No. 2J308-036EN I: Toshiba Medical Systems Corporation 2010-2012 All Rights Reserved

No.
2J308-036EN*I
PERFORMANCE CHECK MANUAL

FOR
INTERVENTIONAL ANGIOGRAPHY SYSTEMS
Infinix-i INFX-8000F, INFX-8000C,
INFX-8000V, INFX-8000H
Infinix series
(2J308-036EN*I)
1/2
 TOSHIBA MEDICAL SYSTEMS CORPORATION 2010-2012

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
No. 2J308-036EN*I
This performance check manual is divided into two volumes (1/2 and 2/2).
For subsections 18 to 31 (including the HHS TEST in subsection 30), refer to second volume (2/2).
IMPORTANT!
1. No part of this manual may be copied or reprinted, in whole or in part,

without prior written permission.
2. The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice
and without legal obligation.
3. The contents of this manual are correct to the best of our knowledge.
Please inform us of any ambiguous or erroneous descriptions, missing
information, etc.
No. 2J308-036EN*I
REVISION RECORD
REV. DATE REASON PAGE SER. DOC.

(YYYY-MM) /AUTHOR CHANGED No. PRODUCT.
INI. 2010-04 Mr. Uehara ------- TM-WP2
*A 2010-08 Support of V4.10, V4.22 Mr. Ishikawa All pages
*B 2010-12 Support of V4.23 Mr. Ishikawa All pages
*C 2011-03 Addition of descriptions for V4.23 All pages

Mr. M. Kobayashi
*D 2011-06 Support of V4.25 Mr. Ishikawa All pages
*E 2011-08 Follow up Mr. Ishikawa All pages
*F 2011-11 Support of V4.30 Mr. Ishikawa All pages
*G 2012-04 Support of V4.40 Mr. Ishikawa All pages
*H 2012-06 Follow up Mr. Ishikawa All pages TM-WP2G
*I 2012-10 Support of V4.50 Mr. Ozawa All pages
3
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Safety Precautions
1. Meaning of Signal Words
In this manual, the signal words DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION are used to indicate
safety and other important instructions. The signal words and their meanings are defined as follows.
Please understand their meanings clearly before reading this manual.
Signal word Meaning
DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will

result in death or serious injury.
WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result
in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in
property damage.
In addition to the above, the signal word NOTE is used to indicate other important information.
NOTE Indicates reference information that enables more efficient use of the equipment.
4
No. 2J308-036EN*I
2. Safety Precautions
When servicing this system, observe the precautions described below to ensure safety of the operator
and service personnel.
WARNING: 1. Before connecting the power cable, be sure to turn OFF the breaker of the
power distribution board of the facility. Otherwise, death or serious injury
caused by an electric shock may result.
2. Post a sign reading "INSPECTION IN PROGRESS" on the entrance of the

radiographic room during work to make people outside the room aware
that work is in progress and thereby avoid endangering them.
3. Be sure to inform co-workers before turning ON the power of the

distribution board and system.
4. Do not operate this system in an atmosphere containing flammable gases

such as anesthetics or flammable liquids such as ethanol because a fire
or explosion may ensue.
5. When the system must be stopped in an emergency, immediately press

the power "OFF" switch.
6. Press the X-ray exposure switch only when exposure is to be performed.

There is a danger of unintentional X-ray exposure if this switch is pressed
inadvertently while the system power is ON.
7. When it is necessary to work on the interior of the system to replace

parts, connect measuring instruments, etc., turn OFF the breaker of the
facility and the system power and wait for at least 5 minutes before
starting work in order to prevent electric shock.
Since the system contains charged sections, be sure to check residual

charge (with respect to the ground) of the target parts using a digital
voltmeter etc.
Do not change measuring points or connect/disconnect connectors while

the power is ON.
5
No. 2J308-036EN*I
CAUTION: 1. Before starting work, fully review the work contents and procedures with co-
workers so that work can be performed safely and efficiently.
2. When generating X-rays, confirm that only the required workers are present
in the radiographic room.
If work must be performed in the radiographic room while X-rays are being
generated, every worker must wear protective clothing and use a protective
screen etc. to avoid exposure to X-rays.
3. Do not spill or spray disinfectant, detergent, or water on the system or on the

floor.
Wipe sections which require disinfection or cleaning using a soft cloth that
has been soaked in disinfectant or detergent and thoroughly wrung out. If
liquid enters the system or cable pit, a malfunction or accident may occur.
4. Wear a safety helmet and safety shoes during work.

When working in high places, wear a safety helmet and use a stable
stepladder.
5. Take all required precautions to prevent electric shock. If the power of the
system is turned ON with the cover of the system removed, do not touch
sections to which power is supplied.
6. When moving the system, be sure to check the following points.
 Confirm that no persons are working on the system and that no persons
are behind the system.
 Confirm that there are no obstacles such as a carrying-in jigs or other
units behind the system. Confirm that no tools are placed on the system.
7. Be careful to avoid catching any part of your body in moving sections of the
system and to avoid touching sharp edges of the system. Failure to do so
may result in personal injury. Special care is required when performing work
with the covers of the system removed.
8. Exercise extreme care to ensure safety, because heavy units must be

handled during work. Do not allow a person to carry an object weighing
more than 20 kg.
9. The use of radio-wave-emitting devices near this system may interfere with
its operation. Devices which generate radio waves, such as cellular phones,
transceivers, and radio-controlled toys, must not be brought into the room
where this system is installed and must never be used near the system.
6
No. 2J308-036EN*I
NOTE: 1. Do not lay the X-ray control unit on its side, because the internal generator containing oil
does not have an air-tight structure and the power transformer is heavy.
2. The low-voltage cables and signal cables must be routed separately.
3. During bringing-in, be careful not to subject the system to excessive shock or vibration.
4. The removed covers and other items must be stored in a safe place so that they do not fall
over or become damaged.
5. For systems equipped with the LM tube, frequent system start-up and shutdown during the
adjustment and installation work may damage the X-ray tube bearing. Be sure to observe
the following guidelines.
 When the anode is to be shut down, follow the specified shutdown sequence for the X-ray
system. Wait for more than 1 minute before restarting the system after it has been shut
down.
 For anode shutdown, always wait for more than 3 minutes after the system has been
started up.
6. To adjust the image quality in systems using the FPD, wait at least 30 minutes (preferably 1
hour) after the system power was turned ON before starting the adjustment.
7
No. 2J308-036EN*I
CONTENTS
Page
Safety Precautions ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
1. SCOPE ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 25
2. PREPARATION ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 26
2.1 Manuals Required ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 26
2.2 Measuring Instruments and Tools Required -------------------------------------------------------------- 26
2.3 Parts to Be Prepared (Recommended) --------------------------------------------------------------------- 27
2.4 Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 28
3. CHECKS BEFORE TURNING ON THE POWER SUPPLY ---------------------------------------------------- 30
3.1 Checking the Voltage Setting of the System Transformer --------------------------------------------- 30
3.2 Setting for Each Unit Before Turning ON the Power ---------------------------------------------------- 31
3.3 DFP-8000A Setting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 32
3.3.1 PWB setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 32
3.3.2 Setting the Multi drive ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 46
3.3.3 Setting the USB extender ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 47
3.3.4 DIP switch setting of the VIDEO card ---------------------------------------------------------- 48
3.3.5 DIP switch setting of the bridge board and the bridge card ------------------------------- 49
3.3.6 Setting of main console C ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 52
3.4 CAS-810A Setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 53
3.4.1 PWB setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 53
3.4.2 Statuses of the POWER/SERVO UNIT -------------------------------------------------------- 54
3.5 CAS-830A, CAS-830B Setting -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 55
3.5.1 PWB setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 55
3.5.3 Checking the coolant circulator ------------------------------------------------------------------ 62
3.6 CAS-880A Setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 64
3.6.1 PWB setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 64
3.6.3 Check of the coolant circulator (for water-cooled FPD cardiac systems) ------------- 69
8
No. 2J308-036EN*I
3.7 CAS-820B Setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 71
3.7.1 PWB setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 71
3.7.2 Check of the coolant circulator (for water-cooled FPD cardiac systems) ------------- 75
3.8 BLA-800C Setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 77
3.8.1 Switch setting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 77
3.8.2 Checking the ROM ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 77
3.8.3 Checking the jumper wire ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 77
3.8.4 Check and replacement of the beam hardening filter -------------------------------------- 78
3.9 BLA-800A Setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 81
3.9.1 Switch setting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 81
3.9.2 Checking the ROM ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 81
3.9.3 Checking the jumper wire ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 81
3.9.4 Check and replacement of the beam hardening filter -------------------------------------- 82
3.10 CAT-850B Setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 83
3.11 CAT-870B Setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 87
3.12 CAT-880B Setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 91
4. CHECKS DURING THE SYSTEM POWER ON PROCEDURES -------------------------------------------- 98
4.1 Checking the Power ON/OFF Circuit Operation ---------------------------------------------------------- 98
4.2 Checking the 400 V System Power -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 98
4.3 Checking Power Distribution to Each Unit ----------------------------------------------------------------- 99
4.3.1 Checking power distribution to the high-voltage generator ------------------------------- 99
4.3.2 Checking power distribution to the water-cooled unit ------------------------------------ 100
4.3.3 Checking power distribution to the support unit and catheterization table ---------- 101
4.3.4 Checking power distribution to the operation room monitor and other --------------- 105
4.3.5 Checking power distribution to the examination room monitor------------------------- 105
4.3.6 DFP-8000A continuity check ------------------------------------------------------------------- 105
4.3.7 LEDs of the DFP-8000A ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 106
4.3.8 Checking the system BIOS in the server PC ----------------------------------------------- 124
4.3.9 Checking power distribution to the starter for the LM tube ------------------------------ 125
4.4 Emergency Operation Check ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 126
9
No. 2J308-036EN*I
4.5 Communication Check Between the DFP-8000A and the Coolant Circulator ------------------ 126
5. SYSTEM SETTINGS --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 129
5.1 Preparation------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 129
5.2 DFP-8000A Setting -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 129
5.2.1 Setting function ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 129
5.2.2 Starting the setting screen and applying the changed data----------------------------- 131
5.2.3 Service login screen ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 132
5.2.4 Service home window ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 133
5.2.5 Config. window ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 138
5.2.6 Service tool error messages -------------------------------------------------------------------- 229
5.2.7 Backing up the system files --------------------------------------------------------------------- 231
5.2.8 3D-Angio setting (option) ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 237
5.2.9 Initial setting for the additional filter ----------------------------------------------------------- 240
5.3 XTP-8100G Setting -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 245
5.4 CAS-810A Setting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 245
5.5 CAS-830A, CAS-830B Setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 247
5.6 CAS-880A Setting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 251
5.7 CAS-820B Setting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 259
5.8 Checking the Ceiling Installation Position for the CAS-830A, CAS-830B------------------------ 261
5.8.1 Checking the installation position in the ceiling longitudinal direction ---------------- 261
5.9 Checking the Ceiling Installation Position for the CAS-820B --------------------------------------- 262
5.9.1 Checking the installation position in the ceiling longitudinal direction ---------------- 262
5.9.2 Checking the installation status of the CAS-820B ----------------------------------------- 263
5.10 Changing the Ceiling Longitudinal Stroke ---------------------------------------------------------------- 265
5.11 CAT-850B Setting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 266
5.11.1 Adjustment items ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 266
5.12 CAT-870B Setting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 278
5.13 CAT-880B Setting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 293
10
No. 2J308-036EN*I
6. X-RAY ADJUSTMENT ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 301
6.1 Preparation------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 301
6.2 Reconnecting Connector "X1" in the Power Cabinet -------------------------------------------------- 301
6.3 Tube Voltage Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 302
6.3.1 Adjustment procedures for the radiography tube voltage

(at the time of shipment/PWB replacement) ------------------------------------------------ 302
6.3.2 Adjustment of continuous fluoroscopy tube voltage correction

(at the time of shipment/PWB replacement) ------------------------------------------------ 303
6.3.3 Adjustment procedures for the overshoot --------------------------------------------------- 304
6.4 Tube Current Adjustment (when the adjustment navigator is not used) ------------------------- 305
6.4.1 Setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 306
6.4.2 Outline ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 306
6.4.3 SETUP screen ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 307
6.4.4 Tube current adjustment (automatic) --------------------------------------------------------- 308
6.4.5 Tube current adjustment (manual adjustment) --------------------------------------------- 313
6.4.6 mA Drop adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 314
6.4.7 PreFlash adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 316
6.4.8 Checking tube current adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------ 318
6.5 Tube Current Adjustment (when the adjustment navigator is used) ------------------------------ 319
6.5.1 Outline ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 319
6.5.2 Heating adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 320
6.5.3 mA Drop adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 321
6.5.4 PreFlash adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 322
6.5.5 Checking tube current adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------ 322
6.6 Supplementary Documents ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 323
6.6.1 Supplementary document for tube current adjustment ---------------------------------- 323
6.6.2 Supplement material for Pre_Flash ----------------------------------------------------------- 325
6.7 Tube Aging Support Functions ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 326
6.7.1 Opening the tube aging window --------------------------------------------------------------- 326
6.7.2 Tube aging window ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 327
6.7.3 Operating the tube aging window ------------------------------------------------------------- 328
11
No. 2J308-036EN*I
7. SYSTEM ALIGNMENT ADJUSTMENT --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 329
7.1 Preparation------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 329
7.2 Outline and Precautions -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 330
7.2.1 For the CAS-810A --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 330
7.2.2 For the CAS-830A --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 331
7.2.3 For the CAS-820B --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 333
7.3 Beam Centering of the X-ray Tube Unit for CAS-810A, CAS-830A, CAS-820B --------------- 334
7.4 Beam Centering of the X-ray Beam Limiting Device for

CAS-810A, CAS-830A, CAS-820B ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 337
7.5 Beam Centering (for systems that use the CAS-880A (with FPD8 (TFP-800A/A1,
TFP-800A/B1)) or CAS-830B (with FPD8 (TFP-800A/A1))) ---------------------------------------- 339
7.5.1 Outline and precautions for systems that use the CAS-880A (with FPD8
(TFP-800A/A1, TFP-800A/B1)) or CAS-830B (with FPD8 (TFP-800A/A1)) ------- 339
7.5.2 Alignment of the X-ray tube unit (focus), the rotation center of the X-ray beam
limiting device, and the FPD near/away movement direction for CAS-880A ------- 344
7.5.3 Alignment of the center of the detection area and the

rotation center of the FPD for CAS-880A ---------------------------------------------------- 348
7.5.4 Alignment of the rotation center of the X-ray beam limiting device
and the FPD (center of the detection area) for CAS-880A ------------------------------ 351
7.5.5 Alignment of the X-ray beam limiting device and the FPD
(center of the detection area) for CAS-880A ----------------------------------------------- 352
7.6 Alignment of the Rotation Center of the FPD (TFP-1216A) ----------------------------------------- 354
7.7 Beam Centering (for systems that use the CAS-880A (with FPD1216 (TFP-1216A/A1) or
FPD12 (TFP-1200A, TFP-1200A/B1)) or CAS-830B (with FPD1216 (TFP-1216A/A1) or
FPD12 (TFP-1200A))) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 358
7.7.1 Outline and precautions for systems that use the CAS-880A (with FPD1216
(TFP-1216A/A1) or FPD12 (TFP-1200A, TFP-1200A/B1)) or CAS-830B
(with FPD1216 (TFP-1216A/A1) or FPD12 (TFP-1200A)) ----------------------------- 358
7.7.2 Alignment of X-ray tube unit (focus) and FPD near/away movement direction ---- 363
7.7.3 Alignment of the FPD (center of the detection area) and

rotation center of the FPD ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 366
7.7.4 Alignment of the X-ray tube focus and the center of the
X-ray beam limiting device, FPD (center of the detection area) ----------------------- 369
8. FPD/X-RAY BEAM LIMITING DEVICE ADJUSTMENT ------------------------------------------------------- 370
8.1 X-ray Beam Limiting Device Aperture Adjustment (BLA-800A, BLA-800C) --------------------- 370
8.1.1 Preparation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 370
12
No. 2J308-036EN*I
8.1.2 Aperture adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 371
8.1.3 Aperture adjustment (when the TFP-1216A is used in combination)----------------- 376
8.1.4 All clear procedures ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 381
8.2 X-ray Beam Limiting Device Aperture Adjustment (BLA-900A, BLA-900C) --------------------- 382
8.2.1 Preparation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 382
8.2.2 Aperture adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 383
8.2.3 Procedures for clearing all the data ----------------------------------------------------------- 388
8.3 Beam Limiting Device Aperture Adjustment/Positional Error Correction ------------------------- 389
8.3.1 Support tool operating procedures ------------------------------------------------------------ 389
8.3.2 Aperture adjustment/positional error correction -------------------------------------------- 397
8.3.3 Procedures for clearing all the data ----------------------------------------------------------- 405
9. FPD ADJUSTMENT ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 406
9.1 Procedures ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 406
9.2 Parameter Setting for FPD Mode -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 407
9.3 Other Parameter Setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 410
9.4 Calibration Without the Adjustment Navigator ---------------------------------------------------------- 411
9.4.1 Offset calibration parameter setting and procedures ------------------------------------- 411
9.4.2 Gain calibration parameter setting and procedures --------------------------------------- 412
9.5 Calibration with the Adjustment Navigator --------------------------------------------------------------- 417
9.6 Basic Rate Parameter Setting for the FPD -------------------------------------------------------------- 419
10. FLUOROSCOPY/RADIOGRAPHY DOSE ADJUSTMENT--------------------------------------------------- 425
10.1 Preparation------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 425
10.2 Work Procedures ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 426
10.3 Dose Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 429
10.3.1 When the adjustment navigator is not used ------------------------------------------------ 430
10.3.2 When the adjustment navigator is used ----------------------------------------------------- 442
10.4 Standard Values for Each Parameter --------------------------------------------------------------------- 448
11. F-ACT ADJUSTMENT ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 476
11.1 Preparation------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 476
11.2 Work Procedures ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 476
13
No. 2J308-036EN*I
11.3 F-ACT Adjustment Program --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 478
11.3.1 When the adjustment navigator is not used ------------------------------------------------ 478
11.3.2 When the adjustment navigator is used ----------------------------------------------------- 480
12. DOSE LIMIT ADJUSTMENT ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 483
12.1 Preparation------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 483
12.2 Work Procedures ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 484
12.3 Dose Limit Adjustment Data Calculation Procedure -------------------------------------------------- 490
13. MONITOR/MICROPHONE ADJUSTMENT ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 491
13.1 Monitor Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 491
13.2 Microphone Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 494
14. SNRF (SUPER NOISE REDUCTION FILTER) ADJUSTMENT--------------------------------------------- 495
14.1 Preparation------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 495
14.2 Work Procedures ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 495
14.3 Starting Up the System --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 496
14.4 Performing Examination Using the Adjustment Protocol --------------------------------------------- 496
14.5 Starting up the SNRF Adjustment Tool ------------------------------------------------------------------- 497
14.6 Acquiring the Images Used for Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------- 499
14.6.1 Setting confirmation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 501
14.6.2 Acquiring images and image-related information ------------------------------------------ 502
14.7 Analyzing Images Using the Tool -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 510
14.8 Checking the Adjustment Results -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 511
14.9 Rebooting the System ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 515
14.10 List of Messages ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 515
15. DPRF (Digital Pattern Recognition Filter) ADJUSTMENT ---------------------------------------------------- 517
15.1 Preparation------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 517
15.2 Procedures ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 518
15.3 Starting Up the System --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 518
15.4 Starting the Study Using the Adjustment Protocol ----------------------------------------------------- 519
15.5 Mounting the Phantom and Checking the Position ---------------------------------------------------- 520
15.6 Acquiring Images ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 521
14
No. 2J308-036EN*I
15.7 Analyzing Images Using the Tool -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 523
15.8 Checking the Adjustment Results -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 527
15.9 Rebooting the System ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 530
15.10 List of Messages ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 530
16. IMAGE ADJUSTMENT CHECK ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 531
16.1 Preparation for Image Check -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 531
16.2 Measuring the FPD Relative Conversion Coefficient (RGX) ---------------------------------------- 532
16.2.1 Measurement method ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 532
16.2.2 Image level measurement tool ----------------------------------------------------------------- 534
16.3 Image Quality Check ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 535
17. DICOM SETTING ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 542
17.1 Preparation for DICOM Setting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 543
17.1.1 Preparation for DICOM setting in the remote devices ------------------------------------ 543
17.1.2 Preparation for DICOM setting in local devices -------------------------------------------- 544
17.2 DICOM Setting Flowchart ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 545
17.3 DICOM Setting for the Local Station ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 546
17.3.1 TCP/IP setting -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 546
17.3.2 DICOM communication parameter setting -------------------------------------------------- 547
17.4 DICOM Setting for the Remote Station ------------------------------------------------------------------- 554
17.4.1 Host registration------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 554
17.4.2 DICOM Management (Remote Nodes) ------------------------------------------------------ 556
17.4.3 DICOM Management (Printers) ---------------------------------------------------------------- 572
17.4.4 DICOM (MWM Presets) -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 580
17.4.5 3D (AE Title setting) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 581
17.5 DICOM Operational Checks --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 582
17.5.1 Common items ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 582
17.5.2 DICOM Storage/Commitment/Query & Retrieve (XIDF-DCM801 option) ----------- 583
17.5.3 DICOM MWM/MPPS (XIDF-DCM802 option) ---------------------------------------------- 585
17.5.4 DICOM Print ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 587
18. IMAGER SETTING ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 599
15
No. 2J308-036EN*I
18.1 Imager Setup Principle ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 599
18.2 Setting Procedure ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 600
18.3 Checking the Filmed Image --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 602
19. ADJUSTMENT OF THE AREA DOSE METER (OPTION) --------------------------------------------------- 603
19.1 Entering the Chamber Correction Data ------------------------------------------------------------------- 603
19.2 Calibration of the Area Dose Meter ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 604
19.3 Dosimeter Calibration Software Operating Procedure ------------------------------------------------ 606
20. SETTING OF THE QCA, LVA, LVA-BP, AND QVA FUNCTIONS (OPTIONS)
(V4.22 OR LATER) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 609
20.1 Setting of the QCA/LVA (+LVA BP+QVA) Functions (Options) ------------------------------------ 609
20.1.1 Items to be prepared ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 609
20.1.2 Installation procedures --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 610
20.1.3 Troubleshooting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 619
20.1.4 Uninstallation procedure ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 624
20.2 Setting of the QCA/QVA Functions (Options) ----------------------------------------------------------- 625
20.2.1 Preparation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 625
20.2.2 Installation procedure ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 625
20.2.4 Uninstall procedure ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 638
21. SETTING OF THE CV-3D FUNCTION (OPTION)-------------------------------------------------------------- 639
21.1 Items to Be Prepared ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 639
21.2 Installation Procedures --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 639
21.3 Uninstallation Procedures ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 678
21.4 PC Requirements ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 683
21.5 Reinstalling the Software ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 684
21.5.1 Installing the basic environment using the recovery CD --------------------------------- 685
22. ADJUSTMENT FOR 3D-DSA/DA (OPTION) -------------------------------------------------------------------- 689
22.1 Calibration Procedure ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 689
22.1.1 Preparation for work ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 689
22.1.2 Data acquisition ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 700
16
No. 2J308-036EN*I
22.1.3 Data transfer ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 709
22.1.4 Checking the calibration table registration -------------------------------------------------- 710
22.1.5 Explaining the calibration procedures to the user ----------------------------------------- 710
22.2 Checking the 3D Image Quality ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 711
22.3 Enhancement of Bone Density Values in 3D-DA ------------------------------------------------------ 714
22.3.1 Changing the acquisition conditions ---------------------------------------------------------- 714
22.3.2 Changing the reconstruction conditions ----------------------------------------------------- 714
23. 3D ROADMAP CALIBRATION (OPTION) (V4.22 OR LATER) --------------------------------------------- 715
23.1.1 Preparation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 715
23.1.3 Data transfer ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 721
23.2 Checking the 3D Roadmap Image Quality --------------------------------------------------------------- 722
24. SETTING OF OTHER OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS --------------------------------------------------------------- 725
24.1 Additional Monitor ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 725
24.1.1 Setting the additional monitor ------------------------------------------------------------------ 725
24.2 Setting the XIDF-ESD801 and Color LCD Monitor (CDL2013A-1A) ------------------------------ 728
24.2.1 Setting the XIDF-ESD801 ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 728
24.2.2 Adjusting the color LCD monitor (CDL2013A-1A) ----------------------------------------- 729
24.2.3 Adjustment of the VSW-ESD (XIDF-ESD801) --------------------------------------------- 730
24.2.4 Operation check ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 731
24.2.5 Display property setting for the devices to be connected to the XIDF-ESD801 --- 732
25. SAFETY FUNCTION OPERATION CHECK --------------------------------------------------------------------- 737
25.1 Preparation------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 737
25.2 Checking the Touch Sensors ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 737
25.2.1 CAS-810A ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 737
25.2.2 CAS-820B ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 738
25.2.3 CAS-830A, CAS-830B --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 738
17
No. 2J308-036EN*I
25.2.4 CAS-880A ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 739
25.3 Checking Backup Fluoroscopy ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 739
26. SYSTEM OPERATION CHECK ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 740
26.1 Checking Operation of the Fluoroscopy Function ------------------------------------------------------ 740
26.1.1 Operation of the fluoroscopy switch ---------------------------------------------------------- 740
26.1.2 Operation related to change in fluoroscopy conditions ---------------------------------- 740
26.1.3 Checking operation of the ABC function ----------------------------------------------------- 741
26.1.4 Checking the fluoroscopy X-ray precision --------------------------------------------------- 741
26.2 Checking Operation of the DA Function ------------------------------------------------------------------ 742
26.2.1 Checking the radiography sequence --------------------------------------------------------- 742
26.2.2 Checking operation of the F-ACT function -------------------------------------------------- 742
26.2.4 Checking interlocking with peripheral devices --------------------------------------------- 742
26.3 Checking Operation of the DSA Function ---------------------------------------------------------------- 743
26.4 Checking Operation of the One-Shot Radiography Function --------------------------------------- 744
26.4.2 Checking F-ACT movement -------------------------------------------------------------------- 744
26.5 Checking Operation of the Stepping DSA (S-DSA) Function (Option) --------------------------- 745
26.6 Checking Operation of the Rotational DSA Function (Option) -------------------------------------- 747
26.7 Checking Operation of the 3D-DSA Function (Option) ----------------------------------------------- 749
26.8 Checking Operation of the Rotational DA (Automatic Rotation) Function (Option)------------ 750
18
No. 2J308-036EN*I
26.9 Checking Operation of the 3D-DA Function (Option) ------------------------------------------------- 751
26.10 Checking Operation of the LCI Function (Option) ------------------------------------------------------ 752
26.10.2 Checking interlocks with peripheral devices ------------------------------------------------ 752
26.11 Checking Operation of the Additional Console --------------------------------------------------------- 752
27. NETWORK OPERATION CHECK ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 753
28. DATA BACKUP ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 753
29. APPENDIX 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 754
29.1 DFP-8000A Setting -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 754
29.1.1 RAID -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 754
29.1.2 Database output/conversion -------------------------------------------------------------------- 773
29.2 XTP-8100G Setting -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 777
29.2.1 System transformer cabinet --------------------------------------------------------------------- 777
29.2.2 Power cabinet -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 779
29.2.3 External appearances of units ------------------------------------------------------------------ 782
29.2.4 PWB details ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 785
29.2.5 Test methods --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 807
29.3 CAS-810A Setting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 812
29.3.1 PWB setting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 812
29.4.1 PWB setting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 815
29.5 CAS-880A Setting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 824
29.5.1 PWB setting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 824
29.6 CAS-820B Setting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 830
29.6.1 PWB setting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 830
29.7 BLA-800C Setting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 835
29.8 BLA-800A Setting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 835
29.9 BLA-900A Setting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 836
19
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.10 CAT-850B Setting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 837
29.11 CAT-870B Setting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 837
29.12 Adjustment Software Starting Procedures --------------------------------------------------------------- 837
29.12.1 X-ray adjustment support function (Adjustment navigator function) ------------------ 839
29.13 Adjustment Procedure If Misregistration Became Large During Rotational DSA -------------- 845
29.14 Procedures for Registering the Auto-Positioning Target Positions -------------------------------- 862
29.15 Examination Room Display Setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 864
29.15.1 Examination room monitor physical layout setting ---------------------------------------- 864
29.15.2 Display style setting for examination room monitor layout and
L-side angle (biplane systems) ----------------------------------------------------------------- 869
29.15.3 Examination room monitor-system information display settings ----------------------- 872
29.15.4 Examination room menu setting --------------------------------------------------------------- 879
29.16 Setting Procedures When Several 3D-Angio Systems Are Used ---------------------------------- 882
29.17 Operational Internal Flag Setting Procedures ----------------------------------------------------------- 887
29.18 Corrective Actions When the DFP-8000A Cannot Be Started Up --------------------------------- 903
29.18.1 Outline of the DFP-8000A software ----------------------------------------------------------- 903
29.18.2 Proactive measures against system corruption -------------------------------------------- 906
29.18.3 Actions to be taken after a system crash has occurred ---------------------------------- 911
29.18.4 Mirroring unit setting confirmation ------------------------------------------------------------- 940
29.19 Check of the Memory, Video Board, and Hard Disk Settings --------------------------------------- 942
29.20 Setting the Image Quality Parameters -------------------------------------------------------------------- 945
29.20.1 Setting procedure and setting mechanism -------------------------------------------------- 945
29.20.2 Fluoroscopic image quality parameters ------------------------------------------------------ 948
29.20.3 SNRF image quality parameters --------------------------------------------------------------- 966
29.21 Setting the Date Display Format --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 969
29.22 Setting the Automatic Label Name Issuance Rule for Media --------------------------------------- 970
29.23 Setting the Frame-Advance Playback Condition Using the Jog ------------------------------------ 971
29.24 Fluo. PulseRate Select Processing ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 972
29.25 Changing the LIH Font ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 975
29.26 Correction for Virtual Collimation --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 977
20
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.27 Default Settings for the Playback System (Image Playback Systems) --------------------------- 984
29.27.1 Starting up the tools ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 984
29.27.2 Annotation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 985
29.27.3 Calibration ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 986
29.27.4 Context menu --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 996
29.27.5 Customization of the function buttons -------------------------------------------------------- 997
29.27.6 Measurement in the ROI ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1001
29.27.7 Image parameter setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1002
29.27.8 Length ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1003
29.27.9 Pixel shifting---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1007
29.27.10 Setting automatic display of transfer images from Directory -------------------------- 1009
29.27.11 Setting automatic display of previous link images ---------------------------------------- 1010
29.27.12 Setting the playback start position ----------------------------------------------------------- 1011
29.27.13 Specifying the mouse double-click operations -------------------------------------------- 1012
29.27.14 Setting the PanoramicView creation mode selection combo box display ---------- 1013
29.27.15 Specifying the default combo box when a PanoramicView image is created ----- 1014
29.27.16 Setting whether LM% reset is enabled when the

Reset Parameter function is executed ------------------------------------------------------ 1015
29.28 Playback System Default Settings (Examination room monitor functions) --------------------- 1016
29.28.1 Startup of the tool --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1016
29.28.2 Specifying the settings for the guidance lines used for the
X-ray beam limiting device -------------------------------------------------------------------- 1017
29.28.3 Displaying the image-related information --------------------------------------------------- 1018
29.28.4 Mouse sensitivity setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1022
29.28.5 Virtual collimation --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1026
29.28.6 Thumbnail view------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1029
29.28.7 Others ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1043
29.29 Printing (Customized Setting of Scale Display) -------------------------------------------------------- 1049
29.30 Changing the Gamma Function for Subtraction Images -------------------------------------------- 1051
29.31 Settings Related to Security -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1052
29.31.1 Installation of a firewall system ---------------------------------------------------------------- 1052
21
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.31.2 HIPAA Mode setting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1053
29.32 Procedures for Reducing the Variation of the Timing for

Starting Radiography or Storage Fluoroscopic Images --------------------------------------------- 1055
29.33 Setting Communication with the Coolant Circulator -------------------------------------------------- 1058
29.33.1 Setting procedures for enabling/disabling communication ----------------------------- 1058
29.33.2 Setting procedures for the communication port ------------------------------------------- 1059
29.34 Image Quality Control Parameter Settings ------------------------------------------------------------- 1060
29.34.1 Additional filter linkage setting tool ----------------------------------------------------------- 1060
29.34.2 Additional radiographic filter interlock setting tool ---------------------------------------- 1078
29.34.3 Fluoroscopy control parameter-setting tool manual ------------------------------------- 1080
29.35 Printing (Setting of the Maximum Number of Characters to Be Displayed for the
Patient Name) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1083
29.36 Additional Filter Initial Settings ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1084
29.36.1 Settings---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1084
29.36.2 Operation procedure ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1085
29.36.3 Additional filter setting method ---------------------------------------------------------------- 1086
29.36.4 Setting procedure for the additional filter settings tool ---------------------------------- 1088
29.36.5 Specifying the settings of the additional radiographic filter interlock tool ----------- 1090
29.36.6 F-ACT adjustment control ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 1091
29.36.7 Dose limit adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1091
29.37 Biplane System Automatic Positioning Data-Setting Tool ------------------------------------------ 1092
29.37.1 Screen layout -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1092
29.37.2 Method of use ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1093
29.37.3 List of messages ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1095
29.38 V-IF FPGA Data Download Tool -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1097
29.38.1 Screen layout -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1097
29.38.2 Operating method -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1098
29.38.3 Message list ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1100
29.39 Tool for Changing the Fluoroscopy Roadmapping Factor ------------------------------------------ 1101
29.39.1 Screen layout -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1101
29.39.2 Operating procedure ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1102
22
No. 2J308-036EN*I
30. APPENDIX 2 (HHS TEST) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1103
30.1 DFP-8000A, XTP-8100G/DFP-8000D, XTP-8100G -------------------------------------------------- 1103
30.1.1 Detailed instructions for production testing ------------------------------------------------ 1103
30.1.2 Measuring points for production testing ----------------------------------------------------- 1121
30.1.3 Adjustment accuracy and standards list ---------------------------------------------------- 1138
30.2 BLA-800A, BLA-800C ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1139
30.3 BLA-900A, BLA-900C ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1141
30.3.1 Method for checking the beam quality (HVL) of the BLA-900A or BLA-900C ----- 1141
30.3.2 Method for checking the alignment of the X-ray field relative to the
fluoroscopic image receptor for the BLA-900A or BLA-900C ------------------------- 1143
31. APPENDIX 3 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1149
31.1 PreProc/SNRF2 FPGA Data Download Tool ---------------------------------------------------------- 1149
31.1.1 Description of the window ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 1149
31.1.2 Using the PreProc FPGA data download tool --------------------------------------------- 1150
31.1.3 List of messages ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1152
31.2 SNRF FPGA Data Download Tool ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1153
31.2.2 Using the SNRF FPGA data download tool ------------------------------------------------ 1154
31.2.3 List of messages ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1156
31.3 ADIF FPGA Data Download Tool ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1157
31.3.1 Screen layout -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1157
31.3.3 Message list ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1160
31.4 Pre-Operation Check Support Function ----------------------------------------------------------------- 1161
31.4.1 Examination protocol for pre-operation check support function ---------------------- 1161
31.4.2 Customizing the initial setting data ----------------------------------------------------------- 1162
31.4.3 Customizing the information display --------------------------------------------------------- 1164
31.4.4 Data transmission to InnerVision ------------------------------------------------------------- 1165
31.4.5 Termination of the pre-operation check support function------------------------------- 1167
31.4.6 Checking the tube current (V4.22 or later) ------------------------------------------------- 1167
23
No. 2J308-036EN*I
31.5 Constancy Test Support Function ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1168
31.5.1 Study protocol for supporting the constancy test ----------------------------------------- 1168
31.5.2 Procedure for acquiring the data (single-plane system) -------------------------------- 1169
31.5.3 Procedure for acquiring the data (biplane system) --------------------------------------- 1170
31.5.4 Procedure for acquiring the data (dual-plane system) ---------------------------------- 1173
31.6 Remote Maintenance Function ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1174
31.7 SPD Data Acquisition Support Function ----------------------------------------------------------------- 1178
31.7.1 File transmission settings ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 1178
31.7.2 Acquiring SPD data ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1179
31.8 Edge Mask ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1182
31.8.1 Setting procedure (V4.00) ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 1182
31.8.2 Setting procedures ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1184
31.8.3 Check procedure --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1185
31.9 Reference Line Display for Radiation Field Alignment ----------------------------------------------- 1186
31.9.1 Setting using system settings ----------------------------------------------------------------- 1186
31.9.2 Setting from the beam limiting device aperture support tool
(referred to below as "support tool") --------------------------------------------------------- 1186
31.10 ABC ROI Setup Tool ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1187
31.11 X-ray Self-Adjustment Tool --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1190
31.11.1 Window information ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1190
31.11.2 Explanation to the user and setting the administrator ----------------------------------- 1191
31.11.3 Precautions----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1191
31.12 Large-Screen Monitor Setting Tool ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 1192
31.13 Time Server Setting Tool ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1193
24
No. 2J308-036EN*I
1. SCOPE
This manual details the system setting, adjustment, and operation check procedures for
interventional angiography systems in the Infinix-i series. Before performing adjustment according
to this manual, confirm that installation has been performed based on the installation manual
(2C308-087EN) and obtain a thorough understanding of the operating procedures described in the
operation manual. When adjustment/testing is performed, refer to the connection diagrams
provided with the system as required.
The names of the systems in the Infinix-i INFX-8000* series are shown in the table below.
System name System outline

CS-i Floor-mounted single-plane cardiovascular system
 Infinix-i
(INFX-8000F) VS-i Floor-mounted single-plane angiography system for the head,
abdomen, and legs
 Infinix
DP-i Dual-plane system
 Infinix-i CC-i Ceiling-suspended single-plane cardiovascular system
(INFX-8000C) VC-i Ceiling-suspended single-plane angiography system for the
 Infinix head, abdomen, and legs
CF-i/SP Single-plane cardiovascular system incorporating the
CAS-880A
CF-i/BP Biplane cardiovascular system incorporating the
 Infinix-i
CAS-880A and CAS-820B
(INFX-8000V)
VF-i/SP Single-plane angiography system incorporating the
 Infinix
CAS-880A
VF-i/BP Biplane angiography system incorporating the CAS-880A and
CAS-820B
 Infinix-i CC-i or VC-i Systems incorporating an operating table
(INFX-8000H)
For Infinix series systems, make the following substitutions in system names.
 DFP-8000D  DFP-8000A
 XIDF-100A  XIDF-3DP801
25
No. 2J308-036EN*I
2. PREPARATION
2.1 Manuals Required
 Installation manual : 2C308-087EN

 Circuit diagram list : 2K308-035EN
 Installation quality check sheet : 2J308-037EN
2.2 Measuring Instruments and Tools Required
Prepare the measuring tools listed in the following table.
Measuring instrument Remarks

Type Model name
1 Digital multimeter
2 Oscilloscope With storage function
3 Tube-voltage meter Victoreen
NERO mAx 8000 type
ALCO KV-201D
4 Neutral-point MA meter ALCO MA-201
MA-2000
5 Dosimeter MDH-2025AC
MDH-1015C
Victoreen 500/Victoreen
NERO mAx 8000 type
(The optional ionization
chamber for X-ray
fluoroscopy is required.)
Radcal 9015/9010
ACCU-DOSE2186 (Radcal)
RaySafe Xi (Unfors Xi)
Piranha (RTI)
6 Collimator KOWA XM-4A/4B
7 Acrylic phantom Phantom kit for Toshiba
angiography systems
8 Lead pieces
9 Copper plates Two 0.5-mm plates and three
1-mm plates are required.
10 Dosimeter mounting tool
11 Resolution chart Funk Type 38 or equivalent
12 Fluoroscopy/DA phantom X-Check FLU (PTW)
13 DSA phantom NORMI 8 (PTW)
14 Rotation phantom Spinning Wheel (N.A.)
15 Protective cloth
16 Angle scale Accuracy of 0.1° or better
17 Collimator test tool MODEL 07-661
18 Beam alignment test tool MODEL 07-662
19 Keyboard unit BSX14-0530
20 Tool for setting the beam PX14-64801-1 Service tool for the CAS-880A
alignment test tool
21 Tool for adjusting the tilt of PX14-64802-2 Service tool for the CAS-880A
the beam alignment test tool
26
No. 2J308-036EN*I
2.3 Parts to Be Prepared (Recommended)
 HDD (for the part number, refer to the supplied parts list 2F305-565EN)
If the system software or the database in the system disk is damaged, the system does not start
up properly. System recovery is possible using the recovery CD supplied with the system;
however, the process takes a long time.
To enable quick restoration of the system, it is recommended that an HDD be prepared and that
the data in the system disk be backed up (mirrored) to the HDD at the time of installation or
maintenance.
27
No. 2J308-036EN*I
2.4 Outline
Check before turning ON the power supply Section 3


Checks during the power ON procedures Section 4


Check of emergency operation


System settings Section 5


X-ray adjustment Section 6


System alignment adjustment Section 7


FPD/X-ray beam limiting device adjustment Section 8


FPD adjustment Section 9


Fluoroscopy/radiography dose adjustment Section 10


F-ACT adjustment Section 11


Dose limit adjustment Section 12


Monitor/microphone adjustment Section 13


SNRF adjustment Section 14


DPRF adjustment Section 15


Image adjustment check Section 16


DICOM setting Section 17


Imager setting Section 18


Area dose meter adjustment (option) Section 19


QCA/LVA, LVA-BP, QVA setting (option) Section 20


28
No. 2J308-036EN*I
CV-3D setting (option) Section 21


3D-DSA/DA adjustment (option) Section 22

3D ROADMAP calibration (option) (V4.22 or later) Section 23

Other optional function setting Section 24

Safety function operation check Section 25

System operation check Section 26

Network operation check Section 27

Data backup Section 28

Fluoroscopy image quality parameter setting Subsection
29.20.2

SNRF image quality parameters Subsection
29.20.3
29
No. 2J308-036EN*I
3. CHECKS BEFORE TURNING ON THE POWER SUPPLY
CAUTION: When setting or adjusting the DIP switches, rotary switches, or VRs of the
PWB using a tool such as a screwdriver, be careful not to damage the
surrounding parts or the pattern.
3.1 Checking the Voltage Setting of the System Transformer
Change the connections on the voltage selection terminal board of power transformers T1, T2, and
T3, which are located in the system power supply cabinet, according to the line voltage of the
facility as shown in the figures below.
DANGER: Before changing internal wiring connections, shut down the circuit
breaker of the power distribution board. If this is not observed, there is
danger of electric shock, possibly resulting in death.
CAUTION: The line voltage must be determined by actually measuring the voltage at
the power distribution board of the facility. If a stepup transformer
cabinet (XSDT-100A) is used, the line voltage must be the actual
measurement of the output voltage from the stepup transformer.
(1) Power transformers T1 and T3 (200 V system power)
Change the input wires (labeled "B" and C) of the power transformer according to the line
voltage.
Line voltage
240 T1 240 Terminal
T3 (actual measurement)
F1 230 230
[B] [C]
220 220 180 - 210 VAC 200
200 200
211 - 225 VAC 220
F2
0 0 226 - 235 VAC 230
236 - 264 VAC 240
30
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Power transformer T2
Change the three input wires (labeled "A") of transformer T2 according to the line voltage.
Do not change the 400 V output wire (labeled "400").
Line voltage
Terminal
480U
T2 (actual measurement)
440U
CNT1 360 - 390 VAC 380 U, 380 V, 380 W
415U
[A]
400U 391 - 410 VAC 400 U, 400 V, 400 W
[400]
380U
411 - 430 VAC 415 U, 415 V, 415 W
431 - 460 VAC 440 U, 440 V, 440 W
480V
440V 461 - 510 VAC 480 U, 480 V, 480 W
415V
[A]
400V
[400]
380V
480W
440W
415W
[A]
400W
[400]]
380W
P.CAB
400V
3.2 Setting for Each Unit Before Turning ON the Power
(1) High-voltage generator (XTP-8100G/XTBP-8100G)
Confirm that PXCIF-PWB F/L is set properly and that the signal cable between XTP-8100G
and XTBP-8100G is connected securely. No other special settings are required.
31
No. 2J308-036EN*I
3.3 DFP-8000A Setting
Confirm the following before turning ON the power of the system.
 NFB1 of the DFP-8000A (in the lower section of the rear) is ON.
 NFB1 in the power supply section at the lower section of the rear of the CCB is set to ON.
 Optical connector and PWB of the rear of the RAID are NOT loose.
For the settings of the RAID and explanations of the LED, refer to subsection 29.1.1 "RAID".
3.3.1 PWB setting
cPCI Chassis
Physical Slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
V V V V V V P5
V V V V V V P4
V V V V V V P3
clock routing
clock routing clock routing P2
64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 P1
64 64 32 64 64
B1
SNRF
SNRF
ADIF
VIF(F)
VIF(L)
Power PC
Bridge Board
Master
Proc
Proc
PreProc
PreProc
DFP-8000A/J3, W3
* After inserting the PWB, secure the panel to the chassis using the front panel top/bottom
screws near the free edge of the PWB.
32
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(1) Power PC (J1/ W1: slot 14, J2/ W2: slot 13)
Confirm that the PMC module (CAN IF board) is connected to the PMC connector side.
(2) ADIF (J1/ W1: slot 9, J2/ W2: slot 8)
(a) For PX17-42291
 W5 (shorting pins)
Short
 W1/W2 (shorting pins)
Open all pins.
(b) For PX17-45526
 W1 (shorting pins)
Open all pins
 S0 (DIP-SW [4 bits])
All OFF
 S2 (rotary SW)
Set 0.
 S3 (DIP-SW [4 bits])
All OFF
33
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(c) Footswitch setting (PX17-42291 Gr. 2/Gr. 3 or PX17-45526)
The functions of the footswitch can be allocated when system software V4.10R000 or
later and the ADIF PWB of PX17-42291 Gr. 2 or PX17-45526 are used in
combination. Note that the functions that can be set differ depending on the software
version and Gr. of the ADIF.
It is necessary to allocate the functions of the footswitch in the service settings for
DFP-8000A.
The footswitch does not operate if the settings of DIP SW S1 on the ADIF PWB differ
from the settings in the software.
After setting is performed for DIP switch S1 on the ADIF PWB, perform the same
settings in the service setting window and confirm that the footswitch operates
normally. The location of DIP SW S1 is shown in the figure below.
<PX17-42291> <PX17-45526>
XBFS-880B XBFS-880S
34
No. 2J308-036EN*I
The relationship between the DIP switch settings and the functions are as shown
below.
To change the settings, perform settings referring to the table below. (The settings at
the time of shipment are shown.)
F1-0 F1-1 F1-2 F2-0 F2-1 F2-2 F3-0 F3-1 F3-2
F1-0 F1-1 F1-2 F1 Settings at the time of shipment Remarks

0 0 0 Not defined
1 0 0 HLC_F 
0 1 0 HLC_L
1 1 0 Function
0 0 1 FREC-BP
Spot
1 0 1
fluoroscopy
0 1 1
Not defined
1 1 1

0 0 0 Not defined
1 0 0 HLC_F
0 1 0 HLC_L 
1 1 0 Function
0 0 1 FREC-BP
Spot
1 0 1
fluoroscopy
0 1 1
Not defined
1 1 1

0 0 0 Not defined
1 0 0 HLC_F
0 1 0 HLC_L
1 1 0 Function 
0 0 1 FREC-BP
Spot
1 0 1
fluoroscopy
0 1 1
Not defined
1 1 1
35
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Proc (slot 2/slot 3)
(a) For PWB number PX17-41801-1 or earlier
No setting required.
(b) For PWB number PX17-41854-1
 SW1 : 3 2
Set this SW to 2.
Set this SW to 1.
4 1
 SW2 : 3 2
Set this SW to 2.
Set this SW to 1.
4 1
All pins of J8, J9, and J10 are "OPEN"
 S1 : HEX-SW setting value 0
(4) Master (slot 1)
(a) The optical connector on the front of Master must not be loose.
(b) Shorting plug setting
 J18 : For PX17-41842, N/A

For PX17-45200, short only 3-4
(5) System-IF
(a) Shorting plug setting
 W1 to W5, W9 : Short only 1-2

 W6 to W8 : Short only 2-4 and 3-5
 W10 : For PX17-40533*G or earlier, short only 1-2
For PX17-45589, open all pins
 W11 : Short 1-2
(b) Switch setting
 S1, S2, S5 : All OFF

 S4 : Set 0 (for PX17-45589)
36
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(c) VR resistance settings
LOC Meaning of VR Setting

VR1 Humidity sensor adjustment Set at the time of shipment from the factory.
(cannot be changed)
VR2 External waveform adjustment Set at the time of shipment from the factory.
to (cannot be changed)
VR7
VR8 Talk microphone input volume Set at the time of installation.
(installation manual)
VR10 Melody volume Set at the time of shipment from the factory.
(HLC sound, F-REC sound, etc.)
Counterclockwise rotation turns up the volume.
(PX17-45589)
Clockwise rotation turns up the volume (for PWBs
other than PX17-45589)
VR11 Intercom speaker volume Set to medium at the time of shipment from
For fine volume adjustment the factory.
VR12 Console speaker volume Set to medium at the time of shipment from
(HLC sound, F-REC sound, fluoroscopy start/end the factory.
sound, etc.)
For fine volume adjustment
VR13 System indicator speaker volume Set to medium at the time of shipment from
(HLC sound, F-REC sound, fluoroscopy start/end the factory.
sound, etc.)
For fine volume adjustment
VR14 Main console C buzzer sound volume Set to the maximum at the time of shipment
Image acquisition sound, system error sound, etc. from the factory.
Counterclockwise rotation turns up the volume. (Fully rotated counterclockwise)
(only for PX17-45589)
VR15 System indicator buzzer sound volume Set to the maximum at the time of shipment
Image acquisition sound, system error sound from the factory.
VR16 Main console B buzzer sound volume Set to the maximum at the time of shipment
Image acquisition sound, system error sound from the factory.
37
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(6) VSW-SM
Perform SW settings referring to the table below.
SW SW application Details
SW1 Examination room live monitor output GAIN setting 1: ON when the cable length is 30 m
2: ON when the cable length is 50 m
SW2 Examination room ref monitor output GAIN setting 1: ON when the cable length is 30 m
SW3 Additional monitor output GAIN setting 1: ON when the cable length is 30 m
SW4 PWB setting SW 1: ON for the frontal-side VSW-M
OFF for the lateral-side VSW-M
2: TEST mode setting
OFF for normal use
3: EXT1 input selection
OFF for single-plane and biplane systems
ON for dual-plane systems
4: EXT2 input selection
OFF for single-plane and biplane systems
ON for dual-plane systems
SW5 Control room live monitor output GAIN setting 1: ON when the cable length is 10 m
4: OFF
SW6 Control room ref monitor output GAIN setting 1: ON when the cable length is 10 m
4: OFF
SW7 Color monitor R output GAIN setting 1: OFF
2: ON
SW8 Color monitor G output GAIN setting 1: OFF
2: ON
SW9 Color monitor B output GAIN setting 1: OFF
2: ON
38
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(7) CCI
For connection with the For connection with the

main console A/B main console C
Biplane Single-plane Biplane Single-plane
S1 1 OFF 
ON   
2 OFF  
ON  
3 OFF    
ON
4 OFF    
ON
5 OFF    
ON
6 OFF    
ON
7 OFF    
ON
8 OFF    
ON
S2 1 OFF
ON    
2 OFF    
ON
3 OFF    
ON
4 OFF    
ON
S3 - Pin Nos. 
1 and 4
- Pin Nos.   
3 and 6
JP1 - Short With CAN terminal resistance
- Open Without CAN terminal resistance
JP2 1-2 Short
2-3 Short    
39
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(8) VSW-ESD (XIDF-ESD801)
Set the switches according to the table below.
S1 to S4 correspond to IN1-TERM to IN4-TERM on the rear of the cabinet.
(a) For PX17-41076*E (PWB: YWM1215*B) or earlier
SW Setting (initial value) Details

S1 (IN1-TERM) ON Sets the terminal for video input signal 1 ON/OFF.
ON : Through output is not used.
OFF : Through output is used.
S5 1-8: OFF Switches between NTSC and PAL.
ON : PAL
OFF : NTSC
2-7: OFF For testing
Do not change the initial setting.
3-6: OFF Changes the gain of the RGB decoder.
4-5: ON Changes the gain of the RGB decoder.
S6 1-4: ON Changes the output gain.
2-3: OFF Do not change the initial setting.
S9 1-4: ON Sets the clock path.
40
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) For PX17-41076*F (PWB: YWM1402) or later
SW Setting (initial value) Details

S5 1-8: OFF Switches between NTSC and PAL.
ON : PAL
OFF : NTSC
3-6: ON Changes the gain of the RGB decoder.
S9 1-4: ON Sets the clock path.
41
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(9) V-IF (slots 9 and 11)
Slot 9 is used for the F side (or Tube 1) and slot 11 is for the L side (or Tube 2).
For single-plane systems, only slot 9 is used.
(a) PWBs used
 PX17-41797*H Gr.1 or later
(b) PWB switch settings
The settings of switch <1> differ depending on the conditions. Setting is not required
for the other switches.
For the settings of all switches, including switch <1>, refer to the table in <2>.
<1> S7-3 setting
 For the F side (or Tube 1 side) (slot 10) : ON

 For the L side (or Tube 2 side) (slot 12) : OFF
<2> Settings of all switches on the PWB
The settings of all switches on the PWB are shown in the table below.
For switches other than switch <1>, it is not necessary to change the settings.
<a> Switch S6
* When S7-8 is OFF (normal setting), the setting of switch S6 is not valid.
Name Function Setting

S6-8 PX17-41470 Sets the control of the reset switch. ON
 RESETEN ON : The reset switch is enabled.
OFF : The reset switch is disabled.
S6-8 PX17-41797 This is a debugging switch. Do not change the setting. ON
 FSW16
S6-7 PX17-41470 Sets the FPGA configuration. OFF
 CONFEN ON : Configuration is performed at resetting.
OFF : Configuration is not performed at resetting.
S6-7 PX17-41797 Sets fogging correction control. OFF
 FSW15 ON : Fogging correction is performed.
OFF : Fogging correction is not performed.
S6-6 PX17-41470 This is a debugging switch. Do not change the setting. OFF
 FSW9
PX17-41797
 FSW14
S6-5 PX17-41470 ON/OFF of the backup video output ON
 TMD2 Sets whether the backup video signal is set to ON or OFF
PX17-41797 when image processing ENABLE is controlled by the hardware.
 FSW13 ON : The backup video signal is output.
OFF : The backup video signal is not output.
S6-4 PX17-41470 Gain correction circuit control ON
 TMD1 Sets whether the gain correction circuit is set to ON or OFF
PX17-41797 when image processing ENABLE is controlled by the hardware.
 FSW12 ON : Gain correction is performed.
OFF : Gain correction is not performed.
42
No. 2J308-036EN*I

S6-3 PX17-41470 Resizing circuit control OFF
 TMD0 Sets whether the resizing circuit is set to ON or OFF when
PX17-41797 image processing ENABLE is controlled by the hardware.
 FSW11 ON : Resizing is performed.
OFF : Resizing is not performed.
S6-2 PX17-41470 Fogging correction control OFF
 TEST Sets whether fogging correction is performed when image
PX17-41797 processing ENABLE is controlled by the hardware.
 FSW10 ON : Fogging correction is performed.
OFF : Fogging correction is not performed.
S6-1 PX17-41470 Horizontal filtering control OFF
 2020 Sets whether the horizontal filtering is performed when image
PX17-41797 processing ENABLE is controlled by the hardware.
 FSW9 ON : Horizontal filtering is performed.
OFF : Horizontal filtering is not performed.
 Switch S7

S7-8 FSW8 Switches image processing ENABLE control between software OFF
and hardware.
ON : Hardware control (Setting of switch S6 is valid.)
OFF : Software control
S7-7 FSW7 Sets whether image processing is disabled other than during OFF
fluoroscopy or radiography.
ON : Image processing is performed regardless of
synchronization with fluoroscopy or radiography.
OFF : Image processing is performed in synchronization with
fluoroscopy or radiography.
S7-6 FSW6 This is a debugging switch. Do not change the setting. OFF
*1)
S7-3 FSW3 Selects the F-side board or L-side board. ON
ON : When the F-side board is inserted into slot 10.
OFF : When the L-side board is inserted into slot 12.
S7-2 FSW2 User Sync pulse width setting (standard is 5 ms) ON
S7-1 FSW1 SW [2:1] = ON (0), ON (0): 10 sec OFF
SW [2:1] = ON (0), OFF (1): 5 msec
SW [2:1] = OFF (1), ON (0): 15 msec
SW [2:1] = OFF (1), OFF (1): 10 sec
*1) The setting differs for the F and L sides. Refer to <1>.
43
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<c> Switch S3 (PX17-41797 Gr.1)

S3-8 FSW24 If PX17-41797 Gr.1 is used in combination with software earlier OFF
than V3.40, perform setting according to the software version.
ON : Earlier than V3.40
OFF : V3.40 or later
S3-7 FSW23 If PX17-41797 Gr.1 is used in combination with software V3.23 ON
or earlier, perform setting depending on the FPD used in
combination.
ON : XIDF-FPD801, XIDF-FPD801/A1 / TFP-800A
FPD8 compatible mode (operated as PX17-41470 Gr.1)
OFF : XIDF-FPD803/TFP-1216A
FPD1216 compatible mode (operated as PX17-41470
Gr.2)
S3-6 FSW22 Forced setting for FPD1216 BP format conversion OFF
ON : 1216 BP mode
OFF : Normal mode (software setting)
S3-5 FSW21 Test pattern vertical direction increment setting OFF
ON : IV setting value  16
OFF : IV setting value
S3-3 FSW19 If PX17-41797 Gr.1 is used in combination with software earlier OFF
than V3.40, perform setting according to the software version.
ON : Earlier than V3.40
OFF : V3.40 or later
<d> Switch S4
CAUTION: Do not touch the switch S4. The setting may be changed
and the corresponding data will be cleared.

S4-4 CPLD4 Configuration ROM setting OFF
<e> Rotary switch

S1 S1 This is a debugging switch. Do not change the setting. 2
S1 S1 This is a debugging switch. Do not change the setting. 2
44
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(10) SNRF2 (slot 4/slot 6)
In the SP/BP/DP systems, only slot 4 is used.
Both slots 4 and 6 are used in the HSBP system, with slot 4 for the frontal side and slot 6
for the lateral side.
(a) PWB used
PX17-44911*C Gr.1 or later
(b) Switch settings of the PWB
Switch setting for each function is not required.
 Switch S0
LOC Name Details of switch setting Setting

S0-1 - Switching of JTAG OFF
OFF : FPGA
ON : SPI-FLASH ROM
S0-2 - Switching of SPI-Flash ROM OFF
OFF : Updated ROM
ON : Original ROM (ROM for backup)
S0-3 - Control of Config OFF
OFF : Retry is enabled.
ON : Retry is disabled.
(The ROM to be used differs according to
the setting of S0-2.)
S0-4 - Write protect setting of the original SPI-Flash ROM OFF
OFF : Write protected
ON : Write enabled
 Switch S1

S1-1 DSW1 For debugging OFF
 Switch S2

S2 - For debugging 0
45
No. 2J308-036EN*I
3.3.2 Setting the Multi drive
Remove the front, rear, and the side covers of the CCB and confirm that the DIP SW on the rear
of the Multi drive is set as shown below. Correct the DIP SW setting if necessary.
(1) Set the DIP SW on the rear of the Multi drive as shown below.
DIP SW
ON AUTO OFF
DIP SW setting
46
No. 2J308-036EN*I
3.3.3 Setting the USB extender
Remove the front, rear, and side covers of the CCB and check the status of the LEDs as
described below.
(1) LEX LEDs
POWER and HOST LEDs are present on the LEX.
 POWER = Blue
 HOST = Green
(2) REX LEDs
POWER and HOST LEDs are present in each of four ports. It is only necessary to check
the port to which the USB cable is connected.
 POWER = Blue
 HOST = Green
 USB port of the REX = Green
47
No. 2J308-036EN*I
3.3.4 DIP switch setting of the VIDEO card
The DIP switch setting of the VIDEO card differs according to the mounting position of the
VIDEO card. Set the DIP switches appropriately referring to the figures below.
For single-plane systems For XIDF-REF801
Setting 2
Setting 1
Rear of the Server PC Rear of the Server PC
Setting 1 CFG DVI RGB VGA Setting 2 CFG DVI RGB VGA
VGA: OFF
VGA: ON
RGB: ON
RGB: ON
DVI: OFF
DVI: OFF
ON ON CFG: ON
CFG: ON
Location of the DIP switch (setting 1 is used in this example)
48
No. 2J308-036EN*I
3.3.5 DIP switch setting of the bridge board and the bridge card
The bridge board in the cPCI chassis and the bridge card in the server PC are used together in
order to connect between the PCI bus of the cPCI chassis and the PCI bus of the server PC.
For the procedure for identifying each board, refer to subsection 5.1.18 "Bridge card/Bridge
board replacement procedure" in the service manual (2D308-016EN).
(1) Checking DIP SW setting
Check that the DIP switches of the bridge board and bridge card are set to the default
specified by the manufacturer. If not, set them to the default.
(a) For ROCKY
Bridge card
Default setting
1 ON
2 ON
3 OFF
4 OFF
5 OFF
6 OFF
7 OFF
8 OFF
Setting of each bit of the DIP switch
No Function OFF ON
1 Operation mode Sets StarGate to LEAF. Sets StarGate to ROOT
2 PCI -to-PCI bridge Disables the PCI -to-PCI bridge Enables the PCI -to-PCI
function bridge function
3 PFNO Sets PFNO bit 0 to 0. Sets PFNO bit 0 to 1.
4 LOCKOUT Normal o peration Prohibits access to register
SG2010 from the switching
fabric.
5 GPIO [0] Sets GPIO bit 0 to 0. Sets GPIO bit 0 to 1.
Details of the DIP switch settings
49
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Bridge board
Default setting
1 OFF
2 ON
3 OFF
4 OFF
5 ON
6 OFF
7 OFF
8 OFF
No Function OFF ON
1 Operation mode Sets StarGate to LEAF. Sets StarGate to ROOT
2 PCI-to -PCI bridge Disables the PCI -to-PCI bridge Enables the PCI -to-PCI
function bridge function
3 PFNO Sets PFNO bit 0 to 0. Sets PFNO bit 0 to 1.
4 LOCKOUT Normal o peration Prohibits access to register
SG2010 from the switching
fabric.
5 SKIPINS Skips the insertion state of Passes through the insertion
the hot swap controller. state of the hot swap controller.
(b) For ADVANET
Bridge card
DIP switches for setting mode (DSW1)
Default setting
1 OFF
2 OFF
3 ON
4 ON
5 ON
6 OFF
7 ON
8 OFF
No Name OFF ON
1 /ROOT Board is set to root (primary side when Board is set to leaf (secondary side
BRGEN bit is OFF). when BRGEN bit is OFF).
2 /BRGEN Enables the PCI-to-PCI bridge function Disables the PCI-PCI bridge function
(PCI legacy mode). (Gateway only mode).
3 PFNO Sets parallel function number to N + 1. Sets parallel function number to N.
4 /CFEN Enables the PCI central function. Disables the PCI central function.
5 /ARBEN Enables the arbiter circuit in the board. Disables the arbiter circuit in the board.
6 RESERVE - -
7 /SYSTEM Insertion to the system slot Insertion to the peripheral slot
8 RESERVE - -
50
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Bridge board
DIP switches for setting mode
Default setting
1 ON
2 OFF
3 ON
4 OFF
5 OFF
6 OFF
7 OFF
DIP switches for setting mode (DSW1) 8 OFF
No Name OFF ON
1 /ROOT Board is set to root (primary side when Board is set to leaf (secondary side
BRGEN bit is OFF). when BRGEN bit is OFF).
2 /BRGEN Enables the PCI-to-PCI bridge function Disables the PCI-PCI bridge function
(PCI legacy mode). (Gateway only mode).
3 PFNO Sets parallel function number to N + 1. Sets parallel function number to N.
4 /CFEN Enables the PCI central function. Disables the PCI central function.
5 /ARBEN Enables the arbiter circuit in the board. Disables the arbiter circuit in the board.
6 RESERVE - -
7 RESERVE - -
8 RESERVE - -
51
No. 2J308-036EN*I
3.3.6 Setting of main console C
S1-1 S1-2 Target of the field size Target of the field size
change switch on the F change switch on the L
side side
Independent switching (at the time OFF OFF F side L side
of shipment)
Change of the field sizes on the ON OFF F and L sides F and L sides
both the F and L sides at the same
time
Change of the field sizes on the ON ON F and L sides L side
both F and L sides at the same
time using the F-side field size
change switch
(The L-side switch is used to
change the L-side field only.)
S1-3
OFF (at the time of shipment) ON
Field size change switch The field size increases. The field size decreases.
Operation in the + direction (The image is reduced.) (The image is enlarged.)
Field size change switch The field size decreases. The field size increases.
Operation in the - direction (The image is enlarged.) (The image is reduced.)
S1-4 to S1-8: Not used (all set to OFF at the time of shipment)
VR1 (BUZ) Buzzer volume control

VR2 (SPK) Speaker volume control
52
No. 2J308-036EN*I
3.4 CAS-810A Setting
3.4.1 PWB setting
(1) [A01] HOST CPU PWB
DIP SW1-1: OFF (Initial data BB-RAM at power ON is selected.)

SW1-2: OFF (Information saved for each axis is not initialized.)
SW1-3: OFF (CANopen SDO value is not initialized.)
SW1-4: OFF (Independent auto positioning value is not initialized.)
SW1-5: ON (Detector type: FPD)
SW1-6: OFF (CANopen address Frontal or TUBE1 is selected.)
SW1-7: OFF (Independent operation mode is disabled.)
SW1-8: OFF (Not used)
DIP SW2-1: OFF (Not used)
DIP SW2-2: OFF (FPD fan lock detection is enabled.)
DIP SW2-3: ON (FPD temperature detection is disabled.)
DIP SW2-4: ON (Check for interference with the table, patient is available.)
DIP SW2-5, 6, 7, 8: OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF (Single-plane)
: OFF, OFF, ON, OFF (DP system 0°)
: OFF, ON, OFF, OFF (DP system 90°)
: ON, ON, OFF, OFF (DP system 180°)
JP1: SHORT (Use as the system controller is enabled.)
JP2, JP3: SHORT JP4: OPEN (External ROM is enabled.)
(2) [A02] A/D COUNT PWB
DIP SW S1 : All are OFF.

RSW 2 : 0 (IRQ LEVEL CODE)
RSW 3 : 0 (STATUS ID)
VR1 : CAS speaker volume
Adjust the volume by pressing the override button.
53
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) [A03] MIO PWB
DIP SW S1-1: OFF (Service mode function is disabled.)

S1-2: OFF (C-arm support unit: CAS-810A)
S1-3, 4: OFF, OFF (Single-plane)
S1-3, 4: OFF, OFF (DP system 0°)
: ON, OFF (DP system 90°, 180°)
DIP SW S2-1: OFF (All safety switches are enabled.)
S2-2: ON (Other arm safety switches are disabled.)
DIP SW S3-4: ON (IRQ4 selection)
All OFF for others
JP1: Open (Not used)
JP2: Short (Auxiliary safety switch is not used.)
JP3: Open (C-arm safety switch is used.)
JP4: 9-10 Short (GA TRIGER 125 Hz)
RSW S4: 4 (IRQ LEVEL CODE)
RSW S5: 4 (STATUS ID)
RSW S6: 0 (Selection of the axis for auto-scaling, "0" = no axis)
(4) [A04] COLLIMATOR CONT PWB
RSW1 (Selection of combined detector size)

RSW1: 0 (TFP-800A/A1, TFP-800A/B1, or TFP-800B is combined)
RSW1: 1 (TFP-1200A/B1 or TFP-1200B is combined)
DIP SW S1-1: OFF (ON-main mode)
SW S1-2: OFF (Not used)
SW S1-4: OFF (Blade/compensation filter can be operated only during fluoroscopy.)
SW S1-5: OFF (Blade/compensation filter can be operated only while tube is selected.)
SW S1-8: ON (When the BLA-800C is mounted)
OFF (When the BLA-800A is mounted)
3.4.2 Statuses of the POWER/SERVO UNIT
The circuit protectors (CP1, CP2) must be ON (red).
For the DP system, both "ON (red)" and "OFF (black)" are OK.
54
No. 2J308-036EN*I
3.5 CAS-830A, CAS-830B Setting
3.5.1 PWB setting
[CAS-830A]

ON (For the DP system, TUBE2 is selected.)
SW1-8: OFF (Timeout setting is enabled when the ceiling-suspended C-arm is
selected.)
DIP SW2-2: ON (FPD fan lock detection is disabled.)
DIP SW2-3: ON (when the TFP-800A/A1 or TFP-1200A is used in combination)
(FPD temperature detection is disabled.)
OFF (when the TFP-1216A is used in combination) (FPD temperature
detection is enabled.)

RSW S2 : 0 (IRQ LEVEL CODE)
RSW S3 : 0 (STATUS ID)
55
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) [A03] MIO PWB

S1-2: OFF (C-arm support unit: CAS-830A)
S1-3, 4: OFF, OFF (Single-plane)
S1-3, 4: OFF, ON (DP system 0°)
: ON, ON (DP system 90°, 180°)
S2-2: ON (The safety switches of other arms are disabled.)
All OFF for others
JP2: Short (Auxiliary safety switch is not used.)
JP3: Short (C-arm safety switch is not used.)
JP4: 9-10: Short (GA TRIGGER 125 Hz)
RSW S6: 0 (Selection of the axis for auto-scaling, "0" = no axis)

RSW1: 0 (TFP-800A/A1 is combined.)
RSW1: 3 (TFP-1216A is combined.)
SW S1-4: OFF (Blade/compensation filter can be operated only during fluoroscopy.)
SW S1-5: OFF (Blade/compensation filter can be operated only while tube is selected.)
SW S1-8: ON (When the BLA-800C is mounted)
OFF (When the BLA-800A is mounted)
56
No. 2J308-036EN*I
[CAS-830B]

ON (For the DP system, TUBE2 is selected.)
SW1-8: OFF (Timeout setting is enabled when the ceiling-suspended C-arm is
selected.)
DIP SW2-3: ON (when the TFP-800A/A1 or TFP-1200A is used in combination)
(FPD temperature detection is disabled.)
OFF (when the TFP-1216A is used in combination) (FPD temperature
detection is enabled.)
JP2: OPEN (Internal ROM is enabled.)
JP3, JP4: SHORT (Internal ROM is enabled.)

57
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) [A03] MIO PWB
Dip SW Setting Function

S10 1 OFF Service mode function: Enabled
(8 bit)
2 OFF Support unit type: CAS-830B
3 ON
4 OFF Not used
5 ON Rail switch function: Enabled
6 OFF Not used
7 OFF Not used
8 OFF FPGA configuration
S2 1 OFF Touch sensor function: Enabled
(2 bit)
2 ON Other-arm touch sensor function: Disabled <Single-plane>
S3 1 Only 4 ON IRQ setting
(8 bit)
:
8
Rot SW Setting Function

S4 4 IRQ STATUS ID setting
S5 0 Not used
Selection of the axes for auto-scaling and initial teaching:
S6 0
No axis
S7 3 Servo communication clock setting (250 Hz)
S8 4 IRQ LEVEL setting
58
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Jumper Setting Function

JP2 Shorted AUX touch sensor setting (disabled)
JP3 Shorted C-arm touch sensor setting (disabled)
LED Color Function

LED1 Red System reset (lit during reset operation)
LED2 Green Emergency status (not lit when the Emergency SW is ON)
LED3 Green CLOCK and FPGA status (blinking during normal operation)
Tableside console communication status
LED4 Green
(lit during normal operation)
Satellite console communication status
LED5 Green
LED6 Green Not used (not lit)
LED7 Red PWB reset (lit during reset operation)
FPGA configuration
LED8 Red
(goes out when configuration is completed)
LED9 Red Not used (not lit)
(4) [A04] COLLIMATOR I/F PWB
RSW1 (Selection of the size of the detector used in combination)
0 : TFP-800A
2 : TFP-1200A
3 : TFP-1216A/A1
RSW2 (Selection of the support unit used in combination)
3 : CAS-830B
RSW3 (not used)
0 : Not used
RSW4 (not used)
0 : Not used
Dip SW 1-1 : ON (SH7055 operation mode (internal ROM enabled))

1-2 : OFF (SH7055 operation mode (internal ROM enabled))
1-3 : OFF (SH7055 operation mode (internal ROM enabled))
1-4 : ON (Flash Write Enable boot mode setting)
59
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Dip SW 2-1 : OFF (Service mode OFF)

2-2 : OFF (Not used)
2-5 : OFF (when the EPOS PWB is used in combination)
ON (when the EPOS2 PWB is used in combination)
2-6 : OFF (Manual speed initialization is not performed.)
2-7 : OFF (The aperture adjustment/positional error correction value is
not cleared.)
2-8 : OFF (The SDO value is not initialized.)
Dip SW 3-1 : OFF (when the BLA-900A is installed)

: ON (when the BLA-900C is installed)
3-2 : OFF (BLA type; reserved)
3-3 : OFF (ON-main mode)
3-4 : ON (Aperture adjustment is enabled.)
3-5 : ON (The beam hardening filter can be operated.)
3-6 : OFF (The blades/compensation filter can be operated only
during fluoroscopy.)
3-7 : OFF (The blades/compensation filter can be operated only when the
corresponding tube is selected.)
3-8 : OFF (Beam limiting device main unit rotation is enabled when the
BLA-900A or BLA-900C is installed.)
Dip SW 4-1 : ON (FPGA configuration mode)

4-2 : ON (FPGA configuration mode)
Dip SW 5-1 : OFF (Not used)

Dip SW 6-1 : ON (CAN1 terminator not provided)

6-1 : ON (CAN2 terminator not provided)
Dip SW 7-1 : OFF (Not used)

60
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(5) Inside the operating panel
Tableside console Satellite console

(XGCP-880BA, XGCP-882BA) (XGCP-880AA, XGCP-882AA)
PWB PO Setting change is not possible Setting change is not possible
JP1 (Shorted) (Not used)
JP2 (Open) (Shorted)
JP3 (Not used) (Open)
JP4 (Shorted) (Open)
JP6 (Shorted) 
S1 (All bits set to OFF) (All bits set to OFF)
PWB CO
S1-1 OFF (The MAG selection switches (+/-) are not inverted.)
S1-2 OFF (F/L linking with the MAG selection switches is disabled.)
S1-3, 4 Not used
PWB IMG
S1-1, 2, 3 OFF (Not used)
S1-4 ON (The function buttons are not lit at power ON.)
61
No. 2J308-036EN*I
3.5.3 Checking the coolant circulator
CAUTION: 1. There are several types of coolant circulator according to functional

differences. Before work, check the sections indicated by "1" and "2" on the
label at the rear of the coolant circulator. This is required to identify the
coolant circulator.
 Label at the rear of the coolant circulator
TYPE 1 (MODEL NO.) 2 (PUMP TYPE)

E SCS-05A 250 W
2. If the following operation is performed, coolant circulator power is not turned

ON when system power is next turned ON.
With the system power ON, turn OFF the power breaker on the rear of the coolant
circulator. The power of the coolant circulator is turned OFF.

System power is turned OFF with coolant circulator power OFF.

System power is turned ON again.

Coolant circulator power is not turned ON because there is no longer a power link
between the system and the coolant circulator.
62
No. 2J308-036EN*I
[Coolant circulator type E]
(1) Confirm that the circuit breaker on the rear of the coolant circulator is OFF.
(2) Remove the coolant supply panel from the top of the coolant circulator and then remove
the cap from the coolant supply tank.
Coolant circulator after the coolant supply panel

and the cap of the tank have been removed
(3) Add coolant up to the "MAX" level of the coolant volume check indicator (refer to the figure
below).
(4) Turn ON the power of the system.
(5) Turn ON the circuit breaker on the rear of the coolant circulator.
(6) When the coolant circulator starts operating, the coolant level drops. Add more coolant.
(7) When the coolant level has stabilized, add coolant up to the MAX level.
(8) Remount the cap of the tank and the coolant supply panel.
63
No. 2J308-036EN*I
3.6.1 PWB setting

: ON, OFF, OFF, OFF (BP system)
JP1 : SHORT (Use as the system controller is enabled.)
JP2, JP3, JP4 : OPEN, SHORT, SHORT (Internal ROM is enabled.)

RSW 2 : 0 (IRQ LEVEL CODE)
RSW 3 : 0 (STATUS ID)
64
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) [A03] MIO PWB

S10 (8 bit) 1 OFF Service mode function: Disabled
2 OFF Support unit type: CAS-880A
3 OFF
4 OFF Support unit used in combination:
Biplane and single-plane systems in which the
820B is used in combination
6 OFF Grid connect function: Disabled
7 OFF Not used
S2 (2 bit) 1 OFF Touch sensor function: Enabled
2 OFF Other arm touch sensor function:
(ON) Enabled <biplane system>
(Disabled <single-plane system>)
S3 (8 bit) 1 ON for 4 only IRQ setting
to
8

S5 0 Not used
S6 0 Selection of the axis for auto-scaling, initial-teaching:
No axis

JP2 SHORT Auxiliary touch sensor setting (disabled)
JP3 OPEN Floor base touch sensor setting (enabled)
LED Color Function

LED1 Red System reset (lights for reset)
LED2 Green Emergency status (goes out for Emergency ON)
LED3 Green CLOCK and FPGA status (blinks for normal)
LED4 Green Tableside console communication status (lights for
normal)
LED5 Green Satellite console communication status (lights for
normal)
LED6 Green Not used (goes out)
LED7 Red PWB reset (lights for reset)
LED8 Red FPGA configuration (goes out when completed)
LED9 Red Not used (goes out)
65
No. 2J308-036EN*I

(a) When the BLA-800C is used in combination
RSW1 (Selection of the detector used in combination)
RSW1: 0 (TFP-800A/A1, TFP-800A/B1, or TFP-800B is combined)
SW S1-4: OFF (The beam limiting device blades and the compensation filters
can only be operated during fluoroscopy.)
SW S1-5: OFF (The beam limiting device blades and the compensation filters
can only be operated when the corresponding tube is selected.)
SW S1-8: ON (When the BLA-800C is installed)
(b) When the BLA-900A or BLA-900C is used in combination
RSW1 (Selection of the detector used in combination)
0: The TFP-800A/A1, TFP-800A/B1, or TFP-800B is used in combination.
2: The TFP-1200A, TFP-1200A/B1, or TFP-1200B is used in combination.
3: The TFP-1216A is used in combination.
RSW2 (Selection of the support unit used in combination)
4: The CAS-880A is used in combination
RSW3 (Not used)
0: Not used
RSW4 (Not used)
0: Not used
DIP SW 1-1: ON (SH7055 operation mode (The internal ROM is enabled.))
SW 1-2: OFF (SH7055 operation mode (The internal ROM is enabled.))
SW 1-4: ON (Flash Write Enable boot mode setting)
DIP SW 2-1: OFF (Service mode is disabled.)
SW 2-2: OFF (Not used)
SW 2-5: OFF (when the EPOS PWB is used in combination)
SW 2-6: OFF (Manual speed initialization is not performed.)
SW 2-7: OFF (Aperture adjustment is not performed./Positional error
correction values are not cleared.)
SW 2-8: OFF (SDO value initialization is not performed.)
66
No. 2J308-036EN*I
DIP SW 3-1: OFF (when the BLA-900A is installed)

ON (when the BLA-900C is installed)
SW 3-2: OFF (BLA type reserved)
SW 3-3: OFF (ON-main mode)
SW 3-4: ON (Aperture adjustment is valid.)
SW 3-5: ON (The beam hardening filter can be operated.)
SW 3-6: OFF (The beam limiting device blades and the compensation filters
can only be operated when the corresponding tube is selected.)
SW 3-8: OFF (The beam limiting device rotation shaft is provided when the
BLA-900A or BLA-900C is installed)
ON (The beam limiting device rotation shaft is not provided when the
BLA-900C is installed)
DIP SW 4-1: ON (FPGA configuration mode)
SW 4-2: ON (FPGA configuration mode)
DIP SW 5-1: OFF (Not used)
DIP SW 6-1: ON (CAN1 terminator provided)
SW 6-2: ON (CAN2 terminator provided)
67
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(5) PWBs inside the operating panel

PWB PO The setting cannot be changed. The setting cannot be changed.
JP1 (SHORT) (not used)
JP2 (OPEN) (SHORT)
JP3 (not used) (SHORT)
JP4 (SHORT) (SHORT)
JP5 (SHORT) (OPEN)
JP6 (SHORT) --
S1 (All are OFF) (All are OFF)
PWB CO
S1-1 OFF (Increase/decrease functions of the MAG selection switches (+/-) are
not inverted.)
S1-2 OFF (F/L link with the MAG selection switch is disabled.)
S1-3, 4 OFF (Not used)
PWB IMG
S1-4 ON (The function button is not lit at power ON.)
68
No. 2J308-036EN*I
For the DP system, both "ON (red)" and "OFF (black)" are OK.
3.6.3 Check of the coolant circulator (for water-cooled FPD cardiac systems)

differences. Before work, check the applicable coolant circulator referring to
subsection 3.5.3.




69
No. 2J308-036EN*I

below).
70
No. 2J308-036EN*I
3.7 CAS-820B Setting
3.7.1 PWB setting

SW1-6: ON (CANopen address Lateral is selected.)
DIP SW2-1 : OFF (Not used)
DIP SW2-2 : ON (FPD fan lock detection is disabled.)
DIP SW2-3 : OFF (Not used)
DIP SW2-4 : ON (Interference with the table/patient is checked.)
DIP SW2-5, 6, 7, 8 : ON, OFF, OFF, OFF (BP system)
DIP SW S1 : All OFF

Adjust the volume by pressing the Override button.
71
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) [A03] MIO PWB

S10 (8 bit) 1 OFF Service mode function: Disabled
2 ON Support unit type: CAS-820B
3 OFF
4 OFF Not used
6 OFF Grid connect function: Disabled
7 OFF Not used
S2 (2 bit) 1 OFF Touch sensor function: Enabled
2 OFF Other arm touch sensor function:
(ON) Enabled <biplane system>
(Disabled <single-plane system>)
to
8

S5 0 Not used
S6 0 Selection of the axis for auto-scaling: No axis

JP2 SHORT Auxiliary touch sensor setting (disabled)
JP3 SHORT Floor base touch sensor setting (disabled)
LED Color Function

normal)
normal)
72
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(a) When the BLA-800C is used in combination
RSW 1 (Combined detector size selection)

RSW 1: 0 (TFP-800A/A1 is combined.)
S1-2: OFF (Not used)
S1-4: OFF (Blades and compensation filter are enabled during the
fluoroscopy.)
S1-5: OFF (Blades and compensation filter are enabled when tube is
selected.)
S1-8: ON (When BLA-800C is installed.)
(b) When the BLA-900A or BLA-900C is used in combination
RSW 1 (Selection of the detector used in combination)

0: The TFP-800A/A1, TFP-800A/B1, or TFP-800B is used in combination.
2: The TFP-1200A is used in combination.
RSW 2 (Selection of the support unit used in combination)
2: The CAS-820B is used in combination.
RSW 3 (Not used)
0: Not used
RSW 4 (Not used)
0: Not used
SW 1-4: ON (Flash Write Enable boot mode setting)
DIP SW 2-1: OFF (Service mode is disabled.)
SW 2-5: OFF (when the EPOS PWB is used in combination)
SW 2-6: OFF (Manual speed initialization is not performed.)
SW 2-7: OFF (Aperture adjustment is not performed./Positional error
correction values are not cleared.)
SW 2-8: OFF (SDO value initialization is not performed.)
73
No. 2J308-036EN*I
DIP SW 3-1: OFF (when the BLA-900A is installed)

ON (when the BLA-900C is installed)
SW 3-2: OFF (BLA type reserved)
SW 3-3: OFF (ON-main mode)
SW 3-4: ON (Aperture adjustment is valid.)
SW 3-5: ON (The beam hardening filter can be operated.)
can only be operated when the corresponding tube is selected.
SW 3-8: OFF (The beam limiting device rotation shaft is provided when the
ON (The beam limiting device rotation shaft is not provided when
the BLA-900C is installed)
DIP SW 6-1: ON (CAN1 terminator provided)
SW 6-2: ON (CAN2 terminator provided)
74
No. 2J308-036EN*I
3.7.2 Check of the coolant circulator (for water-cooled FPD cardiac systems)

subsection 3.5.3.





75
No. 2J308-036EN*I
below).
76
No. 2J308-036EN*I
3.8 BLA-800C Setting
3.8.1 Switch setting
RSW1, RSW2: 0
DIP SW 1-1 : OFF (ON-main mode)
1-2 : ON (Aperture correction is enabled.)
1-3 : ON (Dose adjustment filter is enabled.)
1-4 : ON (When the FPD is combined)
For other detailed setting, refer to the installation manual for the BLA-800C (2C356-064E).
3.8.2 Checking the ROM
When the CAS-810A/-820B/-830A is used in combination

Three beam hardening filters : X35013-09 or earlier or X35448-00
or X35483-00 or later
Four beam hardening filters : X35013-10 or X35481 or later
When the CAS-880A is used in combination
Three beam hardening filters : X35359-01 or earlier or X35449-00
or X35484-00 or later
Four beam hardening filters : X35359-02 or X35482-00 or later
3.8.3 Checking the jumper wire
Depending on whether or not the beam limiting device reset function is provided, and whether or
not the PWB of the beam limiting device is upgraded, it may be necessary to remove the jumper
wire (between PHC8 pin 6 and U7 pin 1) and to perform pattern cutting (between PHC8 pin 6
and U7 pin 1) on the PWB of the beam limiting device. Since a communication error of the
beam limiting device may occur if unnecessary jumper wires exist or pattern cutting is not
performed, check the ROM No. of the [A04] COLLIMATOR CONT PWB of the CAS as well as
the part number of the PWB of the beam limiting device and perform the work as appropriate.
(1) When the beam limiting device reset function is not provided (The jumper wire is not
required.)
If the ROM No. of the [A04] COLLIMATOR CONT PWB of the CAS is one of the following
numbers and the part number of the PWB of the beam limiting device is BSX13-0262
(YWP5639), the jumper wire (between PHC8 pin 6 and U7 pin 1) is not necessary. Be
sure to remove the jumper wire. If the part number of the PWB of the beam limiting device
is BSX13-0456 (YWP5831), pattern cutting (between PHC8 pin 6 and U7 pin 1) on the
back of the PWB is necessary. Be sure to perform pattern cutting.
X35223-06 or earlier (standard)

X35358-01 or earlier (CF-i system CAS-880A)
(2) When the beam limiting device reset function is provided (The jumper wires are required.)
(YWP5639), the jumper wire (between PHC8 pin 6 and U7 pin 1) is necessary. Be sure to
connect the jumper wire. If the part number of the PWB of the beam limiting device is
BSX13-0456 (YWP5831), pattern cutting (between PHC8 pin 6 and U7 pin 1) on the back
of the PWB is not necessary. Be sure to confirm that pattern cutting is not performed. If
pattern cutting has already been performed, connect a jumper wire between PHC8 pin 6
and U7 pin 1 on the front side of the PWB.
X35223-07 or later (standard)

X35358-02 or later (CF-i system CAS-880A)
77
No. 2J308-036EN*I
3.8.4 Check and replacement of the beam hardening filter
In image processor software version V3.42 or later, the material for the beam hardening filter in
the beam limiting device has been changed to copper (Cu) from tantalum (Ta). If the beam
limiting device is replaced due to malfunction etc., replace the new beam hardening filter with
the same type of filter that was used in the old beam limiting device.
 F1 = Cu 0.2 mm, F2 = Cu 0.3 mm, F3 = Al 1.8 mm, F4 = Cu 0.3 mm
Beam hardening filter replacement procedure
Perform beam hardening filter replacement as described below.
(1) Remove the beam limiting device cover.
(2) Replace the beam hardening filters.
(a) For the three beam hardening filter type
Prepare the new beam hardening filter (Ta), filter retaining plates, and mounting
screws (M2  3 mm). (Use parts supplied with the new beam limiting device. If these
are not supplied, remove parts from the old beam limiting device and reuse them.)
Ta 0.03 mm (three)
Filter retaining plates (two)
Filter mounting screws (M2 x 3 mm) (four)
78
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) For the four beam hardening filter type
The following beam hardening filters are provided with the replacement beam limiting
device
Ta 0.03 mm (three)
Filter mounting screws (M2 x 4 mm) (four)
(3) Checking the layout of the beam hardening filter and replacement
Carry out replacement referring to the following filter layout.
(a) For the three beam hardening filter type
F3: AI
F2: Ta 0.06 F1: Ta 0.03

or Cu 0.3 or Cu 0.2
Layout of the filter
79
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) For the four beam hardening filter type
F4: Cu 0.5
F1: Ta 0.03
F2: Ta 0.06
or Cu 0.2
or Cu 0.3
F3: Al 1.8
80
No. 2J308-036EN*I
3.9 BLA-800A Setting
3.9.1 Switch setting
RSW1, RSW2: 0
1-2 : ON (Aperture correction is enabled.)
1-3 : ON (Dose adjustment filter is enabled.)
1-4 : ON (When the FPD is combined)
For other detailed setting, refer to the installation manual for the BLA-800A (2C356-056E).
3.9.2 Checking the ROM
When the TFP-1216A is not used in combination : X35113-** or X35479-**
When the TFP-1216A is used in combination : X35371-** or X35480-**
-** indicates the latest revision.
3.9.3 Checking the jumper wire
Depending on whether or not the beam limiting device reset function is provided, and whether or
not the PWB of the beam limiting device is upgraded, it may be necessary to remove the jumper
wire (between PHC8 pin 6 and U7 pin 1) and to perform pattern cutting (between PHC8 pin 6
and U7 pin 1) on the PWB of the beam limiting device. Since a communication error of the
beam limiting device may occur if unnecessary jumper wires exist or pattern cutting is not
performed, check the ROM No. of the [A04] COLLIMATOR CONT PWB of the CAS as well as
the part number of the PWB of the beam limiting device and perform the work as appropriate.
(1) When the beam limiting device reset function is not provided (The jumper wire is not
required.)
(YWP5639), the jumper wire (between PHC8 pin 6 and U7 pin 1) is not necessary. Be
sure to remove the jumper wire. If the part number of the PWB of the beam limiting device
is BSX13-0455 (YWP5831), pattern cutting (between PHC8 pin 6 and U7 pin 1) on the
back of the PWB is necessary. Be sure to perform pattern cutting.
X35223-06 or earlier (standard)

X35370-01 or earlier (when the CAS-830A + FPD1216 are combined)
(2) When the beam limiting device reset function is provided (The jumper wires are required.)
(YWP5639), the jumper wire (between PHC8 pin 6 and U7 pin 1) is necessary. Be sure to
connect the jumper wire. If the part number of the PWB of the beam limiting device is
BSX13-0455 (YWP5831), pattern cutting (between PHC8 pin 6 and U7 pin 1) on the back
of the PWB is not necessary. Be sure to confirm that pattern cutting is not performed. If
pattern cutting has already been performed, connect a jumper wire between PHC8 pin 6
and U7 pin 1 on the front side of the PWB.
X35223-07 or later (standard)

X35370-02 or later (when the CAS-830A + FPD1216 are combined)
81
No. 2J308-036EN*I
3.9.4 Check and replacement of the beam hardening filter
In image processor software version V3.42 or later, the material of the beam hardening filter of
the beam limiting device has been changed to copper (Cu) from tantalum (Ta). If the beam
limiting device is replaced due to malfunction etc., replace the new beam hardening filter with
the same type of filter that was used in the old beam limiting device.
 F1 = Cu 0.2 mm, F2 = Cu 0.3 mm, F3 = Al 1.8 mm
For the beam hardening filter replacement procedure, refer to subsection 3.8.4.
82
No. 2J308-036EN*I
3.10 CAT-850B Setting
(1) Setting jumper plugs, switches, and VRs
The settings of the jumper plugs, switches, and VRs on the TABLE CONT. PWB are listed
in the tables below. The position of each component is shown in figure 3.10-1 in the PWB
layout.
(a) Functions and factory settings of jumper plugs
Function description
Name Factory setting Function assigned
YWM2078
JP1 Short Termination is enabled. CANbus termination setting
Note: Normally, the table is the terminator of
the CANbus.
JP2 Short System reset is enabled. Enables/disables the reset function in the
system.
JP5 Short Combination of Hyper Sets the tabletop panning function.
handle Short : Enables tabletop longitudinal/lateral
panning by means of the Hyper
handle.
Note : When this setting is enabled,
tabletop longitudinal/lateral
movement cannot be released
independently.
Open : For combinations other than the
Hyper handle
JP3, 4 Open Combination of XBFG- Short : Enables TABLE UP/DOWN switch of
850B XBFG-850B
Open : Disables TABLE UP/DOWN switch
of XBFG-850B
83
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) Functions and factory settings of DIP switches/push switches
Function description
Name Factory setting Function assigned
YWM2078
S1 1 OFF Enabled Enables/disables the tabletop vertical
8-bit DIP SW movement extension function.
ON : Enables tabletop vertical movement at
a slow speed.
2 OFF Disabled Sets the operation mode while tabletop
panning is performed.
OFF : The mode is not switched to manual
operation mode during tabletop
operation.
ON : The mode is switched to manual
operation mode during tabletop
operation.
Note : If auto positioning is to be cancelled by
tabletop operation during auto
positioning, set this SW to ON.
3 OFF –
4 OFF –
5 OFF – IVR-CT layout setting
6 OFF – 5: OFF, 6: OFF, 0° layout setting
5: OFF, 6: ON, 180° layout setting
5: ON, 6: OFF, 90° layout setting
7 OFF – Dual-plane layout setting
8 OFF – 7: OFF, 8: OFF, 0° layout setting
7: OFF, 8: ON, 90° layout setting
7: ON, 8: OFF, 180° layout setting
S2 1 ON Be sure to observe Observe the factory setting for the function for
4-bit DIP SW the settings CPU operation mode switching.
2 OFF indicated on the
left.
3 OFF
4 OFF
S3 push SW – – Push switch used for adjustment during
servicing etc.
84
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(c) Functions and factory settings of rotary switches
Name Factory setting Function description

RSW1 Other than 8 Used in service adjustment mode and when monitoring is performed.
RSW2 Other than 8 Note: Service adjustment mode is entered by setting of RSW1, RSW2,
and RSW3 to 8.
RSW3 Other than 8
NOTE: Set RSW1, RSW2, and RSW3 to values other than 8 for normal use.
(d) VR functions
Name Function description

VR1 For the magnet brake for tabletop rotation; adjusts the delay time from brake OFF to brake
ON.
VR2 For the magnet brake for tabletop longitudinal movement; adjusts the delay time from
brake OFF to brake ON.
VR3 For the magnet brake for tabletop lateral movement; adjusts the delay time from brake
OFF to brake ON.
(e) LED function definitions
No. Name Definition

D8 RUN 10-Hz blinking (normal operation status)/2-Hz blinking (normal operation
disabled status)
D7 SERVICE Lit (service mode status)/extinguished (normal status)
D6 10-Hz blinking (network operation status)/2-Hz blinking (network startup
waiting status)
D5 Cyclic blinking
D4 Operation mode status (4-bit binary representation)
D3
D2
D1
85
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Figure 3.10-1 Layout of the TABLE CONT. PWB (YWM2078)
86
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(1) Setting jumper plugs, switches, and VRs
The settings of jumper plugs, switches, and VRs on the TABLE CONT.PWB are listed in the
tables below.
The position of each component is shown in figure 3.11-1 in the PWB layout.
(a) Functions and factory settings of jumper plugs
Name Factory setting Function assigned Function description

JP1 Short Combination of Hyper handle Sets the tabletop panning function.
Short: Enables tabletop
longitudinal/lateral panning
by means of the Hyper
handle.
Note: When this setting is enabled,
tabletop longitudinal/lateral
movement cannot be
released independently.
Open: For combinations other than
the Hyper handle
JP2 Short System reset is enabled. Enables/disables the reset function
in the system.
JP3 Short Termination is enabled. CANbus termination setting
Note: Normally, the table is the
terminator of the CANbus.
87
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) Functions and factory settings of DIP switches/push switches
Factory
Name Function assigned Function description
setting
1 ON Be sure to observe the Observe the factory setting for the function for CPU
S1 2 OFF settings indicated on the left. operation mode switching.
4-bit DIP SW 3 OFF
4 OFF
S5 push SW   Push switch used for adjustment during servicing etc.
1 OFF Disabled Sets the off-lock brake used for vertical movement/tilting.
OFF : Synchronized operation is not performed.
ON : Synchronized operation is performed.
2 OFF Disabled Sets the operation mode while tabletop panning is
performed.
OFF : The mode is not switched to manual operation
mode during tabletop operation.
ON : The mode is switched to manual operation mode
during tabletop operation.
S6 Note : If auto positioning is to be cancelled by tabletop
8-bit DIP SW operation during auto positioning, set this SW to
ON.
3 OFF  Bit and setting
Type of the system
4 OFF  3 4 5 6 8 7
Single Plane (CAS-830A)
5 OFF  (Factory setting)
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
6 OFF  Single Plane (CAS-810A) ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Biplane ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
7 OFF  Dual Plane (0 degree layout) ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
8 OFF  Dual Plane (90 degree layout) ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON
Dual Plane (180 degree layout) ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF
1 OFF Be sure to observe the Used for initial assembly adjustment at the factory.
settings indicated on the left. Observe this setting.
2 OFF Disabled Adjusts the horizontal initialization sensor.
OFF : When the horizontal initialization sensor is active,
the LED at the center of the longitudinal movement
SW is not lit.
ON : When the horizontal initialization sensor is active,
the LED at the center of the longitudinal movement
SW is lit.
4 OFF  Sets the operation in Harmonic tilt mode.
S7 OFF : Operation is performed in a different manner from
8-bit DIP SW that for the CAT-450B.
ON : Operation is performed in the same manner as that
for the CAT-450B.
6 OFF  Sets the tilt mode when the power is turned ON.
OFF : Independent tilt mode is set when the power is
turned ON.
ON : Harmonic tilt mode is set when the power is turned
ON.
7 OFF Used for lateral movement adjustment during servicing.
8 OFF Used for support column rotation adjustment during
servicing.
88
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(c) Functions and factory settings of rotary switches

S2 Other than 8 Used in service adjustment mode and when monitoring is
Other than 8 performed.
S3
Note : Service adjustment mode is entered by setting S2,
S4 Other than 8
S3, and S4 to 8.
NOTE: For normal use, set S2, S3, and S4 to values other than 8.
(d) VR functions

VR1 Adjusts the operating voltage of the tabletop longitudinal movement clutch.
VR2 Adjusts the delay time from brake OFF to brake ON for the tabletop lateral movement
magnet brake.
VR3 Adjusts the delay time from brake OFF to brake ON for the tabletop longitudinal
movement magnet brake.
(e) LED function definitions
No. Name Definition

D70 RUN 10-Hz blinking (normal operation status)/2-Hz blinking (normal
operation disabled status)
D71 SERVICE Lit (service mode status)/extinguished (normal status)
D72 10-Hz blinking (network operation status)/2-Hz blinking (network
startup waiting status)
D73 Cyclic blinking
D74 Operation mode status (4-bit binary representation)
D75
D76
D77
89
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Jumper plug JP1
Rotary switch S2
Rotary switch S3
Rotary switch S4
DIP SW S6
DIP SW S7
Jumper plug JP2 DIP SW S1
Push switch S5
Jumper plug JP3
Figure 3.11-1 TABLE CONT. PWB layout (YWP5751)
90
No. 2J308-036EN*I
The settings of the jumper pins, switches, and VRs on the TABLE CONT. PWB are shown in the
lists.
The PWB layout is shown in figure 3.12-2 for setting.
Table 3.12-1 Settings of jumper pins (when combined with XBFS-850B)
JP No. Function button Assigned function Setting

JP11 to 20 Setting of Function 1 Not used JP11 to 20: open
JP21 to 30 Setting of Function 2 HLC L JP22: short JP21, JP23 to 30: open
JP1 to 10 Setting of Function 3 HLC F JP1: short JP2 to 10: open
JP31 to 36 – Setting of the ground JP31, 33, 35: short JP32, 34, 36:
open
JP40 – External control of the clutch Short
Table 3.12-2 Settings of jumper pins (when combined with XBFS-880B)
Connected to
Function Factory JP No.
Assigned function (*1) Common JP No. setting TABLE CONT.
button setting assigned
PWB
HLC F  JP11;short JP33;short JP34;open CNN-B2 - 5 pin
HLC L JP12;short JP33;short JP34;open CNN-B2 - 6 pin
System controller function JP13;short JP33;short JP34;open CNN-B2 - 1 pin
CAT tabletop rotation lock release function JP14;short JP33;open JP34;short 
1 Reserved (CAT tabletop UP function) JP15;short JP33;open JP34;short 
(SW7) Reserved (CAT tabletop DOWN function) JP16;short JP33;open JP34;short 
CAT tabletop lock release function JP17;short JP33;open JP34;short 
Not used JP18;open   
HLC F JP21;short JP35;short JP36;open CNN-B2 - 5 pin
HLC L  JP22;short JP35;short JP36;open CNN-B2 - 6 pin
System controller function JP23;short JP35;short JP36;open CNN-B2 - 1 pin
HLC F JP1;short JP31;short JP32;open CNN-B2 - 5 pin
HLC L JP2;short JP31;short JP32;open CNN-B2 - 6 pin
System controller function  JP3;short JP31;short JP32;open CNN-B2 - 1 pin
(*1) Do not assign the same function to SW6 to SW8.
91
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Figure 3.12-1
Table 3.12-3 Functions and factory settings of DIP switches
Factory Function
setting assigned
Service mode setting
1 OFF Disabled OFF : Normal mode
ON : Service mode
Sets the operation mode while tabletop panning is performed.
OFF : The mode is not switched to manual operation
mode during tabletop operation.
2 OFF Disabled ON : The mode is switched to manual operation mode
during tabletop operation.
Note : If auto positioning is to be cancelled by tabletop
operation during auto positioning, set this SW to ON.
Brake release time of the support column rotation
3 OFF 10 s OFF : 10 s
ON : 30 s
DSW1 Latch the brake of the support column rotation
4 OFF Disabled OFF : Disabled
8-bit DIP SW
ON : Enabled
Automatic stop at the horizontal level: Longitudinal tilt
5 OFF Enabled OFF : Enabled
ON : Disabled
Automatic stop at the horizontal level: Lateral tilt
ON : Disabled
Control of the stroke limit in service mode
ON : Disabled
BBM initialize
ON : Enabled
92
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Factory Function
setting assigned
1 OFF  Not used
2 OFF  Not used
3 OFF  Not used
DSW2 4 OFF  Not used
8-bit DIP SW 5 OFF  Not used
6 OFF  Not used
7 OFF  Not used
8 OFF  Not used
System type
1 OFF DSW3-3, -2, -1: OFF, OFF, OFF CAS-880A SP/BP
OFF, OFF, ON CAS-830A, CAS-830B SP
OFF, ON , OFF CAS-830A DP 0
CAS-880A OFF, ON , ON CAS-830A DP 90/180
2 OFF
SP/BP
ON , OFF, OFF CAS-810A SP/DP
ON , OFF, ON Undefined (spec pending)
3 OFF ON , ON OFF Undefined (spec pending)
ON , ON , ON Undefined (spec pending)
ROI in harmonic tilt performed by the table independently
4 ON DSW3-5, -4: OFF, OFF Head (30 cm from the head end of
DSW3 Settings for the tabletop)
chest OFF, ON Neck (50 cm from the head end of the tabletop)
8-bit DIP SW radiography
5 OFF ON, OFF Chest (70 cm from the head end of the tabletop)
ON, ON Abdomen (90 cm from the head end of the tabletop)
S-DSA stop accuracy check mode
ON : Enabled
Setting for 7-segment LED display on the TABLE CONT.
PWB
7 OFF Disabled
OFF : According to RSW setting
ON : Display of axis positioning data during movement
Motor parameter writing
Not
8 OFF OFF : Writing not performed
performed
ON : Writing performed
93
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Factory Function
setting assigned
Longitudinal direction SW operation
1 OFF Standard OFF : Longitudinal direction only (standard setting)
ON : Longitudinal direction, longitudinal tilt direction
Tilt Operation setting
Double OFF : Double action (Tilt direction sw only)
2 OFF
action ON : Single action (Tilt direction swi and Interlock release
sw)
HIL-DSW Initial tilt mode setting
Normal
8-bit DIP SW 3 OFF OFF : Normal tilt mode
mode
ON : Harmonic tilt mode
4 OFF  Not used
5 OFF  Not used
6 OFF  Not used
7 OFF  Not used
8 OFF  Not used
FPGA JTAG route selection
CPU-JTAG
 OFF JTAG OFF : JTAG connector route
1-bit DIP SW
ON : CPU route
Write-enable for CPU internal flash ROM
Always
1 ON ON : Always enabled status
enabled
MODE-DSW OFF : Control enabled by CPU common I/O
4-bit DIP SW 2 OFF CPU movement mode setting
3 OFF MODE6 MODE-DSW 2, 3, 4 : OFF, ON, ON MODE 4
OFF, OFF, ON MODE 6 (usual)
4 ON
SYSRESET System reset setting from the external connector
 ON Enabled OFF : Disabled
1-bit DIP SW ON : Enabled
CAN (CAT-DFP) Communication termination setting
CAN1-SW
1-bit DIP SW
ON : Enabled
CAN (Servo) Communication termination setting
CAN2-SW
1-bit DIP SW
ON : Enabled
Longitudinal Panning operation setting for Hyper handle
T-FREE movement/ OFF : Longitudinal movement only
 ON lateral ON : Longitudinal movement/lateral movement
1-bit DIP SW movement
enabled
94
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Table 3.12-4 Functions of the push switches

PSW1  General switch for the CPU
PSW2  General switch for the DIO1 (FPGA1)
PSW3  General switch for the DIO2 (FPGA2)
RESET-SW  CPU reset switch
Table 3.12-5 Functions and factory settings of rotary switches

RSW1 3 Error code display
RSW2 0 (Not used) Latest 16 logs are displayed.
RSW3 0 Retrace and display the error code by switching RSW3.
RSW4 0 (Not used) RSW3 0: latest, 1: 2nd, 2: 3rd, ...., E: 15th, F: 16th
Table 3.12-6 VR functions

VR1 Adjusts the operating voltage of the tabletop longitudinal movement clutch.
Adjusts the delay time from brake OFF to brake ON for the tabletop longitudinal
VR2
Adjusts the delay time from brake OFF to brake ON for the tabletop lateral
VR3
95
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Table 3.12-7 LED function definitions

LED-A RED  7SEG.LED (5th digit)
LED-B RED  7SEG.LED (4th digit)
LED-C RED  7SEG.LED (3rd digit)
LED-D RED  7SEG.LED (2nd digit)
LED-E RED  7SEG.LED (1st digit)
Frimware RUN status
LED08 GRN 
Switching the light ON/OFF in each loop
Operation mode
LED07 GRN  Down mode: 2 Hz blinking
Else: 10 Hz blinking (Normal)
CANOpen0 (CH1) status (CAT-DFP)
LED06 GRN  Operaitonal: 10 Hz blinking (Normal)
Non-Operational: 2 Hz blinking
CANOpen1 (CH2) status (Servo)
LED05 GRN  Operaitonal: 10 Hz blinking (Normal)
Non-Operational: 2 Hz blinking
LED04 GRN 
LED03 GRN 
Operation mode (* Refer to table 3.12-8.)
LED02 GRN 
LED01 GRN 
CPU RUN
LED20 GRN CPU RUN
Normal: Lit
FPGA DONE
LED21 GRN FPGA DONE
Configuration mode: Lit
POWER ON RESET
LED22 RED POWER ON RESET
RESET condition: Lit
SYSTEM RESET
LED23 RED SYSTEM RESET
RESET condition: Lit
+5 VDC power supply status
LED30 YLW +5 VDC
Normal: Lit
LED31 YLW +15 VDC
Normal: Lit
-15 VDC power supply status
LED32 YLW -15 VDC
Normal: Lit
LED33 YLW +24 VDC
Normal: Lit
LED34 YLW -24 VDC
Normal: Lit
I/F +5 VDC power supply status
LED35 YLW I/F +5 VDC
Normal: Lit
LED36 YLW -9 VDC
Normal: Lit
+3.3 VDC power supply status
LED37 YLW +3.3 VDC
Normal: Lit
+2.5 VDC power supply status
LED38 YLW +2.5 VDC
Normal: Lit
96
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Table 3.12-8 LED01 to 04 Operation mode LED
Operation mode LED04 LED03 LED02 LED01

IDLE MODE_IDLE Extinguished Extinguished Extinguished Extinguished
SERVICE MODE_SRVC Extinguished Extinguished Extinguished Lit
DOWN MODE_DOWN Extinguished Extinguished Lit Extinguished
(Not used)  Extinguished Extinguished Lit Lit
OVERRIDE MODE_OVRD Extinguished Lit Extinguished Extinguished
(Not used)  Extinguished Lit Extinguished Lit
MANUAL MODE_MANU Extinguished Lit Lit Extinguished
AUTO POSITIONG MODE_AUTO Extinguished Lit Lit Lit
(Not used)  Lit Extinguished Extinguished Extinguished
Figure 3.12-2 TABLE CONT. PWB (YWM1786) layout
97
No. 2J308-036EN*I
4. CHECKS DURING THE SYSTEM POWER ON PROCEDURES
When turning ON the system power, follow the procedures below. Confirm the check points for
each step before proceeding to the next step.
4.1 Checking the Power ON/OFF Circuit Operation
Turn OFF all circuit protectors of NFB1 and NFB3 and power transformers T2 and T3 in the
system power cabinet.
(1) Turn ON the main switch (200 V system) on the power distribution board.
(2) Turn ON NFB3 (200 V system) in the system power cabinet.
(3) Confirm that the power input terminal of power transformer T1 carries the correct voltage.
(4) Press the power ON switch on the console. Confirm that CNT1 and CNT2 operate.
If the power ON switch box is used, press the power ON switch on the switch box.
(5) Confirm that the power input terminal of power transformer T3 carries the correct voltage.
(6) Confirm that when the power OFF switch on the console is pressed, CNT1 and CNT2 are
turned OFF.
If the power ON switch box is used, press the power OFF switch on the switch box and
confirm that CNT1 and CNT2 are turned OFF.
4.2 Checking the 400 V System Power
Confirm that circuit breaker "NFB1" on the power cabinet of the high-voltage generator
"XTP-8100G" is OFF.
(1) Turn ON the main switch (400 V system) on the power distribution board.
(2) Turn ON NFB1 (400 V system) in the system power cabinet.
(3) Press the power ON switch on the console.
If the power ON switch box is used, press the power ON switch on the switch box.
(4) On the terminal board of power transformer T2, confirm that each voltage between PU1, PV1,
and PW1 is 400 V.
(5) On the terminal board (far side) of power transformer T2, confirm that each voltage between
U1, V1, and W1 is 220 V.
(6) Press the power OFF switch on the console to turn OFF the power.
98
No. 2J308-036EN*I
4.3 Checking Power Distribution to Each Unit
4.3.1 Checking power distribution to the high-voltage generator
(1) Preparation before turning ON the power
Before turning ON the power, follow the procedures described below to disable the
operation of the power-related circuits.
 Disabling the X-ray tube filament heating circuit
Before setting the X-ray tube unit, do not connect connector "X1" in the upper right of
the PWB UNIT in the power cabinet. By disconnecting connector "X1", power supply to
the filament heating circuit is cut off and filament heating is not performed.
 Disabling the X-ray tube starter circuit
Before setting the X-ray tube unit, do not turn ON circuit breaker "NFB2" in the AC/DC
UNIT of the power cabinet. Turning OFF circuit breaker "NFB2" prevents inappropriate
voltage from being applied to the rotor coil of the X-ray tube unit.
 Disabling the charging circuit for the capacitor unit
Since charging of the capacitor unit will be checked at the final stage of the power
distribution check procedures, disconnect connector "X30" on the TERMINAL PWB in
the power cabinet. Disconnecting connector "X30" causes the contactor of the power
supply circuit for the capacitor unit to be released, cutting off the power to the capacitor
unit and preventing the generation of high voltage.
When the three steps above have been completed, turn ON circuit breaker "NFB1" in the
power cabinet and operate the power ON switch on the console to supply power to the
high-voltage generator.
(2) Checking power distribution
(a) When power is distributed to the high-voltage generator, check the following items.
 Confirm that the cooling fan in the upper section of the power cabinet and the fan
for the inverter unit rotate. Since the fan for the inverter unit is mounted inside the
unit, audibly check for the rotation of the fan.
 Confirm that the DC power LED on the PWB unit lights.
 Confirm that the 24 V power is active by checking LED1 on the TERMINAL PWB.
(b) Charging of the capacitor unit will then be checked. Operate the power OFF switch
on the console to turn OFF the system.
99
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Checking charging of the capacitor unit
After turning OFF the system power, reconnect connector "X30" on the TERMINAL PWB
located on the back of the AC/DC UNIT door of the power cabinet. This permits the
capacitor unit to be charged at power ON.
CAUTION: 1. Before starting work, turn OFF circuit breaker "NFB1" in the
system power cabinet in order to prevent electric shock.
2. If the system has been left unpowered for more than 2 years,
the electrolytic capacitor may have deteriorated. If this is the
case, the system must be charged without generating X-rays for
at least 1 hour after power ON (to perform voltage processing of
the electrolytic capacitor).
(a) Operate the power ON switch on the console to turn ON the power.
Confirm that LED "L2" on the TERMINAL PWB gradually becomes brighter with
charging. Charging is completed in approximately 15 seconds.
(b) Operate the power OFF switch on the console to turn OFF the power.
Confirm that the capacitor unit is discharged below 10 V in approximately 60 seconds

and that the above LED gradually becomes darker.
CAUTION: The power distribution check has now been completed. Do not
operate the fluoroscopy or radiography switch before setting after
power ON has been completed.
If the setting of the X-ray tube to be used in combination is not
appropriate, inappropriate voltage is applied to the rotor coil or
filament of the X-ray tube, possibly leading to a defect.
4.3.2 Checking power distribution to the water-cooled unit
To turn ON the water-cooled unit, turn ON NFB24 (for the front) and NFB25 (for the side) of
power transformer T2 of the system power cabinet. The check of power distribution to the
water-cooled unit must include the check of cooling water as described in the individual manual.
(See the appropriate manual for the individual unit.)
100
No. 2J308-036EN*I
4.3.3 Checking power distribution to the support unit and catheterization table
To check power distribution to the support unit, turn ON circuit breakers NFB21 (on the front)
and NFB22 (on the side) in the system power cabinet.
These circuit breakers also operate for the starter for the LM tube. The LM tube may be
defective if the power is turned OFF during startup sequence or braking. Therefore, when
power distribution to the support unit is checked, disconnect the power input connector CNN2 of
the starter for the LM tube (ST-7008).
(1) Checking the switching line voltage in the PWB/CNN UNIT
Check the voltage at the TP located above the line voltage adjustment section at the right
end on the front of the unit. If the measured voltage does not fall within the specified
range, adjust the voltage using the VR.
Voltage Range
J1 side +5 V +4.9 to +5.1 V
+12 V +11.9 V to +12.1 V
-12 V -11.9 V to -12.1 V
J2 side +24 V (I/F +24 V) +25.0 V to +25.5 V
+5 V (I/F +5 V) +4.9 V to +5.1 V
(2) Line voltage of the BLA main unit
 Checking the power of the BLA-800C/800A
Checking the 24-V input line voltage of the BLA main unit (COLLI. CONT PWB)
Confirm that the voltage at the 24-V check pin on the COLLI. CONT PWB of the BLA
main unit is 20 V or more.
 Checking the power of the BLA-900A/900C
Checking the 24-V input line voltage of the BLA main unit (EPOS PWB)
Confirm that the voltage at the 24-V check pin on the EPOS PWB of the BLA main unit
is 20 V or more.
If the measured value is not within the specified range, adjust the voltage using the VR on
the line voltage adjustment section at the right end on the front of the PWB/CNN UNIT
(VME chassis).
101
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Checking power distribution to the coolant circulator (water-cooled FPD system)

subsection 3.5.3.




(4) Filling the coolant circulator (type E) with coolant and checking the setting values
(a) Confirm that the circuit breaker on the rear of the coolant circulator is OFF.
(b) Remove the coolant supply panel from the top of the coolant circulator and then
remove the cap from the coolant supply tank.

102
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(c) Add coolant up to the "MAX" level of the coolant volume check indicator (refer to the
figure below).
(d) Turn ON the power of the system.
(e) Turn ON the circuit breaker on the rear of the coolant circulator.
(f) When the coolant circulator starts operating, the coolant level drops. Add more
coolant.
(g) When the coolant level has stabilized, move the arm of the support unit to the angles
shown in the table below to purge air from the coolant hoses. Movement for about 5
minutes is sufficient for each support unit.
<CAS-820B>
LAO
0° 120°
CAU, CRA 0°  
<CAS-830A, CAS-830B>
RAO LAO
180° 90° 0° 90°
90°    
CAU
0°    
CRA 50°    
<CAS-880A>
RAO LAO
120° 90° 0° 90°
90°    
CAU
0°    
CRA 50°    
103
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(h) When the coolant level has stabilized, add coolant up to the MAX level.
(i) Remount the cap of the tank and the coolant supply panel.
(j) Check the coolant setting temperature. Press the [TEMP. SET] button shown in the
figure below to display the setting temperature. When the setting temperature is
displayed on the LED screen of the display panel instead of the current temperature,
confirm that the displayed temperature is the same as the setting temperature shown
in the table below.
If the displayed temperature differs from the above, press the [UP] or [DOWN] button
while holding down the [TEMP. SET] button to set the appropriate temperature
according to the system.
Setting temperature for the coolant circulator
TFP-800A/A1 TFP-1216A TFP-1200A

CAS-820B Single-type heat exchanger 26°C
CAS-830A, Single-type heat exchenger 26°C 26°C
CAS-830B Double-type heat exchanger 26°C
CAS-880A Single-type heat exchanger 26°C 26°C
Double-type heat exchanger 26°C
(k) Confirm that the upper-limit temperature of the coolant is 35.0°C. The upper-limit
temperature is displayed by pressing the [HI. TEMP. ALARM] button shown in the
figure above. If the displayed temperature is not 35.0°C, press the [UP] or [DOWN]
button while holding down the [HI. TEMP. ALARM] button to adjust the setting
temperature to 35.0°C.
(l) Confirm that the lower-limit temperature of the coolant is 5.0°C. The lower-limit
temperature is displayed by pressing the [LOW. TEMP. ALARM] button shown in the
figure above. If the displayed temperature is not 5.0°C, press the [UP] or [DOWN]
button while holding down the [LOW. TEMP. ALARM] button to adjust the setting
temperature to 5.0°C.
104
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(m) Confirm that the pressure is 0.7 MP or less.
4.3.4 Checking power distribution to the operation room monitor and other
To supply 100 VAC in the operation room, turn ON NFB33 of power transformer T3 of the
system power cabinet.
4.3.5 Checking power distribution to the examination room monitor
To supply 100 VAC power for the monitor in the examination room, turn ON NFB32 of power
transformer T3 of the system power cabinet. When this circuit protector is turned ON, the fan in
the ceiling of the system power cabinet rotates.
4.3.6 DFP-8000A continuity check
Confirm that there is no abnormality in the cable connection inside/outside the DFP-8000A
referring to the installation manual (2C308-087EN).
Check the voltage of the DC power at the power terminals of the CPCI chassis. If any of the
voltages are outside the acceptable ranges, readjust them.
Adjust the power so that the voltages at the power terminals of the CPCI chassis are within the
following ranges.
Power supply Range
<1> PS1, +3.3 VDC +3.36 V to +3.44 V (target: 3.40 V)
<2> PS2, +5 VDC +5.05 V to +5.15 V (target: 5.10 V)
<3> PS3, +12 VDC +11.90 V to +12.10 V (target: 12.00 V)
<4> PS4, -12 VDC -11.90 V to -12.10 V (target: -12.00 V)
105
No. 2J308-036EN*I
4.3.7 LEDs of the DFP-8000A
(1) Power PC
For BSX17-0999A
BFL : Orange, Board Failure

Lights when the power is turned ON. After the board is started,
the LED goes out.
If it does not go out, it indicates an error.
CPU : Green, CPU Activity

Lights when the CPU bus is busy.
The LED goes out when the CPU is ready.
HOT SWAP STATUS : Blue (lower section of the front panel as seen from the front of the
board)
Indicates that removing the PWB at the time of PWB replacement
(hot swap function) is permitted while the power is ON.
(In the system, PWB replacement while the power is ON is not
performed.)
If this LED continues to light, an abnormality of the board or
contact failure with the CPCI chassis is likely.
For BSX17-xxxx
CPU STATUS 1 : Green (with the PWB standing, upper right of the SIO port of the
panel)
Indicates the operating status of the CPU. Refer to the table
below for details.
CPU STATUS 2 : Yellow (with the PWB standing, lower right of the SIO port of the
panel)
Indicates the operating status of the CPU. Refer to the table
below for details.
If CPU STATUS 2 goes out and lights repeatedly while CPU
STATUS 1 lights, it is possible that a shortage of power from the
CompactPCI bus is causing intermittent reset operation.
CPU STATUS 1 CPU STATUS 2

Power OFF state Not lit Not lit
During CPU reset processing Lit Lit
Or during initialization
CPU in normal operation Lit Not lit
HOT SWAP STATUS : Blue (with the PWB standing, lower left of the PMC slot of the
panel)
Indicates that removal of the PWB is permitted when replacing
the PWB while the power is ON (Hot Swap function).
(Replacement of the PWB while the power is ON is not
performed in the main system.)
If this LED lights, connection failure with CPCI Chassis of the
PWB can be considered.
ETHERNET ACTIVITY: Yellow (upper right of the Ethernet port of the panel with the PWB
standing)
Lights during Ethernet transmission
106
No. 2J308-036EN*I
ETHERNET LINK : Green (with the PWB standing, lower right of the Ethernet port of
the panel)
Lights when Ethernet linkage is established.
CPU STATUS 1
CPU STATUS 2
ETHERNET ACTIVITY
ETHERNET LINK
HOT SWAP STATUS
(2) ADIF
The following table shows the LED lighting status after inserting the ADIF into the slot and
turning the power ON.
CAUTION: If boards other than the Server PC, Bridge board, and the Power PC are inserted,
the lighting status may differ.
107
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Details of the LED display
(a) For PX17-42291
Status when the power is turned

LED No. Silk Description of the LED
ON
D1 5V Lit: 5 V ON, Not lit: 5 V OFF Green
D2 3.3 V Lit: 3.3 V ON, Not lit: 3.3 V OFF Green
D3 ABC_DONE Lit: config error, Not lit: config OK Lights immediately after the system
is booted (red)  Goes out.
D4 IF_DONE Lit: config error, Not lit: config OK Lights immediately after the system
D5 SLOADA Lit: LoadA is input. Green
D6 RMK Lit: RMK is input. Not lit
D7 ADDINT Lit: ADDINT is input. Not lit
D8 RST Lit: RST is input. Lights immediately after the system
D9 SHUTDOWN Lit: Shutdown is being performed. Not lit
D10 BMK Lit: BMK is input. Not lit
D11 FFONEN Lit: F_FON_EN is active. Not lit
D12 LRDYEN Lit: L_RDY_EN is active. Not lit
D13 LFONEN Lit: L_FON_EN is active. Not lit
D14 FRDYEN Lit: F_RDY_EN is active. Not lit
D15 TEST_NOR Lit: Normal image mode, Green
Not lit: Test mode
D16 FFEN Lit: F_FEN is active. Not lit
D17 LFEN Lit: L_FEN is active. Not lit
D31 FRXCOM# Lit: RXCOM of the frontal side is active Not lit
D32 LRXCOM# Lit: RXCOM of the lateral side is active Not lit
D3, D4, and D8 light immediately after the power is turned ON and then go out.
Configuration
D3: When the "H" (LED OFF) data cannot be received after "L" (LED ON) is terminated
during configuration, or when configuration does not operate normally, a red "L" LED
lights.
during configuration, or when configuration is not performed normally, a red "L" LED
lights.
Resetting
D8: A red LED lights momentarily when the power is turned ON.
108
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) For PX17-45526
Status when the power is turned

LED No. Silk Description of the LED
ON
D33 1.2 V Lit: 1.2 V ON, Not lit: 1.2 V OFF Yellow
5V Lit: 5 V ON, Not lit: 5 V OFF Yellow
D2 3.3 V Lit: 3.3 V ON, Not lit: 3.3 V OFF Yellow
D3 M_DONE Lit: Configuration error Lit immediately after the system is
Not lit: Configuration succeeded booted (red)  Goes out.
D4 CF_DONE Lit: Configuration error Lit immediately after the system is
Not lit: Configuration succeeded booted (red)  Goes out.
D5 SLDA# Lit: Load A input Green
D6 RMK# Lit: RMK input Not lit
D7 ADINT# Lit: ADDINT input Not lit
D8 RST# Lit: RST input Lit immediately after the system is
booted (red)  Goes out.
D9 SHTDN# Lit: Shutdown processing in progress Not lit
D10 BMK# Lit: BMK input Not lit
D11 FFON# Lit: F_FON_EN active Not lit
D12 LRDY# Lit: L_RDY_EN active Not lit
D13 LFON# Lit: L_FON_EN active Not lit
D14 FRDY# Lit: F_RDY_EN active Not lit
D15 TEST_NOR Lit: Normal image mode Green
Not lit: Test mode
D16 F_FEN Lit: F_FEN active Not lit
D17 L_FEN Lit: L_FEN active Not lit
D31 FRXCM# Lit: F system RX COM output Not lit
D32 LRXCM# Lit: L system RX COM output Not lit
D3, D4, and D8 light immediately after the power is turned ON and then go out.
Configuration
during configuration, or when configuration does not operate normally, a red "L" LED
lights.
during configuration, or when configuration is not performed normally, a red "L" LED
lights.
Resetting
D8: A red LED lights momentarily when the power is turned ON.
109
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Proc (The Nos. and meanings of some LEDs differ between PX17-41801 and
PX17-41854.)
LED No.
PX17- PX17- LED color LED function Details
41801 41854
1 7 Green EDGE function output status Status in which output to the video bus is
performed by each image processing function
2 1 Yellow
- Green ON = Status in which effective data is
3 8 Green WARP function output status
output to the bus
4 2 Yellow
- Yellow ON = Status in which output to the
5 — Green SCATTER function output bus by each image processing
status function is halted.
ON when downloading of the
6 — Yellow
FPGA data is complete.
7 10 Green SUBTRACTION function
- None = Status in which output to the
output status
8 4 Yellow bus by each function is not
active.
9 11 Green PIXEL SHIFT function
output status These LED statuses are not defined until the
FPGA data is downloaded.
10 5 Yellow
11 12 Green AVERAGING function output
status
12 6 Yellow
13 13 Red ERROR ON when a Proc board internal error occurs
* Image size error
* Overflow of a memory connected to the input
video bus
* Parity error of the input data
14 14 Green User LED 1 LED display controlled by the software (not used
at present)
15 15 Green User LED 2
The LED display is also affected by the following
procedures.
- When the power is ON or reset: All OFF
18 18 Green User LED 5 - When access to the following internal PLD is
19 19 Green User LED 6 performed: OFF
20 20 Green User LED 7 * When the GPGA data is being downloaded
21 21 Green User LED 8 * When a chip connected to the video bus is
being configured
* When reading/writing is performed for
these LEDs via the software
22 23 Green +2.5-V power indicator When each power supply is normal: ON
— 9 Green +3.3-V power indicator When a power supply is abnormal (power is not
supplied or the power supply is abnormal): OFF
— 3 Green +5.0-V power indicator
24 22 Red FPGA download status The FPGA download status is shown.
- When the FPGA is not downloaded: ON
- When the FPGA has been downloaded
normally: OFF
— 24 Red Temperature alarm Alarm status
- The alarm threshold for the FPGA die
temperature has been crossed: ON
- Normal status: OFF
* When the power is ON, LEDs No. 22 to No. 24 are ON
110
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(4) Master
(a) For PX17-38873 and PX17-40540
LED No.
Power ON
PX17- PX17- LED color Function
status
38873 40540
LED1-4 LED1-4 Green OFF LED display controlled by the software (not used at present)
LED5-8 LED5-8 Green LED5-8 = ON Status related to the fiber channel for the RAID (not defined yet)
LED9 LED9 Yellow OFF When the FPGA is initialized: ON
Cases other than the above: OFF
LED10 LED10 Yellow ON The FPGA download status is shown.
* When the FPGA is not downloaded : ON
* When the FPGA has been downloaded normally : OFF
LED11 LED11 Red ON When the board is reset : ON
Cases other than the above : OFF
LED12 — Green ON When the +2.5-V power indicator is normal : ON
When the power supply is abnormal : OFF
(power is not supplied or the power supply is abnormal)
LED13 LED13 Green ON When the +3.3-V power indicator is normal : ON
When the power supply is abnormal
(power is not supplied or the power supply is abnormal) : OFF
LED14 LED12 Green ON When the +5-V power indicator is normal : ON
When the power supply is abnormal : OFF
(power is not supplied or the power supply is abnormal)
* The meanings of some LEDs differ between PX17-38873 and PX17-40540.
(b) PX17-41842 and PX17-45200
The board status is indicated using 13 LEDs.
Power-up
LED Color Function
State*
LED0-3 Green OFF Undefined, programmable by software via the Board_LED
register
LED4-5 Green OFF Blinks in short cycles if the PCI controller operates normally
after downloading of the FPGA.
LED6-7 Green OFF Blinks in long cycles if operation is normal after
downloading of the FPGA.
LED8 Yellow OFF ON = FPGA initialization in progress
OFF = Before or after initialization
LED9 Yellow ON ON = FPGA loading not completed
LED10 Red ON ON = Board reset
LED11 Green ON ON = F1 fuse OK / 5-V power indicator
LED12 Green ON ON = 3.3-V power indicator
* When power is applied, all the LEDs should light momentarily and then settle to the
indicated power-up state.
LED8 blinks momentarily during FPGA initialization, indicating that the FPGAs are
clearing their program memory. Once the FPGAs are programmed correctly, LED8 and
LED9 should be in the unlit state.
111
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(5) SYSTEM-IF
Description of the lit LEDs
No. Description of the lit LEDs

D52 RMK detection is OK.
D53 The X-ray exposure SW in the examination room is NG.
D54 The X-ray exposure SW in the control room is NG.
D55 Humidity error
D56 Thermal fuse error
D57 L-side exposure display
D58 F-side exposure display
D59 Board Ready OK.
D71 F-side radiography preparation signal
D72 F-side fluoroscopic signal
D73 F-side actual exposure signal
D74 L-side radiography preparation signal
D75 L-side fluoroscopic signal
D76 L-side actual exposure signal
Additional LEDs of PX17-45589

D92 FPGA program error
D49 PWB reset signal
D94 MELODY IC error
D93 Debug error LED (normally out)
D39 5.0 V being supplied
D90 Blinks when FPGA is active
D48 Debug LED (normally out)
112
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(6) VSW-SM
Description of the lit LEDs

D1 There is a CNN1 VIDEO signal input.
D4 There is a color monitor VIDEO signal output.
D5 There is a B/W monitor (Live) VIDEO signal output.
D6 There is a B/W monitor (Ref) VIDEO signal output.
D7 There is an additional monitor VIDEO signal output.
D8 Color monitor output selection: CNN1
D9 Color monitor output selection: Live
D10 Color monitor output selection: Ref
D11 B/W monitor (Live) output selection: CNN2
D12 B/W monitor (Live) output selection: BNC 22
D13 Additional monitor output selection: Live
D14 Additional monitor output selection: Ref
D15 Additional monitor output selection: EXT1
D16 Additional monitor output selection: EXT2
D17 When the power is turned ON
(7) RAID
Refer to subsection 29.1.1 "RAID".
113
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(8) VSW-ESD (XIDF-ESD801)
Meanings of the LEDs
(a) For PX17-41076*E (PWB: YWM1215*B) or earlier
No. Meaning of the LED when it is lit

D1 The power is turned ON.
D2 The video signal is input to SIG IN-1 (V-SYNC of the video signal is present).
D8 The video signal is output (V-SYNC of the video signal is present).
D9, D10, D11 Selection of the video signal from the DFP-8000D
D9: OFF, D10: OFF, D11: OFF = SIG IN1 is selected.
D9: ON, D10: OFF, D11: OFF = SIG IN2 is selected.
D9: OFF, D10: ON, D11: OFF = SIG IN3 is selected.
D9: ON, D10: ON, D11: OFF = SIG IN4 is selected.
D9: OFF, D10: OFF, D11: ON = SIG IN5 is selected.
D9: ON, D10: OFF, D11: ON = SIG IN6 is selected.
(b) For PX17-41076*F (PWB: YWM1402) or later
No. Meaning of the LED when it is lit

D1 The power is turned ON.
D8 The video signal is output (V-SYNC of the video signal is present).
D9, D10, D11 Selection of the video signal from the DFP-8000D
D9: OFF, D10: OFF, D11: OFF = SIG IN1 is selected.
D9: ON, D10: OFF, D11: OFF = SIG IN2 is selected.
D9: OFF, D10: ON, D11: OFF = SIG IN3 is selected.
D9: ON, D10: ON, D11: OFF = SIG IN4 is selected.
D9: OFF, D10: OFF, D11: ON = SIG IN5 is selected.
D9: ON, D10: OFF, D11: ON = SIG IN6 is selected.
D38 FPGA configuration error
114
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(9) V-IF
D12 D8 D17 D6 D4 D2 D15 D10 D18 D5
P_PARE
HEALTH
FLASHH
P_RDY
RESET
D-512
BKUP
ERR2
ACT
Top end of
IN
the board
D9 D13 D16 D7 D3 D26 D14 D11 D19 D20
EXPOSE
CP_RST
U-SYNC
START
DONE
ERR1
ERR3
OUT
MINI
INT
Board edge
D21 D22
PS 1.5 V
3.3 V
D23 D1
Bottom end
2.5 V
of the board
5V
Board edge
Status at the time of

LED No. Name Indication
system startup
D12 (green) ACT Blinks when the clock on the CP is operating. Blinking
D9 (green) START Lights when the V-IF board is activated. OFF
D8 (green) IN Lights with input FEN. Blinking
D13 (green) OUT Lights with output FEN. OFF
D17 (green) P_RDY Lights when Panel Ready is received. ON
D16 (green) EXPOSE Lights when Expose ok is received. Blinking
D6 (green) P_PARE Lights when the Pre-Pare command is output. Depends on the system status
D7 (green) INT Lights when the V-IF board is interrupted. OFF
D4 (green) FLASH Lights during free-running Flashing. Depends on the system status
D3 (green) U-SYNC Lights when User Sync is output. Blinking
D2 (green) D-512 Lights when 512 signals are output. Depends on the system status
D26 (green) MINI Lights when the system is in minimized Depends on the system status
operation mode.
D15 (red) RESET Lights when the board is reset. OFF
D14 (red) DONE Not lit when the FPGA is configured correctly. OFF
D10 (red) Healty Lights when Panel Healthy is deasserted. OFF
D11 (red) CP_RST Lights when the reset command is OFF
transmitted.
D18 (red) BACK UP Lights when the system is in backup mode. OFF
115
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Status at the time of

LED No. Name Indication
system startup
D19 (red) ERR1 Not used OFF
D21 (orange) PS1.5 V Lights when the 5-V power for the 1.5-V ON
power supply is supplied.
This LED is not provided for PX17-41797
Gr.1.
D23 (orange) 5 V Lights when 5-V power is supplied. ON
D22 (orange) 3.3 V Lights when 3.3-V power is supplied. ON
D1 (orange) 2.5 V Lights when 2.5-V power is supplied. ON
(10) SNRF2
(a) PX17-44911
LED layout
G9
G10
G11
G12
R4
R5
R6
R7
S2
G0
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
G6
G7
G12
G13
G14
G15
P_RESET
RESET
DONE0
DONE1
TEMP
R1
R2
R3
R8
R9
R10
R11
Edge of the PWB
CN4 CN1
2.5 V
3.3 V
5.0 V
1.0 V
1.2 V
1.8 V
Edge of
the PWB
116
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Description of the LED display
Lighting status
Initial status
LED Silk-screen immediately
Color Function (after
No. marking after the power
configuration)
is turned ON
D1 Red P_RESET Lit : During resetting of PCI-BUS Lit Not lit
Not lit : Resetting not performed
D2 Red RESET Lit : During resetting of the PWB Lit Not lit
Not lit : Resetting not performed
D3 Red DONE0 Lit : Configuration of MAIN and ROUTER- Lit Lit
FPGA not completed
Not lit : Configuration of MAIN and ROUTER-
FPGA completed
D4 Red DONE1 Lit : Configuration of CONFIG-FPGA not Not lit Not lit
completed
Not lit : Configuration of CONFIG-FPGA
completed
D5 Red TEMP Lit : Temperature error of MAIN-FPGA Not lit Not lit
(initial value 85°C)
Not lit : MAIN-FPGA temperature normal
D6 Red R1 DDR2 No. 0 initialization error Not lit Not lit
D9 Red R4 Not lit Not lit
(Far side)
(Far side)
(Far side)
(Far side)
D17 Green G0 Blinking : PWB 35 MHz in normal status Lit Not lit
Lit or not lit : PWB 35 MHz in abnormal status
D18 Green G1 Blinking : VCLK 35 MHz in normal status Lit Not lit
Lit or not lit : VCLK 35 MHz in abnormal status
D19 Green G2 Lit : Data being received from ADIF on the Lit Lit
F side
D20 Green G3 Lit : Data being received from ADIF on the Not lit Not lit
L side
D21 Green G4 Lit : SNRF block data being received Not lit Not lit
D22 Green G5 Lit : PRE-PROC block data being received Not lit Not lit
D23 Green G6 Lit : SNRF2 started up Not lit Not lit
D24 Green G7 Lit : PCI BLAST_N asserted Not lit Not lit
D25 Green G8 Blinking : ADIF-F40 MHz in normal status Not lit Not lit
(Far side) Lit or not lit : ADIF-F40 MHz in abnormal status
D26 Green G9 Blinking : ADIF-L40 MHz in normal status Not lit Not lit
(Far side) Lit or not lit : ADIF-L40 MHz in abnormal status
D27 Green G10 Not used Not lit Not lit
(Far side)
117
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Lighting status
Initial status
LED Silk-screen immediately
Color Function (after
No. marking after the power
configuration)
is turned ON
(Far side)
D29 Green G12 Blinking : PWB 35 MHz in normal status Not lit Not lit
Lit or not lit : PWB 35 MHz in abnormal status
D30 Green G13 Blinking : VCLK 35 MHz in normal status Not lit Not lit
Lit or not lit : VCLK 35 MHz in abnormal status
D32 Green G15 Lit : Router in operation (data being received Not lit Not lit
from MAIN)
D37 Orange 1V Lit : 1.0 V ON Lit Lit
Not lit : 1.0 V OFF
D38 Orange 1.2 V Lit : 1.2 V ON Lit Lit
Not lit : 1.2 V OFF
Not lit : 1.8 V OFF
Not lit : 2.5 V OFF
Not lit : 3.3 V OFF
D34 Orange 5V Lit : 5 V ON Lit Lit
Not lit : 5 V OFF
* "Initial status" is the status 20 seconds after the power is turned ON.
118
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(11) Server PC
Power LED Lights (green) when the power is ON.

Not lit when the power is OFF.
Power LED
Alarm LED Lights (orange) when an error occurs in POST.

Alarm LED
Not lit when the system operates normally.
(12) Bridge card and bridge board
Bridge card
Link status LED

Display Status
Not lit S erial link not synchronized
Blink ing Serial link synchronized, but communication not established
Li t Communication established with serial link
Normal state: All LEDs lit
Bridge board
Link status LED

Display Status
Not lit S erial link not synchronized
Blink ing Serial link synchronized, but communication not established
Li t Communication established with serial link
Hot-swap status LED

Display Status
Not lit Pullout or insertion of the PWB is not permitted.
Lights Pullout and insertion of the PWB is permitted
Normal state: All LEDs lit
119
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(13) Mirroring unit
Drive 1 LED
(orange) Drive 1
Drive 1 LED Power LED (green)

(green)
Access LED (green)

Drive 2 LED
(orange)
Access LED (orange)
Drive 2
Drive 2 LED
(green)
Descriptions of the LED displays
LED Colors of the LEDs Description

Power LED Green (lit) The power is turned ON.
Access LED Green (lit) Access from the host is in progress.
Orange (blink) The system is halted.
Drive LED Green (lit) Access to the drive is in progress.
Orange (lit) The drive is defective.
Orange (blink) Data reconstruction is in progress. (For details,
refer to the following table.)
Details of the access LEDs and drive LEDs
Operation mode Access LED LEDs of drives 1 and 2

During startup at power ON The green LED is lit. The green LED and orange
LED are lit.
During normal operation The green LED is lit during The green LED is lit during
access. access.
Data reconstruction The green LED is lit during The green LED is lit during
(rebuilding) is in progress. access. access.
Copy destination: The
orange LED blinks.
Degraded status The green LED is lit during The green LED is lit during
(Operation is performed on access. access.
one disk only.) Defective drive: The orange
LED is lit.
120
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Normal LED display statuses

Power LED Green Lit.
Access LED Green Lit when access from the host is in progress.
Orange Not lit.
Drive LED Green Lit when access to the drive is in progress.
Orange Not lit (except during startup immediately after
power is turned ON).
Failure diagnosis
Power LED Access LED Drive LED Status of the mirroring unit and
corrective actions
Not lit. - - Check the power supply status.
If the error cannot be released, the
mirroring unit is defective.
Replace the mirroring unit.
The green LED The orange - The system is halted.
is lit. LED blinks. Both of the drive units are
defective, or the mirroring unit is
defective.
Replace the drive units with those
for backup, or replace the
mirroring unit.
The green LED - The orange The drive unit is defective.
is lit. LED is lit. Replace the drive unit whose drive
LED is lit.
Even though the drive unit is

normal, note that both green and
orange drive LEDs are lit
immediately after the power is
turned ON.
(14) VIDEO CARD
Front of the front panel

Power LED Green (lit) The power is turned ON.
* This LED does not light immediately after the power is turned ON; it lights after the
system is started up.
121
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(15) USB Extender
(a) LEX
<1>
<2>
<3> <4>
No. LED Colors of the LED Description

1 Power LED Blue (lit) Lit when power is supplied.
Not lit when no power is supplied.
2 Host LED Green (lit) Lit when the host computer is
detected and connected to LEX.
3 Link LED of RJ45 Green (lit) Indicates the status of connectivity
port between LEX and REX.
Lit on both LEX and REX when the
link between the units is established.
Not lit when there is no link between
LEX and REX.
4 Activity LED of Amber (lit) Indicates RJ45 port activity.
RJ45 port Blinks intermittently on LEX and
REX.
122
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) REX
<3> <4>
<5>
<1> <2>
No. LED Colors of the LED Description

1 Power LED Blue (lit) Lit when power is supplied.
Not lit when no power is supplied.
2 Host LED Green (lit) Lit when the host computer is
detected and connected to REX.
3 Link LED of RJ45 Green (lit) Indicates the status of connectivity
port between LEX and REX.
Lit on both LEX and REX when the
link between the units is established.
Not lit when there is no link between
LEX and REX.
4 Activity LED of Amber (lit) Indicates RJ45 port activity.
RJ45 port Blinks intermittently on LEX and
REX.
5 Device port Green (lit) Lit when a USB device is detected.
123
No. 2J308-036EN*I
4.3.8 Checking the system BIOS in the server PC
(1) Checking/setting the system BIOS
(a) Turn ON the power.
(b) Press the [F2] key while the message "Press <F2> to enter SETUP" is displayed in
the lower part of the window a few seconds after the power is turned ON.
The BIOS setting window opens.
Confirm that the system time (current time) and system date (current date) are
correct. If necessary, perform setting as follows.
System BIOS main menu
Enter the system time (current time) and system date (current date). Use the arrows
[] [] to move the cursor.
<1> Move the cursor to "System Time" and enter the hour, minute, and second in
order. Press the [Enter] key to move to the next data entry field (hour  minute
 second).
<2> Move the cursor to "System Date" and enter the month, day, and year in order.
Press the [Enter] key to move to the next data entry field (month  day  year).
124
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(c) Save the BIOS settings and close the BIOS setting window.
When the [F10] key is pressed, the following message is displayed.

Select [Yes] and press the [Enter] key.
Setup Configuration
Save Configuration changes and exit now?
(d) The system is restarted automatically. Press the [F2] key while the message "Press
<F2> to enter SETUP" is displayed in the lower part of the window a few seconds
after the power is turned ON. When the BIOS setting window opens, turn OFF the
power of the system.
4.3.9 Checking power distribution to the starter for the LM tube
The LM tube may be defective if the power is turned OFF during startup sequence or braking;
therefore, it is recommended that the LM tube be checked for power distribution at the final
stage.
125
No. 2J308-036EN*I
4.4 Emergency Operation Check
The emergency switches located on the main console (or on the power ON switch box when
XIDF-MCC801 is used in combination), tableside console, table control panel, C-arm body
(CAS-830A, CAS-830B, and CAS-880A), and tilting table handswitch (CAT-870B only) must shut
down the drive power to the support unit and catheterization table.
(1) The support unit is checked in the control unit.
(a) The 7-segment LED on the servo amplifier, which normally appears as , changes to .
(b) The display section of the inverter (support units other than the CAS-810A) goes out.
(2) The catheterization table is checked in the table body.
(a) The display section of the inverter (CAT-850B, 860B) goes out.
(b) The 7-segment LED on the servo amplifier (CAT-870B, 880B), which normally appears
as , changes to .
To recover after the operation check has been completed, press the power reset switch on the
table control panel. The power will be turned ON again.
4.5 Communication Check Between the DFP-8000A and the Coolant Circulator
If the DFP-8000A detects an error in the coolant circulator, perform the communication check as
follows to confirm that an error is detected. Check whether the communication cable is properly
connected between the DFP-8000A and the coolant circulator as described in the installation
manual (2C308-087EN) to determine the error in the coolant circulator.
<<For SP>>
(1) Start up the DFP-8000A and the coolant circulator.
(2) Turn OFF the switch on the rear of the connected coolant circulator.
(3) Wait for about 1 minute and confirm that the following message is displayed in the message
display area of the system monitor.
"(FPD chiller) operation abnormal. Call service."
(4) Turn ON the switch on the rear of the connected coolant circulator.
(5) Confirm that the message displayed in the message display area of the system monitor is
cleared.
126
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<<For BP>>
If the coolant circulator is connected to either the F side or L side, perform the following procedure
only for the side to which the coolant circulator is connected.
(2) To check communication with the F side, turn OFF the switch on the rear of the coolant
circulator connected to the FPD of the F side.
"[F] (FPD chiller) operation abnormal. Call service."
(4) Turn ON the switch on the rear of the coolant circulator connected to the FPD of the F side.
cleared.
(6) To check communication with the L side, turn OFF the switch on the rear of the coolant
circulator connected to the FPD of the L side.
"[L] (FPD chiller) operation abnormal. Call service."
(8) Turn ON the switch on the rear of the coolant circulator connected to the FPD of the L side.
cleared.
<<For DP>>
If the coolant circulator is connected to either TUBE1 or TUBE2, perform the following procedure
for only the side to which the coolant circulator is connected.
(2) To check communication with TUBE1, turn OFF the switch on the rear of the coolant
circulator connected to the FPD of TUBE1.
"(Tube1 FPD chiller) operation abnormal. Call service."
(4) Turn ON the switch on the rear of the coolant circulator connected to the FPD of TUBE1.
cleared.
(6) To check communication with TUBE2, turn OFF the switch on the rear of the coolant
circulator connected to the FPD of TUBE2.
"(Tube2 FPD chiller) operation abnormal. Call service."
(8) Turn ON the switch on the rear of the coolant circulator connected to the FPD of TUBE2.
127
No. 2J308-036EN*I
cleared.
If the communication check has failed:
<<If an error is not displayed when the switch is turned OFF>>
It is likely that the software has not been set for communication with the coolant circulator.
Perform setting referring to subsection 29.33 "Setting Communication with the Coolant Circulator".
<<If an error for a coolant circulator other than the one tested is displayed when the switch is
turned OFF>>
Incorrect connection of the communication cable is likely. Check the cable connection referring to
the installation manual (2C308-087EN) and the general connection diagrams (2K308-035EN).
<<If the error message is not cleared when the switch is turned ON>>
 Incorrect connection of the communication cable is likely. Check the cable connection referring
to the installation manual (2C308-087EN) and the general connection diagrams (2K308-035EN).
 Improper software setting for communication with the coolant circulator is likely. Perform setting
referring to subsection 29.33 "Setting Communication with the Coolant Circulator".
 Incorrect setting of the communication port is likely. Check the port settings referring to
<<Checking the serial port settings>> in subsection 5.1.11 "USB serial converter replacement
procedure" of the service manual (2D308-016EN).
 Take appropriate measures referring to the error message table in subsection 3.3.6 of the
service manual (2D308-016EN).
128
No. 2J308-036EN*I
5. SYSTEM SETTINGS
5.1 Preparation
Before performing system setting, confirm that the connection between all systems is completed
and that the power is turned ON. If there are any abnormalities in the components or in the
communication between the components, the setting performed in this section may not be applied
correctly.
5.2.1 Setting function
The settings for the DFP-8000A are roughly categorized into the following five groups.
This subsection describes the functions of the Config. tab.
Service main menu
Config. tab
Site Description Display of the site information
System Management Basic system settings (time, language, etc.)
System System settings
Character set Language setting for DICOM communication
Directories Work folder setting
3D AE title setting for the 3D workstation
MWM Presets MWM editing enabled/disabled setting
DICOM Management DICOM settings (Refer to section 17.)
Security Management Network settings
Service Management Service settings
Adjustment Submenus for adjustment
Utils tab
Command Line Command line function
Software Upgrade Software upgrading
Remote Console Management Remote console settings
Beam Filter Setup Utility Beam compensation filter settings
Fluoro Control Parameter Fluoroscopic parameter settings
Radiography Control
Parameter Radiographic parameter settings
129
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Maint. tab
Adjustment Submenus for adjustment
System Test System self-diagnosis
System Status Display and resetting of system degradation level
information
Data Storage System disk/image disk diagnosis
Backup/Restore Backup/restoration of data
FMI Record FMI implementation record
Memo Memo function
Service Tool (*V4.50 or later) Software Upgrading
Diag. tab
System Test System self-diagnosis
Data Storage System disk/image disk diagnosis
RT Log RT log and command history
DICOM Network Analysis DICOM communication analysis
Log Viewer Various log viewers
Logs tab
RT Log RT log and command history
Log Viewer Various log viewers
Log Settings Log storage settings
130
No. 2J308-036EN*I
5.2.2 Starting the setting screen and applying the changed data
(1) Turn ON the power of the Infinix-i series system.
(2) Select the [Utility] tab on the screen and press the [Service] button.
(3) To apply the changed data, the system must be restarted twice.
Perform the operations described below after entry of the data.
(a) System power supply OFF (shutdown processing)
(b) System power supply ON for restart
(c) System power supply OFF (shutdown processing)
(d) System power supply ON for restart
In addition, the items shown below need to be checked after the data is applied.
Be sure to perform operational checks for each item.
 Config. - System: CAS setting Room Flex
Distance between the tabletop rotation center and the right wall
(right side relative to the patient)
Distance between the tabletop rotation center and the left wall
Distance between the tabletop rotation center and the head-end wall
131
No. 2J308-036EN*I
5.2.3 Service login screen
(1) Purpose
To have the access key entered (to prevent unauthorized access and changes to the
settings by the user).
(2) Display window
(3) Display items
No. Item name Item descriptions

1 Entry field Enter the password.
2 [OK] The system can proceed to the next step if the key has been
entered correctly.
3 [Cancel] Closes the dialog
132
No. 2J308-036EN*I
5.2.4 Service home window
(1) Purpose
The basic system information is displayed as a list (editing is not possible).
To open another service window, click the corresponding tab.
(2) Display window
133
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Display items
(a) Service home window
No. Item name Description

1 Basic Info
System Name  System name
Model Name  Model name
Serial Number  Serial number of the system
Site ID  Site ID
Hospital Name  Name of the facility
Department  Department name
IP Address  IP address
For automatic acquisition setting, the IP address that is currently
assigned is displayed.
Subnet Mask  Subnet mask
For automatic acquisition setting, the address that is currently
Default Gateway  Default gateway
For automatic acquisition setting, the address that is currently
Work Group  Network connection work group
2 Software Version
Software Version  Version of the system software
RT Software  Version of the realtime software
Service Software  Version of the service software
3 Date  Current date
4 Other Info
Error Info
Log Date 1  Log acquisition date (most recent log)
Log Date 2  Log acquisition date (second most recent log)
Log Date 3  Log acquisition date (third most recent log)
Reset Info
Reset Date 1  Date of most recent system reset operation
Reset Date 2  Date of second most recent system reset operation
Reset Date 3  Date of third most recent system reset operation
Information
Memo  Memo
Available/None
FMI Record  FMI implementation record
Available/None
Software Record
Installed Version  System software version at the time of shipment
Before Version  System software version before upgrading (N/A is displayed if the
software has not been upgraded.)
134
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) List of tabs (service functions)

1 [Config.] tab
Site Description  Display of the site information
System Management  Basic settings of the system
Date&Time - Date and time setting
* A date/time that is 24 hours or more ahead or behind the currently
set date/time must not be set.
Language - Language setting
Computer Name - Computer name (change of the setting is not possible)
System  System setting
Character set  Language setting for DICOM communication
Directories  Work folder setting
3D  AE title setting of the 3D workstation
*1
MWM Presets  MWM editing enabled/disabled setting
With regard to the scheduled study information obtained with MWM
and displayed on the screen, whether editing is enabled or disabled
is set for each item.
DICOM Management  DICOM settings
Local Node - Local node setting
Remote Nodes - Remote node setting
Printers - Printer setting
Offline Devices - Offline device (DVD drive, etc.) setting
Security Management  Network setting
Firewall Settings - Firewall setting
TCP/IP Filter Settings - TCP/IP filtering setting
Service Management  Service setting
Advanced Service - Installation/uninstallation of third-party vendor licenses
Adjustment  Submenus for adjustment
For the DP system, tube switching must be performed before
opening this window. In Service mode, tube switching cannot be
performed correctly.
2 [Utils] tab
Command Line*  Command line function
Software Upgrade*  Preparation for installation of the system software and installation of
the realtime software
Remote Console  Remote console settings
Management* * Not used
Remote Console - Settings related to the remote console
Settings * Not used
Remote Console - Account management for the remote console
Account * Not used
Beam Filter Setup  Beam compensation filter settings
Utility
Fluoro Control  Fluoroscopic parameter settings
Parameter
Radiography Control  Radiographic parameter settings
Parameter
135
No. 2J308-036EN*I

3 [Maint.] tab
Adjustment  Submenus for adjustment
For the DP system, tube switching must be performed before
opening this window. In Service mode, tube switching cannot be
System Test*  Self-diagnosis of the system controller hardware
System Status  Display and resetting of system degradation level information
Data Storage*  System disk/image disk diagnosis
Backup/Restore*  Backup/restoration of data
Backup System - Writing of system-specific information on other media (HD)
Settings
Restore System - Reading of system-specific information from other media (HD)
Settings
FMI Record*  FMI implementation record
Memo*  Memo function
*2
Service Tool  Preparation for installation of the system software
4 [Diag.] tab
System Test*  Self diagnosis of the system controller hardware
Date Storage*  System disk/image disk diagnosis
RT Log*  RT log and command history
DICOM Network  DICOM communication analysis
Analysis*
Log Viewer*  Various log viewers
Application Event - Display of application event logs
Log
System Event Log - Display of system event logs
Security Event Log - Display of security event logs
DICOM Log - Display of logs related to DICOM
Alert Log View - <TBD>
Error Display Log - Display of service function error logs
View * Normally not used.
Performance Log - Display of acquired performance logs
View
Operation Log View - Display of service function operation logs
* Normally not used.
136
No. 2J308-036EN*I

5 [Logs] tab
RT Log*  RT log and command history
Log Viewer*  Various log viewers
Application Event - Display of application event logs
Log
System Event Log - Display of system event logs
Security Event Log - Display of security event logs
DICOM Log - Display of logs related to DICOM
Alert Log View - <TBD>
Error Display Log - Display of service function error logs
View * Normally not used.
Performance Log - Display of acquired performance logs
View
Log Settings*  Settings for saving of logs
Performance Log - Setting of the timing of log acquisition and the target data to be
Settings acquired
Max Los Size - Setting of the maximum size of the log data
Settings
*1: Available in software V4.30 or later.
*2: Available in software V4.50 or later.
NOTE: 1. In the "List of tabs (service functions)", an asterisk (*) is used to indicate the
functions that require a license. These functions are not displayed for users
without the appropriate licenses.
2. If startup of "RT Log" in the [Diag.] tab or the [Logs] tab is attempted by
double-clicking it, operation in the window may be disabled in rare cases.
Be sure to single-click "RT Log".
If operation in the window is disabled, perform the following steps to restore

operation.
(a) Hold down [Ctrl]  [Alt]  [Delete] simultaneously to open the system
reset window.
(b) Select [Restart] to restart the system.
137
No. 2J308-036EN*I
5.2.5 Config. window
(1) Site Description
(a) Purpose
To display and set (change) the system-unique information.
(b) Display window
V4.30 or later
138
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(c) Display items

1 System Name System name (cannot be changed)
2 Model Name Model name (cannot be changed)
3 Pet Name Trade name of the system
4 Serial Number Serial number of the system (cannot be changed)
5 Site ID Site ID
6 Site Equip. ID Equipment number of the system at the site
7 Site Equip. Seq ID Serial number of the system at site
8 Hospital Name Hospital name (entry in preset language)
9 Department Name of the department to which the system belongs
(entry in preset language)
10 Customer Name Customer name (entry in preset language)
11 Street No. Street number
12 Street Street (entry in preset language)
13 City City (entry in preset language)
14 District District (entry in preset language)
15 Country Country (entry in preset language)
16 ZIP Code ZIP code
17 Phone Number Customer phone number
18 Station Name* Station name
19 [Apply] Sets the changes.
20 [Reset] Cancels the changes and returns to the previous setting.
*: Setting is possible in the software of V4.30 or later.
139
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) System Management
(a) Date & Time
<1> Purpose
To display and set (change) the date, time, and time zone.
<2> Display window
140
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<3> Display items

1 Date & Time The current time/date setting can be changed.
Note, however, that a date/time that is 24 hours or more ahead or
behind the currently set date/time must not be set. If the date/time is
changed by 24 hours or more relative to the currently set time, startup
will fail.
Date  The current date is entered here. A calendar can be displayed by
clicking [].
Time  The current time is entered here.
2 Network Time Protocol Function that connects with the server and synchronizes the time with
that set in the server.
Do not enable this function.
Automatically  The system is automatically connected to the server at the time of
synchronizes with system startup and the time is synchronized with that set in the
server server (cannot be selected).
Server Address  The address of the server is specified.
[Refresh Now]  Used to synchronize the time with that set in the server.
3 Time zone selection list The time zone is displayed. The time zone in which the system is
installed can be selected.
Be sure to set the time zone here. Do not set it from the control panel.
141
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) Language
<1> Purpose
To display the set language and change the language setting
<2> Display window
<3> Display items

1 Language settings The language used in the system can be set here.
entry field However, do not change the settings made at the time of shipment.
 Japan: Japanese
 Countries other than Japan:
If the area corresponding to the site location is available in the
options, select English (area corresponding to site location).
If the area corresponding to the site location is not available in the
options, select English (United States).
To set French GUI: French (France)
To set Spanish GUI: Spanish (Traditional Sort)
To set Italian GUI: Italian (Italy)
To set German GUI: German (Germany)
To set Portuguese GUI: Portuguese (Portugal)
To set Russian GUI: Russian (Russia)
142
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(c) Computer Name
<1> Purpose
To display the computer name (fixed).
<2> Display window
143
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Network Settings
(a) Purpose
To display the network information
To set or change the network information, open the Network Connections screen
from Windows control panel.
(b) Display window
(c) Display items

1 [Confirm Settings] Displays the confirmation dialog for the network connection setting (refer to (c)).
2 [Repair] Restores network connection.
3 [Enable] Enables network connection selected on the list (cannot be selected).
4 [Disable] Disables network connection selected on the list (cannot be selected).
5 [Edit] Changes the network connection setting (cannot be selected).
144
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(d) Setting confirmation dialog

1 Physical Address Physical address (MAC address)
2 IP Address IP address
3 Subnet Mask Subnet mask
4 Default Gateway Default gateway
5 DHCP Server IP address of the DHCP server
6 Lease Obtained When the DHCP function is used, the start time of acquisition of the IP
address.
7 Lease Expires When the DHCP function is used, the estimated release time of the IP
address.
8 DNS Servers IP address of the DNS server
(e) How to change the network setting from Windows
1) Start up the system.
2) Open Command Line from the service tool.
3) Set "NT Command Interpreter" in the Command List and enter the following
data in the Parameters column. Then click [Go].
F:\Celeve\bin\Txs_stopCeleve.js
4) When the confirmation dialog is displayed, click [OK] to close it.
* The system setting has now been changed so that Celeve software will not
start up when the power is turned ON.
5) Close the service tool and shut down the system.
145
No. 2J308-036EN*I
6) Turn ON the power to start up the system again.
7) When Windows is started up, press the Windows key of the keyboard and
select "Connection To"  "Show all connections" to open the network setting
screen.
8) Select the network connection for which the network settings will be changed
and click the right mouse button. In the displayed menu, click "Properties".
9) Select "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)" in the list and click [Properties].
146
No. 2J308-036EN*I
10) Change the settings as required and then click [OK] to close the screen.
11) Run the following batch file from Explorer.

F:\Celeve\bin\Txs_restartCeleve.js
12) When the confirmation dialog is displayed, click [OK] to close it.
13) Shut down the system.
14) Turn ON the power of the system again and confirm that the Celeve software is
started up normally.
CAUTION: 1. Network setting must be performed in the status in which the Celeve
software is not started.
2. For a network card that is not connected, do not leave it in

"Unplugged" status (Enable status). Specifically, change the status
to "Disable".
3. Confirm that the network segment of the IP address of the

unconnected network card (Disable status) differs from that of the
connected network card. If the segment is the same, change the IP
address segment of the network card that is not currently connected.
4. If the intra-hospital network segment is "192.168.0.*", change the IP

address of the Microsoft Loopback Adapter to an IP address (e.g.,
172.16.0.*) different from the intrahospital network segment.
147
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(4) System
(a) System configuration setting
<1> System name: System (series) type setting
System (series) name Outline

CS-i CAS-810A single-plane system (TFP-800B, TFP-800A/B1)
VS-i CAS-810A single-plane system (TFP-1200B, TFP-1200A/B1)
CC-i CAS-830A single-plane system (TFP-800A/A1)
VC-i CAS-830A single-plane system (TFP-1216A)
CAS-830B single-plane system (TFP-1216A, TFP-1200A)
DP-i 1st: CAS-810A + 2nd: CAS-830A dual-plane system
Activ CAS-830A + CT combined system
CAS-830B + CT combined system
CF/SP CAS-880A single-plane system (TFP-800A/A1)
CF/BP F: CAS-880A + L: CAS-820B biplane system (TFP-800A/A1)
VF/SP CAS-880A single-plane system (TFP-1216A, TFP-1200A)
VF/BP F: CAS-880A + L: CAS-820B biplane system
(F: TFP-1216A, TFP-1200A; L: TFP-1200A )
148
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<2> CAT type
CAT name Selection/input item Setting method

CAT-850B When the CAT-850B is used in combination
CAT-870B When the CAT-870B is used in combination Select one item.
NONE When not connected to the end of the table
<3> DP-i layout
DP-i layout name Selection/input item Setting method

- Not a dual-plane system
Layout 90 90° layout
Select one item.
Layout 180 180° layout
Layout 0 0° layout
<4> CT system type
CT system name Selection/input item Setting method

- No CT system is used in combination
Asteion Asteion is used in combination Select one item.
Aquilion Aquilion is used in combination
<5> Monitor configuration (control room)
Item Selection/input item Setting method

Number of 0
additional monitors
1
in the control room Select one item.
2
(4)
149
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<6> CAS type (only display)
CAS name Selection/input item Setting method

- Not used
CAS-810A When the CAS-810A is used in combination
Automatic generation
CAS-830A When the CAS-830A or CAS-830B is used in
One item is selected.
combination
CAS-880A When the CAS-880A is used in combination
<7> Plane type (only display)
Plane name Outline Setting method

CS-i/CS5/VS-i CS-i/CS5/VS-i
CB-i Frontal/VB-i Frontal CB-i Frontal/VB-i Frontal
Activ * Activ Automatic generation
CB-i/VB-i Lateral * CB-i/VB-i/Lateral One item is selected.
DP-i Tube1 DP-i Tube 1
DP-i Tube2 DP-i Tube 2
150
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<8> FPD type

TFP-1216 Automatic generation
FPD model name TFP-1200A One item is selected.
TFP-800A
8 inch Automatic generation
12 inch Fixed value depending on the
Size
16 inch FPD type
Automatic generation
3 modes Fixed value depending on the
Number of modes FPD type
4 modes
N Fixed value Automatic generation

M1 Fixed value Fixed value depending on the
Field size FPD type
M2 Fixed value
M3 -/Fixed value Input a value.
<9> BLA type (only display)
BLA name Selection/input item Setting method

- Not used
BLA-800A When the BLA-800A is used in
combination
BLA-800C When the BLA-800C is used in Select one item.
combination
BLA-900A When the BLA-900A is used in
combination
<10> Number of the beam filters (display only)
BLA name Selection/input item Setting method

3 Filters Three beam filters are used. Selection of one of the
4 Filters Four beam filters are used. two items or automatic
*1
selection
*1
: Selectable only when BLA-800C is selected. "3 Filters" is automatically
selected for BLA-800A and "4 Filters" is automatically selected for BLA-900A.
<11> CCD (MTV) type (only display)

- Not used
151
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<12> Optics type (only display)

- Not used
<13> Tube type (only display)

- Not used
DRX-T7235GFS When the DRX-T7235GFS is
used in combination
used in combination
used in combination
DSRX-T7345GFS When the DSRX-T7345GFS is Select one item.
used in combination
DSRX-T7444GDS When the DSRX-T7444GDS is
used in combination
*1, *2
DSRX-T7345GFS_U When the DSRX-T7345GFS_U
is used in combination
*1, *3
DSRX-T7444GDS_U When the DSRX-T7444GDS_U
is used in combination
*1
: Should be selected when 120-kV pulsed fluoroscopy is to be performed.
*2
: The model name shown on the rating label of this X-ray tube is
DSRX-T7345GFS, UB.
*3
: The model name shown on the rating label of this X-ray tube is
DSRX-T7444GDS, UB.
<14> XTP type (only display)
XTP name Selection/input item Setting method

- Not used
Select one item.
XTP-8100G When the XTP-8100G is used
in combination
152
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) Optional unit configuration setting
V4.22 or later
153
No. 2J308-036EN*I
V4.30 or later
154
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Setting
Function Outline Remarks
method
*5
XIDF-SFL801 is provided/not provided Spot Fluoroscopy kit Selection —
XIDF-ROT801 is provided/not provided Rotational DSA kit Selection —
XIDF-ROT801 is provided/not provided Rotational DA function Selection —

(Rotational DA function is
added to XIDF-ROT801.)
XIDF-STP801 is provided/not provided *2 Stepping DSA kit Selection —
XIDF-3DI801/ 3D-Angio/3D Selection —
XIDF-100A is provided/not provided reconstruction PC/
angiography workstation
XIDF-LCI801 *2 LCI option kit Selection Selectable when the
XIDF-3DI801/XIDF-100A is
selected
XIDF-3DP802 is provided/not provided 3D Roadmap kit Selection Selectable when XIDF-
*3, 4
3DI801/XIDF-100A are
(V4.30 or later)
selected.
3D Roadmap/High- (V4.30 or later)
speed 3D kit
Exclusive selection with
XIDF-QCA303
 3D & LCI: 3D Angio and
LCI can be used.
 3D Roadmap: 3D
Roadmap can be used.
 ALL: 3D Angio, LCI, and
3D Roadmap can be
used.
XIDF-QCA303 is provided/not provided *2 CV-3D console kit Selection Exclusively for selection with
the XIDF-QCA301/A1 or
XIDF-3PP802
XIDF-DCM801 is provided/not provided DICOM storage kit Selection —
XIDF-DCM802 is provided/not provided DICOM RIS connection Selection —
kit
XIDF-REF801 is provided/not provided *1 Additional monitor Selection —
XIDF-LMA801 is provided/not Large-screen monitor Selection —
*2
provided
XJDK-001A/002A Area dose Selection —
XJDC-009A/016A is provided/not meter/Ionization chamber
provided kit
XIDF-QCA801 is provided/not provided *3 QCA/LVA kit Selection Exclusively for installation
with the XIDF-QCA804
XIDF-QCA802 is provided/not provided *3 LVA biplane kit Selection Biplane system only
Selectable when the
XIDF-QCA801 is selected
XIDF-QCA803 is provided/not provided *3 QVA kit Selection Selectable when the
XIDF-QCA801 is selected
155
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Setting
Function Outline Remarks
method
XIDF-QCA804 is provided/not provided *3 QCA QVA kit Selection Exclusively for selection with
the XIDF-QCA801
XIDF-QCA301/A1 is provided/not Selection Exclusively for selection with
provided *2 the XIDF-QCA303
XIDF-ESD801 is provided/not provided External signal display kit Selection —
XIDF-BPS802 is provided/not provided High-speed biplane kit Selection Biplane system only
XIDF-BPS803 is provided/not provided Fluoroscopy high-speed Selection Biplane system only
biplane kit Exclusively for selection with
the XIDF-BPS804
Selectable when the
TFP-800A is selected.
XIDF-BPS804 is provided/not provided *2 High-speed biplane kit Selection Biplane systems only
Exclusively for selection with
the XIDF-BPS803
Selectable when the
TFP-800A is selected.
XIDF-SNR801 is provided/not provided SNRF kit Selection —
*1 :
Selectable in V4.10 or later in biplane systems
*2 :
Selectable in V4.10 or later
*3 :
*4 :
*5 :
156
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(c) Combined device setting
<1> Contrast/bolus injector

Injector interlock Used (Default)
Select one item.
Not used
<2> Vital signs monitor
Vital signs monitor Used (Default)

Select one item.
connection Not used
<3> ECG input

Used (Default)
ECG input Select one item.
Not used
157
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<4> ECG input: Pressure wave input

Used (Default)
Pressure wave input Select one item.
Not used
<5> Video cassette recorder (VCR)

Used
VCR connection Select one item.
Not used (Default)
(d) Support unit (CAS) setting
<1> Axis Movement
158
No. 2J308-036EN*I
CAUTION: The items here do not need to be changed, except for the
speed of the main rotation axis (ARM ROT). Do not change the
speed and limit positions of each axis unnecessarily. Doing so
may lead to failure during operation.
The Room Flex function described later allows the limit

positions of each axis to remain unchanged. If any change is
required, observe the precautions described below.
 Changes other than ceiling longitudinal and lateral movement

and support column rotation in the CAS-830A and ceiling
longitudinal movement in the CAS-820A must not be
performed.
 The initialization sensor and the limit switch must be moved
simultaneously.
 To prevent failure during operation, axes other than those
specified above must not be changed.
 Setting the main rotation axis manual speed and the auto-positioning speed
to 30/s
For the CAS-810A, CAS-830A, and CAS-880A, the main rotation axis
manual speed and the auto-positioning speed have been set to 20°/s at the
time of shipment.
 Manual speed: Change "20"  "30" in the "ARM ROT" list box for
"Speed (Manual)"
 Auto positioning speed: Change "20"  "30" in the "ARM ROT" list box for
"Speed (Auto)".
Note) Consult with the user before increasing the speeds.
159
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Item
Manual operation speed [°/s]
ARM ROT Automatic operation speed [°/s]
+ side limit position [°]
- side limit position [°]
ARM SLIDE Automatic operation speed [°/s]
Manual operation speed [cm/s]
SID Automatic operation speed [cm/s]
+ side limit position [cm]
- side limit position [cm]
CEIL LONG Automatic operation speed [cm/s]
CEIL LATE Automatic operation speed [cm/s]
CEIL ROT Automatic operation speed [°/s]
BEAM Up/Down Automatic operation speed [cm/s]
Manual operation speed [/s]
FLOOR ROT Automatic operation speed [/s]
+ side limit position []
- side limit position []
COLU ROT Automatic operation speed [/s]
FPD ROT Automatic operation speed [/s]
BLA ROT Automatic operation speed [/s]
CT LONG + side limit position [cm]
160
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<2> Room Flex
 CAS-810A
There is no possibility of interference with the wall; therefore, the parameters

for Room Flex do not need to be changed. All entered changes, except for
the isocenter height, are ignored. (The Room Flex function cannot be used
to enable operation in narrow spaces by limiting support column rotation.)
Parameter Descriptions Setting range Default value Remarks

Distance between the tabletop rotation
Right Side No change
center and the right wall (right side 195 to 1000 225
Wall required.
relative to the patient) (cm)
Left Side Distance between the tabletop rotation No change
195 to 1000 225
Wall center and the left wall (cm) required.
Head Side Distance between the tabletop rotation No change
390 to 1000 390
Wall center and the head-end wall (cm) required.
Foot Side Distance between the tabletop rotation No change
210 to 1000 210
Wall center and the foot-end wall (cm) required.
Ceiling No change
Ceiling height (cm) 270 to 350 270
Height required.
No change
Iso Center Isocenter height (cm) 100 to 120 108
required normally.
Note) The setting ranges and the default values are for single-plane standard systems and are different
from those for biplane and compound systems.
161
No. 2J308-036EN*I
 CAS-830A
When the room size is narrower or wider than the default value, measure the
examination room size at the time of installation and enter the actual size.
Note that the entries for "Foot Side Wall" and "Ceiling Height" are ignored
because there is no possibility of interference.

Distance between the tabletop
Right Side
rotation center and the right wall (right 118 to 1000 260
Wall
side relative to the patient) (cm)
Left Side Distance between the tabletop
118 to 1000 260
Wall rotation center and the left wall (cm)
Head Side
rotation center and the head-end wall 354 to 1000 394
Wall
(cm)
Foot Side No change
rotation center and the foot-end wall 226 to 1000 226
Wall required.
(cm)
Ceiling No change
Height required.
No change
required normally.
 CAS-880A

Right Side
rotation center and the right wall (right 118 to 1000 227
Wall
side relative to the patient) (cm)
Left Side Distance between the tabletop
118 to 1000 227
Wall rotation center and the left wall (cm)
Head Side
rotation center and the head-end wall 354 to 1000 407
Wall
(cm)
Foot Side No change
rotation center and the foot-end wall 220 to 1000 220
Wall required.
(cm)
Ceiling No change
Height required.
No change
required normally.
Note) The setting ranges and the default values are for single-plane standard systems and are different
from those for biplane and compound systems.
CAUTION: If the parameter settings are incorrect, the support unit and the tabletop may
interfere with the wall, resulting in damage. When the parameters are changed,
restart the system twice to apply the changed data and perform operational checks
to confirm that the clearance from the wall is at least 40 cm.
162
No. 2J308-036EN*I
 CAS-880A/CAS-820B biplane system
When the room size is narrower or wider than the default value, measure the
examination room size at the time of installation and enter the actual size.
Note that the entries for "Foot Side Wall" and "Ceiling Height" are ignored
because there is not possibility of interference.

Right Side
center and the right wall (right side 227 to 1000 250
Wall
Left Side
center and the left wall (left side 227 to 1000 270
Wall
Head Side Distance between the tabletop rotation
500 to 1000 500
Wall center and the head-end wall (cm)
Foot Side Distance between the tabletop rotation No change
220 to 1000 220
Wall center and the foot-end wall (cm) required.
Ceiling No change
Height required.
No change
required normally.
Note) The setting ranges and the default values are for standard biplane systems and are different from
those for single-plane, IVR-CT, and dual-plane systems.
CAUTION: If the parameter settings are incorrect, the support unit and the tabletop may
interfere with the wall, resulting in damage. When the parameters are changed,
restart the system twice to apply the changed data and perform operational checks
to confirm that the clearance from the wall is at least 40 cm.
163
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<3> Option

Hyper-handle type
Tableside console type Select one item.
Joystick type
Satellite console used/not Used

Select one item.
used Not used
Hyper-handle type When the satellite console
Satellite console type is used:
Joystick type
Select one item.
164
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<4> Mode & Display_Offset

Input of 2-way simultaneous operation is identified/ Identified
not identified at the tableside console joystick
Not identified
section
Input of 2-way simultaneous operation is identified/ Identified
not identified at the satellite console joystick
Not identified
section
SSD setting 30 cm
38 cm
The interference with the table is checked/not Checked (Default)
checked
Not checked
The interference with the patient is checked/not Checked (Default)
checked
Not checked
The interference with the wall is checked/not Checked
checked
Not checked
Anatomical control auto-selection Checked (Default)
(whether or not anatomical control auto-selection is
set) Not checked
Arm auto-selection (Park position) Checked

(whether or not automatic plane switching during
parking is set) (biplane systems only) Not checked
165
No. 2J308-036EN*I

Accessory mounting rail extender Checked
(whether or not the rail extender on which the
operating box is mounted is used in combination) Not checked
Duration of Timeout of Ceiling Operation 70 (Default) Steps of 100 [ms]
When set to 0, timeout
does not apply.
SID display offset HHS display
IEC display (Default)
(e) CAT (catheterization table) setting
Item CAT-850B CAT-860B CAT-870B CAT-880B

- side limit position [mm] 775 775 810 750
TBLHIGHT
+ side limit position [mm] 1150 1100 1100 1054
- side limit position [cm] 0 0 0 0
TBLLONG
+ side limit position [cm] 135 150 135 135
- side limit position [cm] -20 -20 -15 -20
TBLLATE
+ side limit position [cm] 20 20 15 20
- side limit position [°] -180 -180 -180 -90
TBLROT
+ side limit position [°] 90 90 90 90
166
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Item CAT-850B CAT-860B CAT-870B CAT-880B

- side limit position [°] – – -28 –
TBLTILT
+ side limit position [°] – – 30 –
TBLLONG - side limit position [°] – – – -16
TILT + side limit position [°] – – – 16
TBLCRADLE - side limit position [°] – – – -16
TILT + side limit position [°] – – – 16
(f) BLA (beam limiting device) setting

Operation is performed only when the tube is
selected Disabled
Setting is possible using
a switch on the board.
Operation is performed only when fluoroscopy
Disabled
is performed
167
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<1> Compensation filter/collimator

Distance between the focus and Filter 1 [mm] 222.4 Read only.
Setting is not possible.
Distance between the focus and horizontal 256.0 Read only.
blades [mm] Setting is not possible.
Distance between the focus and the vertical 255.6 Read only.
blades [mm] Setting is not possible.
* The displayed value differs depending on whether the BLA-800A, BLA-800C,

or BLA-900A is used.
168
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(g) XTP (X-ray high-voltage generator) setting
169
No. 2J308-036EN*I

Heater inverter 1 Yes (Default) Select one item.
No * Common
No * Common
No * Common
No * Common
HVC1/IGBT_DRIVER1/INVERTER1 Yes (Default) Select one item.
No * Common
HVC2/IGBT_DRIVER2/INVERTER2 Yes (Default) Select one item.
No * Common
*1
PXCIM ROM Type-A (Default) Select one item.
Type-B
LM tube rotational control Normal (Default) Select one item.
(LM Tube) High * F (1st)/L (2nd) individual setting
Keep high speed 1 minute Yes Select one item.
(except for the LM tube) No (Default) * F (1st)/L (2nd) individual setting
Let rotation speed normal when idle Yes (Default) Select one item.
(GFS Tube) No * F (1st)/L (2nd) individual setting
GCU Yes (Default) (caution) Select one item.
No * F (1st)/L (2nd) individual setting
Starter Yes (Default) (caution) Select one item.
No * F/L individual setting
Heat Exchanger Yes (Default) Select one item.
No * F/L individual setting
(*)
Pulse Fluoro Max Voltage (kV) 110 (Default) Select one item.
120 * F (1st)/L (2nd) set separately.
(*)
Pulse Fluoro Max Wattage (kW) 2.2 (Default) Select one item.
(*1)
3.0 * F (1st)/L (2nd) set separately.
(*) When using a combination of tubes other than DSRX-T7345GFS_U,

DSRX-T7444GDS_U, do not change the setting from 110 kV/2.2 kW.
(*1) Setting cannot be performed for the DRX-T7345GFS and DRX7444-GFS.
170
No. 2J308-036EN*I
CAUTION:  For DP-i systems, check the boxes for "GCU" and "Starter" on the
Tube2 (2nd) tab.
 Remove the checkmark from "Keep high speed 1 minute" for the
X-ray tube unit.
Do not use 1-minute extension mode for high-speed rotation
except in cases of adjustments. The service life of the rotation
mechanism of the X-ray tube unit will be significantly shortened.
171
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(h) DFP (image processor) setting
<1> Supplementary setup

Loop (Default)
FOV change mode Select one item.
Reciprocation
The generator pause status is automatically Yes (Default)

Select one item.
set to OFF when a study starts. No
The door interlock is set to ON during X-ray Yes (Default)

Select one item.
generation. No
Permission for fluoroscopy while the door Yes

Select one item.
interlock is set during X-ray generation No (Default)
Yes (Default)
The room light interlock is used. Select one item.
No
Yes
Right/left reversal display of the RL area Select one item.
No (Default)
172
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<2> Auto-positioning
Category Item Selection/input item Setting method

Entire setting Setting from when the No. is input to when Seconds (Default: 5) Input a value.
cancellation is performed
Setting from when an action is Seconds (Default: 5) Input a value.
discontinued to when cancellation is
performed
Setting of the positioning information Seconds (Default: 1) Input a value.
display time during storage
Setting is completed even though setting Yes (Default) Select one item.
for the BLA is incomplete
No
Auto Park No. setting 0 to 99 (Default: 99) Input a value.
Temp Park No. setting 0 to 99 (Default: 98) Input a value.
(only for biplane)
Biplane Frontal Park No. 0 to 99 Input a value.
(Default: Disabled)
Biplane Frontal/Lateral Park No. 0 to 99 Input a value.
(Default: Disabled)
RL-LL switching position No. 0 to 99 (Default: 95) Input a value.
(only for biplane)
LL-RL switching position No. 0 to 99 (Default: 96) Input a value.
(only for biplane)
FPD rot. Neutral No. 0 to 99 (Default: 90) Input a value.
(only when the Universal FPD is used in
combination)
FPD rot. CCW90 (deg.) No. 0 to 99 (Default: 91) Input a value.
(only when the Universal FPD is used in
combination)
FPD rot. CW90 (deg.) No. 0 to 99 ―
(only when the Universal FPD is used in (Default: Disable)
combination)
173
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<3> Auto-positioning (for each No.)

Auto positioning No. setting
AP. No. selection 0 to 99
User protect setting ON

Operating setting OFF
for each AP. No. Can be used before start of study ON
OFF
CAT interlock Vertical movement Yes
interlock
No
Lateral tilt interlock Yes
No
CAS interlock FOV interlock Yes
Interlock setting No
for each AP. No. SID interlock Yes
No
Ceiling system Yes
interlock
No
Floor system Yes
interlock
No
174
No. 2J308-036EN*I

BLA interlock Compensation filter Yes
interlock
No
Beam limiting Beam limiting Yes
device interlock device blade
No
Interlock setting interlock
for each AP. No.
CT interlock Gantry longitudinal Yes
movement interlock
No
Tilt interlock Tilt table Yes
Tilt interlock No
CAUTION: 1. In this screen, the following settings can be performed for each
AP No.
* User protect setting

* Study start interlock setting
* Interlock setting
For the procedures for registering the auto-positioning target

positions, refer to subsection 28.14 "Procedures for Registering
the Auto-Positioning Target Positions".
2. For the DP system, auto-positioning setting can be performed for

each plane (for each No.).
175
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<4> Auto Map Image
Axis name Item Selection/input item Setting method

Reference setting is performed/not Set (Default)
performed
Not set
RAO/LAO
Positioning permissible range Angle value Unit [°]
(Default: 5)
Reference setting is performed/not Set (Default)
performed
Not set
CRA/CAU
Positioning permissible range Angle value Unit [°]
(Default: 5)
176
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<5> Auto Angle

Interlock setting CAS (1st) interlock FOV interlock Yes (Default)
No
SID interlock Yes (Default)
No
Ceiling system Yes
interlock
No (Default)
Floor system Yes (Default)
interlock
No
CAS (2nd) interlock FOV interlock Yes (Default)
No
SID interlock Yes (Default)
No
Ceiling system Yes
interlock
No (Default)
CAT interlock Vertical movement Yes
interlock
No (Default)
Lateral tilt interlock Yes
No (Default)
BLA (1st) interlock Compensation filter Yes
interlock
No (Default)
Beam limiting Yes
device interlock
No (Default)
BLA (2nd) interlock Compensation filter Yes
interlock
No (Default)
Beam limiting Yes
device interlock
No (Default)
CT interlock Gantry longitudinal Yes
movement interlock
No
177
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<6> Auto Pixel Shift
Category Selection/input item Setting method

Smoothing 1 to 4 (Default: 2) Input a value.
Distance 1 to 20 (Default: 1) Input a value.
Threshold 0 to 100 (Default: 0) Input a value.
Calculation shift 0 to 20 (Default: 10) Input a value.
178
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<7> Console Function Key

F-Store function Enable (Default) Only one item is selected.
Disable
F-Store acquisition time 10 (Default), 20, 30, 60 Only one item is selected.
(s.)
179
No. 2J308-036EN*I
 Tableside Console
Applicable console Selectable functions

*4
Tableside console 3D Auto Angle Angle reproduction from the reconstruction PC
(Hyper-handle/joystick) Angio Pos. *5
Auto-positioning of the support unit to the position
selected on the CT image
Auto Angle Auto-map positioning (auto-angle)
Auto Map Auto-map image
Auto Pixel Shift Auto pixel shift
Auto Window Auto-window
*5
Bookmark Bookmark setting (setting of whether the image is to be
switched)
*5
Bookmark Mode Bookmark function ON/OFF
Catheter Calib. Calibration menu for QCA/QVA/LVA (Catheter)
Distance Calib. Calibration menu for QCA/QVA/LVA (Distance)
CO2 Trace CO2 Trace
Copy to Printing Transfer to Printing mode
Enhance Enhance function for CV-3D Console
View SW ESD801 QCD switching
*1
View Select ESD801 QCD switching
F-LM% LM factor control using the cursor
*3
F-LM [0%] Fluoroscopic landmark vessel image display ON/OFF
F-Mask Mask image creation in fluoroscopic subtraction/landmark
F-Mask & F-Sub MASK-Sub switching with a single operation
F-Mask LIH Mask image creation using LIH image
F-Mode Fluoroscopy mode switching
F-REC Fluoroscopic image acquisition (dynamic image)
F-REC (S) Fluoroscopic image acquisition (still image)
180
No. 2J308-036EN*I

Tableside console F-STORE Fluoroscopic image acquisition (F-STORE)
(Hyper-handle/joystick) F-Sub Fluoroscopic subtraction/landmark ON/OFF
F-Sub/LM Fluoroscopic subtraction/landmark switching
F-Timer Reset Fluoroscopy timer reset
*5
Gantry Pos. Auto-positioning of the CT gantry to the position selected
on the displayed image
HLC On/Off HLC ON/OFF * Do not set to ON in systems for the USA.
Injector Injector interlock ON/OFF
Latest Run Display of the last image acquired in the study
*3
Layout Large-screen monitor layout selection menu
*3
< Layout Selection of the previous option for large-screen monitor
layout
*3
Layout > Selection of the next option for large-screen monitor
layout
Length Distance measurement
*1
Line Line display during SNRF adjustment
LVA LVA
LVA BP Biplane LVA
Live Zoom Setting menu for fluoroscopy magnification ratio
Live Zoom On/Off Fluoroscopy magnification ratio switching with a single
operation
*1
LM Set Application of landmark
*2
LM Set (BP) Application of landmark (biplane image)
LM Set/Reset Param Selective execution of the LM Set function and Reset
*4
Parameter function
LM% LM factor control for playback images
Map Catalog Map thumbnail display
Map Save Map Image Save
Map  Run Map  Run
Mask Select Mask image selection in fluoroscopic
subtraction/landmark
Mask Select (BP) Mask image selection in fluoroscopic
subtraction/landmark (biplane image)
Menu On/Off Switching between the menu display and the thumbnail
display
Menu/Run Switching to the dynamic image thumbnail display
Menu/Map Switching to the map image thumbnail display
MIH Select (BP) Selection of MAP to be displayed for Map Image Hold
(biplane image)
*1
Mask Shift Fluoroscopic mask image shifting
*1
Mask Shift (F) Fluoroscopic mask image shifting (F)
*1
Mask Shift (L) Fluoroscopic mask image shifting (L)
*1
Menu Switching between the menu display and the thumbnail
display (RUN/MAP)
MIH On/Off Map Image Hold ON/OFF
MIH Select Selection of MAP to be displayed for Map Image Hold
Monitor Image processing target image switching
*2
Monitor Conf. Change of the examination room monitor configuration
Neg./Pos. Negative/positive reversal
Network DICOM transfer of the image shown on the in-room
monitor
Open Blades Blade position reset
181
No. 2J308-036EN*I

Tableside console Open Blades (F) Blade position reset (F)
(Hyper-handle/joystick) Open Blades (L) Blade position reset (L)
Open Filter Compensation filter position reset
Open Filter (F) Compensation filter position reset (F)
Open Filter (L) Compensation filter position reset (L)
Panning Roaming
Pause Generator pause
Pause (F) Generator pause (F)
Pause (L) Generator pause (L)
Peak Trace Peak Trace
PF Change Fluoroscopic pulse rate selection menu
PF Rate Fluoroscopic pulse rate change
Photo Save Photo Image Save
Playback Start/Stop Dynamic Playback Playback/Stop
*5
Pos. Restore Reexecution of auto-positioning of the CT gantry to the
position selected on the displayed image
Post Zoom Setting menu for playback magnification ratio
Post Zoom On/Off Playback magnification ratio switching with a single
operation
Program Acquisition program selection
< Program Previous acquisition program selection
Program > Next acquisition program selection
QVA QVA
QCA QCA
*5
RejectImage Selection of an image set as unnecessary (setting of
whether the image is to be archived)
Reset Parameter Reset window
*2
Reset Param (BP) Reset window (biplane image)
RoomLight Off Turn OFF room light
Run Catalog Run thumbnail display
Save Saving
Sequence Sequential navigation ON/OFF
Sequential Playback Continuous playback
S-Filter Change of the spatial filter using the in-room menu
Show Position Show Position function for CV-3D Console
Shutter Post-process electronic shutter
*5
Slice Select The slice of the CT image corresponding to the position
selected on the displayed image is displayed.
*5
Slice Foot The displayed slice of the CT image is changed to the
next slice in the patient foot direction.
*5
Slice Head The displayed slice of the CT image is changed to the
next slice in the patient head direction.
Sphere Calib. Calibration menu for QVA/QCA/LVA (Sphere)
*3
Spot On/Off Spot fluoroscopy mode ON/OFF
*1
Stent Area Display/non-display of the guidelines for radiography with
high definition LCI
182
No. 2J308-036EN*I

Tableside console Sub Sub
(Hyper-handle/joystick) Sub/LM Switching of subtraction and landmarking for playback
images
Timer Stopwatch
*1
Undo Shift Cancels fluoroscopic mask image shifting
*1
Undo Shift (F) Cancels fluoroscopic mask image shifting (F)
*1
Undo Shift (L) Cancels fluoroscopic mask image shifting (L)
WW/GL Gradation control using the cursor
Zoom&Pan Panning starts automatically after the image
magnification operation is completed
2nd Console Select and perform Enhance function and Show Position
function for CV-3D Console
*1
3DRM On/Off 3D roadmap function ON/OFF
*1
3DRM Remask Recreation of the mask image for 3D roadmap
*1:
Selectable in V4.22 and later versions
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
183
No. 2J308-036EN*I
 Main Console

*4
Main console (A)/ 3D Auto Angle Angle reproduction from the reconstruction PC
Main console (C) Angio Pos.
*5
*5
switched)
*5
CO2 Trace CO2 Trace
*1
*3
F-LM[0%] Fluoroscopic landmark vessel image display ON/OFF
F-REC Fluoroscopic acquisition (dynamic image)
F-REC (S) Fluoroscopic acquisition (still image)
184
No. 2J308-036EN*I

Main console (A)/ F-STORE Fluoroscopic acquisition (F-STORE)
Main console (C) F-Sub Fluoroscopic subtraction/landmark ON/OFF
F-Sub/LM Fluoroscopic subtraction/landmark switching
*5
F-Timer Reset Fluoroscopy timer reset
HLC On/Off HLC ON/OFF * Do not set to ON in systems for the USA
*3
*3
layout
*3
Layout > Selection of the next option for large-screen monitor layout
Live Zoom On/Off Fluoroscopy magnification ratio switching with a single
operation
*1
*2
*4
Parameter function
LVA LVA
LVA BP Biplane LVA
display
(biplane image)
*1
*1
*1
*1
display (RUN/MAP)
*2
monitor
Open Blades (F) Blade position reset (F)
Open Blades (L) Blade position reset (L)
Panning Roaming
185
No. 2J308-036EN*I

Main console (A)/ Pause Generator pause
Main console (C) Pause (F) Generator pause (F)
PF Rat Fluoroscopic pulse rate change
*5
Post Zoom On/Off Playback magnification ON/OFF with a single operation
< Program Previous acquisition program selection
Program > Next acquisition program selection
*5
*2
Save Saving
*5
*5
*5
Sphere Calib. Calibration menu for QCA/QVA/LVA (Sphere)
*3
*1
high definition LCI
Sub Sub
Sub/LM Switching of subtraction and landmarking for playback
images
Timer Stopwatch
*1
*1
*1
View ID VIEW ID
View ED (F/L) Switching of the frontal View ED/lateral View ED
Zoom&Pan Panning starts automatically after the image
magnification operation is completed
186
No. 2J308-036EN*I

*1
Main console (A)/ 3DRM On/Off 3D roadmap function ON/OFF
Main console (C) 3DRM Remask
*1
Recreation of the mask image for 3D roadmap
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
CAUTION: At the time of installation, if assignment of the function buttons on the

main console (A) was changed, replace the labels appropriately.
187
No. 2J308-036EN*I
 Additional Console
NOTE: The image console can be connected only when Main console C is
selected.
188
No. 2J308-036EN*I

*4
Satellite console 3D Auto Angle Angle reproduction from the reconstruction PC
(Hyper-handle/joystick) Angio Pos. *5
*5
switched)
*5
CO2 Trace CO2 Trace
Digital Zoom Magnification fluoroscopy
Digital Zoom On/Off Digital zoom ratio switching with a single operation
*1
*3
*1
F-Mode Fluoroscopy mode selection
F-STORE Fluoroscopic image acquisition (F-STORE)
F-Sub Fluoroscopic subtraction/landmark ON/OFF
F-Sub/LM Fluoroscopic subtraction/landmark selection
*5
*3
*3
layout
*3
Layout > Selection of the next option for large-screen monitor layout
Live Zoom Setting menu of magnification ratio for fluoroscopy
Live Zoom On/Off Fluoroscopy magnification ON/OFF with a single
operation
*1
*2
*4
Parameter function
189
No. 2J308-036EN*I

Satellite console LVA LVA
(Hyper-handle/joystick) LVA BP Biplane LVA
Map  Run Map  Run
*1
*1
*1
*1
display (RUN/MAP)
display
(biplane image)
*2
monitor
Panning Roaming
PF Rate Fluoroscopic pulse rate change
*5
190
No. 2J308-036EN*I

Satellite console < Program Previous acquisition program selection
(Hyper-handle/joystick) Program > Next acquisition program selection
*5
QCA QCA
QVA QVA
*2
Save Saving
*5
*5
*5
*3
*1
high definition LCI
Sub Sub
images
Timer Stopwatch
*1
*1
*1
Zoom&Pan Panning starts automatically after the image magnification
operation is completed
*1
*1
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
191
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<8> Foot Switch Function Key
NOTE: Type 1: Conventional-type footswitch
Type 2: Footswitch with function keys
For ADIF PWB PX17-42291 Gr2 or PX17-45526, key No. 1 and No. 2
can be set as function keys.
<Systems other than the biplane system (such as a single-plane system)>
V4.30 or later
192
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<Biplane system>
V4.30 or later
193
No. 2J308-036EN*I

ON
Spot fluoroscopy function* Exclusive selection
OFF (Default)
* Setting is possible in the software of V4.30. In the software of V4.40 or later, setting is possible
in the option configuration setting window (see 5.2.5 (4) (b) "Option configuration setting").
CAUTION: 1. The spot fluoroscopy function is supported only in the following systems. Do not set the
spot fluoroscopy function to ON in systems other than those specified below.
 CAS-880A single plane system with the TFP-1200A
 Biplane system with the CAS-880A and TFP-1200A on the frontal system and the
CAS-820B and TFP-1200A on the lateral system
* Note, however, that spot fluoroscopy is performed only with the frontal system.
For systems with software V4.40 or later, spot fluoroscopy is also available on the lateral
system.
Note that the spot fluoroscopy function is also supported in the following systems with
software V4.40 or later.
 CAS-880A single-plane system with the TFP-800A
 Biplane system with the CAS-880A and TFP-800A on the frontal system and the CAS-
820B and TFP-800A on the lateral system
* The spot fluoroscopy function is available for both the frontal system and lateral
system.
The spot fluoroscopy function is also supported in the following system with software
V4.50 or later.
 CAS-830B single-plane system with the TFP-800A, TFP-1200A, or TFP-1216A
2. If the spot fluoroscopy function is enabled, select Utility mode - Protocol Presets -
Advanced Presets and set the spot fluoroscopy function to ON for each study protocol.
For a study protocol in which the spot fluoroscopy function is not set to ON, the
footswitch to which the spot fluoroscopy function is assigned is disabled. Be sure to
explain this to the user.
194
No. 2J308-036EN*I

*5
Type 2 footswitch 3D Auto Angle Angle reproduction from the reconstruction PC
*6
Angio Pos. Auto-positioning of the support unit to the position
*1
Acq. Plane Select Acquisition plane selection
*6
switched)
*6
Digital Zoom Magnification fluoroscopy (ring menu)
Digital Zoom On/Off Digital zoom ratio switching with a single operation
*2
*4
F-Mask Mask image creation in fluoroscopic
F-Mask&F-Sub MASK-Sub switching with a single operation
F-Mode Fluoroscopy mode selection
F-STORE Fluoroscopic image acquisition (F-STRE)
F-Sub Fluoroscopic subtraction/landmark ON/OFF
F-Sub/LM Fluoroscopic subtraction/landmark selection
*6
*4
*4
layout
*4
Layout > Selection of the next option for large-screen monitor
layout
*2
Live Zoom Setting menu of magnification ratio for fluoroscopy
Live Zoom On/Off Fluoroscopy magnification ON/OFF with a single
operation
*2
*3
*5
Parameter function
195
No. 2J308-036EN*I

Type 2 footswitch LVA LVA
LVA BP Biplane LVA
Map->Run Map->Run
display
(biplane image)
*2
*2
*2
*2
display (RUN/MAP)
*3
monitor
Panning Roaming
PF Rate Fluoroscopic pulse rate selection change
*6
< Program Previous Acquisition program selection
Program > Next Acquisition program selection
196
No. 2J308-036EN*I

Type 2 footswitch QCA QCA
QVA QVA
*6
*3
Save Save
*6
*6
*6
*4
*2
high definition LCI
Sub Sub
images
Timer Stopwatch
*1
*1
*1
WW/GL Gray-scale control using the cursor
*2
*2
*1:
Selectable in the biplane system only
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
*6:
197
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<9> Image data management (OverWrite/Remain)
Item Selection/input item

RUN management mode OverWrite
Remain
Map image management mode OverWrite
Remain
Maximum number of map images 1 to 999
Photo image management mode OverWrite
Remain
Maximum number of photo images 1 to 999
198
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<10> Mag. calculation

Calculation mode Usual (*1)
New (*2) (Default)
Tabletop height [mm] 0 [mm] to 500 [mm] (Default: 100)
*1: Usual
The geometric magnification ratio is calculated assuming that the target

region is immobilized above a certain position of the tabletop. The arm
position is assumed to be fixed to PA for calculation.
There are two ways to specify the target region.
<1> Assuming that the target region is immobilized at the specified

position on the upper of the tabletop.
<2> Assuming that the target region is immobilized at the isocenter on the
upper of the tabletop.
After setting the calculation mode to "Usual", select [Utils]  "Command

Line" and set "NT Command Interpreter" in the Command List. Enter the
following in the Parameters field and click the [Go] button to apply the
settings.
To set <1>
f:\celeve\bat\utility\registry ComLib_AutoCalib_OldType_OFF.reg
If the RDSR option is enabled, change the setting of

f:\celeve\data\TxsREMInfo\REMDoseDataInfo.ini as specified below.
[ReferencePointDefinition]
; value = "5cm from 10cm above Tabletop toward Source"

; value = "5cm from Isocenter toward Source"
value = "5cm from 10cm above Tabletop toward Source (PA)"
To set <2>
f:\celeve\bat\utility\registry ComLib_AutoCalib_OldType_ON.reg

; value = "5cm from 10cm above Tabletop toward Source"

value = "5cm from Isocenter toward Source"
; value = "5cm from 10cm above Tabletop toward Source (PA)"
199
No. 2J308-036EN*I
*2: New
Although the calculation method is basically the same as for <1> for "Usual",
the arm position is not fixed to PA.
The arm angle, the table lateral position, and the ceiling lateral position of
the support unit are all taken into consideration to calculate the geometric
magnification ratio.

value = "5cm from 10cm above Tabletop toward Source"

; value = "5cm from Isocenter toward Source"
; value = "5cm from 10cm above Tabletop toward Source (PA)"
<11> Rotational DA

Additional Time for Acceleration and 0 to 100 (0.1 s) (Default) 15
Deceleration
Marginal Time 0 to 200 (0.1 s) (Default) 20
200
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<12> 3D-Angio

Target plane selection CAS-810A/CAS-880A (Plane1)
CAS-830A (Plane2)
FOV to be used N
M1
M2
(M3)
SID to be used [mm] 1200
1150
1100
Setting the FPD orientation Portrait : Orientation in which the
longer sides of the FPD
are parallel to the patient
axis.
Landscape : Orientation in which the
shorter sides of the FPD
are parallel to the patient
axis.
201
No. 2J308-036EN*I

First reconstruction mode Standard reconstruction (Default)
Device reconstruction
First reconstruction voxel size 512
256
256  512 (Default)
Second reconstruction mode No reconstruction (Default)
Standard reconstruction
Device reconstruction
Second reconstruction voxel size 512 (Default)
256
256  512
LUT No. for density conversion 0 to 7 (Default: 0)
MC (Mask-Contrast) acquisition Used
sequence
Not used (Default)
BoneFusion function Used (Default)
Not used
When the settings for FOV and SID in the 3D-Angio area on this screen have
been performed, set the 3D DSA and 3D DA programs again according to the
following procedures.
Be sure to perform setting again for all the 3D DSA and 3D DA programs.
1. Restart the system and enter Utility mode.
2. Click the [Protocol Presets] button to display the Study Protocol/Acquisition

Program list.
3. Click the Study Protocol list including the 3D DSA or 3D DA program.
4. Select the 3D DSA or 3D DA program list from the Acquisition Program list
and click the [Update] button.
5. Open the combo boxes for FOV and SID on the Radiography tab on the
Acquisition Program Edit screen and confirm that the set values for FOV
and SID are displayed.
6. Click the [OK] button at the lower right of the screen to close the Acquisition
Program Edit screen.
7. Be sure to perform operations 3 to 6 for all the 3D DSA and 3D DA

programs.
When a 3D-WS that does not support device reconstruction is used in

combination, set "No Reconstruction" for "Second reconstruction mode".
202
No. 2J308-036EN*I
CAUTION: 1. When the MC acquisition sequence is set to ON, be sure to

recreate the calibration table. In this case, only the MC
sequence is used for calibration image acquisition. Also, when
the calibration table is created on the reconstruction PC/
angiography workstation, since 2 types of table for MRC and
MC are created, the processing time is approximately doubled
compared when only the table for MRC is created.
2. The BoneFusion function is set to ON only when the

XIDF-100A/A1, XIDF-3DP801, or XIDF-AWS801 is connected
and the reconstruction processing speedup option has been
added. If these conditions are not satisfied, be sure to set this
function to OFF.
3. After the FPD orientation (portrait/landscape) is changed,

perform 3D calibration again in the orientation after the change.
If the 3D calibration for the 3D reconstruction images may be
affected and incorrect diagnosis may result.
For details, refer to the reference manual.
203
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<13> Low Contrast Imaging

Select either or both of the items
ON on the left.
FPD Rotation1 /
(only systems in which the
FPD Rotation1
OFF TFP-1216A is used in
combination)
FPD Rotation1
N Select either of the items on the
M1 left.
FOV to be used
M2
-
1200 Select either of the items on the
SID to be used [mm]
1100 left.
FPD Rotation2
FOV to be used M1 Select either of the items on the
- left.
SID to be used [mm] 1200 Select either of the items on the

left.
1100
Recon. Parameter Transfer Set to ON only when the software
ON version of the reconstruction PC
(XIDF-3DP801/B2 or later or the
angiography workstation [XIDF-
OFF AWS801]) is V3.72 or later. Set
to OFF for other versions.
204
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<14> Log Collect Function

ON
Real Time Alert One item must be selected
OFF (Default)
<15> Others
Default value (m)

Item
TFP-800A TFP-1216A TFP-1200A
Pixel size N 184.4 367.9 276.0
M1 161.3 276.0 230.0
M2 138.3 184.0 184.0
M3 115.3 138.0 138.0
CAUTION: Enter the measured pixel size (the measurement must be accurate).
When the detector is an FPD, measurement is not required. Use the

default value.
205
No. 2J308-036EN*I
 Audible Signal Setting for IEC/HHS Standard
Selection/input item Setting method

IEC One of those methods is set automatically.
HHS (2006.06-)
CAUTION: HHS (2006.06-) is selectable for systems shipped to the USA only. For
systems shipped to the other countries, the setting is fixed to IEC.
 Audible Signal Setting for IEC/HHS Standard
Selection/input item Setting method Remarks

Alarm Time Setting 0, 7, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 Automatic deletion setting time
(sec) (Default) 30 Setting is enabled only when the HHS (2006.06-)
radio button is selected.
"0" is the manual reset setting.
An alarm continues to sound until the user performs
resetting.
 HLC Alarm Type

HLC Alarm Type Selection format Selection of warning tone during operation in HLC
Type 1/Type 2 mode
Type 1: Warning tone always sounds.
Type 2: Warning tone sounds when the exposure
dose exceeds the Normal Dose Limit.
* Do not select Type 2 in systems for the USA.
 Emergency Stop Switch

Terminate the emission Selection format Actions after the emergency stop switch is pressed
of X-rays ON/OFF (Default) ON : X-ray exposure is stopped.
OFF : X-ray exposure is not stopped.
CAUTION: Set this function to ON only in systems for Canada.
206
No. 2J308-036EN*I
 DICOM REM Option

Radiation Dose Selection format Setting for enabling/disabling RDSR
Structured Report ON/OFF (Default) RDSR: the function to output the dose information
(RDSR) in the SR format
NOTE: For transfer destination setting, refer to section 17 "DICOM setting".
 Activ Option

IVR-CT 2nd Gen Selection format Setting for enabling/disabling the CT link function
ON/OFF (Default) (for future use)
NOTE: For details of the setting procedure, refer to 2J308-033EN.
<16> FPD (Adjustment Parameter)

Digital Mask Control Selection format OFF For the ON setting, follow the instructions from the
(Default) factory.
NOTE: For this function, follow the instructions from the factory.
207
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<17> Hardware
Subject Item Selection/input item Setting method

No (Default) One item must be
Shading Compensation Min selected
Max
CCDIF Yes (Default) One item must be
Crack Compensation
No selected
Yes One item must be
Offset Compensation
No (Default) selected
Type-A One item must be
Type-B selected
ADIF LUT type
Type-C
Type-D (Default)
Temperature Detector temperature CAS One item must be
*1
Sensor sensor position FPD (Default) selected
*1
: CAS must be selected when the detector is TFP-1216A.
CAUTION: Dose limit adjustment must be repeated if the destination is changed.
208
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<18> External Signal Display

Port1 (D-SUB) No selected
Type name Input character string
External signal Type name Input character string
display kit Yes One item must be
Port5 (BNC) No selected
Port6 (BNC) No selected
209
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(i) DFP (image processor) X-ray control setting
210
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Default Dose Table (R)
Table No. TFP-800A, TFP-1216A , TFP-1200A
Checkbox Value
1  100
2  150
3  200
4  250
5  300
6  400
7 ― 0
8 ― 0
9 ― 0
10 ― 0
11 ― 0
12 ― 0
13 ― 0
14 ― 0
15 ― 0
16 ― 0
CAUTION: For FPD systems, do not change the values in the default dose table.
211
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(j) DFP (image processor) F-mode setting
212
No. 2J308-036EN*I

Minimum fluoroscopy effective time [ms] 1000 [ms] to 5000 [ms] Input a value.
(Default: 1000)
F-ACT mA range table 90 [%] to 100 [%] Input a value.
(76 arrays) (Default: 100)
SEC Halation level 1 to 4095 (Default: 3800) Input a value.
kV adjustable mode ON (Default) Select one item.
OFF
Dose table (16 arrays) 0 to 1000 Input a value.
S/N table (16 arrays) 0 to 500 Input a value.
Fluoroscopy (basic) ABC tube voltage (low) [kV] 50 [kV] to 125 [kV] Input a value.
(Default: 70)
ABC tube voltage (high) [kV] 50 [kV] to 125 [kV] Input a value.
(Default: 80)
Fluoroscopic focus Extremely small focus (Setting Select one item.
is not possible.)
Small focus (Default)
Medium focus
Large focus
Fluoroscopy (pulsed) Pulse rate 1 to 30 [f/s] Select the desired number.
Radiographic image DA acquisition rate 1 to 60 [f/s] Select the desired number.
acquisition DSA acquisition rate 1/3 to 60 [f/s] Select the desired number.
S-DSA acquisition rate 1/3 to 15 [f/s] Select the desired number.
Destination Japan
USA Select one item.
Europe etc. (regions other (Display only)
than Japan and USA)
Program No. 1 to 32 (Default: 1) Input a value.
Number of fluoroscopy 4 (Low/Middle/Normal/High) Select one item.
modes
3 (Low/Normal/High)
2 (Normal/High)
Parameter set Low Middle Normal High Display only
I.I. incident dose Low Low Low Low Select one item.
Fluoroscopy mode Normal Normal Normal Normal
High High High High
Pulse rate [f/s] 1 to 30 1 to 30 1 to 30 1 to 30 Select one item.
Beam Filter BF1: Cu 0.2 BF1 BF1 BF1 BF1 Select one item.
BF1: Cu 0.3 BF2 BF2 BF2 BF2
BLA-900A BF1: Al 1.8 BF3 BF3 BF3 BF3
BF1: Cu 0.5 BF4 BF4 BF4 BF4
Beam Filter BF1: Cu 0.2 BF1 BF1 BF1 BF1 Select one item.
BLA-800C BF2: Cu 0.3 BF2 BF2 BF2 BF2
BLA-800A BF3: Al 1.8 BF3 BF3 BF3 BF3
Dose Limit Low Low Low Normal Select one item.
Normal Normal Normal High
ABC tube voltage Low Low Low Low Select one item.
High High High High
Beam Filter Auto Control ON Select one item.
OFF (Default)
Auto Dose Control ON Select one item.
OFF (Default)
ADC Dose Normal Select one item depending
High on the "I.I. Entrance
Dose".
213
No. 2J308-036EN*I
To satisfy the requirements of IEC60601-2-43, the standard air kerma rate (= patient
entrance dose) in fluoroscopy Low mode must not exceed half the standard air
kerma rate in NormaTl mode.
Do not set the "High" dose limit for Low/Middle/Normal modes.

Although 2 modes are selectable, do not set 2 modes when the requirements of
IEC60601-2-43 are to be satisfied.
NOTE: When the air kerma rate in fluoroscopy Low mode is changed to 1/2 or
less that in Normal mode, note the following ratios.
 Beam Filter : F5 (Cu 0.9):F4 (Cu 0.5):F2 (Cu 0.3):F1 (Cu 0.2):
F3 (Al 1.8)
= 0.6:0.7:0.8:1.0:1.5 (at 80 kV)
 ABC tube voltage : Low:High = 1.2:1.0
(Example) When the beam filter is changed from F1 (Cu 0.2) to

F2 (Cu 0.3), the standard air kerma rate is changed to 0.85.
214
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(k) DFP (image processor) image quality setting
V4.30 or later
215
No. 2J308-036EN*I

*1
Fluoro Roadmapping Image Process ON (Default) Select one item.
*1
OFF
F-ACT Control Type Type-A Select one item.
Type-B (Default)
Target kV Offset [kV] 0.00 to 10.00 (default: 5.00) Input a value.
Estimate kV Range [kV] 5.00 to 30.00 (default: 15.00) Input a value.
ADC Parameter Change Point (From Thin) 1.0 to 2.0 (default: 1.5) Input a value.
ADC Parameter Change Point (From Thick) 0.5 to 1.0 (default: 0.7) Input a value.
Application of the changed window width of OFF (Default) Select one item.
the mask image (DSA image) for
fluoroscopic roadmapping.
*2 ON
*1) If ON was set when performing SEC adjustment during DSA, be sure to change
this setting to OFF. When adjustment is completed, return the setting to the
original setting.
*2) Setting is possible in the software of V4.30 or later.
216
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(l) Security setting
CAUTION: After the Security Setting is changed and [Save] is pressed, be sure
to restart the system. The changed Security Setting is not applied
and system operation is unstable until the system is restarted.
Item Selection/input item Remarks

HIPAA HIPAA Mode ON/OFF (Default) HIPAA mode ON/OFF setting
User Management ON/OFF (Default) User management function ON/OFF
setting
ON is automatically set when HIPAA mode
is ON.
Audit Trail ON/OFF (Default) Audit Log recording ON/OFF setting
Selectable when HIPAA mode is ON
Emergency Only Logon Exclusive selection Whether automatic study start is performed
Logon Auto Start Study at the time of Emergency Logon
Setting (Default when the Selectable when HIPAA mode is ON
HIPAA is ON)
Remote Remote ON/OFF (Default) Remote maintenance function ON/OFF
Maintenance Maintenance setting
Enable/Disable Exclusive selection Remote maintenance function
enable/disable setting
Selectable when the remote maintenance
function is ON
217
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(m) Version information
218
No. 2J308-036EN*I
219
No. 2J308-036EN*I
220
No. 2J308-036EN*I
221
No. 2J308-036EN*I

General Drawing No. Perform checks at the time
of part replacement.
Group
Change the contents as
Revision required.
(5) Directories
(a) Purpose
 Naming (definition of the logical name) can be performed for data transfer of
Windows files converted with the Database Output function or Conversion function.
 The directories related to the names can be defined.
 The system must be restarted after information is changed.
(b) Display window
(c) Display items

1 Information display area The information for the registered directory is
displayed.
2 [Add] Opens the window for directory registration (refer to
the figure below).
3 [Edit] Allows editing of the information of the selected
directory (refer to the figure below).
4 [Remove] Deletes the selected directory.
222
No. 2J308-036EN*I
CAUTION: Do not delete "LOCAL", which is registered by default. Doing so will cause
abnormalities in some functions, such as the Conversion function.
(d) Add Edit Information

1 Mnemonic Name The mnemonic name is entered here.
2 Host Name The host name can be selected from the pulldown
list. For the registration procedure for the host
name, refer to (e) "Host Add/Del".
3 [Host Add/Del] Displays the dialog for host registration.
4 Share The shared folder name is entered here.
5 Domain The domain name is entered here.
6 User The shared user name is entered here.
7 Password The shared password is entered here.
8 Confirm password The shared password is entered again here.
9 [OK] Registers the entries and closes the dialog.
10 [Cancel] Cancels the entries and closes the dialog.
11 [Apply] Registers the entries.
223
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(e) Host Add/Del

1 Information display area The registered host information (host name, IP
address) is displayed here.
2 [Ping] Pings the selected host and displays the results.
The results and the corresponding statuses are
shown below.
Status Displayed result
Host found The Host is Alive
Host not found The Host is Not Alive
3 [Add] Opens the window for adding a host name (refer to

the figure below).
4 [Edit] Opens the window for editing the selected host
name (refer to the figure below).
5 [Remove] Deletes the selected host name.
6 [Close] Closes the dialog for host registration.
224
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(f) Advanced TCP Address

1 Host Name The host name is entered here.
2 IP Address The IP address is entered here.
3 [Find] Searches for the entered host name within the
network. If the host name is found, the
corresponding IP address is automatically entered.
4 [OK] Saves the entries and closes the dialog.
5 [Cancel] Cancels the entries and closes the dialog.
225
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(6) Security Management (*Do not use this function.)
(a) Firewall Settings
<1> Purpose
To set a Windows firewall
<2> Display window
226
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) TCP/IP Filter Settings
<1> Purpose
Settings for Windows TCP/IP filtering
<2> Display window
227
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(7) Service Management
(a) Advanced Service
<1> Purpose
To install or update third-party vendor licenses
<2> Display window
<3> Display items

1 Status Whether the third-party vendor license is installed or
not is displayed.
 When the license is installed: Installed
 When the license is not installed: Uninstalled
2 Install Date The date on which the third-party vendor license
was installed is displayed.
3 Expiry Date The expiry date of the third-party vendor license is
displayed. Functions that require the third-party
vendor license are disabled when the expiry date is
passed.
4 [Install] Executes installation of the third-party vendor
license. The license CD must be inserted into the
DVD drive for installation.
5 [Uninstall] Executes uninstallation of the third-party vendor
license. Be aware that once uninstallation is
performed, the license CD is required for
reinstallation.
228
No. 2J308-036EN*I
5.2.6 Service tool error messages
The list of messages is displayed in the message window when the [Config.] - "System" is
pressed in the main window of the service tool or when the configuration is changed and the
[Save] button is pressed.
229
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Example Error message Text of displayed error message

Probable cause Explanation of probable mechanism
Countermeasures Explanation of required countermeasures
1 Error message ERROR!!
Data communications with other components failed.
Please check connection or the power supply for other
components.
Probable cause Data communication with components such as the KXO failed.
Countermeasures Check the power supply for the other components, such as the
KXO.
File Read Error. Please check existence of a file.
File Name: ***
Probable cause The setting data required for service setting does not exist.
Countermeasures Check whether required file (whose name is displayed) exists.
File Write Error. Please check the attribute of a file.
File Name: ***
Probable cause File writing failed.
Countermeasures Check the attributes of the file whose name is displayed and
remove the ReadOnly attribute.
Please collect logs and contact your service personnel.
Probable cause The system data file is damaged.
Countermeasures Recover the system with the recovery disk or collect the logs
and contact your service representative.
The fatal error occurred.
Please collect logs and contact your service personnel.
Countermeasures Problem in the system configuration or the system data is
damaged.
Countermeasures Recover the system with the recovery disk or collect the logs
and contact your service representative.
230
No. 2J308-036EN*I
5.2.7 Backing up the system files
(1) Turn the power of the Infinix-i series system ON.
(2) Press [Ctrl] + [Alt] + [Del] to display the system reset screen.
(3) Use the right mouse button to double-click the blue task bar on the top of the system reset
screen and close the screen.
Press the Windows key to display the Windows task bar and select "Start" –
"All Programs" – "Accessories" – "System Tools" – "Backup".
(4) The dialog shown below opens. Click [OK] to close the dialog.
(5) Click Advanced Mode (circled section in the figure below).
231
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(6) Click "Automated System Recovery Wizard".
(7) Click [Next].
232
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(8) Enter "C:\WINDOWS\repair\Backup.bkf" under "Backup media or file name".

Click [Next].
(9) Click [Finish].
233
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(10) Backup processing starts. Do not perform operation in the window until processing is
completed.
234
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(11) When backup processing is completed, the following two error dialogs are displayed in
succession. They can be ignored. Click [OK] to close them.
(12) Click [Close].
235
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(13) Click [] in the top-right corner of the dialog to terminate backup processing.
236
No. 2J308-036EN*I
5.2.8 3D-Angio setting (option)
(1) Setting the computer name of the 3D reconstruction PC/angiography workstation
If two or more 3D-Angio systems exist on the same network, two or more 3D
reconstruction PCs/angiography workstation with the same computer name may exist on
the network. Therefore, it is necessary to change the default computer name to a unique
computer name.
Perform the following procedure to change the computer name for the 3D reconstruction
PC/angiography workstation.
(a) Start up the service tool and select "Command Line" in the [Utils] tab.
(b) Enter the following parameter while "NT Command Interpretor" is selected and press
the [Go] button.
Parameter: notepad f:\celeve\TxsSite\Txs3d\Txs3dSite.ini
(c) When Notepad opens, change "3D-Angio" shown below to the desired computer
name.
(e.g. 3D-Angio1, 3D-Angio2, etc.)
Do not change parts other than the name.
(Omitted)
;
; Information related to the network drive
;
; Setup of a network drive connection

[NetworkDriveConnection]
; A drive name to connect
DriveName = o:
; The network pass name of a place of a connection
===> NetworkPathName = \\3D-Angio\A3D_DRV
; User name for the connection

UserName = user
; Password for the connection
Password = user
(d) After editing is completed, overwrite the file and terminate the operation.
(e) This completes the computer name change procedure.
237
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Setting the IP address of the 3D reconstruction PC/angiography workstation
Set the IP address of the 3D reconstruction PC so that the 3D reconstruction PC/

angiography workstation can be found by the DFP-8000A.
(a) Start up the service tool and select "Directories" in the [Config.] tab.
(b) Click the [Add] button. The corresponding dialog opens. Click the [Host Add/Del]
button in the dialog.
(c) The "Host Add/Del" dialog opens. Click the [Add] button in the dialog and enter the
computer name of the 3D reconstruction PC/angiography workstation in the Host
Name section. Enter the IP address of the 3D reconstruction PC in the IP address
section and press "OK".
(d) This completes setting of the IP address of the 3D reconstruction PC/angiography

workstation.
(3) Setting the FPD orientation (TFP-1216A)
Set the FPD orientation (portrait/landscape) during 3D calibration image acquisition and
during 3D image acquisition.
(a) Using the DFP-8000A service tool, select [Config.] - "System".
(b) Select "DFP" (DFP-8000A Setting).
(c) Select "Portrait" or "Landscape" as the FPD orientation in the 3D-Angio and then
press the [SAVE] button.
CAUTION: Precautions when the FPD orientation is changed
1. After the FPD orientation is changed, update the 3D calibration

table. If the table is not updated, calibration may not be
performed correctly. This may adversely affect 3D
reconstruction images, resulting in incorrect diagnosis.
2. For 3D images acquired before changing the FPD orientation,

perform 3D reconstruction processing before changing the
FPD orientation. After the FPD orientation is changed,
calibration may not be performed correctly. This may
adversely affect 3D reconstruction images, resulting in
incorrect diagnosis.
(4) Communication setting with the 3D reconstruction PC/angiography workstation
If both of the following items are satisfied, perform communication setting as described in
steps (a) to (d).
 When the 3D roadmap option is not installed in the 3D reconstruction PC/angiography

workstation
 When one or more of the following functions are used in the 3D reconstruction
PC/angiography workstation
- Angio Pos./Gantry Pos./Slice Select functions are used in a system with the CT scan
system and angiography workstation used in combination
- TAVR support function (option)
238
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<Setting procedure>
(a) Start up the service tool and select "Command Line" in the [Utils] tab.
(b) Enter the following parameter while "NT Command Interpretor" is selected and press
the [Go] button.
Parameter: notepad f:\celeve\TxsSite\Txs3d\Txs3dSite.ini
(c) Notepad starts up and the file opens.
Under "Option setting" in the lower part of the opened file, change the setting for
"ClinicalApplication" to "Exist". If "Exist" has already been set, do not change the
setting (just close the file).
;
; Option setting
;
[OPTION]
; CLinical application option on ReconPC
; Exist or NotExist
ClinicalApplication = Exist Change the setting.
(d) After the setting has been changed, save and close the file.
(The new setting becomes effective when the system is restarted.)
239
No. 2J308-036EN*I
5.2.9 Initial setting for the additional filter
Initial setting for the applicable additional filter must be performed according to the system
configuration. The initial setting procedure is described below.
(1) Select "Beam Filter Setup Utility" from [Utils] tab in Service mode and click the [Go] button.
The window below appears.
CAUTION: When the BLA setting is changed, be sure to restart the system. Then perform
other settings.
NOTE: When this utility is started up, the message "setup data error! beam filter xxxxxx.
please setup data" appears because the additional filter setting values do not
correspond to the actual BLA configuration. This message stops appearing after the
setting procedures in this section are completed.
(2)
(3)
(4)
(7)
(6)
(2) Set the [Area].
The items that can be selected in [Area] are JPN for Japan, USA for the United States,
and OTHER for other areas.
(3) Enter the [Ser No.].
Enter the BLA Serial No. for the BLA-800A and BLA-800C.
* Entry of the serial number is not required for the BLA-900A.
240
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(4) Click the [Set] button. Confirm that the automatically entered additional filter information
and safety beam filter information correspond to the settings in (2) and (3).
NOTE: It is not necessary to change the additional filter information and safety beam filter
information that is entered automatically. Checking the "Customize" checkbox makes
it possible to change this information manually.
(5) In DP/BP systems, set items (2) to (4) for "Lateral (2nd)" as well.
(6) Click the [Save] button to apply the settings.
(7) Click the [Quit] button to quit the software.
NOTE: When the system has not started properly and the settings are saved, a "Failed to
download!" error occurs. Confirm that the system has started properly and then
perform the setting procedure again.
If only the beam limiting device and additional filters are to be replaced, F-ACT
adjustment and Dose Limit adjustment are required in addition to the changes in the
additional filter setting. In this case, refer to sections 11 and 12.
(8) From the [Utils] tab in Service mode, select "Fluoro Control Parameter Setup Utility" and
click the [Go] button to display the following screen.
(V4.25 or earlier)
(9)
(10) (12) (13)
241
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(V4.30 or later)
(* This screen is for the BP configuration.)
(9) Select [Dose Type].
If "JPN" has been selected in [AREA] in "Fluoro ABC mAs Control Setup Utility", select
[JPN] here.
If an area other than "JPN" has been selected, select "HHS".
(10) Click the [Set Default] button.
After clicking the button, confirm that values have already been entered for "Fluoroscopy
Control Parameter" and "Beam Filter Control Parameter for SID" (V4.25 or earlier) or
"Beam Filter Control Parameter" (V4.30 or later).
(11) For DP/BP systems, also perform setting for [Lateral (2nd)] by performing steps (8) and
(9).
NOTE: 1. If the values do not change from the default values even after the [Set Default]
button is clicked, the [Save] button cannot be clicked.
In this case, saving is not required.
2. If setting or saving is attempted while the system is not operating properly, a

download error showing "Failed to download!" occurs. After confirming that the
system is operating properly, perform setting again.
3. In the software of V4.30 or later, the fluoroscopic beam filter control parameters can
be set according to the thickness of the object and the SID. The beam filter can be
set for each combination of the thickness (Thickness 3 and 4) and SID (SID1 to 3).
For Thickness 1 and 2, however, one beam filter type is set regardless of the SID.
242
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(13) Click the [Quit] button to exit the software.
NOTE: If only the beam limiting device and the additional filter are to be replaced, it is
necessary to perform F-ACT adjustment and DOSE Limit adjustment in addition to
changing the additional filter setting. For these procedures, refer to sections 11 and 12.
(14) From the [Utils] tab in Service mode, select "Radiography Control Parameter Setup Utility"
and click the [Go] button to display the following screen.
(This screen is for the BP configuration.)
243
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(15) Change the settings as required.
Basically, the default settings are to be used.
(16) After the settings are changed, click the [Save] button to apply the settings.
NOTE: 1. If the values do not change from the default values even after the [Set Default]
button is clicked, the [Save] button cannot be clicked.
In this case, saving is not required.
2. If setting or saving is attempted while the system is not operating properly, a

download error showing "Failed to download!" occurs. After confirming that the
system is operating properly, perform setting again.
(17) Click the [Cancel] button to exit the software.
NOTE: If only the beam limiting device and the additional filter are to be replaced, it is
necessary to perform F-ACT adjustment and DOSE Limit adjustment in addition to
changing the additional filter setting. For these procedures, refer to sections 11 and 12.
244
No. 2J308-036EN*I
5.3 XTP-8100G Setting
None
Position data reset procedure (auto scaling)
The auto scaling function resets the position data.
(1) Service mode setting
Set MIO PWB (A03) DIP SW S1-1 to ON (service mode function is enabled).
(2) Setting the movement axis for adjustment
Select the axis using MIO PWB (A03) RSW S6 (selection of the axis for auto scaling).
RSW S6 Target axis

1 Main rotation
2 Slide
3 Detector near/away movement
4 Support column rotation (DP system only)
(3) Auto scaling
(a) Auto scaling is started by pressing the trigger switch of the Hyper handle or the [START]
switch on the extension control panel (this is applicable to all axes other than the
support column rotation axis)
Specifications for auto scaling movement
<1> Movement is performed in the direction that results in the Initial SW (for detecting
the reference position) being turned ON.
<2> Moves to the reference position, emits a sound indicating that movement is
completed, and completes auto scaling.
Reference position: Main rotation = 0°, Slide = CRA LIMIT, Detector near/away
movement = 1220 mm
245
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) Auto scaling is started by rotating the C-arm while holding down the park switch.
(Target axis: Support column rotation axis)
While holding down the park switch, manually rotate the C-arm to the reference position
and release the park switch.
Reference position: Column rotation = 0
CAUTION: 1. The movement speed during the initial teaching operation is slow.
2. When the trigger switch or the START switch is released, movement stops.
When they are pressed again, movement resumes. (Deadman type)
3. Because interference or interlock does not function during auto scaling, take
note of the start position (for example) while performing operation.
(4) Coolant circulator setting (for water-cooled FPD)
Temperature 26°C
246
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Potentiometer automatic adjustment procedures (auto scaling)
Auto scaling automatically adjusts the potentiometer gain and offset. Since auto scaling also
resets the encoder, it should be performed for the axes without potentiometers.
For the potentiometer mounting procedures, refer to subsection 5.3.7 "Replacing the
potentiometers" in the service manual (2D308-016EN).
[CAS-830A]
Set MIO PWB (A03) DIP SW S1-1 to ON (service mode function is enabled).
[CAS-830B]
Set DIP SW S10-1 on the MIO PWB (A03) to ON (Service mode enabled).
Select the axis for which the potentiometer gain and offset are adjusted with MIO PWB (A03)
RSW S6 (selection of the axis for auto scaling).
RSW S6 Target axis

1 Main rotation
2 Slide
4 Ceiling longitudinal movement
5 Ceiling lateral movement
6 Support column rotation
7 FPD rotation (CAS-830A with TFP-1216A or CAS-830B)
(3) Auto scaling
switch on the extension control panel (CAS-830A with TFP-1216A/applicable axes other
than FPD rotation).
Specifications for auto-scaling movement
<2> Movement is performed to the reference position, a sound indicating that

movement is completed is emitted, and auto scaling is completed.
Reference position: Main rotation = 0, sliding = CRA limit, detector near/away
movement = away limit (systems with CAS-830A and TFP-800A/A1)/near limit
(systems other than those with CAS-830A and TFP-800A/A1), ceiling longitudinal
movement = patient head-end limit, ceiling lateral movement = patient left-end limit,
column rotation = patient left rotation limit, FPD rotation = 0 (CAS-830B only)
247
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) Auto scaling is started by pressing the trigger switch of the Hyper handle or the [START]
switch on the extension control panel (for FPD rotation for systems with TFP-1216A)
<1> Auto scaling moves in the direction which results in the Initial SW (for detecting the
reference position) being turned ON.
Initial SW position: FPD rotation = 0
If the start position is already the reference position, auto scaling starts from the
movement in <2>.
<2> Moves to the LIMIT positions at both ends of the target movement axis.
<3> Operates to the set position, issues a completion sound when movement is
completed, and finishes auto scaling.
Set position: FPD rotation = 0
2. When the trigger switch or the START switch is released, movement

stops. When they are pressed again, movement resumes. (Deadman
type)
3. Because interference or interlock does not function during auto scaling,

take note of the start position (for example) while performing operation.
4. After auto scaling is terminated, the completion sound is generated. If

the sound is not generated, there is a possibility that auto scaling was
not performed properly. Check the stroke.
(4) FPD coolant circulator setting
(a) For the TFP-1216A with the single-plate-type heat exchanger
Temperature 20°C
(b) For the TFP-800A/A1, TFP-1200A, and TFP-1216A with the double-plate-type heat
exchanger
Temperature 26°C
248
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(5) Adjustment procedures for the gas spring for the slide duct hose
When sliding the C-arm from CRA 50 to CAU/CRA 0, if the rotation duct clamp is not
returned to the position shown in the figure below (ceiling orientation), adjust the gas spring
mounting position. First, loosen the two securing bolts and the locknut shown in the following
figure, rotate the adjustment bolt in the direction indicated by the arrow, and move the gas
spring mounting plate in direction (A). After adjustment, retighten the securing bolts with a
tightening torque of 9.81 Nm (100 kgfcm).
Place the excess length of the duct hose within the clamp so that the duct hose does not
interfere with the floor rotation section or the support column rotation section.
249
No. 2J308-036EN*I
NOTE: When the C-arm is slid in the CRA direction after it is set to a slide angle of between
0 and CAU 90 and remains in the same position for a long time, a movement
sound may be generated by the oil-seal section of the gas spring (refer to the figure
above) at the start of movement. (Note that "long time" here refers to approximately
half a day, but this may vary depending on the temperature and relative humidity.)
The movement sound can be eliminated by sliding the arm back and forth several
times within the range from 0 to CRA 50.
CAUTION: Do not apply any lubricant (such as grease) to the rod of the gas spring in an
attempt to eliminate the movement sound. The application of lubricant may
cause dust to adhere to the rod and result in damage to the oil-seal section or
another part of the gas spring.
250
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Adjustment of the initial position (initial-teaching)
An Initial SW is provided for each axis of the support unit to return the system to the reference
position. However, adjustment of the mounting position of the Initial SW is difficult in some axes.
To clear this problem, the reference position of each axis is registered in the system so that return
to the reference position becomes possible without adjusting the mounting position of the switches.
(1) Setting to service mode
Set Dip SW S10-1 of the MIO PWB (A03) to ON (service mode is enabled).
(2) Selecting the movement axis to be adjusted
Select the target axis of adjustment using RSW S6 of the MIO PWB (A03) (initial-teaching
target axis selection).
RSW S6 Target axis Reference position

1 Main rotation (0 deg)
2 Sliding (+50 deg)
3 Detector near/away movement (900 mm)
4 Floor rotation (0 deg)
5 Support column rotation (0 deg)
6 FPD rotation (0 deg)
7 BLA rotation* (0 deg)
* BLA rotation is only for systems with the BLA-800C.
(3) Move the system to the reference position specified above. Note that the system does not
stop at the stroke limit. Be aware of this.
(a) Initial position adjustment procedure
Perform movement to reach the initial position on the selected axis by manually
operating the unit from the console. Movement is possible at low speed by pressing the
override key.
The initial position adjustment procedure is described below. An angle meter and a
level are needed in this procedure.
251
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<1> Place a level on the beam limiting device and adjust the angle to make it level.
(Arm main rotation axis) 0
<2> Place the angle meter on the SID drive frame and adjust the angle to 40.
(Arm sliding axis) When an angle meter is used: +50
252
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<3> Perform adjustment by placing a ruler against the unit so that the distance
between the top of the roller mounting section of the sliding axis and the arm end
is the length shown in parentheses in the figure below.
(Arm sliding axis) When adjustment is performed using the mark on the unit
as a reference line: +50
253
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<4> Perform adjustment using a ruler so that upper surface of the FPD near/away
movement drive section frame is aligned with the mark.
(SID axis) 900 mm
Mark
Upper surface of the FPD
near/away movement drive
section frame
<5> Perform adjustment so that four screw holes are visible.
(Floor rotation axis) 0
254
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<6> Perform adjustment so that the marks are aligned with each other.
(Column rotation axis) 0
<7> Set the arm main rotation axis to 90.0. Place a level on the FPD mounting
surface and perform adjustment to make it level.
(FPD rotation axis) 0
255
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<8> Set the arm main rotation axis to 90.0. Place a level on the top of the beam
limiting device and perform adjustment to make it level.
(Beam limiting device rotation (only for systems with an BLA-800C)) 0
(4) Simultaneously, press [Override] and [0] on the numeric keypad on the Hyper-handle or the
extension operating panel. (The completion sound is generated twice consecutively.
The encoder is reset to the initial position at this time.)
(5) Press the trigger switch of the Hyper-handle or the [START] switch of the extension operating
panel. The system moves along the target axis in the direction in which the Initial SW is
activated.
(6) The system stops at the initialize sensor position (the completion sound is generated once
and initial teaching for the 1st axis is completed).
(7) If there are other target axes, repeat steps (2) to (6).
(8) Set Dip SW10-1 on the MIO PWB (A03) to OFF (service mode function enabled) to complete
adjustment.
CAUTION: 1. Checks for interference and interlocks are released during initial teaching. Pay
careful attention to prevent interference between the system and nearby
equipment, the walls, and the floor at the time of adjustment.
2. The system moves at a slow speed during initial-teaching operation.
3. The system moves only while the trigger switch or the [START] switch is held
down (deadman type operation).
4. If adjustment is canceled and the target axis is to be readjusted, reset RSW6 to 0

before starting step (2).
5. Set Dip SW1-2 of the CPU to ON to initialize the initial position (overwritten with
the default value).
6. When initial-teaching operation is completed, quit service mode and perform full
stroke movement (confirm that the final limit switch is not OFF and the system
does not come into contact with the mechanical stopper).
256
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(9) Coolant circulator unit setting
Temperature 26°C
(a) Adjustment procedures for the gas spring for the slide duct hose
When sliding the C-arm from CRA 50 to CAU/CRA 0, if the rotation duct clamp is not
returned to the position shown in the figure below (ceiling orientation), adjust the gas
spring mounting position. First, loosen the two securing bolts and the locknut shown in
the following figure, rotate the adjustment bolt in the direction indicated by the arrow,
and move the gas spring mounting plate in direction (A). After adjustment, retighten the
securing bolts with a tightening torque of 9.81 Nm (100 kgfcm).
Place the excess length of the duct hose within the clamp so that the duct hose does
not interfere with the floor rotation section or the support column rotation section.
NOTE: When the C-arm is slid in the CRA direction after it is set to a slide angle of between 0
and CAU 90 and remains in the same position for a long time, a movement sound may
be generated by the oil-seal section of the gas spring (refer to the figure above) at the
start of movement. (Note that "long time" here refers to approximately half a day, but this
may vary depending on the temperature and relative humidity.)
The movement sound can be eliminated by sliding the arm back and forth several times
within the range from 0 to CRA 50.
257
No. 2J308-036EN*I
CAUTION: Do not apply any lubricant (such as grease) to the rod of the gas spring in an
attempt to eliminate the movement sound. The application of lubricant may cause
dust to adhere to the rod and result in damage to the oil-seal section or another
part of the gas spring.
(b) Adjusting the clearance between the floor-rotating arm and the floor
Confirm that the clearance between the toe guard plate of the floor-rotating arm and the
floor is less than 9 mm within the operating range. (The toe guard plate is located under
the floor-rotating arm outer cover.)
This is necessary to prevent the operator's toes from being caught between the
floor-rotating arm and the floor.
If the clearance is more than 9 mm, remove the floor-rotating arm outer cover and
loosen the toe guard part mounting screws (shown in the figure below) for height
adjustment. Perform adjustment so that the clearance at all sections is less than 9 mm
within the operating range.
Toe guard parts

(also provided in
the opposite side)
Toe guard parts
258
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Potentiometer automatic adjustment procedures (auto scaling)
Auto scaling automatically adjusts the potentiometer gain and offset. Since auto scaling also
resets the encoder, it should be performed for the axes without potentiometers.
For the potentiometer mounting procedures, refer to subsection 5.3.7 "Replacing the
potentiometers" in the service manual (2D308-016EN).
Set DIP SW S10-1 on the MIO PWB (A03) to ON. (Service mode function is enabled.)
Select the axis for which the potentiometer gain and offset are adjusted using RSW S6 on the
MIO PWB (A03). (Selection of the axis for auto scaling)
RSW S6 Target axis

1 Main rotation
2 Slide
4 Ceiling longitudinal movement
5 Ceiling lateral movement
6 FPD rotation (only for systems with the 12" FPD)
7 Detector up/down movement
8 Tube up/down movement
(3) Auto scaling
switch on the extension control panel (this is applicable to all axes other than detector
near/away movement and tube near/away movement).
Specifications for auto-scaling movement
<2> Movement is performed to the reference position, a sound indicating that

movement is completed is emitted, and auto scaling is completed.
Reference position: Main rotation = 0, sliding = CRA limit, detector near/away
movement = away limit, ceiling longitudinal movement = patient head-end limit,
ceiling lateral movement = patient left-end limit, FPD rotation = 0
259
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) Pressing the trigger switch on the Hyper-handle or the [START] switch on the expanded
control panel activates auto scaling (for the detector near/away and tube near/away
movement axes).
<1> Auto scaling moves in the direction that results in the Initial SW (for detecting the
reference position) being turned ON.
Initial SW position of the target axis: Detector near/away movement, tube

near/away movement = away limit
If the start position is already at the reference position, auto scaling starts from the
movement in <2>.
<2> Moves to the LIMIT positions at both ends of the target movement axis.
<3> Moves to the set position, emits a sound indicating that movement is completed,
and finishes auto scaling.
Set position for the target axis: Detector near/away movement, tube
near/away movement = 0 cm
2. When the trigger switch or the START switch is released, movement

stops. When the switch is pressed again, movement is resumed
(deadman-type switch).
3. Because the interference interlock does not function during auto

scaling, take note of the start position while operating the system.
Pay particular attention to the position of the CAS-810A and CAT-850B
due to the long stroke of main rotation scaling.
4. After auto scaling is terminated, the completion sound is generated.

If the sound is not generated, there is a possibility that auto scaling was
not performed properly. Check the stroke.
5. If operation stops while auto scaling for the ceiling longitudinal/lateral

axis is performed, check whether the ceiling travel roller or rails are dirty
or damaged. If no abnormality is found, change the torque boost value
referring to subsection 5.3.3 "Replacing the inverters" in the service
manual (2D308-016EN).
6. For systems in which the CAS-820B (12" FPD) is used in combination,

observe the following precautions.
 Auto scaling for the FPD rotation axis can be performed only when
the SID is set in the range from 95 to 120 cm. Perform scaling for
the SID first.
 Auto scaling for the SID axis is disabled when FPD rotation is other
than 0°. Confirm that the positional data is set to 0° and that there is
no interference between the FPD and the cover beforehand.
(4) Coolant circulator setting
Temperature 26°C
260
No. 2J308-036EN*I
5.8 Checking the Ceiling Installation Position for the CAS-830A, CAS-830B
5.8.1 Checking the installation position in the ceiling longitudinal direction
Check the installation position in the ceiling longitudinal direction by following the procedures
below.
(1) Measurement procedures
(a) Support unit measurement position
CAS-830A, CAS-830B : C-arm longitudinal head-end set position

(CRA/CAU = 0°, LAO = 90°)
(b) Hang the weight from the detector front center position of the CAS-830A,
CAS-830B and place a mark on the floor indicating the center position.
(c) Measure distances A and B in the figure below.
(d) If the measured values differ from those in the figure below, move the dogs at both
ends of the longitudinal stroke to adjust the center position.
After the dog positions have been adjusted, be sure to perform the automatic
adjustment (auto-scaling) procedures for the potentiometer again.
(2) Distance to be measured for check
(a) CAS-830A, CAS-830B (including the CAS-830A [0°/90°/180°] for the DP-i system)
Isocenter
Distance B
1100  5
CAS-830A Ceiling rail (1800) CAT-850B Base plate
(Unit: mm)
261
No. 2J308-036EN*I
5.9 Checking the Ceiling Installation Position for the CAS-820B
5.9.1 Checking the installation position in the ceiling longitudinal direction
Check the installation position in the ceiling longitudinal direction by following the procedures
below.
(1) Measurement procedures
(a) Support unit measurement position
CAS-820B : Biplane set position (CRA/CAU = 0°, LAO = 90°)
(b) Hang the weight from the detector front center position of the CAS-820B and place a
mark on the floor indicating the center position.
(c) Measure distance A in the figure below.
(d) If the measured values differ from those in the figure below, move the dogs at both
ends of the longitudinal stroke to adjust the center position.
After the dog positions have been adjusted, be sure to perform the automatic
adjustment (auto-scaling) procedures for the potentiometer again.
(2) Distance to be measured for check
(a) CAS-820B
CAS-820B ceiling rail

Isocenter
Distance A
CAT-850B base plate
(1100)
CAS-880A subbase plate
(1800)
(Unit: mm)
262
No. 2J308-036EN*I
5.9.2 Checking the installation status of the CAS-820B
Check the following clearances.
(1) Clearance between the FRP cover and the floor
Set the -arm to LAO/RAO = 0° and measure the clearance between the FRP cover of the
X-ray tube holder and the floor.
The clearance must be 5 mm or more.
5 mm or more
5 mm or more
Floor surface
20
263
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Clearance between the C-arm holder cover and the -arm
(a) Move the C-arm to the set position by support column rotation. The error should be
minimal.
(b) Perform auto parking or auto setting for the -arm and stop the arm at the side of the
C-arm holder.
(c) Measure the clearance between the C-arm holder side cover and the -arm.
225 mm or more 145 mm or more
264
No. 2J308-036EN*I
5.10 Changing the Ceiling Longitudinal Stroke
If it is necessary to change the limit position in the ceiling longitudinal direction for the
CAS-820B, CAS-830A, CAS-830B, follow the procedures below.
<1> Change the limit switch dog position.
Shift the detection position for the stroke limit and secure the dog.
<2> Using the DFP-8000A service tool, select [Config.]  "System"  "CAS" and enter the data
for "Axis Movement".
* To validate the data, the system must be rebooted twice.
<3> Execute auto scaling for the applicable axis.
* If the limit switch is turned ON within the stroke range set above, auto scaling is
interrupted. Adjust the dog position correctly.
<4> Exit CAS service mode. Then perform operation over the entire stroke to confirm that
operation stops correctly within the stroke.
CAUTION: 1. After the ceiling longitudinal stroke is changed, the stored auto-positioning target
positions (park positions) may not be reproduced. In this case, change the
target positions in AutoPos Service Mode.
2. The head-end limit switch detection position is the reference position. Change
the dog position correctly and confirm that the isocenter position (0 cm in the
longitudinal direction) has not been changed as a result of the adjustment.
265
No. 2J308-036EN*I
5.11.1 Adjustment items
(1) Adjustment for position detection (auto scaling)
This table uses software to adjust the position detection of the potentiometer. At the time
of installation, it is necessary to use software to digitize and store the adjustments of the
gain and offset of the analog voltage response to the potentiometer input. This
procedure is called the auto scaling operation, and this function is called the auto scaling
function.
To perform auto scaling operation, service adjustment mode must be entered by setting
rotary switches RSW1, RSW2, and RSW3 on the TABLE CONT. PWB to 8. The axis to
be adjusted can be switched in the order tabletop vertical movement  tabletop
longitudinal movement  tabletop lateral movement  tabletop rotation by pressing
push switch S3.
CAUTION: For a pair of axes targeted for adjustment, when only one axis is stored (with
only one side of the step slide test switch on the control panel lit), axis
switching is not performed even when push switch S3 is pressed. To switch
axes, it is necessary to exit service adjustment mode.
Tabletop
Tabletop vertical longitudinal Tabletop lateral
movement movement movement Tabletop rotation
Pressing the push switch under the condition

of "not adjusted" or "adjustment completed"
allows axis switching.
Service adjustment mode axis switching transition diagram
7SEG. LED display in service adjustment mode
Name of axis 7SEG. LED display Remarks

Tabletop vertical movement P-01 Pressing push switch S3 does not cause axial
Tabletop longitudinal movement P-02 switching except under the condition of "not
adjusted" or "adjustment completed".
Tabletop lateral movement P-03
Tabletop rotation P-04
266
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Tabletop vertical movement
Relationship between the potentiometer and the tabletop vertical position
The recommended positions for installation of the tabletop vertical movement

potentiometer are given in the table below. Perform installation referring to the values in
the table.
Recommended installation position

Conditions to be satisfied
(one of the following positions)
Number of rotations of Potentiometer
Resistance
Distance from floor to top of tabletop potentiometer ADC real display
value []
(2 k/5 rotations) (hexadecimal)
Stroke center position 2.5 0.5 rotations back from 1000  200  0200  66
962.5  20 mm the UP or DOWN limit (019A to 266)
UP limit position – 1664  200  0354  66
1150.0  20 mm (02EE to 03BA)
DOWN limit position – 336  200  00AC  66
775.0  20 mm (0046 to 0112)
(a) Adjustment procedures
Use the Hyper handle or the table vertical movement switch and follow the
procedures below to perform auto scaling.
<1> Move the tabletop vertically to the UP limit. When it reaches the UP limit, the
LED on the corresponding side of the step slide test switch on the control
panel blinks. Press this blinking switch. This results in data being sampled at
the UP limit position. When sampling is completed, the blinking LED light
stops blinking and stays lit.
<2> Move the tabletop vertically to the DOWN limit. When it reaches the DOWN
limit, the LED on the corresponding side of the step slide test switch on the
control panel blinks. Press this blinking switch. This results in data being
sampled at the DOWN-side limit position. When sampling is completed, the
blinking LED stops blinking and stays lit. Now, preset the encoder at this
position.
<3> Procedures <1> and <2> above cause both LEDs of the step slide test switch
on the control panel to light, indicating that auto scaling for tabletop vertical
movement is completed. Either procedure <1> or procedure <2> can be
performed first. Once auto scaling for tabletop vertical movement is
completed (P-01 is displayed on the 7SEG. LED), another session of auto
scaling for tabletop vertical movement cannot be performed. To retry auto
scaling, exit service adjustment mode or turn the power OFF and then ON
again.
CAUTION: Tabletop vertical movement is restricted to a low speed of

10 mm/s in service adjustment mode (normal speed: 20 mm/s).
267
No. 2J308-036EN*I
DOWN (-) side UP (+) side
Mechanical limit
: +767 mm : +1158 mm
Limit switch
: +775 mm : +1150 mm
Software speed
reduction zone
: +785 mm : +1135 mm
Encoder: Count UP
: +775 mm
: +1150 mm
Potentiometer ADC: UP
: +775 mm
: Mechanical limit position

: Limit switch activation position
: Software speed reduction position
: Encoder preset position
: Sampling position for scaling
Status chart of the tabletop vertical position detection sensor
268
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Tabletop longitudinal movement (when the XBSD-850B is used in combination)
Relationship between the potentiometer and the tabletop longitudinal position
The relationship is the same as when the XBSD-850B (stepping kit) is not used in
combination. Refer to item (4).
Use the Hyper handle or the table longitudinal movement free switch and follow the
<1> Move the tabletop longitudinally to the FORWARD mechanical limit. When the
FORWARD limit is reached, the LED on the corresponding side of the step
slide test switch on the control panel blinks. Press this blinking switch. This
results in data being sampled at the FORWARD limit position. When sampling
is completed, the blinking LED stops blinking and stays lit.
<2> Move the tabletop longitudinally to the BACKWARD limit. When the
BACKWARD limit is reached, the LED on the corresponding side of the step
results in data being sampled at the BACKWARD limit position. When
sampling is completed, the blinking LED stops blinking and stays lit.
on the control panel to light, indicating that auto scaling for tabletop
longitudinal movement is completed. Either procedure <1> or procedure <2>
can be performed first. Once auto scaling for tabletop longitudinal movement
is completed (P-02 is displayed on the 7SEG. LED), another session of auto
scaling for tabletop longitudinal movement cannot be performed. To retry auto
again.
CAUTION: When the XBSD-850B is used in combination, only a sensor that

detects the FORWARD limit in the tabletop longitudinal
movement direction is provided. Therefore, when the
BACKWARD limit is to be saved in the memory, it must be saved
only when the tabletop is at the BACKWARD mechanical limit.
(To facilitate potentiometer adjustment, an LED blinks when the
tabletop is within the adjustable range and the limit can be saved
even when the tabletop is not at the mechanical limit. However,
saving of the BACKWARD limit must only be performed at the
BACKWARD mechanical limit.)
NOTE: To limit the tabletop longitudinal movement stroke for narrow spaces, perform
auto scaling over the full stroke, and change the mechanical stopper mounting
position.
269
No. 2J308-036EN*I
FORWARD (-) side BACKWARD (+) side
Mechanical limit
: 0 mm : +1350 mm
Limit switch
: 0 mm
Software limit
: +30mm : +1320 mm
Encoder: Count UP
: 0 mm
: +1350 mm
: 0 mm

: Software limit
Status chart of the tabletop longitudinal position detection sensor
270
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(4) Tabletop longitudinal movement (when the XBSD-850B is used in combination)
The recommended positions for installation of the tabletop longitudinal movement

the table.

Number of rotations of Potentiometer
Distance from the head-end Resistance
potentiometer ADC real display
(FORWARD limit position) value []
Stroke center position 5 1 rotations back from the 1000  200  0200  66
675.0  20 mm FORWARD or BACKWARD (019A to 0266)
limit
Head-end (FORWARD) limit position – 324  200  00A6  66
0.0  20 mm (0040 to 010C)
Foot-end (BACKWARD) limit position – 1676  200  035A  66
1350.0  20 mm (03C0 to 02F4)
<1> Move the tabletop longitudinally to the FORWARD mechanical limit. When it
reaches the FORWARD limit, the LED on the corresponding side of the step
results in data being sampled at the FORWARD limit position. When sampling
is completed, the blinking LED stops blinking and stays lit. Now, preset the
encoder at this position.
again.
271
No. 2J308-036EN*I
CAUTION: Since sensors that detect the FORWARD and BACKWARD limits
in the tabletop longitudinal movement direction are not provided,
when the FORWARD or BACKWARD limit is to be saved in the
memory, it must be saved only when the tabletop is at the
FORWARD or BACKWARD mechanical limit. (To facilitate
potentiometer adjustment, an LED blinks when the tabletop is
within the adjustable range and the limit can be saved even when
the tabletop is not at the mechanical limit. However, saving of
the FORWARD or BACKWARD limit must only be performed at
the corresponding mechanical limit.)
Mechanical limit
: 0 mm : +1350 mm
: +1350 mm
: 0 mm

NOTE: To limit the tabletop longitudinal movement stroke for narrow spaces, perform
auto scaling over the full stroke, and change the mechanical stopper mounting
position.
272
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(5) Tabletop lateral movement
Relationship between the potentiometer and the tabletop lateral position
The recommended positions for installation of the tabletop lateral movement

the table.

Number of rotations of the Potentiometer
Resistance
Distance from the lateral center potentiometer ADC real display
value []
Stroke center position 2.5 0.5 rotations back from the 1000  200  0200  66
0.0  20 mm LEFT or RIGHT limit (019A to 266)
LEFT limit position – 1664  200  0354  66
-200.0  20 mm (02EE to 03BA)
RIGHT limit position – 336  200  00AC  66
200.0  20 mm (0046 to 0112)
Use the Hyper handle or the tabletop lateral movement free switch and follow the
<1> Move the tabletop laterally to the LEFT mechanical limit. When the LEFT limit
is reached, the LED on the corresponding side of the step slide test switch on
the control panel blinks. Press this blinking switch. This results in data being
sampled at the LEFT limit position. When sampling is completed, the blinking
LED stops blinking and stays lit.
<2> Move the tabletop laterally to the RIGHT limit. When the RIGHT limit is
reached, the LED on the corresponding side of the step slide test switch on
sampled at the RIGHT limit position. When sampling is completed, the
blinking LED stops blinking and stays lit.
on the control panel to light, indicating that auto scaling for tabletop lateral
performed first. Once auto scaling for tabletop lateral movement is completed
(P-03 is displayed on the 7SEG. LED), another session of auto scaling for
tabletop lateral movement cannot be performed. To retry auto scaling, exit
service adjustment mode or turn the power OFF and then ON again.
273
No. 2J308-036EN*I
CAUTION: Since sensors that detect the LEFT and RIGHT limits in the
tabletop lateral movement direction are not provided, when the
LEFT or RIGHT limit is to be saved in the memory, it must be
saved only when the tabletop is at the LEFT or RIGHT
mechanical limit. (To facilitate potentiometer adjustment, an LED
blinks when the tabletop is within the adjustable range and the
limit can be saved even when the tabletop is not at the
mechanical limit. However, saving of the LEFT or RIGHT limit
must only be performed at the corresponding mechanical limit.)
LEFT (-) side RIGHT (+) side
Mechanical limit
: -200 mm : +200 mm
: -200 mm
: +200 mm
Status chart of the tabletop lateral position detection sensor
274
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(6) Tabletop rotation
Relationship between the potentiometer and the tabletop rotation position
The recommended positions for installation of the tabletop rotation potentiometer are
given in the table below. Perform installation referring to the values in the table.

Number of rotations of the Potentiometer
Rotation angle from the Resistance
potentiometer ADC real display
tabletop rotation center value []
(2 k/10 rotations) (in hexadecimal)
Stroke center position 5 1 rotations back from the 1000  200  0200  66
-45.0  5 CW or CCW limit (019A to 266)
CW mechanical limit position – 281  200  0090  66
90.0  5 (002A to 00F6)
Center position (0) – 760  200  0185  66
0.0  5 (011F to 01EB)
CCW mechanical limit position – 1719  200  0370  66
Center position (-180) (030A to 03D6)
-180.0  5
Use the tabletop rotation brake release switch on the control panel by the table and
follow the procedures below to perform auto scaling.
<1> Press the tabletop rotation brake release switch to release tabletop rotation
and rotate the tabletop to 0°. When it reaches 0° (the tabletop rotation center
position display LED lights), the LED on the corresponding side of the step
results in data being sampled at the 0° position. When sampling is completed,
the blinking LED stops blinking and stays lit.
and rotate the tabletop to -180°. When it reaches -180° (the tabletop rotation
center position display LED lights), the LED on the corresponding side of the
step slide test switch on the control panel blinks. Press this blinking switch.
This results in data being sampled at the -180° position. When sampling is
completed, the blinking LED stops blinking and stays lit.
on the control panel to light, indicating that auto scaling for tabletop rotation is
completed. Either procedure <1> or procedure <2> can be performed first.
Once auto scaling for tabletop rotation is completed (P-04 is displayed on the
7SEG. LED), another session of auto scaling for tabletop rotation cannot be
performed. To retry auto scaling, exit service adjustment mode or turn the
power OFF and then ON again.
275
No. 2J308-036EN*I
CAUTION: In service adjustment mode, the delay (approx. 10 s) function for

brake release using the tabletop rotation brake release switch
does not operate, making adjustment easier.
CCW (-) side CW (+) side
Mechanical limit
: -180° : +90°
0° Center
Photo-sensor
Potentiometer ADC: UP : -180°
: 0°

Status chart of the tabletop rotation position detection sensor
276
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(7) Adjustment of magnet brake
Tabletop longitudinal movement, lateral movement, and rotation are provided with a
holding brake function that utilizes the attraction and repulsion forces arising from the
voltage applied to the magnet. After adjusting the gap between the magnet and touch
surface as described in the installation manual, follow the procedures below to adjust the
delay time from the brake-OFF status to the brake-ON status. The operating principle
and adjustment procedures are described below.

VR1 For the magnet brake for tabletop rotation; adjusts the delay time from brake OFF to brake ON.
VR2 For the magnet brake for tabletop longitudinal movement; adjusts the delay time from brake
OFF to brake ON.
VR3 For the magnet brake for tabletop lateral movement; adjusts the delay time from brake OFF to
brake ON.
ON
Power
OFF
ON
OFF
Handswitch
+24V
Brake ON status
(Forced contact of magnet)
0V Spontaneous contact status
Brake OFF status

(Forced repulsion of magnet)
-24V
Use V1 to V3 to adjust the
delay time until brake ON.
Timing chart for magnet brake operation
CAUTION: For all VRs, turning the VR CW (clockwise) increases the time
constant, increasing the delay time until brake ON. This causes
the time until magnet contact to lengthen, and the brake turns
ON through spontaneous contact, reducing the contact noise.
However, this slows down the response from handswitch OFF to
brake ON. Optimal adjustment using the VRs is thus required.
277
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(1) Adjustment for position detection (auto scaling)
of installation, it is necessary to use software to digitize and store the adjustments of the
procedure is called the auto scaling operation, and this function is called the auto scaling
function.
rotary switches S2, S3, and S4 on the TABLE CONT. PWB to 8.
The axis to be adjusted can be switched in the order tabletop vertical movement 
tabletop longitudinal movement  tabletop lateral movement  tabletop rotation 
tabletop tilting by pressing push switch S5.
CAUTION: For a pair of axes targeted for adjustment, when only one axis is stored
(with only one side of the step slide test switch on the control panel lit), axis
switching is not performed even when push switch S5 is pressed. To
switch axes, it is necessary to exit service adjustment mode.
Tabletop
Tabletop vertical longitudinal Tabletop lateral
movement movement movement Tabletop rotation Tabletop tilting
Pressing the push switch under the condition

of "not adjusted" or "adjustment completed"
allows axis switching.
Service adjustment mode axis switching transition diagram
7SEG. LED display in service adjustment mode
Name of axis 7SEG. LED display Remarks

Tabletop vertical movement P-01 Pressing push switch S5
Tabletop longitudinal movement P-02 does not cause axial
Tabletop lateral movement P-03 switching except under the
Tabletop rotation P-04 condition of "not adjusted"
Tabletop tilting P-05 or "adjustment completed".
278
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Tabletop tilting
Relationship between the potentiometer and the tabletop tilt angle
The recommended positions for installation of the tabletop tilting potentiometer are given
in the table below. Perform installation referring to the values in the table.
Recommended installation position Conditions to be satisfied

Horizontal position Before the potentiometer gear is engaged with the rack,
the tabletop must be set horizontal and adjusted so that
(0° 0.1°)
the resistance between pin 1 and pin 2 is 5 k 100 .
(Number of rotations of potentiometer (10 k/rotation))
Use the Hyper handle or the table tilting switch and follow the procedures below to
perform auto scaling.
<1> Tilt the tabletop through the horizontal position and perform procedures <2>
and <3>.
<2> Tilt the tabletop to the HEAD-UP stop position (+25°). When it reaches the
HEAD-UP stop position, the LED on the corresponding side of the step slide
test switch on the control panel blinks. Press this blinking switch. This results
in data being sampled at the HEAD-UP stop position. When sampling is
completed, the blinking LED light stops blinking and stays lit.
<3> Tilt the tabletop to the HEAD-DOWN stop position (-25°). When it reaches the
HEAD-DOWN stop position, the LED on the corresponding side of the step
results in data being sampled at the HEAD-DOWN stop position. When
sampling is completed, the blinking LED light stops blinking and stays lit.
Now, preset the encoder at this position.
on the control panel to light, indicating that auto scaling for tabletop tilting is
Once auto scaling for tabletop tilting is completed (P-05 is displayed on the
7SEG. LED), another session of auto scaling for tabletop tilting cannot be
CAUTION: Perform adjustment with the horizontal initialization sensor

installed.
Tabletop tilting is restricted to a low speed of 1°/s in service
adjustment mode (normal speed: 4°/s).
279
No. 2J308-036EN*I
HEAD-DOWN (-) side HEAD-UP (+) side
Mechanical limit
: -30° : +32°
Limit switch
: -28° : +30°
Software speed
reduction point (limit)
: -26.5° : +28.5°
Software speed : -1.5° : +1.5°

reduction point (horizontal)
Software horizontal stop : 0° : +0.2°
Horizontal initialization sensor : 0°
Tilt backup sensor : -0.9° : +0.9°
Encoder: Count UP : 0°
: +25°
Potentiometer ADC: UP
: -25°

: Software speed reduction position (limit)
: Software speed reduction position (horizontal)
: Software horizontal stop position
: Horizontal initialization sensor change position
: Tilt backup sensor change position
Status chart of the tabletop tilting position detection sensor
280
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Relationship between the potentiometer and the tabletop vertical position
The recommended positions for installation of the tabletop vertical movement

the table.

Distance from the floor to the top of Number of rotations of potentiometer
tabletop (2 k/5 rotations)
DOWN limit position With the potentiometer gear disengaged from the
810.0 ±20 mm vertical movement rack, secure the potentiometer
(when the table is embedded 36 mm) temporarily. Observe the axis of the potentiometer and
manually rotate the axis counterclockwise to the limit.
From this limit, manually rotate the axis clockwise by
360° ±10°, engage the potentiometer gear and the rack,
and secure the potentiometer.
Use the Hyper handle or the table vertical movement switch and follow the
<1> Move the tabletop vertically to the UP limit. When it reaches the UP limit, the
LED on the corresponding side of the step slide test switch on the control
panel blinks. Press this blinking switch. This results in data being sampled at
the UP limit position. When sampling is completed, the blinking LED light
stops blinking and stays lit.
<2> Move the tabletop vertically to the DOWN limit. When it reaches the DOWN
limit, the LED on the corresponding side of the step slide test switch on the
control panel blinks. Press this blinking switch. This results in data being
sampled at the DOWN limit position. When sampling is completed, the
blinking LED stops blinking and stays lit. Now, preset the encoder at this
position.
on the control panel to light, indicating that auto scaling for tabletop vertical
performed first. Once auto scaling for tabletop vertical movement is
completed (P-01 is displayed on the 7SEG. LED), another session of auto
scaling for tabletop vertical movement cannot be performed. To retry auto
again.
CAUTION: Tabletop vertical movement is restricted to a low speed of 10

mm/s in service adjustment mode (normal speed: 20 mm/s).
281
No. 2J308-036EN*I
DOWN (-) side UP (+) side
Mechanical limit
: +mm : +mm
Limit switch
: +810 mm : +1100 mm
Software speed
reduction zone
: +820 mm : +1090 mm
Encoder: Count UP
: +810 mm
: +1110 mm
: +810 mm

Status chart of the tabletop vertical position detection sensor
282
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(4) Tabletop longitudinal movement
The recommended positions for installation of the tabletop longitudinal movement

the table.

Distance from the head-end Number of rotations of potentiometer
(FORWARD limit position) (1 k/10 rotations)
Head-end (FORWARD) With the potentiometer gear disengaged from the longitudinal
limit position movement rack, secure the potentiometer temporarily. Press
0.0 ±20 mm the tabletop control switch to move the tabletop to the head-
end mechanical limit.
Observe the axis of the potentiometer and manually rotate
the axis clockwise to the limit. From this limit, manually
rotate the axis counterclockwise by 360° ±10°, engage the
potentiometer gear and the encoder gear, and secure the
potentiometer.
<1> Move the tabletop longitudinally to the FORWARD limit.

When the FORWARD limit is reached, the LED on the corresponding side of
the step slide test switch on the control panel blinks. Press this blinking switch.
This results in data being sampled at the FORWARD limit position. When
again.
CAUTION: Tabletop longitudinal movement is restricted to a low speed of

20 mm/s in service adjustment mode (normal speed: 50 mm/s).
283
No. 2J308-036EN*I

Mechanical limit
: -12 mm : +1362 mm
Limit switch
: 0 mm : +1350 mm
Software speed
reduction zone
: +15 mm : +1335 mm
Encoder: Count UP
: +0 mm
: +1350 mm
: +0 mm

284
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Relationship between the potentiometer and the tabletop lateral position
The recommended positions for installation of the tabletop lateral movement

the table.

Distance from the lateral center Number of rotations of the potentiometer
(2 k/5 rotations)
RIGHT limit position With the potentiometer gear disengaged from the lateral
150.0 ±20 mm movement rack, secure the potentiometer temporarily.
Set S7-7 on the TABLE CONT. PWB to ON so that the
lateral movement brake release status is maintained, and
move the tabletop to the RIGHT mechanical limit
(+150 mm).
the axis counterclockwise to the limit. From this limit,
manually rotate the axis clockwise by 360° ±10°, engage
the potentiometer gear and the rack, and secure the
potentiometer. Then set S7-7 on the TABLE CONT. PWB
to OFF.
Use the Hyper handle or the tabletop lateral movement free switch and follow the
<1> Move the tabletop laterally to the LEFT mechanical limit. When the LEFT limit
is reached, the LED on the corresponding side of the step slide test switch on
sampled at the LEFT limit position. When sampling is completed, the blinking
LED stops blinking and stays lit.
<2> Move the tabletop laterally to the RIGHT limit. When the RIGHT limit is
reached, the LED on the corresponding side of the step slide test switch on
sampled at the RIGHT limit position. When sampling is completed, the
blinking LED stops blinking and stays lit.
on the control panel to light, indicating that auto scaling for tabletop lateral
performed first. Once auto scaling for tabletop lateral movement is completed
(P-03 is displayed on the 7SEG. LED), another session of auto scaling for
tabletop lateral movement cannot be performed. To retry auto scaling, exit
service adjustment mode or turn the power OFF and then ON again.
285
No. 2J308-036EN*I
CAUTION: Since sensors that detect the LEFT and RIGHT limits in the
tabletop lateral movement direction are not provided, when the
LEFT or RIGHT limit is to be saved in the memory, it must be
saved only when the tabletop is at the LEFT or RIGHT mechanical
limit. (To facilitate potentiometer adjustment, an LED blinks
when the tabletop is within the adjustable range and the limit can
be saved even when the tabletop is not at the mechanical limit.
However, saving of the LEFT or RIGHT limit must only be
performed at the corresponding mechanical limit.)
Mechanical limit
: -150 mm : +150 mm
: -150 mm
: +150 mm

Status chart of the tabletop lateral position detection sensor
286
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(6) Tabletop rotation
Relationship between the potentiometer and the tabletop rotation position
The recommended positions for installation of the tabletop rotation potentiometer are
given in the table below. Perform installation referring to the values in the table.

Rotation angle from the tabletop Number of rotations of the potentiometer
rotation center (2 k/10 rotations)
CW mechanical limit position With the potentiometer gear disengaged from the rack,
90.0 ±5° secure the potentiometer temporarily.
Set S7-8 on the TABLE CONT. PWB to ON so that the
rotation brake release status is maintained, and rotate the
tabletop to the +90° position.
the axis counterclockwise to the limit. From this limit,
manually rotate the axis clockwise by 360° ±10°, engage
the potentiometer gear and the rack, and secure the
potentiometer. Then set S7-8 on the TABLE CONT. PWB
to OFF.
Use the tabletop rotation brake release switch on the control panel by the table and
follow the procedures below to perform auto scaling.
and rotate the tabletop to 0°. When it reaches 0° (the tabletop rotation center
position display LED lights), the LED on the corresponding side of the step
results in data being sampled at the 0° position. When sampling is completed,
the blinking LED stops blinking and stays lit.
and rotate the tabletop to -180°. When it reaches -180° (the tabletop rotation
center position display LED lights), the LED on the corresponding side of the
step slide test switch on the control panel blinks. Press this blinking switch.
This results in data being sampled at the -180° position. When sampling is
completed, the blinking LED stops blinking and stays lit.
on the control panel to light, indicating that auto scaling for tabletop rotation is
Once auto scaling for tabletop rotation is completed (P-04 is displayed on the
7SEG. LED), another session of auto scaling for tabletop rotation cannot be
CAUTION: In service adjustment mode, the delay (approx. 10 s) function for

brake release using the tabletop rotation brake release switch
does not operate, making adjustment easier.
287
No. 2J308-036EN*I
CCW (-) side CW (+) side
Mechanical limit
: -180° 0° Center : +90°
Photo-sensor
Potentiometer ADC: UP : -180°
: 0°

Status chart of the tabletop rotation position detection sensor
288
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(7) Horizontal adjustment
The horizontal position (tilt 0° position) is determined by the installation positions of the
horizontal initialization sensor and the tilting backup sensor. The installation procedures
are described below. For the sensor statuses, refer to the figure provided in step (2)
"Status chart of the tabletop tilting position detection sensor".
Sensor name Recommended installation position

Horizontal initialization sensor 0±
Tilt backup sensor -0.9± to +0.9±
(a) Installation procedures
<1> For the horizontal initialization sensor, set the tabletop horizontal using the
angle scale and set S7-2 to ON. In this setting, when the horizontal
initialization sensor is active, the LED at the center of the tabletop longitudinal
movement switch is lit. Install the horizontal initialization sensor immediately
before the LED at the center of the tabletop longitudinal movement SW lights.
<2> After installing the horizontal initialization sensor, install the tilting backup
sensor so that the horizontal initialization sensor is at the center.
<3> Set S7-2 to OFF. After auto scaling for tilting is performed, set S2, S3, and S4
to values other than 8.
Tilt the tabletop from the HEAD-UP side to the horizontal position. When
tabletop movement stops, measure the tabletop angle using the angle scale.
Also tilt the tabletop from the HEAD-DOWN side to the horizontal position.
Either the procedure from the HEAD-UP direction or that from the HEAD-
DOWN direction can be performed first. Repeat procedures <1> and <2> until
the tabletop angle is within the recommended range.
289
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(8) Adjustment of the magnet brake

VR2 For the magnet brake for tabletop lateral movement; adjusts the delay time from
brake OFF to brake ON.
VR3 For the magnet brake for tabletop longitudinal movement; adjusts the delay time
from brake OFF to brake ON.
ON
Power
OFF
ON
OFF
Handswitch
+24 V
Brake ON status
Brake OFF status

-24 V
Use VR1 to VR3 to adjust

the delay time until brake ON.
Timing chart for magnet brake operation
the time until magnet contact to lengthen, and the brake turns ON
through spontaneous contact, reducing the contact noise.
290
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(9) Changing the setting depending on the floor installation work type
(a) Floor installation work types
The following four typical cases are applicable depending on the floor installation
work type.
No. Installation case Installation conditions Lower limit Upper

value limit value
1 Drill down into the floor 810 mm 1100 mm
XBPP-870A (t16 mm)
52 mm and secure the
table on the XBPP-
52 mm 36 mm 870A (base plate).
16 mm  The table is installed
36 mm below the floor.
2 Install the XBPP-870A 862 mm 1152 mm
16 mm
(base plate) on the floor
and secure the table on
XBPP-870A (t16 mm) the XBPP-870A.
 The table is installed
16 mm above the floor.
4 Drill down into the floor 810 mm 1100 mm
36 mm
by 36 mm and secure
the table.
36 mm below the floor.
5 Install the table directly 846 mm 1136 mm
on the floor.
on the floor.
The upper/lower limit values in the table control section will change within the
following ranges.
Lower limit value: 810 mm (default) to 862 mm
Upper limit value: 1100 mm (default) to 1152 mm
291
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) Changing the setting values
When changing the setting values, change "Height (mm)" of the CAT setting page
in the DFP service tool. Since this setting tool does not identify the above four
cases, the desired values can be set for the upper/lower limit values for each axis
(unit: mm) even in cases other than the above four cases.
Note, however, that the movement stroke of the CAT-870B table vertical movement
axis is fixed to 290 mm. The difference between the upper limit value and the lower
limit value (movement stroke) must always be set to 290 mm.
No. Limited Position (- Side) Limited Position (+ Side) Stroke value

1 810 1100 290
2 862 1152 290
4 810 1100 290
5 846 1136 290
(c) Applying the setting values
In the DFP, the values changed in (b) are applied after the service tool is saved and
the system is rebooted. In the CAT-870B, these values are applied after they are
received from the DFP via CAN communication. Operate the CAT-870B over the
entire stroke and check the table height (unit: cm) displayed on the DFP monitor to
confirm that the changed setting is applied properly.
292
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(1) Adjustment for position detection (encoder)
This table uses software to adjust the position detection of the encoder. At the time of
installation, it is necessary to use software to overwrite the encoder pulse at the initial
position. This procedure is called the initialize operation, and this function is called the
initialize function.
This function is applied to tabletop vertical movement, tabletop longitudinal movement,

tabletop lateral movement, tabletop rotation, tabletop longitudinal tilt, and tabletop lateral
tilt.
To perform the initialize operation, service adjustment mode must be entered by setting
DIP switch DSW1-1 on the TABLE CONT. PWB to ON. Then, the axis must be operated
to the initial position in order to reset the encoder. When the initial sensor is actuated,
the position data is overwritten to the initial position.
(2) Adjustment for position detection (potentiometer)
of installation, it is necessary to use software to digitize and store the adjustments to the
procedure is called the auto-scaling operation, and this function is called the auto-scaling
function.
This function is applied to tabletop rotation.
DIP switch DSW1-1 on the TABLE CONT. PWB to ON.
Move the target axis to the limit position on one side and press the tabletop longitudinal
movement SW on the table console. Then move the axis to the other limit position and
press the tabletop longitudinal movement SW on the table console. The gain/offset of
the analog voltage is determined for potentiometer input and auto-scaling is completed
by performing the movements above.
Table 5.13.1-1 7-segment LED display in service adjustment mode
7-segment
Name of axis RSW2 Procedure
LED display
Tabletop vertical movement 1 AS-01 Initialize for the encoder
Tabletop longitudinal movement 2 AS-02 Initialize for the encoder
Tabletop lateral movement 3 AS-03 Initialize for the encoder
Table support column rotation 4 AS-04 Auto-scaling for the potentiometer
Tabletop longitudinal tilt 5 AS-05 Initialize for the encoder
Tabletop lateral tilt 6 AS-06 Initialize for the encoder
293
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Perform initialization with the Hyper Handle or the tabletop vertical movement switch by
following the procedures below.
<1> Set DIP switch DSW1-1 on the TABLE CONT. PWB to ON to enter service
adjustment mode. Set RSW2 to [1] (tabletop vertical movement). [AS-01] blinks on
the 7-segment LED on the TABLE CONT. PWB. (* If initialization has not been
performed, [01FST] blinks.)
<2> Move the tabletop to the UP limit.
When the tabletop reaches to the UP limit, the initial sensor is actuated. This
position is set as the standard position (1054 mm) and the position data is
overwritten.
<3> When the operation in <2> is completed, [AS-01] displayed on the 7-segment LED
on the TABLE CONT. PWB stops blinking and lights continuously. This indicates
that tabletop vertical movement initialization has been completed.
CAUTION: In service adjustment mode, tabletop vertical movement is set to

low speed (10 mm/s rather than 20 mm/s for regular movement).
DOWN (-) side
Mechanical
stop : 748 mm : 1060 mm
Limit switch UP (+) side

: 754 mm : 1054 mm
Software stroke
: 754 mm : 1054 mm
Microswitch
: 794 mm
Encoder count : 1054 mm

Initial position
Figure 5.13.1-1 Tabletop vertical position detection sensor timing chart
294
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(4) Tabletop longitudinal movement
Perform initialization with the Hyper Handle or the tabletop longitudinal movement switch
by following the procedures below.
adjustment mode. Set RSW2 to [2] (tabletop longitudinal movement). [AS-02]
blinks on the 7-segment LED on the TABLE CONT. PWB. (* If initialization has not
been performed, [02FST] blinks.)
<2> Move the tabletop to the FORWARD limit in the longitudinal direction.
When the tabletop reaches the FORWARD limit, the initial sensor is actuated. This
position is set as the standard position (0 mm) and the position data is overwritten.
that tabletop longitudinal movement initialization has been completed.
CAUTION: In service adjustment mode, tabletop longitudinal movement is

set to low speed (25 mm/s rather than 50 mm/s for regular
movement).
HEAD (-) side FOOT (+) side

Mechanical
stop
: -5 mm : +1355 mm
Limit switch
: 0 mm : +1350 mm
Software stroke
: 0 mm : +1350 mm
Encoder count
0 mm
Initial position
Figure 5.13.1-2 Tabletop longitudinal position detection sensor timing chart
295
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Perform initialization with the Hyper Handle or the panning operation switch by following
the procedures below.
adjustment mode. Set RSW2 to [3] (tabletop lateral movement). [AS-03] blinks on
the 7-segment LED on the TABLE CONT. PWB. (* If initialization has not been
<2> Move the tabletop from the patient right side limit to the left side limit in the lateral
direction.
When the tabletop reaches the center, the initial sensor (microswitch) is actuated.
This position is set as a standard position (0 mm) and the position data is
overwritten.
that tabletop lateral movement initialization has been completed.
CAUTION: Since the initial sensor for tabletop lateral movement is a

microswitch, the location where it is switched ON/OFF differs
when the tabletop is moved from right to left or from left to right.
Be sure to perform tabletop lateral movement from the right side
of the patient to the left side when performing adjustment.

Mechanical
stop
: -200 mm : +200 mm
Software stroke
: -200 mm : +200 mm
Initial switch
: 0 mm
Encoder count
0 mm
Initial position
Figure 5.13.1-3 Tabletop lateral position detection sensor timing chart
296
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(6) Table support column rotation
Since the table support column rotation range is ±90°, install the table support column so
that column rotation is 0° at a potentiometer resistance value of 1 k ±50 . Perform
auto-scaling movement by following the procedures below using the table support
column rotation brake release switch on the table console.
adjustment mode. Set RSW2 to [4] (table support column rotation). [AS-04] blinks
on the 7-segment LED on the TABLE CONT. PWB. (* If auto-scaling has not been
<2> Press the release switch for table support column rotation to set free rotation and
move the table support column to +90° rotation. When table support column
rotation reaches +90°, the LED for one direction on the longitudinal movement
switch on the operating panel blinks. Press the blinking switch. Acquire data at the
+90° position. The LED stops blinking and lights continuously when acquisition has
been completed.
<3> Press the release switch for table support column rotation to set free rotation and
move the table support column to -90° rotation. When table support column rotation
reaches -90°, the LED for another direction on the longitudinal movement switch on
the operating panel blinks. Press the blinking switch. Acquire data at the -90°
position. The LED stops blinking and lights continuously when acquisition has been
completed.
<4> LEDs for both directions on the longitudinal movement switch on the operating
panel light after the operations in <2> and <3>. This indicates that table support
column rotation auto-scaling has been completed. The 7-segment LED [AS-04] on
the TABLE CONT. PWB also stops blinking and lights continuously. Operation can
be performed starting with either step <2> or <3> above.
CAUTION: The brake release timer for the table support column rotation
brake release switch is disabled in service adjustment mode in
order to facilitate adjustment work.
CWW (-) side CW (+) side

Mechanical
stop
: -90 deg. : +90 deg.
Software stroke
: -90 deg. : +90 deg.
Initial sensor
: 0 deg.
Potentiometer gain
0 deg.
Initial position
Figure 5.13.1-4 Table support column rotation position detection sensor timing chart
297
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(7) Tabletop longitudinal tilt
Perform initialization by following the procedures below using the interlock cancel switch
and the tabletop longitudinal tilt operation switch on the table console.
adjustment mode. Set RSW2 to [5] (tabletop longitudinal tilt). [AS-05] blinks on the
7-segment LED on the TABLE CONT. PWB. (* If initialization has not been
<2> Move tabletop longitudinal tilt to the horizontal position (0°).
When tabletop longitudinal tilt reaches the horizontal position, the initial sensor is
actuated. This position is set as the standard position (0°) and the position data is
overwritten.
that tabletop longitudinal tilt initialization has been completed.
HEAD DOWN (-) side HEAD UP (+) side

Mechanical
stop
: -17 deg. : +17 deg.
Software stroke
: -16 deg. : +16 deg.
Microswitch
: -8 deg. : +8 deg.
Initial sensor
: 0 deg. : +16 deg.
Initial sensor
: -16 deg. : 0 deg.
Encoder count
0 deg.
Initial position
Figure 5.13.1-5 Tabletop longitudinal tilt position detection sensor timing chart
298
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(8) Tabletop lateral tilt
Perform initialization by following the procedures below using the interlock cancel switch
and the tabletop lateral tilt operation switch on the table console.
adjustment mode. Set RSW2 to [6] (tabletop lateral tilt). [AS-06] blinks on the
7-segment LED on the TABLE CONT. PWB. (* If initialization has not been
<2> Move tabletop lateral tilt to the horizontal position (0°).
When tabletop lateral tilt reaches the horizontal position, the initial sensor is
actuated. This position is set as the standard position (0°) and the position data is
overwritten.
that tabletop lateral tilt initialization has been completed.
LEFT UP (-) side RIGHT UP (+) side
Mechanical
stop
: -17 deg. : +17 deg.
Software stroke
: -16 deg. : +16 deg.
Initial sensor
: 0 deg. : +16 deg.
Initial sensor
: -16 deg. : 0 deg.
Encoder count
0 deg.
Initial position
Figure 5.13.1-6 Tabletop lateral tilt position detection sensor timing chart
299
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(9) Adjustment of the magnet brake
Table 5.13.1-2 VR adjustment functions

For the magnet brake for tabletop lateral movement; adjusts the delay
VR2
time from brake OFF to brake ON.
For the magnet brake for tabletop longitudinal movement; adjusts the
VR3
delay time from brake OFF to brake ON.
ON
Power
OFF
ON
OFF
Handswitch
+24V
Brake ON status
Brake OFF status

-24V
Use VR1 to VR3 to adjust
the delay time until brake ON.
Figure 5.13.1-7 Timing chart for magnet brake operation
the time until magnet contact to lengthen, and the brake turns
ON through spontaneous contact, reducing the contact noise.
300
No. 2J308-036EN*I
6. X-RAY ADJUSTMENT
X-ray adjustment requires tube voltage adjustment and tube current adjustment. Because feedback
control is made by the high-voltage bleeder incorporated in the system for tube voltage, tube voltage
adjustment is not required if the high-voltage bleeder incorporated in the system is adjusted
correctly. This is normally adjusted at the time of shipment from the factory. For tube current,
perform adjustment for each X-ray tube and focus. Tube current adjustment is also required when
the X-ray tube unit is replaced.
Start of X-ray adjustment
Tube voltage adjustment

(Already adjusted at the factory)
Check the overshoot.
Tube current detection circuit adjustment

(MA_DETECTOR PWB)
If there is a difference between the tube
current detection value of the system and
the measured value using a calibrated
tube-current meter on site, calibrate the
tube-current detection circuit.
Tube current adjustment

For each focus of each X-ray tube,
perform heating adjustment
for fluoroscopy/radiography.
Termination of tube
current adjustment
6.1 Preparation
Prepare the following instruments before installation.
(1) Ammeter for neutral point: MA-2000
6.2 Reconnecting Connector "X1" in the Power Cabinet
Connect the connector "X1" in the PWB UNIT of the power cabinet which was disconnected during
the power distribution test and turn ON the circuit breaker "NFB2" in the AC/DC UNIT.
If this wiring is not restored to its original position, filament heating and starter operation cannot be
performed.
301
No. 2J308-036EN*I
6.3 Tube Voltage Adjustment
"Tube voltage" is adjusted at the time of shipment from the factory. At the site, perform tube
voltage adjustment if the PWB etc. has been replaced. Check the overshoot even if only the X-ray
tube is replaced.
6.3.1 Adjustment procedures for the radiography tube voltage (at the time of shipment/PWB
replacement)
If the combination between the HVC PWB and the molded high-voltage transformer has been
changed due to repair etc., adjustment of the HVC PWB is required. The adjustment
procedures are described below.
The XTP-810G and XTBP-8100G are provided with 2 sets of inverter circuits, and adjustment
must be performed for each inverter unit. The HVC1 PWB controls the upper unit and the
HVC2 PWB controls the lower unit.
(1) Preparation
Remove an HVC PWB and reattach it via an extension PWB for adjustment. Remove the
other HVC PWB from the motherboard. The cables connected to the PWB can be left as
they are.
Connect the tube voltage meter so that the tube voltage waveform can be observed on the
oscilloscope. Set the measurement delay time of the tube voltage meter to 10 msec.
Set conditions of 80 kV, 200 mA, and 100 msec. For the focus, select the large focus.
If radiography is not possible due to the rating of the X-ray tube, decrease the mA step.
(2) Adjustment of the high-voltage waveform
Perform adjustment of the detection waveform of the high-voltage bleeder with VR1 (E-K)
and VR5 (A-E) on the HVC PWB. While observing the waveform output from the tube
voltage meter, make the tube voltage waveform flat. Turn both VR1 and VR 5 to the same
position.
Although the detection waveform of the high-voltage bleeder incorporated in the system is
output to TP10 for the HVC PWB, the waveform at this point cannot be used in place of
the waveform output from the tube voltage meter.
NOTE: 1 to 2 kV overshoot may occur within 3 msec of waveform rising, adjustment of

which will be performed later.
If the high-voltage waveform is not flat, the charge/discharge current of the high-
voltage capacitor affects the current at the neutral point.
302
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Adjustment of the tube voltage value
When the rotary switches on the HVC_PWB are set to SW1 = 0, SW2 = 0, the radiography
tube voltage is displayed on the LED. Then perform actual radiography and perform
adjustment with VR2 so that the radiography tube voltage detection tube value and the
reading of the tube voltage meter are +/- 0.5 kV.
Note that the output tube voltage is smaller than the actual voltage for tube voltage
settings of 110 kV or more. For example, at the 125-kV setting, the actual output tube
voltage is intentionally set to around 123 kV.
When replacing the ROM of the HVC_PWB (PX12-45659 Gr2), be sure to use PWBs of
the same revision in HVC1 and HVC2.
6.3.2 Adjustment of continuous fluoroscopy tube voltage correction (at the time of shipment/PWB
replacement)
Perform adjustment on the HVC1 and HVC2 PWBs.
Adjustment of continuous fluoroscopy must be performed on each PWB in the same manner as
for tube voltage adjustment.
(1) Adjustment of 50 kV, 0.5 mA
For adjustment, set SW1 = C and SW2 = 1. While outputting continuous fluoroscopy
under conditions of 50 kV and 0.5 mA, increase/decrease data with SW3 to adjust the
fluoroscopy tube voltage.
fluoroscopy tube voltage.
fluoroscopy tube voltage. (Actual adjustment data is for 10 mA, but it operates after
converted to the value at 4.0 mA through correction calculation for control.)
fluoroscopy tube voltage. (Actual adjustment data is for 10 mA, but it operates after
converted to the value at 4.0 mA through correction calculation for control.)
303
No. 2J308-036EN*I
6.3.3 Adjustment procedures for the overshoot
(1) Preparation
NOTE: This adjustment is performed after the adjustments of both HVC1 and HVC2
have been completed.
Insert both of HVC1 and HVC2 onto the motherboard.
Set conditions of 125 kV, 200 mA, and 50 msec. For the focus, select the large focus.
If radiography is not possible due to the rating of the X-ray tube, decrease the mA step.
(2) Adjustment of overshoot
If overshoot occurs at the rising portion of the tube voltage waveform, change the
radiography tube voltage rising time data.
When the rotary switches on the HVC PWB are set to SW1 = C and SW2 = A, the rising
data is displayed on the LED display section, which should be increased or decreased
using SW3.
For data, 0 causes the fastest rising and 7 the slowest. The slower the rising, the less
overshoot and the longer the rising of the tube voltage. If rising is too slow, the linearity of
short-period exposure is affected and adjustment must be performed so that slight
overshoot can be seen.
To prevent over kV detection during system operation, perform one-shot radiography at

125 kV/200 mA/50 msec and confirm the following.
 The maximum overshoot should not exceed 3 kV.
 The tube voltage detection value at the HVC_PWB should not exceed 128 kV.
304
No. 2J308-036EN*I
6.4 Tube Current Adjustment (when the adjustment navigator is not used)
Tube current adjustment includes adjustment for items of SETUP, heating adjustment, mA Drop
adjustment, and PreFlash adjustment. Adjustment must be performed in the order specified below.
Start of tube
current adjustment
Heating adjustment for fluoroscopy

Perform heating adjustment for
fluoroscopy for each focus and
record the Pre_Heat data.
Heating adjustment for radiography

Perform heating adjustment for
radiography for each focus.
mA_Drop adjustment
Set the Pre_Heat data.
Check the mA_Drop correction
status for each focus and perform
adjustment if required.
Pre_Flash adjustment
Perform Pre_Flash adjustment for
continuous fluoroscopy, pulsed
fluoroscopy, and radiography
for each focus.
Termination of tube
current adjustment
NOTE: For the adjustment software startup procedure, refer to subsection 29.12.
In order to improve adjustment accuracy, it is recommended that tube current adjustment

be performed after the power of the system is turned ON and approximately 40 minutes
have elapsed, or after X-rays are generated to increase HU.
305
No. 2J308-036EN*I
6.4.1 Setting
Perform XTP-related setting.
This setting is required only once for each tube at the time of installation.
Select [SETUP] of the adjustment software and check/change the set data such as the cable
length, tube rotation control parameters, adjustment precision, etc.
6.4.2 Outline
(1) Starting the X-ray adjustment software
For the adjustment software startup procedure, refer to subsection 29.12.
(2) Checking the SETUP information (Refer to subsection 6.4.3.)
* This setting is required only once for each tube.
(3) Tube current adjustment (Refer to subsection 6.4.4.)
(4) mA Drop adjustment (Refer to subsection 6.4.6.)
This adjustment requires no more than one check after installation.
(5) PreFlash adjustment (Refer to subsection 6.4.7.)
306
No. 2J308-036EN*I
6.4.3 SETUP screen
When the SETUP tab is selected, the following information is displayed.
<Key descriptions>
Target mA Ratio (80 - 100%) : Target ratio of tube current adjustment: Standard 93
Sets the target ratio against tube current on the manual
adjustment screen.
OLP check Mode : Specify the display status of the OLP-100% operation settings
button in the GENE tab.
Normal Rating : Operation axis button not shown
Max Rating : Operation axis button shown
<Common key descriptions>
[SET] : SET key. Reflects the entered information.
[LOAD] : Reads existing adjustment data.
[SAVE] : Records and registers adjustment data.
[QUIT] : Quits the adjustment software.
CAUTION: The tube current conditions are checked using the pre-operational check tool in
V4.22. If the value for "Target mA Radio" is too large, a warning message is
frequently displayed. It is recommended to set the standard value.
307
No. 2J308-036EN*I
6.4.4 Tube current adjustment (automatic)
When the mA Adjust tab is opened, tube current adjustment auto mode is checked.
(1) Select the plane and tube information.
(2) Select the focus.
(3) Select the adjustment mode (fluoroscopy, radiography).
(4) Use factory data for Pre heat. Select the consecutive 0.1-mA heating value – 50 or select
1600, whichever is less.
(5) Check the measurement conditions (tube voltage, heating level).
(6) Depending to the adjustment mode, press the fluoroscopy switch or the radiography switch.
Use the radiography switch with the dual-step mechanism pushed down to the X-ray
status.
(7) Confirm that the tube current is displayed. After all conditions have been measured,
X-rays stop automatically.
(8) Check the range of the measurement results.
 Tube current at 60 kV < Tube current at 90 kV
 Fluoroscopy tube current : Calculation precision is improved when the NE-mA

minimum value is within the range from 0.4 mA to 0.7 mA.
Calculation precision is improved when the NE-mA
maximum value is within the range from 3.5 mA to 5 mA.
 Radiography tube current : A minimum value falling within the range from 20 mA to
50 mA results in better calculation precision.
For the maximum value, increase the input value while
carefully checking OLP.
(9) To calculate the heating data, press the [CALC.] key.
The heating data at each adjustment point is graphically displayed.
(10) When performing fluoroscopic tube current adjustment, press the [MANUAL MODE] key
and record the heating data at 0.1 mA (90 kV).
(11) For other foci, change the adjustment mode (fluoroscopy, radiography) to calculate the
heating data in the same manner.
(12) Register the data by pressing [SAVE].
(It is sufficient to register for each focal tube.)
CAUTION: If adjustment is completed after tube current adjustment, return the Pre Heat
value to its original value and press the [SET] key for registration.
308
No. 2J308-036EN*I
The flowchart for tube current adjustment (fluoroscopy) is shown below.
Start of fluoroscopy
Pre-Heat setting (temporary)

Set 1500 for all items.
Selecting the focus

(S/M/L)
Checking the heating data

for current adjustment
Performing continuous fluoroscopy

Operating the fluoroscopy switch
Measuring the tube current by

switching the filament heating/tube
voltage automatically
Calculating the adjustment data

Operating the [CALC] key
Calculation NG Measurement the current range

results
Checking the adjustment data

OK Operating the [MANUAL] key NO
Set the heating data using the
following fluoroscopic conditions
Changing as the heating data
the heating NG
data for current measurement.
60 kV/0.5 mA
60 kV/1.0 mA
60 kV/2.0 mA
OK 60 kV/4.0 mA
Pre_Heat data setting

Operating the [MANUAL] key
Record the heating data using the
following fluoroscopic conditions as
the Pre_Heat data.
90 kV/0.1 mA-50, or 1600,
whichever is less.
Save
Operating the [SAVE] key
All focus
adjustment
procedures
are complete.
YES
Precision check
(Perform fine adjustment manually
if required.)
Termination of
fluoroscopy adjustment
309
No. 2J308-036EN*I
The flowchart for tube current adjustment (radiography) is shown below.
Start of radiography
Selecting the focus

(S/M/L)
Checking the heating data

for current adjustment
Performing radiography
Operating the radiography switch
Measuring the tube current by

automatic filament heating/tube
voltage automatically
Operating the [CALC] key
Calculation NG Changing the heating data NO

results
Checking the adjustment data

OK Operating the [MANUAL] key
Set the heating data using the following
radiographic conditions as the heating
data for current measurement.
Measurement NG 60 kV/10 mA
current range For the two setting items, select the
tube current heating data so that the
tube current step interval is even.
(At a current step precedent to 2 steps
OK from the 60-kV/maximum tube current step)
Save
Operating the [SAVE] key
All focus
adjustment
procedures
are complete.
YES
Precision check
(Perform fine adjustment
manually if required.)
Termination of
fluoroscopy adjustment
310
No. 2J308-036EN*I
List of heating value defaults
DRX-T7345GFS DRX-T7445GFS DSRX-T7345GFS DSRX-T7444GDS

FLUO RAD FLUO RAD FLUO RAD FLUO RAD
SF 2115 2575 2100 2555 2105 2577 1748 2160
(FocusS) 2214 2760 2195 2800 2205 2717 1837 2403
2317 2923 2300 2970 2311 2932 1929 2643
2427 3121 2410 3173 2424 3133 2024 2964
MF 1776 2186 1769 2192 1857 2265 1746 2167
(FocusM) 1863 2479 1857 2441 1945 2475 1838 2412
1956 2682 1948 2740 2038 2769 1932 2654
2055 3016 2044 2987 2137 3100 2030 2979
LF 1847 2246 1845 2246 1822 2220 1813 2234
(FocusL) 1934 2577 1930 2545 1909 2463 1905 2477
2025 2779 2025 2860 2000 2754 1999 2769
2120 3161 2120 3200 2096 3135 2098 3160
* The values shown above are used as the heating value defaults when the tube is
replaced. Note that it is not necessary to change the settings unless the tube is
replaced.
311
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<Key descriptions>
Plane-Tube information : Display of Plane/Tube information to be adjusted.

FRONTAL-TUBE1/LATERAL-TUBE1/FRONTAL-TUBE2
Data display, setting area :
No. : Normally, all numbers become selected.
HEAT : Filament heating data
KV : Perform adjustment with 60 kV and 90 kV as the basic

values.
Actual mA : The value (tube current) obtained by subtracting the current

in the internal bleeder from the current value at the neutral
point measured in the system is displayed. Because the
resistance value of the internal bleeder is 200 M, 0.3 mA
for 60 kV and 0.45 mA for 90 kV are subtracted from the
neutral point current detected value.
NE-mA : Neutral-point current
FLUOROSCOPY/
RADIOGRAPHY : Adjustment mode
C.FLUO : Performs adjustment from 0.1 mA to 8 mA though

continuous fluoroscopy.
RADIO : Performs adjustment from 10 mA to 1250 mA through

radiography.
[SET] : Set key

If the numeric value is changed, press to start measurement
with the changed items.
[CALC.] : Starts calculation of heating data based on the

measurement data.
The heating data on the graph may not change.
This result is obtained when the OLP and maximum filament
current are taken into consideration.
312
No. 2J308-036EN*I
6.4.5 Tube current adjustment (manual adjustment)
When [MANUAL] on the auto adjustment screen is selected, the manual adjustment screen is
displayed.
 Enter the tube voltage kV and heating data "Heat" corresponding to the mA to be adjusted.
 When [SET] is pressed, fluoroscopy or radiography for the focused kV and "Heat" is allowed.
msec : Pulse width normally 50 msec
PreHeat : Preheating level
mA conditions for fluoroscopy : 0.1/0.13/0.16/0.2/0.25/0.32/0.40/0.50/0.63/0.8/1.0/

1.3/1.6/2.0/2.5/3.2/4.0/5.0/6.3/8.0
313
No. 2J308-036EN*I
mA conditions for radiography : 10/13/16/20/25/32/40/50/63/80/100/130/160/200/250/

320/400/500/630/800/1000/1250/1600/2000
[RETURN] : Returns to the auto screen.
[SET] : Set the main heating (HEAT1/HEAT2). Used for partial

adjustment.
[CALC] : Used to recalculate the adjustment data based on the

measurement results that are acquired manually.
NOTE: Some tube current adjustment values can be changed by performing manual
adjustment. However, if AUTO adjustment is performed again, all the changed
heating values are returned to those estimated by AUTO.
6.4.6 mA Drop adjustment
When the mA Drop tab is selected, the following adjustment screen is displayed.
(1) Check the plane and tube information.
(3) Set the Pre heat value.
The standard Pre heat value can be calculated by subtracting 50 from the heating data at
60 kV/0.1 mA that was acquired by tube current adjustment. Use the calculated standard
Pre heat value or a value of 1600, whichever is less.
(4) Check the measurement conditions (tube voltage, tube current, msec, mA Drop correction
factor).
When the conditions have been measured, press the [SET] key.
(5) Press the radiography switch. The waveform data for the tube current of the measurement
conditions is displayed. Change the mA Drop correction factor repeatedly so that the
waveform data becomes flat. At this time, set a value for adjustment so that the tube
current does not decrease when exposure starts.
(6) Change the measurement No. to perform adjustment for other conditions. Also check for
other foci and planes.
314
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(7) Register data by pressing [SAVE]. (It is sufficient to register for each tube.)
Correction values are created at all mA steps.
NOTE: On site, this adjustment may require no more than confirmation.
Adjustment conditions : Measurement No., tube voltage, tube current, pulse width, and
Drop and the previous adjustment information are displayed as
preset values.
Drop : mA Drop adjustment value. For this value, enter the

percentage (%) increase with respect to the reference 100.
(Example: Enter 15 for 15% increase.)
Measurement No. : 4-point display for each focus is performed for the adjustment
conditions.
Click the number corresponding to the adjustment conditions.
315
No. 2J308-036EN*I
6.4.7 PreFlash adjustment
To raise the filament temperature in a shorter period of time, heating is performed for a short
period of time at a higher heating level than normal.
For preflash adjustment, perform adjustment for three conditions for the tube current: preflash
fluoroscopy, pulsed fluoroscopy, and radiography.
(1) Check the plane and tube information.
(3) Select the adjustment mode (continuous fluoroscopy, fluoroscopy, radiography).
Check the measurement conditions (tube voltage, tube current, pulse width, PreFlash data,
PreFlash time, and Pre Heat) and press the [SET] key.
The default values are displayed for the tube voltage, tube current, and pulse width.
(4) When the radiography switch is pressed, X-ray exposure occurs for 3 seconds and then
the tube current vs. time data is displayed. Refer to this data to change the PreFlash data
and PreFlash time so that the waveform becomes appropriate.
(5) Change the measurement mode (continuous fluoroscopy, fluoroscopy, radiography) to

perform adjustment for the other conditions. Perform check in the same manner for other
foci and planes.
(6) Register data by pressing [SAVE].
Select the adjustment item using the tab.
NOTE: For this adjustment, only checking is required on site.
If the PreFlash adjustment is insufficient, images for test X-ray exposure at the
time of DSA become dark. Also check the DSA at the time of this adjustment.
316
No. 2J308-036EN*I
The fundamental conditions are displayed for kV/mA/msec.
Data : Heating level
Time : PreFlash time (msec)
Adjustment items
C.FLUO : Continuous fluoroscopy
P. FLUO : Pulsed fluoroscopy
RADIO : Radiography
The following are the default parameters for P.FLUO and RADIO.
P.FLUO
kV mA msec Time
SF 80 50 10 500
MF 80 50 10 500
LF 80 50 10 500
RADIO
kV mA msec Time
SF 80 100 8 700
MF 80 200 8 700
LF 80 320 8 700
317
No. 2J308-036EN*I
6.4.8 Checking tube current adjustment
Check of the tube current adjustment for radiography is performed using this screen.
(2) Enter the X-ray conditions and press the [SET] key.
(3) By pressing the radiography switch, the current at the neutral point can be checked.
(4) After the check is completed, quit the software by pressing [QUIT].
Mode : The entry method check conditions are selected.
When Manual is selected, enter the X-ray conditions to be checked

in "Setting". Then press [SET] to apply the settings.
When File is selected, the preset check conditions are displayed.

Press [SET] so that the check can be performed. At this time, the
focus, fluoroscopy type, and radiography type are automatically
selected.
Result : The conditions under which X-ray exposure was performed and the
results are displayed.
100% OLP Setting : OLP 100% operating mode specified
Use when 100% OLP operation is needed during acceptance testing.
Only appears when the [Max Rating] item is selected in [OLP check
Mode] under the SETUP tab.
CAUTION: The check using this screen must be performed after data registration.
Beam Filter : Select beam quality filter (V3.63 or later).
318
No. 2J308-036EN*I
6.5 Tube Current Adjustment (when the adjustment navigator is used)
The tube current adjustment with the adjustment navigator includes heating adjustment, mA Drop
adjustment and PreFlash adjustment. The details of each adjustment are the same as those
described in subsection 6.4. In this adjustment, these procedures are designed to be carried out in
the order described below.
6.5.1 Outline
(1) Starting the X-ray adjustment software
For the adjustment software startup procedure, refer to subsection 29.12.
(2) Checking the SETUP information (Refer to subsection 6.4.3.)
* This setting is required only once for each tube.
(3) Heating adjustment (Refer to subsection 6.5.2.)
(4) mA Drop adjustment (Refer to subsection 6.5.3.)
(5) PreFlash adjustment (Refer to subsection 6.5.4.)
The procedures for each adjustment are described below.
319
No. 2J308-036EN*I
6.5.2 Heating adjustment
The heating adjustment window containing the adjustment navigator is displayed as shown
below.
In the heating adjustment with the adjustment navigator, the adjustment procedures can
proceed to the next stage automatically by starting and continuing fluoroscopy or radiography
that corresponds to the selected type of X-ray generation. The confirmation dialog "Do you
want to save adjustment results?" is displayed after the adjustments for all stages are complete.
Click [YES] to move to the next procedure .
If the adjustment results are inappropriate, messages are displayed in the Status field.
Repeat the procedure until the appropriate adjustment results are acquired, referring to the
target value displayed in the Help window.
320
No. 2J308-036EN*I
6.5.3 mA Drop adjustment
NOTE: On site, this adjustment may require no more than confirmation.
The mA Drop adjustment window containing the adjustment navigator is displayed as shown
below.
In the mA Drop adjustment with the adjustment navigator, stage and focus size can be changed
automatically after X-ray generation for each stage. The confirmation dialog "Do you want to
save adjustment results?" is displayed after the adjustments for all stages are complete.
Click [YES] to move to the next procedure .
321
No. 2J308-036EN*I
6.5.4 PreFlash adjustment
NOTE: For this adjustment, only checking is required on site.
If the PreFlash adjustment is insufficient, images for test X-ray exposure at the time of
DSA become dark. Also check the DSA at the time of this adjustment.
The PreFlash adjustment window containing the adjustment navigator is displayed as shown
below.
In the PreFlash adjustment window containing the adjustment navigator, focus size can be
changed and adjustment made automatically by pressing the [Fluoroscopy] or [Radiography]
button that corresponds to the selected X-ray generation type for each focus size. When the
adjustments for all focus sizes are almost complete, the confirmation dialog "Do you want to
save adjustment results?" is displayed. Click [OK] to move to the next procedure .
CAUTION: It is recommended that X-rays be generated at intervals of 3 to 4 seconds to

prevent incorrect detection.
6.5.5 Checking tube current adjustment
For the procedures for checking the radiographic tube current adjustment, refer to the
description in subsection 6.4.8 "Checking tube current adjustment".
322
No. 2J308-036EN*I
6.6 Supplementary Documents
6.6.1 Supplementary document for tube current adjustment
Heating level
Pre_Flash
mA_Drop mA_Drop
Heat Heat Heat
Pre_Heat Pre_Heat
Time
Ready_ON Exp Exp Ready_OFF
(1) Heating control
 Pre_Heat status
When the filament is cool, it may take a very long time from when filament heating starts
to when the filament reaches the stationary status. Therefore, pre-heating the filament
is required.
When the filament temperature is higher, the time required to complete filament warm-
up becomes shorter. However, if the tube voltage is applied when the filament
temperature is too high, the tube current will flow immediately. Considering the current
during continuous fluoroscopy, a filament current of 0.1 mA or equivalent at a lower
heating level must be set.
 Pre_Flash status
In order to increase the filament temperature, the filament current flows at a higher
heating level than usual. This period is called the Pre-Flash period.
During adjustment, set the filament current increase percentage (%) relative to the
normal heating current and the filament current increase time. It is advisable that the
filament current increase period be set to longer, and the filament current increase
percentage (%) be set to lower.
 Heat status
Normal heating status
323
No. 2J308-036EN*I
 mA_Drop correction status
When the tube current starts flowing, it influences the filament temperature and reduces
the tube current. In order to correct this phenomenon, the heating level during X-ray
exposure is slightly increased. During adjustment, set the tube current increase ratio.
CAUTION: To increase the filament current, the aforementioned Pre_Flash setting

should be performed. To increase the tube current, mA/Drop correction
setting should be performed. Do not mix up these correction settings.
324
No. 2J308-036EN*I
6.6.2 Supplement material for Pre_Flash
Filament temperature
Time
Heating level
Pre_Flash
mA_Drop
Heat
Pre_Heat
Time
Ready_ON Exp
During Pre_Flash adjustment, set the filament current increase percentage (%) relative to the
normal heating level and the filament current increase period (msec). For the setting
procedures, it is advisable that the filament current increase period be set to longer, and the
filament current increase percentage (%) be set to lower.
If excessive tube current flows when X-ray exposure starts and the value gradually
approximates the constant value, the filament temperature may be overshot. In this case, lower
the preflash level so that the filament temperature does not increase more than necessary.
If less tube current flows when X-ray exposure starts and the value gradually approximates the
constant value, the filament temperature may not reach the constant value. In this case,
increase the preflash level after confirming that sufficient preflash time has elapsed.
325
No. 2J308-036EN*I
6.7 Tube Aging Support Functions
This section describes a support function that permits automatic change of the X-ray conditions
and exposure time through tube aging. Tube aging performed for tube replacement etc. is in the
conventional study mode, and acquisition conditions or exposure time are set manually. Using the
support function described below, these settings can be made automatically, making tube aging
easier.
6.7.1 Opening the tube aging window
The tube aging support function can be started up using the GENE window in the tube current
adjustment window for X-ray adjustment.
Click the [AGING] button on the GENE window to open the tube aging window.
NOTE: Activate the GENE window while the adjustment navigator function is not started up.
While the adjustment navigator function is started up, the pages cannot be changed by
clicking the tabs. Uncheck the [Navi] box at the upper right of the window to terminate
the adjustment navigator function.
Tube current adjustment window (GENE window)
The following dialog is displayed before the tube aging window opens. Block the X-ray radiation
port to protect the detector and prevent unnecessary X-ray exposure.
326
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Click [OK] to display the following tube aging window.
Tube aging window
6.7.2 Tube aging window
The descriptions of the tube aging window are as shown below.
Tube Name : Tube name

HU : HU% of the current tube
Target HU : Target HU% of the tube. It is normally set to 60%. When HU reaches 60%,
terminate aging.
Limit HU : Maximum HU% of the tube. It is normally set to 70%. When HU exceeds
70%, aging is terminated to protect the tube.
Operation : The operating instructions for aging are displayed. The aging process will
be completed if these instructions are followed.
Status : Messages indicating that aging is complete and descriptions of any error
that occurred during aging are displayed.
[QUIT] : Used to close the aging window.
The table in the center of the screen shows the X-ray conditions for each stage. The highlighted
line shows the current stage (5th line from the top in the table). When the line in the table is
clicked, the stage that corresponds to the line is displayed. The parameters are as shown
below.
Tech : X-ray study type. DA or fluoroscopy (PF) can be selected.

Focus : Focal size. Large-size, middle-size or small-size focus can be selected.
kV, mA, mSec : X-ray conditions
Rate : Exposure rate
Time : Exposure time
Delay : Pause between stages
327
No. 2J308-036EN*I
6.7.3 Operating the tube aging window
(1) The first stage is set as the current stage after startup of the tube aging window. Perform
aging for this stage.
(2) Hold down the exposure button ([Radiography] or [Fluoroscopy]) that corresponds to the
radiation type (Tech) set for each stage or messages displayed in the Operation field.
(3) Perform X-ray exposure for the exposure time (Time) set for each stage. After a pause
(Delay) between stages, it proceeds to the next stage. The following message is
displayed in the Status field during pause time.
NOTE: The Exposure button must be held down during the pause between stages. This
is required to ensure that the process continues during the pause.
If the Exposure button is released during a pause, press it again. The aging
process can restart, starting from the stage when the button was released.
(4) Perform the above procedures until HU reaches 60%. When it exceeds 60%, the following
message is displayed. Click [QUIT] to terminate the aging window.
NOTE: If HU exceeds 70%, the following message is displayed. To protect the tube,
aging cannot continue.
328
No. 2J308-036EN*I
7. SYSTEM ALIGNMENT ADJUSTMENT
7.1 Preparation
Prepare the following instruments for installation.
(1) Standard set of tools
(2) Collimator test tool : MODEL07-661
(3) Beam alignment test tool : MODEL07-662
(4) Tool for setting the test tool : Service tool for the CAS-880A (refer to figure 7.1-1)
(5) Tool for adjusting the tilt of the test tool : Service tool for the CAS-880A (refer to figure 7.1-2)
Figure 7.1-1 Tool for setting the test tool
Figure 7.1-2 Tool for adjusting the tilt of the test tool
329
No. 2J308-036EN*I
7.2 Outline and Precautions
7.2.1 For the CAS-810A
Alignment adjustment for the C-arm main unit is performed at the time of shipment from the
factory. Therefore, alignment must be performed by referring to the figure below at the time of
installation only if necessary.
The base material (aluminum) in part <1>, in particular, may be damaged by repeated tightening.
For this reason, adjustment must be restricted to the minimum required number of times and the
tightening torque must be observed.
Adjustment locations direction <1>

Hexagonal socket head bolt (with washer)
M10, L = 30
4 locations, tightening torque = 20 N･m
<1>
Adjustment locations in direction <2><3>

Hexagonal socket head bolt (with washer)
M10, L = 30
4 locations, tightening torque = 20 N･m
Adjustment locations in direction <4>

Adjust the angle using the shim.
<4>
<2>
<3>
330
No. 2J308-036EN*I
7.2.2 For the CAS-830A
(1) Alignment adjustment
Alignment adjustment for the C-arm main unit is performed at the time of shipment from
the factory. Therefore, alignment must be performed by referring to the figure below at the
time of installation only if necessary.
<1>
For the adjustment locations when the FPD
is used in combination, refer to figures below.
<2>
Adjustment locations in directions <2> and <3>

<3> Hexagonal socket head bolt M8, L = 30
<4> Tightening torque = 25 N•m

Adjust the angle using the shim.
331
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(a) When the TFP-1216A is used in combination, perform alignment adjustment for the
detector according to the figures below.
<1> FPD adjustment plate securing locations

Hexagonal bolt M8, L = 20, 4 locations
Tightening torque = 25 N m
Adjustment locations in directions <1> for FPD
Hexagonal socket head bolt M4, L=12, 16,
2 bolts x 2 locations
(b) When the TFP-800A/A1 (water-cooled type) is used in combination, refer to the
figure below.
<1>
<1>
* Hexagonal socket head bolt (with washer)
M6, L = 20, 4 locations
Tightening torque = 9.8 Nm
332
No. 2J308-036EN*I
7.2.3 For the CAS-820B
Alignment adjustment for the C-arm main unit is performed at the time of shipment from the
factory. Therefore, alignment should be performed referring to the figures below at the time of
installation only if necessary.
<2>
<3>
<1>
Adjustment locations in direction <1> (for the I.I. only)

<4>
 16", 14", 12" combined
Hexagonal bolt (with washer)
M8, L = 20
6 locations, tightening torque = 11 N m
 9" combined
Hexagonal socket head bolt
M5, L = 16
4 locations, tightening torque = 6 N m
Adjustment locations in directions <2> and <3>

Hexagonal socket head bolt M8, L = 20, 4 locations

Adjust the angle with shims.
333
No. 2J308-036EN*I
7.3 Beam Centering of the X-ray Tube Unit for CAS-810A, CAS-830A, CAS-820B
(1) Set the support unit to RAO/LAO = 0° and CRA/CAU = 0° and set the SID as follows.
TFP-800A/A1, TFP-800A/B1, or TFP-800B: SID = 900 mm (CAS-820B: SID = 950 mm),

TFP-1216A: SID = 900 mm
Apply a level to the X-ray tube unit mounting surface and check that is 0°. (Refer to the figure
below.)
When the TFP-1216A is used in combination, set the detector mounting position to the
central adjustment position and secure the detector at that position.
(2) Adjust the tabletop height of the catheterization table to the position 600 mm from the X-ray
tube focus. In this status, confirm that the tabletop is horizontal using the level. (Refer to the
figure below.)
(3) As shown in the figure below, place the collimator test tool (MODEL07-661) on the tabletop,
on which the beam alignment test tool (MODEL07-662) must be placed with the centers
coinciding with each other.
Detector
Beam alignment test tool
Collimator test tool

SID = near limit
Tabletop
600 mm
X-ray tube focus
Checking X-ray collimator adjustment
(4) Set the detector magnification size to approximately 7".
334
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(5) Perform fluoroscopy and confirm that none of the beam limiting device blades of the X-ray
beam limiting device appear on the TV monitor. If the blades appear on the TV monitor, open
them in the manner described below to remove them from the TV monitor.
<Opening/closing beam limiting device blades: for the BLA-800A or BLA-800C>
Slide the slide switch on the COLLI.CONT PWB of the X-ray beam limiting device main unit
from CPU to OVER.
Using the beam limiting device open/close switch of the support unit or the system console,
open the rectangular beam limiting device blades. To open/close the circular beam limiting
device blades, operate the circular beam limiting device blade open/close switches (round
pushbutton switches) on the COLLI. CONT PWB of the X-ray beam limiting device main unit.
Until beam centering is completed, keep the slide switch set to the OVER side.
COLLI. CONT PWB
Circular beam limiting device

blade open/close switches
Slide switch
OVER CPU
<Opening/closing beam limiting device blades: for the BLA-900A or BLA-900C>
Use the beam limiting device keyboard to select Mode 0 and sub-mode 80 or 81 and press
the [OPEN] key to open the beam limiting device blades.
Note that pressing the [CLEAR] key returns the beam limiting device blades to their original
status.
335
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(6) Move the tabletop so that the center of the collimator test tool is aligned with the center of the
display area on the TV monitor. At this time, the cross scale must be the same in the vertical
and horizontal directions as shown in the figure below.
1
5
2
4
3
3
4
2
5
6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6
6
3 4 5 6 7 8 8 7 6 5 4 3
6
2
5
3
4
4
3
5
2
6
Position on the TV monitor
(7) When the monitor appears as shown in the figure above, the two small balls of the beam
alignment test tool being overlapped at the center indicate that beam alignment is adjusted
appropriately. The pattern of misalignment between the two small balls suggests the degree
at which the beam is misaligned with respect to the vertical direction on the detector front.
Within 0.5 Within approx. 1.5 Approx. 3
Misalignment angle of beam alignment
The standard for misalignment shall be within 1.
(8) If misalignment is greater than 1, move the X-ray tube unit horizontally for adjustment.
To move the X-ray unit, refer to the installation manual.
(9) When adjustment is completed, secure the X-ray tube unit firmly.
If the beam limiting device blades were opened in step (5), return them to the original status.
The collimator test tool and the beam alignment test tool are used for beam centering of the
X-ray beam limiting device described in the next subsection. Therefore, they must be left as
they are.
336
No. 2J308-036EN*I
7.4 Beam Centering of the X-ray Beam Limiting Device for CAS-810A, CAS-830A, CAS-820B
(1) With the setting in subsection 7.3, perform fluoroscopy to make adjustments so that the
circular beam limiting device blades can be collimated towards the center as shown in the
figure below. For the adjustment procedures, refer to (2).
(For the BLA-900C used in combination, the shape of the beam limiting device blades is
square.)
Circular beam limiting device blade
1
5
2
4
3
3
4
2
5
6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6
6
3 4 5 6 7 8 8 7 6 5 4 3
1
6
2
5
3
4
4
3
5
2
6
Beam centering of the X-ray beam limiting device
337
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) For beam centering of the X-ray beam limiting device, first loosen the 4 screws temporarily
securing the X-ray beam limiting device and then move the X-ray beam limiting device main
unit back/forth and left/right for centering.
After centering has been completed, firmly tighten the 4 screws securing the X-ray beam
limiting device, mark the screw heads with green paint, and mount the cover.
Linear extension from the

green on the bolt head
Mounting screw (4 locations)

Mounting torque : 4.5 N m
{45 kg cm}
(when the BLA-800C is used
in combination)
Mounting torque : 10.0 N m

{100 kg cm}
(when the BLA-800A is used
in combination)
Beam centering of the X-ray beam limiting device (for the CAS-830A)
Beam centering of the X-ray beam limiting device (for the CAS-820B and BLA-900C used in combination)
338
No. 2J308-036EN*I
7.5 Beam Centering (for systems that use the CAS-880A (with FPD8 (TFP-800A/A1, TFP-800A/B1))
or CAS-830B (with FPD8 (TFP-800A/A1)))
7.5.1 Outline and precautions for systems that use the CAS-880A (with FPD8 (TFP-800A/A1,
TFP-800A/B1)) or CAS-830B (with FPD8 (TFP-800A/A1))
Alignment adjustment for the C-arm main unit, excluding the X-ray beam limiting device and
FPD, has already been performed at the time of shipment. Therefore, alignment adjustment
must be performed by referring to the flowchart below and confirming the adjustment locations
only if necessary at the time of installation.
339
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Figure 7.5.1-1 (a) For the BLA-800C used in combination
340
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Figure 7.5.1-1 (b) For the BLA-900C used in combination

for FPD Hexagonal socket head bolts M4,
<1> L = 12, 16, 2 bolts × 3 locations
FPD adjustment plate securing locations
Hexagonal bolts M8, L = 20, 4 locations
Figure 7.5.1-2 TFP-800A/A1
341
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Figure 7.5.1-3
Figure 7.5.1-4 (a) For the BLA-800C
342
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Figure 7.5.1-4 (b) For the BLA-900C
343
No. 2J308-036EN*I
7.5.2 Alignment of the X-ray tube unit (focus), the rotation center of the X-ray beam limiting device,
and the FPD near/away movement direction for CAS-880A
(1) Set the support unit to RAO/LAO = 0, CRA/CAU = 0, and floor base rotation/support
column rotation/X-ray beam limiting device rotation/FPD rotation = 0. Set the SID to
1250 mm.
Place a level against the X-ray beam limiting device mounting surface and confirm that it
reads 0.
(2) As shown in the figure below, align the steel center of the beam alignment test tool
(MODEL07-662) with the center of the hole in the tool for setting the test tool, and then
secure it in position using the thumb screws. (This is not required for systems with the
BLA-900C used in combination.)
Tool for setting the test tool
Thumb screws (3 locations)
When the BLA-900C is used in combination, also use the beam alignment plate (provided
for the XGTM-048C: 3X13-14282).
Beam alignment plate
344
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) As shown in the figure below, place the tool for setting the test tool, to which the beam
alignment test tool has been secured, on the X-ray beam limiting device rotation unit.
When the BLA-900C is used in combination, mount the beam alignment plate and place the
beam alignment test tool on it.

Tool for setting the test tool
X-ray beam limiting device rotation unit
(X-ray beam limiting device surface)
For the XGTM-028C
For the XGTM-048C
345
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(4) Perform fluoroscopy. When the image on the monitor appears as shown in the figure below,
if the small ball of the beam alignment test tool at the detector side is within that at the tube
side, alignment of the X-ray tube unit (focus) and the rotation center of the X-ray beam
limiting device is properly adjusted.
The distance between the two small balls indicates the degree of misalignment between the
X-ray tube unit (focus) and the rotation center of the X-ray beam limiting device.
When the BLA-900C is used in combination, perform adjustment so that the small ball of the
beam alignment test tool is aligned with the center of the beam alignment plate.
In addition, perform adjustment so that the crosshairs of the beam alignment plate are
aligned with the crosshairs on the monitor.
Small ball of the beam alignment test tool

at the tube side
Small ball of the beam alignment test tool

at the detector side
Small ball at the

detector side
Small ball at the

tube side
Schematic diagram of the

beam alignment test tool
Small balls of the beam alignment test tool on the monitor
Approx. 1.5 mm misalignment Approx. 3 mm misalignment
Misalignment distance between the X-ray tube unit (focus) and

the rotation center of the X-ray beam limiting device (for the BLA-800C)
346
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Small balls of the beam alignment test tool on the monitor
Approx. 1.5 mm misalignment Approx. 3 mm misalignment
Misalignment distance between the X-ray tube unit (focus) and

the rotation center of the X-ray beam limiting device (for the BLA-900C)
(5) If the small ball at the detector side is not within that at the tube side, move the X-ray beam
limiting device rotation unit horizontally so that the small ball at the detector side is within that
at the tube side. For the adjustment locations, refer to <2> in figure 7.5.1-4 (a) or figure
7.5.1-4 (b) <2>.
(6) Set the SID to 900 mm.
(7) Perform fluoroscopy. When the image on the monitor appears as shown in the figure above,
if the small ball of the beam alignment test tool at the detector side is within that at the tube
side, alignment of the X-ray beam and the FPD near/away movement direction is properly
adjusted.
(8) If the small ball at the detector side is not within that at the tube side, adjust the X-ray tube
unit mounting angle so that the small ball at the detector side is within that at the tube side.
For the adjustment locations, refer to <4> in figure 7.5.1-4 (a) or figure 7.5.1-4 (b) <4>.
After adjustment, set the SID to 1250 mm and confirm that the small ball at the detector side
is within that at the tube side. The tool for setting the test tool will be used to prevent X-ray
leakage at the time of alignment of the FPD (center of the detection area) and the rotation
center of the FPD as described in the next subsection. Therefore, this must be left as is.
347
No. 2J308-036EN*I
7.5.3 Alignment of the center of the detection area and the rotation center of the FPD for CAS-880A
(1) As described in the previous subsection, set the support unit to RAO/LAO = 0,
CRA/CAU = 0, and floor base rotation/support column rotation/X-ray beam limiting device
rotation/FPD rotation = 0. Set the SID to 900 mm.
(2) Adjust the height of the catheterization table to 1150 mm above the floor surface.
(3) As shown in the figure below, place the tool for adjusting the tilt of the test tool near the
center of the FPD detection surface on the tabletop on which the beam alignment test tool
(MODEL07-662) is to be placed.
Place a level against the top surface of the beam alignment test tool (MODEL07-662) and
adjust the lengths of the legs of the tool to adjust the tilt of the test tool so that the level
reads 0. (Remove the beam alignment plate from the BLA-900C.)
FPD
Thumb screw (for securing Tool for adjusting the tilt

the beam alignment test tool) of the test tool
Leg of the tool for adjusting
the tilt of the test tool
Tabletop
SID 900 mm
Tabletop height = 1150 mm
X-ray tube focus
Floor surface
348
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(4) Rotate the X-ray beam limiting device rotation unit/FPD to -45, 0, and 45 and perform
fluoroscopy at each angle position. Move the tool for adjusting the tilt of the test tool to a
position on the tabletop where the smaller ball of the beam alignment test tool shown on
the monitor does not move as the FPD is rotated.
The small ball of the beam alignment test tool can be positioned anywhere in the display
area of the TV monitor.
Move the test tool to a location

-45 where this point does not move
even when beam limiting
+45 device/FPD rotation is performed.
Fluoroscopic image on the TV monitor
Top view of the tabletop
349
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(5) The reference line is displayed on the monitor for adjusting the alignment of the X-ray field.
Refer to subsection 31.9 for display procedures.
(6) Perform fluoroscopy at X-ray beam limiting device rotation/FPD rotation = 0. When the
center of the reference line on the display area of the TV monitor is aligned with the
smaller ball of the beam alignment test tool as shown in the figure below, alignment of the
FPD (center of the detection area) and the rotation center of the FPD is properly adjusted.
Reference line displayed
Small ball of the beam

alignment test tool
(7) If the center of the reference line is not aligned with the smaller ball of the beam alignment
test tool on the TV monitor, move the FPD horizontally for adjustment.
For the adjustment locations, refer to <1> in figure 7.5.1-2 or <1> in figure 7.5.1-3.
After adjustment, remove the tool for adjusting the tilt of the test tool from the tabletop and
proceed to the next subsection concerning alignment of the rotation center of the X-ray
beam limiting device and FPD (center of the detection area).
350
No. 2J308-036EN*I
7.5.4 Alignment of the rotation center of the X-ray beam limiting device and the FPD (center of the
detection area) for CAS-880A
(2) As described in (2), (3) of subsection 7.5.2, place the test tool on the X-ray beam limiting
device rotation unit on which the beam alignment test tool (MODEL07-662) is to be placed.
(For the BLA-900C used in combination, mount the beam alignment plate and place the
beam alignment test tool on it.)
(3) Perform fluoroscopy. When the center of the reference line on the display area of the TV
monitor is aligned with the small ball of the beam alignment test tool, alignment of the
rotation center of the X-ray beam limiting device and the FPD (center of the detection area)
is properly adjusted.
(4) If the small ball of the beam alignment test tool is not aligned with the center of the
reference line on the TV monitor, move the X-ray tube unit horizontally for adjustment.
For the adjustment locations, refer to <3> in figure 7.5.1-4 (a) or figure 7.5.1-4 (b) <3>.
After adjustment, remove the tool for setting the test tool and beam alignment test tool
(MODEL07-662).
(For the BLA-900C used in combination, remove the beam alignment plate and beam
alignment test tool.)
351
No. 2J308-036EN*I
7.5.5 Alignment of the X-ray beam limiting device and the FPD (center of the detection area) for
CAS-880A
(Since adjustment is not required for the BLA-900C, it is not necessary to perform the procedure
described in this subsection.)
(2) Temporarily secure the X-ray beam limiting device according to the installation manual.
(3) Perform fluoroscopy and confirm that none of the square beam limiting device blades of
the X-ray beam limiting device appear on the TV monitor. If the blades appear on the TV
monitor, open them using the blade open/close switch of the support unit or system
console.
(4) Open the circular beam limiting device blades using the circular beam limiting device blade
open/close switches (round pushbutton switches) on the COLLI.CONT PWB of the X-ray
beam limiting device main unit.
Keep the slide switch set to the OVER position until beam centering is completed.
COLLI. CONT PWB
Circular beam limiting device

blade open/close switches
Slide switch
OVER CPU
(5) Perform fluoroscopy. Perform adjustment so that the circular beam limiting device blades
can be collimated towards the center of the TV monitor as shown in the figure below.
Adjust the direction of the reference line and rectangular blade of the collimator.
For the adjustment procedures, refer to (6).
Circular beam
limiting device blade
Beam centering of the X-ray beam limiting device
352
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(6) For beam centering of the X-ray beam limiting device, first loosen the 4 screws that are
temporarily securing the X-ray beam limiting device and then move the X-ray beam limiting
device main unit horizontally (directions indicated by the arrows in the figure below) for
adjustment.
After centering is completed, firmly tighten the 4 screws for securing the X-ray beam
limiting device, apply green paint to the heads of the screws, and then mount the cover.
Mark an extension line from

the green on the screw head.
Mounting screws (4 locations)

Tightening torque: 4.5 N m
(7) Delete the displayed reference line.
Refer to subsection 31.9 for cancellation procedures.
353
No. 2J308-036EN*I
7.6 Alignment of the Rotation Center of the FPD (TFP-1216A)
(1) Perform steps (1) to (4) in subsection 7.3 to set the adjustment positions of the support unit
and the catheterization table.
Set the support unit to the following position.
RAO/LAO = 0, CRA/CAU = 0, SID = 900 mm, FPD rotation position = Portrait (FPD rotation
position = 0, Auto Pos # 90).
(2) Display the reference line indicating the center of the image receptor on the TV monitor.
By following the procedure described below, display the reference line on the TV monitor that
indicates the center of the image receptor for alignment (LIH image only).
(a) Enter Service mode in the DFP-8000A.
(b) Select "Command Line" in the [Utils] tab.
(c) Select/enter the following command and parameters.
<1> To display the reference line on the LIH (last image hold) image
Select "Command List"  "Cross Line ON".
Press the [Go] button to execute the command.
<2> To disable image rotation correction
Select "Command List"  "Image Rot Correct DISABLE".
(d) Restart the DFP-8000A.
<1> Confirm that the reference line is displayed on the LIH image.
<2> Rotate the FPD and confirm that image rotation correction is disabled during
rotation between the portrait orientation and the landscape orientation.
Reference line displayed
Small ball of the beam

alignment test tool
354
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Rotate the FPD to the portrait orientation. Perform fluoroscopy and move/adjust the beam
alignment test tool and collimator test tool so that the steel ball of the beam alignment test
tool is located at the center of the reference line that was displayed in step (2).
(4) For reference, attach, for example, an M6 washer on the front surface of the FPD. Then
adjust the position so that the center of the washer is aligned with the center of the image
receptor (FPD) shown on the screen.
(5) Rotate the FPD to the portrait orientation (FPD rotation position = 0, Auto Pos #90). Perform
fluoroscopy while rotating the FPD until the FPD reaches the landscape orientation (FPD
rotation position = 90, Auto Pos #91).
(6) Perform fluoroscopy again. After fluoroscopy, check the amount of shift between the center
of the reference line on the LIH monitor (center of the M6 washer attached on the FPD front
surface), that was displayed in step (2), and the steel ball position of the beam alignment test
tool. If the amount of shift exceeds 1, adjust the FPD mounting position.
355
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(7) For FPD mounting position adjustment, loosen bolts <4> in the figure in subsection 7.2.2 and
push/pull the adjustment bolts in the X/Y directions.
For positional adjustment, referring to the figure below, align the center of the image receptor
(FPD) (center of the reference line shown on the LIH image) and the mechanical rotation
center axis for FPD rotation.
Based on , , and shown in the figure below, estimate the FPD rotation center and
adjust the FPD mounting position.
Center of the reference line, displayed in step (2)
Steel ball position of the beam alignment test tool

after FPD rotation, calculated in step (6)
FPD rotation center
Perpendicular bisector of the line passes and
Estimation of the FPD rotation center position
(8) After adjustment, rotate the FPD to the portrait and landscape orientations and perform
fluoroscopy at both orientations. Check the amount of shift for the FPD rotation center.
If the amount of shift at the center position exceeds 1, repeat steps (3) to (7).
Since the FPD position has been adjusted, move the beam alignment test tool and collimator
test tool, perform readjustment, and then perform checks.
356
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(9) Hide the reference line indicating the center of the image receptor on the TV monitor and
enable image rotation correction.
Hide the reference line indicating the center of the image receptor (for alignment) on the TV
monitor (LIH image only) and enable image rotation correction as follows.
(a) Enter Service mode in the DFP-8000A.
(b) Select "Command Line" in the [Utils] tab.
(c) Select/enter the following command and parameters.
<1> To hide the reference line on the LIH (last image hold) image
Select "Command List"  "Cross Line OFF".
<2> To enable image rotation correction
Select "Command List"  "Image Rot Correct ENABLE".
(d) Restart the DFP-8000A.
<1> Confirm that the reference line is not displayed on the LIH image.
<2> Rotate the FPD and confirm that image rotation correction functions during
rotation between the portrait orientation and the landscape orientation.
357
No. 2J308-036EN*I
7.7 Beam Centering (for systems that use the CAS-880A (with FPD1216 (TFP-1216A/A1) or FPD12
(TFP-1200A, TFP-1200A/B1)) or CAS-830B (with FPD1216 (TFP-1216A/A1) or FPD12 (TFP-
1200A)))
7.7.1 Outline and precautions for systems that use the CAS-880A (with FPD1216 (TFP-1216A/A1) or
FPD12 (TFP-1200A, TFP-1200A/B1)) or CAS-830B (with FPD1216 (TFP-1216A/A1) or FPD12
(TFP-1200A))
Except for the X-ray beam limiting and FPD, the alignment adjustments for the C-arm are
finished when shipped. For this reason, refer to the following flowchart to confirm the
adjustment position and make alignment adjustments only when necessary during installation.
Alignment adjustment flowchart
(1) Alignment of the X-ray tube unit (focus) and FPD near/away
movement direction
Adjustment location: <3> <4> in figure 7.7.1-1
Refer to subsection 7.7.2 of this manual.
(2) Alignment of the FPD (center of the detection area) and

rotation center of the FPD
Adjustment location: <1> in figure 7.7.1-1
(3) Alignment of the X-ray tube unit (focus) and X-ray beam
limiting device, FPD (center of the detection area)
Adjustment location: <2> in figure 7.7.1-1, X-ray beam limiting device
358
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Figure 7.7.1-1
359
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Adjustment location for direction

<1> (FPD) FPD adjustment plate securing section
Hexagonal socket head bolts Hexagonal bolts (M8, L = 20), 4 locations
(M4, L = 12 and 16), Tightening torque = 10.8 N m
2 bolts × 2 locations
<1>
Figure 7.7.1-2 TFP-1216A/A1
Adjustment location for direction

<1> (FPD)
Hexagonal socket head bolts
(M4, L = 16, 20), 2 bolts x
2 locations
Adjustment location for direction FPD adjustment plate securing section

<1> (FPD) Hexagonal bolts
Hexagonal socket head bolts (M8, L = 20), 4 locations
(M4, L = 16, 20), 4 bolts x 1 location Tightening torque = 10.8 N•m
<1>
Figure 7.7.1-3 TFP-1200A
360
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Figure 7.7.1-4 TFP-1200A/B1
361
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Adjustment location for direction <2>

(beam limiting device)
<2> Pan head screws (M4, L = 8),
2 screws × 4 locations
Beam limiting device securing section
Hexagonal socket head bolts (M5, L = 16),
4 locations
Tightening torque = 5.9 N•m
<A>

<4> Adjustment location for direction <3> (X-ray tube unit)

Hexagonal bolts (M6, L = 20, 25), 2 bolts × 4 locations
Adjustment location for direction <4> (X-ray tube unit)
The angle is adjusted by inserting shims between part
<3> <A> and part .
X-ray tube unit adjustment plate securing section

Hexagonal bolts (M8, L = 25), 4 locations
Tightening torque = 25 N•m
Figure 7.7.1-5
362
No. 2J308-036EN*I
7.7.2 Alignment of X-ray tube unit (focus) and FPD near/away movement direction
(1) Set tube support to RAO/LAO = 0°, CRA/CAU = 0°, floor base rotation/column rotation/
X-ray beam limiting device rotation/FPD rotation = 0°, and set SID to 1200 mm (when
FPD1216 is used in combination) or 1250 mm (when FPD12 is used in combination).
Put a level on the X-ray beam limiting device attachment surface and confirm that it is 0°.
363
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Set the positioning tool for the beam alignment test tool on the X-ray beam limiting device
attachment panel as shown in the figure below. When doing so, the center of the beam
alignment test tool should be exactly even with the boring for the center of the X-ray beam
limiting device attachment panel.
X-ray beam limiting device

attachment panel
364
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Perform fluoroscopy. When the monitor image appears like in the figure below, it is good if
the detector-side sphere is within the tube-side sphere of the beam alignment test tool.
If the two are apart, adjust the horizontal position of the beam alignment test tool so that
the spheres overlap.
Tube-side sphere of the

Detector-side sphere of the

Detector-side sphere
Tube-side sphere
Schematic of the beam alignment test tool
Beam alignment test tool sphere on the monitor
Off approximately 1.5 mm Off approximately 3 mm
X-ray tube unit (focus) and the distance from it
(4) Set SID to 900 mm.
(5) Perform fluoroscopy. When the monitor image appears like in the figure above, if the
detector-side sphere is within the tube-side sphere of the beam alignment test tool, the
X-ray beam and FPD near/away movement direction are appropriately adjusted.
(6) If the detector-side sphere is not within the tube-side sphere, move the angulation scale of
the X-ray tube device to adjust it so that the detector-side sphere is within the tube-side
sphere. For the adjustment location, refer to figure 7.7.1-4 <4>.
After the adjustment, set SID to 1200 mm (when FPD1216 is used in combination) or 1250
mm (when FPD12 is used in combination) and confirm that the detector-side sphere is
within the tube-side sphere.
Note that the test tool setting equipment is used to prevent X-ray leakage when adjusting
the FPD (center of the detection area) and rotation center of the FPD in the next
subsection, so it should be left as is.
365
No. 2J308-036EN*I
7.7.3 Alignment of the FPD (center of the detection area) and rotation center of the FPD
(1) Continuing from the previous subsection, set tube support to RAO/LAO = 0°,
CRA/CAU = 0°, floor base rotation/column rotation/FPD rotation = 0°, and set SID to
900 mm.
(2) Fine-tune the height of the tabletop of the catheterization table to a position 1150 mm from
the surface of the floor.
(3) Put the horizontal level tool for the beam alignment test tool near the FPD front surface on
the tabletop as shown in the figure below, and then set the beam alignment test tool on top
of it.
In this state, put a level on the top surface of the beam alignment test tool (MODEL07-662)
and adjust the legs of the horizontal level tool for the beam alignment test tool so that it
reads 0°.
FPD
Knob screw Beam alignment test tool
(Horizontal level tool for the Test tool tilt adjustment jig
beam alignment test tool) Test tool adjustment jig legs
Tabletop
SID 900 mm
Tabletop height = 1150 mm
X-ray tube focus
Floor surface
366
No. 2J308-036EN*I
*1, *2
(4) Rotate the FPD , perform fluoroscopy at each rotation angle, and move the horizontal
level tool for the beam alignment test tool to a position on top of the tabletop where the
beam alignment test tool sphere (the smaller one) does not move in response to FPD
rotation.
When doing this, the position of the beam alignment test tool sphere in the display area of
the TV monitor is arbitrary.
Adjust the position of the test tool

so that the beam alignment test
-135 tool sphere does not move on the
fluoroscopic images when the
+135 X-ray beam limiting device and
FPD are rotated.
Fluoroscopic images displayed on the TV monitor
Tabletop when viewed from above
*1 FPD rotation angle

 FPD1216 (TFP-1216A/A1): -135, 0, 135
 FPD12 (TFP-1200A, TFP-1200A/B1): -45, 0, 45
*2 Because the FPD rotation angles are normally -45° to +45°, make the settings below before
carrying out these operations.
 Turn OFF the CAS power supply.
 Set DipSW10-1 to ON on the [A03] MIO PWB.
 Set RotSW6 to 6 on the [A03] MIO PWB.
 Turn ON the CAS power supply.
 Run the FPD rotation operations by rotating the X-ray exposure range adjustment lever.
367
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(5) Reference lines are displayed on the monitor to adjust the alignment of the X-ray exposure
field.
Refer to subsection 31.9 for display procedures.
(6) Perform fluoroscopy with FPD rotation = 0°. If the center of the crosshairs on the TV
monitor are aligned with the beam alignment test tool sphere (the smaller one) as shown in
the figure below, the FPD (center of the detection area) and the rotation center of the FPD
are appropriately adjusted.
Displayed crosshairs
Beam alignment
test tool sphere
(7) If the beam alignment test tool sphere (the smaller one) on the monitor image is not
aligned with the center of the crosshairs on the TV monitor, move the FPD in the horizontal
direction to adjust it.
For the adjustment location, refer to figure 7.7.1-2 <1> (for FPD1216) or to figure 7.7.1-3
<1> or figure 7.7.1-4 <1> (for FPD12). After the adjustment, tighten any loose attachment
bolts.
368
No. 2J308-036EN*I
7.7.4 Alignment of the X-ray tube focus and the center of the X-ray beam limiting device, FPD (center
of the detection area)
(1) Perform fluoroscopy. When the monitor image appears, confirm that the beam alignment
test tool spheres overlap. If the beam alignment test tool spheres are not aligned, move
the X-ray tube unit in the horizontal direction to adjust it.
For the adjustment location, refer to figure 7.7.1-5 <2>.
(2) In this state, if the beam alignment test tool sphere is aligned with the center of the
crosshairs on the TV monitor, the X-ray tube focus and FPD (center of the detection area)
are appropriately adjusted. (Refer to the figure on the previous page.) After the
adjustment, remove the positioning tool for the beam alignment test tool and the beam
alignment test tool (MODEL07-662). After the adjustment, tighten any loose attachment
bolts on the X-ray tube sphere attachment panel.
(3) Refer to 2C308-087EN to attach the X-ray beam limiting device.
Set tube support to RAO/LAO = 0°, CRA/CAU = 0°, floor base rotation/column rotation/X-
ray beam limiting device rotation/FPD rotation = 0°, and set SID to 1050 mm.
(4) Perform fluoroscopy, and move it until the rectangular blades for the X-ray beam limiting
device are displayed on the monitor along with the longitudinal blades/lateral blades.
Adjust the beam limiting device until the vertical and lateral movement of the rectangular
blades on the monitor seems even and the blades are parallel with the edge of the screen,
as shown in the figure below. Doing so aligns the center of the X-ray beam limiting device
and the FPD (center of the detection area).
After the adjustment, tighten any loose attachment bolts on the X-ray beam limiting device.
Lateral blades
Longitudinal
blades
Fluoroscopic images displayed on the TV monitor
369
No. 2J308-036EN*I
8. FPD/X-RAY BEAM LIMITING DEVICE ADJUSTMENT
8.1 X-ray Beam Limiting Device Aperture Adjustment (BLA-800A, BLA-800C)
This subsection describes the adjustment procedures for the X-ray beam limiting device
(BLA-800A, BLA-800C).
8.1.1 Preparation
(1) Connecting the keyboard unit
Refer to the figure below to connect the keyboard unit to the COLLIMATOR CONT PWB or
COLLIMATOR I/F PWB of the support unit.
Configured in the control unit

COLLIMATOR CONT PWB
of the support unit
or COLLIMATOR I/F PWB
Keyboard unit
CNN2
Connecting the keyboard unit
(2) Turning ON the power
Turn ON the power of the X-ray beam limiting device.
Confirm that at power ON, the beam limiting device blades are automatically opened,
initialized, and closed again to specific positions.
(3) Setting the type of the combined support unit
Use the keyboard unit to select mode 1 sub-mode 35.
Depending on the combined support unit, use the [OPEN] and [CLOSE] keys to set the
number corresponding to the units below and write it using the [STORE] key.
 CAS-830A : 0
 CAS-810A : 3
 CAS-820B : 4
 CAS-880A : 5
Turn OFF and ON the power to make the setting available.
370
No. 2J308-036EN*I
8.1.2 Aperture adjustment
Perform X-ray radiation field aperture adjustment according to the procedures below.
Understanding the aperture adjustment procedures Refer to (1).

using the keyboard unit

Clearing all of the data when aperture adjustment is Refer to subsection 8.1.4.
performed again.

Aperture adjustment for the normal size I.I. Refer to (2).
(Support unit angle: Angles marked  in table 8.1.2-1)

Entering a sag correction value for the support unit Refer to (3).
(Support unit angle: Angles marked  in table 8.1.2-1)

Aperture adjustment for the normal size detector Refer to (4).
CAUTION: 1. Aperture adjustment must be performed in the specified order.

If adjustment is performed in a different order, aperture adjustment
data may become abnormal.
2. Exposure of fluoroscopic X-rays is involved. Provide sufficient

protection against X-ray exposure for yourself, as well as other
workers.
3. Set the digital zoom magnification to 1.0.
4. When the FPD is used in combination, the aperture of the circular

blade is set through calculation of the aperture information for the
rectangular blades. Therefore, the adjusted value of the circular
blade aperture will not be reflected in actual movement of the
circular blade. However, adjust the aperture and enter values for the
circular blade to ensure that the software does not detect abnormal
values.
371
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(1) Aperture adjustment procedures using the keyboard unit
(a) Selecting the mode and sub-mode (mode 4 and sub-modes 01 to 05 are used)
<1> Press the [MODE] key and press [4]. : Display 4-00
<2> Then, press the [SUB] key and press [0] [1]. : Display 4-01
<3> Press the [READ] key.
This selects mode 4 and sub-mode 01. The display indicates the radiation field on
the detector of each beam limiting device blade (in units of 0.1 mm).
Mode 4 is the aperture adjustment mode. Also, a sub-mode No. is assigned to each
beam limiting device as shown below. When sub-mode 01 is selected, L blades are
set.
Sub-mode 01: L blade

Sub-mode 02: R blade
Sub-mode 03: H blade
Sub-mode 04: F blade
Sub-mode 05: Circular blade
(b) When the [OPEN] or [CLOSE] key is pressed, the L blades selected by sub-mode 01
open/close. Perform fluoroscopy and adjust the positions of the L blades using the
[OPEN] or [CLOSE] keys while observing the TV monitor.
(c) When the [STORE] key is pressed, the adjustment data of the positions of the
L blades is saved. When the data is successfully saved, "0End" is displayed.
(d) Press the [SUB] key, the [0] [2] keys, and then the [READ] key. Sub-mode 02 is
selected to allow R blade adjustment. The adjustment procedures are the same as
in (b) and (c).
(e) In the same manner, adjustment can be performed in sub-modes 03 to 05.
NOTE: Setting the circular blade (sub-mode 05) first will make it easier to set the
rectangular blades.
372
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Aperture adjustment of each beam limiting device blade (standard status of the support
unit: normal size detector)
Adjust the aperture of the circular and rectangular beam limiting device blades.
(a) Preparation
<1> Set the support unit to the angle indicated by  in table 8.1.2-1.
<2> Select Normal for the detector size. Also, set the SID to the minimum.
(b) Adjustment
<1> Use the keyboard unit to select mode 4 and sub-modes 01 to 05.
<2> While performing fluoroscopy, adjust each beam limiting device blade as shown
in the figure below and save the adjustment data.
Adjustment position for the circular

beam limiting device blade
Adjustment position for the rectangular beam limiting

device blades
Position where the edge of the X-ray radiation field
collimated by the beam limiting device blades
coincides with the display area of the monitor image
{For fluoroscopy with the normal or magnified FPD size}
TV monitor fluoroscopic image
NOTE: If the angle of the support unit is not appropriate, "EEEE" is displayed in the
display section of the keyboard unit.
373
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Entering a sag correction value for the support unit
Enter a sag correction value for the circular and rectangular beam limiting device blades.
(a) Preparation
<1> Select Normal for the detector size.
<2> SID = minimum, support column rotation  0°
(b) Angles at which data is entered for the support unit
Perform the data entry procedures described in (c) at all angle positions indicated by
 in table 8.1.2-1.
For the angles indicated by , data entry can be started at any angle position and in
any order.
For the angles indicated by  in table 8.1.2-1, data is already entered in (2).
Table 8.1.2-1 Sag correction entry angles
 CAS-830A
RAO LAO
180° 90° 0° 90°
90°     : Normal only
CAU
45°     : Normal, Mag1, Mag2, Mag3
0°    
CRA
45°    
 CAS-810A
RAO LAO
90° 0° 90°
CAU 45°   
0°   
CRA
45°   
 CAS-820B
LAO
0° 90° 120°
CAU 45°   
0°   
CRA
45°   
374
No. 2J308-036EN*I
 CAS-880A
RAO LAO
90° 0° 90°
90°   
CAU
45°   
0°   
CRA
45°   
(b) Data entry
<1> Set the support unit to the angle indicated in (b).
<3> While performing fluoroscopy, adjust each beam limiting device blade as
described in (2) and save the adjustment data.
When adjustment is completed at all angles, the entry of sag correction values for
the support unit is completed.
NOTE: 1. If the data entry angle of the support unit is not appropriate, "EEEE" is
displayed in the display section of the keyboard unit.
2. It is sufficient to enter sag correction values for the normal detector

size only.
3. The sag correction angle is a mechanical angle. Set the angle

information display to mechanical angle display mode before starting
the work.
unit: magnified size detector)
(a) Preparation
Set the support unit to the angle indicated by  in table 8.1.2-1.
(b) Adjustment
<1> Select Mag1 for the detector magnification size.
<4> Perform steps <2> and <3> for all selectable magnified sizes.
(c) Terminating aperture adjustment mode
Press the [CLEAR] key to return from aperture adjustment mode to normal mode.
375
No. 2J308-036EN*I
8.1.3 Aperture adjustment (when the TFP-1216A is used in combination)
Adjust the radiation field size by following the procedures below.
Understanding the aperture adjustment procedures using the Refer to (1)

keyboard unit

Clearing all the data when aperture adjustment is to be Refer to subsection
performed again. 8.1.4.

Aperture adjustment for the normal size FPD Refer to (2)
* FPD rotation position: 0°(Portrait) only

Entering a sag correction value for the support unit Refer to (3)
(Support unit angle: Angles marked  in table 8.1.3-1)
* FPD rotation position: 0° (Portrait) only

Aperture adjustment for the normal size detector Refer to (4)
* FPD rotation position: Mag1 to Mag3 of 0°(Portrait)
* FPD rotation position: Normal to Mag3 of -90°(Landscape)

If adjustment is performed in a different order, aperture adjustment
data may become abnormal.
2. Exposure of fluoroscopic X-rays is involved. Provide sufficient

protection against X-ray exposure for yourself, as well as other
workers.
4. When the TFP-1216A is used in combination, do not adjust the

aperture of the circular beam limiting device blades.
376
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(1) Aperture adjustment procedures using the keyboard unit
This selects mode 4 and sub-mode 01. The display indicates the radiation field
on the detector of each beam limiting device blade (in units of 0.1 mm).
Mode 4 is the aperture adjustment mode. Also, a sub-mode No. is assigned to

each beam limiting device as shown below. When sub-mode 01 is selected,
L blades are set.

(b) When the [OPEN] or [CLOSE] key is pressed, the L blades selected by sub-mode 01
open/close. Perform fluoroscopy and adjust the positions of the L blades using the
(c) When the [STORE] key is pressed, the adjustment data of the positions of the L
blades is saved. When the data is successfully saved, "0End" is displayed.
in (b) and (c).
377
No. 2J308-036EN*I
unit: normal size detector)
Adjust the aperture of the circular and rectangular beam limiting device blades.
(a) Preparation
<1> Set the support unit to the angle indicated by  in table 8.1.3-1.
<2> Set the FPD rotation position to 0° (portrait) and select Normal for the X-ray
detector size. Also, set the SID to the minimum.
(b) Adjustment
<2> While performing fluoroscopy, adjust each beam limiting device blade as shown
in the figure below and save the adjustment data.
Adjustment position for the rectangular beam

device blades
Position where the edge of the X-ray radiation
collimated by the beam limiting device
coincides with the display area of the monitor
{For fluoroscopy with the normal or magnified FPD}
TV monitor fluoroscopic image
NOTE: If the angle of the support unit is not appropriate, "EEEE" is displayed
in the display section of the keyboard unit.
378
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Entering a sag correction value for the support unit
Enter a sag correction value for the rectangular beam limiting device blades.
(a) Preparation
<1> Set the FPD rotation position 0° (portrait) and select Normal for the X-ray
detector size.
<2> SID = minimum, support column rotation  0°
 in table 8.1.3-1.
For the angles indicated by , data entry can be started at any angle position and in
any order.
For the angles indicated by  in table 8.1.3-1, data is already entered in (2).
Table 8.1.3-1 Sag correction entry angles for the CAS-830A
RAO LAO
180° 90° 0° 90°
CAU 90°      : Normal only
45°      : Normal, Mag1, Mag2, Mag3
CRA 0°    
45°    
(c) Data entry
When adjustment is completed at all angles, the entry of sag correction values
for the support unit is completed.
NOTE: 1. If the data entry angle of the support unit is not appropriate,
"EEEE" is displayed in the display section of the keyboard unit.
2. It is sufficient to enter sag correction values for the normal detector

size only.
3. The sag correction angle is a mechanical angle. Set the angle

information display to mechanical angle display mode before
starting the work.
379
No. 2J308-036EN*I
unit: magnified size detector)
(a) Preparation
Set the support unit to the angle indicated by  in table 8.1.3-1.
(b) Adjustment
<1> Set the FPD rotation position to 0 (portrait) and select Mag 1 for the X-ray
detector size.
<4> Perform steps <2> and <3> for all selectable magnified sizes.
<5> After adjustment at an FPD rotation angle of 0 (portrait) is completed, change

the FPD rotation angle to -90 (landscape) and select Normal for the X-ray
detector size.
<8> Repeat the adjustment procedures described in <6> and <7> for all the
selectable magnification sizes.
Press the [CLEAR] key to return from aperture adjustment mode to normal mode.
380
No. 2J308-036EN*I
8.1.4 All clear procedures
If the aperture adjustment values for the beam limiting device blades and sag correction values
for the support unit cannot be written for some reason, clear all the data according to the
procedures below.
After all the data has been cleared, enter the aperture adjustment values for the beam limiting
device blades and sag correction values for the support unit.
Perform data entry in the order described in subsection 8.1.2.
Clear all procedures
(1) Turn OFF the power.
(2) Set the COLLI. CONT PWB of the X-ray beam limiting device as follows.
DIP Switch S1-1 : ON (OFF main)

RSW1 : 0
RSW2 : 3
(3) Turn ON the power.
The beam limiting device blades open. After approximately 30 seconds, all the data is
cleared.
When all the data is cleared, the beam limiting device blades are reset to the aperture of
the combined detector before correction.
Return the COLLI. CONT PWB setting of the beam limiting device to the standard settings.
DIP Switch S1-1 : OFF (ON main)

RSW1 : 0
RSW2 : 0
381
No. 2J308-036EN*I
8.2 X-ray Beam Limiting Device Aperture Adjustment (BLA-900A, BLA-900C)
This subsection describes the adjustment procedures for the X-ray beam limiting device
(BLA-900A, BLA-900C).
8.2.1 Preparation
(1) Checking/setting the type of the support unit used in combination
Confirm that RSW2 (which sets the support unit type) on the COLLIMATOR I/F PWB is set
correctly according to the support unit used in combination.
 CAS-810A ········································· 1
 CAS-820B ········································· 2
 CAS-830A, CAS-830B ························· 3
 CAS-880A ········································· 4
(2) Connecting the keyboard unit
Refer to subsection 8.2.1 to connect the keyboard unit to the COLLIMATOR I/F PWB of
the support unit.
(3) Turning ON the power
Turn ON the power of the X-ray beam limiting device.
Confirm that at power ON, the beam limiting device blades are automatically opened,
initialized, and closed again to the specified positions.
382
No. 2J308-036EN*I
8.2.2 Aperture adjustment
Perform X-ray field aperture adjustment according to the procedures below.

<1> Understanding the procedures for adjusting the aperture using the Refer to (1).
keyboard unit
<2> Clearing all the data when aperture adjustment is to be performed Refer to
again. subsection 8.2.3.
<3> Aperture adjustment with the Normal FPD field size Refer to (2).
* FPD rotation angle 0° (portrait setting)
<4> Entering a positional error correction value for the Normal FPD field Refer to (3).
size
(Support unit angle: Angles marked  in table 8.2.2-1)
* FPD rotation angle 0° (portrait setting)
<5> Aperture adjustment for each FPD size Refer to (4).

 FPD rotation angle 0° (portrait setting): Mag1(*) to Mag3
 FPD rotation angle 90° (landscape setting): Normal to Mag3
* Setting for the portrait-Normal combination has already been
performed in step <2>.
* Landscape setting is required only when the FPD1216 is used in
combination.

For the BLA- 900A/BLA-900C, aperture adjustment values with the
Normal field size are considered as standard. Positional errors are
calculated based strictly on the difference from these standard
values. The calculated positional errors are also used for correction
calculation in beam limiting device rotation. Therefore, never
change the aperture adjustment order.
2. Fluoroscopic X-rays are generated in this procedure. Ensure that all

workers are provided with sufficient protection against X-ray
exposure.
4. Since the BLA-900A/BLA-900C does not have circular blades,

circular blade adjustment mode is not provided.
5. In spot fluoroscopy, the beam limiting device blades are controlled

based on the conditions in which the aperture adjustment value and
the sag correction value are applied. Thus, the blade position for
the target ROI in spot fluoroscopy is calculated based on the blade
position adjusted by aperture adjustment and the sag correction. In
order to set the blade position accurately for the target ROI, be sure
to adjust the blade position without adding any unnecessary margin
so that the edge of the exposure field collimated by the beam
limiting device blades coincides with the display area of the monitor
image as described in 8.1.2 (2).
383
No. 2J308-036EN*I
CAUTION: Note that, after completion of aperture adjustment and sag

correction, if the beam limiting device blades are visible in the
image during FPD calibration or 3D calibration, add the aperture
adjustment margin that becomes effective temporarily. For details
for setting the aperture adjustment margin, refer to (1) (b) of
subsection 4.1.3 "Display contents list" in the service manual
2D308-016EN.
(1) Aperture adjustment using the keyboard unit
This selects mode 4 and sub-mode 01. The display indicates the X-ray field
data (positional data for the detector surface) calculated from the aperture data
(positional data for the blade surface) in steps of 0.1 mm.
Mode 4 is the aperture adjustment mode. Also, a sub-mode No. is assigned to

each beam limiting device blade as shown below. When sub-mode 01 is
selected, the L blade is set.

(b) When the [OPEN] or [CLOSE] key is pressed in sub-mode 01, the L blade is
opened/closed. Perform fluoroscopy and adjust the position of the L blade using the
(c) When the [STORE] key is pressed, the adjustment data for the position of the L blade
is saved. When the data is saved successfully, "End" is displayed.
in (b) and (c).
NOTE: 1. In aperture adjustment mode for the BLA-900A/BLA-900C, the X-ray

field data (positional data for the detector surface) calculated from the
aperture data (positional data for the blade surface) is displayed.
Therefore, when the [OPEN]/[CLOSE] key is pressed, the variation of X-
ray field size display may not be continuous.
2. The normal adjustment speed for the BLA-900A/BLA-900C is 1 mm/s.

The speed can be changed to 10 mm/s by pressing [OPEN]/[CLOSE]
while holding down the "1" key on the numeric keypad.
384
No. 2J308-036EN*I
unit: Normal FPD field size)
Adjust the aperture of the rectangular beam limiting device blades.
(a) Preparation
<1> Set the support unit to the angle marked  in table 8.2.2-1.
<2> Set the FPD rotation angle to 0 (portrait) and select Normal for the FPD field
size. Set the SID to the minimum and set the ceiling support column rotation,
floor base rotation, floor support column rotation, and beam limiting device
rotation angles to 0. If the limitations of the examination room make it difficult
to satisfy all these conditions, ensure that at least the beam limiting device
rotation angle is set to 0 and that the beam limiting device is not rotated during
the adjustment work.
(b) Adjustment
described in subsection 8.1.3 (2) and save the adjustment data.
NOTE: If the angle of the support unit is not appropriate, "EEEE" is displayed in the
display section of the keyboard unit.
(3) Entering a positional error correction value for the support unit
Enter a positional error correction value for the rectangular beam limiting device blades.
(a) Preparation
Set the FPD rotation position to 0 (portrait) and select Normal for the FPD field size.
Set the SID to minimum, and set the ceiling support column rotation angle, floor base
rotation angle, floor support column rotation angle, and beam limiting device rotation
angle to 0. If the limitations of the examination room make it difficult to satisfy all
these conditions, ensure that at least the beam limiting device rotation angle is set to
0 and that the beam limiting device is not rotated during the adjustment work.
 in table 8.2.2-1.
For the angles marked , data entry can be started at any angle position and in any
order.
* When the support unit is moved to the angle marked , the corresponding value
entered in (2) is displayed as the standard value.
* For the angles marked  in table 8.2.2-1, data is already entered in (2).
385
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(c) Data entry
When adjustment is completed at all angles, the entry of positional error

correction values for the support unit is completed.
NOTE: 1. If the data entry angle of the support unit is not appropriate, "EEEE" is
displayed in the display section of the keyboard unit.
2. It is sufficient to enter the positional error correction values only for the
Normal FPD field size.
3. The positional error correction angle is a mechanical angle. Set the angle
information display to mechanical angle display mode before starting the
work.
Table 8.2.2-1 Positional correction error entry angle
 CAS-880A
LAO LAO/RAO RAO

90° 0° 90°
CAU 90°   
CAU 45°   
CRA/CAU 0°    : Normal only
CRA 45°    : Normal, Mag1, Mag2, Mag3
 CAS-820B
LAO/RAO LAO/RAO LAO/RAO

120° 90° 0°
CRA/CAU 0° or 180°   
 CAS-830B
RAO LAO
180° 90° 0° 90°
CAU 90°     : Normal only
45°     : Normal, Mag1, Mag2, Mag3
CRA 0°    
45°    
386
No. 2J308-036EN*I
unit: each FPD field size)
(a) Preparation
Set the support unit to the angle marked  in table 8.2.2-1.
(b) Adjustment
<1> Set the FPD rotation position to 0 (portrait) and select Mag1 for the field size.
<4> Repeat steps <2> and <3> for all the selectable magnification sizes.
<5> After adjustment at an FPD rotation angle of 0 (portrait) is completed, change

the FPD rotation angle to 90 (landscape) and select the Normal FPD field size.
<8> Repeat steps <6> and <7> for all the selectable magnification sizes.
Press the [CLEAR] key to exit aperture adjustment mode and return to normal mode.
387
No. 2J308-036EN*I
8.2.3 Procedures for clearing all the data
If the aperture adjustment values for the beam limiting device blades and positional error
correction values for the support unit cannot be written for some reason, clear all the data
according to the procedures below.
After all the data has been cleared, re-enter the aperture adjustment values for the beam
limiting device blades and positional error correction values for the support unit.
Procedures for clearing all the data
(2) Change the setting of the COLLIMATOR I/F PWB in the [A04] slot of the CAS cabinet as
follows.
DSW 2-7 : ON (Setting for clearing the aperture adjustment/positional error)
Initialization of the beam limiting device blades starts (the blades open) and all the data is
cleared after approximately 30 seconds.
After all the data is cleared, the beam limiting device blade aperture is reset to the
uncorrected aperture for the installed detector.
Return the setting of the COLLIMATOR I/F PWB in the [A04] slot of the CAS cabinet to the
normal setting.
DSW 2-7 : OFF (Normal setting (clearing of an aperture adjustment/positional error is not
required))
388
No. 2J308-036EN*I
8.3 Beam Limiting Device Aperture Adjustment/Positional Error Correction
(System console aperture adjustment support tool)
This subsection describes the adjustment procedure using the system console aperture
adjustment support tool (hereinafter referred to as the "support tool") for the beam limiting device
(BLA-900A/BLA-900C). For beam limiting device aperture adjustment/positional error correction,
perform adjustment using either the keyboard or the support tool.
8.3.1 Support tool operating procedures
The support tool is intended to be used to perform aperture adjustment/positional error

correction from the control room. This support tool has the following functions.
 Selection of adjustment points for the support unit

 Selection of the beam limiting device blade adjustment positions (full-open position, 1/8
position)
 Aperture adjustment/positional error correction by manual operation
 Aperture adjustment/automatic calculation of positional error correction values at the 1/8
position (However, it is necessary to perform check and fine adjustment at the full-open
position.)
CAUTION: To position the support unit to the adjustment position using this tool,
press the radiography switch to perform auto-positioning. Although
X-rays are not generated during auto-positioning, keep in mind that
X-rays are generated as usual when other operations are performed.
In particular, note that X-rays are generated after auto-positioning has
timed out.
389
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(1) Descriptions of buttons and displays of the support tool
(a) (c)
(f) (g)
(k)
(d)
(b) (h)
(e) (i)
(l)
(m) (j)
Support tool screen
(a) [Arm Type] combo box
Select the support unit to be adjusted from the pull-down menu. After the support
unit is selected, the [Angle] buttons showing the buttons for each support unit are
displayed.
(b) Angle buttons
Select the support unit adjustment point from the displayed buttons. After selecting
the point, press the radiography switch. The support unit moves to the selected
position. When the current support unit and the target position match, update the
display aperture. A checkmark is placed in adjustment points whose correction
values have been saved after starting up this tool.
(c) [SID] box
Set the SID at which adjustment is performed. After entering the SID, select the
support unit adjustment point from the [Angle] buttons. The SID is set for the auto-
positioning target position.
390
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(d) Blade aperture entry box
Enter/display the aperture for each of the H, F, L, and R blades. If the beam limiting
device cannot be adjusted, "0" is displayed and no values can be entered. Note that
the displayed values are not for the radiation field but for the aperture of the beam
limiting device. Keep in mind that the scale is different from that of the conventional
keyboard.
(e) [Auto] button
Click this button to enable automatic calculation at the 1/8 position. When
fluoroscopy is performed with this button selected, aperture adjustment/automatic
calculation of positional error correction values are performed. When automatic
calculation is completed, the button changes to the unselected status.
(f) [Open] button, [1/8] button
Click these button to switch the adjustment position (described later) of the beam
limiting device blades.
[Open] button : Full-open position

[1/8] button : 1/8 position
(g) [Console] button
Click this button to interrupt Adjustment mode and enable checking of the beam
limiting device operation from the beam limiting device operating lever on the console.
Clicking this button again resumes Adjustment mode.
(h) [Auto Calc After Auto-Pos.] checkbox
When a checkmark is placed in this checkbox, each time the support unit adjustment
point is selected from the angle buttons, [Auto] button is automatically changed to the
selected status.
(i) [Store] button
Click this button to save the current correction values.
(j) [Close] button
Click this button to terminate adjustment.
(k) [FOV, FPD] buttons
Select the FOV from the displayed list. The current FPD orientation is displayed. For
systems other than those with the TFP-1216A used in combination, "Portrait" is
always selected. A checkmark is placed in the FOV buttons for which correction
values have been saved at the aperture adjustment position.
(l) Message display area
Messages such as operating procedures and errors are displayed.
(m) [Cross Line] button
Displays cross-line alignment for the radiation field.
391
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Selecting the support unit adjustment point
Select the support unit to be adjusted in the [Arm Type] combo box and position the
support unit using the support tool.
SID values must have been entered in the [SID] box.
(a) Select the support unit adjustment point from the angle buttons.
(b) When the radiography switch is pressed immediately after step (a) is performed,
auto-positioning starts. Hold down the switch until positioning is completed.
(c) When positioning is completed, the current aperture data is displayed in each blade
aperture entry box in [Aperture].
NOTE: 1. When the adjustment point is selected, "P-A" is also displayed on the system
monitor, in addition to the auto-positioning No. which is displayed during
normal auto-positioning. While "P-A" is displayed, press the radiography
switch to perform auto-positioning. When auto-positioning has timed out,
"P-A" is cleared and X-rays can be generated using the radiography switch.
2. When the [Angle] buttons for the target position are selected while the current
support unit position matches the target position, the system enters the same
status as the auto-positioning completed status. The current aperture data is
then displayed in each blade aperture entry box in [Aperture].
3. To perform positioning of the support unit CAS-830B, the table height should
be set to 1050 mm and the ceiling longitudinal and lateral movement positions
should be set to 0 mm.
392
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Selecting the beam limiting device blade adjustment position
During aperture adjustment/positional error correction using the support tool, it is possible
to perform adjustment at the following two beam limiting device blade positions: 1/8
position and full-open position. Use the [1/8] button or the [Open] button to switch the
position. After positioning the support unit, the guidelines used for adjustment at the 1/8
position are displayed.
(When the support tool is started up, the system is in 1/8 mode.)
 [1/8] button pressed (1/8 mode)

The beam limiting device blades are adjusted within the area 1/8 inward from the ends
of the display area on the monitor (hereinafter referred to as the "1/8 position"). It is
possible to perform adjustment by considering the guidelines to be the ends of the
display area. In this mode, automatic calculation can also be performed so that
alignment with the guidelines is performed automatically.
 [Open] button pressed (Full-open mode)

The beam limiting device blades are adjusted to the ends of the display area on the
monitor as usual (hereinafter referred to as the "full-open position"). (This is the same
adjustment procedure as the keyboard-based conventional procedure.)
NOTE: 1. Even if the beam limiting device has been adjusted when it is aligned with the
guidelines in 1/8 mode, when the mode is switched to Full-open mode, the
beam limiting device may enter the display area. Therefore, after adjustment
in 1/8 mode is performed, it is necessary to perform checks and fine
adjustment in Full-open mode.
2. If the beam limiting device is at the full-open position even though 1/8 mode is
selected, the following causes are likely.
 The support unit is located at an angle other than the adjustment point.
 The FOV size is other than "Normal" and the positional error correction
angle ( in table 8.3.2-1) is set.
393
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(4) Aperture adjustment/positional error correction by manual operation
Adjust the aperture of each beam limiting device blade manually.
(a) When auto-positioning to the adjustment point is completed, the current aperture
data is displayed in each blade aperture entry box.
(b) Adjust the position of each blade by entering a value in each blade aperture entry
box for H, F, L, and R or by operating the spin button. Perform fluoroscopy to check
the beam limiting device blade positions.
(c) When the [Store] button is clicked, the correction values for the adjusted blades are
saved.
NOTE: 1. If another adjustment point is selected without clicking the [Store] button, the
correction values for the adjusted blades are not saved.
2. If the [Open] button is clicked during adjustment, even after the beam limiting
device position is switched, the entered aperture remains effective.
(Example) When the blade H aperture in 1/8 mode is "300" and that in Full-
open mode is "350", if "320" is entered as the blade H aperture in
1/8 mode and then the mode is switched to Full-open mode, the
aperture becomes "370".
394
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(5) Aperture adjustment/automatic calculation of positional error correction values
When the beam limiting device adjustment position is displayed in 1/8 mode, correction
values are automatically calculated so that the beam limiting device blades are aligned
with the guidelines at the 1/8 position (equivalent to the ends of the display area in Full-
open mode).
NOTE: Even if the blades have been aligned with the guidelines during aperture
adjustment/automatic calculation of positional error correction values, when the
mode is switched to Full-open mode, the beam limiting device may enter the
display area. Therefore, after automatic calculation is performed, it is necessary
to perform checks and fine adjustment in Full-open mode.
(a) When the mode is 1/8 mode and manual aperture adjustment/positional error
correction are enabled, click the [Auto] button.
(b) Perform fluoroscopy for 2 seconds or more with the [Auto] button selected.
(c) Based on the LIH image, the beam limiting device blades are adjusted so that they
are aligned with the guidelines and the correction values are saved automatically.
The [Auto] button then returns to the unselected status.
395
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(d) It is possible to check the adjustment results by performing fluoroscopy.

The picture below shows a square field.
Before automatic calculation After automatic calculation
396
No. 2J308-036EN*I
8.3.2 Aperture adjustment/positional error correction
This subsection describes the actual aperture adjustment/positional error correction procedures.
After ensuring that you have a clear understanding of the support tool operating procedure
(subsection 8.3.1), perform aperture adjustment/positional error correction as described below.
<1> Preparation Refer to (1).
<2> Aperture adjustment for each FPD field size Refer to (2).
(support unit angle: angle marked  in table 8.3.2-1)
* FPD rotation 0° (portrait) only
<3> Positional error correction when the FPD field size is "Normal" Refer to (3).
(support unit angle: angle marked  in table 8.3.2-1)
* FPD rotation 0° (portrait) only
<4> Aperture adjustment when the FPD field size is "Normal" Refer to (4).
(perform only when TFP-1216A is used in combination)
(angle for the support unit: angle marked  in table 8.3.2-1)
* FPD rotation 0° (landscape) only
Table 8.3.2-1 Entry angle for positional error correction
 CAS-880A
LAO LAO/RAO RAO

90° 0° 90°
CAU 90°   
CAU 45°   
CRA/CAU 0°    : Normal only
CRA 45°    : Normal, Mag1, Mag2, Mag3
 CAS-820B
LAO or LAO or LAO/

RAO RAO RAO
120° 90° 0° : Normal only
CRA/CAU 0° or 180°    : Normal, Mag1, Mag2, Mag3
 CAS-830B
RAO LAO
180° 90° 0° 90°
CAU 90°     : Normal only
45°     : Normal, Mag1, Mag2, Mag3
CRA 0°    
45°    
397
No. 2J308-036EN*I
CAUTION: 1. Perform the specified aperture adjustment/positional error

correction procedures.
For the BLA-900A/BLA-900C, the aperture adjustment value when
the FPD field size is Normal is regarded as the standard. Based on
the difference from the standard, the amount of positional error is
accurately calculated. Since this amount is also used for
correction calculation when the beam limiting device main unit is
rotated, be sure to perform the procedures in the specified order.
2. Since X-rays are generated during work, take appropriate protective

measures to avoid X-ray exposure.
Also be extremely careful to avoid exposing co-workers to X-rays.
3. During work, auto-positioning is performed from the control room.

Therefore, before starting work, move all peripheral devices outside
the support unit operating range. Also be careful to prevent
collisions with co-workers.
398
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(1) Preparation
(a) Setting/confirming the support unit used in combination
Set/confirm the number set at RSW2 (support unit type) on the COLLIMATOR I/F
PWB so that the number corresponds to the type of the support unit used in
combination.
 CAS-820B -------------------------- 2
 CAS-830B -------------------------- 3
 CAS-880A -------------------------- 4
(b) Turning ON the power
Turn ON the system power.
At power ON, confirm that the beam limiting device blades open automatically for
initialization and move to the specified auto-collimation positions.
(c) Retracting the peripheral devices and setting the support unit
For BP systems, set the support unit position referring to the table below.
For the CAS-820B settings, refer to the table below.
Move the peripheral devices outside the support unit operating range and confirm
that the devices cannot come into contact with the support unit.
Table 8.3.2-2 Setting of the support unit position
F-side L-side
When adjusting the F-side Patient head-end set Park position
position
When adjusting the L-side Patient head-end set Between the F-side support
position unit and the table
399
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(d) Starting a study
Start a study using the emergency study protocol and the DA 15 fps radiography
program. (Note that the desired frame rate can be used as long as X-ray generation
is possible at the selected frame rate.) After confirming that the Pause status is set
as shown in the table below, perform fluoroscopy for 2 seconds or more so that
radiography is enabled. If radiography is disabled, it is not possible to position the
support unit using the support tool.
Table 8.3.2-3 Pause status of the support unit
F-side L-side
When adjusting the F-side Pause released Pause
When adjusting the L-side Pause released Pause released
(e) Starting up the support tool
Click the [Aperture Adjust.] button in the Utility tab.
When the following dialog is displayed, confirm the status shown in step (c) and then
click the [OK] button.
Note that the support tool can only be started up during a study.
(f) Selecting the support unit type
Select the type of the support unit to be adjusted from the [Arm Type] combo box.
NOTE: When DA 30 fps is set as the acquisition program in a BP system, X-ray

generation may not be possible if the actual acquisition rate is 15 fps or less.
In this case, auto-positioning cannot be performed with the radiography switch.
Change the acquisition rate.
400
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Aperture adjustment of each beam limiting device blade (each FPD field size in portrait
orientation)
This subsection describes the procedure for adjusting the aperture of the rectangular-field
blades.
NOTE: Since the BLA-900A does not have circular-field blades, circular-field blade
adjustment mode is not provided.
(a) Preparation
<1> Set "Normal" for the FPD field size. Set all of the angles for ceiling support
column rotation/floor base rotation/support column rotation/beam limiting device
main unit rotation to 0°. Set the FPD rotation angle to 0° (portrait) when
TFP-1216A is used in combination. Set the digital zoom ratio to "1.0".
For BP systems, the support unit position and the Pause status must be set as
shown in tables 8.3.2-2 and 8.3.2-3.
 When adjusting the F-side: The L-side is at the park position and X-ray
generation is paused only for the L-side.
 When adjusting the L-side: The F-side is at the patient head-end set
position and X-ray generation is possible for
both the F- and L-sides.
<2> Place a checkmark in the [Auto Calc After Auto-Pos.] checkbox of the support
tool.
<3> Enter the minimum SID (CAS-880A: 90 cm) in the [SID] box. Select the
adjustment point marked  in table 8.3.2-1 from the angle buttons.
Immediately after selecting the point, position the support unit by
auto-positioning.
<4> When auto-positioning is completed, confirm that the current aperture data is
displayed in each blade aperture entry box. However, since a checkmark was
placed in the [Auto Calc After Auto-Pos.] checkbox in step <2>, the [Auto]
button changes to the selected status when auto-positioning is completed and
values cannot be entered in each blade aperture entry box.
(b) Adjustment
<1> Perform fluoroscopy for 2 seconds or more to display the LIH.

The beam limiting device blades are aligned with the guidelines based on the
LIH image, and the correction values are saved.
<2> When saving of the correction values is completed, the [Auto] button returns to
its original status and a checkmark is placed in the FOV buttons. For normal
FOVs, a checkmark is placed in the saved adjustment points. When
fluoroscopy is performed again, it can be confirmed that the beam limiting
device blades are aligned with the guidelines.
<3> Click the [Open] button to exit 1/8 mode. Perform fluoroscopy to confirm that
the beam limiting device blades have been moved to the full-open position. If
the blades have not moved to their appropriate positions at the ends of the
display area, perform final adjustment manually as described in subsection
8.1.3 (2).
401
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<4> When final adjustment is completed, click the [Store] button to save the
adjustment data.
<5> When the FOV is switched to another FOV in the FOV selection pull down
menu, the aperture display for each blade is updated. Repeat steps <1> to <4>.
Then adjust the aperture for each FOV in the same manner.
NOTE: 1. If the support unit has not been positioned at the adjustment point, "0" is
displayed in the aperture entry box. In this status, the aperture cannot
be entered and no [Angle] buttons are selected.
2. When an adjustment point is selected from the [Angle] buttons, if the

current support unit position matches the target position, the system
enters the same status as the auto-positioning completed status. The
current aperture data is displayed in each blade aperture entry box.
3. Even if the FOV size is switched from the main console, the aperture
data after switching is not acquired automatically. Therefore, the
displayed aperture and the actual aperture are not identical. It is
necessary to select the currently selected angle button again so that the
correct aperture data after switching is obtained.
(3) Entering the positional error correction values for the support unit (Portrait, FPD field size
is "Normal")
This subsection describes the procedure for entering the correction values for the
rectangular-field blades.
(a) Preparation
<1> Set "Normal" for the FPD field size. Set all of the angles for ceiling support
column rotation/floor base rotation/support column rotation/beam limiting device
main unit rotation to 0°. FPD rotation angle is 0° (portrait) when TFP-1216A is
used in combination. Set the digital zoom ratio to "1.0".
<2> Place a checkmark in the [Auto Calc After Auto-Pos.] checkbox of the support
tool.
(b) Support unit adjustment points
At all of the adjustment points marked  in table 8.3.2-1, perform the procedure in
step (c) "Entering data".
Note that adjustment point adjustment can be performed in any order.
* When the support unit is moved to the angle marked , the value obtained at the
FPD field size "Normal" entered in (2) is used as the standard value.
* The angle marked  in table 8.3.2-1 has already been entered in (2).
402
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(c) Entering data
<1> Enter the minimum SID in the [SID] box. From the angle buttons, select the
desired adjustment point marked  in table 8.3.2-1. Immediately after selecting
the point, press the radiography switch to position the support unit by auto-
positioning.
displayed in each blade aperture entry box. However, since a checkmark was
placed in the [Auto Calc After Auto-Pos.] checkbox in step (a) <2>, the [Auto]
button changes to the selected status when auto-positioning is completed and
<3> Perform fluoroscopy for 2 seconds or more to display the LIH.

The beam limiting device blades are aligned with the guidelines based on the
LIH image, and the correction values are saved.
its original status and a checkmark is placed in the saved adjustment points.
When fluoroscopy is performed again, it can be confirmed that the beam limiting
device blades are aligned with the guidelines.
<5> Click the [Open] button to exit 1/8 mode. Perform fluoroscopy to confirm that
8.1.3 (2).
<6> When final adjustment is completed, click the [Store] button to save the
adjustment data.
<7> In the same manner, perform the adjustment procedures described in steps <1>
to <6> for all of the angles marked  in table 8.3.2-1.
(d) Termination of distortion correction
 When TFP-1216A is used in combination

Perform (4) "Adjustment for each beam limiting device blade aperture"
(landscape, FPD field size is "Normal").
 Other than above

Click the [Close] button to terminate adjustment.
NOTE: 1. If the support unit has not been positioned at the adjustment point, "0" is
displayed in the aperture entry box. In this status, the aperture cannot be
entered and no [Angle] buttons are selected.
2. Enter the positional error correction values at the Normal FOV size only.
The aperture cannot be entered at an FOV size other than normal. If an
FOV size other than Normal was used to check the beam limiting device
blades and then the size was then changed to Normal, it is necessary to
select the currently selected [Angle] buttons again so that the correct
aperture data is obtained.
3. Even after all adjustment procedures have been completed, it is possible to

modify some correction values again. However, if the aperture adjustment
values at the Normal FPD field size are changed, all positional error
corrections are affected.
403
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(4) Adjustment for each beam limiting device blade aperture (landscape, FPD field size is
"Normal")
Perform only when TFP-1216A is used in combination.
This subsection describes the procedure for adjusting the aperture of the rectangular
blades.
(a) Preparation
<1> Set "Normal" for the FPD field size. Set all the angles for ceiling support
column rotation/floor base rotation/floor support column rotation/beam limiting
device main unit rotation to 0° and the angle for FPD rotation to 90° (landscape).
Set the digital zoom ratio to "1.0".
<2> Place a checkmark in the [Auto Calc After Auto-Pos.] support tool checkbox.
<3> Enter the minimum SID (CAS-880A: 90cm) in the [SID] box. From the angle
buttons, select the desired adjustment point marked  in table 8.3.2-1.
Immediately after selecting this point, press the radiography switch to
auto-position the support unit.
displayed in each blade aperture entry box. However, as a checkmark was
placed in the [Auto Calc After Auto-Pos.] checkbox in step <2>, the [Auto]
button changes to selected status when auto-positioning is completed, and
(b) Adjustment
<1> Perform fluoroscopy for 2 seconds or more to display the LIH. The beam
limiting device blades are aligned with the guidelines based on the LIH image,
and the correction values are saved.
its original status and a checkmark is placed in the FOV buttons. When the
field is set to "Normal", the saved adjustment point changes to green (light gray
on monochrome monitors). When fluoroscopy is performed again, it can be
confirmed that the beam limiting device blades are aligned with the guidelines.
<3> Click the [Close] button to exit 1/8 mode. Perform fluoroscopy to confirm that
8.1.3 (2).
(c) Termination of adjustment
Click the [Close] button to terminate adjustment.
404
No. 2J308-036EN*I
8.3.3 Procedures for clearing all the data
If the aperture adjustment values for the beam limiting device blades and positional error
correction values for the support unit cannot be written for some reason, clear all the data
according to the procedures below.
After all the data has been cleared, re-enter the aperture adjustment values for the beam
limiting device blades and positional error correction values for the support unit.
(2) Change the setting of the COLLIMATOR I/F PWB in the [A04] slot of the CAS cabinet as
follows.
DSW 2-7: ON (Setting for clearing the aperture adjustment/positional error correction
values)
Initialization of the beam limiting device starts (the blades open) and all the data is cleared
after approximately 20 seconds.
After the data items are cleared, the beam limiting device blades are set to the aperture
before the combined X-ray detector is corrected.
Return the setting on the COLLIMATOR I/F PWB in the [A04] slot of the CAS cabinet to
the standard setting.
DSW 2-7: OFF (Normal setting (clearing of an aperture adjustment/positional error

correction values is not required))
405
No. 2J308-036EN*I
9. FPD ADJUSTMENT
FPD adjustment performs the parameter setting and calibration in the FPD.
The adjustment items can be switched by changing the tab.
NOTE: 1. The adjustment support function is provided to facilitate FPD adjustment. For the
adjustment software startup procedure, refer to subsection 29.12.
2. If the beam limiting device blades are visible in the image during FPD calibration (only
in systems that support spot fluoroscopy), add the aperture adjustment margin that
becomes effective temporarily. For details for setting the aperture adjustment margin,
refer to (1) (b) of subsection 4.1.3 "Display contents list" in the service manual 2D308-
016EN.
9.1 Procedures
The basic adjustment procedures are shown below.
SETUP (FPD Mode) ..... Set the FPD parameters (by the manufacturing department).

Enter the LUT magnification factor (by the manufacturing
SETUP (FPD Parameter)
department).

Offset Calib ..... Offset calibration (by the manufacturing department)

Gain Calib

..... Correct the Sense Ratio parameters (by the manufacturing
Sense Ratio Check department).
NOTE: Since the setup is completed at the time of shipment, it is not necessary to make
changes.
However, the FPD is replaced on site, check the default values and then set the
data.
Since the offset calibration is already performed at the start of adjustment, it is not
necessary to perform this calibration.
Offset calibration must be performed when an onsite upgrade is performed.
406
No. 2J308-036EN*I
9.2 Parameter Setting for FPD Mode
Set and change the parameters for the FPD. Use the default values for the parameters.
Item name Function

FPD-Mode Select the desired FPD mode from the combo box.
ReadOut Select "Binding/NonBinding".
Matrix Select "1024/512".
Rate Select the pulse rate to be used as the reference.
LagCorA Lag correction coefficient A
LagCorB Lag correction coefficient B
Hol Filt Horizontal filter coefficient
Hol Lut LUT number for horizontal filter
Low Scan Timing Set the scan time.
Study use This flag indicates that the FPD mode set here are used in study.
Use OneShot Flag indicating that this mode can also be used in OneShot.
SenseRatio Sensitivity coefficient for FPD mode
[SET] This is used to send the edited contents to the RT.
407
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(1) Parameters (default)
TFP-800A or TFP-800B
Lag Lag Read Offset Low Scan Use

FPD- Read FOV Hol Hol NoCol Sense Study
Matrix Rate Cor Cor out Calib Timing Technique One-
Mode Out set Filt Lut Frame Ratio Use
A B Time Num (: Checked) Shot
0 1 1024 30 ALL 0 0 0 0 16.13 3 5  42.93 Fluoroscopy  
1 1 1024 20 ALL 0 0 1 0 23.81 3 5  45 Fluoroscopy  
2 0 512 60 ALL 0 0 2 0 8.4 3 5  18 DA  
 (*1)
3 1 1024 30 ALL 0 0 2 0 16.13 3 5  16.2 DA  
4 1 1024 15 ALL 0 0 3 0 32.26 3 5  18 DA  
5 1 1024 30 ALL 0 0 2 5 16.13 3 5  2.37 DSA  
6 1 1024 6 ALL 0 0 3 6 32.26 3 5  2.56 DSA  
7 0 512 60 ALL 0 0 3 0 8.4 3 5  61 Fluoroscopy  

(for HSBP)  (*2)
*1) "" for biplane configurations with the TFP-1216A

*2) "" when the optional XIDF-BPS803 is used in combination
TFP-1216A
Lag Lag Offset Low Scan Use

FPD- Read FOV Hol Hol Read out NoCol Sense Study
Matrix Rate Cor Cor Calib Timing Technique One-
Mode Out set Filt Lut Time Frame Ratio Use
A B Num (: Checked) Shot
0 0 1024 30 N/M1 0 0 0 0 16 3 5  73 Fluoroscopy  
16.13 (*1)
1 2 1024 30 N2/ 0 0 1 1 16.13 3 5  45 Fluoroscopy  
M3
2 0 1024 30 N/M1 0 0 2 2 16 3 5  10.3 DA  
16.13 (*1)
3 2 1024 30 N2/ 0 0 2 3 16.13 3 5  9.32 DA  
M3
4 1 1024 6 ALL 0 0 3 4 61.44 4 5  2.56 DSA  
5 0 1024 30 N/M1 0 0 2 5 16 5 5  2.57 DSA  

16.13 (*1)
6 2 1024 30 N2/ 0 0 3 6 16.13 5 5  2.41 DSA  
M3
*1) When in a biplane configuration
408
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Lag Lag Offset Low Scan Use

FPD- Read FOV Hol Hol Readout NoCol Sense Study
Matrix Rate Cor Cor Calib Timing Technique One-
Mode Out set Filt Lut Time Frame Ratio Use
A B Num (: checked) Shot
0 0 1024 30 N/M1 0 0 0 2 16.2 3 5  55.7 Fluoroscopy  
1 2 1024 30 M2/ 0 0 1 1 16.7 3 5  52.7 Fluoroscopy  
M3
2 0 1024 30 N/M1 0 0 0 2 16.2 3 5  14.1 DA  
3 2 1024 30 M2/ 0 0 3 3 16.7 3 5  26 DA  
M3
4 1 1024 6 ALL 0 0 3 4 38.5 3 5  3.71 DSA  
5 0 1024 30 N/M1 0 0 3 5 16.2 3 5  3.57 DSA  

6 2 1024 30 M2/ 0 0 3 6 16.7 3 5  3.43 DSA  
M3
7 0 1024 20 N/M1 0 0 0 2 16.22 3 5  56.9 Fluoroscopy  
8 2 1024 20 M2/ 0 0 1 1 24.08 3 5  58 Fluoroscopy  
M3
9 0 1024 15 N/M1 0 0 0 2 19.3 3 5  14.9 DA  
10 2 1024 15 M2/ 0 0 3 3 32.4 3 5  30.3 DA  
M3
11 0 512 60 M2/ 0 0 2 0 8.36 3 5  49.9 Fluoroscopy  
M3 (HSBP)
12 0 512 60 M2/ 0 0 0 2 8.36 3 5  12.5 DA  
M3 (*1)
13 1 1024 12 ALL 0 0 3 4 38.5 3 5  3.72 DSA (BP)  

(*2)
*1) "" for biplane configurations with the TFP-1216A

*2) "" when the TFP-1200A or TFP-1200B is used for both the F and L sides in the biplane
configuration.
409
No. 2J308-036EN*I
9.3 Other Parameter Setting
Enter the LUT information coefficient.
This work was already performed at the time of shipment. The values can be used as defaults.
LUT SenseRatio : Sensitivity coefficient for each LUT
[SET] : This is used to send the edited contents to the RT.
LUT No. Sense Ratio

0 1.5
1 1
2 1.5
3 2
4 0.5
5 0.67
6 0.5
7 0.67
410
No. 2J308-036EN*I
9.4 Calibration Without the Adjustment Navigator
9.4.1 Offset calibration parameter setting and procedures
Item name Item description

FpdModeNo Select a number for which the offset calibration is
performed.
[All] Selects all the list boxes in Offset Calibration.
Frame Additional Number Select the number of frames to be added from the combo
box.
[SET] Sends the edited contents to the RT.
[EXEC.] Sends the offset calibration start command to the RT.
(1) Select all the FPD mode numbers for which the offset calibration is performed from the list
box.
(2) Select "5-32 exposure" for the number of frames to be added in the combo box.
(3) Press the [SET] key to send the settings to the RT.
(4) Press the [EXEC.] key to start the offset calibration.
(5) The offset calibration is performed in order from top to bottom of the list box. The selected
status is released when the offset calibration is completed.
411
No. 2J308-036EN*I
9.4.2 Gain calibration parameter setting and procedures
Item name Item description

FpdMode Select the desired FPD mode from the combo box.
Technique Techniques that are set to FPD mode are displayed here.
Reference only.
X-ray conditions Specify kV, mA, and mSec.
Rate Set the rate for actually exposure.
FOV Select "Normal".
Exposure Number Set the number of exposures for which the gain calibration is
performed.
VIF Gain Set the VIF gain value.
VIF LUT Specify the LUT number.
Image Level The image level is displayed during exposure and updated
periodically.
Gain Calibration This flag indicates that calibration is performed.
[SET] Sends the edited contents to the RT.
CAUTION: For the tube current for pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography, enter the
value from among the following values.
10, 20, 32, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 320, 400, 500, 640
412
No. 2J308-036EN*I
NOTE: 1. When the area dose meter or tube cover is mounted, it is not necessary to remove
it for adjustment.
2. Before starting gain calibration, set the beam limiting device blades to the full-open
position to prevent the blades from entering the field.
3. If the beam limiting device blades are visible in the image during FPD calibration
(only in systems that support spot fluoroscopy), add the aperture adjustment
margin that becomes effective temporarily. For details for setting the aperture
adjustment margin, refer to (1) (b) of subsection 4.1.3 "Display contents list" in the
service manual 2D308-016EN.
(1) Perform gain calibration
(a) Exclude the tabletop from the FOV (no phantom).
(b) Set the C-arm to the longitudinal head-end position (TFP-1216A).
(c) Set the detector to the landscape position (TFP-1216A).
(d) Remove the grid from the detector.
(e) Select the FPD mode number for which gain calibration is performed from the combo
box.
(f) Set the SID and FOV to the maximum (the X-ray beam limiting device must not be
placed within the FOV).
(g) Set "32" in Exposure Number, "100" in VIF Gain, and "1" in VIF Lut.
(h) Confirm that the check mark for Gain Calibration is removed.
(i) Adjust the X-ray conditions so that the image level becomes 1300 100 when X-ray
exposure is performed.
(j) When the target image level is obtained, place a check mark for Gain Calibration and
perform X-ray exposure.
413
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(k) A dialog requesting standby is displayed in front of the screen as shown below.
(l) Keep the X-ray exposure switch held down.
(m) When the number of images required for calibration is acquired, X-ray exposure
stops automatically.
(n) While calibration continues, this dialog remains on screen.
(o) When calibration is completed, this dialog disappears.
414
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Correct the Sense Ratio parameters.

Check the Sense Ratio parameters after gain calibration is performed.
NOTE: The sense ratio parameters must be corrected at the time of shipment and after
an upgrade.
(a) For the TFP-800A or TFP-800B
<1> Select the SETUP (FPDMode) tab and record the SenseRatio values in
FPDModes 5 and 6.
<2> Select the GainCalib tab and select FPDModes 5 and 6. Confirm that the check
mark is removed from the Gain Calibration checkbox.
<3> Select FPDMode5, press the X-ray exposure button, and record the image level
at that time. (Image_FPDMode5)
<4> Select FPDMode6, and enter the FPDMode5 X-ray conditions (kV/mA/msec)
during gain calibration. Also enter FOV = Normal and then press [SET].
Press the X-ray exposure button, and record the image level at that time.
(Image_FPDMode6)
<5> Calculate the SenseRatio value for FPDMode5.
SenseRatio in FPDMode5 = SenseRatio of FPDMode6

* (Image_FPDMode5/Image_FPDMode6)
<6> Return the X-ray conditions and the FOV setting for FPDMode6 to the original
values.
<7> Select the SETUP (FPDMode) tab and change the SenseRatio value for
FPDMode5.
(b) For the TFP-1216A
FPDModes 4, 5, and 6.
<2> Select the GainCalib tab and select FPDModes 4, 5, and 6. Confirm that the
check mark is removed from the Gain Calibration checkbox.
<4> Select FPDMode4, enter the FPDMode5 X-ray conditions (kV/mA/msec) during
gain calibration. Also enter FOV = Normal and the current X-ray conditions,
and then press [SET]. Press the X-ray exposure button and record the image
level at that time. (Image_FPDMode4-1)
<6> Select FPDMode4, enter the FPDMode6 X-ray conditions (kV/mA/msec) during
gain calibration. Also enter FOV = M2 and the current X-ray conditions, and
then press [SET]. Press the X-ray exposure button and record the image level
at that time. (Image_FPDMode4-2)
415
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<7> Calculate the SenseRatio values for FPDModes 5 and 6.
SenseRatio in FPDMode5 = SenseRatio in FPDMode4

* (Image level of FPDMode5 /image level of FPDMode4-1)

* (Image level of FPDMode6 /image level of FPDMode4-2)
<8> Return to original FPDMode4 X-ray conditions and the FOV setting.
<9> Select the SETUP (FPDMode) tab and change the SenseRatio values for
FPDModes 5 and 6.
(c) For the TFP-1200A or TFP-1200B
FPDModes 4, 5, and 6.
<2> Select the GainCalib tab and select FPDModes 4, 5, and 6. Confirm that the
check mark is removed from the Gain Calibration checkbox.
<3> Select FPDMode5, press the X-ray exposure button, and record the image level.
(Image_FPDMode5)
<4> Select FPDMode4 and enter the FPDMode5 X-ray conditions (kV/mA/ms)
during gain calibration. Also enter FOV = Normal and press [SET]. Press the
X-ray exposure button and record the image level. (Image_FPDMode4-1)
<5> Select FPDMode6, press the X-ray exposure button, and record the image level.
(Image_FPDMode6)
<6> Select FPDMode4 and enter the FPDMode6 X-ray conditions (kV/mA/ms)
during gain calibration. Also enter FOV = M2 and press [SET].
Press the X-ray exposure button and record the image level.
(Image_FPDMode4-2)
<7> Calculate the SenseRatio values for FPDModes 5 and 6.

* (Image_FPDMode5/Image_FPDMode4-1)

* (Image_FPDMode6/Image_FPDMode4-2)
<8> Restore the original FPDMode4 X-ray conditions and FOV settings.
<9> Select the SETUP (FPDMode) tab and change the SenseRatio values for
FPDModes 5 and 6.
416
No. 2J308-036EN*I
9.5 Calibration with the Adjustment Navigator
(1) Outline
FPD adjustment with the adjustment navigator includes offset calibration, gain calibration,
and sense ratio calculation. This procedure is designed to be carried out in the order
described below.
Startup of
FPD adjustment
Offset calibration
Gain calibration
Sense ratio calculation

(Only for FPD mode
of DSA)
Completion of
FPD adjustment
NOTE: 1. Refer to the Help window for details regarding the preparation of instruments and
other items for the adjustment procedures.
2. If the beam limiting device blades are visible in the image during FPD calibration
adjustment margin, refer to (1) (b) of subsection 4.1.3 "Display contents list" in
the service manual 2D308-016EN.
417
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Work procedure
(a) Start up the FPD adjustment function of the adjustment navigator.
The following FPD adjustment window opens.
(b) Offset calibration
Offset calibration can be performed automatically for all FPD modes at the start of FPD
adjustment.
(c) Gain calibration
Start and continue fluoroscopy or radiography corresponding to the exposure type for
each FPD mode, as described in the messages. After a few seconds, the exposure is
interrupted automatically and gain calibration starts. Perform these procedures for each
FPD mode.
NOTE: When the area dose meter or tube cover is mounted, it is not necessary to remove
it for adjustment.
(d) Sense ratio calculation
After all the gain calibrations are complete, sense ratio calculations are performed for
some FPD modes of DSA.
Hold down the radiography button as instructed in the messages. After a few seconds,
the results of the sense ratio calculation will be displayed automatically.
(e) FPD adjustment using the adjustment navigator is now complete.
418
No. 2J308-036EN*I
9.6 Basic Rate Parameter Setting for the FPD
The relationship between the pulse rate of the UI in FPD mode and the rate used for internal
operation is defined here.
419
No. 2J308-036EN*I
TFP-800A or TFP-800B (for single-plane configurations or biplane configurations with

TFP-800A or TFP-800B)
FPD_Mode0 FPD_Mode1 FPD_Mode2 FPD_Mode3 FPD_Mode4 FPD_Mode5 FPD_Mode6 FPD_Mode7

FLUO FLUO DA DA DA DSA DSA FLUO
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)

Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
60 0 0 60 0 0 60 60 60 60 0 0 60 0 0 30 30 0 30 0 0 60 60 0
30 30 0 30 0 0 30 0 60 30 30 0 30 0 0 15 15 30 15 0 0 30 0 60
20 0 0 20 20 0 15 0 0 15 0 30 15 15 0 10 10 20 10 0 0 20 0 60
15 0 30 15 15 0 10 0 0 10 30 30 10 0 0 6 0 0 6 6 12 15 0 0
10 0 0 10 20 20 7.5 0 0 7.5 0 0 7.5 15 15 3 0 0 3 6 6 10 0 0
7.5 0 0 7.5 15 15 5 0 0 5 0 0 5 15 15 2 0 0 2 6 6 7.5 0 0
5 0 0 5 15 15 3 0 0 3 0 0 3 15 15 1 0 0 1 6 6 5 0 0
3 0 0 3 15 15 2 0 0 2 30 30 2 0 0 1/2 0 0 1/2 6 6 3 0 0
2 0 0 2 20 20 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 15 15 1/3 0 0 1/3 6 6 2 0 0
1 0 0 1 15 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
TFP-800A or TFP-800B (for biplane configurations with TFP-1216A)

FLUO FLUO DA DA DA DSA DSA FLUO
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)

Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)

Base Rate
60 0 0 60 0 0 60 0 0 60 0 0 60 0 0 30 30 0 30 0 0 60 60 0
30 30 0 30 0 0 30 0 0 30 30 0 30 0 0 15 15 30 15 0 0 30 0 60
20 0 0 20 20 0 15 0 0 15 0 30 15 15 0 10 10 20 10 0 0 20 0 60
15 0 30 15 15 0 10 0 0 10 30 30 10 0 0 6 0 12 6 6 0 15 0 0
10 0 0 10 20 20 7.5 0 0 7.5 0 0 7.5 15 15 3 0 0 3 6 6 10 0 0
7.5 0 0 7.5 15 15 5 0 0 5 0 0 5 15 15 2 0 0 2 6 6 7.5 0 0
5 0 0 5 15 15 3 0 0 3 0 0 3 15 15 1 0 0 1 6 6 5 0 0
3 0 0 3 15 15 2 0 0 2 30 30 2 0 0 1/2 0 0 1/2 6 6 3 0 0
2 0 0 2 20 20 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 15 15 1/3 0 0 1/3 6 6 2 0 0
1 0 0 1 15 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
420
No. 2J308-036EN*I
TFP-1216A (for single-plane)

FLUO FLUO DA DA DSA DSA DSA N/A
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)

Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
60 0 0 60 0 0 60 0 0 60 0 0 30 0 0 30 30 0 30 30 0 0 0 0
30 30 0 30 30 0 30 30 0 30 30 0 15 0 0 15 15 0 15 15 0 0 0 0
20 20 0 20 20 0 15 30 0 15 30 0 10 0 0 10 10 0 10 10 0 0 0 0
15 30 0 15 30 0 10 30 0 10 30 0 6 6 0 6 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0
10 30 0 10 30 0 7.5 15 0 7.5 15 0 3 6 0 3 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0
7.5 30 0 7.5 30 0 5 15 0 5 15 0 2 6 0 2 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0
5 30 0 5 30 0 3 15 0 3 15 0 1 6 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
3 30 0 3 30 0 2 30 0 2 30 0 1/2 6 0 1/2 0 0 1/2 0 0 0 0 0
2 30 0 2 30 0 1 15 0 1 15 0 1/3 6 0 1/3 0 0 1/3 0 0 0 0 0
1 30 0 1 30 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
TFP-1216A (for biplane)

FLUO FLUO DA DA DSA DSA DSA N/A
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)

Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
60 0 0 60 0 0 60 30 0 60 30 0 30 0 0 30 30 0 30 30 0 0 0 0
30 30 0 30 30 0 30 30 0 30 30 0 15 0 0 15 15 30 15 15 30 0 0 0
20 20 0 20 20 0 15 30 30 15 30 30 10 0 0 10 10 20 10 10 20 0 0 0
15 30 30 15 30 30 10 30 30 10 30 30 6 6 0 6 0 12 6 0 12 0 0 0
10 20 20 10 20 20 7.5 15 15 7.5 15 15 3 6 6 3 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0
7.5 30 30 7.5 30 30 5 15 15 5 15 15 2 6 6 2 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0
5 30 30 5 30 30 3 15 15 3 15 15 1 6 6 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
3 30 30 3 30 30 2 30 30 2 30 30 1/2 6 6 1/2 0 0 1/2 0 0 0 0 0
2 20 20 2 20 20 1 15 15 1 15 15 1/3 6 6 1/3 0 0 1/3 0 0 0 0 0
1 30 30 1 30 30 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
421
No. 2J308-036EN*I
TFP-1200A or TFP-1200B (for single-plane)
FPD_Mode0 FPD_Mode1 FPD_Mode2 FPD_Mode3 FPD_Mode4 FPD_Mode5 FPD_Mode6

FLUO FLUO DA DA DSA DSA DSA
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)

Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
60 0 0 60 0 0 60 0 0 60 0 0 30 0 0 30 30 0 30 30 0
30 30 0 30 30 0 30 30 0 30 30 0 15 0 0 15 15 30 15 15 30
20 0 0 20 0 0 15 0 30 15 0 30 12 0 0 12 0 0 12 0 0
15 0 30 15 0 30 10 30 30 10 30 30 10 0 0 10 10 20 10 10 20
10 0 0 10 0 0 7.5 0 0 7.5 0 0 6 6 0 6 0 0 6 0 0
7.5 0 0 7.5 0 0 5 0 0 5 0 0 3 6 0 3 0 0 3 0 0
5 0 0 5 0 0 3 0 0 3 0 0 2 6 0 2 0 0 2 0 0
3 0 0 3 0 0 2 30 30 2 30 30 1 6 0 1 0 0 1 0 0
2 0 0 2 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1/2 6 0 1/2 0 0 1/2 0 0
1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1/3 6 0 1/3 0 0 1/3 0 0

FLUO FLUO DA DA N/A DA DSA
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
Base Rate (BP)

Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)

Base Rate
UI Rate
Base Rate
60 0 0 60 0 0 60 0 0 60 0 0 60 60 0 60 60 0 30 0 0
30 0 0 30 0 0 30 0 0 30 0 0 30 0 60 30 0 60 15 0 0
20 20 0 20 20 0 15 15 0 15 15 0 20 0 60 15 0 0 12 12 0
15 15 0 15 15 0 10 0 0 10 0 0 15 0 0 10 0 0 10 0 0
10 20 20 10 20 20 7.5 15 15 7.5 15 15 10 0 0 7.5 0 0 6 0 12
7.5 15 15 7.5 15 15 5 15 15 5 15 15 7.5 0 0 5 0 0 3 0 6
5 15 15 5 15 15 3 15 15 3 15 15 5 0 0 3 0 0 2 0 6
3 15 15 3 15 15 2 0 0 2 0 0 3 0 0 2 0 0 1 0 6
2 20 20 2 20 20 1 15 15 1 15 15 2 0 0 1 0 0 1/2 0 6
1 15 15 1 15 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1/3 0 6
422
No. 2J308-036EN*I
TFP-1200A or TFP-1200B (for biplane configurations with TFP-1200A or TFP-1200B)

UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)

Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
60 0 0 60 0 0 60 0 0 60 0 0 30 0 0 30 30 0 30 30 0
30 30 0 30 30 0 30 30 0 30 30 0 15 0 0 15 15 30 15 15 30
20 0 0 20 0 0 15 0 30 15 0 30 12 0 0 12 0 0 12 0 0
15 0 30 15 0 30 10 30 30 10 30 30 10 0 0 10 10 20 10 10 20
10 0 0 10 0 0 7.5 0 0 7.5 0 0 6 6 0 6 0 0 6 0 0
7.5 0 0 7.5 0 0 5 0 0 5 0 0 3 6 0 3 0 0 3 0 0
5 0 0 5 0 0 3 0 0 3 0 0 2 6 0 2 0 0 2 0 0
3 0 0 3 0 0 2 30 30 2 30 30 1 6 0 1 0 0 1 0 0
2 0 0 2 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1/2 6 0 1/2 0 0 1/2 0 0
1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1/3 6 0 1/3 0 0 1/3 0 0

UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
Base Rate (BP)

Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
60 0 0 60 0 0 60 0 0 60 0 0 60 60 0 60 60 0 30 0 0
30 0 0 30 0 0 30 0 0 30 0 0 30 0 60 30 0 60 15 0 0
20 20 0 20 20 0 15 15 0 15 15 0 20 0 60 15 0 0 12 12 0
15 15 0 15 15 0 10 0 0 10 0 0 15 0 0 10 0 0 10 0 0
10 20 20 10 20 20 7.5 15 15 7.5 15 15 10 0 0 7.5 0 0 6 0 12
7.5 15 15 7.5 15 15 5 15 15 5 15 15 7.5 0 0 5 0 0 3 0 6
5 15 15 5 15 15 3 15 15 3 15 15 5 0 0 3 0 0 2 0 6
3 15 15 3 15 15 2 0 0 2 0 0 3 0 0 2 0 0 1 0 6
2 20 20 2 20 20 1 15 15 1 15 15 2 0 0 1 0 0 1/2 0 6
1 15 15 1 15 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1/3 0 6
423
No. 2J308-036EN*I
TFP-1200A or TFP-1200B (for biplane configurations with TFP-1216A)

UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)

Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
60 0 0 60 0 0 60 0 0 60 0 0 30 0 0 30 30 0 30 30 0
30 30 0 30 30 0 30 30 0 30 30 0 15 0 0 15 15 30 15 15 30
20 0 0 20 0 0 15 0 30 15 0 30 12 0 0 12 0 0 12 0 0
15 0 30 15 0 30 10 30 30 10 30 30 10 0 0 10 10 20 10 10 20
10 0 0 10 0 0 7.5 0 0 7.5 0 0 6 6 0 6 0 12 6 0 12
7.5 0 0 7.5 0 0 5 0 0 5 0 0 3 6 6 3 0 0 3 0 0
5 0 0 5 0 0 3 0 0 3 0 0 2 6 6 2 0 0 2 0 0
3 0 0 3 0 0 2 30 30 2 30 30 1 6 6 1 0 0 1 0 0
2 0 0 2 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1/2 6 6 1/2 0 0 1/2 0 0
1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1/3 6 6 1/3 0 0 1/3 0 0

UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)
Base Rate (BP)

Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
Base Rate
UI Rate
Base Rate (BP)

Base Rate
UI Rate
Base Rate
60 0 0 60 0 0 60 0 0 60 0 0 60 60 0 60 60 0 30 0 0
30 0 0 30 0 0 30 0 0 30 0 0 30 0 60 30 0 60 15 0 0
20 20 0 20 20 0 15 15 0 15 15 0 20 0 60 15 0 0 12 12 0
15 15 0 15 15 0 10 0 0 10 0 0 15 0 0 10 0 0 10 0 0
10 20 20 10 20 20 7.5 15 15 7.5 15 15 10 0 0 7.5 0 0 6 0 12
7.5 15 15 7.5 15 15 5 15 15 5 15 15 7.5 0 0 5 0 0 3 0 0
5 15 15 5 15 15 3 15 15 3 15 15 5 0 0 3 0 0 2 0 0
3 15 15 3 15 15 2 0 0 2 0 0 3 0 0 2 0 0 1 0 0
2 20 20 2 20 20 1 15 15 1 15 15 2 0 0 1 0 0 1/2 0 0
1 15 15 1 15 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1/3 0 0
424
No. 2J308-036EN*I
10. FLUOROSCOPY/RADIOGRAPHY DOSE ADJUSTMENT
Perform adjustment of the fluoroscopy and radiography dose by setting the dose value, the FOV
gain, and the LUT.
CAUTION: If a country has special regulations concerning the dose value, the dose
value should not be set to exceed the specified limit.
NOTE: The adjustment support function is provided to facilitate fluoroscopic/radiographic dose

adjustment. For the adjustment software startup procedure, refer to subsection 29.12.
10.1 Preparation
Prepare the following instruments for installation.
(1) Dosimeter
(2) Phantom : Copper plate 2.5 mm or acrylic plate 20 cm

(copper plate only for V4.22 or later)
(3) Dosimeter mounting tool
425
No. 2J308-036EN*I
10.2 Work Procedures
(1) Mounting the dosimeter, phantom, etc.
In V4.22 or later, it is possible to select the mounting position of the dosimeter, either at the
front of the grid (Before grid) or the back of the grid (After grid). Mounting at the front of the
grid is recommended. In this case, it is not necessary to remove the grid.
(a) TFP-800A or TFP-800B (For ABC adjustment, remove the dosimeter.)
<1> No grid (for V4.50 or later systems with the grid detachment unit)
<2> At the front of the grid (V4.22 or later)
FPD
* Neither the touch sensor nor Grid
are removed.
Touch sensor
Grid
Probe
Table
SID = 100 cm
Cu 2.5 mm
426
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<3> At the back of the grid
FPD
Touch sensor
PID=0 cm Dosimeter probe
Grid
Table
SID=100 cm
Cu 2.5 mm
(b) TFP-1216A, TFP-1200A, or TFP-1200B
When the system is used, install a dosimeter referring to the supplied table (for ABC
adjustment, remove the dosimeter).
<1> No grid (for V4.50 or later systems with the grid detachment unit)
427
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<2> At the front of the grid (V4.22 or later)
FPD
Grid * Neither the touch sensor nor Grid

are removed.
Dosimeter
Carbon panel
Table
SID = 100 cm
Cu 2.5 mm
<3> At the back of the grid
FPD
Grid * Remove the touch sensor

Dosimeter
Dosimeter
placement location
3 cm
Adjustment device
for the FPD
Table
SID = 100 cm
Carbon panel
Cu 2.5 mm
CAUTION: 1. Acrylic phantoms, if used, must be in contact with the detector.

For the copper plate, it must be placed in front of the beam
limiting device. Either an acrylic phantom or copper plate must
be used (an acrylic phantom cannot be used in V4.22 or later).
2. Adjust the fluoroscopic/radiographic dose using an image field

size that can be selected by the detector used in combination.
If the fluoroscopic/radiographic dose is adjusted using an image
field size that cannot be selected, "Adjustment data is not
correct." is displayed on the system monitor.
428
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Recording the X-ray conditions that satisfy the standard dose
(a) Select the radiography program for dose adjustment.
(b) Obtain the X-ray conditions which satisfy the standard dose through manual setting.
(c) Record the data.
Standard condition table
Field size Dose Target tube voltage Pulse rate

Continuous fluoroscopy M1 NORMAL 80 kV –
Pulsed fluoroscopy M1 NORMAL 80 kV 15 fps
DA M1 NORMAL 80 kV 15 fps
One-shot radiography M1 – 80 kV –
DSA M1 300 R 80 kV 6 fps
CAUTION: The reference conditions for the beam filter are F1 (Cu 0.2 mm) for both
DA and ONE SHOT (because F1 is automatically selected for the ABC
adjustment screen).
(3) Adjustment using the program
(a) Check SETUP in each adjustment mode.

(For this data, the standard value is set at the time of shipment from the factory.)
(b) Perform adjustment using adjustment programs.
10.3 Dose Adjustment
The following descriptions assume that the X-ray conditions which satisfy the standard dose have
been recorded.
The adjustment item can be changed by switching the tab.
FOV Check : Measurement of the image level according to the difference in FOV
Continuous Fluoro. : Adjustment of the continuous fluoroscopy standard dose
Pulse Fluoro. : Adjustment of the pulsed fluoroscopy standard dose
DA : Adjustment of the DA standard dose
One Shot : Adjustment of the one-shot radiography standard dose
DSA : Adjustment of the DSA standard dose
The adjustment screens of all items are similar, and the screen for adjusting the pulsed
fluoroscopy standard dose is described.
429
No. 2J308-036EN*I
10.3.1 When the adjustment navigator is not used
Select the [ABC Gain Adjustment] key in the adjustment menu to display the adjustment
screen for the fluoroscopy/radiography standard dose.
(1) Select adjustment mode (FOV CHECK).
Confirm that the fixing value (400) is set in N, M1, M2, and M3.
(1.1) V4.11 or earlier
430
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(*1)
(1.2) V4.22 to V4.50
Select the mounting position of the dosimeter with the [Adjustment Point] radio button.
When "Before grid" is selected, check the value of "Conversion Factor". Refer to
subsection 10.4.
It is not necessary to perform fluoroscopy.
*1) When the grid detachment unit is used in combination, refer to (1.3) "V4.50 or later
(with grid detachment unit)".
431
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(1.3) V4.50 or later (with grid detachment unit)
(a) Select "No grid".
(b) Remove the grid following the instructions given in the dialog.
(c) After adjustment is completed, remount the grid.
(2) Select the tab for fluoroscopy/radiography and start adjustment.
An example of pulse fluoroscopy is described below.
(3) Click the [SETUP] button on the PULSE FLUORO. tab and check the information.
Refer to subsection 10.4.
(4) If adjustment is performed for the first time, select each pulse rate, press the [FPDMode
Read Default] button, and check the FPD_MODE/LUT information.
(5) Set the X-ray conditions for the standard dose.
Select "X-ray condition" and adjust the values of the kV/mA/mSec items. Perform X-ray
exposure. Determine the X-ray conditions that match the standard dose. Note that the
X-ray conditions cannot be changed during X-ray exposure.
432
No. 2J308-036EN*I
CAUTION: 1. Carefully use the dosimeter in one-shot radiography because

X-ray exposure is performed at 1 fps. Also, note that the X-ray
conditions cannot be changed during X-ray exposure.
2. For the tube current for pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography,

enter the value from among the following values.
10, 20, 32, 50, 80, 125, 160, 200, 320, 400, 500, 630
3. For V4.22 or later, if Before grid is set for [Adjustment Point] on

the [FOV CHECK] screen, the appropriate value is
automatically set for [Conversion Factor] according to the
detector (Grid) setting and the standard dose for adjustment is
displayed based on the set conversion factor. Therefore,
[Standard Dose] displayed on the adjustment screen differs
from [Standard Dose (FPD Input Dose)] on the SETUP screen.
It is usually not necessary to change the value of [Conversion
Factor].
(6) Set the optical conditions for the standard dose.
Select "ABC Adjustment".
When the fluoroscopy switch or the X-ray switch is pressed, gain measurement for the
FPD is performed. When the measurement is completed, "Finish" is displayed.
<For single-plane systems>
(a) V4.11 or earlier
433
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(*1)
(b) V4.22 to V4.50
*1) When the grid detachment unit is used in combination, refer to (c) "V4.50 or
later (with grid detachment unit)".
(c) V4.50 or later (with grid detachment unit)
434
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<For biplane systems>
435
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(*1)
(b) V4.22 to V4.50
*1) When the grid detachment unit is used in combination, refer to (c) "V4.50 or
later (with grid detachment unit)".
(c) V4.50 or later (with grid detachment unit)
436
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<Key description>
[FPDMode Read Default] : Reads the FPD_MODE information defined by FPD

adjustment.
(7) Enter the [CALC.] key. The other conditions are all obtained through calculation.
If an error occurs when the [CALC.] key is used, the SETUP value may be incorrect.
Check the setting value.
If the SETUP value is correct, change the LUT value as specified below.
 When the GAIN value is 1: Change the value in the order of 3  2  1  5  4 (e.g.,
if the current setting value is "1", change it to "5").
 When the GAIN value is 16: Change the value in the order of 4  5  1  2  3
(e.g., if the current setting value is "1", change it to "2").
(8) The values obtained are shown in the lower section.
(9) Press the [SAVE] key. The adjustment data is recorded.
CAUTION: Before pressing the [SAVE] key, press the [CALC.] key to
confirm that the gain values have been calculated.
(10) The following window appears when the [SETUP] key is pressed. The baseline dose
values, baseline image levels, and the dose ratios for each adjustment point are defined
for the adjustment conditions in this window.
437
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<SETUP Window (except for DSA)>
(b) V4.22 or later
438
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Standard Dose : Standard condition (Normal dosimeter/15 fps/FOV M1)

dose values (For V4.22 or later, "(FPD Input Dose)" is
added to distinguish from the display on the adjustment
screen.)
Target Image Level : Target image level
Phantom Kindness : Records the type of phantom used during adjustments.

(V4.11)
Dose Ratio : Input the dose ratio corresponding to each dose. Values
accurate to the second decimal place can be entered.
RateRatio : Input the rate values and the corresponding ratios. Values
FOV Ratio : Input the FOV ratio corresponding to each FOV. Values
[SET] : Function for transferring the data input
[RETURN] : Function for getting out of the SETUP window
NOTE: For the basic adjustment data, refer to subsection 10.4.
439
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<SETUP Window (DSA)>
(b) V4.22 or later
440
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Standard Dose : Standard condition (Dose 5 dosimeter/6 fps/FOV M1)

dose values (For V4.22 or later, "(FPD Input Dose)" is
added to distinguish from the display on the adjustment
screen.)
Target Image Level : Target image level
Phantom Kindness : Records the type of phantom used during adjustments.

(V4.11)
Dose Value : The dose value corresponding with the dosimeter mode,
cannot be edited.
RateRatio : Input the rate values and the corresponding ratios. Values
FOV Ratio : Input the FOV ratio corresponding to each FOV. Values
[SET] : Function for transferring the data input
[RETURN] : Function for getting out of the SETUP window
NOTE: For the basic adjustment data, refer to subsection 10.4.
441
No. 2J308-036EN*I
10.3.2 When the adjustment navigator is used
(1) Outline
The fluoroscopic dose adjustment with the adjustment navigator includes the exposure
reference settings for continuous fluoroscopy, pulsed fluoroscopy, DA, one-shot
radiography, and DSA, as well as gain calibrations for these exposure references.
In this adjustment, these procedures are designed to be carried out in the order
described below.
NOTE: Refer to the Help window for preparation for adjustment and instrument installation.
442
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Work procedure
(2.1) V4.11 or earlier
(a) Start up the fluoroscopic dose adjustment function of the adjustment navigator.
The following fluoroscopic dose adjustment window opens. Proceed to step (c).
443
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(*1)
(2.2) V4.22 to V4.50
The following fluoroscopic dose adjustment window opens. Proceed to step (c).
*1) When the grid detachment unit is used in combination, refer to (2.3) "V4.50
or later (with grid detachment unit)".
444
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2.3) V4.50 or later (with grid detachment unit)
The FOV CHECK window opens.
445
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) Grid selection setting (Measurement Point)
<1> Select either "Before grid" or "No grid" according to the type of support unit
used.
<2> Remove the grid or mount the dosimeter according to the message and click
[Next] to proceed to the next adjustment step.
The following fluoroscopic dose adjustment window opens.
(c) Exposure reference setting (X-ray conditions)
<1> Perform fluoroscopy or radiography that corresponds to the selected X-ray

study type.
<2> Enter the X-ray conditions so that the value displayed in the dosimeter
approaches the value displayed in "Standard Dose".
<3> After the value displayed in the dosimeter approaches the value displayed in
the indicator, click [Set]  [Next] as described in the message to proceed to
the next adjustment.
NOTE: 80 kV is fixed, but the values of mA or msec for exposure adjustment should be
changed.
446
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(d) Gain calculation that corresponds to the exposure reference (ABC adjustment)
<1> Perform fluoroscopy or radiography that corresponds to the type of X-ray

study selected. Perform exposure for a few seconds.
<2> The gain calculation starts automatically and the results of the gain calculation
are displayed for rate, dose, and FOV. Perform the procedures for each X-ray
study type.
(e) Fluoroscopic dose adjustment using the adjustment navigator is now complete.
(Note that if the grid was removed in (b) in (2.3), remount it.)
447
No. 2J308-036EN*I
10.4 Standard Values for Each Parameter
(1) Entrance dose
The standard entrance dose to the FPD is indicated for each FPD size.
This standard value is the value when a copper plate of 2.5 mm is used. When an acrylic
phantom of 20 cm is used, the standard value becomes larger than that for the copper plate.
The difference in dose between the acrylic phantom and the copper plate is caused by the
difference in beam quality. In addition, the larger the field size, the greater the difference.
This is because a copper plate causes only a small amount of scattered rays, while an
acrylic phantom causes more scattered rays, and because the larger the field size, the more
significant the scattered rays.
(a) List of dose data at the time of adjustment in adjustment mode (for the copper plate)
Phantom conditions : Copper plate of 2.5 mm (If the standard dose cannot
be achieved at 80 kV with some techniques, perform
adjustment using a 2.0-mm copper plate for these
techniques only. For the other techniques, use a
2.5-mm copper plate.)
X-ray tube voltage condition : 80 kV
PF, DA pulse rate : 15 fps
Dose mode : Normal
Field size : M1
Dose per frame Upper = μR/frame, (Lower = nGy/frame)

TFP-800A TFP-1200A
or TFP-1216A or
Dose TFP-800B TFP-1200B
7 inch 12 inch 10 inch
(Mag.1) (Mag.1) (Mag.1)
Continuous Fluoro Normal 3.50 2.07 2.80
(30.5) (18.1) (24.5)
Pulse Fluoro Normal 5.24 3.74 4.19
(45.8) (32.7) (36.6)
DA Normal 26.7 13.16 19.7
(233) (115) (172)
One Shot 177.8 157.8 170.4
(1552) (1378) (1488)
DSA 300 μR/f 248 217 225
(2165) (1894) (1964)
448
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Dose per minute Upper = mR/min, (Lower = Gy/min)

TFP-800A TFP-1200A
or TFP-1216A or
(Mag. 1) (Mag.1) (Mag.1)
(54.9) (32.6) (44.0)
(41.2) (29.3) (32.9)
DA Normal 24.0 11.8 17.7
(210) (103) (155)
* 1 μR = 0.258 nC/kg/frame, 1R = 0.00873 Gy
449
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) List of dose data at the time of adjustment in adjustment mode (for the acrylic
phantom)
Phantom conditions : Acrylic phantom of 20 cm (if 80 kV cannot be

achieved, change the thickness.)
X-ray tube voltage condition : 80 kV
PF, DA pulse rate : 15 fps
Dose mode : Normal
Field size : M1
Dose per frame Upper = μR/frame, (Lower = nGy/frame)

TFP-800A TFP-1200A
or TFP-1216A or
(Mag.1) (Mag.1) (Mag.1)
(41.2) (27.5) (33.0)
(61.8) (49.5) (49.5)
DA Normal 36.0 20.0 26.6
(314) (175) (232)
One Shot 240 240 230
(2100) (2100) (2010)
DSA 300 μR/f 330 330 321
(2881) (2881) (2805)
Dose per minute Upper = mR/min, (Lower = Gy/min)

TFP-800A TFP-1200A
or TFP-1216A or
(Mag. 1) (Mag.1) (Mag.1)
(74.2) (49.5) (59.5)
(55.6) (44.6) (44.3)
DA Normal 32.4 18.0 23.9
(283) (157) (208)
* 1 μR = 0.258 nC/kg/frame, 1R = 0.00873 Gy
450
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Conversion factor (V4.22 or later)
When Before grid is selected, it is necessary to calculate the target dose to obtain the
standard dose (FPD Input Dose) using the conversion factor. The detector type, the grid,
and the corresponding conversion factor are specified below.
Detector type Grid Conversion factor

TFP-800A or TFP-800B YEG1285-01 0.76
TFP-1216A YEG1330-01 0.76
TFP-1200A or TFP-1200B YEG1332-01 0.82
451
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Other parameters
Parameters for gain adjustment (dose ratio per frame)
The shaded areas are the references for adjustment.
Refer to the table below.
Dose ratio for the TFP-800A or TFP-800B

Continuous Fluoro Image Level 400
Dose Dose High Normal Low
Ratio 1.50 1.00 0.67
FOV FOV 8 inch 7 inch 6 inch 5 inch
Ratio 0.71 1.00 1.24 1.40
Pulse Fluoro Image Level 400
Ratio 1.50 1.00 0.67
Pulse Rate Rate 30fps 20fps 15fps 10/5/3/1fps
Ratio 0.67 0.83 1.00 1.00
Ratio 0.71 1.00 1.24 1.40
DA Image Level 400
Ratio 1.00 1.00 0.60
Ratio 0.80 1.00 1.00 1.00
*1
Ratio 0.67 1.00 1.20 1.40
One Shot Image Level 400
Ratio 0.67 1.00 1.20 1.40
DSA Image Level 800
Dose Dose 1 2 3 4 5 6
Value 100 150 200 250 300 400
Pulse Rate Rate 30 15 10 6 3 2 1/0.5/0.3
Ratio 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Ratio 0.91 1.00 1.19 1.36
*1 If adjustment cannot be performed when gain is 1.0 or less, or if artifacts are shown on
halation areas, set the value to 1.20.
452
No. 2J308-036EN*I
NOTE: The FPD incident dose with different field sizes and dose modes: For the
2.5-mm copper plate, refer to the following table.
Unit: R/frame
The shaded sections are the reference values.
1 μR = 0.258 nC/kg/frame, 1R = 0.00873 Gy
The pulse rate for PF and DA is 15 fps.
FPD. FOV Size
Dose 8 inch 7 inch 6 inch 5 inch
(Normal) (Mag. 1) (Mag. 2) (Mag. 3)
Continuous Fluoro High 3.72 5.24 6.50 7.35
Normal 2.48 3.50 4.34 4.90
Low 1.66 2.34 2.90 3.28
Pulse Fluoro High 5.59 7.87 9.75 11.0
Normal 3.72 5.24 6.50 7.34
Low 2.49 3.51 4.36 4.92
DA High 17.9 26.7 32.0 37.4
Normal 17.9 26.7 32.0 37.4
Low 10.7 16.0 19.2 22.4
One Shot 119.2 177.8 214 248
DSA 100 75 83 98 112
150 113 124 148 169
200 151 165 197 225
250 188 207 246 281
300 226 248 295 337
400 301 331 394 450
NOTE: The default values of the latest software version are set for the LUT values.
However, depending on the adjustment result, some of the LUT values may
need to be changed in some cases.
<For continuous fluoroscopy>
Rate Continuance
FPD
Dose FOV LUT
MODE
High N 0 0
M1 0 0
M2 0 0
M3 0 0
Normal N 0 0
M1 0 0
M2 0 0
M3 0 0
Low N 0 0
M1 0 0
M2 0 0
M3 0 0
453
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<For pulsed fluoroscopy> (Mode, LUT)
Rate 30 fps 20 fps 15 fps 10 fps 5.0 fps 3.0 fps 1.0 fps
FPD FPD FPD FPD FPD FPD FPD
Dose FOV LUT LUT LUT LUT LUT LUT LUT
MODE MODE MODE MODE MODE MODE MODE
High N 0 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
M1 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
M2 0 1 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5
M3 0 1 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5
Normal N 0 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
M1 0 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
M2 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
M3 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Low N 0 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
M1 0 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
M2 0 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
M3 0 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
<For pulsed fluoroscopy> (mode (BP), LUT (BP), for biplane systems in which the
TFP-800A or TFP-800B is installed)
High N 7 1 7 1 0 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
M1 7 1 7 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
M2 7 5 7 5 0 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5
M3 7 5 7 5 0 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5
Normal N 7 2 7 2 0 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
M1 7 2 7 2 0 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
M2 7 1 7 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
M3 7 1 7 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Low N 7 2 7 2 0 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
M1 7 2 7 2 0 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
M2 7 2 7 2 0 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
M3 7 2 7 2 0 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
<For pulsed fluoroscopy> (mode (BP), LUT (BP), for biplane systems in which the
TFP-1216A is installed)
High N ― ― ― ― 0 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
M1 ― ― ― ― 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
M2 ― ― ― ― 0 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5
M3 ― ― ― ― 0 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5
Normal N ― ― ― ― 0 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
M1 ― ― ― ― 0 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
M2 ― ― ― ― 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
M3 ― ― ― ― 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Low N ― ― ― ― 0 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
M1 ― ― ― ― 0 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
M2 ― ― ― ― 0 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
M3 ― ― ― ― 0 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
454
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<For DA> (Mode, LUT --- For SP, DP, biplane with TFP-800A or TFP-800B)
High N 2 1 3 1 4 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
M1 2 5 3 5 4 5 3 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
M2 2 5 3 5 4 5 3 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
M3 2 5 3 5 4 5 3 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
Normal N 2 1 3 1 4 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
M1 2 5 3 5 4 5 3 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
M2 2 5 3 5 4 5 3 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
M3 2 5 3 5 4 5 3 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
Low N 2 1 3 1 4 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
M1 2 1 3 1 4 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
M2 2 1 3 1 4 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
M3 2 1 3 1 4 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
<For DA> (Mode, LUT --- For biplane with TFP-1216A)
High N ― ― 3 1 4 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
M1 ― ― 3 5 4 5 3 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
M2 ― ― 3 5 4 5 3 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
M3 ― ― 3 5 4 5 3 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
Normal N ― ― 3 1 4 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
M1 ― ― 3 5 4 5 3 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
M2 ― ― 3 5 4 5 3 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
M3 ― ― 3 5 4 5 3 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
Low N ― ― 3 1 4 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
M1 ― ― 3 1 4 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
M2 ― ― 3 1 4 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
M3 ― ― 3 1 4 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
455
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<For DA> (Mode (BP), LUT (BP) --- For biplane with TFP-800A or TFP-800B)
High N 2 1 2 1 3 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
M1 2 5 2 5 3 5 3 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
M2 2 5 2 5 3 5 3 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
M3 2 5 2 5 3 5 3 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
Normal N 2 1 2 1 3 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
M1 2 5 2 5 3 5 3 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
M2 2 5 2 5 3 5 3 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
M3 2 5 2 5 3 5 3 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
Low N 2 1 2 1 3 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
M1 2 1 2 1 3 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
M2 2 1 2 1 3 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
M3 2 1 2 1 3 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
<For DA> (Mode (BP), LUT (BP) --- For biplane with TFP-1216A)
High N ― ― ― ― 3 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
M1 ― ― ― ― 3 5 3 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
M2 ― ― ― ― 3 5 3 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
M3 ― ― ― ― 3 5 3 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
Normal N ― ― ― ― 3 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
M1 ― ― ― ― 3 5 3 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
M2 ― ― ― ― 3 5 3 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
M3 ― ― ― ― 3 5 3 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
Low N ― ― ― ― 3 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
M1 ― ― ― ― 3 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
M2 ― ― ― ― 3 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
M3 ― ― ― ― 3 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
456
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<For one-shot radiography> (Mode, LUT)
FPD
Dose FOV LUT
MODE
High N - -
M1 - -
M2 - -
M3 - -
Normal N 6 1
M1 6 5
M2 6 5
M3 6 5
Low N - -
M1 - -
M2 - -
M3 - -
<For one-shot radiography> (Mode (BP), LUT (BP))
FPD
Dose FOV LUT
MODE
High N - -
M1 - -
M2 - -
M3 - -
Normal N 6 1
M1 6 5
M2 6 5
M3 6 5
Low N - -
M1 - -
M2 - -
M3 - -
457
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<For DSA> (Mode, LUT)
Rate 30 fps 15 fps 10 fps 6.0 fps 3.0 fps 2.0 fps 1.0 fps 0.5 fps 0.33 fps
FPD FPD FPD FPD FPD FPD FPD FPD FPD

Dose FOV LUT LUT LUT LUT LUT LUT LUT LUT LUT
MODE MODE MODE MODE MODE MODE MODE MODE MODE
100 R N 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M1 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M2 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M3 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
150 R N 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M1 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M2 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M3 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
200 R N 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M1 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M2 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M3 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
250 R N 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M1 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M2 5 1 5 1 5 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1
M3 5 1 5 1 5 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1
300R N 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M1 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M2 5 1 5 1 5 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1
M3 5 1 5 1 5 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1
400 R N 5 1 5 1 5 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1
M1 5 1 5 1 5 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1
M2 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5
M3 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5
458
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<For DSA> (Mode (BP), LUT (BP) --- For biplane with TFP-800A or TFP-800B)

100 R N ― ― 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M1 ― ― 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M2 ― ― 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M3 ― ― 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
150 R N ― ― 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M1 ― ― 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M2 ― ― 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M3 ― ― 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
200 R N ― ― 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M1 ― ― 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M2 ― ― 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M3 ― ― 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
250 R N ― ― 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M1 ― ― 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M2 ― ― 5 1 5 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1
M3 ― ― 5 1 5 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1
300 R N ― ― 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M1 ― ― 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M2 ― ― 5 1 5 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1
M3 ― ― 5 1 5 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1
400 R N ― ― 5 1 5 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1
M1 ― ― 5 1 5 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1
M2 ― ― 5 5 5 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5
M3 ― ― 5 5 5 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5
459
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<For DSA> (Mode (BP), LUT (BP) --- For biplane with TFP-1216A)

100 R N ― ― 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M1 ― ― 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M2 ― ― 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M3 ― ― 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
150 R N ― ― 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M1 ― ― 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M2 ― ― 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M3 ― ― 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
200 R N ― ― 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M1 ― ― 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M2 ― ― 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M3 ― ― 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
250 R N ― ― 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M1 ― ― 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M2 ― ― 5 1 5 1 5 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1
M3 ― ― 5 1 5 1 5 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1
300 R N ― ― 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M1 ― ― 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2
M2 ― ― 5 1 5 1 5 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1
M3 ― ― 5 1 5 1 5 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1
400 R N ― ― 5 1 5 1 5 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1
M1 ― ― 5 1 5 1 5 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1
M2 ― ― 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5
M3 ― ― 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5
460
No. 2J308-036EN*I
TFP-1216A Dose Ratio

Continuous Image Level 400
Fluoro Ratio 1.50 1.00 0.67
Ratio 0.75 1.00 1.50 2.00
Ratio 1.50 1.00 0.67
Pulse Rate Rate 30 fps 20 fps 15 fps 10/5/3/1 fps
Ratio 0.67 0.83 1.00 1.00
Ratio 0.75 1.00 1.50 2.00
DA Image Level 400
Ratio 1.60 1.00 0.60
Pulse Rate Rate 30 fps 15 fps 10 fps 7.5/3/2/1 fps
Ratio 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
Ratio 1.00 1.00 1.50 2.40
Ratio 0.67 1.00 1.20 1.40
DSA Image Level 800
Dose Dose 1 2 3 4 5 6
Value 100 150 200 250 300 400
Pulse Rate Rate 30 15 10 6 3 2 1/0.5/0.3
Ratio 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
Ratio 0.91 1.00 1.19 1.36
NOTE: FPD entrance dose with different field sizes and dose modes: For the 2.5-mm
copper plate
Refer to the following table.
Unit system: μR/frame The shaded areas are the references.

1 μR = 0.258 nC/kg/frame, 1R = 0.00873 Gy
The pulse rate for PF and DA is 15 fps.
461
No. 2J308-036EN*I
TFP-1216A
FPD. FOV Size
Dose 16 inch 12 inch 8 inch 6 inch
(Normal) (Mag. 1) (Mag. 2) (Mag. 3)
Continuous Fluoro High 2.33 3.11 4.66 6.21
Normal 1.55 2.07 3.11 4.14
Low 1.04 1.39 2.08 2.77
Normal 2.80 3.74 5.60 7.47
Low 1.88 2.50 3.75 5.01
DA High 21.1 21.1 31.6 50.5
Normal 13.2 13.2 19.7 31.6
Low 7.90 7.90 11.8 19.0
One Shot 105.8 157.8 189.4 221
DSA 100 66 72 86 99
150 99 109 129 148
200 132 145 172 197
250 165 181 215 246
300 197 217 258 295
400 263 289 344 393
TFP-1216A
<For continuous fluoroscopy> (Mode, LUT)
Rate Continuance
FPD
Dose FOV LUT
MODE
High N 0 0
M1 0 0
M2 1 0
M3 1 0
Normal N 0 0
M1 0 0
M2 1 0
M3 1 0
Low N 0 0
M1 0 0
M2 1 0
M3 1 0
462
No. 2J308-036EN*I
TFP-1216A
High N 0 2 0 2 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5
M1 0 2 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5
M2 1 2 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5
M3 1 5 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4
Normal N 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2
M1 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2
M2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
M3 1 2 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5
Low N 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2
M1 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2
M2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
M3 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
<For pulsed fluoroscopy> (Mode (BP), LUT ( BP))
High N ― ― ― ― 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5
M1 ― ― ― ― 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5
M2 ― ― ― ― 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5
M3 ― ― ― ― 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4
Normal N ― ― ― ― 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2
M1 ― ― ― ― 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2
M2 ― ― ― ― 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
M3 ― ― ― ― 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5
Low N ― ― ― ― 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2
M1 ― ― ― ― 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2
M2 ― ― ― ― 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
M3 ― ― ― ― 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
463
No. 2J308-036EN*I
TFP-1216A
<For DA> (Mode, LUT)
Rate 30 fps 15 fps 10 fps 7.5 fps 3.0 fps 2.0 fps 1.0 fps
High N 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
M1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
M2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2
M3 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1
Normal N 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
M1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
M2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2
M3 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2
Low N 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3
M1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
M2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2
M3 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2
<For DA> (Mode (BP), LUT (BP))

Rate 30 fps 15 fps 10 fps 7.5 fps 3.0 fps 2.0 fps 1.0 fps
High N ― ― 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
M1 ― ― 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
M2 ― ― 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2
M3 ― ― 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1
Normal N ― ― 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
M1 ― ― 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
M2 ― ― 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2
M3 ― ― 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2
Low N ― ― 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3
M1 ― ― 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
M2 ― ― 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2
M3 ― ― 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2
464
No. 2J308-036EN*I
TFP-1216A
<For one-shot radiography> (Mode, LUT)
FPD
Dose FOV LUT
MODE
High N ― ―
M1 ― ―
M2 ― ―
M3 ― ―
Normal N 4 1
M1 4 5
M2 4 5
M3 4 5
Low N ― ―
M1 ― ―
M2 ― ―
M3 ― ―
<For one-shot radiography> (Mode (BP), LUT (BP))
FPD
Dose FOV LUT
MODE
High N ― ―
M1 ― ―
M2 ― ―
M3 ― ―
Normal N 4 1
M1 4 5
M2 4 5
M3 4 5
Low N ― ―
M1 ― ―
M2 ― ―
M3 ― ―
465
No. 2J308-036EN*I
TFP-1216A

100 R N 5 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M1 5 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M2 6 2 6 2 6 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M3 6 2 6 2 6 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
150 R N 5 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M1 5 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M2 6 2 6 2 6 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M3 6 2 6 2 6 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
200 R N 5 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M1 5 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M2 6 2 6 2 6 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M3 6 2 6 2 6 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
250 R N 5 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M1 5 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M2 6 2 6 2 6 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M3 6 1 6 1 6 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
300 R N 5 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M1 5 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M2 6 1 6 1 6 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
M3 6 1 6 1 6 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
400 R N 5 1 5 1 5 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
M1 5 1 5 1 5 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
M2 6 5 6 5 6 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
M3 6 5 6 5 6 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
466
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<For DSA> (Mode (BP), LUT (BP))


100 R N ― ― 5 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M1 ― ― 5 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M2 ― ― 6 2 6 2 6 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M3 ― ― 6 2 6 2 6 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
150 R N ― ― 5 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M1 ― ― 5 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M2 ― ― 6 2 6 2 6 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M3 ― ― 6 2 6 2 6 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
200 R N ― ― 5 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M1 ― ― 5 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M2 ― ― 6 2 6 2 6 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M3 ― ― 6 2 6 2 6 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
250 R N ― ― 5 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M1 ― ― 5 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M2 ― ― 6 2 6 2 6 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M3 ― ― 6 1 6 1 6 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
300 R N ― ― 5 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M1 ― ― 5 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M2 ― ― 6 1 6 1 6 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
M3 ― ― 6 1 6 1 6 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
400 R N ― ― 5 1 5 1 5 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
M1 ― ― 5 1 5 1 5 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
M2 ― ― 6 5 6 5 6 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
M3 ― ― 6 5 6 5 6 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
467
No. 2J308-036EN*I
TFP-1200A or TFP-1200B Dose Ratio

Continuous Fluoro Image Level 400
Ratio 1.50 1.00 0.67
Ratio 1.0 1.00 1.11 1.67
Ratio 1.50 1.00 0.67
Ratio 0.67 0.83 1.00 1.00
Ratio 1.0 1.00 1.11 1.67
DA Image Level 400
Ratio 1.00 1.00 0.60
Pulse Rate Rate 60 fps 30 fps 15 fps 10/5/3/1 fps
Ratio 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
Ratio 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.50
Ratio 1.0 1.00 1.11 1.33
DSA Image Level 800
Dose Dose 1 2 3 4 5 6
Value 100 150 200 250 300 400
Pulse Rate Rate 30 15 10 6 3 2 1/0.5/0.3
Ratio 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Ratio 0.90 1.00 1.11 1.33
NOTE: For the FPD incident dose (assuming a 2.5-mm-thick copper plate) for other field
sizes and dose modes, refer to the table below.
Unit: R/frame (the values in the gray field are for reference)
1R = 0.258nC/kg/frame, 1R = 0.00873Gy
The pulse rate for Pulse Fluoro and DA is 15 fps.
468
No. 2J308-036EN*I
FPD. FOV Size
Dose 12 inches 10 inches 8 inches 6 inches
(Normal) (Mag.1) (Mag.2) (Mag.3)
Continuous High 4.20 4.20 4.66 7.01
Fluoro Normal 2.80 2.80 3.11 4.68
Low 1.88 1.88 2.08 3.13
Normal 4.19 4.19 4.65 7.00
Low 2.81 2.81 3.12 4.69
DA High 19.7 19.7 19.7 29.6
Normal 19.7 19.7 19.7 29.6
Low 11.8 11.8 11.8 17.7
One Shot 170.4 170.4 189.2 226.6
DSA 100 68 75 83 100
150 101 113 125 150
200 135 150 167 200
250 169 188 208 249
300 203 225 250 299
400 270 300 333 399
<For continuous fluoroscopy>
Rate Continuous
fluoroscopy
FPD
Dose FOV LUT
MODE
High N 0 0
M1 0 0
M2 1 0
M3 1 0
Normal N 0 0
M1 0 0
M2 1 0
M3 1 0
Low N 0 0
M1 0 0
M2 1 0
M3 1 0
469
No. 2J308-036EN*I
High N 0 2 7 2 7 2 7 2 7 2 7 2 7 2
M1 0 2 7 2 7 2 7 2 7 2 7 2 7 2
M2 1 1 8 1 8 1 8 1 8 1 8 1 8 1
M3 1 1 8 5 8 5 8 5 8 5 8 5 8 5
Normal N 0 2 7 2 7 2 7 2 7 2 7 2 7 2
M1 0 2 7 2 7 2 7 2 7 2 7 2 7 2
M2 1 2 8 2 8 1 8 1 8 1 8 1 8 1
M3 1 2 8 1 8 1 8 1 8 1 8 1 8 1
Low N 0 2 7 2 7 2 7 2 7 2 7 2 7 2
M1 0 2 7 2 7 2 7 2 7 2 7 2 7 2
M2 1 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2
M3 1 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2
<For pulsed fluoroscopy> (Mode (BP), LUT (BP))
High N - - - - 0 2 7 2 7 2 7 2 7 2
M1 - - - - 0 2 7 2 7 2 7 2 7 2
M2 - - - - 1 1 8 1 8 1 8 1 8 1
M3 - - - - 1 5 8 5 8 5 8 5 8 5
Normal N - - - - 0 2 7 2 7 2 7 2 7 2
M1 - - - - 0 2 7 2 7 2 7 2 7 2
M2 - - - - 1 1 8 1 8 1 8 1 8 1
M3 - - - - 1 1 8 1 8 1 8 1 8 1
Low N - - - - 0 2 7 2 7 2 7 2 7 2
M1 - - - - 0 2 7 2 7 2 7 2 7 2
M2 - - - - 1 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2
M3 - - - - 1 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2
470
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<For DA> (Mode, LUT)
High N - - 2 1 9 1 2 1 9 1 9 1 9 1
M1 - - 2 1 9 1 2 1 9 1 9 1 9 1
M2 12 1 3 5 10 5 3 5 10 5 10 5 10 5
M3 12 1 3 5 10 5*1 3 5 10 5*1 10 5*1 10 5*1
Normal N - - 2 1 9 1 2 1 9 1 9 1 9 1
M1 - - 2 1 9 1 2 1 9 1 9 1 9 1
M2 12 1 3 5 10 5 3 5 10 5 10 5 10 5
M3 12 1 3 5 10 5*1 3 5 10 5*1 10 5*1 10 5*1
Low N - - 2 1 9 1 2 1 9 1 9 1 9 1
M1 - - 2 1 9 1 2 1 9 1 9 1 9 1
M2 12 1 3 1 10 1 3 1 10 1 10 1 10 1
M3 12 1 3 1 10 1 3 1 10 1 10 1 10 1
*1 If errors occur when GAIN is set to 1 or less or artifacts occur in areas of halation on
images, change the dose rate from 5 to 4.
<For DA>
(Mode (BP), LUT (BP) --- for biplane with TFP-1200A or TFP-1200B)
High N - - - - 2 1 2 1 9 1 9 1 9 1
M1 - - - - 2 1 2 1 9 1 9 1 9 1
M2 - - 12 5 3 5 3 5 10 5 10 5 10 5
M3 - - 12 5 3 5*1 3 5 10 5*1 10 5*1 10 5*1
Normal N - - - - 2 1 2 1 9 1 9 1 9 1
M1 - - - - 2 1 2 1 9 1 9 1 9 1
M2 - - 12 5 3 5 3 5 10 5 10 5 10 5
M3 - - 12 5 3 5*1 3 5 10 5*1 10 5*1 10 5*1
Low N - - - - 2 1 2 1 9 1 9 1 9 1
M1 - - - - 2 1 2 1 9 1 9 1 9 1
M2 - - 12 1 3 1 3 1 10 1 10 1 10 1
M3 - - 12 1 3 1 3 1 10 1 10 1 10 1
471
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<For DA>
(Mode (BP), LUT (BP) --- for biplane with TFP-1216A)
High N - - - - 2 1 2 1 9 1 9 1 9 1
M1 - - - - 2 1 2 1 9 1 9 1 9 1
M2 - - - - 3 5 3 5 10 5 10 5 10 5
M3 - - - - 3 5*1 3 5 10 5*1 10 5*1 10 5*1
Normal N - - - - 2 1 2 1 9 1 9 1 9 1
M1 - - - - 2 1 2 1 9 1 9 1 9 1
M2 - - - - 3 5 3 5 10 5 10 5 10 5
M3 - - - - 3 5*1 3 5 10 5*1 10 5*1 10 5*1
Low N - - - - 2 1 2 1 9 1 9 1 9 1
M1 - - - - 2 1 2 1 9 1 9 1 9 1
M2 - - - - 3 1 3 1 10 1 10 1 10 1
M3 - - - - 3 1 3 1 10 1 10 1 10 1
<One-shot radiography> (Mode, LUT)
FPD
Dose FOV LUT
MODE
High N - -
M1 - -
M2 - -
M3 - -
Normal N 4 1
M1 4 5
M2 4 5
M3 4 5
Low 1 N - -
M1 - -
M2 - -
M3 - -
472
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<One-shot radiography> (Mode (BP), LUT (BP))
FPD
Dose FOV LUT
MODE
High N - -
M1 - -
M2 - -
M3 - -
Normal N 4 1
M1 4 5
M2 4 5
M3 4 5
Low 1 N - -
M1 - -
M2 - -
M3 - -
473
No. 2J308-036EN*I

100 R N 5 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M1 5 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M2 6 2 6 2 6 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M3 6 2 6 2 6 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
150 R N 5 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M1 5 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M2 6 2 6 2 6 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M3 6 2 6 2 6 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
200 R N 5 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M1 5 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M2 6 2 6 2 6 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M3 6 1 6 1 6 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
250 R N 5 1 5 1 5 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
M1 5 1 5 1 5 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
M2 6 5 6 5 6 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
M3 6 5 6 5 6 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
300 R N 5 1 5 1 5 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
M1 5 1 5 1 5 1 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
M2 6 5 6 5 6 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
M3 6 5 6 5 6 5 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
400 R N 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
M1 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
M2 6 5 6 5 6 5 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
M3 6 4 6 4 6 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
<For DSA>
(Mode (BP), LUT (BP) --- for biplane with TFP-1200A or TFP-1200B)

100 R N - - 5 2 5 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2
M1 - - 5 2 5 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2
M2 - - 6 2 6 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2
M3 - - 6 2 6 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2
150 R N - - 5 2 5 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2
M1 - - 5 2 5 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2
M2 - - 6 2 6 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2
M3 - - 6 2 6 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2
200 R N - - 5 2 5 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2
M1 - - 5 2 5 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2
M2 - - 6 2 6 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2
M3 - - 6 1 6 1 13 1 13 1 13 1 13 1 13 1 13 1
250 R N - - 5 1 5 1 13 1 13 1 13 1 13 1 13 1 13 1
M1 - - 5 1 5 1 13 1 13 1 13 1 13 1 13 1 13 1
M2 - - 6 5 6 5 13 5 13 5 13 5 13 5 13 5 13 5
M3 - - 6 5 6 5 13 5 13 5 13 5 13 5 13 5 13 5
300 R N - - 5 1 5 1 13 1 13 1 13 1 13 1 13 1 13 1
M1 - - 5 1 5 1 13 5 13 5 13 5 13 5 13 5 13 5
M2 - - 6 5 6 5 13 5 13 5 13 5 13 5 13 5 13 5
M3 - - 6 5 6 5 13 4 13 4 13 4 13 4 13 4 13 4
400 R N - - 5 5 5 5 13 5 13 5 13 5 13 5 13 5 13 5
M1 - - 5 5 5 5 13 5 13 5 13 5 13 5 13 5 13 5
M2 - - 6 5 6 5 13 4 13 4 13 4 13 4 13 4 13 4
M3 - - 6 4 6 4 13 4 13 4 13 4 13 4 13 4 13 4
474
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<For DSA>
(Mode (BP), LUT (BP) --- for biplane with TFP-1216A)

100 R N - - 5 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M1 - - 5 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M2 - - 6 2 6 2 6 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M3 - - 6 2 6 2 6 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
150 R N - - 5 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M1 - - 5 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M2 - - 6 2 6 2 6 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M3 - - 6 2 6 2 6 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
200 R N - - 5 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M1 - - 5 2 5 2 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M2 - - 6 2 6 2 6 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
M3 - - 6 1 6 1 6 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
250 R N - - 5 1 5 1 5 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
M1 - - 5 1 5 1 5 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
M2 - - 6 5 6 5 6 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
M3 - - 6 5 6 5 6 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
300 R N - - 5 1 5 1 5 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
M1 - - 5 1 5 1 5 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
M2 - - 6 5 6 5 6 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
M3 - - 6 5 6 5 6 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
400 R N - - 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
M1 - - 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
M2 - - 6 5 6 5 6 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
M3 - - 6 4 6 4 6 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
475
No. 2J308-036EN*I
11. F-ACT ADJUSTMENT
F-ACT adjustment is a function for determining the X-ray conditions related to DA, one-shot, and
DSA radiography.
NOTE: The adjustment support function for facilitating the procedures can be used for F-ACT
adjustment. For the adjustment software startup procedure, refer to subsection 29.12.
11.1 Preparation
Prepare the following items.
 Phantom: 20-cm acrylic phantom
Follow the procedures to perform adjustment work.
(1) Set the phantom.
(2) Start the F-ACT adjustment program.
(3) Check the adjustment item on the adjustment screen.
When the program starts, all adjustment items are selected.
(4) Check the adjustment conditions which are displayed in the <Setup Condition> display area.
Set the 20-cm phantom on the tabletop. Adjust the tabletop height so that the SID is 100
cm and the PID is 10 cm. For Setup Condition, "20 cm" is displayed for the phantom.
Depending on the accuracy of adjustment, the phantom thickness can be changed.
(5) Perform fluoroscopy.
The radiography conditions estimated by F-ACT are displayed on the screen.
476
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(6) Perform radiography.
Stable conditions for radiography are displayed together with a correction value.
DA : X-ray generation is performed for approximately 4 seconds.

When the SW is released, the stable conditions are displayed in
"Actual". F-ACT correction values are calculated based on the
estimated
X-ray conditions and stable conditions.
One-shot radiography : X-ray generation is performed once. When the SW is released,

the target image level and the image level during X-ray
generation are displayed as "Actual". Correction values are
calculated based on the target and the actual image level.
DSA : X-ray generation is performed once. When the SW is released,

the target image level and the image level during X-ray
generation are displayed as "Actual". Correction values are
calculated based on the target and actual image levels.
* If adjustment cannot be performed with a 20-cm thick phantom, "Dose down.

Reduce some Phantoms and try again." is displayed in the message box on completion
of fluoroscopy. At this time, reduce phantom thickness by removing the minimum-
thickness phantom and continue adjustment work. It is not necessary to reset phantom
thickness to the original thickness when the next item or later is carried out. If "Dose up.
Pile more Phantoms and try again." is displayed, increase phantom thickness and
continue adjustment work.
(7) When the [NEXT] button is pressed, the program proceeds to the next item.
(8) When all adjustment conditions are completed, press the [SAVE] button to register the data.
477
No. 2J308-036EN*I
11.3 F-ACT Adjustment Program
11.3.1 When the adjustment navigator is not used
Item name Function

Estimated Displays the radiography conditions estimated from
fluoroscopy.
Actual Displays the stable X-ray conditions for radiography.
[NEXT] button Button to advance the condition
[ALL] button Button to select all items to be adjusted
Check Box Items to be adjusted are checked.
[Thick.Correct.] button Button for registering the correction coefficient for estimating
the patient thickness (only for DA)
Data Input (Manual Select this item to enter the offset
Mode)
X-ray tube display Displays the X-ray tube.
[FRONTAL-TUBE1], [LATERAL-TUBE1], [FRONTAL-TUBE2]
Keep Rotation Extends the high-speed rotation of the tube for one minute
(only works with bearing tubes)
[LOAD] button Reads the adjustment data.
[SAVE] button Calculates and registers the adjustment data.
[SETUP] button Refer to the parameter related to the estimated conditions.
478
No. 2J308-036EN*I
 The dialog box displayed when the [SETUP] button is pressed.
DA / OneShot DSA
Item name Item descriptions

Beam Filter (FLUO) Specifies the Beam Filter used for fluoroscopy.
Beam Filter (RAD.) Specifies the Beam Filter used for radiography.
kV Target (DSA only, exclusively for checking) Target kV when making
estimations
kV Max (DSA only, exclusively for checking) Maximum kV when
making estimations
kV Min (DSA only, exclusively for checking) Minimum kV when
making estimations
Focus (DSA only, exclusively for checking) Focus when making
estimations
mSec Max (DSA only, exclusively for checking) Maximum mSec when
making estimations
mSec Min (DSA only, exclusively for checking) Minimum mSec when
making estimations
 Beam Filter settings
The initial settings for the Beam Filter are set according to the detector.
TFP-800A TFP-1200A
or TFP-1216A or
TFP-800B TFP-1200B
BeamFilter (FLUO) F1 F1 F1
BeamFilter (RAD.) F1 F1 F1
NOTE: It is not necessary to change these settings unless instructed to do so by the factory.
479
No. 2J308-036EN*I
11.3.2 When the adjustment navigator is used
(1) Outline
The correction values for the X-ray conditions for DA, one-shot radiography, and DSA are
calculated during F-ACT adjustment using the adjustment Navigator function.
The procedures must be carried out in the order specified in the following flowchart.
NOTE: Refer to the Help window for details regarding the preparation of instruments and
other items for the adjustment procedures.
480
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Work procedure
(a) Start up the F-ACT adjustment function of the adjustment navigator.
The following F-ACT adjustment window opens.
(b) DA
<1> Perform fluoroscopy for at least 2 seconds as instructed in the guide message
displayed in the Operation field.
<2> After fluoroscopy is complete, the sequence proceeds to "DA" automatically.

Perform radiography for at least 4 seconds as instructed in the guide message.
<3> After radiography is complete, the correction values are displayed in the
Correction field. When correction value calculation is complete, the sequence
automatically proceeds to the next FOV or the next radiography mode.
(c) One-shot radiography
in the Operation field.
<2> After fluoroscopy is complete, the sequence proceeds to "One-shot

radiography" automatically. Perform radiography as instructed in the guide
message.
automatically proceeds to the next FOV or the next radiography mode.
481
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(d) DSA
displayed in the Operation field.
<2> After fluoroscopy is complete, the sequence proceeds to "DSA" automatically.

Perform radiography as instructed in the guide message.
automatically proceeds to the next FOV or next radiography mode.
NOTE: 1. If an appropriate correction value could not be obtained, the following message
is displayed in the "Status" field. In this case, perform radiography again.
Repeat the procedures until the correction value calculation is completed
appropriately and the sequence automatically proceeds to the next FOV or the
next radiography mode.
When the correction values satisfy the following criteria, the calculations for each
radiography are considered to have been completed.
 DA: The actual kV should be within ±1 kV.
 One-shot radiography: The actual level should be within 20 of the target
level.
 DSA: The actual level should be within 40 of the target level.
2. The following message may be displayed during DSA.
If the message is displayed, indicating that the set adjustment value is too high
or that the phantom is too thick, check the adjustment value. If an inappropriate
adjustment value has been set, disable the Navigator function and change the
adjustment value in the manual mode.
482
No. 2J308-036EN*I
12. DOSE LIMIT ADJUSTMENT
By performing dose limit adjustment, the upper limit of the entrance dose to the patient is specified.
Dose limit adjustment has already been performed at the time of shipment from the factory.
However, perform checks at the time of installation and perform adjustment if required.
For C-arm units (positioners) used for angiography, perform adjustment so that the entrance dose
at a position 30 cm from the touch sensor surface is less than the specified value when no
phantom is used.
CAUTION: If Dose Limit adjustments are started when there is a mismatch in the Beam Filter
information between the system settings and the adjustment data, the message
"Addition filter information is not correct. Please adjust it again." appears. Make
readjustments for all beam filters.
NOTE: The adjustment support function is provided to facilitate dose limit adjustment. For the
adjustment software startup procedure, refer to subsection 29.12.
12.1 Preparation
Prepare the following items.
 Dosimeter
 Adjustment device for the FPD
483
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Follow the procedures below to perform adjustment work.
(1) Set the dosimeter.
Imaging system
Imaging Lead sheet 2 mm
system
Adjustment device
for the FPD
30 cm
30 cm
Probe Probe
Table Table
X-ray tube X-ray tube
CAUTION: 1. For all SIDs of the measurement conditions, confirm that the specified
distance between the FPD input surface and the dosimeter probe is
ensured. It may not be possible to ensure the specified distance in some
cases depending on the support unit or table used in combination.
Therefore, be sure to set the probe and the shielding object at the
appropriate positions.
2. In the case of the TFP-1216A, be sure to prevent burn-in by placing the

adjustment device for the FPD as shown in the right figure above and avoid
X-ray penetration of the FPD.
However, as this adjustment device has not been provided for the
TFP-800A or TFP-800B, use an appropriate shielding object to prevent
X-rays from entering the FPD. When installing the shielding object, set the
distance between this object and the probe to 20 cm or more.
3. The distance to the probe must be measured from the touch sensor
surface.
NOTE: If necessary, slide the table so that X-ray exposure is not shut off.
(a) Set the SID (Step2) of the measurement conditions.
(b) Set the probe so that it becomes the image center at a position 30 cm from the FPD
surface.
(c) Set the field size to Normal.
(d) Maximize the shutter aperture of the X-ray beam limiting device.
484
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) When the adjustment navigator is not used
(a) Dose measurement under standard conditions
Select Continuous fluoroscopy (90 kV/3 mA, 125 kV/4 mA) or Pulsed fluoroscopy
(90 kV/50 mA/2 msec, 110 kV/50 mA/2 msec) and press the fluoroscopy switch. X-ray
generation starts using the set conditions. Read the dosemeter and enter the value
after X-ray exposure is completed.
Do this for all Beam Filters.
(b) Data registration
Press the [SAVE] button.
(c) Confirmation/Correction
Use the confirmation mode section.
Select [ABC Pulsed Fluoroscopy], check one of the fluoroscopic conditions

(Normal/HLC), and select "30" for Rate to perform dose confirmation.
Overall correction is performed in the Standard Adjustment section. Correction for

each SID is performed in the Fine Adjustment section. After entering the offset, press
the [SAVE] button to register the results of correction.
* The additional filter displayed on the tab differs depending on the type and serial
number of the beam limiting device.
485
No. 2J308-036EN*I
 Confirmation Mode : Dose Limit confirmation mode for fluoroscopy.

Types of fluoroscopy : Continuous fluoroscopy/Pulsed fluoroscopy
Types of Dose : Norma/HLC
Use Pulsed fluoroscopy because continuous fluoroscopy is limited
to 125 kV/4 mA. For thick Beam Filters or the SID is large, the
X-ray conditions are restricted by the tube OLP limit. In this case,
"Dose Limit" is not displayed on the screen. The correction value
is the same value as the value for the dose type that is restricted
for Dose Limit. If no Dose types reach the Dose Limit, enter 100.
 X-ray Tube : Displays the X-ray tube.

[FRONTAL_TUBE 1], [LATERAL_TUBE 1], [FRONTAL_TUBE 2]
 Positioner : Displays the type of positioner.

Displays the SID for SID step information and Dose Limit
adjustment according to the support unit selected.
 GraphView : Expresses Dose Limit curves in graphs.
 Adjustment SID Points: Indicates the SID points to be adjusted (4 points).
Positioner Display of the adjustment SID points

CAS-810A 90 cm 94 cm 102 cm 110 cm
CAS-820B 95 cm 99 cm 106 cm 114 cm
CAS-830A, CAS-830B 90 cm 94 cm 102 cm 110 cm
CAS-880A 90 cm 94 cm 102 cm 110 cm
 Standard Type: Type of Dose Limit standard
HHS: American standard JPN: Japanese standard
Other area should be set to "HHS" Type.
 Unit: Dose unit during adjustment
CAUTION: Dose Limit setting should be set to the regulation of each country. Outside
Japan, type of Dose Limit should be set to HHS.
486
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(d) Checking the dose limit
 Measurement dose: Enter the dose value at the measurement conditions.

(1 R/min = 0.258 mC/kgmin)
 Measurement beam filter: Filter types of F1, F2, and F3 are available.
 Adjustment level (Standard Adjustment): Set the level at which a Dose Limit curve
at Step2 of SID is generated.
Step1, 3, and 4 of SID are estimated based on Step2.
Thereafter, enter the percentage against each basic set value. By changing this
value, the adjustment level can be changed.
Compliant
Fluoroscopy type Specified value Target setting value (95%)
standards
American HHS Normal fluoroscopy 10 R/min 2.45 mC/kgmin (= 82.9 mGy/min = 9.50 R/min)
standard HLC fluoroscopy 20 R/min 4.90 mC/kgmin (= 166 mGy/min = 19.0 R/min)
 [LOAD] button: Reads the adjustment data.

 [SAVE] button: Calculates and registers the adjustment data.
 Measure the dose with the standard SID (step2) for each beam filter (F1, F2, F3)
and each fluoroscopy mode (Normal/HCL).
 If the value does not reach the target setting value or exceeds the specified value,
change the standard adjustment value (%). (If the value is to be increased by 20%,
set 120%.)
By changing this value, change is made to all SIDs at the same rate.
CAUTION: If the dose limit setting value is too small, the image quality may
deteriorate. Be sure to set the target setting value.
Note, however, that the value should not exceed the specified value.
 Change the SID and check the actual dose limit measurement value in the same
manner.
 To fine adjust the SID, change the fine adjustment value (%).
487
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) When the adjustment navigator is used
(a) Outline
The dose limit adjustment with the adjustment navigator includes the reference
exposure (reference curve) calculation, overall correction (standard adjustment), and
correction for each SID (fine adjustment). In this adjustment, these procedures are
designed to be carried out in the order described below.
NOTE: Refer to the Help window for preparation for adjustment and instrument
installation.
488
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) Work procedure
<1> Start up dose limit adjustment. The following dose limit adjustment window
opens.
<2> Reference exposure setting (Reference curve calculation)
Perform fluoroscopy as described in the guide messages displayed in the

Operation field. The current field is highlighted in yellow. Enter the value
measured by the dosimeter in this field. Then click [Next] to proceed to the next
adjustment. Click [SAVE] to save the adjusted value.
<3> Standard adjustment

<4> Fine adjustment

489
No. 2J308-036EN*I
12.3 Dose Limit Adjustment Data Calculation Procedure
(1) An isodose curve for each <Isodose curve>
mAs
beam quality filter is provided in
the PC.
F1
F2 kV
F3
(2) Enter the measured dose value

into the PC and press the
[SAVE] key. A Dose Limit
curve is selected and
correction calculation for each
SID is performed in the PC.
(3) Using the result of the dose

measurement, calculate the
mAs conditions which result in
the target dose (9.5 R/min),
(19.0 R/min).
(4) Determine the Step2 data from <Isodose curve>

mAs
the measurement data at two

points as shown in the dotted
lines and then calculate a Dose
Limit curve for Step1, Step3,
and Step4.
(5) Calculate a Dose Limit curve

Step4
for each pulsed Step3
fluoroscopy/continuous Step2
fluoroscopy and each beam F1 Step1
quality filter.
F2 kV
(6) When the [SAVE] key is
pressed, the Dose Limit curve F3
is calculated and registered.
490
No. 2J308-036EN*I
13. MONITOR/MICROPHONE ADJUSTMENT
13.1 Monitor Adjustment
For monitor adjustment, display an SMPTE test pattern on the monitor and adjust the contrast
and brightness to the optimal positions.
(1) Display of an SMPTE test pattern
Follow the steps below to display the SMPTE test pattern on the monitor.
(a) Prepare the test pattern CD supplied with the system.
(b) Import the SMPTE test pattern using Study Selection mode.
(c) Display the imported image on the monitor.
NOTE: The SMPTE test pattern can be displayed as follows. Importing from the CD is
not required in this method.
(a) Open the Command Line window in Service mode.
(b) Select "LCD checker" in the selection box.
(c) Clicking the mouse displays 3 types of test patterns. Select the SMPTE test
pattern.
(2) Setting procedures
The optimal setting for the monitor depends on the use environment (room brightness, view
distance, etc.) and the application. The setting given below is just for reference.
For monitors of the same type used for the system, the same luminance and brightness
must be set.
(a) For MDL1908A-1A
The unit is set to be used in combination with the RF system (Calibration1) at the time
of shipment; therefore, change the settings so they are appropriate for the
angiography system (Calibration2) with OSD (On Screen Display) control.
<1> Press the control dial to display the OSD main menu.
<2> Turn the control dial to select "Display Mode" and then press the control dial.
<3> Turn the control dial to select "Calibration" and then press the control dial. The
Cal. Selection window opens.
<4> Turn the control dial to select "Calibration2" and then press the control dial. The
setting is changed.
<5> The cursor should be located at "Exit". Press the control dial without moving the
cursor. The display returns to "Display Mode".
cursor. The display returns to the main menu.
<7> Turn the control dial to select "Auto Setup" and then press the control dial. The
Auto Setup window opens.
<8> Turn the control dial to select "Auto Size" and then press the control dial. Auto
Size is executed.
491
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<9> Turn the control dial to select "Auto Contrast" and then press the control dial.
Auto Contrast is executed.
cursor. The display returns to the main menu.
cursor. The OSD display is closed.
(b) For SMD-19102
The unit is set to be used in combination with the RF system (Display Function 1) at
the time of shipment; therefore, change the settings so that they are appropriate for
the angiography system (Display Function 2) with OSD (On Screen Display) control.
<1> Press button 1 on the front of the monitor to display the OSD main menu.
<2> Press [] (button 1) to select "Others" and press [] (button 2).
<3> Press [] (button 1) to select "LUT Settings" and press [] (button 2).
<4> Press [] (button 1) to select "Select display function". Then press [+] (button 2)
or [-] (button 3) to select "2" (User Lmin: 2.16 Lmax: 490.0).
<5> Press [Exit] (button 4) several times to return the display to the OSD main menu.
<6> Press [] (button 1) to select "Auto functions" and then press [] (button 2).
<7> Press [] (button 1) to select "Execute selected auto functions" and then press
[] (button 2).
<8> Press [Exit] (button 4) several times to open the Exit OSD menu.
<9> Press [] (button 1) to select "Accept Changes" and then press [] (button 2) to
close the OSD screen.
(c) For ML19193
The unit is set to be used in combination with an RF system (0.8/500 DICOM) at the
time of shipment; therefore, change the settings so that they are appropriate for the
angiography system (0.6/450 Gamma 2.2) with OSD (On Screen Display) control.
(Use the monitor setting keys on the front of the monitor to change the settings.)
<1> Press [MENU] to display the OSD main menu.
<2> Select "Display Mode" using the [+]/[-] buttons and press [MENU].
<3> Select "Calibration" using the [+]/[-] buttons and press [MENU]. The Cal.
Selection window opens.
<4> Select "0.6/450 Gamma 2.2" using the [+]/[-] buttons and press [MENU]. The
changes are set.
<5> After the settings are changed, "Exit" is automatically selected. Press [MENU]
and return to "Display Mode".
<6> "Exit" is also automatically selected in the Display Mode window. Press [MENU]
and return to the main menu window.
492
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<7> Select "Image Setting" using the [+]/[-] buttons and press [MENU].
<8> Select "Auto Size" using the [+]/[-] buttons and press [MENU]. Auto Size is
executed.
<9> Select "Auto Contrast" using the [+]/[-] buttons and press [MENU]. Auto Contrast
is executed.
<10> After Auto Contrast is executed, "Exit" is automatically selected. Press [MENU]
and return to the main menu window.
<11> In the main menu window, "Exit" is automatically selected. Press [MENU] to
close the OSD.
NOTE: For other settings for the display, refer to the operation manual of the
display.
493
No. 2J308-036EN*I
13.2 Microphone Adjustment
Follow the procedure below to adjust the microphone.
(1) XIDF-MIC802
(a) Start the system.
(b) Adjust the listening volume (volume of the speaker in the control room) and the talk
volume (volume of the microphone in the examination room) approprialely on the main
console.
(2) XIDF-MIC802
(a) Start the system.
(b) Adjust the listening volume (volume of the speaker in the control room) and the talk
volume (volume of the microphone in the examination room) appropriately using the
MIC1 and MASTER knobs on the listen amplifier and the MIC knob on the talk
amplifier.
(MIC1 knob) (MASTER knob)
Listen amplifier (A-1803)
(MIC knob)
Talk amplifier (FA-101)
494
No. 2J308-036EN*I
14. SNRF (SUPER NOISE REDUCTION FILTER) ADJUSTMENT
The SNRF (Super Noise Reduction Filter) adjustment concerns image processing for fluoroscopy,
DA, one-shot radiography, and DSA.
CAUTION: The DPRF (Digital Pattern Recognition Filter) adjustment described in

section 15 must be performed after the SNRF adjustment is complete.
14.1 Preparation
The following are required for the installation adjustment.
 Acrylic phantom : 20 cm
 Copper plate : 4.0 mm (Three 1-mm copper plates and two 0.5-mm copper plates)
An outline of the work procedures is provided below.
14.3 Starting up the system ······· Start up the system.
14.4 Performing examination using the ······· Perform examination using dedicated
adjustment protocol protocol.
14.5 Starting up the SNRF adjustment tool ······· Start up the adjustment tool.
14.6 Acquiring the images used for ······· Adjust the position of the phantom while
adjustment performing fluoroscopy. Acquire images
with image-related information.
Fluoroscopy (15 fps)
DA (15 fps, 1024 matrix)
DSA (6 fps, 1024 matrix)
HSBP (30 pps, 1024 matrix) (option)
Perform the above exposures for 3 seconds
to acquire images (5 seconds for DSA).
14.7 Analyzing images using the tool ······· Analyze the acquired images using the tool.
14.8 Checking the adjustment results ······· Check the adjustment results.
14.9 Rebooting the system ······· Reboot the system.
Operation checks ········Confirm the results of the adjustment again.
495
No. 2J308-036EN*I
14.3 Starting Up the System
Start up the system.
14.4 Performing Examination Using the Adjustment Protocol
Perform examination using the "Image Quality Adj." Protocol installed as standard.
496
No. 2J308-036EN*I
14.5 Starting up the SNRF Adjustment Tool
The procedure for starting up the SNRF adjustment tool is described below.
(1) Display the Exam mode. Double right-click on the area between the patient ID display and
the [Frontal/Lateral] button while holding down the [Ctrl] and [Shift] keys. The adjustment
tool selection window is displayed.
CAUTION: 1. Mode change cannot be performed during fluoroscopy or

radiography. Do not start up the adjustment tool during fluoroscopy
or radiography.
2. The [SET] and [SAVE] buttons on the Image Param. Check window of
the Utility mode are disabled while the adjustment tool is started up.
497
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Select [SNRF Setup] in the adjustment tool selection window. The system enters SNRF
adjustment mode and the SNRF adjustment tool starts up.
498
No. 2J308-036EN*I
14.6 Acquiring the Images Used for Adjustment
The procedure for acquiring images used for adjustment is described below.
CAUTION: 1. The SNRF adjustment tool must be started up while images used for
adjustment are being acquired.
2. Keep in mind that the image used for adjustment differs according to
detectors used in combination.
3. If the procedures for image acquisition (including acquisition of

image-related information) are performed incorrectly, perform the
relevant acquisitions again correctly.
Fluoroscopy
Detector DA (15 fps) DA (60 fps) DSA (6 fps) HSBP (30 pps)
(15 fps)
TFP-800A or IMG L M1 IMG L M1 IMG L M1 (*1) IMG L M1
TFP-800B IMG R M1 IMG R M1 IMG R M1 (*1) IMG R M1
UNI Nml UNI Nml UNI Nml (*1) UNI Nml
TFP-800A or IMG L M1 IMG L M1 IMG L M1 IMG L M1 IMG L M1
TFP-800B IMG R M1 IMG R M1 IMG R M1 IMG R M1 IMG R M1
(with HSBP option)
UNI Nml UNI Nml UNI Nml UNI Nml UNI Nml
TFP-1200A or IMG L M2 IMG L M2 IMG L M2 (*1) IMG L M2
TFP-1200B IMG R M2 IMG R M2 IMG R M2 (*1) IMG R M2
UNI Nml UNI Nml UNI Nml
UNI M2 UNI M2 UNI M2 (*1) UNI M2
TFP-1216A IMG L M2 IMG L M2 IMG L M2
IMG R M2 IMG R M2 IMG R M2
UNI Nml UNI Nml UNI Nml
UNI M2 UNI M2 UNI M2
*1) Not applicable to biplane systems with the TFP-1216A used in combination
NOTE: Acquisition and analysis of the 3-layer acrylic phantom image in the AGC area can be
omitted.
499
No. 2J308-036EN*I
* IMG indicates images of the 3-layer acrylic phantom. UNI indicates uniform images of the
acrylic phantom.
* IMG indicates images in which the X-ray tube voltage is set close to 95 kV (80 kV for DSA).
* L, R indicates the orientation of the 3-layer acrylic phantom. (Either end can be L or R.)
* Nml/M1/M2 indicate the FOV.
 Nml (8" field) and M1 (7" field) for TFP-800A or TFP-800B
 Nml (12" field) and M2 (8" field) for TFP-1200A or TFP-1200B
 Nml (16" field) and M2 (8" field) for TFP-1216A
* In biplane systems, single-plane images are acquired in both the frontal and lateral planes.
Analysis of biplane images is not possible due to error generation. However, in HSBP (30
pps) acquisition (in systems with the HSBP option), biplane image acquisition is performed for
both the frontal and lateral planes for adjustment (since the FPD mode for HSBP is used) and
the frontal and lateral images are respectively selected for adjustment of the frontal and lateral
planes.
NOTE: 1. With consideration given to the acrylic phantom position, X-ray tube voltage, table
height and copper plate thickness, the required time can be shortened by acquiring
the images in the order below.
IMG L (Fluoroscopy  DA 15  DA 60  DSA) 

IMG R (Fluoroscopy  DA 15  DA 60  DSA) 
UNI Nml (Fluoroscopy  DA 15  DA 60  DSA) 
UNI M2 (Fluoroscopy  DA 15  DA 60  DSA)
(If the HSBP option is installed: HSBP30 (IMG L  IMG R  UNI Nml))
2. It is recommended that image names be entered in each View ID during image

acquisition to prevent incorrect image selection.
3. A 3-layer reference line for positioning the phantom will be displayed by selecting
[Line] in [Adj.] that is in the menu area of the reference monitor.
500
No. 2J308-036EN*I
14.6.1 Setting confirmation
(1) Arm position
LAO/RAO = 0°, CRA/CAU = 0°, SID = 100 cm
C-arm head-end position -arm right-side position

(common to all detecotor types) (common to all detector types)
(landscape for TFP-1216A)
(2) Fluoroscopy
Fluoroscopy mode (F-Mode): Middle of "P29"

(F-Pulse Rate: 15 fps, Dose: Normal, Beam Filter: F1, Dose Limit: Normal,
ABC Tube Voltage: High)
(3) DA 15 f/s
Rate: 15 fps, Focus: Middle, Dose: Normal, Matrix Size: 1024, Bits: 12
(4) DA 60 f/s
Rate: 60 fps, Focus: Middle, Dose: Normal, Matrix Size: 512, Bits: 12
(5) DSA 6f/s
Mask (Rate: 6 fps, Add: 1), Contrast (Rate: 6 fps, Add: 1, Frames: 30),
Focus: Auto, AEC Dose: 77.4 nC/kg, Matrix Size: 1024, Bits: 12, Display Mode: LIVE/P
501
No. 2J308-036EN*I
14.6.2 Acquiring images and image-related information
(1) Image 1 of 3-layer acrylic phantom: IMG L
(a) Set the SID to 100 cm.
(b) Confirm the FOV.
(c) Stack the 10-cm, 15-cm and 20-cm acrylic phantoms in piles of three.
(d) Fluoroscopy (15 fps) acquisition
<1> Adjust the thickness (2.5 mm to 3.5 mm) of the copper plate and the height of
the table so that the X-ray tube voltage is in the range of 90 kV to 99 kV (best:
95 kV) while performing fluoroscopy.
* The thickness of the copper plate can be changed if necessary in order to

achieve the target tube voltage.
<2> Perform fluoroscopy for at least 3 seconds to acquire a fluoroscopy image.
<3> Display the Exam mode.
<4> Click the cut selection button to display the acquired image.
<5> Click the [ROI] button and confirm that the displayed ROIs are not placed over
an image boundary, and are placed in the center of each area.
<6> Click the [Confirm] button. The ROIs are set and the ROI displays disappear.
<7> Place a check mark in the checkbox on the image acquisition list. Image-
related information that corresponds to the checkbox in the image acquisition
list can be acquired.
CAUTION: Never perform an X-ray exposure until the procedures have been
performed (Display an acquired image with the Exam mode after
image acquisition.  Click [ROI].  Click [Confirm].  Place a
check mark.). This is because the settings for image-related
information when the last exposure is performed are used,
regardless of whether or not an image is acquired. If the X-ray
exposure has been performed without the procedures above, the
adjustment is performed with unintended related information,
resulting in problems in the adjustment results. If this happens,
acquire the image again.
502
No. 2J308-036EN*I
503
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(e) DA (15 fps) acquisition
<1> Adjust the maximum X-ray pulse width (Max. Pulse W.) and the exposure time
(Time) of the acquisition program "DA 15f/s" so that the X-ray tube voltage is
in the range of 90 kV to 99 kV (optimum value: 95 kV). (The copper plate
thickness and table height are the same as those in the fluoroscopic
acquisition (15 fps) above.)
* If the X-ray tube voltage is not within the target range after adjustment,
change the focus to "Large" and perform readjustment.
* If the X-ray tube voltage is still not within the target range, change the
thickness of the copper plate and perform adjustment again.
<2> Perform X-ray exposure for at least 3 seconds to acquire a DA (15 fps) image.
<3> Perform the procedures in steps <3> to <7> of (d) for the acquired DA (15 fps)
image.
(f) DA (60 fps) acquisition
<1> Adjust the maximum X-ray pulse width (Max. Pulse W.) and the exposure time
(Time) of the acquisition program "DA 60f/s" so that the X-ray tube voltage is
in the range of 90 kV to 99 kV (optimum value: 95 kV). (The copper plate
thickness and table height are the same as those in the fluoroscopic
acquisition (15 fps) above.)
* If the X-ray tube voltage is not within the target range after adjustment,
change the focus to "Large" and perform readjustment.
* If the above conditions are not satisfied, change the thickness of the copper
plate and perform adjustment again.
<2> Perform X-ray exposure for at least 3 seconds to acquire a DA (60 fps) image.
<3> Perform the procedures in steps <3> to <7> of (d) for the acquired DA (60 fps)
image.
(g) DSA (6 fps) acquisition
<1> Replace the copper plate that faces the X-ray tube with a 1.5-mm-thick copper
plate. (The table height is the same as that in the fluoroscopic acquisition
(15 fps) above.)
<2> Perform fluoroscopy with the acquisition program "DSA 6f/s" and perform a
test shot. Confirm that the tube voltage for DSA is 80 kV and that the dose
and the average image level in the ROI do not decrease.
* When the above conditions are not satisfied, change the thickness of the
copper plate.
<3> Perform an X-ray exposure (for at least 5 seconds) to acquire a DSA (6 fps)
image.
<4> Perform the procedures in steps <3> to <7> of (d) for the acquired DSA (6 fps)
image.
* If the conditions are not satisfied, change the thickness of the copper plate
and perform adjustment again.
504
No. 2J308-036EN*I
CAUTION: Using a biplane system, a single-plane image acquired using

the frontal arm and a single-plane image acquired using the
lateral arm must be acquired. A biplane image causes errors
and cannot be analyzed.
HSBP (30 pps) acquisition (in systems with the HSBP option)
requires the table height to be changed in order to adjust the
tube voltage; therefore, HSBP acquisition should be performed
only after all the images (IMG/UNI) have been acquired for
fluoroscopy/DA/DA60/DSA. Refer to (5).
(2) Image 2 of 3-layer acrylic phantom: IMG R
(b) Confirm the FOV.
(c) Stack the 10-cm, 15-cm and 20-cm acrylic phantoms in piles of three. (Set them in
the opposite direction to that in (1).)
Perform the procedures in step (d) of (1).

(Adjust the thickness of the copper plate (2.5 mm to 3.5 mm) and the table height
so that the tube voltage is in the range of 90 kV and 99 kV (target: 95 kV), and
generate X-rays for at least 3 seconds to acquire an image.)

Perform the procedures in step (e) of (1).

(Use the same table height as for fluoroscopic acquisition (15 fps), adjust the
maximum X-ray pulse width (Max. Pulse W.) and the exposure time (Time) so that
the tube voltage is in the range of 90 kV to 99 kV (target: 95 kV), and generate
X-rays for at least 3 seconds. If the X-ray tube voltage is not within the target range
after adjustment, change the focus size and perform readjustment. If the X-ray tube
voltage is still not within the target range, change the thickness of the copper plate
and perform adjustment again.)
505
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Perform the procedures in step (f) of (1).

Perform the procedures in step (g) of (1).

(Use the same table height as for fluoroscopic acquisition (15 fps), set the copper
plate thickness to 1.5 mm, perform test shot, and confirm that the tube voltage for
DSA is 80 kV and that the dose and the average image level in the ROI do not
decrease. Then generate X-rays for at least 5 seconds to acquire an image.
If the above conditions are not satisfied, change the thickness of the copper plate.)
(3) Uniform image 1 of acrylic phantom: UNI Nml
(b) Set the FOV to the normal field.
(c) Set the 15-cm acrylic phantom horizontally.

(Adjust the thickness of copper plate (2.5 mm to 4.0 mm) and the table height so
that the tube voltage is in the range of 90 kV and 99 kV (target: 95 kV), and

506
No. 2J308-036EN*I

(f) DA (60 fps) acquisition (Not applicable to the systems used in combination with
TFP-1200A or TFP-1200B.)


decrease. Then generate X-rays for at least 5 seconds to acquire an image. If the
above conditions are not satisfied, change the thickness of the copper plate.)
(4) Uniform image 2 of acrylic phantom: UNI M2 (Not applicable to systems used in
combination with TFP-800A or TFP-800B.)
(b) Set the FOV to the M2 field.
(c) Set the 15-cm acrylic phantom horizontally.
507
No. 2J308-036EN*I

(Adjust the thickness of copper plate (2.5 mm to 3.5 mm) and the table height so
that the tube voltage is in the range of 90 kV and 99 kV (target: 95 kV), and




decrease. Then generate X-rays for at least 5 seconds to acquire an image. If the
above conditions are not satisfied, change the thickness of the copper plate.)
508
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(5) HSBP (30 pps) acquisition (with the HSBP option)
HSBP (30 pps) acquisition (in systems with the HSBP option) requires the table height to
be changed in order to adjust the tube voltage; therefore, HSBP acquisition should be
performed only after all the images (IMG/UNI) have been acquired for
fluoroscopy/DA/DA60/DSA.
In biplane systems, single-plane images are acquired in both the frontal and lateral
planes. However, in HSBP (30 pps) acquisition, biplane image acquisition is performed
for both the frontal and lateral planes for adjustment (since the FPD mode for HSBP is
used) and the frontal image and lateral images are respectively selected for adjustment
of the frontal and lateral planes. The lateral image acquired for frontal plane adjustment
and the frontal image acquired for lateral plane adjustment are not actually used for
adjustment.
CAUTION: Be sure to set 30.0 for "F-Pulse Rate" and put a check mark in
the "HSBP Fluoroscopy" column in order to acquire HSBP
(30 pps). The "F-Pulse Rate" field and the "HSBP Fluoroscopy"
checkbox are hidden by the SNRF adjustment tool. Use the
mouse to move the tool and change the value of "F-Pulse Rate"
and place a check mark in the "HSBP Fluoroscopy" checkbox, if
necessary.
509
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(a) Image 1 of 3-layer acrylic phantom: IMG L
Refer to fluoroscopic (15 fps) acquisition in (d) of (1).
(b) Image 2 of 3-layer acrylic phantom: IMG R
(c) Uniform image 1 of acrylic phantom: UNI Nml
14.7 Analyzing Images Using the Tool
The procedure for analyzing images using the tool is described below.
(1) Display the Exam mode.
(2) Click the [CALC] button in the adjustment tool while all checkboxes are checked. The
images specified by the checkboxes are analyzed and the parameters are updated to the
system automatically.
After processing is completed, "Success." is displayed in the message display area of the
adjustment tool.
510
No. 2J308-036EN*I
14.8 Checking the Adjustment Results
The procedures for acquiring and comparing images with and without SNRF and confirming that
noise is decreased in images with SNRF are described below.
NOTE: The image processing is set as shown below at startup of the SNRF adjustment tool.
TEST MODE: OFF (button unselected)  SNRF: OFF; other image processing: OFF
TEST MODE: ON (button selected)  SNRF: ON; other image processing: OFF
(1) Set an acrylic phantom horizontally (thickness: 20 cm, no copper plates). Set the SID to
100 cm, the PID to 10 cm, and the FOV to the reference FOV for adjustment.
 TFP-800A or TFP-800B M1: 7" field

 TFP-1200A or TFP-1200B M2: 8" field
 TFP-1216A M2: 8" field
(2) Acquiring an image without SNRF
Perform fluoroscopy for at least 3 seconds while the [TEST MODE] button on the
adjustment tool is unselected. A fluoroscopy image is acquired.
511
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Acquiring an image with SNRF
Click the [TEST MODE] button on the adjustment tool to select it. Then perform fluoroscopy
for at least 3 seconds to acquire a fluoroscopy image.
(4) Perform X-ray exposure for at least 3 seconds with the DA (15 fps) setting to acquire an
image in the same manner as in steps (2) and (3).
(5) Perform X-ray exposure for at least 3 seconds with the DA (60 fps) setting to acquire an
image in the same manner as in steps (2) and (3).
(6) Perform X-ray exposure for at least 5 seconds with the DSA (6 fps) setting to acquire to
acquire an image in the same manner as in steps (2) and (3).
(7) Click the adjustment tool [Close] button. Then double right-click the area where the
adjustment tool is displayed while holding down the [Ctrl] and [Shift] keys. The screen
returns to normal. The adjustment mode returns to normal.
512
No. 2J308-036EN*I
513
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(8) Display the Exam mode and perform ROI measurement for each acquired image. Compare
the value of standard deviation (S.D.) and confirm that the noise is decreased by SNRF.
(Use frames acquired after the image level has stabilized.)
NOTE: Criterion for checking noise reduction
If the S.D. value in the ROI at the center of the image with SNRF is lowered by
60% or more relative to that in the ROI at the center of the image without the
SNRF, adjustment has been performed appropriately. Note, however, that the
noise reduction ratio is dependent on the SNRF image quality parameters of the
Image Param. Check window in Utility mode. The above criterion is applicable
when the check is performed under the default SNRF image quality parameters
set at the time of shipment.
The "Image Quality Adj." protocol is set to "Type H" by default. If the S.D. value
does not reduce to 60% or less when SNRF is applied, perform image acquisition
and obtain the image related information for the technique again, and then
analyze the images using the tool.
(9) Perform fluoroscopy, DA and DSA and confirm that there is no abnormality in the images.
514
No. 2J308-036EN*I
14.9 Rebooting the System
Click the [Finish Study] button in Patient mode to terminate the examination. Click [Shut Down] in
the system mode to shut down the system.
14.10 List of Messages
Message Cause and handling

Please confirm ROIs. ROIs are not set. Click the [ROI] button to display
the ROIs to check their position. Then click the
[Confirm] button to set the ROIs.
Please Confirm Image Type. Image type is not selected. Turn ON the checkbox
for the image type and click the [CALC] button.
This image cannot be used for SNRF The image intended for use in analysis is not
adjustment. selected.
Select an appropriate image. Select an appropriate image using the cut-
selection button, or acquire another image after
confirming the acquisition mode etc.
This image cannot be used for SNRF The image intended for use in analysis is not
adjustment. Select an appropriate selected.
image.Use image acquired with SNRF Select an appropriate image acquired with the
adj.tool SNRF adjustment tool.
This image cannot be used for SNRF The image for the target plane is not selected.
adjustment. Select an appropriate image. Select an appropriate image using the Cut
Check acquisition Plane Selection button, or acquire another image after
confirming the plane.
This image cannot be used for SNRF The image for the set acquisition type is not
adjustment. Select an appropriate image. selected.
Check acquisition type Select an appropriate image using the Cut
Selection button, or acquire another image after
confirming the acquisition type.
This image cannot be used for SNRF The image for the target detector is not selected.
Check kind of FPD Selection button, or acquire another image after
confirming the target FPD.
This image cannot be used for SNRF The image for the target rate is not selected.
Check frame rate Selection button, or acquire another image after
confirming the rate.
This image cannot be used for SNRF The image for the target matrix is not selected.
Check image matrix Selection button, or acquire another image after
confirming the matrix.
This image cannot be used for SNRF The image for the target FOV is not selected.
Check acquisition FOV Selection button, or acquire another image after
confirming the FOV.
This image cannot be used for SNRF The image for the three-step phantom is not
Check Phantom Select an appropriate image using the Cut
confirming the setting status of the acrylic
phantom.
515
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Message Cause and handling

This image cannot be used for SNRF The image for the set acquisition type is not
Check arm type Select an appropriate image using the Cut
confirming the acquisition type.
The number of images is not enough for Insufficient number of images.
SNRF adjustment. Images for which an X-ray exposure has been
Perform fluoroscopy or radiography for performed for at least 3 seconds must be used for
3 seconds or more to acquire the sufficient analysis.
number of images.
SNRF adjustment processing failed. Analysis failed. Acquire an image again after
Select an appropriate image. confirming the acquisition mode etc.
Writing of the data to the file failed. Data writing failed. Check the data file
configuration.
Downloading of the data to the PreProc Analysis results could not be updated to the
board failed. system. Reboot the system and perform the
Restart the system and try it again. procedures again.
Reading of the image information failed. Image information could not be loaded. Reboot
the system and perform the procedures again.
The system could not open the parameter Parameter files could not be loaded. Check the
files. data file configuration.
Calculation and operations are disabled Mode change or analysis cannot be performed
when fluoroscopy or radiography is in during fluoroscopy/radiography. Perform the
progress. procedures again.
Fatal error occurred. A crucial error occurred. Reboot the system and
perform the procedures again.
test mode Test Mode
This System cannot use SNRF adjustment A detector that does not support the adjustment is
Function. installed in the system.
The imager related information does not The image-related information does not include the
include the angle information. It is angle information. Adjustment is possible.
recommended that radiography be However, it is recommended that radiography be
performed again. performed again.
Calculating… Calculation is being performed.
Success. The analysis is complete.
516
No. 2J308-036EN*I
15. DPRF (Digital Pattern Recognition Filter) ADJUSTMENT
DPRF adjustment influences the image processing of fluoroscopy, DA, and one-shot radiography.
CAUTION: The adjustment tool must be started up and images acquired while the
system is in adjustment mode must be used during analysis of DPRF
adjustment. If images acquired while the system is in normal mode are
used, image processing is not performed correctly.
NOTE: When XIDF-SNR801 (SNRF kit) is used in combination, perform the procedures
described in section 14 "SNRF (SUPER NOISE REDUCTION FILTER) ADJUSTMENT"
before performing DPRF adjustment.
15.1 Preparation
Prepare the instruments below for installation.
 Acrylic phantom : 20 cm
 Copper plates : 3.5 mm (three 1-mm plates, one 0.5-mm plate)
 Rotation phantom (spinning wheel)
517
No. 2J308-036EN*I
15.2 Procedures
NOTE: When XIDF-SNR801 (SNRF kit) is used in combination, perform the procedures
described in section 14 "SNRF (SUPER NOISE REDUCTION FILTER) ADJUSTMENT"
before performing DPRF adjustment. If DPRF adjustment is performed before SNRF
adjustment, image processing is not performed correctly.
15.3 Starting up the system ......Start up the system normally.


15.4 Starting the study using ......Start the study using the dedicated protocol.
the adjustment protocol

15.5 Mounting the phantom ......Mount the phantom and check its position during
and checking the position fluoroscopy.

15.6 Acquiring images ......The adjustment tool must be started up and the system
must enter adjustment mode during image acquisition.
Fluoroscopy (15 fps)
Perform fluoroscopy and radiography for 3 seconds or
more to acquire images.

15.7 Analyzing images using the tool ......Analyze the acquired images sequentially using the tool.

15.8 Checking the adjustment results ......Check the adjustment results.

15.9 Rebooting the system ......Reboot the system.

Operational checks ......Check the adjustment results again.
15.3 Starting Up the System
Start up the system normally.
518
No. 2J308-036EN*I
15.4 Starting the Study Using the Adjustment Protocol
Start the study using the "ImageQualityAdj." protocol that is installed in the system as standard.
519
No. 2J308-036EN*I
15.5 Mounting the Phantom and Checking the Position
Mount the phantom in order to acquire images required for adjustment and check the position of
the phantom during fluoroscopy.
NOTE: A 3-layer reference line for positioning the phantom will be displayed by selecting [Line]
in [Adj.], which is in the menu area of the reference monitor.
(1) Setting the acrylic phantom and copper plate
 C-arm: patient head-end, -arm: patient right-side

 Landscape (TFP-1216A)
 SID = 100 cm
 Make the 10 cm, 15 cm, and 20 cm steps using the
acrylic phantoms.
FPD  FOV = M1 (TFP-800A or TFP-800B) or
M2 (TFP-1216A, TFP-1200A or TFP-1200B)
 Fluoroscopy mode = Middle of "P29"
(Pulse rate = 15 fps, dose mode = Normal,
dose filter = F1, High kV mode)
SID 100 cm
 Adjust the thickness of the copper plate (Cu) and

the height of the table so that the X-ray tube voltage
is between 90 kV and 99 kV.
Cu 2.5 mm
or 3.0 mm
Example of an image
520
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Setting the LAO/RAO, CRA/CAU, and SID
LAO = 0°, CRA = 0°, SID = 100 cm
(3) Checking the FOV
FOV: M1 (for TFP-800A or TFP-800B)

FOV: M2 (for TFP-1216A, TFP-1200A, or TFP-1200B)
(4) Checking fluoroscopy mode
Fluoroscopy mode (F-Mode): Middle of "P29"
(Pulse rate: 15 fps, dose mode: Normal, dose filter: F1, ABC kV: High kV mode)
(5) Checking the focus size in DA
Focus size: Middle

(Large is acceptable if the X-ray tube voltage does not fall within the target range.)
15.6 Acquiring Images
This subsection describes the procedure for acquiring images after the adjustment tool is
activated and the system is set to adjustment mode.
(1) Enter Exam mode. Hold down [Ctrl] + [Shift] and double-click the right mouse button in the
area between the patient ID display area and the [Frontal/Lateral] button. This activates the
adjustment tool selection window.
CAUTION: 1. The mode cannot be changed during fluoroscopy/radiography. Do not

activate the adjustment tool during fluoroscopy/radiography.
2. During startup of the adjustment tool, [SET] and [SAVE] in the Image
Param. Check window in Utility mode are disabled.
521
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Select [DPRF Setup] in the adjustment tool selection window. The system enters DPRF
adjustment mode and the DPRF adjustment tool starts up.
(3) Enter acquisition mode. Perform X-ray exposure for 3 seconds or more and acquire images
as shown below. (The adjustment tool must be started up and the system must enter
adjustment mode during image acquisition.)
 Fluoroscopy : 15 fps
 DA : 15 fps, 12 bits, 1024 matrix
 DA : 60 fps, 12 bits, 512 matrix (Not required for the TFP-1216A.)
(a) In fluoroscopy, adjust the thickness of the copper plate (Cu) and the height of the table
so that the X-ray tube voltage is between 90 kV and 99 kV in order to meet the target
X-ray tube voltage.
(b) In DA, adjust the X-ray pulse width so that the X-ray tube voltage is between 90 kV
and 99 kV in order to meet the target X-ray tube voltage. (If the required adjustment
cannot be performed, change the focus size to "Large" and adjust the X-ray pulse
width again.)
522
No. 2J308-036EN*I
CAUTION: In biplane systems, acquire frontal single images and lateral single images.
Biplane images cannot be analyzed due to an error.
15.7 Analyzing Images Using the Tool
This subsection describes the image analysis procedure using the tool.
CAUTION: The adjustment tool must be started up and images acquired while the system is in
adjustment mode must be used. If images acquired while the system is in normal
mode are used, image processing is not performed correctly.
(1) Enter Exam mode.
(2) Click the cut selection button to display the acquired images.
523
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Click the [ROI] button. Confirm that the displayed ROIs are not overlapped on the boundary
between the images and that each ROI is displayed at the center of each area.
524
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(4) Click the [Confirm] button. The ROIs are set and then disappear.
The displayed images are analyzed. The data is created and saved in the system
automatically.
525
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(5) Click the [CALC] button of the adjustment tool. The displayed images are analyzed and the
parameters are saved in the system automatically. When the processing is completed,
"Success" is displayed in the message display area on the adjustment tool.
(6) Perform the procedures described in steps (2) to (5) for all acquired images (three cuts: one
fluoroscopic image and two DA images, six cuts in biplane systems: two fluoroscopic
images and four DA images).
526
No. 2J308-036EN*I
15.8 Checking the Adjustment Results
This subsection describes the procedures for checking processed images in the image
processing board in normal mode.
(1) Press the [Test Mode] button in the adjustment tool so that the button is selected. The
system enters the mode in which the processed images in the image processing board can
be displayed.
527
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Perform fluoroscopy and DA for checking the images.
With the 20-cm acrylic plate + spinning, confirm that up to the third wire is shown in white.
Sections shown in white are detected as signals.
528
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Press the [Close] button in the adjustment tool. In the same area where the adjustment tool
was displayed, double-click the right mouse button while holding down [Ctrl] + [Shift]. The
system exits from Adjustment mode and returns to normal mode.
(4) Perform normal fluoroscopy and DA to confirm that there are no abnormalities in images.
529
No. 2J308-036EN*I
15.9 Rebooting the System
In Patient mode, press the [Finish Study] button to terminate the study. In Shutdown mode,
press [Shut Down] to reboot the system.
15.10 List of Messages
Messages Causes and handling

Please confirm ROIs. ROIs are not set. Press the [ROI] button to display
ROIs to check their positions. Then press the
[Confirm] button to set the ROIs.
This image cannot be used for Eigen filter The image is not an analysis target.
adjustment. Select an appropriate image. Select an appropriate image using the Cut selection
button.
Alternatively, acquire images again while checking
Acquisition mode etc.
This image cannot be used for Eigen filter The image intended for use in analysis is not selected.
adjustment. Select an appropriate image.
Select an appropriate image acquired with the DPRF
Use image acquired with Eigen filter adj. tool adjustment tool.
The number of images is not enough for Eigen The number of acquired images is not sufficient.
filter adjustment. For analysis, use images acquired by generating
Perform fluoroscopy or radiography for 3 seconds X-rays for 3 seconds or more.
or more to acquire the sufficient number of images.
Eigen filter adjustment processing failed. Analysis failed.
Select an appropriate image. Alternatively, acquire images again while checking
Acquisition mode etc.
Writing of the data to the file failed. Data writing failed.
Check the data file configuration.
Downloading of the data to the PreProc board The analysis result cannot be set for the system.
failed. Restart the system and perform the procedures again.
Restart the system and try it again.
Reading of the image information failed. Reading of the image information failed.
Restart the system and perform the procedures again.
The system could not open the parameter files. Reading the parameter files failed.
Check the data file configuration.
Calculation and operations are disabled when Changing the data and analysis are disabled when
fluoroscopy or radiography is in progress. fluoroscopy or radiography is in progress.
Perform operation again.
Calculating... Calculation is in progress.
Success. Analysis terminated.
530
No. 2J308-036EN*I
16. IMAGE ADJUSTMENT CHECK
16.1 Preparation for Image Check
(1) Tools and parts required
 Resolution chart : Funk Type38 and equivalent

 Fluoroscopy/DA phantom : X-Check FLU (PTW)
 DSA phantom : X-check DSA or NORMI 8 (PTW)
 Rotation phantom : Spinning Wheel (N.A.)
 Acrylic phantom : Min 10 cm
 Copper plate : t1 mm  3, t0.5 mm  2
 Dosimeter
NOTE: There are two types of rotation phantom, one with 6 wires (original type) and one
with 5 wires (NEMA type). Either type can be used. However, the thickness of
the wires varies depending on the section, so refer to the reference value during
measurement.
(2) System setting
When the following measurement and test is performed, some items may require the
following system settings.
 Setting and check of the examination protocol

 Setting of the parameter for image processing OFF
 Setting and check of fluoroscopy mode
531
No. 2J308-036EN*I
16.2 Measuring the FPD Relative Conversion Coefficient (RGX)
This system measures the RGX using the following simple method.
For RGX control, the initial value is important and measurement must be performed at the time of
installation.
CAUTION: Because relative changes are checked, the same measurement method
must be used for each measurement. Details of the measurement
conditions must be recorded together with the measurement results.
16.2.1 Measurement method
Measure the entrance dose using the conditions below.
(1) Set SID 100 cm.
(2) Place a 1-mm copper plate on the X-ray beam limiting device.
(3) Attach the dosimeter probe at the center of the FPD in front of the grid.
CAUTION: If an acrylic phantom is used instead of the copper plate, the influence of
the scattered beam is increased. Insert the dosimeter probe between the
FPD input screen and the grid and then perform measurement.
Tabletop Dosimeter
X-ray beam
Tube limiting device
1-mm copper plate FPD
SID 100 cm
RGX measurement
(4) Start the image level measurement tool referring to subsection 16.2.2.
(5) Set the following conditions.
X-ray conditions : 80 kV/50 mA/8 ms

Rate : 15
FOV : N (TFP-800A or TFP-800B), M2 (TFP-1216A, TFP-1200A or
TFP-1200B)
BeamF : F1 (Cu 0.2 mm)
DigGain : 100 (%)
Focus : Focus-S
532
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(6) Perform fluoroscopy and measure the dose in front of grid "D". The cumulative dose for
1 minute (mR) or the dose rate (mR/min) are acceptable. Finally, the one-frame dose is
obtained after conversion.
(7) Remove the dosimeter probe and measure image level "B" in image level measurement
mode.
(8) Confirm that the image level is 1000 to 3500 at the time of initial measurement. If the
image level is outside this range, change the pulse width or tube current and perform
measurement again. The changed conditions must be recorded. Note, however, that
conditions that lead to the Dose limit are not acceptable.
(9) Obtaining the FPD relative conversion coefficient (RGX)
Calculate the RGX using the expression below, based on the values of entrance X-ray
intensity "D" (R/f) and image level "B".
RGX = B/D
NOTE: If the tube voltage and tube current have been adjusted before RGX
measurement, the stability of dose "D" is ensured under the same X-ray
conditions and therefore the measurement of "D" can be omitted under those
conditions.
Note, however, that if the X-ray tube has been changed, Beam Filter type
changes for example, during measurement, the radiation dose may change
even under the same X-ray conditions and therefore the dose should be
measured each time the RGX is to be obtained.
(10) Example of control of the FPD coefficient (RGX)
 Measure the RGX at the time of installation (RGX1). (Be sure to record the conditions
for measurement.)
 Measure the RGX periodically using the same method (RGX2).
 If (RGX2)/(RGX1) = 0.8, it means that GX is reduced by approx. 20% with respect to
that at the time of installation.
533
No. 2J308-036EN*I
16.2.2 Image level measurement tool
When measuring Gx, use the image level tool.
This tool is used to measure the mean image level by manually changing all conditions such
as the X-ray conditions for pulsed fluoroscopy and the optical conditions.
This tool can be started by selecting Image Level Analysis in Adjustment of the Service menu.
(1) Select Focus/Tube plane and manually set the X-ray conditions and optical conditions in
Condition. (The setting values shown in the figure above are examples. Enter the
specified setting values.)
(2) The data entered in Condition is reflected using the [SET] key.
(3) When fluoroscopy is performed, the mean image level is displayed in the Image Level
area.
In this mode, for images to which gray-scale processing is not performed, the mean
image level in the ABC light field is displayed with digital values.
534
No. 2J308-036EN*I
16.3 Image Quality Check
(1) Checking the fluoroscopy image quality
(a) Fluoroscopy setting
Before performing checks, create the examination protocol for service and set [P29]
for setting fluoroscopy mode.
To check the fluoroscopic image quality, perform START STUDY in the examination
protocol for service in Normal fluoroscopy mode.
 Pulse rate : 15 fps pulsed fluoroscopy

 Dose mode : Normal dose
 Beam filter : F1 (Cu 0.2 mm)
 kV mode : High (80 kV)
 Dose limit : 50 mGy/min for Japan, 10 R/min for overseas
 Matrix size : 1024  1024
 Image quality parameter : Standard
(b) Checking the resolution
<1> Attach the resolution chart (Funk type 38 or equivalent) at the center of the
detector in front of the grid. At this time, incline the chart by 45° to prevent it from
interfering with the grid's striped pattern.
<2> Perform fluoroscopy with approx. SID 100 cm, no phantom, and a fluoroscopy
mode of Normal to visually check the fluoroscopy resolution for each field on the
monitor.
<3> Standard for resolution
16.3-1 Resolution standards
Radiography resolution
Fluoroscopy resolution
Mode (DA/DSA)
Min. Typ. Min. Typ.
TFP-800A or 8" 18 20 18 20
TFP-800B 7" 22 25 22 25
6" 25 25 25 25
5" 28 31 28 31
TFP-1216A 12"  16" 12 14 12 14
12" 14 16 14 (18) 16 (20)
8" 20 22 22 25
6" 25 28 25 28
TFP-1200A or 12" 14 16 14 (18) 16 (20)
TFP-1200B 10" 14 16 14 (18) 16 (20)
8" 20 22 22 25
6" 25 28 25 28
The values in parentheses are for 1 fps (low-rate) DSA.
535
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(c) Low contrast resolution, dynamic range
<1> Assemble the X-Check FLU phantom and set it as shown below.
Phantom position and image example
NOTE: If the X-Check FLU phantom is not assembled, it is acceptable to use a

5-cm acrylic phantom + a 1-mm copper plate and place the phantom
plate of the X-Check FLU phantom so that it is in contact with the FPD.
<2> Perform fluoroscopy for data acquisition under the following conditions.
 Select a fluoroscopy mode of Normal for the examination protocol for the same
service as for the resolution check.
 Field size : 8"
 ABC ON : Tube voltage 80 kV (High kV mode)
536
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<3> Measuring the low contrast resolution
 Play back the images acquired through fluoroscopy and perform evaluation
using these dynamic images.
 For the marks for measuring the low contrast resolution on the image acquired
through fluoroscopy (refer to the figure below), record the mark with highest
number that is visible.
Measuring the low contrast resolution and dynamic range
<4> Dynamic range
 In the area indicated by "D" of the figure above, confirm that the white circle
and black circle are visible on the dynamic playback image acquired through
fluoroscopy.
537
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(d) Measuring the dynamic resolution and persistent image
<1> Place the Spinning Wheel phantom as shown in the figure below.
<2> In fluoroscopy mode, set 15 fps/Nor dose/F1/Dose limit of 10 R/min. The X-ray
tube voltage must be 80 kV.
<3> While keeping the rotation switch off, perform fluoroscopy and check the No. of
the minimum diameter of the wire that can be checked on the monitor. (Still)
<4> Set the rotation switch to ON and perform fluoroscopy for image acquisition to
check the No. of the minimum diameter of the wire that can be seen during
rotation (Moving) and measure the number of persistent images of the No. 1 wire
(Echo).
This check can be done easily by playing back the images acquired through
fluoroscopy at a lower speed.
If approx. half the wire is visible, the wire should be counted as 0.5.
538
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<5> Standard values (according to the setting of the beam quality parameter)
Still Moving Echo

Standards for Cardiac 5 (4) or more 3.5 or more 1.5 or less
Low persistent images for Cardiac 5 (4) or more 4 or more 0.5 or less
Standards for Angio 5 (4) or more 2.5 or more 2 or less
NOTE: The reference value given above is for the 6-wire type (original type) rotation
phantom.
Use the value in parentheses for the 5-wire type (NEMA type). (Still is "4 or
more".)
(2) DA image quality check
Perform steps (b) and (c) of the procedures for the fluoroscopy image quality check. The
check of the dynamic resolution and persistent images in (d) is not required.
(a) DA setting
1024  1024 matrix, 15 fps acquisition rate, normal dose, and focus Auto must be
used for DA mode.
(b) Resolution check
<1> Procedure
Measure the resolution for each detector, field size using the same procedures
as for the fluoroscopy image quality check.
If the brightness is too high with no phantom, perform adjustment using an acrylic
phantom with a thickness of 2-3 cm, a copper plate with a thickness of 0.5 mm,
or another appropriate phantom.
<2> Standard value
For the standard value, refer to table 16.3-1.
(c) Low contrast resolution and dynamic range
<1> Procedure
Perform DA for the 8" field only for checking using the same procedures as for
the fluoroscopy image quality check. The tube voltage must be set to approx.
70 kV 2 kV.
<2> Standard value
 Low contrast : 11 or more for 70 kV beam quality

(10 or more for 80 kV beam quality)
 Dynamic range : It must be possible to confirm both circles.
539
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) DSA image quality check
(a) DSA setting
The conditions for checking the DSA image must be set as listed below.
To check unsubtracted images and subtraction images, perform radiography and

switch between the unsubtracted image and the subtracted image in the
postprocessing screen to check the phantom images.
 AEC Dose : 300 R/f (77.4 nC/kg)

 Acquisition rate : 1 f/s (acquisition time of 20 sec)
 Image addition : None (for both mask and live)
 Field size : 7" or 6"
 Target kV : 70 kV
 Focus : Auto
 Beam filter : F3 (Al)
Details Checking the unsubtracted image Checking the subtraction image

Matrix size 1024  1024 1024  1024
Bits 12 12
Display Mode Live/P Sub/N
Brightness 0 2400
Contrast 4095 360
Spatial filter NONE NONE
Spatial filter coefficient 0 0
(b) DSA image quality check
<1> Set the DSA phantom as shown in the figure below.
540
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<2> After mask radiography, air-drive the simulated blood vessel phantom after
5 contrast radiography frames (5 sec) and continue contrast radiography.
<3> After DSA, display the DSA image shown in the figure below and check the
following points.
 Dynamic range
On an unsubtracted image, confirm that halation does not occur in row <1>.
Also confirm that row <7> is not totally black and that row <7> can be
differentiated from row <6>.
 Contrast
On a subtraction image, confirm that line 1 can be clearly viewed up to step

<4>. In addition, for each of lines 1 to 4, determine the highest step (from <1>
to <7>) at which each line can be clearly viewed.
 Artifact
Check for abnormal artifacts on subtraction images.
(c) Checking the resolution
<1> Procedure
By following the same procedure as for fluoroscopic image quality check,

measure the resolution for each field size. Use unsubtracted images for check.
If the brightness is too high when the phantom is not used, perform adjustment in
the acrylic plate thickness range of 2 to 3 cm and a 0.5 mm-thick copper plate etc.
<2> Standard value
Refer to table 16.3-1.
541
No. 2J308-036EN*I
17. DICOM SETTING
Outline of the DICOM setting procedure
Preparation Subsection 17.1
Flow of DICOM setting Subsection 17.2
DICOM setting for the local station Subsection 17.3
DICOM setting for the remote station Subsection 17.4
Operational checks Subsection 17.5
542
No. 2J308-036EN*I
17.1 Preparation for DICOM Setting
17.1.1 Preparation for DICOM setting in the remote devices
To perform the DICOM connection setting procedure smoothly, prepare the required
information items in advance referring to the following list.
To be acquired from the hospital

Common Example
network administrator
IP address for Infinix-i series 172.16.0.10
Subnet mask 255.255.0.0
Gateway IP address 172.16.0.1
DNS server address 172.16.0.2
Wins server address 172.16.0.3
To be acquired from the To be supplied to the

Item
server administrator server administrator
DICOM Print IP address IP address, Port No., and
AE title MAXPDU are used in common.
AE title (For HIS/RIS, Study,
Port No.
Transfer, and Print)
MAX PDU size
Laser imager manufacturer
name/model reference
DICOM Storage IP address
AE title
Port No.
MAX PDU size
Commitment server when DICOM IP address
storage commitment is performed AE title
Port No.
MAX PDU size
DICOM HIS/RIS MWM server IP address
AE title
Port No.
MAX PDU size
MPPS server when DICOM IP address
HIS/RIS MPPS is performed AE title
Port No.
MAX PDU size
Item To be acquired from the system administrator/operation supervisor

Image transfer method Lossless compression (None, JpegLossless)
Resize setting (Original, Original/8, 512/8)
Image processing (LUT, subtraction, zooming, spatial filter)
543
No. 2J308-036EN*I
17.1.2 Preparation for DICOM setting in local devices
To perform the DICOM connection setting procedure smoothly, prepare the required
information items in advance referring to the following list.
Item To be acquired from the system administrator/operation supervisor

Method of storage to CDR Lossless compression (None, JpegLossless)
Image display Viewer writing (performed, not performed)
Method of storage to DVDR Lossless compression (None, JpegLossless)
Image display Viewer writing (performed, not performed)
544
No. 2J308-036EN*I
17.2 DICOM Setting Flowchart
The DICOM-related setting flowchart is shown below. After DICOM setting is completed, check
the DICOM operation referring to subsection 17.5 "DICOM Operational Checks".
<2> <3> DICOM setting for the

<1> TCP/IP protocol setting local station
AE-Title for the local
from the control panel station
IP address Number of simultaneous
Computer name connections
PDU size
Other
Default character
set
<4>
HDD
<5> DICOM setting for the remote

station
Offline device setting
Storage, Q/R setting
WindowsXP Print output setting
LUT setting
MWM, MPPS setting
<6>
<7> The settings are

enabled after the
: Indicates the flow of the system is restarted.
DICOM setting procedures.
<1> Set the TCP/IP protocols from the control panel. (Refer to subsection 17.3.1 "TCP/IP
setting".)
<2> Start the service software.
<3> Set the DICOM conditions for the local station. (Refer to subsection 17.3 "DICOM Setting
for the Local Station".)
<4> Display the other screen of the service software.
<5> Set the DICOM conditions for the remote station. (Refer to subsection 17.4 " DICOM
Setting for the Remote Station".)
<6> Display the other screens of the service software.
<7> Reboot the system.
545
No. 2J308-036EN*I
17.3 DICOM Setting for the Local Station
Outline of DICOM setting procedure
TCP/IP setting Subsection 17.3.1
DICOM communication parameter setting Subsection 17.3.2
17.3.1 TCP/IP setting
To perform network setting for the local station, select Control Panel  System, open the
network ID properties, and set the computer name. Then select the following network and
dial-up connection and select the local area connection properties.
In the EtherNet properties window, select the Internet protocol (TCP/IP), and click the
Properties button. Set the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, DNS server address,
and WINS server address.
CAUTION: Do not change the computer name and work group name. Doing so will disable
system startup.
Do not select "Obtain an IP address automatically (DHCP protocol)". Doing so
will obstruct DICOM communication.
546
No. 2J308-036EN*I
17.3.2 DICOM communication parameter setting
On the Toshiba service UI screen, check the TCP/IP setting, which is essential for DICOM
setting for the local station, and set the AE title, timeout, character set, and off-line devices.
(1) Network Settings
(a) Purpose
To display the system network information.
(b) Display window
(c) Display items
No. Item name Item description

1 Obtain an IP Address Obtains the IP address from DHCP (cannot be selected).
Automatically
2 IP address The current IP address is displayed.
3 Subnet mask Mask value for the network
4 Default gateway Default gateway information
5 Obtain DNS server address Obtains the DNS server address from DHCP (cannot be
automatically selected).
6 Preferred DNS Server IP address of the priority DNS server
7 Alternate DNS Server IP address of the alternate DNS server
547
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Character set
(a) Purpose
 To display and specify the character set to be used for DICOM communication.
(b) Display window
(c) Display items

1 Characterset The list of character sets that can be used for DICOM
communication is displayed. Refer to the correspondence
table for the display information below.
(d) Correspondence table for the display information
Language name Item description

English ISO_IR 6
Japanese ISO 2022 IR 6
Spanish ISO_IR 100
French ISO_IR 100
German ISO_IR 100
Italian ISO_IR 100
Russian ISO_IR 100
548
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) DICOM Management (Local Node)
(a) Local Node
<1> Purpose
 To display and set the AE Title information for DICOM communication.

 To display and set the maximum PDU size and timeout period for DICOM
communication.
 The system must be rebooted after information is changed.
<2> Display window
549
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<3> Display items

1 Storage/Query/Retrieve The AE title used in DICOM Storage communication is set
SCU here.
2 Use the same AE Title for When this box is checked, the specified AE title is used in
all services all DICOM services.
3 MWM SCU The AE title used in DICOM MWM communication is set
here.
4 MPPS SCU The AE title used in DICOM MPPS communication is set
here.
5 Print SCU The AE title used in DICOM Print communication is set
here.
6 Verification (SCU) The AE title used in DICOM Verification communication
(Echo) is set here.
7 Storage SCP The AE title used in DICOM Storage communication,
image reception, and event reception of Storage
Commitment is set here.
8 Port Number The port number used in DICOM Storage communication,
image reception, and event reception of Storage
Commitment is set here.
9 [Detailed Settings] Opens the detailed settings window (refer to step <4>).
10 [Apply] Saves the entered data.
* The changes become effective when the system is
restarted.
11 [Reset] Cancels the entered data and loads and displays the
currently saved data again.
* Note, however, that if [Apply] is clicked and then [Reset]
is clicked, the settings are not returned to the previous
state.
<Definition of terms>
 SCU : Service Class User
Station that uses the DICOM service. In DICOM Storage, for

example, the SCU is the Infinix-i series system that transfers the
images.
 SCP : Service Class Provider
Station that provides the DICOM service. In DICOM Storage, for

example, the SCP is the DICOM server that receives the images.
 Port : Communication No. for TCP/IP used by applications in systems in

which SCP is set. Must be unique in the system.
550
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<4> Detailed Settings

1 Simultaneous DICOM Maximum number of DICOM associations that can be handled at
Associations the same time
2 Maximum PDU Size The maximum PDU size (unit: bytes) can be selected from the
values listed below.
2048/4096/8192/16384/28672 (value set at the time of shipment)
32768/65536/131072/262144/524288/1048576
3 Supported Timeout The timeout period can be set individually for each item.
Accept Reject Timeout  Timeout period for Accept and Reject.
Default: 160 seconds
Association Open  Timeout period for association-open request.
Timeout Default: 60 seconds
Association Close  Timeout period for association-close request.
Accept Message Timeout  Timeout period for connection accept message reception
Default: 60 seconds
Wait for Data Packets  Data packet timeout period
DNM Response Timeout  Timeout period for intrasystem communication
Default: 55 seconds
HRIS Response Timeout  Timeout period for intrasystem communication
Default: 3000000 seconds
Accept network connect  Timeout period for network connection
4 [OK] Saves the entered data and closes the detailed settings window.
* The changes become effective when the system is restarted.
5 [Cancel] Cancels the entered data and closes the detailed settings window.
* The changes become effective when the system is restarted.
551
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<Definition of term>
 PDU: Protocol Data Unit
Unit in which data is transmitted or received. The default is 28 KB.
(b) Offline Devices
<1> Purpose
 To display and set offline devices (CD-RW, DVD, etc.) for writing data using
DICOM communication.
 To define details of an offline device and assign it a logical name.
<2> Display window
<3> Display items

1 Information display area The registered offline devices are listed.
2 [Add] Adds an offline device (refer to step <4>).
3 [Edit] Allows editing of the offline device selected in the list.
4 [Remove] Deletes the offline device selected in the list.
5 [Confirm Settings] Displays the setting information for the offline device
selected in the list.
552
No. 2J308-036EN*I
CAUTION: Do not delete the registered default items "MULTI" and

"ConvertDestination" from the list. If they are deleted, some functions
are disabled.
<4> Adding/editing offline devices

1 Mnemonic Name The logical name is entered here.
2 Device Type The device type can be selected from the following three
options.
 NetworkDrive
 OptionalDevice (normally not selected)
 SuperMultiDrive
3 Drive Letter The selected drive letter is displayed.
4 [Drive Letter Browse] Allows selection of the drive letter from a list.
*Do not assign drives A to F and Z. Be sure to assign
drive G to SuperMultiDrive.
5 [Detailed Information] Allows setting of detailed information. Normally not used.
6 [OK] Saves the entered data and closes the adding/editing
window.
7 [Cancel] Cancels the entered data and closes the adding/editing
window.
553
No. 2J308-036EN*I
17.4 DICOM Setting for the Remote Station
Outline of DICOM setting procedure
Host registration Subsection 17.4.1
DICOM Management (Remote Node) Subsection 17.4.2
DICOM Management (Printers) Subsection 17.4.3
17.4.1 Host registration
(1) In the [Config.] tab tree view, select "DICOM Management"  "Remote Nodes" and click
[Add].
(2) The corresponding window opens. Click [Host Add/Del] at the upper right of the window.
The host registration dialog opens.
(a) Purpose
 To register the target host name and IP address when setting the DICOM service.
(b) Display window
554
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(c) Display items

1 Information display area The registered host information (host name/IP address) is
displayed here.
2 [Ping] Pings the selected host and displays the results. The
results and the corresponding statuses are shown below.
Host found The Host is Alive
Host not found The Host is Not Alive
3 [Add] Opens the window for adding a host name (refer to (d)
below).
4 [Edit] Opens the window for editing the selected host name
(refer to (d) below).
5 [Remove] Deletes the selected host name.
6 [Close] Closes the host registration dialog.
(d) Adding/editing the host name

1 Host Name The host name is entered here.
2 IP Address The IP address is entered here.
3 [Find] Searches for the entered host name within the network. If
the host name is found, the corresponding IP address is
automatically entered.
4 [OK] Saves the entries and closes the dialog.
5 [Remove] Cancels the entries and closes the dialog.
555
No. 2J308-036EN*I
17.4.2 DICOM Management (Remote Nodes)
(1) Remote Nodes
(a) Purpose
 To define the logical name, host, AE title, and port No., target for DICOM
Storage, Storage Commitment, Query, Retrieve, MWM, MPPS.
(b) Display window
(c) Display items

1 Information display area The remote nodes for DICOM communication are listed.
 Mnemonic Name : Logical name of the remote node
 AE Title : AE title
 Host Name : Host name
 Port Number : Port number
For the following items, "Y" is displayed when the item is
supported and "N" is displayed when the item is not
supported.
 ST : Storage
 SC : Storage Commitment
 QU : Query
 RE : Retrieve
 MW : MWM
 MP : MPPS
556
No. 2J308-036EN*I

2 [Ping] Pings the selected remote node and displays the results. The

Remote node found The Host is Alive
Remote node not found The Host is Not Alive
3 [DICOM Echo] Executes DICOM Echo for the selected remote node and
displays the results. The results and the corresponding
statuses are shown below.

DICOM Echo succeeded Echo - Succeeded
No response to DICOM Echo Echo - Failed
Failure due to a reason other Echo - Error: System
than the above
4 [Test] Opens an association for a service set for the selected remote
node and displays the results. Data transmission is not
performed. The results and the corresponding statuses are
shown below.

Association succeeded Service name - Succeeded
Association rejected by Service name - Failed:
remote node Rejected by Remote
Connection with remote Service name - Failed:
node interrupted Aborted by Remote
Host name incorrect Service name - Error:
Host Name (Remote)
Communication with Service name - Error:
remote node could not Network
be established
Failure due to a reason Service name - Error:
other than the above System
5 [Confirm Settings] Opens the window for displaying the setting information for the
selected remote node.
6 [Export] Displays the DICOM setting file export window for export of the
setting file.
7 [Import] Displays the DICOM setting file import window for import of the
setting file.
8 [Add] Displays the dialog for adding new remote nodes (refer to (d)
below).
9 [Edit] Displays the dialog for editing the settings for the selected
remote node (refer to (d) below).
10 [Remove] Deletes the setting information for the selected remote node.
557
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(d) Adding a new remote node and editing the settings

1 Mnemonic Name The logical name of the remote node is set here. The
logical name is used by the user to identify the host in
Directory Mode.
2 AE Title The AE title is set here. An AE title that is already
registered for another remote node cannot be used. Use a
different AE title for the new remote node.
3 Host Name The host name of the registered remote node is selected
here.
4 [Host Add/Del] Opens the dialog for registering the host name.
For details, refer to subsection 17.4.1.
5 Port Number The port number used in communication with the remote
node is set here.
6 [Ping] Pings the selected remote node and displays the results.
The results and the corresponding statuses are shown
below.

Remote node found The Host is Alive
Remote node not found The Host is Not Alive
558
No. 2J308-036EN*I

7 [Test] Opens an association for a service set for the selected remote
node and displays the results. Data transmission is not
performed. The results and the corresponding statuses are
shown below.

Association succeeded Service name - Succeeded
Association rejected by Service name - Failed:
remote node Rejected by Remote
Connection with remote Service name - Failed:
node interrupted Aborted by Remote
Host name incorrect Service name - Error:
Host Name (Remote)
Communication with Service name - Error:
remote node could not Network
be established
Failure due to a reason Service name - Error:
8 [<<< Detailed Info] Displays the detailed settings for the remote node.
Retry Count  The number of retry times for DICOM communication is set
here.
Retry Interval  The retry interval for DICOM communication is set here.
9 Storage Check this box when the DICOM Storage service (image
storage function) is used. For details, refer to (2) in subsection
17.4.2.
10 Storage Commitment Check this box when the DICOM Storage Commitment service
(image storage commitment function) is used. For details,
refer to (3) in subsection 17.4.2.
11 Query Check this box when the DICOM Query service (PACS server
query function) is used. For details, refer to (4) in subsection
17.4.2.
12 Retrieve Check this box when the DICOM Retrieve service (PACS
server image import function) is used. For details, refer to (4)
in subsection 17.4.2.
13 MWM Check this box when the DICOM MWM service (study list
function) is used. For details, refer to (5) in subsection 17.4.2.
14 MPPS Check this box when the DICOM MPPS service (study results
transfer function) is used. For details, refer to (6) in subsection
17.4.2.
15 [OK] Saves the entered data and closes the dialog.
16 [Cancel] Cancels the entered data and closes the dialog.
559
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Storage
(a) Check the "Storage" box in the dialog for adding new remote nodes and editing the
settings. Then click [Detailed].
<1> Purpose
 To set DICOM storage.
<2> Display window
560
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<3> Display items

1 Mnemonic Name The logical name of the remote node that is currently
being edited is displayed here.
2 Compression Type The permitted data compression methods for DICOM
communication can be set here.
Jpeg LossLess  Lossless compression. The compression rate is low.
Jpeg Lossy  Lossy compression. The compression rate is high.
RLE  Lossless compression. The compression rate varies
according to the image to be compressed. The
compression rate is higher for images with simpler color
tones.
3 Max Number of Request The maximum number of requests that can be sent
simultaneously in DICOM communication is set here.
4 Default Send Condition The send condition for the images to be sent via DICOM
communication is set here. The default setting does not
normally need to be changed.
5 Use Default Port Number If a port number that is different from that currently set for
the remote node is to be set, remove the checkmark and
set the desired port number.
6 Check Duplication Check this box to allow more than one image to be sent at
the same time in DICOM communication.
7 Monochrome Conversion Check this box to execute monochrome conversion in
DICOM communication.
8 Image DataType The image data types that can be sent via DICOM
communication are listed here.
9 [>>>Add>>>] If the data type to be used is selected from the image data
types and then this button is clicked, the selected data
type is added to the list of usable image data types on the
right side of the window.
10 [<<<Del<<<] If the data type to be deleted from the list of usable image
data types is selected and then this button is clicked, the
selected data type is deleted from the list.
11 Advenced tab Not used
CAUTION: Set the XIDF-DCM801 option to active in advance.
NOTE: No special settings are required for DICOM communication with AWS-
1000A (Angio Link).
561
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Storage Commitment
(a) Place a checkmark for "Storage Commitment" in the dialog for adding new remote
nodes and editing the settings. Then click [Detailed].
<1> Purpose
 To set Storage Commitment.
<2> Display window
<3> Display items

being edited is displayed.
2 Commitment Mnemonic The remote node (logical name) to be set for Storage
Name Commitment can be selected. If the remote node currently
being edited is set, leave the selection as [Current Node].
3 Timeout Value The response timeout period for Storage Commitment is
set.
562
No. 2J308-036EN*I
CAUTION: Depending on the Storage Commitment server, association may not complete and
image transfer may fail. By changing the Role setting of "Storage Commitment",
this problem may be prevented. Change the setting using the procedure below.
Change procedure:
(1) Start Explorer.
(2) Back up the following files.
 copy c:\syngo\config\merge\merercom.app
c:\syngo\config\merge\merercom.orig.app
(3) Open the following file using Notepad.
 c:\syngo\config\merge\mergecom.app
Search the following section starting with and change the contents as follows.
(4) [MPLUS_RMTDCM_SRV_CMT_0]
<Before change>
[MPLUS_RMTDCM_SRV_CMT_0]
SERVICES_SUPPORTED = 1
SERVICE_1 = STORAGE_COMMITMENT_PUSH
ROLE_1 = BOTH
<After change>
[MPLUS_RMTDCM_SRV_CMT_0]
SERVICES_SUPPORTED = 1
SERVICE_1 = STORAGE_COMMITMENT_PUSH
ROLE_1 = SCU
(5) Save the changes and close Notepad.
(6) Close Explorer.
(7) Restart the i-series system.
To revert to the original settings from the changed settings shown above,
change the settings back to their pre-change state and then restart the
system.
563
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(4) Query/Retrieve
(a) Place a checkmark for "Query" in the dialog for adding new remote nodes and
editing the settings. Then click [Detailed].
<1> Purpose
 To set Query/Retrieve.
<2> Display window
564
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<3> Display items

2 Patient Root The query types are set here. These settings do not
normally need to be changed.
Study Root
3 Query Request Max The maximum number of query requests is set here.
Connection
4 Retrieve Request Max The maximum number of retrieve requests is set here.
Connection
6 Image Data Type The image data types that can be set as retrieve targets in
DICOM communication are listed here.
7 [>>>Add>>>] If the data type to be used is selected from the image data
types and then this button is clicked, the selected data
type is added to the list of usable image data types on the
right side of the window.
8 [<<<Del<<<] If the data type to be deleted from the list of usable image
data types is selected and then this button is clicked, the
selected data type is deleted from the list.
9 [Query Key List] Displays the query key list (refer to <4> below).
565
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<4> Query Key List

1 Data List The usable query keys for each level (Patient, Study,
Series, and Image) are listed here.
2 Query Key List The query keys to be used are listed here.
3 [>>>Add>>>] If data is selected in the Data List and then this button is
clicked, the selected data is moved to the Query Key List.
4 [<<<Del<<<] If data is selected in the Query Key List and then this
button is clicked, the selected data is moved back from the
Query Key List to the Data List.
5 [Import DetaList FIle] Imports data to be added to the Data List.
566
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(5) MWM
(a) Place a checkmark for "MWM" in the dialog for adding new remote nodes and
<1> Purpose
 To set MWM.
<2> Display window
<3> Display items

2 Set as Default Used to set this host as the default host from which the
scheduled study information is obtained. If no other hosts
are set for MWM, the checkmark cannot be removed. If
only one other host is set for MWM, the other host is
automatically set to as the default host when this
checkmark is removed.
3 Max Number of Results The maximum number of results for an MWM query is set
here.
4 Timeout Between Results The MWM query interval is set here.
6 [Work List] Sets the data displayed in the Data List (refer to <4>).
567
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<4> Work list

1 Data List The usable MWM keys are listed here.
2 Work List The MWM keys to be used are listed here.
3 [>>>Add>>>] If data is selected in the Data List and then this button is
clicked, the selected data is moved to the Work List.
4 [<<<Del<<<] If data is selected in the Work List and then this button is
clicked, the selected data is moved back from the Work
List to the Data List.
5 [Import DataList FIle] Imports data to be added to the Data List.
CAUTION: 1. Set the XIDF-DCM801 option to active in advance.
2. More than one Basic Worklist server can be registered. However,

communication with several servers at the same time or switching of the
servers during startup cannot be performed. Therefore, for the node
that is normally used, place a checkmark for "Set as Default".
NOTE: For some RIS servers (such as the Asahi Kasei information system), the AE
title for the local station is required. In this case, select the checkbox for "Get
worklist for local machine" in the [Patient Reg. Presets] area of the Utility tab.
568
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(6) MPPS
(a) Place a checkmark for "MPPS" in the dialog for adding new remote nodes and
<1> Purpose
 To set MPPS.
<2> Display window
<3> Display items

2 Set as Default Used to set to this host as the default host to which the
information for the completed study is to be registered. If
no other hosts are set for MPPS, the checkmark cannot be
removed. If only one other host is set for MPPS, the other
host is automatically set to as the default host when this
checkmark is removed.
3 Designator The Designator information to be registered for MPPS
communication is set here.
4 Version The Version information to be registered for MPPS
communication is set here.
569
No. 2J308-036EN*I
CAUTION: More than one MPPS server can be registered. However, communication
with several servers at the same time or switching of the servers during
startup cannot be performed. Therefore, for the node that is normally used,
place a checkmark for "Set as Default".
NOTE: Some servers can receive the dose exposure history as "Performed Procedure
Step".
Although outputting of the dose exposure history has been set to OFF as the
factory default setting, either of the following two output patterns can be set
according to the setting of the operational internal flag (subsection 29.17).
(a) Transfer the dose exposure history.
<Setting procedures>
Execute "Comlib_PPS_DOSE_EXPOSURE_DETAIL_ON.reg" in the

operational internal flag.
<Information to be transferred>
 Dose Sequence
Tag VR
Exposure Dose Sequence (0040,030E) SQ
>KVp (0018,0060) DS
>X-ray Tube Current (*) (0018,1151) IS
>Exposure Time (0018,1150) IS
Fluoro Dose Sequence (*) (0040,030F) SQ

>KVp (*) (0040,0308) DS
>X-ray Tube Current (*) (0040,030A) IS
>Exposure Time (*) (0040,030C) US
The number of elements included in the sequence corresponds to the

number of times radiography or fluoroscopy is performed.
(i.e. Each time radiography or fluoroscopy is performed, the tube voltage,
tube current, and exposure time are recorded.)
Note that tags with * are private tags that are not regulated by DICOM
standards. Confirm in advance that these tags can be received by the
server.
 Total Number of Exposures (0040, 0301)

The total number of radiographic frames acquired in a study is set.
570
No. 2J308-036EN*I
NOTE: (b) Batch transfer of the dose exposure history is carried out.
<Setting procedures>
Execute "Comlib_PPS_DOSE_EXPOSURE_DETAIL_ON.reg" and

"Comlib_PPS_DOSE_EXPOSURE_SUMMARY_ON.reg" in the operational
internal flag.
<Information to be transferred>
 Dose Sequence
Tag VR
Exposure Dose Sequence (0040,030E) SQ
>KVp (0018,0060) DS
>Exposure Time (0018,1150) IS
Fluoro Dose Sequence (*) (0040,030F) SQ

>KVp (0018,0060) DS
>Exposure Time (0018,1150) US
There is only one element included in the sequence. A value calculated

by the following method is set in the element.
KVp : The maximum tube voltage in the sequence is used.

X-ray Tube Current : The maximum tube current in the sequence is used.
Exposure Time : The cumulative exposure time in the sequence is
used.
Note that tags with * are private tags that are not regulated by DICOM
standards. Confirm in advance that these tags can be received by the
server.
 Total Number of Exposures (0040, 0301)
The total number of radiographic images acquired in the same study is set
(except for fluoroscopic images).
571
No. 2J308-036EN*I
17.4.3 DICOM Management (Printers)
(1) Printers
(a) Purpose
 To perform Printer setting. After setting is performed, detailed setting is required

as described in (2) Detail Information.
(b) Display window
(c) Display items

1 Information display area The currently set printers are listed here.
 Mnemonic Name : Logical name of the printer
 AE Title : AE title
 Host Name : Host name
 Port Number : Port number
2 [Ping] Pings the selected printer and displays the results. The

Printer found The Host is Alive
Printer not found The Host is Not Alive
572
No. 2J308-036EN*I

3 [DICOM Echo] Executes DICOM Echo for the selected printer and displays
the results. The results and the corresponding statuses are
shown below.

DICOM Echo succeeded Echo - Succeeded
No response to DICOM Echo Echo - Failed
Failure due to a reason other Echo - Error: System
than the above
4 [Test] Opens an association for the selected printer and displays the
results. Data transmission is not performed. The results and
the corresponding statuses are shown below.

Association succeeded Print - Succeeded
Association rejected by Print - Failed:
printer Rejected by Remote
Connection with printer Print - Failed:
interrupted Aborted by Remote
Host name incorrect Print - Error:
Host Name (Remote)
Communication with Print - Error:
printer could not be Network
established
Failure due to a reason Print - Error:
5 [Confirm Settings] Opens the window for displaying the setting information for the
selected printer.
6 [LUT Setting] Opens the window for setting the LUT for the printer (refer to
(3) in subsection 17.4.3).
7 [Add] Opens the dialog for adding new printers (refer to (d) below).
8 [Edit] Opens the dialog for editing the settings for the selected printer
(refer to (d) below).
9 [Remove] Deletes the setting information for the selected printer.
573
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(d) Adding a new printer and editing the settings

1 Mnemonic Name The logical name of the printer is set here.
2 AE Title The AE title is set here. An AE title that is already registered
for another printer cannot be used. Use a different AE title for
the new printer.
3 Host Name The host name of the printer is selected here.
4 [Host Add/Del] Opens the dialog for registering the host name. For details,
refer to subsection 17.4.1.
5 Port Number The port number used in communication with the printer is set
here.
6 [Ping] Pings the selected printer and displays the results. The results
and the corresponding statuses are shown below.

Printer found The Host is Alive
Printer not found The Host is Not Alive
7 [Test] Opens an association and displays the results. Data

transmission is not performed. The results and the
corresponding statuses are shown below.

Association succeeded Print - Succeeded
Association rejected by Print - Failed: Rejected by
printer Remote
Connection with printer Print - Failed: Aborted by
interrupted Remote
Host name incorrect Print - Error: Host Name
(Remote)
Communication with Print - Error: Network
printer could not be
established
Failure due to a reason Print - Error: System
other than the above
574
No. 2J308-036EN*I

8 [Detail Information] Opens the detailed setting window for the printer. Refer to (2)
in subsection 17.4.3.
(2) Dertail Information
(a) Purpose
 To register the hardcopy (HC) device and to associate a DICOM node with the
imager product model.
(b) Display window
575
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(c) Display items

1 HC Device Name The logical name of the printer whose detailed settings are
currently being edited is displayed here.
2 Device Type Printer type. DICOM Printer, SPCI Printer, or simulator
can be selected. Normally DICOM Printer is selected.
3 Class Printer name. Printers for which operational checks have
been performed are displayed in the pulldown menu. If
the printer name cannot be found in the list, select a
different printer name of the same manufacturer instead.
The printer names in the list consist of the manufacturer
name and the model name. Note, however, that some
printers may not be listed in order of manufacturer name.
Check the list to the end and select an appropriate printer
name.
4 Location Information concerning the location of the printer can be
entered here.
5 Comment A comment can be entered here.
6 Medium Type Available selections: Blue film, Clear film, Paper
7 Film Destination Available selections: Magazine, Processor
8 Color Appearance Available selections: Grayscale 8 bits, Grayscale 12 bits
9 Background Available selections: Black, White
10 Transformation Available selections: Replicate, Bilinear, Cubic,
no magnification
11 Hold Print Job The number of filming jobs to be held is specified here
(max: 50).
12 Min Density The minimum density is specified here (0 to 20).
13 Pixel Size The pixel size is specified here (cannot be set to 0).
14 FIlm Sheet Formats A film sheet name can be defined for any combination of
Portrait the number of pixels (horizontal  vertical). Film sheet
Film Sheet Formats names are preset in the "Film Sheet Format" list box.
Landscape Changes are normally not required. If "define new" is
selected in this field, enter a name in the "Film Sheet
Format" field and define the number of pixels in the
"Number of Pixel" fields ("0" cannot be set). Then click
[Add] to register the entered data.
576
No. 2J308-036EN*I
CAUTION: 1. If an HC device is not registered on the Detail Information screen, images

cannot be output to the imager (editing on the Printing tab is possible). If
the HC device name is registered twice, the system may not start up.
Never register the same HC device name.
2. In the DICOM Print process, if an error (Medium Type error, Max Density
error, Min Density error, Film Size ID error, Row/Column size error,
Resource Limitation error, etc.) is returned from the remote station in the
period between BASIC_FILM_SESSION and
BASIC_GRAYSCALE_IMAGE_BOX, the DFP-8000A cannot process the
subsequent print jobs and film output is disabled.
To prevent this problem, request the system operation supervisor, server
administrator, or the person in charge of installation of the remote station
to change the setting of the remote station so that it does not return errors
during this period. If this setting change is not made in the remote station
and an error occurs during this period, the DFP-8000A software must be
reset or the system must be rebooted.
NOTE: DICOM Print is not supported for imagers that can print data onto paper
(Codonics, Canon, etc.).
577
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) LUT Setting
(a) Purpose
 To set the lookup table file to be used for the printer

(b) Display window
(c) Display items

1 LUT Type LUT type. Fixed to "Correction LUT".
2 Image Type Image type. Fixed to "XAImage".
3 LUT LUT type. Available selections: nothing selected, Linear,
SiemensMonitor, xa
4 Max Density The maximum density is set in this column (2.00 to 3.00).
5 Overall Maximum Density The overall maximum density is set here (3.00 to 4.00).
6 Interpolation for printing Interpolation method.
Available selections: Replicate, Bilinear, Cubic
7 Smoothing Type Smoothing type (can be set when the interpolation method
is "Cubic")
Available selections: 0, 2, 3, 4
8 [Import] Opens the LUT Import window. Refer to (4) in subsection
17.4.3.
<Definition of term> LUT: Look Up Table
578
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(4) LUT Import
(a) Purpose
 To load or delete a LUT file

(b) Display window
(c) Display items

1 Import LUT LUT data can be loaded to the system from an external
device.
Entry field  The local directory of the device in which the LUT data is
stored is entered here.
[...]  Opens the dialog for selecting the local directory.
Source  LUT data to be loaded
Destination  Information on the storage destination of the LUT data
LUT Type  LUT type
Directory  Storage location of the LUT data loaded from the
external device.
[Copy]  Executes loading of the LUT data.
2 Remove LUT LUT data stored in the system can be deleted.
LUT Type  LUT type
Directory  Storage location of the LUT data in the system
Selection field  LUT data that can be deleted is listed here.
[Remove]  Executes deletion of the LUT data selected in the
selection field.
3 [OK] Closes the LUT File Import window.
579
No. 2J308-036EN*I
17.4.4 DICOM (MWM Presets)
(1) Purpose
 Whether editing is enabled or disabled for the user is set for each item of the scheduled
study information obtained with Basic Worklist and displayed on the Patient tab.
 After the information is edited, the system must be restarted.
(2) Display window
(3) Display items

1 Scheduled study information Editing is possible for the checked items.
2 [Apply] Saves the changes.
3 [Reset] Returns the settings to their original state.
580
No. 2J308-036EN*I
17.4.5 3D (AE Title setting)
(1) Purpose
 To set the AE title of the workstation (WS) from which a snapshot image with clinical
angle information is to be transferred via DICOM communication to this system.
(2) Display window
(3) Display items

1 3DWS AETitle The AE title of the WS from which a snapshot image with
clinical angle information is to be transferred is set here.
2 [Apply] Saves the changes.
3 [Reset] Returns the settings to their original state.
CAUTION: The above setting should be performed when the optional XIDF-
3DI801/XIDF-100A is enabled.
After setting the 3DWS AETitle, register the host name and TCP-IP address
of the 3D Workstation referring to subsection 17.4.1 "Host registration".
581
No. 2J308-036EN*I
17.5 DICOM Operational Checks
The DICOM operational check procedures are described separately for the common items and
for each service.
17.5.1 Common items
(1) It is strongly recommended that the following checks be performed in the presence of the
vendor of the remote station. This enables confirmation of smooth information exchange
between the local station and the remote station under the customer environment, test
data preparation, deletion of image data after operational checks, etc. It also enables a
quick response in case of trouble.
(2) Checking the DICOM connection environment again
(a) Check the IP address, port No., and AE title of the remote host again. Also check
again that the transfer syntax that can be accepted by the remote server is correct.
(b) Check again that the class of the laser imager of the remote host is correct.
(c) If the image server of the connected destination supports the query and retrieve
service, reconfirm that a value approximately equal to the PDU size of the image
server is selected in addition to (a). This is required to balance the performance of
image transfer/reception between the DFP-8000A and the image server.
(3) Checking the communication line at TCP/IP level
(a) Checking the TCP/IP setting for the local station
Select "Network Settings" in the [Config.] tab and confirm that the IP address and
subnet mask for this system are set correctly. Especially when the remote server is
not connected to the same network as this system but connected via a gateway,
add the gateway address to the network configuration of both local and remote
stations and confirm that the correct IP address is set for "gateways".
(b) Checking the TCP/IP setting for the remote station
Select "DICOM Management"  "Remote Node" in the [Config.] tab and click [Add].
The corresponding window opens. Click [Host Add/Del] at the upper right of the
window and confirm that the IP address is correct in the opened window. Then,
press the [Ping] button to check whether the remote host is operating using TCP/IP.
(4) Checking the response to DICOM ECHO
(a) Checking the response of the remote server to DICOM ECHO
Select "DICOM Management"  "Remote Nodes" in the [Config.] tab, select the
registered Mnemonic Name and confirm that the AE Title associated with the logical
name is selected. Then, press the [DICOM Echo] button and confirm that the
DICOM services work correctly in the remote server. Some servers do not respond
to DICOM ECHO even though the DICOM services are working correctly in those
servers.
(b) Checking the response of the local station to DICOM ECHO
Request the person in charge of the remote station to send a DICOM ECHO to this
system and confirm that the system responds to it correctly.
582
No. 2J308-036EN*I
17.5.2 DICOM Storage/Commitment/Query & Retrieve (XIDF-DCM801 option)
(1) Checking the transfer syntax
This system supports the following three transfer syntaxes. Note that for Jpeg Lossless,
only the UID in item (c) below, which is the most commonly used UID for compression in
the DICOM standards, is supported.
(a) Non compression (ImplicitLittleEndian): 1.2.840.10008.1.2
(b) Non compression (ExplicitLittleEndian): 1.2.840.10008.1.2.1
(c) Lossless compression (JpegLossless): 1.2.840.10008.1.2.4.70
(2) Checking the image transfer function
(a) Transfer of still images
<1> Import the SMPTE pattern, select an image on the [Directory] tab and transfer
it. Prior to image transfer, deselect all the checkboxes for the image transfer
conditions that are set using the Node/Conversion dialog.
<2> Display the [Network] tab of the Job Control dialog, and confirm that the status
changes from "Queued"  "Transferring"  "Completed".
<3> If the status does not change to "Completed", try the following measures.
 If the status is "Queued" or "Transferring", the image may be being played

back in the examination room or control room. Stop playback of the image.
 If the status is "Failed", delete the transfer job and try to transfer the image
again, or select another image and transfer it.
 Confirm that the setting of this option has been completed.
 Confirm that the check of the common items has been completed.
(b) Transfer of dynamic images
<1> Acquire a dynamic image or import one from the CD-R or DVD, select a frame
of the image on the [Directory] tab, and transfer it. Prior to image transfer,
deselect all the checkboxes for the image transfer conditions that are set using
the Node/Conversion dialog.
changes from "Queued"  "Transferring"  "Completed".
<3> If the status does not change to "Completed", try the following measures.
 If the status is "Queued" or "Transferring", the image may be being played

back in the examination room or control room. Stop playback of the image.
 If the status is "Failed", delete the transfer job and try to transfer the image
again, or select another image and transfer it.
583
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Checking image transfer and commitment
Commitment is performed in the background for each image and the result is not
displayed. The check procedure is the same as described in (2) "Checking the image
transfer function".
(4) Checking Query & Retrieve
The Query function acquires the list of patients, studies, or images from the image server
of the remote station. It does not import the image data. To import the image data, make
sure that the Retrieve function is enabled.
(a) Checking the Query function
<1> Set the filter for the Q/R server to OFF.
<2> Select the Q/R server on the [Directory] tab. After a while, the search results
are displayed sequentially in the Patient list area. Next, select a patient. The
search results are displayed sequentially in the Study list area. Then, select a
study. The search results are displayed sequentially in the Image list area.
<3> If the search results are not displayed, check the following.

 Confirm that images used for the test exist correctly in the image server.
(b) Checking the Retrieve function
<1> Set the filter for the Q/R server to OFF.
<2> Select the Q/R server on the [Directory] tab. After a while, the search results
are displayed sequentially in the Patient list area. Next, select a patient. The
search results are displayed sequentially in the Study list area. Then, select a
study. The search results are displayed sequentially in the Image list area.
<3> Select an arbitrary patient, study, or image, and then click "Import" in the
context menu displayed by right-clicking the mouse. Import from the image
server is started.
changes from "Retrieving" to "Completed" and from "Receiving" to "Received".
<5> Confirm that the imported image can be played back on the monitor in the
control room.
<6> If the import process does not complete, try the following measure.
 If the status is "Failed", delete the import job and try to import the image
again, or select another image and import it.
584
No. 2J308-036EN*I
If the above check process does not complete and the status stays in "Failed" or
"Transferring", the TCP/IP setting or DICOM setting may be inappropriate. Check the
settings and status of the remote station. In addition, send the following files, the network
configuration, and the DICOM settings to your service representative. The network
configuration must include a full list of the devices that communicate with the DFP-8000A.
 c:\syngo\config\merge\mergecom.app
 c:\syngo\log\an_container.log
 c:\syngo\log\stu_container.log
 c:\syngo\log\qr_container.log
 c:\syngo\log\TxsAn_container.log
 c:\syngo\log\TxsCrc_container.log
 c:\syngo\log\TxsQr_container.log
 c:\syngo\log\merge_stu.log
 c:\winnt\system32\drivers\etc\hosts
 c:\winnt\system32\drivers\etc\lmhosts
17.5.3 DICOM MWM/MPPS (XIDF-DCM802 option)
(1) Checking the study information acquisition function (MWM)
(a) Press the [Get Worklist] button on the [Patient] tab.
<1> With the standard setting, the system requests the RIS server to search the
schedule for the day and the previous two days.
<2> Within several seconds, the Scheduled Study list is displayed.
(b) If the Scheduled Study list is not displayed and an error dialog is displayed, confirm
the following.
<1> Confirm that the setting of this option has been completed.
If the setting is complete, the characters "Modality:XA" or "System:ALL" are

displayed near the [Go Worklist] button on the [Patient] tab.
<2> Confirm that the check of the common items has been completed.
<3> Confirm that the studies used for test exist correctly in the RIS server.
585
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Checking the performed procedure step return function (MPPS)
(a) Select a scheduled study or start examination manually.
<1> The study start information is transferred to the RIS server.
<2> If an error dialog is displayed, check the following.
<a> Confirm that the setting of this option has been completed.
* If the setting is complete, the [MPPS] button is displayed near the

[Delete] button on the [Patient] tab.
 Confirm that the check of the common items has been completed.
(b) When the study is completed, the study result input screen is displayed (with the
standard setting). Press the [Completed] button on the screen.
<1> The study end information is transferred to the RIS server.
<2> If an error dialog is displayed, confirm the following.
<a> Confirm that the setting of this option has been completed.
If the above check process does not complete and an error dialog is displayed, the
TCP/IP setting or DICOM setting may be inappropriate. Check the settings and status of
the remote station. In addition, send the following files, the network configuration, and
the DICOM settings to your service representative. The network configuration must
include a full list of the devices that communicate with the DFP-8000A.
 c:\syngo\log\pr_container.log
 c:\syngo\log\hisris_container.log
 c:\syngo\log\TxsPr_container.log
 c:\syngo\log\merge_HRI.log
 c:\syngo\log\TxsHRI_container.log
 c:\syngo\log\merge_TxsHRI.log
586
No. 2J308-036EN*I
17.5.4 DICOM Print
(1) Checking the settings in Utility mode
(a) Make the HC registered in "DICOM Management (Printers)" in subsection 17.4.3

effective in the Utility tab.
<1> Select "Printing Presets" in the [Utility] tab. Then press [Printer Setting] and
select the required imager from HC options at the left section of the screen,
and move the selected imager to the right section using [Add ->]. For an
imager that is used in a normal fashion, press the [Default] button. Press the
[OK] button.
<2> Close Utility mode and restart the system. The printer icon should then be
displayed on the Common information display area.
(2) Perform operational checks in the [Printing] tab.
(a) Display an image on the [Printing] tab and press the [Print] button.
<1> Display the [Printing] tab of the Job Control dialog. Confirm that the status for
the corresponding patient is "Printing" and that the "Printing" message is
removed from the list after some time. Then, press the [Prev] button and
confirm that the status is "Printed".
<2> If "Aborted" is displayed in the status field for the patient, confirm the following.
<a> Confirm that the type of the film selected corresponds to the type of the
film actually loaded in the imager.
<c> Confirm that the imager is in the ready status.
If the above check process does not complete and film is not output or the status stays in
"Aborted", the TCP/IP setting or DICOM setting may be inappropriate. Check the
settings and status of the remote station. Reset the software and perform the checks
again. In addition, send the following files, the network configuration, and the DICOM
settings to your service representative. The network configuration must include a full list
of the devices that communicate with the DFP-8000A.
 c:\syngo\log\ControlRoom_ui.log
 c:\syngo\log\ExamRoom_ui.log
 c:\syngo\log\HARDCOPY_container.log (The actual hardcopy name is displayed in
place of "HARDCOPY".)
 c:\syngo\log\TxsFl_container.log
 c:\syngo\log\TxsFl_container.log
 c:\syngo\log\merge_hc.log
587 *
No. 2J308-036EN*I
PERFORMANCE CHECK MANUAL

FOR
INTERVENTIONAL ANGIOGRAPHY SYSTEMS
Infinix-i INFX-8000F, INFX-8000C,
INFX-8000V, INFX-8000H
Infinix series
(2J308-036EN*I)
2/2
 TOSHIBA MEDICAL SYSTEMS CORPORATION 2010-2012

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
No. 2J308-036EN*I
IMPORTANT!
1. No part of this manual may be copied or reprinted, in whole or in part,

without prior written permission.
2. The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice
and without legal obligation.
3. The contents of this manual are correct to the best of our knowledge.
Please inform us of any ambiguous or erroneous descriptions, missing
information, etc.
No. 2J308-036EN*I
CONTENTS - 2/2
Page
18. IMAGER SETTING ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 599
18.1 Imager Setup Principle ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 599
18.2 Setting Procedure ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 600
18.3 Checking the Filmed Image --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 602
19. ADJUSTMENT OF THE AREA DOSE METER (OPTION) --------------------------------------------------- 603
19.1 Entering the Chamber Correction Data ------------------------------------------------------------------- 603
19.2 Calibration of the Area Dose Meter ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 604
19.3 Dosimeter Calibration Software Operating Procedure ------------------------------------------------ 606
20. SETTING OF THE QCA, LVA, LVA-BP, AND QVA FUNCTIONS (OPTIONS)
(V4.22 OR LATER) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 609
20.1 Setting of the QCA/LVA (+LVA BP+QVA) Functions (Options) ------------------------------------ 609
20.1.1 Items to be prepared ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 609
20.1.2 Installation procedures --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 610
20.1.4 Uninstallation procedure ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 624
20.2 Setting of the QCA/QVA Functions (Options) ----------------------------------------------------------- 625
20.2.1 Preparation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 625
20.2.2 Installation procedure ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 625
20.2.4 Uninstall procedure ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 638
21. SETTING OF THE CV-3D FUNCTION (OPTION)-------------------------------------------------------------- 639
21.1 Items to Be Prepared ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 639
21.2 Installation Procedures --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 639
21.3 Uninstallation Procedures ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 678
21.4 PC Requirements ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 683
21.5 Reinstalling the Software ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 684
21.5.1 Installing the basic environment using the recovery CD --------------------------------- 685
22. ADJUSTMENT FOR 3D-DSA/DA (OPTION) -------------------------------------------------------------------- 689
590
No. 2J308-036EN*I
22.1.1 Preparation for work ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 689
22.1.3 Data transfer ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 709
22.2 Checking the 3D Image Quality ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 711
22.3 Enhancement of Bone Density Values in 3D-DA ------------------------------------------------------ 714
22.3.1 Changing the acquisition conditions ---------------------------------------------------------- 714
22.3.2 Changing the reconstruction conditions ----------------------------------------------------- 714
23. 3D ROADMAP CALIBRATION (OPTION) (V4.22 OR LATER) --------------------------------------------- 715
23.1.1 Preparation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 715
23.1.3 Data transfer ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 721
23.2 Checking the 3D Roadmap Image Quality --------------------------------------------------------------- 722
24. SETTING OF OTHER OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS --------------------------------------------------------------- 725
24.1 Additional Monitor ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 725
24.1.1 Setting the additional monitor ------------------------------------------------------------------ 725
24.2 Setting the XIDF-ESD801 and Color LCD Monitor (CDL2013A-1A) ------------------------------ 728
24.2.1 Setting the XIDF-ESD801 ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 728
24.2.2 Adjusting the color LCD monitor (CDL2013A-1A) ----------------------------------------- 729
24.2.3 Adjustment of the VSW-ESD (XIDF-ESD801) --------------------------------------------- 730
24.2.4 Operation check ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 731
24.2.5 Display property setting for the devices to be connected to the XIDF-ESD801 --- 732
25. SAFETY FUNCTION OPERATION CHECK --------------------------------------------------------------------- 737
25.1 Preparation------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 737
25.2 Checking the Touch Sensors ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 737
591
No. 2J308-036EN*I
25.2.1 CAS-810A ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 737
25.2.2 CAS-820B ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 738
25.2.3 CAS-830A, CAS-830B --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 738
25.2.4 CAS-880A ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 739
25.3 Checking Backup Fluoroscopy ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 739
26. SYSTEM OPERATION CHECK ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 740
26.1 Checking Operation of the Fluoroscopy Function ------------------------------------------------------ 740
26.1.1 Operation of the fluoroscopy switch ---------------------------------------------------------- 740
26.1.2 Operation related to change in fluoroscopy conditions ---------------------------------- 740
26.1.4 Checking the fluoroscopy X-ray precision --------------------------------------------------- 741
26.2 Checking Operation of the DA Function ------------------------------------------------------------------ 742
26.2.2 Checking operation of the F-ACT function -------------------------------------------------- 742
26.3 Checking Operation of the DSA Function ---------------------------------------------------------------- 743
26.4 Checking Operation of the One-Shot Radiography Function --------------------------------------- 744
26.4.2 Checking F-ACT movement -------------------------------------------------------------------- 744
26.5 Checking Operation of the Stepping DSA (S-DSA) Function (Option) --------------------------- 745
26.6 Checking Operation of the Rotational DSA Function (Option) -------------------------------------- 747
26.7 Checking Operation of the 3D-DSA Function (Option) ----------------------------------------------- 749
592
No. 2J308-036EN*I
26.8 Checking Operation of the Rotational DA (Automatic Rotation) Function (Option)------------ 750
26.9 Checking Operation of the 3D-DA Function (Option) ------------------------------------------------- 751
26.10 Checking Operation of the LCI Function (Option) ------------------------------------------------------ 752
26.10.2 Checking interlocks with peripheral devices ------------------------------------------------ 752
26.11 Checking Operation of the Additional Console --------------------------------------------------------- 752
27. NETWORK OPERATION CHECK ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 753
28. DATA BACKUP ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 753
29. APPENDIX 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 754
29.1 DFP-8000A Setting -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 754
29.1.1 RAID -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 754
29.1.2 Database output/conversion -------------------------------------------------------------------- 773
29.2 XTP-8100G Setting -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 777
29.2.1 System transformer cabinet --------------------------------------------------------------------- 777
29.2.2 Power cabinet -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 779
29.2.3 External appearances of units ------------------------------------------------------------------ 782
29.2.4 PWB details ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 785
29.2.5 Test methods --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 807
29.3 CAS-810A Setting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 812
29.3.1 PWB setting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 812
29.4.1 PWB setting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 815
29.5 CAS-880A Setting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 824
29.5.1 PWB setting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 824
29.6 CAS-820B Setting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 830
29.6.1 PWB setting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 830
593
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.7 BLA-800C Setting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 835
29.8 BLA-800A Setting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 835
29.9 BLA-900A Setting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 836
29.10 CAT-850B Setting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 837
29.11 CAT-870B Setting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 837
29.12 Adjustment Software Starting Procedures --------------------------------------------------------------- 837
29.12.1 X-ray adjustment support function (Adjustment navigator function) ------------------ 839
29.13 Adjustment Procedure If Misregistration Became Large During Rotational DSA -------------- 845
29.14 Procedures for Registering the Auto-Positioning Target Positions -------------------------------- 862
29.15 Examination Room Display Setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 864
29.15.1 Examination room monitor physical layout setting ---------------------------------------- 864
29.15.2 Display style setting for examination room monitor layout and
L-side angle (biplane systems) ----------------------------------------------------------------- 869
29.15.3 Examination room monitor-system information display settings ----------------------- 872
29.15.4 Examination room menu setting --------------------------------------------------------------- 879
29.16 Setting Procedures When Several 3D-Angio Systems Are Used ---------------------------------- 882
29.17 Operational Internal Flag Setting Procedures ----------------------------------------------------------- 887
29.18 Corrective Actions When the DFP-8000A Cannot Be Started Up --------------------------------- 903
29.18.1 Outline of the DFP-8000A software ----------------------------------------------------------- 903
29.18.2 Proactive measures against system corruption -------------------------------------------- 906
29.18.3 Actions to be taken after a system crash has occurred ---------------------------------- 911
29.18.4 Mirroring unit setting confirmation ------------------------------------------------------------- 940
29.19 Check of the Memory, Video Board, and Hard Disk Settings --------------------------------------- 942
29.20 Setting the Image Quality Parameters -------------------------------------------------------------------- 945
29.20.1 Setting procedure and setting mechanism -------------------------------------------------- 945
29.20.2 Fluoroscopic image quality parameters ------------------------------------------------------ 948
29.20.3 SNRF image quality parameters --------------------------------------------------------------- 966
29.21 Setting the Date Display Format --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 969
29.22 Setting the Automatic Label Name Issuance Rule for Media --------------------------------------- 970
29.23 Setting the Frame-Advance Playback Condition Using the Jog ------------------------------------ 971
594
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.24 Fluo. PulseRate Select Processing ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 972
29.25 Changing the LIH Font ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 975
29.26 Correction for Virtual Collimation --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 977
29.27 Default Settings for the Playback System (Image Playback Systems) --------------------------- 984
29.27.1 Starting up the tools ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 984
29.27.2 Annotation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 985
29.27.3 Calibration ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 986
29.27.4 Context menu --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 996
29.27.5 Customization of the function buttons -------------------------------------------------------- 997
29.27.6 Measurement in the ROI ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1001
29.27.7 Image parameter setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1002
29.27.8 Length ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1003
29.27.9 Pixel shifting---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1007
29.27.10 Setting automatic display of transfer images from Directory -------------------------- 1009
29.27.11 Setting automatic display of previous link images ---------------------------------------- 1010
29.27.12 Setting the playback start position ----------------------------------------------------------- 1011
29.27.13 Specifying the mouse double-click operations -------------------------------------------- 1012
29.27.14 Setting the PanoramicView creation mode selection combo box display ---------- 1013
29.27.15 Specifying the default combo box when a PanoramicView image is created ----- 1014
29.27.16 Setting whether LM% reset is enabled when the

Reset Parameter function is executed ------------------------------------------------------ 1015
29.28 Playback System Default Settings (Examination room monitor functions) --------------------- 1016
29.28.1 Startup of the tool --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1016
29.28.2 Specifying the settings for the guidance lines used for the
X-ray beam limiting device -------------------------------------------------------------------- 1017
29.28.3 Displaying the image-related information --------------------------------------------------- 1018
29.28.4 Mouse sensitivity setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1022
29.28.5 Virtual collimation --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1026
29.28.6 Thumbnail view------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1029
29.28.7 Others ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1043
29.29 Printing (Customized Setting of Scale Display) -------------------------------------------------------- 1049
595
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.30 Changing the Gamma Function for Subtraction Images -------------------------------------------- 1051
29.31 Settings Related to Security -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1052
29.31.1 Installation of a firewall system ---------------------------------------------------------------- 1052
29.31.2 HIPAA Mode setting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1053
29.32 Procedures for Reducing the Variation of the Timing for

Starting Radiography or Storage Fluoroscopic Images --------------------------------------------- 1055
29.33 Setting Communication with the Coolant Circulator -------------------------------------------------- 1058
29.33.1 Setting procedures for enabling/disabling communication ----------------------------- 1058
29.33.2 Setting procedures for the communication port ------------------------------------------- 1059
29.34 Image Quality Control Parameter Settings ------------------------------------------------------------- 1060
29.34.1 Additional filter linkage setting tool ----------------------------------------------------------- 1060
29.34.2 Additional radiographic filter interlock setting tool ---------------------------------------- 1078
29.34.3 Fluoroscopy control parameter-setting tool manual ------------------------------------- 1080
29.35 Printing (Setting of the Maximum Number of Characters to Be Displayed for the
Patient Name) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1083
29.36 Additional Filter Initial Settings ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1084
29.36.1 Settings---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1084
29.36.2 Operation procedure ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1085
29.36.3 Additional filter setting method ---------------------------------------------------------------- 1086
29.36.4 Setting procedure for the additional filter settings tool ---------------------------------- 1088
29.36.5 Specifying the settings of the additional radiographic filter interlock tool ----------- 1090
29.36.6 F-ACT adjustment control ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 1091
29.36.7 Dose limit adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1091
29.37 Biplane System Automatic Positioning Data-Setting Tool ------------------------------------------ 1092
29.37.1 Screen layout -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1092
29.37.2 Method of use ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1093
29.37.3 List of messages ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1095
29.38 V-IF FPGA Data Download Tool -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1097
29.38.1 Screen layout -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1097
29.38.3 Message list ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1100
596
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.39 Tool for Changing the Fluoroscopy Roadmapping Factor ------------------------------------------ 1101
29.39.1 Screen layout -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1101
29.39.2 Operating procedure ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1102
30. APPENDIX 2 (HHS TEST) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1103
30.1 DFP-8000A, XTP-8100G/DFP-8000D, XTP-8100G -------------------------------------------------- 1103
30.1.1 Detailed instructions for production testing ------------------------------------------------ 1103
30.1.2 Measuring points for production testing ----------------------------------------------------- 1121
30.1.3 Adjustment accuracy and standards list ---------------------------------------------------- 1138
30.2 BLA-800A, BLA-800C ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1139
30.3 BLA-900A, BLA-900C ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1141
30.3.1 Method for checking the beam quality (HVL) of the BLA-900A or BLA-900C ----- 1141
30.3.2 Method for checking the alignment of the X-ray field relative to the
fluoroscopic image receptor for the BLA-900A or BLA-900C ------------------------- 1143
31. APPENDIX 3 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1149
31.1 PreProc/SNRF2 FPGA Data Download Tool ---------------------------------------------------------- 1149
31.1.2 Using the PreProc FPGA data download tool --------------------------------------------- 1150
31.1.3 List of messages ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1152
31.2 SNRF FPGA Data Download Tool ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1153
31.2.2 Using the SNRF FPGA data download tool ------------------------------------------------ 1154
31.2.3 List of messages ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1156
31.3 ADIF FPGA Data Download Tool ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1157
31.3.1 Screen layout -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1157
31.3.3 Message list ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1160
31.4 Pre-Operation Check Support Function ----------------------------------------------------------------- 1161
31.4.1 Examination protocol for pre-operation check support function ---------------------- 1161
31.4.2 Customizing the initial setting data ----------------------------------------------------------- 1162
31.4.3 Customizing the information display --------------------------------------------------------- 1164
597
No. 2J308-036EN*I
31.4.4 Data transmission to InnerVision ------------------------------------------------------------- 1165
31.4.5 Termination of the pre-operation check support function------------------------------- 1167
31.4.6 Checking the tube current (V4.22 or later) ------------------------------------------------- 1167
31.5 Constancy Test Support Function ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1168
31.5.1 Study protocol for supporting the constancy test ----------------------------------------- 1168
31.5.2 Procedure for acquiring the data (single-plane system) -------------------------------- 1169
31.5.3 Procedure for acquiring the data (biplane system) --------------------------------------- 1170
31.5.4 Procedure for acquiring the data (dual-plane system) ---------------------------------- 1173
31.6 Remote Maintenance Function ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1174
31.7 SPD Data Acquisition Support Function ----------------------------------------------------------------- 1178
31.7.1 File transmission settings ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 1178
31.7.2 Acquiring SPD data ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1179
31.8 Edge Mask ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1182
31.8.1 Setting procedure (V4.00) ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 1182
31.8.2 Setting procedures ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1184
31.8.3 Check procedure --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1185
31.9 Reference Line Display for Radiation Field Alignment ----------------------------------------------- 1186
31.9.1 Setting using system settings ----------------------------------------------------------------- 1186
31.9.2 Setting from the beam limiting device aperture support tool
(referred to below as "support tool") --------------------------------------------------------- 1186
31.10 ABC ROI Setup Tool ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1187
31.11 X-ray Self-Adjustment Tool --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1190
31.11.1 Window information ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1190
31.11.2 Explanation to the user and setting the administrator ----------------------------------- 1191
31.11.3 Precautions----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1191
31.12 Large-Screen Monitor Setting Tool ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 1192
31.13 Time Server Setting Tool ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1193
598
No. 2J308-036EN*I
18. IMAGER SETTING
18.1 Imager Setup Principle
A special gray scale correction function (Imager Correction LUT) is provided in the output stage
of the imager so that films output from the imager can be processed to appear the same as the
image displayed on the monitor when there is linear relationship between the digital values input
to the imager and the film density.
Input image
Monitor display Monitor display Film density

gamma data
2.7
0.1
to 0.2
0 255
Input value
Imager Correction LUT Imager
(a) Imager Correction LUT (b) Imager setting
599
No. 2J308-036EN*I
18.2 Setting Procedure
Setting of the imager input/output characteristics must be performed by the imager manufacturer.
To output the SMPTE test pattern for imager adjustment, the Imager Correction LUT must be
changed to linear LUT. This subsection describes the change procedure.
(1) Outline of the procedure
(a) Changing the LUT data to linear data using the service software
(b) Adjusting the imager using the SMPTE pattern so that the imager output is linear
(c) Returning the LUT data to non-linear data using the service software
(2) Detailed procedure
(a) Start the service software and select "Printers" in the [Config.] tab.
600
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) Click [LUT Setting] to open the LUT Setting window. Select "Linear" from the pulldown
menu in the LUT column and click [OK]. (After imager setup is complete, return this
setting to "SiemensMonitor", which is the default.)
(c) Reboot the system.
(d) Import the SMPTE image using Directory mode.
The SMPTE test pattern image is recorded on the test pattern CD supplied with the
system.
(e) Transfer the imported SMPTE image to Printing mode and output it to film.
(f) Adjust the imager using the output film.
(g) When imager adjustment is completed, return the Correction LUT data to non-linear
gamma data. (Select Siemens Monitor from the "LUT" pull-down menu described in
step (b) and click [OK].)
(h) Reboot the system.
601
No. 2J308-036EN*I
18.3 Checking the Filmed Image
(1) Checking the film density
Measure the film density of the SMPTE test pattern using the densitometer and generate
the graph as shown in subsection 18.1. Adjust the input/output characteristics of the imager
so that the deviation from the line connecting the density for input value 100% and density
for input value 0% (2.7) is within 0.05 (target) at each density level.
If a higher contrast is desired, the maximum density can be set to 3.0.
(2) Checking the filmed image
Set the Imager Correction LUT back to Siemens Monitor, reboot the system, and film the
SMPTE test pattern again.
Confirm that the filmed image and the image displayed on the monitor appear the same.
CAUTION: When the Correction LUT is set to Linear, the filmed image is not monitor-corrected
and may not appear exactly the same as the monitor image.
602
No. 2J308-036EN*I
19. ADJUSTMENT OF THE AREA DOSE METER (OPTION)
The area dose meter DIAMENTOR K1/K2 (manufactured by PTW) can be used in combination
with this system.
The area dose value and the estimated patient surface dose value (not including backscattered
radiation) are displayed at the left end of the system monitor.
When the area dose meter is installed with the system, it is necessary to register the chamber
correction data, check the accuracy of the displayed area dose value, and perform calibration as
required.
CAUTION: When the area dose meter is installed, set Area Dose Meter to ON for each plane
on the Options page of the Configuration screen. (Refer to subsection 5.2.5.)
19.1 Entering the Chamber Correction Data
The correction data (KG/KR) inherent to each area dose meter chamber is shown on the side of
the unit and also described on the supplied chamber data sheet. Enter the KG value (in Gy) on
the Chamber Setting screen of the DiaCOM service software.
(1) Check the chamber correction factor KG (in Gy) on the unit or on the data sheet.
Note that commas are used instead of decimal points. ("1,18" means "1.18".)
(2) Follow the procedure described in subsection 19.3 to start the DiaCOM service software
and display the Chamber Settings screen.
(3) Enter the chamber correction factor KG (in Gy) in the Calibration factors boxes.
Do not delete "E+09".
If KG = 1.18, the Calibration factors boxes should display "1.18E+09".
(4) Press the [Tab] key of the keyboard to register the new setting.
(5) Click [Exit]. The DiaCOM service software is terminated and the service screen is displayed.
603
No. 2J308-036EN*I
19.2 Calibration of the Area Dose Meter
Compare the displayed area dose value against the value actually measured using the dosimeter
and check the accuracy of the area dose meter.
When the accuracy check is performed for the first time after the area dose meter is installed,
enter the correction factor for the deviation from the actual value on the Chamber Setting screen
of the DiaCOM service software.
(1) Place the probe of the dosimeter on the tabletop at the image center.
Set the tabletop height to 100 cm and the SID to the maximum.
NOTE: If the displayed probe is not within the window, adjust the tabletop height.
The tabletop height does not need to be 100 cm.
(2) Enter Study mode and set the system to fluoroscopy, DA, or DSA mode.
(3) Set N image field mode and reduce the radiation field size to between 10 cm  10 cm and
15 cm  15 cm, so that the radiation field matches the probe on the tabletop.
2
If the radiation field size is 12 cm  12 cm, A is calculated to be 12  12 = 144 cm .
CAUTION: Measure the area (A) of the radiation field at the probe position correctly.
(4) Generate X-rays of beam quality 70 kV under conditions of a total current time product of
approximately 40 mAs. Record the cumulative dose value (B mR) indicated on the
2
dosimeter and the area dose value (C cGy cm ) indicated by the area dose meter.
(For example, 320 mA/8 ms/1 s with the DA 15 fps manual setting)
The area dose at the probe position is defined as A  B. Compare the A  B value against
C and determine the correction factor.
<Example>
If:
2
Area of the radiation field at the probe position (A) 144 cm
Cumulative dose value indicated by the dosimeter (B) 100 mR
2
Area dose value displayed by the area dose meter (C) 10 cGy cm
2 2
A  B = 144  100 = 14400 mR cm = 14.4 R cm
Since 1 Gy = 115 R, 1 cGy = 1.15 R; 1 R = 1/1.15 cGy.
2 2
A  B = 14.4 R cm = 14.4/1.15 = 9.3 cGy cm
Correction factor = AB/C = 9.3/10 = 0.93
(The area dose meter displays a value that is 7% higher than the actual value.)
(5) Quit Study mode. Start the DiaCOM service software and display the Chamber Settings
screen according to the description in subsection 19.3.
604
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(6) Enter the obtained correction factor (AXB/C) in the Correction factors boxes, then press
TAB key on the keyboard to register the values. In the Study mode screen, perform the
same confirmation procedures to ensure that correction is performed properly.
CAUTION: During the periodic inspection after the first calibration, confirm that the accuracy of
the area dose value is ±25% (defined by the IEC standard). If this standard is not
met, perform calibration again.
Checking the accuracy of the area dose meter
605
No. 2J308-036EN*I
19.3 Dosimeter Calibration Software Operating Procedure
(1) Start the service software.
(2) Select the [Utils] tab of the service software and click "Command Line" in the tree-view
pane.
(3) Confirm that "NT Command Interpreter" is selected in the Command List and then enter
"TxsDiaCalib" in the Parameters field.
606
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(4) Click [Go] at the bottom of the screen. The dosimeter calibration software "DiaCom" is
started.
(5) Click [Connect Diamentor]. The configured Diamentor is connected.
607
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(6) When the Diamentor is connected normally, additional tabs are displayed on the screen as
shown below.
(7) Click the [Chamber Settings] tab. The screen below is displayed.
(This is an example for K2. For K1, Channel B is not effective.)
(8) In the Calibration factors fields, the calibration factor currently registered in the Diamentor is
displayed. Enter the new calibration factor and press the [Tab] key on the keyboard to
register the new calibration factor to the Diamentor.
(9) Click [Exit]. The dosimeter calibration software is terminated and the service screen is
displayed.
608
No. 2J308-036EN*I
20. SETTING OF THE QCA, LVA, LVA-BP, AND QVA FUNCTIONS (OPTIONS) (V4.22 OR LATER)
This section describes the installation and setting procedures for the options listed below.
By combining these options, the QCA, LVA, LVA-BP, and QVA functions can be executed from the
CAAS2000 software.
 XIDF-QCA801
 XIDF-QCA802
 XIDF-QCA803
 XIDF-QCA804
20.1 Setting of the QCA/LVA (+LVA BP+QVA) Functions (Options)
The XIDF-QCA801 (QCA/LVA) can be installed in this system. In addition, the XIDF-QCA802
(LVA-BP) and/or the XIDF-QCA803 (QVA) can be installed if the XIDF-QCA-801 is installed.
Therefore, the following optional combinations are possible.
Optional combination Functions

XIDF-QCA801 QCA, LVA
XIDF-QCA801 + XIDF-QCA802 QCA, LVA, LVA-BP
XIDF-QCA801 + XIDF-QCA803 QCA, LVA, QVA
XIDF-QCA801 + XIDF-QCA802 + XIDF-QCA803 QCA, LVA, LVA-BP, QVA
20.1.1 Items to be prepared
 Hardware license key included in the XIDF-QCA801 (dongle)
 Hardware license key included in the XIDF-QCA802 (dongle) and USB HUB
 Hardware license key included in the XIDF-QCA803 (dongle) and USB HUB
609
No. 2J308-036EN*I
20.1.2 Installation procedures
(1) Procedures
Start
(2) Option setting
Addition of examination
(3) room menu items
Shutdown
(4) Dongle setting
Reboot
Execution of SETUP Executed only
(5) or INI file changes when required
Procedures
(6) after installation
Operational
(7) checks
End
(2) Changing the option settings
Start the DFP-8000A. To enable the XIDF-QCA801 function, perform option setting for
the DFP-8000A.
Once option setting for the XIDF-QCA801 is complete, option setting for the
XIDF-QCA802 or XIDF-QCA803 can be performed. Proceed with setting according to
the options configured.
610
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Addition of examination room menu items
Perform the following procedure to add buttons for the XIDF-QCA801 (XIDF-QCA802,
XIDF-QCA803) to the examination room menu. This procedure is the same for all option
combinations.
(a) Backup the f:\celeve\TxsSite\TxsSysDataMgr folder beforehand.
(b) Execute the program for setting the buttons for the XIDF-QCA801 (XIDF-QCA802,
XIDF-QCA803) to the examination room menu. If Explorer or the command prompt
can be used, directly execute f:\celeve\bin\AddCaasMenu.exe. If they are not
available, start service from the full option CD and the following screen appears.
(c) Select [Utils]  "Command Line". The screen below is displayed.
611
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(d) Type "f:\celeve\bin\AddCaasMenu" in the text entry field of "Parameters" and click
[Go] in the lower part of the screen.
(e) A new window is displayed while addition to menu is being performed, and the
progress status is indicated. Approximately three minutes are required for the
process. The window is closed automatically when the process is completed
successfully, but remains displayed if the process fails. In the latter case, take the
necessary measures referring to subsection 20.1.3 "Troubleshooting".
(4) Dongle setting
(a) Shut down the system.
(b) Confirm that the system power is OFF.
 In the case of the XIDF-QCA801 only, connect an accessory license key (dongle)
to the lower USB port1 of the SERVER PC.
 If the XIDF-QCA802 and/or XIDF-QCA803 are added to XIDF-QCA801, connect

all the accessory license keys (up to 3) to the attached USB hub. Then connect
the USB hub to the lower USB port1 of the SERVER PC.
(c) Start the DFP-8000A.
(5) Execution of SETUP or INI file changes
When necessary, set up the application as follows.
(a) Executing SETUP
Press the [CAAS Param. Setup] button in the [Utility] tab to display the SETUP
window. In SETUP, it is possible to preset the parameters used for each analysis.
Refer to the operation manuals for the XIDF-QCA801, XIDF-QCA802, and
XIDF-QCA803 for the operational details. It is recommended that the regression
formula for volume calculation correction in LVA analysis be changed to the
predefined regression formula "V = 0.810 Vcalc + 1.900" (displayed second for the
Area Length method).
(b) Changing the INI file
The color, size, type, etc. of the lines and characters for graphic display can be
changed by changing the INI file. Note that if any of these items is changed from
the factory setting, lines or characters may become hard to be see. Therefore, it is
recommended that the factory setting be used.
When making changes, confirm that functions of the XIDF-QCA801, XIDF-QCA802,

and XIDF-QCA803 are not being executed. Items other than those in the following
list must not be changed. Since an erroneous change of the INI file may result in
non-operation of the option, be sure to back up the INI file before making any
changes to it.
612
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<1> Change procedures
The folders for each application are located in the folder

f:\celeve\CAAS2000\INFINIX. Each of the application folders contains a file
with the extension INI. If any files that have an extension of PRF exist, delete
them before starting editing. Settings can be changed by editing the INI file in
NotePad.exe or any other text editor. The contents of the INI file are as
follows:
[Name of setting] = [value]

Change the values of the settings as required. After saving the INI file,
rebooting of the software is not required to make the changes effective.
<2> Setting of calibration

File name: f:\celeve\CAAS2000\INFINIX\CAL\CAL.INI
Setting at time of
Setting item Description Permitted settings
shipment
ContourColor Indicates the color of the contour WHITE RED, PURPLE,
(Catheter) or color of the BLUE, GREEN,
circumference (Sphere). YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
CalibWeight Indicates the line width of a 1 Integers from 1 to 7
segment (Distance and Catheter)
or size of a point (Sphere).
ContourWeight Line width of contour (Catheter) or 2 Integers from 1 to 7
line width of circumference
(Sphere).
<3> Setting of QCA

File name: f:\celeve\CAAS2000\INFINIX\QCA\QCA.INI
Setting at time of
shipment
StenosisColor Indicates the color of the stenosis WHITE RED, PURPLE,
marker (segments on graphs and BLUE, GREEN,
images). YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
CompBoundsColor Indicates the color of the stenosed WHITE RED, PURPLE,
areas (segments on graphs and BLUE, GREEN,
images) based on automatic YELLOW, WHITE,
calculation (Auto). GREY, BLACK
UserBoundsColor Indicates the color of the stenosed WHITE RED, PURPLE,
images) based on user definition YELLOW, WHITE,
(User). GREY, BLACK
SubsegBoundsColor1 Indicates the color of the segment WHITE RED, PURPLE,
area (segments on graphs and BLUE, GREEN,
images) in subsegment analysis YELLOW, WHITE,
(SubSeg.). GREY, BLACK
ProfilePosColor Indicates the color of the cross- WHITE RED, PURPLE,
section position (segments on BLUE, GREEN,
graphs and images) in the YELLOW, WHITE,
concentration profile curve. GREY, BLACK
613
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Setting at time of
shipment
ProfileBoundsColor Indicates the color of the contour WHITE RED, PURPLE,
position (graph) in the BLUE, GREEN,
concentration profile curve. YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
UserDefRefColor Indicates the color of the reference WHITE RED, PURPLE,
position (segments on graphs and BLUE, GREEN,
(User). GREY, BLACK
DiameterCurveColor Indicates the color of the diameter WHITE RED, PURPLE,
change curve. BLUE, GREEN,
YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
DensCurveColor Indicates the color of the cross- WHITE RED, PURPLE,
section area change curve BLUE, GREEN,
(Densitometric Area). YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
CircCurveColor Indicates the color of the cross- WHITE RED, PURPLE,
(Circular Area). YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
ProfileCurveColor Indicates the color of the WHITE RED, PURPLE,
concentration profile change curve. BLUE, GREEN,
YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
BGRawCurveColor Indicates the color of the raw data WHITE RED, PURPLE,
of the background change curve. BLUE, GREEN,
YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
BGSmoothCurveColor Indicates the color of the smoothed GREY RED, PURPLE,
data of the background change BLUE, GREEN,
curve. YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
MarkerDotColor Indicates the color of the markers WHITE RED, PURPLE,
on blood vessels. BLUE, GREEN,
YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
ContourColor Indicates the color of contours. WHITE RED, PURPLE,
BLUE, GREEN,
YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
PlaqueColor Indicates the color of blood vessel WHITE RED, PURPLE,
plaque. BLUE, GREEN,
YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
ClineColor Indicates the color of the blood WHITE RED, PURPLE,
vessel center line. BLUE, GREEN,
YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
614
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Setting at time of
shipment
CorrColor Indicates the color of contours WHITE RED, PURPLE,
corrected by user. BLUE, GREEN,
YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
RestrColor Indicates the color of contours WHITE RED, PURPLE,
restricted by user. BLUE, GREEN,
YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
GraphBGColor Indicates the background color of TRANSPARENT RED, PURPLE,
graphs on the image. BLUE, GREEN,
YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK,
TRANSPARENT
GraphAxisColor Indicates the axis color of graphs WHITE RED, PURPLE,
on the image (including the unit BLUE, GREEN,
and the max. values). YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
StenosisStyle Indicates the type of line for the SOLID SOLID, DASH,
stenosis marker (segments on DOT, DASHDOT,
graphs and images). DASHDOTDOT
CompBoundsStyle Indicates the type of line for DOT SOLID, DASH,
stenosed areas (segments on DOT, DASHDOT,
graphs and images) based on DASHDOTDOT
automatic calculation (Auto).
UserBoundsStyle Indicates the type of line for DOT SOLID, DASH,
graphs and images) based on user DASHDOTDOT
definition (User).
SubsegBoundsStyle1 Indicates the type of line for DOT SOLID, DASH,
subsegment areas (segments on DOT, DASHDOT,
graphs and images) in subsegment DASHDOTDOT
analysis (SubSeg.).
ProfilePosStyle Indicates the type of line for cross- DOT SOLID, DASH,
section positions (segments on DOT, DASHDOT,
graphs and images) in the DASHDOTDOT
concentration profile curve.
ProfileBoundsStyle Indicates the type of line for SOLID SOLID, DASH,
contour positions (graph) in the DOT, DASHDOT,
concentration profile curve. DASHDOTDOT
UserDefRefStyle Indicates the type of line for DOT SOLID, DASH,
reference positions (segments on DOT, DASHDOT,
definition (User).
DiameterCurveStyle Indicates the type of line for the SOLID SOLID, DASH,
diameter change curve. DOT, DASHDOT,
DASHDOTDOT
DensCurveStyle Indicates the type of line for the SOLID SOLID, DASH,
cross-section area change curve DOT, DASHDOT,
(Densitometric Area). DASHDOTDOT
615
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Setting at time of
shipment
CircCurveStyle Indicates the type of line for the SOLID SOLID, DASH,
(Circular Area). DASHDOTDOT
ProfileCurveStyle Indicates the type of line for the SOLID SOLID, DASH,
concentration profile change curve. DOT, DASHDOT,
DASHDOTDOT
BGRawCurveStyle Indicates the type of line for the SOLID SOLID, DASH,
raw data of the background DOT, DASHDOT,
change curve. DASHDOTDOT
BGSmoothCurveStyle Indicates the type of line for the SOLID SOLID, DASH ,
smoothed data of the background DOT, DASHDOT,
StenosisWeight Indicates the line width of the 3 Integers from 1 to 7
stenosis marker (segments on
graphs and images).
CompBoundsWeight Indicates the line width of the 3 Integers from 1 to 7
stenosed areas (segments on
graphs and images) based on
UserBoundsWeight Indicates the line width of the 3 Integers from 1 to 7
graphs and images) based on user
definition (User).
SubsegBoundsWeight1 Indicates the line width of the 3 Integers from 1 to 7
segment areas (segments on
graphs and images) in subsegment
analysis (SubSeg.).
ProfilePosWeight Indicates the line width of the 3 Integers from 1 to 7
cross-section area positions
(segments on graphs and images)
in the concentration profile curve.
ProfileBoundsWeight Indicates the line width of the 3 Integers from 1 to 7
contour positions (graph) in the
UserDefRefWeight Indicates the line width of the 3 Integers from 1 to 7
reference positions (segments on
definition (User).
DiameterCurveWeight Indicates the line width of the 3 Integers from 1 to 7
diameter change curve.
DensCurveWeight Indicates the line width of the 3 Integers from 1 to 7
cross-section change curve
(Densitometric Area).
CircCurveWeight Indicates the line width of the 3 Integers from 1 to 7
cross-section change curve
(Circular Area).
ProfileCurveWeight Indicates the line width of the 3 Integers from 1 to 7
concentration profile change curve.
616
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Setting at time of
shipment
BGRawCurveWeight Indicates the line width of the raw 3 Integers from 1 to 7
data of the background change
curve.
BGSmoothCurveWeight Indicates the line width of the 3 Integers from 1 to 7
smoothed data of the background
change curve.
MarkerDotWeight Indicates the size of the dots when 6 Integers from 1 to 7
moving the marker.
RubberLineWeight Indicates the line width when 2 Integers from 1 to 7
displaying the ruubber band.
<4> Setting of LVA

File name: f:\celeve\CAAS2000\INFINIX\LVA\LVA.INI
Setting at time of
shipment
ApexMarkerColor Indicates the color of the apex WHITE RED, PURPLE,
marker. BLUE, GREEN,
YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
ValveMarkerColor Indicates the color of the valve WHITE RED, PURPLE,
marker. BLUE, GREEN,
YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
ValveColor Indicates the color of the line WHITE RED, PURPLE,
connecting the valve edges. BLUE, GREEN,
YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
ContourColor Indicates the color of the left WHITE RED, PURPLE,
ventricle contour. BLUE, GREEN,
YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
CorrectionColor Indicates the color of the corrected WHITE RED, PURPLE,
left ventricle contour. BLUE, GREEN,
YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
CardiacWallColor Indicates the color of the cardiac WHITE RED, PURPLE,
wall position. BLUE, GREEN,
YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
ApexMarkerSize Indicates the size of the apex 10 Integers from 1 to
marker. 20
ValveMarkerSize Indicates the size of the valve 10 Integers from 1 to
marker. 20
ValveWeight Indicates the size of the valve. 2 Integers from 1 to
10
ContourWeight Indicates the line width of the left 2 Integers from 1 to
ventricle contour. 10
617
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Setting at time of
shipment
CorrectionWeight Indicates the line width of the 2 Integers from 1 to
corrected left ventricle contour. 10
CardiacWallWeight Indicates the line width of the 2 Integers from 1 to
cardiac wall position. 10
<5> Setting of LVA-BP
It is not necessary to set LVA-BP when LVA is set because their settings are
common.
<6> Setting of QVA
File name: f:\celeve\CAAS2000\INFINIX\QVA\QVA.INI
The items that can be set are the same as those for QCA.
Refer to the table for QCA.
(6) Procedures after QCA/LVA installation
After the system is rebooted, confirm that the tips of all the dongles light in red. If the tips
do not light in red, the dongles are not installed correctly. Install them correctly referring
to subsection 20.1.3 "Troubleshooting".
(7) Operational checks
Referring to the operation manual for the XIDF-QCA801, confirm that the QCA/LVA
functions can be executed correctly. For the XIDF-QCA802 and XIDF-QCA803 also,
refer to their operation manuals and confirm that the LVA-BP and QVA functions can be
executed correctly.
618
No. 2J308-036EN*I
20.1.3 Troubleshooting
(1) If the dongle does not light red
The device driver is not connected correctly.

Disconnect the dongle and connect it again to the same USB port or to another USB port.
Or, try the following procedure.
(a) Right-click "My Computer" on the Windows 2000 desktop. Select "Manage" from
the pop-up menu.
(b) The Computer Management window is displayed. Select "Drive Manager".
619
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(c) Find the device "Aladdin USB Key" in the "Universal Serial Bus controllers" folder.
If a yellow exclamation mark (!) is displayed for this device icon, the device driver is
not installed correctly. Right-click the device and select "Properties" from the
pop-up menu. The dialog below is displayed.
(d) Select the [Driver] tab. Click [Update Driver...].
620
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(e) The screen below is displayed. Click [Next].
(f) The screen below is displayed. Select "Display a list of the known ..." and
then click [Next].
621
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(g) Confirm that "Aladdin USB key" is displayed and then click [Next].
(h) Click [Next] again.
622
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(i) Click [Finish]. Confirm that a yellow exclamation mark is not displayed for the
"Aladdin USB Key" icon on the Computer Management screen. If the yellow
exclamation mark is still displayed, the device driver must be reinstalled.
(2) After QCA/QVA (or LVA BP/QVA) is started, an error message indicating that a valid
license for this software could not be found may be displayed.
 The dongle is not connected.
Connect the dongle correctly. If it seems to be connected correctly, connect it to

another USB port.
 The license is invalid.
Use a dongle with a valid license. If the problem occurs even when the correct dongle
is used, try the procedure described in step (1).
(3) When an attempt is made to add items to the examination room menu, an error message
indicating that a valid license could not be found is displayed and the system cannot be
started.
A valid license for the service is required.
indicating that addition to the examination room menu failed is displayed.
The number of pages of the examination room menu may have exceeded 10. Use the
RingMenuEdit to create space in the examination room menu.
623
No. 2J308-036EN*I
20.1.4 Uninstallation procedure
Use the following procedures to uninstall the XIDF-QCA801, XIDF-QCA802, and XIDF-
QCA803. If the XIDF-QCA801 is uninstalled, the XIDF-QCA802 and XIDF-QCA803 must also
be uninstalled.
(1) Procedure
Start
Changing the
(2) optional settings
Shutdown
(3) Removing the dongle
Reboot
End
(2) Changing the optional settings
Start the DFP-8000A. Perform setting of the DFP-8000A to disable the XIDF-QCA801,
XIDF-QCA802, or XIDF-QCA803 functions. If optional settings have been made for
XIDF-QCA802 or XIDF-QCA803 functions, they are automatically disabled when the
XIDF-QCA801 functions are disabled. The optional settings for the XIDF-QCA802 and
XIDF-QCA803 functions can be disabled independently.
(b) Confirm that the system power is OFF. Remove the dongle of the option to be
cancelled. If the dongle for the XIDF-QCA801 is removed, the dongles for the
XIDF-QCA802 and XIDF-QCA803 must be removed at the same time. If both the
XIDF-QCA802 and XIDF-QCA803 are removed but the XIDF-QCA801 is left
installed, remove the USB HUB and connect the license key (dongle) attached to
the XIDF-QCA801 to the lower USB port1 of the SERVER PC.
After starting the DFP-8000A, use the [Post Process] or [Current Case] tab on the system
monitor to confirm that the functions of the uninstalled options cannot be started. Also
confirm that the functions of each option cannot be started on the in-room monitor.
624
No. 2J308-036EN*I
20.2 Setting of the QCA/QVA Functions (Options)
20.2.1 Preparation
XIDF-QCA804 provided Hardware License Key (dongle)
20.2.2 Installation procedure
(1) Procedure
Start
(2) Option setting
Addition of examination
(3) room menu items
Shutdown
(4) Dongle setting
Reboot
Execution of SETUP Executed only
(5) or INI file changes when required
Procedures
(6) after installation
Operational
(7) checks
End
Activate the DFP-8000A. Perform DFP-8000A Option Setting in order to validate

XIDF-QCA804 function.
625
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Addition of items to the examination room menu
Use the following procedures to add buttons for the XIDF-QCA804 to the examination
room menu:
(a) Backup the f:\celeve\TxsSite\TxsSysDataMgr folder beforehand.
(b) Execute the program for setting the buttons for the XIDF-QCA804 to the
examination room menu. If Explorer or the command prompt can be used, directly
execute f:\celeve\bin\AddCaasMenu.exe. If they are not available, start service
from the full option CD and the following screen appears.
(c) Select [Utils]  "Command Line". The screen below is displayed.
626
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(d) Type "f:\celeve\bin\AddCaasMenu" in the text entry field of "Parameters" and click
[Go] in the lower part of the screen.
(e) A new window is displayed while addition to menu is being performed, and the
progress status is indicated. Approximately three minutes are required for the
process. The window is closed automatically when the process is completed
successfully, but remains displayed if the process fails. In the latter case, take the
necessary measures referring to subsection 20.2.3 "Troubleshooting".
(4) Install the dongle
(b) Confirm that the system power is OFF and then connect the attached license key
(dongle) to the lower USB port1 of the SERVER PC.
(5) Execution of SETUP or INI file changes
When necessary, set up the application as follows.
(a) Executing SETUP
Press the [CAAS Param. Setup] button in the [Utility] tab to display the SETUP
window. In SETUP, it is possible to preset the parameters used for each analysis.
Refer to the operation manual for the XIDF-QCA804 for the operational details.
(b) Changing the INI file
The color, size, type, etc. of the lines and characters for graphic display can be
changed by changing the INI file. Note that if any of these items is changed from
the factory setting, lines or characters may become hard to be see. Therefore, it is
recommended that the factory setting be used.
When making changes, confirm that functions of the XIDF-QCA804 are not being
executed. Items other than those in the following list must not be changed. Since
an erroneous change of the INI file may result in non-operation of the option, be
sure to back up the INI file before making any changes to it.
<1> Change procedures
The folders for each application are located in the folder

f:\celeve\CAAS2000\INFINIX. Each of the application folders contains a file
with the extension INI. If any files that have an extension of PRF exist, delete
them before starting editing. Settings can be changed by editing the INI file in
NotePad.exe or any other text editor. The contents of the INI file are as
follows:
[Name of setting] = [value]
Change the values of the settings as required. After saving the INI file,
rebooting of the software is not required to make the changes effective.
627
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<2> Setting of calibration

File name: f:\celeve\CAAS2000\INFINIX\CAL\CAL.INI
Setting at time of
shipment
ContourColor Indicates the color of the contour WHITE RED, PURPLE,
(Catheter) or color of the BLUE, GREEN,
circumference (Sphere). YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
CalibWeight Indicates the line width of a 1 Integers from 1 to 7
segment (Distance and Catheter)
or size of a point (Sphere).
ContourWeight Line width of contour (Catheter) or 2 Integers from 1 to 7
line width of circumference
(Sphere)
<3> Setting of QCA

File name: f:\celeve\CAAS2000\INFINIX\QCA\QCA.INI
Setting at time of
shipment
StenosisColor Indicates the color of the stenosis WHITE RED, PURPLE,
marker (segments on graphs and BLUE, GREEN,
images). YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
CompBoundsColor Indicates the color of the stenosed WHITE RED, PURPLE,
images) based on automatic YELLOW, WHITE,
calculation (Auto). GREY, BLACK
UserBoundsColor Indicates the color of the stenosed WHITE RED, PURPLE,
(User). GREY, BLACK
SubsegBoundsColor1 Indicates the color of the segment WHITE RED, PURPLE,
area (segments on graphs and BLUE, GREEN,
images) in subsegment analysis YELLOW, WHITE,
(SubSeg.). GREY, BLACK
ProfilePosColor Indicates the color of the cross- WHITE RED, PURPLE,
section position (segments on BLUE, GREEN,
graphs and images) in the YELLOW, WHITE,
concentration profile curve. GREY, BLACK
ProfileBoundsColor Indicates the color of the contour WHITE RED, PURPLE,
position (graph) in the BLUE, GREEN,
concentration profile curve. YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
UserDefRefColor Indicates the color of the reference WHITE RED, PURPLE,
position (segments on graphs and BLUE, GREEN,
(User). GREY, BLACK
628
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Setting at time of
shipment
DiameterCurveColor Indicates the color of the diameter WHITE RED, PURPLE,
change curve. BLUE, GREEN,
YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
DensCurveColor Indicates the color of the cross- WHITE RED, PURPLE,
(Densitometric Area). YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
CircCurveColor Indicates the color of the cross- WHITE RED, PURPLE,
(Circular Area). YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
ProfileCurveColor Indicates the color of the WHITE RED, PURPLE,
concentration profile change curve. BLUE, GREEN,
YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
BGRawCurveColor Indicates the color of the raw data WHITE RED, PURPLE,
of the background change curve. BLUE, GREEN,
YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
BGSmoothCurveColor Indicates the color of the smoothed GREY RED, PURPLE,
data of the background change BLUE, GREEN,
curve. YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
MarkerDotColor Indicates the color of the markers WHITE RED, PURPLE,
on blood vessels. BLUE, GREEN,
YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
ContourColor Indicates the color of contours. WHITE RED, PURPLE,
BLUE, GREEN,
YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
PlaqueColor Indicates the color of blood vessel WHITE RED, PURPLE,
plaque. BLUE, GREEN,
YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
ClineColor Indicates the color of the blood WHITE RED, PURPLE,
vessel center line. BLUE, GREEN,
YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
CorrColor Indicates the color of contours WHITE RED, PURPLE,
corrected by user. BLUE, GREEN,
YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
RestrColor Indicates the color of contours WHITE RED, PURPLE,
restricted by user. BLUE, GREEN,
YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
629
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Setting at time of
shipment
GraphBGColor Indicates the background color of TRANSPARENT RED, PURPLE,
graphs on the image. BLUE, GREEN,
YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK,
TRANSPARENT
GraphAxisColor Indicates the axis color of graphs WHITE RED, PURPLE,
on the image (including the unit BLUE, GREEN,
and the max. values). YELLOW, WHITE,
GREY, BLACK
StenosisStyle Indicates the type of line for the SOLID SOLID, DASH,
stenosis marker (segments on DOT, DASHDOT,
graphs and images). DASHDOTDOT
CompBoundsStyle Indicates the type of line for DOT SOLID, DASH,
graphs and images) based on DASHDOTDOT
UserBoundsStyle Indicates the type of line for DOT SOLID, DASH,
definition (User).
SubsegBoundsStyle1 Indicates the type of line for DOT SOLID, DASH,
segment areas (segments on DOT, DASHDOT,
graphs and images) in subsegment DASHDOTDOT
analysis (SubSeg.).
ProfilePosStyle Indicates the type of line for cross- DOT SOLID, DASH,
section positions (segments on DOT, DASHDOT,
graphs and images) in the DASHDOTDOT
ProfileBoundsStyle Indicates the type of line for SOLID SOLID, DASH,
contour positions (graph) in the DOT, DASHDOT,
concentration profile curve. DASHDOTDOT
UserDefRefStyle Indicates the type of line for DOT SOLID, DASH,
reference positions (segments on DOT, DASHDOT,
definition (User).
DiameterCurveStyle Indicates the type of line for the SOLID SOLID, DASH,
diameter change curve. DOT, DASHDOT,
DASHDOTDOT
DensCurveStyle Indicates the type of line for the SOLID SOLID, DASH,
(Densitometric Area). DASHDOTDOT
CircCurveStyle Indicates the type of line for the SOLID SOLID, DASH,
(Circular Area). DASHDOTDOT
ProfileCurveStyle Indicates the type of line for the SOLID SOLID, DASH,
concentration profile change curve. DOT, DASHDOT,
DASHDOTDOT
630
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Setting at time of
shipment
BGRawCurveStyle Indicates the type of line for the SOLID SOLID, DASH,
raw data of the background DOT, DASHDOT,
BGSmoothCurveStyle Indicates the type of line for the SOLID SOLID, DASH ,
smoothed data of the background DOT, DASHDOT,
StenosisWeight Indicates the line width of the 3 Integers from 1 to 7
stenosis marker (segments on
graphs and images).
CompBoundsWeight Indicates the line width of the 3 Integers from 1 to 7
graphs and images) based on
UserBoundsWeight Indicates the line width of the 3 Integers from 1 to 7
definition (User).
SubsegBoundsWeight1 Indicates the line width of the 3 Integers from 1 to 7
segment areas (segments on
graphs and images) in subsegment
analysis (SubSeg.).
ProfilePosWeight Indicates the line width of the 3 Integers from 1 to 7
cross-section area positions
(segments on graphs and images)
in the concentration profile curve.
ProfileBoundsWeight Indicates the line width of the 3 Integers from 1 to 7
contour positions (graph) in the
UserDefRefWeight Indicates the line width of the 3 Integers from 1 to 7
reference positions (segments on
definition (User).
DiameterCurveWeight Indicates the line width of the 3 Integers from 1 to 7
diameter change curve.
DensCurveWeight Indicates the line width of the 3 Integers from 1 to 7
cross-section area change curve
(Densitometric Area).
CircCurveWeight Indicates the line width of the 3 Integers from 1 to 7
cross-section area change curve
(Circular Area).
ProfileCurveWeight Indicates the line width of the 3 Integers from 1 to 7
concentration profile change curve.
BGRawCurveWeight Indicates the line width of the raw 3 Integers from 1 to 7
data of the background change
curve.
BGSmoothCurveWeight Indicates the line width of the 3 Integers from 1 to 7
smoothed data of the background
change curve.
631
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Setting at time of
shipment
MarkerDotWeight Indicates the size of the dots when 6 Integers from 1 to 7
moving the marker.
RubberLineWeight Indicates the line width when 2 Integers from 1 to 7
displaying the rubber band.
<4> Setting of QVA
File name: f:\celeve\CAAS2000\INFINIX\QVA\QVA.INI
The items that can be set are the same as those for QCA. Refer to the table
for QCA.
(6) Post-processing
After the system is rebooted, confirm that the tip of the dongle lights in red. If the tip does
not light in red, the dongle is not installed correctly. Install it correctly referring to
subsection 20.2.3 "Troubleshooting".
Referring to the operation manual for the XIDF-QCA804, confirm that the QCA/QVA
functions can be executed correctly.
632
No. 2J308-036EN*I
20.2.3 Troubleshooting
(1) If the dongle does not light in red.
The driver is not installed properly.
Remove the dongle once and then reconnect it. Use another USB port.
Try the following procedure.
(a) Right-click "My Computer" on the Windows 2000 desktop, then select "Manage"
from the menu that is displayed.
(b) The "Computer Management" window opens. Select "Device Manager".
633
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(c) In the lower hierarchy of the "Universal Serial Bus controller", the "Aladdin USB
Key" device can be found. If a yellow "!" (exclamation point) is shown on the device
icon, the device driver has not been installed properly. Right-click on the device
and select "Properties" from the menu that is displayed. The following dialog is
displayed.
(d) Selecting the [Driver] tab causes the dialog below to be displayed.
Click the [Update Driver…] button.
634
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(e) The screen below is displayed. Click the [Next] button.
(f) The screen below is displayed. Select "Display a list of the known…" and
click [Next].
635
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(g) Confirm that "Aladdin USB key" is displayed, then click [Next].
(h) Click [Next] one more time.
636
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(i) Click [Finish]. Confirm that a yellow "!" (exclamation point) is not shown on the
"Aladdin USB key" icon. If this procedure fails, perform installation again.
(2) After QCA/QVA is started, an error message indicating that a valid license for this
software could not be found may be displayed.
 The dongle is not attached.

Attach the dongle properly. If the dongle is already attached, use another USB port.
 License is incorrect.
Use a dongle with a valid license. If the problem occurs even when the correct dongle
is used, try the procedure described in step (1).
indicating that a valid license could not be found is displayed and the system cannot be
started.
A valid license for the service is required.
indicating that addition to the examination room menu failed is displayed.
The number of pages of the examination room menu may have exceeded 10.
Use the RingMenuEdit to create space in the examination room menu.
637
No. 2J308-036EN*I
20.2.4 Uninstall procedure
Use the following procedure to uninstall the XIDF-QCA804.
(1) Procedure
Start
Changing the
(2) optional settings
Shutdown
Reboot
End
(2) Change the optional settings
Start the DFP-8000A. Perform setting of the DFP-8000A to disable the XIDF-QCA804
functions.
(3) Remove the dongle
(b) Confirm that the system power is OFF. Remove the license key (dongle) of the
XIDF-QCA804 from the lower USB port1 of the SERVER PC.
After starting the DFP-8000A, use the [Post Process] or [Current Case] tab on the system
monitor to confirm that the functions of the XIDF-QCA804 cannot be started.
Also confirm that the functions of the XIDF-QCA804 cannot be started on the in-room
monitor.
638
No. 2J308-036EN*I
21. SETTING OF THE CV-3D FUNCTION (OPTION)
This section describes the installation procedures for the options (XIDF-QCA301 and
XIDF-QCA302 or XIDF-QCA301/A1 and XIDF-QCA302) that enable the use of the CV-3D function.
21.1 Items to Be Prepared
 Dongle, CD including software, and manuals provided with the XIDF-QCA301 or

XIDF-QCA301/A1
 Observation PC, switching HUB, and two Ethernet cables included with the XIDF-QCA302
21.2 Installation Procedures
(1) Procedures
639
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Setting the observation PC
(a) Initial setting for the observation PC
This subsection describes the setting procedure when the power of the observation
PC is first turned ON.
Note that this procedure applies to the PC (Dell Optiplex GX745) included in the
XIDF-QCA302. If another PC is to be installed, perform the equivalent setting
procedure as described in this subsection.
<1> Connect the LCD monitor, mouse, and keyboard to the PC main unit and then
turn the power ON.
<2> When the "Dell End User Software License Agreement" screen is displayed,
press the [Enter] key.
<3> When the "Welcome to Microsoft Windows" screen is displayed, click the [Next]
button at the lower right.
<4> When the "How should dates and currency appear?" window is displayed,
confirm the following settings and then click the [Next] button at the lower right.
I live closest to this region.  Japan

I type mostly in this language.  English (United States)
I use this type of keyboard.  US
<5> When the "The End User License Agreement" window is displayed, place a
check mark for "Yes, I accept" and then click the [Next] button at the lower right.
<6> When the "Help protect your PC" window is displayed, place a check mark for
"Help protect my PC by turning on Automatic Updates now (recommended)." and
then click the [Next] button at the lower right.
<7> When the "What's your computer name?" window is displayed, click the [Next]
button at the lower right without making any changes.
<8> When "What's your Administrator password?" is displayed, enter "xidf-qca302"

for the password and then click the [Next] button at the lower right.
<9> When "How will this computer connect to the Internet?" is displayed, place a
check mark for "Local area network (LAN)" and then click the [Next] button at the
lower right.
<10> When "Setting up a high speed connection" is displayed, place check marks for
"Obtain IP automatically" and "Obtain DNS automatically" and then click the
[Next] button at the lower right. Note that the IP address can be set if it has
already been assigned.
<11> When "Ready to register with Microsoft?" is displayed, place a check mark for
"No, not at this time." and then click the [Next] button at the lower right.
<12> When "Who will use this computer?" is displayed, enter "toshiba" in the Your
name field and then click the [Next] button at the lower right.
<13> When "Thank you!" is displayed, click the [Finish] button at the bottom.
<14> After some time, logon is automatically performed with the "toshiba" account.
640
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) Setting the account to Toshiba
<1> Select "Start"  "Control Panel"  "User Accounts".
<2> Select "toshiba" in the "User Accounts" dialog.
<3> Select "Create a password", enter "cv3d" for the password, and then click the
[CreatePassword] button.
<4> Select "Yes, Make Private" in the next window.
<5> Select the User Accounts dialog again and then select "Change the way users
log on or off". Click the "Cancel" button in the displayed dialog.
<6> Uncheck the "Use the welcome screen" box and click the [Apply Options] button.
<7> Log off and then log on to the system with the "toshiba" account.
(c) Setting the display options
<1> Right-click the window to display the context menu. Select "Properties" from the
displayed menu to display the Display Properties dialog.
<2> Select the [Screen Saver] tab and then select [None] from the Screen Saver
menu.
<3> Select the [Settings] tab. Set "1280 by 1024 pixels" for "Screen resolution" and
set "Highest (32 bit)" for "Color quality".
<4> Click the [Power ...] button in the Monitor power field in the [Screen Saver] tab.
<5> When the Power Options Properties dialog opens, in the Setting for Home/Office
Desk power scheme field, set "Never" for "Turn off monitor", "Turn off hard disk",
"System stand by", and "System hibernate". Then click [OK].
<6> Start up Explorer. Copy the bmp file in the copy source folder of the software CD
as specified below.
<Copy source> <Copy destination>

Folder name : D:\Documents Folder name : C:\WINDOWS
File name : Startup_Screen.bmp File name : Startup_Screen.bmp
<7> Click the [Browse…] button in the [Desktop] tab and select the bmp file copied in
step <6>.
<8> Click the [OK] button at the bottom of the Display Properties dialog to complete
setting.
(d) Setting the sound options
<1> Select "Start"  "Control Panel"  "Sounds, Speech and Audio Devices".
<2> Select "Sound and Audio Devices".
<3> Place a check mark for "Mute" in Properties and then click the [OK] button to
complete setting.
641
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(e) Checking the MAC address
<1> Select "Start"  "All Programs"  "Accessories"  "Command Prompt".
<2> When the Command Prompt dialog opens, enter "ipconfig /all" (be sure to include
a space between "g" and "/") and then press the [Enter] key.
<3> Information on the Windows IP Configuration is displayed. Recode the 12-digit

value (**-**-**-**-**-**) displayed as "Physical Address".
<4> Click [X] at the upper right corner of the Command Prompt dialog.
(f) Applying the label
<1> Apply the XIDF-QCA301 or XIDF-QCA301/A1 label supplied with XIDF-QCA301

or XIDF-QCA301/A1 to the side of the observation PC.
For observation PCs shipped from the factory, the label has already been applied.
(g) Printer driver setting
Set a dummy printer driver. Even if an applicable printer driver is set to connect a
Windows printer, the following procedures need to be performed.
<1> Select "Start"  "Printer and Faxes".
<2> Select "Add a printer" in the Printer and Faxes dialog.
<3> When the following dialog is displayed, click [Next>].
642
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<4> When the following dialog is displayed, confirm that a check mark is placed in
only the "Local printer attached to this computer" check box and that no check
marks are placed in the other check boxes. Then click [Next>].
<5> When the following dialog is displayed, place a check mark for "Use the following
port", select "LPT1", and then click [Next>].
643
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<6> When the following dialog is displayed, select "Generic" for "Manufacturer" and
select "MS Publisher Color Printer" for "Printers".
<7> When the following dialog is displayed, enter "virtual printer for Paieon" in the
Printer name field and then click [Next>].
644
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<8> When the following dialog is displayed, select "No" and then click [Next>].
<9> When the setting confirmation dialog is displayed, confirm that the following
contents are displayed. After confirmation, click [Finish] to close the Add Printer
Wizard.
<10> Select "Start"  "Printer and Faxes" and confirm that the added printer is
displayed in the Printer and Faxes dialog. After confirmation, close the Printer
and Faxes dialog.
645
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Installing the software
(a) Installing the CV-3D software
<1> Insert the CD including the software created by the XIDF-QCA301 or

XIDF-QCA301/A1.
Open Explorer and create the directory "toshiba" under the C drive. Copy all the
folders in the "D:/ICView-3.2.0.481" folder in the CD that contains the software to
the "toshiba" folder.
<2> Click the .exe file in the following folder.
Folder name : C:\toshiba\ICView-3.2.0.481

File name : Setup.exe
<3> When the following Wizard dialog for installation is displayed, click [OK].
646
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<4> When the NET1.1 Framework installation dialog is displayed, click [Yes].
In the following dialog, select "I agree" and then click [Install].
When the following dialog is displayed, click [OK].
647
No. 2J308-036EN*I
The following dialog is displayed. Select "I Agree" and click [Next>].
The following dialog is displayed. Click [Continue].
648
No. 2J308-036EN*I
The following dialog is displayed. Select "Do not restart now" and click [Finish].
<6> When the following installation dialog of the .NET Framework 2.0 is displayed,
click [Next>].
649
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Select "I accept the terms of the License Agreement" in the dialog below and
click [Install].
Click [Finish] when the following dialog is displayed.
650
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<7> When the following installation dialog of the .NET Framework 3.5 is displayed,
select "I have read and ACCEPT the terms of the License Agreement" and click
[Install>].
When the following dialog is displayed, click [Exit].
651
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<8> When the following dialog is displayed, click [Yes].
<9> When the following window is displayed, click [Next>].
652
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<10> In the following dialog, enter "toshiba" for "User Name" and "TMSC" for
"Company Name". Then click [Next>].
<11> Select "Typical" and then click [Next>] in the following dialog.
653
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<12> Click [Next>] without making any changes in the following dialog.
<13> The following dialog is displayed and software installation is performed.
<14> The following dialog is displayed. Click [Yes] to reboot the system.
654
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<15> After the system is rebooted, log on as "ICViewAdmin".

"ICViewAdmin" is a service account. For service procedures, log on using this
account.
<16> The following dialog is displayed. Enter the password "cv3d" for the
"ICViewAdmin" account and click [OK].
<17> Create a shortcut for CV-3D plus software on the desktop.

Select "Start"  "All Programs"  "Paieon"  "CV-3D"  "CV-3D plus".
Right-click the CV-3D plus icon and select "Send To"  "Desk Top (Create
shortcut)".
<18> Right-click on the screen. From the displayed context menu, select "Properties"
to display the Display Properties dialog. Click [Browse…] in the [Desktop] tab
and select C:\WINDOWS\Startup_Screen.bmp. Click the [OK] button at the
bottom of the Display Properties dialog to quit the screen setting.
<19> User's account ("toshiba") has already been registered. To register an additional
user's account, select "Start"  "Control Panel"  "User Accounts" and add the
account.
655
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) Installing the HASP driver
<1> Start Explorer and double-click the following exe file in the following folder in the
CD including the software.
Folder name : D:\HASP-DRIVER\HASP_HL_driver_setup

File name : HASPUserSetup.exe
<2> When the following installation dialog opens, click [Next>].
<3> Select "I accept the license agreement" and then click [Install>].
<4> Installation starts.
656
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<5> When the following dialog is displayed, click [Finish] to close the installation
dialog.
(c) Installing the Help file
<1> Start up Explorer and double-click the following exe file in the following folder of
the software CD.
Folder name : D:\Acrobat

File name : AdbeRdr707_en_US.exe
<2> When the following installation dialog is displayed, click [Next>].
657
No. 2J308-036EN*I
658
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<5> When the following dialog is displayed, click [Install] to start installation.
<6> When the following dialog is displayed, click [Finish] to close the installation
dialog.
<7> Start up Explorer. Copy the PDF file in the copy source folder of the software CD
and save the file in the copy destination.
<Copy source>
Folder name : D:\Documents

File name : CardiOpBHelp.pdf
<Copy destination>
Folder name : C:\Paieon\CardiOp-B\Common\bin

File name : CardiOpBHelp.pdf
659
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<8> In Explorer, double-click the PDF file that was copied in step <7> to open the file.
When the following dialog is displayed, confirm that "English" is selected in the
"Select Language" field. Then click [Accept].
<9> When the User Manual provided by Paieon is displayed, close this PDF file.
<10> Remove the software CD from the CD drive and turn OFF the PC.
(4) Dongle setting
(a) Insert the dongle (shown in the following figure) into the USB port on the back of the
observation PC.
Serial No. (5 digits)
(b) Turn ON the power of the observation PC. Confirm that the dongle lights red.
660
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(5) Dongle file setting
(a) Creating the c2v file
<1> In Explorer, create the "toshiba" folder immediately under the C drive.
<2> Select "Start"  "All Programs"  "Paieon"  "CV-3D"  "hasprus".
<3> Select the [Collect Key Status Information] tab in the following dialog.
<4> Click the [Collect information] button.
661
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<5> When the "Save key status as" dialog is displayed, specify the "C:\toshiba" folder
from the "Save in" pull-down menu. Then specify the serial No. of the dongle in
the File name field as the file name.
(For example, if the serial No. is "01142", the file name will be "01142.c2v".
<6> When the [Save] button is clicked, the above dialog closes.
<7> When the c2v file is created, the following window is displayed. Click [X] at the
upper right corner to close the dialog.
<8> Copy the created c2v file to a USB memory device etc.
662
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) Asking Paieon to create a dongle file
<1> Send the following information items to the Field Support Dept. by e-mail to ask
them to create and send back a dongle file. Use the MAC address and dongle
serial No. of the observation PC and dongle that were used when creating the
c2v file.
 c2v file (2 KB; to be sent as an attachment)

 MAC address
 Dongle serial No.
 Installation site name
NOTE: 1. The dongle file specifies the PC in which the CardiOp-B software is used.
Using the dongle file and the dongle together, it is possible to prevent use
of the software in a PC other than that specified. When the dongle file is
registered, the contents of the dongle file are saved in the dongle.
2. The dongle file must be created in the following cases.
A) New installation
B) Change of computer
C) Change of MAC address (for example, when the communication card

is changed)
If the MAC address is changed due to PC replacement, it necessary to

ask Paieon to create a new dongle file. However, this is not necessary
when the hard disk of the PC is replaced.
3. After the e-mail is sent, a reply may not be received for several hours to
several days. Take this delay into consideration.
663
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(c) Registering the dongle file
<1> Copy the dongle file sent from Paieon ("01142.v2c" in the above example) to the
"C:\toshiba" folder from the USB memory device etc.
<2> Select "Start"  "All programs"  "Paieon"  "CV-3D"  "hasprus".
<3> In the following dialog, select the [Apply License Update] tab and then click the
[...] button at the lower right of the window.
<4> When the "Select the update file for new license" dialog is displayed, specify the
"C:\toshiba" folder in the "Look in" pull-down menu. Then select the dongle file
displayed at the center of the dialog.
664
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<5> Click the [Open] button to close the above dialog. Then click the [Apply update]
button.
<6> After the dongle file has been registered, the following window is displayed. Click
[X] at the upper right corner to close the dialog.
NOTE: The registration procedure using the acquired dongle file can be performed
only once. Even if the same registration procedure is performed using the
same file, an error will occur. In this case, the last registered condition is
maintained.
665
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(6) Network connection
Using the switching HUB and the two Ethernet cables included in XIDF-QCA302, connect
the observation PC installed in the control room and the DFP-8000A. Set the IP address for
the observation PC as required.
(7) DFP-8000A setting
When images are transferred from the DFP-8000A to the observation PC using the DICOM
Storage function, perform setting of the observation PC referring to subsection 17.4 "DICOM
Setting for the Remote Station". This procedure is similar to the setting for adding a DICOM
Storage server using the service tools. In addition, set the DICOM transfer conditions in
Utility mode.
(a) Register the host name and IP address of the observation PC referring to subsection
17.4.1.
Host name : Specify the computer name registered on the observation PC

(recommended name: "XIDF-QCA302").
IP address : Address assigned to the observation PC by the hospital network

administrator.
(b) Set the DICOM communication parameters referring to subsection 17.4.2.
Mnemonic Name : "CV-3D" (recommended)
AE Title : "ICView" (Do not set another value.)
Port Number : "4000" (Do not set another value.)
In "Supported DICOM Service", place a check mark for "Storage" only and then click
the [Save] button.
If multiple observation PCs are connected to a single LAN, the host name and AE title
can be changed.
(c) Close the service tools and then restart the DFP-8000A.
(d) Click the [File Presets] button in Utility mode and select "Node/Conversion".
The "Node setting" dialog box opens.
(e) Select the [Remote Node] tab. Do not place a check mark for "Spatial Filter" in
"Process Condition" for the "CV-3D Console" data transfer conditions
(f) Select [OK] to close the "Node setting" dialog box.
666
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(8) Setting of various functions for the observation PC
Log on to the PC using the service account "ICViewAdmin". Click the "CV-3D plus" icon to
start up the CV-3D plus software. Perform the procedures below.
(a) Select [Edit]  [Tools]  [Options] to display the Administration window.
(b) Select "General" from the Categories column to display the following window.
Start Up
Default Start Up Application : Set the default application to be started when the
system is started up. Select "Viewer", "CV3D",
"LVA", or "StentOp".
Calibration
IsoCenter Height (cm) : Set the value used when Auto Calibration is
performed for StentOptimizer.
Enter "110" when the CAS-880A is used in
combination.
Enter "105" when a C-arm other than the CAS-
880A is used in combination.
Logging
Maximal number of entries per file : "1000" (This does not need to be changed.)
Maximal Folder Size (Bytes) : "200000000" (This does not need to be changed.)
Log Level : "General Log" (This does not need to be
changed.)
667
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Storage Management
Storage Size (GB) : Specify the maximum size of the images stored in
the observation PC. "100" (This does not need to
be changed.)
Type of Deletion : Select "Manual" to retain images until they are
deleted manually.
Select "Auto" to automatically overwrite images in
order of date (oldest images overwritten first).
Store Location : " \Store" (This does not need to be changed.)
Report
Path for XML Reports : Specify the storage location of the CV-3D XML
report.
Automatic Markers Detection

Use TMSC Optimization : Set Automatic Markers Detection in Stent
Optimizer. "Yes" (The setting does not need to be
changed.)
(c) Select "Patient Explorer" from the Categories column to display the following window.
668
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Search
Default Search Database : Set the default search target. Select "Local",
"PACS", or "Both".
Maximal Number of Query Results : Specify the maximum number of entries that
can be received in DICOM Query.
Search by Physician Name : Select "Enable" to use the performing physician
name as the default search parameter.
Select "Disable" not to use the performing
physician name as the default search
parameter.
Load
Default Application on Study Selection: Specify the default application to be started up
after the desired study is selected from Patient
Explorer. Select "Viewer", "CV3D", "LVA", or
"StentOp".
Load File Button : Set to "Disable".
Burn
DVD Size (MB) : Maximum record size per DVD
CD Size (MB) : Maximum record size per CD-R
DVD Format : Format of the DVD media (This does not need
to be changed.)
CD Format : Format of the CD media (This does not need to
be changed.)
Include DICOM Viewer : Select "Yes" to record DICOM Viewer on each
CD-R.
Select "No" not to record DICOM Viewer on
each CD-R.
669
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(d) Select "PACS Connection: Storage" from the Categories column to display the
following window.
Primary
Server AE Title : AE title name of the PACS server
Server IP Address : IP address of the PACS server
Server Port : Port number of the PACS server
Client AE Title : AE title name of the observation PC
Endianness : Endian type used when images are transferred from the
observation PC.
This is usually set to "Little Endian".
VR : Value display type used when an image is transferred
from the observation PC.
"Explicit" (explicit VR), "Implicit" (implicit VR)
Secondary
Server AE Title : AE title name of the backup PACS server
Server IP Address : IP address of the backup PACS server
Server Port : Port number of the backup PACS server
Endianness : Endian type used when an image is transferred from the
observation PC
It is usually set to "Little Endian".
670
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Transfer Station
Transfer Station : Function for the automatic background transfer of all the
XA images received from the DFP-8000A by the
observation PC to the PACS server.
Select "Active" to perform the automatic transfer.
Select "Inactive" to not perform the automatic transfer.
Port Number : "4000" (Receiving port number. This does not need to
be changed.)
(e) Select "PACS Connection: Query Retrieve" from the Categories column to display the
following window.
Server AE Title : AE title name of the Q/R server

Server IP Address : IP address of the Q/R server
Server Port : Port number of the Q/R server
Client IP Address for Retrieve : IP address of the observation PC
Client Port : Port number of the observation PC
Endianness : Endian type used when an image is transferred from
the observation PC.
This is usually set to "Little Endian".
671
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(f) Select "PACS Connection: Storage Commitment" from the Categories column to
display the following screen. When the connecting PACS server does not correspond
to Storage Commitment, confirm that "Storage Commitment" is set to "Inactive".
PACS
PACS AE Title : AE title name of the PACS server corresponding to
Storage Commitment
PACS IP Address : IP address of the PACS server corresponding to
Storage Commitment
PACS Port : Port number of the PACS server corresponding to
Storage Commitment
CV-3D (SCU) AE Title : AE title name of the observation PC (for SCU)
C Arm
CV-3D (SCP) AE Title : AE title name of the observation PC (for SCP)
C Arm AE Title : AE title name of the DFP-8000A
C Arm IP Address : IP address of the DFP-8000A
C Arm Port : Port number of the DFP-8000A
Activity
Storage Commitment : Function to forward all received XA images from
DFP-8000A on the observation PC to PACS server
with Storage Commitment.
"Active" (Forward with Storage Commitment)

"Inactive" (Not forward with Storage Commitment)
The port number for Storage Commitment of the observation PC is the value set for Port
Number in the "PACS Connection: Storage" Transfer Station.
672
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(g) Select "Shared Folder" from the Categories column to display the following window.
Infinix Address : IP address that is used when communicating with

DFP-8000A through the shared folder I/F set in the
observation PC.
(h) On the observation PC, confirm that the following share folders are set using Explorer.
Shared folder Share name

Information C:\Paieon\CardiOp-B\Common\Store\INFINIX INFINIX
Logs C:\Paieon\CardiOp-B\Common\LogFiles ICView Log Files
673
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Follow the procedure below to check the Shared folder setting.
<1> Select the appropriate folder from Explorer. Right click the mouse to display a
pull-down menu and select "Sharing and Security…" from the pull-down menu.
The following dialog will be displayed.
Select "If you understand the security risks (omission), click here" in the
Network sharing and security column of this dialog.
<2> When the following dialog is displayed, select "Just enable file sharing" and
press [OK].
674
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<3> The following dialog will be displayed. Confirm that "Share this folder on the
network" and "Allow network users to change my files" are checked, that the
"Share name" has an appropriate shared name, and press [OK].
(i) The following should be set in the DFP-8000A in order to communicate through the
shared folder I/F.
<1> Option settings
In service settings, select Configurations  System  Options, and select the

following item.
 XIDF-QCA301/A1
<2> Setting Txs2ndConsole.ini file
Open F: \Celeve\TxsSite\Txs2ndCons\Txs2ndCons.ini file and set the following

items.
[Network_Setting]
; Shared folder
Shared_Folder = "\\2ndConsolePC\INFINIX"
··· Overwrite the IP address of the observation PC in
"2ndConsolePC".
(e.g.: "\\133.117.41.20\INFINIX")
; User name
User_Name = "user" ···· Set the user name. The default is "ICViewAdmin".
; Password
Password = "pass" ···· Set the password. The default is "cv3d".
675
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<3> Adding menu item
Add "Enhance" to the inspection protocol if needed.

Stent-enhanced image creation will be started by clicking "Enhance", with
StentOptimizer as the current tab on the observation PC. If the current tab is not
StentOptimizer, it will be changed automatically.
(j) After setting is complete, click the [OK] button in the lower part of the screen to reboot
the CV-3D plus software.
To restart the CV-3D plus software when logging on with the service account
"ICViewAdmin", right-click the "CV-3D plus" icon on the task bar, select "Shutdown All"
in the displayed pull down menu, and then click the "CV-3D plus" icon on the desktop.
To restart the CV-3D plus software when logging on with the user's account (the
default account at the time of shipment is "toshiba" and the password "cv3d"), select
[Session]  [Exit] from the menu of the CV-3D plus software. The system returns to
the Windows logon screen. Then log on again with the service account.
(a) Reconfirm that all of the items described in the installation quality check sheet
(2J308-037EN) have been performed. If any items have not been performed, perform
them.
(b) Perform operational checks referring to the operation manual supplied with this option.
The default account and password at the time of shipment are as follows.
Service account : [ICViewAdmin], password: [cv3d]

(Do not delete this account.)
User's account : [toshiba], password: [cv3d]

(Additionally register the user's account, as required.)
676
No. 2J308-036EN*I
If the CV-3D plus software is started up for the first time, the following dialog is
displayed. Select [Unblock].
The CV-3D plus software supports DICOM Verification. Therefore, select

"CV-3DConsole" in the host name field of the media and network server connection
confirmation dialog, which can be displayed by clicking the [Properties] button in the
study select mode. Then, click the [Test] button and check the DICOM connection
between the system and the observation PC.
(c) If the CV-3D plus software is opened while the dongle inserted in the observation PC
lights red, and the CV-3D plus software cannot be started up and the error message
"Invalid CardiOp License" is displayed, the dongle file may be incorrect.
Perform the procedures described in step (5) "Setting of the dongle file" again.
(d) Measure the image transfer time from the DFP-8000A to the observation PC under the
following conditions to confirm that the time is within the permissible range.
Start a study using the Map independent configuration study protocol, in which RUN
images are set to be transferred to the observation PC automatically.
Acquire five DA cuts under the following conditions: 1024  1024/12 bit, 30 fps, and
4-second acquisition. Measure the time from when the radiography button is released
to when the corresponding thumbnail images are listed on the left side of the
CV-3D software window. Confirm that the time is less than 40 seconds each for a total
of 5 cuts.
(e) If the PACS server has been connected, transfer the CV-3D report screen to the
PACS server. Confirm that the transferred report screen can be displayed at the
PACS server.
(f) If the observation PC is connected to a Windows printer installed in a hospital, check

whether the report window can be printed out using the printer.
677
No. 2J308-036EN*I
21.3 Uninstallation Procedures
(1) Procedures
(2) Uninstalling the software
(a) Uninstalling the CV-3D plus software
<1> Turn ON the power of the observation PC (CV-3D console).
<2> After startup of Windows XP, log on to the system using the "ICViewAdmin"
account (password: cv3d).
<3> Select "Start"  "Control Panel" and select "Add or Remove Programs".
<4> Select "CV-3D" from the "Add or Remove Programs" list and click
[Change/Remove].
678
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<5> The following dialog is displayed. Select "Remove" and click the [Next>] button.
<6> The following confirmation dialog is displayed. Click the [Yes] button to execute
the uninstallation.
<7> The following dialog is displayed, indicating that uninstallation is completed

normally. Click the [Finish] button to close the dialog.
679
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<8> Select "Start"  "Control Panel" and then select "Add or Remove Programs".
Confirm that "CV-3D" is no longer present in the displayed list of programs.
<9> Delete the CV-3D plus shortcut from the desktop.
(b) Uninstalling the Microsoft SQL server
<1> Of the icons displayed on the right side of the task bar, right-click the following
SQL Server icon (icon circled in red). When the pull-down menu is displayed,
select "Exit" to stop the SQL Server.
<2> Select "Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine" from the "Add or Remove
Programs" list and then click "Remove".
<3> When the following confirmation dialog opens, click [Yes].
<4> When the uninstallation procedure starts, the following dialog is displayed.
<5> When the uninstallation procedure has been completed normally, the dialog
closes automatically.
<6> Remove the CD including the software from the CD drive.
<7> Confirm that "Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine" has been removed from the
"Add or Remove Programs" list.
(c) Uninstalling the Adobe Reader software
<1> Select "Start"  "Control Panel" followed by "Add or Remove Programs".
<2> Select "Adobe Reader 7.0.7" from the Add or Remove Programs list and then
click "Remove".
680
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<3> When the following dialog opens, click [Yes].
<4> The following dialog opens and the uninstallation process starts.
<5> When the following dialog is displayed, uninstallation is completed. Click [Yes] to
restart the Observation PC.
<6> When the observation PC is restarted, confirm that "Adobe Reader 7.0.7" is
removed from the Add or Remove Programs list and that the Adobe Reader
shortcut icon is deleted from the desktop.
<7> Start up Explorer and delete all the files in the C:\toshiba folder.
<8> Right-click the recycle bin on the desktop and select "Empty Recycle Bin" to
delete all the files in the recycle bin.
(d) Uninstalling the HASP driver software
<1> From the "Add or Remove Programs" list, select "HASP HL Device Driver" and
then click [Change/Remove].
681
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<2> When the following dialog opens, select "Automatic" and then click [Next>].
<3> Preparation for uninstallation starts.
<4> When the following dialog is displayed, preparation for uninstallation is completed.
Click [Finish] to start the uninstallation procedure.
<5> When the uninstallation procedure is completed normally, the dialog closes
automatically.
<6> Confirm that "HASP HL Device Driver" has been removed from the "Add or
Remove Programs" list.
<7> Close "Add or Remove Programs" and "Control Panel".
<8> Shut down the observation PC.
682
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(a) Confirm that the observation PC has shut down.
(b) Remove the dongle connected to the USB port from the rear of the observation PC.
(4) Changing the DFP-8000A settings
Delete the observation PC settings that were added using the service tools when installing
this option as described in subsection 21.2 (7).
For the setting deletion procedure, refer to subsection 17.4 "DICOM Setting for the Remote
Station".
(a) Start the service tools and then select "DICOM" "Host&Services".
(b) Click the [>] button at the lower right of the Select Host window to move to the General
Node Properties window.
(c) Select "CV-3D" for "Logical Name" and then click the [Delete] button at the lower right
of the window.
(d) Click the [<] button at the lower right of the General Node Properties window to move
back to the Select Host window.
(e) Select "XIDF-QCA302" in the Host name selection field at the upper left of the window
and then click the [Delete] button at the lower right of the window.
(f) Close the service tools and then restart the DFP-8000A.
21.4 PC Requirements
The hardware requirements for the observation PC (used in this option) are listed here.
Item Recommended Configuration by Paieon Configuration shipped by TMSC *

CPU Pentium 4, 3.0 GHz Core 2 Duo, 3.0 GHz
Chipset 915 E8400
FSB Dual Channel 533 MHz Dual Channel 1333 MHz
RAM 2 GB fast memory 2 GB fast memory
HDD SCSI (36 GB) + ATA 7200 rpm (120 GB) S-ATA (160 GB) 7200 rpm
or S-ATA (120 GB)
Graphic Board ATI Radeon, Intel, S3, 128 MB, supports ATI Radeon, HD3450, 256 MB
high resolution
(SXGA 1280  1024)
Monitor Flat, 19", 16 ms, high contrast, high Flat, 19", 16 ms, high contrast, high
resolution (SXGA 1280  1024) resolution (SXGA 1280  1024)
Ethernet card 1 Gb 10/100/1000 Mb (On board)
KB Standard Standard
Mouse Standard Optical mouse Standard Optical mouse
CDR-DVD/CDR Std CDR or DVD writer DVD/CD-RW
OS Microsoft® Windows® Microsoft® Windows®
XP Professional Service Pack 2 XP Professional Service Pack 2
Not x64 Edition
* TMSC supplies Dell's PC model "Optiplex 960" as XIDF-QCA302.
683
No. 2J308-036EN*I
21.5 Reinstalling the Software
If the PC disk of the XIDF-QCA302 is replaced (because, for example, the original disk failed)
and the PC software must be reinstalled, reinstall the software by following the procedures below.
(1) Parts required
(a) Basic environment structure tool (recovery CD)
 CD : 6 "CV-3D 302 PC RECOVERY"
(b) CV-3D software
 CD : 1 "CV-3D PC APPL"
(2) Reinstallation procedures
A flowchart of the reinstallation procedures is shown below.
21.5.1 Installing the basic environment using the recovery CD


21.2 (3) (a) Installing the CV-3D software

21.2 (3) (b) Installing the HASP driver

21.2 (3) (c) Installing the Help file

21.2 (4) Dongle setting

21.2 (5) Dongle file setting

21.2 (6) Network connection

21.2 (7) DFP-8000A setting

21.2 (8) Setting of various functions for the observation PC

21.2 (9) Operational checks
684
No. 2J308-036EN*I
21.5.1 Installing the basic environment using the recovery CD
(1) Initialization of the hard disk
(a) Turn ON the power of the XIDF-QCA302 and set the recovery disk (1/6) in the CD
tray.
(b) When "DELL" appears on the display, press [F12].
(c) When the display such as:
Boot Device Menu

*Onboard or USB CD-ROM Drive
*#0500 ID00 Dell VIRTUAL DISK
*Onboard or USB CD-ROM Drive
is displayed during the startup process, move a cursor to "*Onboard or USB

CD-ROM Drive" and press [Enter]. "Press any key to boot from CD …" is displayed
for a few seconds. Press a space key.
(d) When Windows has started up, the command console screen opens and TMSC
Restore tool is executed. When the messages "Insert the next CD into the drive"
and "Press any key to continue …" are displayed, insert the next CD (2/6) and press
the space key.
(e) Ghost32 11.0 screen opens and the progress indicator statistics are updated.
(f) When "Span Volume [1/2] Done (1660)" is displayed, insert the next CD and click
[OK].
(g) When initialization of the hard disk is complete, the XIDF-QCA302 is automatically
restarted. Remove the CD from the CD tray.
(h) Press the [F2] key during startup processing to open the BIOS setting dialog
(title bar: "Dell Inc. Optiplex 960").
If [F2] is not pressed during startup, the message "We apologize for the
inconvenience, but Windows did not start successfully" appears. In this case, click
"Start Windows Normally" in the lower part of the message window and press the
[Enter] key to restart the system. Press the [F2] key during startup to open the
BIOS setting dialog.
(i) In the tree-view pane on the left of the BIOS setting dialog, select
"Drivers"  "SATA Operation" to display the SATA Operation window on the right
side of the display.
685
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(j) Select the "RAID Autodetect/ATA" radio button instead of the "RAID On" radio
button. A warning window opens. In the window, click [Yes].
(k) Click [Apply] in the lower part of the BIOS setting dialog.
(l) Click [Exit] to close the BIOS setting dialog.
(m) Wait until the message "We apologize for the inconvenience, but Windows did not
start successfully" appears. Click "Start Windows Normally" in the lower part of the
message window and press the [Enter] key to restart the system.
(2) Windows XP setup
When initialization of the hard disk is complete, "Windows XP Setup" is executed.
(a) In Welcome to the Windows XP Setup Wizard, click the [Next] button.
(b) In License Agreement, select "I accept this agreement" and click the [Next] button.
(c) In Your Product Key, enter the Product Key on the license sticker attached to the
PC of the XIDF-QCA302 and click the [Next] button.
(d) When processing in Performing Final Tasks is complete, the system is restarted.
686
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Activation
(a) Windows XP is started up and the login screen is displayed. Log in to the system
using the following user name and password.
User name : toshiba

Password : cv3d
(b) Execute activation after login.
Execute "Activate Windows" from the start menu as follows.
"Start"  "All Programs"  "Accessories"  "System Tools"  "Activate Windows"
(c) When Activate Windows is activated, the following window is displayed.

To activate Windows by telephone, select "Yes, I want to telephone a customer
service representative to activate Windows" and click the [Next] button.
(d) When the following window opens, perform telephone authentication.
687
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<1> At "Step 1: Select your location", select "United States".
<2> Call the number shown in "Step 2".
<3> Press the push button following the voice guidance.
Language of voice guidance: English
Type of license authentication: Windows XP
<4> Entry of installation ID number is required. Following the guidance, enter the
numbers in "Step 3" (6 digits x 9) using the push buttons.
<5> The confirmation ID numbers are read out. Enter them in boxes A to G in
"Step 4".
<6> Click the [Next] button.
(e) The following window opens and activation is now complete.
(f) If activation has been performed, the following window is opened when Activate
Windows is executed.
(g) If the recovery disk is inserted in the CD tray of the XIDF-QCA302, remove it.
688
No. 2J308-036EN*I
22. ADJUSTMENT FOR 3D-DSA/DA (OPTION)
22.1 Calibration Procedure
22.1.1 Preparation for work
CAUTION: Precautions when the TFP-1216A is used in combination

1. If the FPD orientation (portrait/landscape) during 3D calibration
image acquisition and that during 3D image acquisition are
different, calibration may not be performed correctly.
2. After the FPD orientation is changed, reacquire 3D calibration

images with the changed orientation and send the images to the 3D
reconstruction PC/angiography workstation. The 3D calibration
table is updated. If the calibration table is not updated, calibration
may not be performed correctly.
3. For 3D images acquired before changing the FPD orientation,

perform 3D reconstruction processing before updating the 3D
calibration table. After the table is updated, calibration may not be
4. Explain items 1, 2, and 3 above to the user.
5. "Portrait" has been selected at the time of shipment. Do not change

the setting to "Landscape" unless requested to do so by the user.
NOTE: 1. The FPD orientation can be reproduced by auto-positioning. Set the C-arm
rotation angle to 0 and reproduce the position by auto-positioning.
For the auto-positioning procedures, refer to the operation manual.
 Portrait : Auto-positioning No. 90 (CAS-830A),

No. 50 (CAS-880A, CAS-830B)
 Landscape : Auto-positioning No. 91 (CAS-830A),
No. 51 (CAS-880A, CAS-830B)
2. If the beam limiting device blades are visible in the image during 3D calibration
adjustment margin, refer to (1) (b) of subsection 4.1.3 "Display contents list" in the
service manual 2D308-016EN.
689
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(1) Checking the parts required
The following parts are required for calibration work.
 Helical ball phantom (provided with the XIDF-3DP801, XIDF-AWS801) : 1
(a) Helical ball phantom
It is necessary to correct for vibration during C-arm rotation at the support unit to
ensure accurate 3D reconstruction processing. The helical ball phantom is
mounted on the table and is used to acquire image data for correcting for
rotational vibration.
This phantom consists of a syringe barrel which is made of acrylic resin and a
base supporting the syringe barrel. Steel balls are embedded in the syringe
barrel at equal intervals in a helical pattern. Rotational vibration is corrected by
analyzing the positions of the steel balls projected on the image.
Helical ball phantom
(2) Checking the settings and starting up the system
Confirm that the XIDF-3DP801, XIDF-AWS801 settings have been performed as

described in the installation manual. (If several reconstruction PCs/angiography
workstation exist on the same LAN, refer to subsection 29.16 "Setting Procedures When
Several 3D-Angio Systems Are Used".) Then confirm that the 3D options are effective
referring to subsection 5.2.5 "Config. window". Also confirm that the setting for "DICOM
(3DWS AE Title)" has been performed properly in advance.
Turn the power of the XIDF-3DP801, XIDF-AWS801 ON and confirm that it starts up
normally.
Then turn the power of the Infinix-i series system ON and confirm that it starts up
normally.
690
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Setting the calibration protocol "3D Calibration"
The number of acquisition programs registered to the calibration protocol "3D Calibration"
by default differs according to the FPD size. The acquisition conditions of the registered
acquisition programs also differ according to the FPD size.
When XDIF-LCI801 is used in combination, the acquisition program (Flood only) for each
Beam Filter is registered in the calibration protocol "3D Calibration". Before performing
calibration, create "3D Calibration" with the tool below. It is necessary to register the
acquisition program that supports the filters to be used with LCI.
(a) Calibration protocol edit tool: Txs3DcalibPrtclMaker

Select "Txs3DcalibPrtclMaker" from the Command Line of the service tool, and click
[GO]. The following tool will be activated.
(b) Place a check mark for the beam filter* that is used in LCI (Beam Filter3 is checked
by default and cannot be unchecked). Click [OK] to start "3D Calibration" creation.
* The recommended setting is the use of Beam Filter1and Beam Filter3. The
material and thickness of the beam filter can be checked from [Additional Filter
Info] in Utility.
(c) The following dialog is displayed after creation is completed. Click [OK] and close
the tool.
691
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(d) The acquisition program for Beam Filter that was checked earlier using the tool
above is the only registered program in "3D Calibration". Use "3D Calibration" to
perform calibration.
NOTE: If the XIDF-3DP801, XIDF-AWS801 software is V3.71 or earlier, there is no

function for creating a calibration protocol for each beam filter.
Note that it is not useful to acquire multiple types of beam filter calibration
images. To create "3D Calibration" uncheck all items except "BeamFilter3" in
the calibration protocol edit tool.
(e) Acquisition program
FPD (SID/FPD size)

Acquisition program TFP-800A TFP-1200A
or TFP-1216A or
TFP-800B TFP-1200B
FI#1LCIFLF1 (*1) - 120 cm/16''/BF1 -
FI#1LCIMLF1 (*1) - 120 cm/16''/BF1 -
FI#1LCIHLF1 (*1) - 120 cm/16''/BF1 -
FI#1LCIFLF2 (*1) - 120 cm/16''/BF2 -
FI#1LCIMLF2 (*1) - 120 cm/16''/BF2 -
FI#1LCIHLF2 (*1) - 120 cm/16''/BF2 -
FI#1LCIFLF3 (*1) - 120 cm/16''/BF3 -
FI#1LCIMLF3 (*1) - 120 cm/16''/BF3 -
FI#1LCIHLF3 (*1) - 120 cm/16''/BF3 -
FI#1LCIFLF4 (*1) - 120 cm/16''/BF4 -
FI#1LCIMLF4 (*1) - 120 cm/16''/BF4 -
FI#1LCIHLF4 (*1) - 120 cm/16''/BF4 -
FI#1LCIHLF5 (*3) - 120 cm/16''/BF5 -
FI#1LCIMLF5 (*3) - 120 cm/16''/BF5 -
FI#1LCIHLF5 (*3) - 120 cm/16''/BF5 -
FI#2LCIFLF1 (*1) - 110 cm/16''/BF1 -
FI#2LCIMLF1 (*1) - 110 cm/16''/BF1 -
FI#2LCIHLF1 (*1) - 110 cm/16''/BF1 -
FI#2LCIFLF2 (*1) - 110 cm/16''/BF2 -
FI#2LCIMLF2 (*1) - 110 cm/16''/BF2 -
FI#2LCIHLF2 (*1) - 110 cm/16''/BF2 -
FI#2LCIFLF3 (*1) - 110 cm/16''/BF3 -
FI#2LCIMLF3 (*1) - 110 cm/16''/BF3 -
FI#2LCIHLF3 (*1) - 110 cm/16''/BF3 -
692
No. 2J308-036EN*I
FPD (SID/FPD size)

or TFP-1216A or
TFP-800B TFP-1200B
FI#2LCIFLF4 (*1) - 110 cm/16''/BF4 -
FI#2LCIMLF4 (*1) - 110 cm/16''/BF4 -
FI#2LCIHLF4 (*1) - 110 cm/16''/BF4 -
FI#2LCIFLF5 (*3) - 110 cm/16''/BF5 -
FI#2LCIMLF5 (*3) - 110 cm/16''/BF5 -
FI#2LCIHLF5 (*3) - 110 cm/16''/BF5 -
FI#3LCIFLF1 (*1) - 120 cm/12''/BF1 -
FI#3LCIMLF1 (*1) - 120 cm/12''/BF1 -
FI#3LCIHLF1 (*1) - 120 cm/12''/BF1 -
FI#3LCIFLF2 (*1) - 120 cm/12''/BF2 -
FI#3LCIMLF2 (*1) - 120 cm/12''/BF2 -
FI#3LCIHLF2 (*1) - 120 cm/12''/BF2 -
FI#3LCIFLF3 (*1) - 120 cm/12''/BF3 -
FI#3LCIMLF3 (*1) - 120 cm/12''/BF3 -
FI#3LCIHLF3 (*1) - 120 cm/12''/BF3 -
FI#3LCIFLF4 (*1) - 120 cm/12''/BF4 -
FI#3LCIMLF4 (*1) - 120 cm/12''/BF4 -
FI#3LCIHLF4 (*1) - 120 cm/12''/BF4 -
FI#3LCIFLF5 (*3) - 120 cm/12''/BF5 -
FI#3LCIMLF5 (*3) - 120 cm/12''/BF5 -
FI#3LCIHLF5 (*3) - 120 cm/12''/BF5 -
FI#4LCIFLF1 (*1) - 110 cm/12''/BF1 -
FI#4LCIMLF1 (*1) - 110 cm/12''/BF1 -
FI#4LCIHLF1 (*1) - 110 cm/12''/BF1 -
FI#4LCIFLF2 (*1) - 110 cm/12''/BF2 -
FI#4LCIMLF2 (*1) - 110 cm/12''/BF2 -
FI#4LCIHLF2 (*1) - 110 cm/12''/BF2 -
FI#4LCIFLF3 (*1) - 110 cm/12''/BF3 -
FI#4LCIMLF3 (*1) - 110 cm/12''/BF3 -
FI#4LCIHLF3 (*1) - 110 cm/12''/BF3 -
FI#4LCIFLF4 (*1) - 110 cm/12''/BF4 -
FI#4LCIMLF4 (*1) - 110 cm/12''/BF4 -
FI#4LCIHLF4 (*1) - 110 cm/12''/BF4 -
FI#4LCIFLF5 (*3) - 110 cm/12''/BF5 -
FI#4LCIMLF5 (*3) - 110 cm/12''/BF5 -
FI#4LCIHLF5 (*3) - 110 cm/12''/BF5 -
FI#1LCIFPF1 (*1) - 120 cm/12''/BF1 -
FI#1LCIMPF1 (*1) - 120 cm/12''/BF1 -
FI#1LCIHPF1 (*1) - 120 cm/12''/BF1 -
FI#1LCIFPF2 (*1) - 120 cm/12''/BF2 -
FI#1LCIMPF2 (*1) - 120 cm/12''/BF2 -
FI#1LCIHPF2 (*1) - 120 cm/12''/BF2 -
FI#1LCIFPF3 (*1) - 120 cm/12''/BF3 -
FI#1LCIMPF3 (*1) - 120 cm/12''/BF3 -
FI#1LCIHPF3 (*1) - 120 cm/12''/BF3 -
FI#1LCIFPF4 (*1) - 120 cm/12''/BF4 -
FI#1LCIMPF4 (*1) - 120 cm/12''/BF4 -
FI#1LCIHPF4 (*1) - 120 cm/12''/BF4 -
FI#1LCIFPF5 (*3) - 120 cm/12''/BF5 -
FI#1LCIMPF5 (*3) - 120 cm/12''/BF5 -
FI#1LCIHPF5 (*3) - 120 cm/12''/BF5 -
693
No. 2J308-036EN*I
FPD (SID/FPD size)

or TFP-1216A or
TFP-800B TFP-1200B
FI#1LCIFF1 (*1) 120 cm/8''/BF1 (*2) - 120 cm/12''/BF1
FI#1LCIMF1 (*1) 120 cm/8''/BF1 (*2) - 120 cm/12''/BF1
FI#1LCIHF1 (*1) 120 cm/8''/BF1 (*2) - 120 cm/12''/BF1
FI#2LCIFPF1 (*1) - 110 cm/12''/BF1 -
FI#2LCIMPF1 (*1) - 110 cm/12''/BF1 -
FI#2LCIHPF1 (*1) - 110 cm/12''/BF1 -
FI#2LCIFPF2 (*1) - 110 cm/12''/BF2 -
FI#2LCIMPF2 (*1) - 110 cm/12''/BF2 -
FI#2LCIHPF2 (*1) - 110 cm/12''/BF2 -
FI#2LCIFPF3 (*1) - 110 cm/12''/BF3 -
FI#2LCIMPF3 (*1) - 110 cm/12''/BF3 -
FI#2LCIHPF3 (*1) - 110 cm/12''/BF3 -
FI#2LCIFPF4 (*1) - 110 cm/12''/BF4 -
FI#2LCIMPF4 (*1) - 110 cm/12''/BF4 -
FI#2LCIHPF4 (*1) - 110 cm/12''/BF5 -
FI#2LCIFPF5 (*3) - 110 cm/12''/BF5 -
FI#2LCIMPF5 (*3) - 110 cm/12''/BF5 -
FI#2LCIHPF5 (*3) - 110 cm/12''/BF5 -
694
No. 2J308-036EN*I
FPD (SID/FPD size)

or TFP-1216A or
TFP-800B TFP-1200B
FI#3LCIFPF1 (*2) - 120 cm/8''/BF1 -
FI#3LCIMPF1 (*2) - 120 cm/8''/BF1 -
FL#3LCIHPF1 (*2) - 120 cm/8''/BF1 -
FI#3LCIFPF2 (*2) - 120 cm/8''/BF2 -
FI#3LCIMPF2 (*2) - 120 cm/8''/BF2 -
FL#3LCIHPF2 (*2) - 120 cm/8''/BF2 -
FI#3LCIFPF3 (*2) - 120 cm/8''/BF3 -
FI#3LCIMPF3 (*2) - 120 cm/8''/BF3 -
FL#3LCIHPF3 (*2) - 120 cm/8''/BF3 -
FI#3LCIFPF4 (*2) - 120 cm/8''/BF4 -
FI#3LCIMPF4 (*2) - 120 cm/8''/BF4 -
FL#3LCIHPF4 (*2) - 120 cm/8''/BF4 -
FI#3LCIFPF5 (*3) - 120 cm/8''/BF5 -
FI#3LCIMPF5 (*3) - 120 cm/8''/BF5 -
FL#3LCIHPF5 (*3) - 120 cm/8''/BF5 -
Fl#3LCIFF1 (*2) - - 120 cm/8''/BF1
Fl#3LCIMF1 (*2) - - 120 cm/8''/BF1
Fl#3LCIHF1 (*2) - - 120 cm/8''/BF1
Fl#3LCIFF2 (*2) - - 120 cm/8''/BF2
Fl#3LCIMF2 (*2) - - 120 cm/8''/BF2
Fl#3LCIHF2 (*2) - - 120 cm/8''/BF2
Fl#3LCIFF3 (*2) - - 120 cm/8''/BF3
Fl#3LCIMF3 (*2) - - 120 cm/8''/BF3
Fl#3LCIHF3 (*2) - - 120 cm/8''/BF3
Fl#3LCIFF4 (*2) - - 120 cm/8''/BF4
Fl#3LCIMF4 (*2) - - 120 cm/8''/BF4
Fl#3LCIHF4 (*2) - - 120 cm/8''/BF4
Fl#3LCIFF5 (*3) - - 120 cm/8''/BF5
Fl#3LCIMF5 (*3) - - 120 cm/8''/BF5
Fl#3LCIHF5 (*3) - - 120 cm/8''/BF5
Fl#4LCIFPF1 (*2) - 110 cm/8''/BF1 -
Fl#4LCIMPF1 (*2) - 110 cm/8''/BF1 -
Fl#4LCIHPF1 (*2) - 110 cm/8''/BF1 -
Fl#4LCIFPF2 (*2) - 110 cm/8''/BF2 -
Fl#4LCIMPF2 (*2) - 110 cm/8''/BF2 -
Fl#4LCIHPF2 (*2) - 110 cm/8''/BF2 -
Fl#4LCIFPF3 (*2) - 110 cm/8''/BF3 -
Fl#4LCIMPF3 (*2) - 110 cm/8''/BF3 -
Fl#4LCIHPF3 (*2) - 110 cm/8''/BF3 -
Fl#4LCIFPF4 (*2) - 110 cm/8''/BF4 -
Fl#4LCIMPF4 (*2) - 110 cm/8''/BF4 -
Fl#4LCIHPF4 (*2) - 110 cm/8''/BF4 -
Fl#4LCIFPF5 (*3) - 110 cm/8''/BF5 -
Fl#4LCIMPF5 (*3) - 110 cm/8''/BF5 -
Fl#4LCIHPF5 (*3) - 110 cm/8''/BF5 -
695
No. 2J308-036EN*I
FPD (SID/FPD size)

or TFP-1216A or
TFP-800B TFP-1200B
Fl#4LCIFF1 (*2) - - 110 cm/8''/BF1
Fl#4LCIMF1 (*2) - - 110 cm/8''/BF1
Fl#4LCIHF1 (*2) - - 110 cm/8''/BF1
Fl#4LCIFF2 (*2) - - 110 cm/8''/BF2
Fl#4LCIMF2 (*2) - - 110 cm/8''/BF2
Fl#4LCIHF2 (*2) - - 110 cm/8''/BF2
Fl#4LCIFF3 (*2) - - 110 cm/8''/BF3
Fl#4LCIMF3 (*2) - - 110 cm/8''/BF3
Fl#4LCIHF3 (*2) - - 110 cm/8''/BF3
Fl#4LCIFF4 (*2) - - 110 cm/8''/BF4
Fl#4LCIMF4 (*2) - - 110 cm/8''/BF4
Fl#4LCIHF4 (*2) - - 110 cm/8''/BF4
Fl#4LCIFF5 (*3) - - 110 cm/8''/BF5
Fl#4LCIMF5 (*3) - - 110 cm/8''/BF5
Fl#4LCIHF5 (*3) - - 110 cm/8''/BF5
FI#5LCIFLF1 (*2) - 120 cm/8''/BF1 -
FI#5LCIMLF1 (*2) - 120 cm/8''/BF1 -
FL#5LCIHLF1 (*2) - 120 cm/8''/BF1 -
FI#5LCIFLF2 (*2) - 120 cm/8''/BF2 -
FI#5LCIMLF2 (*2) - 120 cm/8''/BF2 -
FL#5LCIHLF2 (*2) - 120 cm/8''/BF2 -
FI#5LCIFLF3 (*2) - 120 cm/8''/BF3 -
FI#5LCIMLF3 (*2) - 120 cm/8''/BF3 -
FL#5LCIHLF3 (*2) - 120 cm/8''/BF3 -
FI#5LCIFLF4 (*2) - 120 cm/8''/BF4 -
FI#5LCIMLF4 (*2) - 120 cm/8''/BF4 -
FL#5LCIHLF4 (*2) - 120 cm/8''/BF4 -
FI#5LCIFLF5 (*3) - 120 cm/8''/BF5 -
FI#5LCIMLF5 (*3) - 120 cm/8''/BF5 -
FL#5LCIHLF5 (*3) - 120 cm/8''/BF5 -
FI#6LCIFLF1 (*2) - 110 cm/8''/BF1 -
FI#6LCIMLF1 (*2) - 110 cm/8''/BF1 -
FI#6LCIHLF1 (*2) - 110 cm/8''/BF1 -
FI#6LCIFLF2 (*2) - 110 cm/8''/BF2 -
FI#6LCIMLF2 (*2) - 110 cm/8''/BF2 -
FI#6LCIHLF2 (*2) - 110 cm/8''/BF2 -
FI#6LCIFLF3 (*2) - 110 cm/8''/BF3 -
FI#6LCIMLF3 (*2) - 110 cm/8''/BF3 -
FI#6LCIHLF3 (*2) - 110 cm/8''/BF3 -
FI#6LCIFLF4 (*2) - 110 cm/8''/BF4 -
FI#6LCIMLF4 (*2) - 110 cm/8''/BF4 -
FI#6LCIHLF4 (*2) - 110 cm/8''/BF4 -
FI#6LCIFLF5 (*3) - 110 cm/8''/BF5 -
FI#6LCIMLF5 (*3) - 110 cm/8''/BF5 -
FI#6LCIHLF5 (*3) - 110 cm/8''/BF5 -
696
No. 2J308-036EN*I
FPD (SID/FPD size)

or TFP-1216A or
TFP-800B TFP-1200B
Flood #1 120 cm/8'' 120 cm/12'' 120 cm/12''
Flood #2 110 cm/8'' 110 cm/12'' 110 cm/12''
Flood #3 - 120 cm/8'' 120 cm/8''
Flood #4 - 110 cm/8'' 110 cm/8''
Flood #5 - - -
Flood #6 - - -
Helix #1 120 cm/8'' 120 cm/12'' 120 cm/12''
Helix #2 110 cm/8'' 110 cm/12'' 110 cm/12''
Helix #3 - 120 cm/8'' 120 cm/8''
Helix #4 - 110 cm/8'' 110 cm/8''
Helix #5 - - -
Helix #6 - - -
He#1LCIFP (*1) - 120 cm/12'' -
He#1LCIMP (*1) - 120 cm/12'' -
He#1LCIHP (*1) - 120 cm/12'' -
He#1LCIF (*1) 120 cm/8'' (*2) - 120 cm/12''
He#1LCIM (*1) 120 cm/8'' (*2) - 120 cm/12''
He#1LCIH (*1) 120 cm/8'' (*2) - 120 cm/12''
He#2LCIFP (*1) - 110 cm/12'' -
He#2LCIMP (*1) - 110 cm/12'' -
He#2LCIHP (*1) - 110 cm/12'' -
He#2LCIF (*1) 110 cm/8'' (*2) - 110 cm/12''
He#2LCIM (*1) 110 cm/8'' (*2) - 110 cm/12''
He#2LCIH (*1) 110 cm/8'' (*2) - 110 cm/12''
He#3LCIFP (*2) - 120 cm/8'' -
He#3LCIMP (*2) - 120 cm/8'' -
He#3LCIHP (*2) - 120 cm/8'' -
He#3LCIF (*2) - - 120 cm/8''
He#3LCIM (*2) - - 120 cm/8''
He#3LCIH (*2) - - 120 cm/8''
He#4LCIFP (*2) - 110 cm/8'' -
He#4LCIMP (*2) - 110 cm/8'' -
He#4LCIHP (*2) - 110 cm/8'' -
He#4LCIF (*2) - - 110 cm/8''
He#4LCIM (*2) - - 110 cm/8''
He#4LCIH (*2) - - 110 cm/8''
He#1LCIFL (*1) - 120 cm/16'' -
He#1LCIML (*1) - 120 cm/16'' -
He#1LCIHL (*1) - 120 cm/16'' -
He#2LCIFL (*1) - 110 cm/16'' -
He#2LCIML (*1) - 110 cm/16'' -
He#2LCIHL (*1) - 110 cm/16'' -
697
No. 2J308-036EN*I
FPD (SID/FPD size)

or TFP-1216A or
TFP-800B TFP-1200B
He#3LCIFL (*1) - 120 cm/12'' -
He#3LCIML (*1) - 120 cm/12'' -
He#3LCIHL (*1) - 120 cm/12'' -
He#4LCIFL (*1) - 110 cm/12'' -
He#4LCIML (*1) - 110 cm/12'' -
He#4LCIHL (*1) - 110 cm/12'' -
He#5LCIFL (*2) - 120 cm/8'' -
He#5LCIML (*2) - 120 cm/8'' -
He#5LCIHL (*2) - 120 cm/8'' -
He#6LCIFL (*2) - 110 cm/8'' -
He#6LCIML (*2) - 110 cm/8'' -
He#6LCIHL (*2) - 110 cm/8'' -
(*1) In combination with XIDF-LCI801 only

(*2) Only when the XIDF-LCI801 is used in combination (V4.22 or later)
(*3) V4.31 or later
698
No. 2J308-036EN*I
The setting items common to all acquisition programs are shown below.
<Acquisition programs for 3D-DSA/3D-DA>
3D-DSA, 3D-DA
All TFP
Acquisition sequence MRC (*1)
DSA acquisition matrix 1024
C-arm set orientation From the patient head end (C-arm support column angle: 0)
C-arm rotation speed Up to 50/s
C-arm rotation range RAO 103 to LAO 103 (fixed)
Acquisition trigger 2 deg/frame
Contrast delay time 1.5 seconds
DSA dose 77.4 nC/kg
*1) The acquisition sequence can be changed to MC (Mask-Contrast). However, MRC is

recommended since artifacts may be generated.
<LCI acquisition program>
LCI
TFP-1216A, TFP-1200A, or TFP-1200B
Acquisition sequence C
DSA acquisition matrix 1024
C-arm set orientation From the patient head end (C-arm support column angle: 0)
C-arm rotation speed Up to 25/s
C-arm rotation range RAO 120 to LAO 120 (maximum)
Acquisition rate 30 frame/s
Radiographic dose 77.4 nC/kg
*1) In V4.22 or later, it is possible to use the LCI acquisition program in all the TFP types.
699
No. 2J308-036EN*I
22.1.2 Data acquisition
Acquire the following image data for each SID and FOV using the calibration phantoms.
Data acquisition must be performed using FOVs with which 3D radiography can be performed.
The following table shows whether 3D radiography is enabled or disabled for each FOV.
(The following table applies to the standard FPD. If the FPD is modified, this table may not be
applicable.)
FOV (Detector field size [inches])

Detector size
4.5 5 6 7 8 10 12 16
TFP-800A/A1 - Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled - - -
or (*1)
TFP-800B
TFP-1216A - - Disabled - Enabled - Enabled Enabled
(*1) (*2)
TFP-1200A Disabled - Disabled - Enabled Disabled Enabled -
or (*1)
TFP-1200B
(*1) Disabled for LCI. Note, however, that it is enabled for LCI in V4.22 or later.
(*2) Enabled when LCI is performed and the FPD is set at the landscape orientation.
(1) Procedures for data acquisition
(a) Registering patients for calibration
Register patients on the system console and select calibration protocol "3D
calibration" for the examination protocol.
(b) Preparation for image data acquisition
When examination starts, the system automatically switches to Acquisition mode,

and an acquisition program specified in step (3) of subsection 22.1.1 is selected.
Change the menu on the reference monitor from [Sequence] to [3D-DSA] using the
menu operating lever.
(c) Acquiring image data without phantom
Perform the following procedures for each FOV to be acquired.
<1> Confirm that the acquisition mode specified in step (3) of subsection 22.1.1 is
selected.
<2> Select the auto-positioning number listed in the table below. Hold down the C-
arm/Tabletop Operation Start lever on the Hyper-handle or hold down the
START key on the joystick control panel. SID/FOV is selected and the arm is
moved to the Test Shot position.
System Auto-positioning No.

INFX-8000V
No. 3
INFX-8000C (*1)
Other systems No. 5
*1) With the TFP-1200A used in combination
700
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<3> Perform fluoroscopy for two seconds and perform Test Shot. Confirm that the
average image value is within 800 100. At this time, move the table out of
the image if the table appears in the image.
<4> Set DSA GAIN on the reference monitor and select the [Confirm Cond.] button
from the menu. (This step can be skipped. However, if five seconds has
elapsed after Test Shot, select the [Confirm Cond.] button and proceed to the
next step.)
<5> Hold down the C-arm/Tabletop Operation Start lever on the tableside console
or hold down the START key on the joystick control panel. The C-arm
automatically moves from the rotation END position to the rotation START
position to confirm that no objects are placed within the C-arm rotation range.
<6> In the same manner as for normal rotational DSA, press the radiography
switch to perform radiography (image acquisition).
<7> Play back the acquired images and confirm that no image includes the
following abnormalities.
- The image brightness changes excessively during radiography.
- There is an object within the field.
- The beam limiting device is within the field.
<8> If any abnormality is found, remove the cause and perform radiography again.
After the series of radiographic operations is completed, radiography should
be performed again. If the image brightness changes excessively during
radiography, the tube current value may be low (e.g. 20 mA to 30 mA). In this
case, set the pulse width in AEC Param to between 5 ms and 2 ms, in order to
increase the tube current to 50 mA or greater. Then perform radiography in
Auto mode without setting the [HOLD] button to ON.
<9> After radiography is terminated, the acquisition program automatically moves

to the next program (sequential navigation has been set for the calibration
protocol "3D Calibration").
<10> Repeat radiography for the other acquisition programs in the same manner.
NOTE: 1. For the systems with the TFP-1216A, TFP-1200A, or TFP-1200B used in
combination, image burn-in may occur during image acquisition. Therefore, the
order of acquisition has been changed so that images without a phantom, for which
occurrence of burn-in is not acceptable, are acquired in sequence from a large field
(*1)
before images with the helical ball phantom are acquired . Note that images with
the helical ball phantom are acquired in sequence from a small field, and therefore
the procedure for changing the FOV can be skipped when the helical ball phantom
(*1)
is installed for Helix#1 .
(*1) For the TFP-800A/A1 or TFP-800B, the FOV is limited to N (8").
2. If acquired helical ball phantom images are displayed in subtraction display, the
white level of the steel ball section may be significantly higher in the first frame (in
negative display). This is due to the characteristics of the FPD and the white level
is not so high (in negative display) in the second frame and later. Since helical ball
phantom images are calibrated using unsubtracted images, there is no problem.
3. If the beam limiting device blades are visible in the image during 3D calibration (only
in systems that support spot fluoroscopy), add the aperture adjustment margin that
becomes effective temporarily. For details for setting the aperture adjustment
margin, refer to (1) (b) of subsection 4.1.3 "Display contents list" in the service
manual 2D308-016EN.
701
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(d) Set the C-arm in the patient frontal direction.
Select the auto-positioning number listed in the table below. Hold down the C-arm/
Tabletop Operation Start lever on the Hyper-handle or hold down the START key
on the joystick control panel. Confirm that SID/FOV is set to the conditions for
helical ball phantom and the C-arm is set in the patient frontal direction (RAO 0/
CRA 0).

INFX-8000V
No. 3
INFX-8000C (*1)
Other systems No. 5
(e) Installing the helical ball phantom
Install the helical ball phantom at the head end of the tabletop as shown in the
figure below.
Positioning steel ball
Helical ball phantom installation position
702
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(f) Adjusting the position and height of the table
Adjust the position and height of the table as described below so that the arm
rotation axis and the phantom cylinder axis are aligned.
<1-1> While observing the fluoroscopy image, insert the square beam limiting
device blade close to the thinner cylinder of the helical ball phantom. Adjust
the helical ball phantom angle so that the edge of the square beam limiting
device blade and the edge of the thinner cylinder of the helical ball phantom
are nearly parallel as shown in the figure below.
Beam limiting device

blade position
Inner cylinder of the

helical ball phantom
<1-2> While observing the fluoroscopy image, adjust the tabletop position in the
longitudinal/lateral directions so that the positioning steel ball embedded
near the center of the cylinder section of the helical ball phantom is located
at the image center as shown in the figure below. This steel ball is larger
than the other steel balls.
Should be at the
center of the image.
<1-3> Fully open the square beam limiting device blade (calibration may fail even if
only a portion of the square beam limiting device blade appears on the
image).
<1-4> Set #5-Pre or #7-Pre using the automatic positioning button. Hold down the
C-arm/Tabletop Operation Start lever on the Hyper-handle or hold down the
START key on the joystick control panel.
703
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<1-5> While observing the fluoroscopy image, adjust the tabletop height so that the
thinner cylinder is located at the image center as shown in the figure below
(the cylinder is located at the image center when the distance between the
right edge of the cylinder and far right of the image is equal to the distance
between the left edge of the cylinder and far left of the image).
Should be almost the same.
<1-6> Move the C-arm to the end opposite the current position (RAO 90/CRA 0)
and reconfirm that the cylinder is located at the image center. If it is
misaligned, adjust the tabletop so that the cylinder is located near the image
center in both positions (LAO 90/CRA 0 and RAO 90/CRA 0).
In V4.30 or later, the guidelines supporting installation of the helical ball phantom
are provided on the fluoroscopic monitor. Adjust the table position and height
following the procedure described below.
<2-1> While observing the fluoroscopic image, adjust the helical ball phantom
angle so that the guidelines and the edge of the slimmer cylinder of the
helical ball phantom are nearly parallel, as shown in the figure below.
704
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<2-2> While observing the fluoroscopy image, adjust the tabletop position in the
longitudinal/lateral directions so that the positioning steel ball embedded
near the center of the cylinder section of the helical ball phantom is located
at the image center, as shown in the figure below. This steel ball is larger
than the other steel balls.
<2-3> Fully open the square beam limiting device blades (calibration may fail even
if only a portion of the square beam limiting device blades are visible on the
image). If the blades are visible on the image, enter aperture adjustment
margin setting mode (mode 4, submode 42) using the keyboard for servicing
and fully open the blades. For details for setting the aperture adjustment
margin, refer to subsection 4.1 "Service Tool Operating Procedure" in the
<2-4> Select #5-Pre or #7-Pre using the automatic positioning button. Hold down
the C-arm/Tabletop Operation Start lever on the Hyper-handle or hold down
the START key on the joystick control panel.
<2-5> While observing the fluoroscopy image, adjust the tabletop height so that the
thinner cylinder is located at the image center as shown in the figure below
(the cylinder is located at the image center when the distance between the
right edge of the cylinder and far right of the image is equal to the distance
between the left edge of the cylinder and far left of the image).
705
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<2-6> Move the C-arm to the end opposite the current position (RAO 90/CRA 0)
and reconfirm that the cylinder is located at the image center. If it is
misaligned, adjust the tabletop so that the cylinder is located near the image
center in both positions (LAO 90/CRA 0 and RAO 90/CRA 0).
NOTE: 1. It is possible to change thickness and number of guidelines using the

setting tool. It is also possible to set nondisplay of the guidelines using
the setting tool. For details, refer to (3) "Setting the guidelines for the
helical ball phantom" in subsection 29.28.7.
2. If the beam limiting device blades are visible in the image during 3D
calibration (only in systems that support spot fluoroscopy), add the
aperture adjustment margin that becomes effective temporarily. For
details for setting the aperture adjustment margin, refer to (1) (b) of
subsection 4.1.3 "Display contents list" in the service manual 2D308-
016EN.
706
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(g) Acquiring image data using the helical ball phantom
Perform the following procedure for each SID/FOV with which image data is
acquired.
<1> Select the auto-positioning number listed in the table below. Hold down the
START key on the joystick control panel. The arm is moved to the Test Shot
position and the SID/FOV with which image data is acquired are set. Perform
fluoroscopy for two seconds or longer and set the radiographic conditions.

INFX-8000V
No. 3
INFX-8000C (*1)
Other systems No. 5
<2> Perform Test Shot and confirm that the average image value is within
800 100.
<3> Set [DSA GAIN] on the reference monitor and select the [Confirm Cond.]
button from the menu (this step can be skipped. However, if five seconds has
elapsed after Test Shot, select the [Confirm Cond.] button and proceed to the
next step).
<4> Hold down the C-arm/Tabletop Operation Start lever on the Hyper-handle or
hold down the START key on the joystick control panel. The C-arm
automatically moves from the rotation END position to the rotation START
position to confirm that no objects are placed within the C-arm rotation range.
<5> In the same manner as for normal rotational DSA, press the radiography
switch to perform radiography (image acquisition).
<6> Play back the acquired images and confirm that no image includes the
following abnormalities.
- The image brightness changes excessively during radiography.

- There is an object other than the helical ball phantom within the field.
- The helical ball phantom is significantly misaligned with the image center
during radiography as shown in the figure below.
Image with the helical ball phantom
707
No. 2J308-036EN*I
After the series of radiographic operations is completed, radiography should
be performed again. If the image brightness changes excessively during
radiography, the tube current value may be low (e.g. 20 mA to 30 mA). In this
case, set pulse width in AEC Param to between 5 ms and 2 ms in order to
increase the tube current to 50 mA or greater. Then perform radiography in
Auto mode without setting the [HOLD] button to ON.
<8> After radiography is terminated, the acquisition program automatically moves

to the next program (sequential navigation has been set for the calibration
protocol "3D Calibration").
<9> Repeat radiography for the other acquisition programs in the same manner
from step (g).
NOTE: 1. After radiography is performed, perform auto-replay using unsubtracted

images to confirm that adjacent steel balls do not overlap each other in the
images. If they overlap each other, the support column rotation angle of the
support unit may be shifted or the longitudinal axes of the table and the
helical ball phantom may not be parallel.
2. Calibration may also fail in the following cases. Adjust the position and
height of the table so that these phenomena do not occur.
 The biggest steel ball is not completely included in the frame or the ball is
in contact with the edge of the frame.
 Less than 14 adjacent steel balls are visible in any frame.
3. If the beam limiting device blades are visible in the image during 3D
calibration (only in systems that support spot fluoroscopy), add the aperture
adjustment margin that becomes effective temporarily. For details for setting
the aperture adjustment margin, refer to (1) (b) of subsection 4.1.3 "Display
contents list" in the service manual 2D308-016EN.
(h) Removing the helical ball phantom
Remove the helical ball phantom from the table.
708
No. 2J308-036EN*I
22.1.3 Data transfer
Switch the mode to Exam Support mode ([Exam] tab) and transfer the calibration image to the
XIDF-3DP801, XIDF-AWS801 using the following procedures.
(1) Switch the mode to Exam Support mode ([Exam] tab) and click the 3D menu button.
(2) Click the Calib. tab in the 3D menu window.
(3) Select the image to be transferred following the procedures described below and click the
[Transfer] button.
(a) Click the ALL Data button. Images acquired without a phantom (flood images) and
helical ball phantom images for each SID/FOV are automatically displayed in the
transfer image list. If phantom images could not be acquired properly and
radiography was performed again, multiple images acquired under exactly the same
conditions may exist. In this case, only the latest images are displayed.
(b) Select the image set to be transferred. Images acquired without a phantom (flood
images) and helical ball phantom images acquired with the same SID/FOV must be
selected. To select all the data items in the displayed transfer image list, click the
top data item in the list and then click the bottom data item in the list while holding
down the [SHIFT] key.
(c) Click the [Transfer] button to start data transfer.
709
No. 2J308-036EN*I
22.1.4 Checking the calibration table registration
It takes about 10 to 20 minutes from when the calibration table is created to when registration
is complete for each set of calibration images (time required for this process differs according
to the type of the PC used for the XIDF-3DP801, XIDF-AWS801). If an MC (Mask-Contrast)
acquisition sequence is set, however, the time required for this process is almost doubled
because two types of tables, one for MRC and one for MC, are created.
For calibration images for LCI, up to 25 minutes may be required (this varies depending on the
number of target images).
When calibration  Table Data is selected from the 3D Angio Manager window menu of the
XIDF-3DP801, XIDF-AWS801, the update date for each SID/FOV is displayed on the window.
Referring to this display, check whether registration of the calibration table succeeded/failed.
If creation/registration of the calibration table failed, the error message "Calibration failed!!" is
displayed in the window. In this case, retransfer the calibration image from the DF. If an error
occurs again, acquire the calibration data with the same patient name again and retransfer the
image.
(*1) MRC is recommended because artifacts may appear.
NOTE: Calibration image list display
1. Adding images to the transfer image list
To add the displayed image to the transfer image list, press the Add Data
button.
Perform this operation when images other than the latest image are included in
the transfer image list
2. Deleting images from the transfer image list
To delete an image from the transfer image list, select the image in the transfer
image list and press the Delete button. Perform this operation when an image
that is not to be transferred is included in the transfer image list. To delete all
the images in the transfer image list, use the All Delete button.
22.1.5 Explaining the calibration procedures to the user
The user must perform calibration periodically (every 3 months). Explain the calibration
procedures to the user.
710
No. 2J308-036EN*I
22.2 Checking the 3D Image Quality
To confirm that 3D image reconstruction processing is performed appropriately, check the image
quality using the image quality check phantom.
After the system is installed, this check is required every two weeks in order to detect degradation
of image quality due to change of quality wobble during C-arm rotation. In normal cases, the
calibration images for correcting for this influence must be updated every 3 months. However,
the C-arm, FPD, or tube may interfere with the table or other units, resulting in mechanical
displacement in rare cases. In order to correct for any changes in this phenomenon between the
update intervals, checks are required every 2 weeks.
The calibration procedure below must be performed by 2 engineers.
(1) Registering a patient for checking the image quality
(a) Register a patient using the system console and select Neuro or Abdominal,
whichever is used more frequently in clinical application.
(b) Start the study.
(2) Selecting an acquisition program
(a) Select a 3D-DSA acquisition program.

Select an acquisition program satisfying the following conditions.
Acquisition sequence : MRC (Mask-Return-Contrast)

DSA acquisition matrix : 1024
Acquisition trigger : 2°/frame
(b) Set the following values for the radiographic conditions.
DSA dose : 77.4 [nC/kg]

Contrast delay time : 20 [s]
(c) If the high-speed 3D option is set to ON, set "Vessel Quality" for the 3D transfer
function.
(3) Setting the image quality check phantom
Place the image quality check phantom on the tabletop. Remove the image quality check
phantom from the case and place the phantom on the tabletop so that the following
conditions are satisfied.
The numeric characters on the phantom should be legible on the image from the lateral
direction (LAO 90/CRA 0).
The comb section of the phantom and the longitudinal axis of the tabletop should be parallel.
(4) Setting the SID/FOV
Select the FOV that is used most frequently in clinical application. If all of the FOVs are
used equally, select the largest FOV. (When the TFP-1200A or TFP-1200B is used, select
the 12" FOV.)
711
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(5) Adjusting the position and height of the table
(a) While performing fluoroscopy, adjust the tabletop position in the longitudinal, lateral,
and vertical directions so that the image quality check phantom is near the image
center.
(b) Perform checks from 2 directions: From the LAO/RAO 0° and CAU/CRA 0° position
From the LAO 90° or RAO 90° and CAU/CRA 0°
position
(6) Adjusting the radiographic conditions
(a) Move the arm to the Test Shot position and perform fluoroscopy to set the
radiographic position. If the tube current is less than 50 mA, set the HOLD button on
the Radiography tab in Acquisition mode to ON so that the X-ray conditions are within
the following range.
Tube current : 80 mA to 125 mA

Tube voltage : 70 kV to 80 kV
Pulse width : 2 ms to 4 ms (Adjustment cannot be performed for FPD systems.)
(b) Perform Test Shot and adjust [DSA GAIN] so that halation does not occur.
(7) Preparing for radiography
(a) Set the radiographic conditions.
(b) Pull the C-arm/tabletop operation start lever on the Hyper-handle or hold down the
START key on the joystick control panel. The C-arm automatically moves from the
rotation end position to the rotation start position to confirm that no objects are placed
within the C-arm rotation range.
(8) Radiography
(a) For 3D-DSA or 3D-DA
<1> Remove the image quality check phantom from the tabletop of the
catheterization table. Since this phantom is used during contrast image
acquisition, mark the position of the phantom on the tabletop using tape or other
appropriate means.
<2> Confirm that the delay time until contrast image acquisition starts is set to 20 [s].
<3> Press the X-ray exposure handswitch to start radiography. Hold down the
handswitch until acquisition of mask images and contrast images is completed.
After mask image acquisition terminates, the C-arm returns to the start position.
<4> After confirming that the C-arm stops at the start position, place the phantom at
the original position again. This operation must be performed within 20
seconds after the C-arm stops at the start position. Contrast image acquisition
does not start during this period.
<5> When 20 seconds have elapsed after the C-arm stops, contrast image
acquisition starts. When contrast image acquisition is completed and the C-arm
stops at the end position, release the X-ray exposure handswitch.
712
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) For LCI
Press the X-ray exposure handswitch to start radiography. Hold down the handswitch
until contrast image acquisition is completed. When the C-arm stops at the end
position, release the X-ray exposure handswitch.
(9) Checking acquired radiographic images
Play back acquired radiographic images to confirm that there are no abnormalities.
Abnormalities include the following: one or more of the teeth in the comb section disappears
due to halation, image brightness changes across frames, or a part of the image quality
check phantom is outside the screen. In these cases, readjust the conditions and then
perform radiography again.
(10) Transferring images
If the high-speed 3D option is set to OFF, perform steps (a) and (b) described below.
If the high-speed 3D option is set to ON, image transfer is performed immediately after
image acquisition. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform steps (a) and (b).
(a) Switch the tab to the [Exam] tab and display the image quality check phantom images
acquired while switching the cuts.
(b) In the same manner as for normal 3D transfer, press the transfer switch to start image
transfer. Select Detail mode (512 mode) as the transfer mode.
(11) Checking the image quality
(a) After reconstruction images are displayed, switch the display to MPR (multiplanar
reconstruction).
(b) Confirm that the 0.7-mm comb teeth are clearly separated.
(c) If the 0.7-mm comb teeth cannot be seen clearly, perform radiography using the image
quality check phantom again or perform calibration again. Check the background
noise to determine whether radiography or calibration should be performed. If the
background noise is large, increase the radiographic dose and perform radiography. If
the background noise is small, perform calibration again.
713
No. 2J308-036EN*I
22.3 Enhancement of Bone Density Values in 3D-DA
This subsection describes the procedure for displaying clearer images of the head in 3D-DA upon
request from the customer. However, use of this method may increase image artifacts at some
sites. Ensure that the customer understands the precautions described below before performing
this procedure.
CAUTION: Do not set an excessively low gain for 3D-DA. If a gain of 80% or lower is set,
errors or artifacts may occur in the 3D reconstruction result (3D image).
22.3.1 Changing the acquisition conditions
(1) On the DFP-8000A, click the Protocol Presets button on the Utility Setting screen to
display the Acquisition Protocol Setting screen.
(2) For the DP system, use the Support Unit Selection list box to select CAS-810A or
CAS-830A for which the study protocols are to be edited. Select the system that is used
for 3D-DSA/DA acquisitions (in most sites CAS-830A is used for 3D-DSA/DA
acquisitions). The Study Protocol list and the Acquisition Program list for the selected
system are displayed.
(3) Select "Neuro" in the Study Protocol list. If the default protocol name has been changed,
select the corresponding protocol name.
(4) Select "3D-DA" in the Acquisition Program list. If the default program name has been
changed, select the corresponding program name.
(5) Select [Update] to display the 3D-DA program for Neuro study. Select the AEC Param.
button for this acquisition program to display the AEC Parameter Setting dialog box.
Change the values for Target kV and Max Tube Voltage (kV) as follows. Do not change
any other values.
Target kV : 76
Max Tube Voltage (kV) : 78
(6) Press [OK] in the AEC Parameter Setting dialog box. Then press [OK] on the Acquisition
Program Edit screen.
(7) Press [OK] in the Study Protocol/Acquisition Program List Selection dialog box.
22.3.2 Changing the reconstruction conditions
Refer to Installation Manual 2C305-729EN for the XIDF-3DP801, XIDF-AWS801.
714
No. 2J308-036EN*I
23. 3D ROADMAP CALIBRATION (OPTION) (V4.22 OR LATER)
23.1 Calibration Procedure
23.1.1 Preparation
CAUTION: 1. After the image for 3D calibration is acquired, perform 3D roadmap

calibration without removing the helical ball phantom or moving the
tabletop or the support unit. If the position or angle of the helical
ball phantom for 3D calibration is changed from that for 3D roadmap
calibration, the fluoroscopic image in 3D roadmapping will be
misaligned with the 3D angiographic image.
2. Be sure to explain the above precaution to the user.
(1) Parts required
The following part is required for calibration.
 Helical ball phantom

(provided as the standard configuration of the XIDF-3DP801, XIDF-AWS801) ........ One
(a) Helical ball phantom
In order to improve the quality of the composite image created from the fluoroscopic
image and the 3D angiographic image, it is necessary to correct distortion in C-arm
rotation of the support unit. This helical ball phantom is used on the table to acquire
the image for correcting distortion in C-arm rotation. It is also used in the work for
adjustment for 3D-DSA/DA described in section 22. For details of helical ball
phantom and the mounting procedure, refer to section 22.
(2) Checking the settings and startup of the system
Confirm that the settings for the XIDF-3DP801, XIDF-AWS801 and XIDF-3DP802 are
performed as specified in the installation manual. Turn ON the power of the XIDF-3DP801,
XIDF-AWS801 and confirm that the XIDF-3DP801, XIDF-AWS801 is started up normally.
Turn ON the power of the Infinix-i system and confirm that the Infinix-i system is started up
normally.
(3) Setting the calibration protocol "3D Roadmap Calibration"
For systems installed at the site, select all the SID sizes for which the FPD does not
interfere with the tabletop or other part of the system during arm rotation for image
acquisition.
715
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(a) Select "3D Roadmap Calib. Protocol Maker" in the command line of the service tool
and click the [GO] button. The following tool is started.
Select all the SID values for which the FPD does not interfere with the tabletop or
other part of the system during arm rotation for image acquisition. Click the [OK]
button.
(b) Acquisition program
FPD (SID/FPD size)

or TFP-1216A or
TFP-800B TFP-1200B
Helix#1Land (*1) - 120 cm/8'' -
Helix#2Land (*1) - 115 cm/8'' -
Helix#3Land (*1) - 110 cm/8'' -
Helix#4Land (*1) - 105 cm/8'' -
Helix#5Land (*1) - 100 cm/8'' -
Helix#6Land (*1) - 95 cm/8'' -
Helix#7Land (*1) - 90 cm/8'' -
Helix#1Port (*1) - 120 cm/8'' -
Helix#2Port (*1) - 115 cm/8'' -
Helix#3Port (*1) - 110 cm/8'' -
Helix#4Port (*1) - 105 cm/8'' -
Helix#5Port (*1) - 100 cm/8'' -
Helix#6Port (*1) - 95 cm/8'' -
Helix#7Port (*1) - 90 cm/8'' -
Flood#1Port (*1) - 120 cm/8'' -
Flood#2Port (*1) - 115 cm/8'' -
Flood#3Port (*1) - 110 cm/8'' -
Flood#4Port (*1) - 105 cm/8'' -
Flood#5Port (*1) - 100 cm/8'' -
Flood#6Port (*1) - 95 cm/8'' -
Flood#7Port (*1) - 90 cm/8'' -
716
No. 2J308-036EN*I
FPD (SID/FPD size)

or TFP-1216A or
TFP-800B TFP-1200B
Flood#1Land (*1) - 120 cm/8'' -
Flood#2Land (*1) - 115 cm/8'' -
Flood#3Land (*1) - 110 cm/8'' -
Flood#4Land (*1) - 105 cm/8'' -
Flood#5Land (*1) - 100 cm/8'' -
Flood#6Land (*1) - 95 cm/8'' -
Flood#7Land (*1) - 90 cm/8'' -
Helix#1 (*1) 120 cm/8'' - 120 cm/8''
Helix#2 (*1) 115 cm/8'' - 115 cm/8''
Helix#3 (*1) 110 cm/8'' - 110 cm/8''
Helix#4 (*1) 105 cm/8'' - 105 cm/8''
Helix#5 (*1) 100 cm/8'' - 100 cm/8''
Helix#6 (*1) 95 cm/8'' - 95 cm/8''
Helix#7 (*1) 90 cm/8'' - 90 cm/8''
Flood#1 (*1) 120 cm/8'' - 120 cm/8''
Flood#2 (*1) 115 cm/8'' - 115 cm/8''
Flood#3 (*1) 110 cm/8'' - 110 cm/8''
Flood#4 (*1) 105 cm/8'' - 105 cm/8''
Flood#5 (*1) 100 cm/8'' - 100 cm/8''
Flood#6 (*1) 95 cm/8'' - 95 cm/8''
Flood#7 (*1) 90 cm/8'' - 90 cm/8''
(*1) Only when the XIDF-3DP802 is used in combination (with V4.22 or later)
The following setting items are common to all the acquisition programs.
3D-DA
All TFP types
Acquisition sequence Contrast acquisition (C method)
DA acquisition matrix 1024
C-arm set position From the patient head end
(C-arm support column rotation angle: 0)
C-arm rotation speed Maximum 10/s
C-arm rotation range RAO 120 to LAO 120 (fixed)
Acquisition trigger 1/frame
Contrast delay time 1.5 s
DA dose 77.4 nC/kg
717
No. 2J308-036EN*I
23.1.2 Data acquisition
The image data is acquired for each SID using the helical ball phantom. Set the FOV to 8
inches (fixed).
SID (cm) 120 115 110 105 100 95 90
Do not use an SID size where the FPD interferes with the tabletop during rotation for image
acquisition.
For the TFP-1216A, acquire the image data with the FPD set to both the portrait and landscape
orientation.
(1) Procedure for acquiring the image data
(a) Patient registration for calibration
Register the patient from the system console and select the calibration protocol "3D
Roadmap Calibration" as the study protocol.
(b) Preparation
Once the examination is started, the system automatically enters Acquisition mode.
For the acquisition program, refer to (3) in subsection 23.1.1.
If the acquisition program for "Flood" (image acquisition without the phantom) is
selected at the beginning of the protocol, manually select the acquisition program for
the helical ball phantom.
(c) Setting the C-arm and installing the helical ball phantom
3D roadmap calibration needs to be performed at the same position and angle

settings as the helical ball phantom used in 3D calibration. For details of the C-arm
setting position and installation of the helical ball phantom, refer to section 22.
(d) Acquiring the image with the helical ball phantom
Perform the steps described below for each SID.
<1> Select the auto-positioning number listed in the table below. Hold down the
START key on the joystick control panel. The arm is moved to the Test Shot
position and the SID/FOV with which image data is acquired are set. Perform
fluoroscopy for two seconds or longer and set the radiographic conditions.

INFX-8000V
No. 3
INFX-8000C (*1)
Other systems No. 5
<2> Perform Test Shot. Confirm that the average image value is within 800 100.
<3> Set DSA GAIN on the reference monitor, and select the [Confirm Cond.] button
from the menu (this step can be skipped. However if five seconds has elapsed
after Test Shot, select the [Confirm Cond.] button and proceed to the next step).
718
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<4> Hold down the C-arm/Tabletop Operation Start lever on the Hyper-handle or
automatically moves from the rotation end position to the rotation start position
to confirm that no objects are placed within the C-arm rotation range.
<5> In the same manner as for normal rotational DA, press the radiography switch
to perform radiography (image acquisition).
<6> Play back the acquired images and confirm that no image includes the following
abnormalities.
- Image brightness changes excessively during radiography.

- There is an object other than the helical ball phantom within the field.
- The helical ball phantom is significantly shifted from the center of the image
during rotation, as shown below.
Helical ball phantom image
After the series of radiographic operations is completed, radiography should be
performed again. If image brightness changes excessively during radiography,
the tube current value may be low (e.g. 20 mA to 30 mA). In this case, set the
pulse width in AEC Param to between 5 ms and 2 ms, in order to increase the
tube current to 50 mA or greater. Then perform radiography in Auto mode
without setting the [HOLD] button to ON.
<8> After radiography is terminated, the acquisition program automatically moves to

the next program (sequential navigation has been set for the calibration protocol
"3D Roadmap Calibration"). If the acquisition program was manually selected
in step (b), manually select the next acquisition program.
NOTE: 1. After radiography is performed, perform auto-replay of the acquired

images to confirm that adjacent steel balls do not overlap each other in
the images. If they overlap, the support column rotation angle of the
support unit may be shifted or the longitudinal axes of the table and the
helical ball phantom may not be parallel.
2. Calibration may also fail in the following cases. Adjust the position and
height of the table so that these phenomena do not occur.
 The biggest steel ball is not completely included in the frame or the
ball is in contact with the edge of the frame.
 Fewer than 14 adjacent steel balls are visible in any frame.
719
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(e) Removing the helical ball phantom
Remove the helical ball phantom from the table.
(f) Acquiring image data without phantom
Perform the following procedures for each SID for which image acquisition is to be
performed.
<1> Confirm that the acquisition program specified in step (3) of subsection 22.1.1 is
selected.
If the acquisition program is manually selected in step (1), also manually select
the acquisition program for "Flood".
<2> Select #5-Pre or #7-Pre using the automatic positioning button. Hold down the
START key on the joystick control panel. The SID/FOV are selected and the
arm is moved to the Test Shot position.
<3> Perform fluoroscopy for two seconds and perform Test Shot. Confirm that the
average image value is within 800 100. At this time, move the table out of the
way if it appears in the image.
<4> Set DSA GAIN on the reference monitor, and select the [Confirm Cond.] button
from the menu (this step can be skipped. However if five seconds has elapsed
after Test Shot, select the [Confirm Cond.] button and proceed to the next step).
<5> Hold down the C-arm/Tabletop Operation Start lever on the tableside console or
automatically moves from the rotation end position to the rotation start position
to confirm that no objects are placed within the C-arm rotation range.
<6> In the same manner as for normal rotational DA, press the radiography switch
to perform radiography (image acquisition).
<7> Play back the acquired images and confirm that no image includes the following
abnormalities.
- Image brightness changes excessively during radiography.

- There is an object within the field.
- The beam limiting device is within the field.
After the series of radiographic operations is completed, radiography should be
performed again. If image brightness changes excessively during radiography,
the tube current value may be low (e.g. 20 mA to 30 mA). In this case, set the
pulse width in AEC Param to between 5 ms and 2 ms, in order to increase the
tube current to 50 mA or greater. Then perform radiography in Auto mode
without setting the [HOLD] button to ON.
<9> After radiography is terminated, the acquisition program automatically moves to

the next program (sequential navigation has been set for the calibration protocol
"3D Roadmap Calibration").
If the acquisition program is manually selected in step <1>, manually select the
next acquisition program.
720
No. 2J308-036EN*I
23.1.3 Data transfer
Switch the mode to Exam Support mode ([Exam] tab) and transfer the calibration image to the
XIDF-3DP801, XIDF-AWS801 using the following procedures.
(1) Switch the mode to Exam Support mode ([Exam] tab) and click the 3D menu button.
(2) Click the Calib. tab in the 3D menu window.
(3) Select the image to be transferred following the procedures described below and click the
[Transfer] button.
(a) Click the ALL Data button. Images acquired without a phantom (flood images) and
helical ball phantom images for each SID/FOV are automatically displayed in the
transfer image list. If phantom images could not be acquired properly and
radiography was performed again, multiple images acquired under exactly the same
conditions may exist. In this case, only the latest images are displayed.
(b) Select the image set to be transferred. Images acquired without a phantom (flood
images) and helical ball phantom images acquired with the same SID/FOV must be
selected. To select all the data items in the displayed transfer image list, click the top
data item in the list and then click the bottom data item in the list while holding down
the [SHIFT] key.
(c) Click the [Transfer] button to start data transfer.
23.1.4 Checking the calibration table registration
It takes about 10 to 20 minutes from when the calibration table is created to when registration is
complete for each set of calibration images (time required for this process differs according to
the type of PC used for the XIDF-3DP801, XIDF-AWS801).
When Calibration  Table Data is selected from the 3D Angio Manager window menu of the
XIDF-3DP801, XIDF-AWS801, the date of update for each SID/FOV is displayed on the window.
Referring to this display, check whether registration of the calibration table succeeded/failed.
If creation/registration of the calibration table failed, the error message "Calibration failed!!" is
displayed in the window. In this case, retransfer the calibration image from the DF. If an error
occurs again, acquire the calibration data with the same patient name again and retransfer the
image.
NOTE: Calibration image list display
1. Adding images to the transfer image list

To add the displayed image to the transfer image list, press the Add Data button.
Perform this operation when images other than the latest image are included in
the transfer image list.
2. Deleting images from the transfer image list

To delete an image from the transfer image list, select the image in the transfer
image list and press the Delete button. Perform this operation when an image that
is not to be transferred is included in the transfer image list. To delete all the
images in the transfer image list, use the All Delete button.
721
No. 2J308-036EN*I
23.1.5 Explaining the calibration procedures to the user
The user must perform 3D roadmap calibration periodically (every 3 months). In the calibration
procedure, image acquisition must be performed using the helical ball phantom set to the same
position and angle as for 3D-DSA/DA calibration. Therefore, 3D roadmap calibration should be
performed after 3D-DSA/DA calibration is completed without removing or moving the helical ball
phantom. Explain the above calibration procedure to the user.
23.2 Checking the 3D Roadmap Image Quality
To confirm that 3D roadmap calibration was performed appropriately, check the image quality
using the helical ball phantom. This work should be performed after 3D roadmap calibration is
completed.
(1) Registering the patient for checking the image quality
(a) Register a patient using the system console and select Neuro for the study protocol.
(b) Start the study.
(2) Selecting a study program
Select a 3D-DA acquisition program.
If the high-speed 3D option is set to ON, set "3D-DA Quality" for the 3D transfer function.
(3) Setting the helical ball phantom.
Place the helical ball phantom on the tabletop. At this time, be sure to set the phantom at the
same position and angle as for calibration
(4) Setting the SID/FOV
Select the FOV that is used most frequently in clinical application. If all of the FOVs are used
equally, select the largest FOV. (When the TFP-1200A or TFP-1200B is used, select the 12"
FOV.)
(5) Adjusting the position and height of the table
Set the table to the same position and height as for calibration.
(a) While performing fluoroscopy, adjust the tabletop position in the longitudinal, lateral, and
vertical directions so that the helical ball phantom is near the image center.
(b) Perform checks from

2 directions : From the LAO/RAO 0° and CAU/CRA 0° position
From the LAO 90° or RAO 90° and CAU/CRA 0° position
722
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(6) Adjusting the radiographic conditions
(a) Move the arm to the Test Shot position and perform fluoroscopy to set the radiographic
position. If the tube current is less than 50 mA, set the HOLD button on the
Radiography tab in Acquisition mode to ON so that the X-ray conditions are within the
following range.
Tube current : 80 mA to 125 mA

Tube voltage : 70 kV to 80 kV
Pulse width : 2 ms to 4 ms (Adjustment cannot be performed for FPD systems.)
(b) Perform Test Shot and adjust [DSA GAIN] so that halation does not occur.
(7) Preparing for radiography
(a) Set the radiographic conditions.
(b) Pull the C-arm/Tabletop Operation Start lever on the Hyper-handle or hold down the
START key on the joystick control panel. The C-arm automatically moves from the
rotation end position to the rotation start position to confirm that no objects are placed
within the C-arm rotation range.
(8) Radiography
Press the X-ray exposure handswitch to start radiography. Hold down the handswitch until
acquisition of contrast images is completed. After contrast image acquisition terminates and
the C-arm stops at the end position, release the switch.
(9) Checking acquired images
Play back acquired radiographic images to confirm that there are no abnormalities.
Abnormalities include the following: one or more of the teeth in the comb section disappears
due to halation, image brightness changes across frames, or a part of the image quality
check phantom is outside the screen. In these cases, readjust the conditions and then
perform radiography again.
(10) Transferring images
If the high-speed 3D option is set to OFF, perform steps (a), (b), and (c) described below.
If the high-speed 3D option is set to ON, image transfer is performed immediately after image
acquisition. Therefore, step (a) only is required and steps (b) and (c) can be skipped.
(a) Confirm that 3D roadmap is running and the study ID, patient name, and patient ID are
displayed on the 3D roadmap screen.
(b) Open the Exam tab and display the acquired helical ball phantom image.
(c) In the same manner as for normal 3D transfer, press the transfer switch to start image
transfer. Select Detail mode (512 mode) as the transfer mode.
(11) Checking the image quality
(a) After reconstruction images are displayed on the 3D roadmap screen, adjust opacity of
the 3D image so that only the steel balls of the helical ball phantom are displayed.
(b) Set the C-arm to LAO/RAO 0 and CAU/CRA 0.
723
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(c) Press the 3D Roadmap button.
(d) Perform fluoroscopy. The 3D image composed of the fluoroscopic image and the steel
ball image is displayed.
(e) Confirm that the positioning steel ball (the biggest ball) embedded near the center of the
cylinder section of the helical ball phantom on the fluoroscopic image and that on the 3D
image either overlap or almost overlap.
(f) If the positioning steel balls on each image do not overlap (visually check whether they
are separated by a distance greater than their diameter), perform 3D-DA again with the
helical ball phantom or perform calibration again.
Whether radiography or calibration is performed again should be determined depending

on the calibration and radiography conditions. If any of the C-arm support unit position,
tabletop position, and helical ball phantom position was different between 3D calibration
and 3D roadmap calibration, perform calibration again. If the C-arm support unit or the
helical ball phantom was moved after 3D-DA, it will not be possible to return it to exactly
the same position. In this case, it will be necessary to perform 3D-DA again.
(g) Set the arm to LAO/RAO 0 and CAU 30. If the positioning steel ball (largest steel ball)
in the fluoroscopic image is not aligned with that in the 3D image, perform adjustment
as described in subsection 29.13 "Adjustment Procedure if Misregistration Became
Large During Rotational DSA".
724
No. 2J308-036EN*I
24. SETTING OF OTHER OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS
24.1 Additional Monitor
When the additional monitor is used in combination, perform setting as follows.
24.1.1 Setting the additional monitor
(1) Setting using the service setting tool
When installing the additional monitor, place a check mark in the check box of the
following service setting tool.
[System]  Options  XIDF-REF801 (Additional Ref. Monitor)
After setting is performed, restart the system and perform setting in Utility Mode as
described in (2).
(2) Setting in Utility Mode
After performing step (1), restart the system.

After the system is restarted, perform the following operation in Utility Mode.
(a) Open the [Utility] tab.
(b) Click the Protocol Presets button.
(c) When the user name/password certification dialog is displayed, enter as follows.
User name : Administrator

Password : Hyper
725
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(d) The study protocol and the acquisition program list are displayed. For registered or
newly registered protocols under "Study protocol", perform the following procedures.
<1> Select the desired protocol from the study protocol list.
<2> Click the [Edit] button. (The setting screen opens.)
<3> Click the [System Param.] button in the upper section of the screen.
(The setting screen opens.)
726
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<4> Check the setting for "Exam Room" in the "Monitor Configuration" area of the
displayed System Param. dialog. Change the contents if required.
<5> After checking and completing the setting, click the [OK] button.
<6> Click the [OK] button at the lower right of the study protocol setting screen.
(3) Setting the examination room monitor layout
Following the instructions in subsection 29.15.2 "Display style setting for examination
room monitor layout and L-side angle (biplane systems)", perform setting appropriately,
depending on the layout of the multiple monitors in the examination room.
727
No. 2J308-036EN*I
24.2 Setting the XIDF-ESD801 and Color LCD Monitor (CDL2013A-1A)
When the XIDF-ESD801 and color LCD monitor are used in combination, perform the following
settings.
24.2.1 Setting the XIDF-ESD801
(1) Setting using the service setup tool
(a) Start the service tool, place a check mark in the checkbox for the following option in
[System]-Options, and press [SAVE].
 XIDF-ESD801 (External Signal Display)
(b) Then perform setting for "External Signal Display" in [System]-DFP.
<1> Place a check mark in the checkbox of the port number for external signal
input.
<2> Consult the user and enter the title to be displayed in the examination room
menu.
Example: 3D-WS
<3> Press [SAVE], terminate the service software by selecting [Home]-[Quit], and
reboot the system.
(2) Setting the DFP-8000A software
Since the XIDF-ESD801 is operated through the examination room menu, use the
examination room menu editing tool to add "[View SW]" to the test protocols that use the
XIDF-ESD801.
For details regarding operation of the examination room menu editing tool, refer to
subsection 29.15.4 "Examination room menu setting" of this manual.
728
No. 2J308-036EN*I
24.2.2 Adjusting the color LCD monitor (CDL2013A-1A)
To use the color LCD monitor as the image display monitor for the XIDF-ESD801, adjust the
color LCD monitor as described below. For the detailed adjustment procedure, refer to the
operation manual provided with the LCD monitor.
(1) Checking and adjusting the displayed image (when the LCD monitor is the
CDL2013A-1A)
This procedure must be performed for every input (SIG-IN1 to SIG-IN6) of the
XIDF-ESD801 to be connected to the LCD monitor.
(a) Common procedure regardless of the input signal to the XIDF-ESD801
<1> Automatic adjustment
 From the personal computer, start up automatic adjustment screen (LCD

check pattern) from the "LCD display adjustment software CD-ROM"
supplied with the CDL2013A-1A.
 Press the control dial of the LCD monitor and execute Auto Setup from the
OSD display.
<2> Manual adjustment
 If automatic adjustment fails, manually adjust the clock, phase, display

position, resolution, and range referring to the operation manual provided
with the monitor.
729
No. 2J308-036EN*I
24.2.3 Adjustment of the VSW-ESD (XIDF-ESD801)
This subsection describes the adjustment procedures for the input signals for the
XIDF-ESD801.
(1) After the adjustment procedure described in subsection 24.2.2 is performed, input NTSC
signals and PAL signals to the XIDF-ESD801. Then select the input signals from the
DFP-8000A and display them on the monitor.
(2) Operate VR3 (refer to the figure below) on the VSW-ESD PWB to obtain an appropriate
monitor brightness according to the operating environment.
Device-mounted PWB with VSW-ESD Locations of VR3 and R162

PX17-41076*E [YWM1215*B] or earlier
Device-mounted PWB with VSW-ESD Locations of VR3 and R162

PX17-41076*F [YWM1402] or later
730
No. 2J308-036EN*I
NOTE: A resistor silk-screened as "R162" is provided near the VR. Observe the waveform
between one end of the resistor and the grounding to confirm that 0.7 Vp-p is read.
For the checks, display an image including black (lowest level) and white (highest
level) and perform checks within this voltage range. (Refer to the following figure.)
These values are reference values. The actual values for the image on the monitor
are given priority.
White level
0.7 Vp-p
Black level
1-field output waveform
24.2.4 Operation check
Input signals to the XIDF-ESD801 to check operation.
(1) Start the system as usual.
(2) Start a study for which [View SW] was set in subsection 24.2.1 "Setting the
XIDF-ESD801".
(3) Press [View SW] in the examination room menu.
(4) Confirm that the items set using the service tool are displayed.
(5) From the displayed items, select the one corresponding to the signal input.
(6) Confirm that the image input to the terminal selected for the external signal display
monitor is being displayed.
731
No. 2J308-036EN*I
24.2.5 Display property setting for the devices to be connected to the XIDF-ESD801
(1) Outline
Some image data output devices such as the 3D-QCA PC (hereinafter referred to as the
"image output device") have a function for automatically optimizing the image output
conditions (resolution, refresh rate, etc.). With this function, Extended Display
Identification Data (EDID), such as the resolution, is read from the combined monitor and
used for optimization.
However, the External signal display kit (XIDF-ESD801), which relays information
between the image output device and monitor, does not support this EDID. The image
output device therefore cannot acquire the EDID from the monitor and inappropriate
image output conditions may be set.
To prevent this problem, it is necessary to disable the EDID setting at the image output
device combined with the XIDF-ESD801.
For the EDID setting change procedure, consult with the manufacturer of the applicable
image output device.
Note that the EDID setting change procedure differs depending on the image output
device used in combination. For reference, the procedure for changing the EDID setting
for the 3D-QCA PC (XIDF-QCA302) is described below.
(2) Example setting for disabling the EDID setting (for the 3D-QCA PC (XIDF-QCA302))
Perform the following procedure to disable the EDID setting for the XIDF-QCA302.
After EDID setting is disabled, the set image output conditions (resolution: 1208  1024,
refresh rate: 60 Hz, etc.) are fixed.
Perform this setting and then connect the signal display kit (external signal display kit
(XIDF-ESD801)).
(a) After the 3D-QCA PC (XIDF-QCA302) is started up, right-click the mouse in the
Windows initial screen to display the pull-down menu. Select "Properties" to display
the Display Properties dialog.
732
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) In the Display Properties dialog, click the [Advanced] button in the [Settings] tab.
(c) When the Plug and Play Monitor and 128MB ATI Radeon X1300 Properties dialog
is displayed, click the [ATI CATALYST (R) Control Center] button in the
[ATI CATALYST (R) Control Center] tab.
733
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(d) When the CATALYST (R) Control Center – Basic dialog is displayed, place a check
mark for "Advanced" and then click the [Next>] button.
(e) When the following confirmation dialog is displayed, click the [Yes] button.
734
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(f) When the CATALYST (R) Control Center dialog is displayed, select "Attributes"
under "Monitor Properties" in the [Graphic Settings] tab.
735
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(g) Remove the check mark from "Monitor Attributes", set the following values, and
then click the [Apply] button.
 Maximum resolution : 1280  1024
 Maximum refresh rate : 60 Hz
(h) Click the [OK] button to close the dialog.
(i) Restart the 3D-QCA PC.
736
No. 2J308-036EN*I
25. SAFETY FUNCTION OPERATION CHECK
As the safety function operation check, check the touch sensors and backup fluoroscopy.
25.1 Preparation
For the backup fluoroscopy check, place a copper plate (approx. 2 mm) or acrylic phantom
(approx. 10 cm) on the tabletop.
25.2 Checking the Touch Sensors
25.2.1 CAS-810A
An alarm sound must be issued from the speaker in the C-arm main unit while the touch
sensor is active.
(1) Checking the touch sensor in the X-ray beam limiting device
 C-arm main rotation and slide movement must stop.
 If C-arm main rotation RAO/LAO  90°, catheterization table vertical UP and tilt
UP (*1) movement must stop.
 If C-arm main rotation RAO/LAO  90°, catheterization table vertical DOWN and tilt
DOWN (*1) movement must stop.
(2) Checking the touch sensor on the front surface of the detector
 Detector near/away movement must automatically retract in the AWAY direction.
 If C-arm main rotation RAO/LAO  90°, catheterization table vertical UP and tilt
 If C-arm main rotation RAO/LAO  90°, catheterization table vertical DOWN and tilt
(3) Checking the touch sensor on the rear surface of the C-arm
(*1): Tilt movement check is applicable only to CAT-870B system.
737
No. 2J308-036EN*I
25.2.2 CAS-820B
Confirm that the alarm sound is emitted from the -arm main speaker while the touch sensor
is actuated.
(1) Checking the X-ray beam limiting device touch sensor
 Confirm that -arm rotation, slide movement, and catheterization table vertical
UP/DOWN and tilt UP/DOWN (*1) movement stop.
(2) Checking the detector front surface touch sensor
 Confirm that -arm rotation, slide movement, and catheterization table vertical
UP/DOWN and tilt UP/DOWN (*1) movement stop.
 Detector near/away movement is automatically performed in the AWAY direction.
25.2.3 CAS-830A, CAS-830B
sensor is active.
(1) Checking the touch sensor on the X-ray tube cover
 If C-arm main rotation RAO/LAO  90°, catheterization table vertical UP and tilt
 If C-arm main rotation RAO/LAO  90°, catheterization table vertical DOWN and tilt
 If C-arm main rotation RAO/LAO  90°, catheterization table vertical UP and tilt
 If C-arm main rotation RAO/LAO  90°, catheterization table vertical DOWN and tilt
738
No. 2J308-036EN*I
25.2.4 CAS-880A
sensor is active.
(1) Checking the touch sensor on the X-ray tube cover
 Floor base rotation and column rotation must stop.
 FPD rotation and BLA rotation must stop.
 If C-arm main rotation RAO/LAO  90°, catheterization table vertical UP movement

must stop.
 If C-arm main rotation RAO/LAO  90°, catheterization table vertical DOWN movement
must stop.
 If C-arm main rotation RAO/LAO  90°, catheterization table vertical UP movement

must stop.
 If C-arm main rotation RAO/LAO  90°, catheterization table vertical DOWN movement
must stop.
(3) Checking the touch sensor on the side of the floor base cover
(Note) An alarm sound is only issued in operation.
25.3 Checking Backup Fluoroscopy
(1) Start the system power.
(2) After approx. 2 minutes, confirm that the function key on the main console is blinking and
then press the fluoroscopy switch.
(3) Confirm that backup fluoroscopy is radiated.
Confirm that a fluoroscopy image is displayed on the screen.
Confirm that ABC operation of continuous fluoroscopy is active.
739
No. 2J308-036EN*I
26. SYSTEM OPERATION CHECK
26.1 Checking Operation of the Fluoroscopy Function
26.1.1 Operation of the fluoroscopy switch
Confirm operation in 3 mode or 4 mode according to the setting of the fluoroscopy operation
mode.
The operation specifications for each mode are described below.
3 mode: For operations using the fluoroscopy switch, fluoroscopy is performed in the
fluoroscopy operation mode (Low, Normal, High) displayed on the fluoroscopy
monitor. For operations using the HLC fluoroscopy switch, high dose rate
fluoroscopy (High) is automatically selected for fluoroscopy. However, if the pulse
rate of the fluoroscopy operation mode selected differs from the pulse rate of High,
the selected pulse rate takes precedence.
4 mode: This setting is an additional mode (Mid) that results in an X-ray dose rate between
Low and Normal of 3 mode.
The settings of the fluoroscopy operation mode parameters depend on the settings of the
fluoroscopy operation mode registered in the examination protocol.
26.1.2 Operation related to change in fluoroscopy conditions
(1) Switching between continuous fluoroscopy and pulsed fluoroscopy
Confirm that switching between continuous fluoroscopy and pulsed fluoroscopy can be
performed by operating F-Pulse Rate on the Acquisition screen of the system console.
If the fluoroscopy operation mode is selected after continuous fluoroscopy has been
performed (after fluoroscopy OFF), confirm that the settings of the fluoroscopy operation
mode are employed.
(2) Switching the fluoroscopy operation mode
For the fluoroscopy operation mode, confirm that switching to 3 mode or 4 mode is
possible on the main console, table-side console, or the fluoroscopy Acquisition screen of
the system console.
In the fluoroscopy operation mode, detector entrance dose rate mode, fluoroscopy
radiation mode (continuous/pulsed), pulse rate (for pulse), X-ray beam quality filter,
maximum patient entrance dose rate, and tube voltage mode (for pulse) are registered as
a set.
(3) Switching the pulse rate
Confirm that the pulse rate can be switched by operating F-Pulse Rate on the Acquisition
screen of the system console.
(4) kV operation
It must be possible to operate the fluoroscopy tube voltage with fluoroscopy ABC turned
OFF.
740
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(5) mA operation
It must be possible to operate the fluoroscopy tube current with fluoroscopy ABC turned
OFF.
(6) ms operation
It must be possible to operate the pulse width of pulsed fluoroscopy with fluoroscopy
ABC turned OFF.
26.1.3 Checking operation of the ABC function
Using an appropriate phantom, confirm that the ABC operation can be performed.
 When fluoroscopy is subsequently performed, the conditions must be stable.
 By observing the image on the TV monitor, visually check for delay in rising or overshoot.
 With phantom parameters that extract the maximum condition (110 kV or 120 kV), add a
2- to 3-mm copper plate and confirm that the ABC function does not darken the monitor
image.
26.1.4 Checking the fluoroscopy X-ray precision
Check the fluoroscopy adjustment results and confirm that the precision specified in X-ray
adjustment in section 6 is observed.
741
No. 2J308-036EN*I
26.2 Checking Operation of the DA Function
26.2.1 Checking the radiography sequence
(1) Checking the interlock
(a) While the DF processor is not in acquirable status, a warning must be displayed,
preventing ready status from being entered.
(b) Place the injector into interlock mode. While the injector is not in standby status,
a warning must be displayed, preventing ready status from being entered.
(c) The interlock related to the door switch must operate as set.
(2) Ready operation
Confirm that when the ready button of the radiography handswitch is pressed, the starter
performs boost operation and enters setup status.
(3) Radiography operation
Radiography must be performed normally.
26.2.2 Checking operation of the F-ACT function
The radiography conditions must be calculated based on the fluoroscopy results. Confirm that
for each FPD field, the difference between the estimated kV and Actual kV is within 3 kV.
26.2.3 Checking operation of the ABC function
ABC must operate normally.

The ABC lock must be activated within the set time.
26.2.4 Checking interlocking with peripheral devices
(1) Interlocking with the injector
(a) When interlocking with the injector is set, the injector switch on the main console
must light.
(b) The injector must operate interlocked with radiography.
(2) Interlocking with the VCR
(a) When interlocking with the VCR is set, the VCR must be placed into recording
status interlocked with ready operation.
(b) When "ready" ends, the VCR must stop.
(3) Interlocking with the room light
(a) When interlocking with the room light is set, the room light must become dim
interlocked with "ready" operation.
(b) When "ready" ends, the room light must be restored.
742
No. 2J308-036EN*I
26.3 Checking Operation of the DSA Function
(b) Place the injector into interlock mode. While the injector is not in standby status, a
warning must be displayed, preventing ready status from being entered.
(2) Ready operation
Confirm that when the ready button of the radiography handswitch is pressed, the starter
performs boost operation and that heating is performed. If the setting allows test
exposure (program setting), confirm that test exposure is performed immediately after
setup is completed.
Radiography must be performed normally.
must light.
(a) When interlocking with the room light is set, the room light must dim interlocked with
"ready" operation.
743
No. 2J308-036EN*I
26.4 Checking Operation of the One-Shot Radiography Function
(b) The interlock related to the door switch must operate as set.
(2) Ready operation, radiography operation
It must be possible to perform radiography using the exposure switch of the radiography
handswitch.
26.4.2 Checking F-ACT movement
(1) Estimating the radiography conditions
The radiography conditions must be calculated based on the fluoroscopy result.
(2) Confirm that the image level of the radiographic image for image checking is appropriate.
744
No. 2J308-036EN*I
26.5 Checking Operation of the Stepping DSA (S-DSA) Function (Option)
(a) Checking the status of the catheterization table
<1> Confirm that a warning is displayed and the sequence cannot be advanced if
the region of interest is set when the tabletop rotation angle of the
catheterization table is other than 0° or 180°.
<2> Confirm that if the catheterization table is a tilting table, a warning is displayed
and the sequence cannot be advanced when the S-DSA program is selected
with the tabletop tilted.
<3> Confirm that a warning is displayed and the sequence cannot be advanced
when tabletop rotation or tabletop tilting is performed with the S-DSA program
being selected.
(b) Checking the system controller status
<1> Confirm that while the DF processor is not in acquirable status, a warning is
displayed and that the sequence cannot be advanced.
<2> Place the injector into interlock mode. While the injector is not in standby
status, a warning must be displayed, preventing ready status from being
entered.
<3> The interlock related to the door switch must operate as set.
(2) Radiography condition setting operation
(a) Set the region of interest and the first Stage. Confirm that each Box on the setting
GUI of the current Stage is highlighted.
(b) Confirm that when Step movement of the catheterization table is performed and
fluoroscopy is performed, radiography conditions are set.
Then confirm that the starter performs boost operation and heating is performed
when "ready" of the radiography handswitch is pressed. In addition, confirm that
test exposure is performed immediately after setup is completed. Note that test
exposure can be performed with the mask acquisition sequence.
(c) Confirm that the catheterization table moves by operating the Stage Step
handswitch and that condition setting described in (b) is repeated.
Repeat up to the final Stage.
Then press the [Fix View] button.
745
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(a) Confirm that for the mask acquisition sequence, holding down the Stage Step
handswitch button and radiography switch causes mask radiography to be
performed, followed by the movement of the catheterization table. (If test exposure
is not performed in step (2), test exposure is performed before starting mask
acquisition at each stage.)
The catheterization table moves from the last Stage to the first Stage repeatedly.
(b) Confirm that for the contrast acquisition sequence, the catheterization table
performs Stage movement when the Stage Step handswitch is pressed.
The radiography switch can be left ON.
(c) Radiography must be performed normally.
must light.
"ready" operation.
746
No. 2J308-036EN*I
26.6 Checking Operation of the Rotational DSA Function (Option)
This subsection describes the operational check procedures for normal rotational DSA.
For systems in which the rotational DSA simplified operating procedure has been selected,
perform operational checks referring to the simplified operating procedure described in the
operation manual.
(2) Isocenter positioning
Set the C-arm to the radiographic position and select the rotational DSA acquisition
program. Then align the center of the anatomical position with the isocenter.
(3) Ready operation
(a) Perform fluoroscopy with the thinnest section of the patient within the radiographic
range to set the radiographic conditions.
(b) Confirm that when the ready button of the radiography handswitch is pressed after
fluoroscopy has been set to ON, the starter performs boost operation and that
heating is performed. If the setting allows test exposure (program setting), confirm
that test exposure is performed immediately after setup is completed.
(c) Then, press the [Cond. Setting] switch.
(4) Arm movement to the end position
(a) Confirm that when angle preset is available, the arm automatically moves to the end
angle after the trigger switch is set to ON.
(b) Confirm that "End Angle" in the PC/reference monitor menu is automatically set to
ON.
(5) Arm movement to the start position
(a) Confirm that when angle preset is available, the arm automatically moves to the
start angle after the trigger switch is set to ON.
(b) Confirm that "Start Angle" in the PC/reference monitor menu is automatically set to
ON.
(a) Confirm that after the radiography enabled icon is displayed, rotation starts and
mask acquisition is performed when the radiography switch is set to ON.
(b) Confirm that when the End angle is reached, contrast acquisition radiography is
performed.
(c) Radiography must be performed normally.
747
No. 2J308-036EN*I
must light.
"ready" operation.
748
No. 2J308-036EN*I
26.7 Checking Operation of the 3D-DSA Function (Option)
Only the differences from rotational DSA are described.
(a) Confirm that speeds lower than 30 deg/s cannot be selected for the arm rotation
speed.
(b) Confirm that an acquisition deg/frame of 3 or higher cannot be selected.
(c) Confirm that only the mask return contrast (MRC) method and the mask contrast
(MC) method are available for the acquisition sequence. Note, however, that use of
the MRC method is recommended because the FPD is used in combination.
(2) Image transfer to the 3D reconstruction system
Images are transferred to the reconstruction PC (XIDF-3DP801/angiography workstation

(XIDF-AWS801)) after radiography is terminated.
If the high-speed 3D option is set to ON, the images are transferred to the reconstruction
PC/angiography workstation immediately after image acquisition.
(3) Displaying 3D reconstruction images
Confirm that 3D images are displayed normally on the 3D workstation.
For the checking procedure, refer to subsection 26.6.2.
749
No. 2J308-036EN*I
26.8 Checking Operation of the Rotational DA (Automatic Rotation) Function (Option)
(2) Isocenter positioning
Set the C-arm to the radiographic position and select the rotational DA acquisition
program. Then align the center of the anatomical region of interest with the isocenter.
(3) Arm movement to the End position
End angle after the trigger switch is set to ON.
(b) Confirm that "End Angle" in the PC/reference monitor menu is automatically set to
ON.
(4) Arm movement to the start position
start angle after the trigger switch is set to ON.
(b) Confirm that "Start Angle" in the PC/reference monitor menu is automatically set to
ON.
(5) Radiographic condition setting
Perform fluoroscopy at the start position to set the radiographic conditions.
(a) Confirm that after the radiography enabled icon is displayed, rotation starts and
image acquisition is performed when the radiography switch is set to ON.
(b) Radiography must be performed normally.
750
No. 2J308-036EN*I
26.9 Checking Operation of the 3D-DA Function (Option)
Only the differences from rotational DSA are described.
(a) Confirm that speed lowers than 30 deg/s cannot be selected for the arm rotation
speed.
(b) Confirm that an acquisition deg/frame of 3 or higher cannot be selected.
(c) Confirm that only the contrast (C) method is available for the acquisition sequence.

Confirm that 3D images are displayed normally on the 3D workstation.
For the checking procedure, refer to subsection 26.6.2.
751
No. 2J308-036EN*I
26.10 Checking Operation of the LCI Function (Option)
Only the differences from 3D-DA are described here.
(1) Checking the interlocks
(a) Confirm that speed of arm rotation is as specified below.
· LCI-Fast acquisition : 25 deg/s
· LCI-Middle acquisition : 15 deg/s
· LCI-High acquisition : 10 deg/s
(b) Confirm that the acquisition rate is 30 fps.
(c) Confirm that only the contrast (C) method is available as the acquisition sequence.

Confirm that 3D images are displayed normally at the 3D workstation.
26.10.2 Checking interlocks with peripheral devices
For the check procedures, refer to subsection 26.6.2.
26.11 Checking Operation of the Additional Console
When the additional console is added, be sure to perform an operation check.
752
No. 2J308-036EN*I
27. NETWORK OPERATION CHECK
Network operation check is performed using the service software of the DFP-8000A.
For the startup procedures, refer to section 5.
28. DATA BACKUP
This section describes the backup and maintenance function of the DFP-8000A.
For the startup procedures, refer to section 5.
[Maint.] tab
Adjustment : Submenus for adjustment
System Test : System self-diagnosis
System Status : Display and resetting of system degradation level information
Data Storage : System disk/image disk diagnosis
Backup/Restore : Backup/restoration of data
FMI Record : FMI implementation record
Memo : Memo function
753
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29. APPENDIX 1
29.1.1 RAID
(1) RAID settings and LED descriptions (for BSX17-3813)
(a) Checking the RAID status.
 The front cover must be mounted correctly.

 The five disks must be inserted correctly.
 The controller board at the rear must be mounted correctly.
 To check the drive insertion status, remove and insert each drive.
Disk drive : Hard disk drive (HDD) with dedicated carrier
Dummy carrier : Dedicated carrier only (without HDD).
 Location and disk drive number
00 01 02 Dummy
Dummy Dummy Dummy Dummy
(b) Additional information for removing the disk drive from the DAC
<1> Pull here to release the lock.
754
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<2> Pull out the ejector.
<3> Slowly pull out the disk drive.
(c) Additional information for inserting the disk drive into the DAC
<1> Carefully insert the replacement disk drive into the slot.
At this time, be sure to keep the ejector pulled out.
755
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<2> Fully insert the disk drive until the ejector aligns with the fittings of the slot and
push the ejector.
<3> Confirm that the ejector is locked.
756
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(d) Names and features of each section of the disk array
The names and features of each section of the disk array are as follows.
<1> Front of the unit
<2> Front of the unit (with the front panel removed)
757
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<a> POWER LED (green)
Lights during normal operation
 SERVICE LED (orange)
Lights when inspection of the whole unit, including the disk enclosure, is
requested.
 POWER LED/SERVICE LED lighting status
Status POWER LED SERVICE LED Description

Operating state Lit Not lit Normal operation
Lit Lit Inspection request received, inspection process in
progress, recovery in progress, etc.
Power ON Lit Blinking One of the following processes is in progress (the
process in progress can be determined by
checking the controller LEDs).
 Power ON sequence
 Online download sequence
 Automatic download sequence
Note: Do not turn OFF the power during
processing of the sequence.
Lit Blinking (lights Request for inspection (battery backup failure)
for 5 seconds Note: Data in the cache may be lost.
and goes out
for 7 seconds)
Power OFF Blinking (lights Not lit Shutdown process in progress
for 0.2 s and
goes out for
0.8 s)
Blinking (lights Not lit Completion of the power OFF sequence
for 0.2 s and
goes out 0.2 s)
Not lit Not lit Power OFF
<c> Disk drive/dummy carrier
3 disk drives and 9 dummy carriers are installed per unit.
Disk drive : Hard disk drive (HDD) with dedicated carrier
Dummy carrier : Dedicated carrier only
 Location and disk drive number
00 01 02 Dummy
758
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<d> ACTIVE/FAULT LED (green/orange)
One LED is provided for each disk drive and dummy carrier and
indicates the disk drive status.
 Status display
Indicates the status of the disk drive on the right.

Indicates the status of the disk drive on the left.
 Lighting status of the ACTIVE/FAULT LED
ACTIVE/FAULT LED Status

Green : Lit Normal state (Ready)
Green : Blinking Normal state (Access in progress)
Green/orange : Blinking alternately Recovery in progress
Orange only : Blinking HDD power-saving state
Orange : Lit Abnormal state
<3> Front and rear of the unit
AC type
<a> Power unit (PS0/PS1)
Two power units are installed per unit.
 Controller (CONT0)
One controller is installed per unit.
759
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<4> Power supply
AC type
<a> Power connector
Power is supplied using the provided power cable.
 POWER GOOD LED (green)
Lighting of this LED indicates that the power is supplied.
<c> POWER FAULT LED (orange)
Lighting of this LED indicates that a power-related failure has occurred

(excluding failure of the fan power; a separate LED lights for a fan
failure).
Blinking of this LED indicates that the temperature in the power unit is
abnormal or that the controller is not mounted in the cabinet.
This LED operates when power is supplied to either the PS0 or PS1
power unit.
<d> FAN FAULT LED (orange)
Lighting of this LED indicates that a fan has failed.
The fans of the power unit operate when power is supplied to either the
PS0 or PS1 power unit.
This LED operates when power is supplied to either the PS0 or PS1
power unit.
<e> Ejector
Used to mount or remove the power unit.
<f> Power cable clamp
Provided to prevent unexpected disconnection of the cable.
760
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<5> Controller
<a> Power switch
Turns the power ON/OFF.
 MNT connector
Used to connect the service PC.
<c> LAN connector (unused)
Used to connect with the LAN for "WebSAM iStorageManager" and

SNMP.
The LINK LED (left) and the ACTIVE LED (right) are provided above the
connector.
<d> READY LED (green)
Lighting of this LED indicates that the power sequence is in progress.
Blinking of this LED indicates normal operation.
High-speed blinking of this LED indicates that the power-OFF request

has been received.
761
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<e> FAULT LED (orange)
Lighting of this LED indicates that an error has occurred in the controller.
 READY LED and FAULT LED
READY LED FAULT LED Description

Blinking Not lit Normal operation
Lit Not lit Power-ON sequence in progress
Blinking (5 times/s) Not lit Power-OFF sequence is completed.
System is ready for power OFF.
Asynchronous blinking Online/automatic download sequence in
progress
Synchronous blinking Download mode
Lit Lit A failure has occurred.
Lit Blinking Ready for power ON of the disk enclosure
Blinking Lit DD full (Disk I/F is stopped)
<f> BACKUP LED (orange)
Blinking of this LED indicates the RAID is in battery backup mode.
<g> HP connector
Connection port for the host.
Two ports are provided near the controller. The ACTIVE LED (left) and
the LINK LED (right) are provided under the connector.
HP LINK LED and ACTIVE LED
 Lighting of the HP LINK LED indicates the link-up state of the

corresponding FC.
 Lighting of the HP ACTIVE LED indicates that I/O processing is in

progress.
 Simultaneous blinking of these LEDs (1-s intervals) indicates that the

port is in the off-line state.
 Simultaneous high-speed blinking of these LEDs (500-ms intervals)

indicates that power-OFF processing is in progress.
 Simultaneous blinking whose characteristics are other than the above

indicates incorrect port setting.
 Location and port number
HP1 (unused) HP0
762
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<h> SAS connector (not used)
Used to connect the disk enclosure.
Two ports are provided per controller.
The FAULT LED (left) and the LINK LED (right) are provided under the
connector.
 LINK LED (LNK) (green)
Lighting of this LED indicates the link-up state.
The LED goes out in the link-down state.
 FAULT LED (FLT) (orange)
Lighting of this LED indicates that an error has been detected.
DP1 DP0
* DP1 supports D3-1x only.
 Expansion BBU connector (not used)
Used to connect the expansion BBU.
<j> MODEM connector (not used)
Used to connect the modem for optional remote maintenance.
<k> Ejector
Used to mount/remove the controller.
<l> Battery FAULT LED (orange)
Lighting of this LED indicates that an error has occurred in the battery
backup unit. Blinking of the LED indicates that the battery has reached
the end of its service life and that replacement is required.
763
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<6> Checking the RAID conditions at the time of power ON
Check the RAID conditions at the time of power ON as follows.
Remove the front cover and check the following LEDs during the period from
turning ON the power to the completion of initialization.
<a> At the front of the RAID, confirm that the POWER LED lights and that the
SERVICE LED blinks immediately after power ON and goes out within
3 minutes and 10 seconds.
 Confirm that the ACTIVE/FAULT LEDs on the disk drives numbered from
00 to 02 do not indicate a fault (orange).
<c> LEDs on the rear of the controller
Confirm that the FAULT LED does not light and that the READY LED
lights immediately after power ON and then blinks.
Lighting of the HP ACTIVE LED (on the left of the HP connector)

indicates that I/O processing is in progress, while lighting of the HP LINK
LED (on the right of the HP connector) indicates the Link-up state of the
corresponding FC. Simultaneous blinking of these LEDs indicates the
following state according to the blinking intervals.
 Simultaneous blinking (1-s intervals) indicates the off-line state of the

port.
 Simultaneous high-speed blinking (500-ms intervals) indicates that

power-OFF processing is in progress.
 Simultaneous blinking other than the above indicates that the port
setting is not correct.
<d> Checking the power (PS0/PS1) LEDs
 Confirm that the POWER GOOD LED lights.
 Confirm that the POWER FAULT LED does not light.
 Confirm that the FAN FAULT LED does not light.
764
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Settings of the RAID and descriptions of the LEDs (for BSX17-4105)
(a) Confirming the RAID status
 Confirm that disks in the internal section (front side) are installed properly.
 The controller board at the rear is installed properly.
 When checking the drive mounting status, remove and then reinsert the drive.
Disk drives : Hard disk (HDDs) with dedicated carriers
 Locations and disk drive Nos.
00 01 02
(b) Detailed procedure for removing the disk drive
<1> Press the green ejector button to release the lock.
<2> Pull the ejector lever to open it by about 40.
<3> Carefully pull out the disk drive.
765
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(c) Detailed procedure for inserting the disk drive
<1> Carefully insert the replacement disk drive into the slot. At this time, be sure
to keep the ejector lever open.
<2> Align the lower end of the ejector lever to the fittings of the slot and push the
ejector lever.
<3> Confirm that the ejector lever is locked.
(d) Names and features of the parts/sections
This subsection describes the name and function of each section of the disk array
system.
<1> Front of the system
766
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<2> Disk drive
<a> ID LED (blue)
Lights when this RAID unit is selected.
 POWER LED (green)
Lights during normal operation.
<c> SERVICE LED (orange)
When this LED lights, maintenance of all units (including the disk
enclosure) is being requested.
<d> STANDBY LED (white)
Lights when DC ON/OFF is possible.
 POWER LED/SERVICE LED lighting status
Status POWER LED SERVICE LED Description

Operating Lit Not lit Normal operation
state
Lit Lit An inspection request is issued or
inspection is in progress
(recovery processing, etc.)
Power ON Lit Blinking (lights for 0.2 s Power ON sequence
and goes out for 0.8 s) Note: Do not turn OFF the power
during the power ON
sequence.
Lit Blinking (lights for 1 s Online F/W update sequence
and goes out for 1 s) Note: Do not turn OFF the power
during the online F/W
update sequence.
Lit Blinking (lights for 4 s Inspection request issued (failure
and goes out for 8 s) of backup)
Note: The data in the cache may
be lost.
Power OFF Blinking (lights for 0.2 s Not lit Completion of power OFF
and goes out for 0.2 s) sequence
767
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<e> Disk drives
Three disk drives are installed per unit.
Disk drives : Hard disks (HDDs) with dedicated carriers
<f> ACTIVE LED (green)/<g> FAULT LED (orange)
One LED is provided for each disk drive and indicates the disk drive
status.
 ACTIVE/FAULT LED lighting status
ACTIVE LED FAULT LED Status

Lit Not lit HDD failure (HDD connector failure)
Lit Not lit Normal state (Ready)
Blinking Not lit Normal state (Access in progress)
Blinking Blinking Recovery in progress
Lit Blinking HDD power-saving state
Lit Lit Abnormal state
<3> Rear surface of the system
<a> Power supply (PS0)
One power supply is installed per unit.
 Controller (CONT0)
One controller is installed per unit.
768
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<4> Power supply
<a> Power plug
Power is supplied using the provided power cable.
 AC switch
Used to turn ON/OFF the AC input power supply.
<c> Input Good LED (green)
Lit when power is supplied by turning ON the AC switch.
<d> Fault LED (orange)
Lit when an abnormality is detected in the power supply.
<e> Service Action LED (blue)
Not used. Always out.
<f> DC Good LED (green)
Lit when the DC output is normal.
<g> Standby Good LED (green)
Lit in the DC output standby state.
<h> Ejector
Used to mount or remove the power unit.
 Power cable clamp
Provided to prevent unexpected disconnection of the cable.
769
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<5> Controller
<a> DC button
When this button is pressed, shutdown of the RAID starts.
* Do not hold down the DC button for four seconds or more because
doing so may adversely affect the disk array unit.
 Maintenance port
Used to connect the maintenance PC.
<c> Management port (not used)
<d> READY LED (green)
<e> FAULT LED (orange)
 READY LED and FAULT LED
READY LED FAULT LED Description

Blinking (lights for 1 s Not lit Normal operation
and goes out for 1 s)
Lit Not lit Startup or rebooting in progress
Rapid blinking Not lit Shutdown in progress
Lit Blinking (lights for 1 s Waiting for power ON of disk enclosure
Lit Lit Error state (during startup or rebooting)
Rapid blinking Lit Error state (during shutdown; information
can be collected)
Blinking (lights for 1 s Lit Disk port blocked
Blinking (lights for 1 s Rapid blinking Update of online firmware in progress
770
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<f> ID LED (blue)
Lit when this RAID unit is selected.
<g> BBU LED (orange) (not used)
<h> Host port
Connector for connection with the host
The ACTIVE LED (right) and the LINK LED (left) are provided above the
connector.
The LINK and ACTIVE LEDs are described below.
 The LINK LED is lit when the corresponding FC is in the link up state.
 The ACTIVE LED is lit when I/O processing is in progress.
 Both LEDs blink simultaneously (2-s intervals) when the port is in the
offline state.
 Both LEDs blink simultaneously at high speed (1-s intervals) when

power OFF processing is in progress.
 Both LEDs blink simultaneously at intervals other than those

described above when the port setting is incorrect.
HP1 (not used) HP0
 Disk port (not used)i
Connector for connection with the disk enclosure
The FAULT LED (lower) and the LINK LED (upper) are provided on the
right of the connector.
 LINK LED (green)
Lit when the disk enclosure is connected.
Not lit when the disk enclosure is not connected.
 FAULT LED (orange)
Lit when an abnormality is detected.
<j> USB port
USB 2.0 port for debugging
Used to connect a USB flash drive and collect logs.
<k> Ejector
Used to mount or remove the controller.
771
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<6> Checking the RAID conditions at the time of power ON
Check the RAID conditions at the time of power ON as follows.
Check the status of the following LEDs from the time the power is turned ON
until initialization of the system is completed.
<a> At the front of the RAID, confirm that the POWER LED lights and that the
SERVICE LED blinks immediately after the power is turned ON and goes
out within 3 minutes and 10 seconds.
 With regard to the ACTIVE/FAULT LEDs of disk drive Nos. 00 to 02,
confirm that no FAULT LED (orange) lights.
<c> LEDs on the rear of the controller
Confirm that the FAULT LED does not light and that the READY LED
lights immediately after power is turned ON and then blinks.
Lighting of the host port ACTIVE LED (on the right above the host port
connector) indicates that I/O processing is in progress, while lighting of
the host port LINK LED (on the left above the host port connector)
indicates that the corresponding FC is in the link up state. Simultaneous
blinking of these LEDs indicates the following states according to the
blink interval.
 Blinking simultaneously (2-s intervals): The port is in the offline state.
 Blinking simultaneously at high speed (1-s intervals): Power OFF

processing is in progress.
 Blinking simultaneously at intervals other than those described above:

The port setting is incorrect.
<d> Power LEDs
 Confirm that the INPUT GOOD LED lights.
 Confirm that the FAULT LED does not light.
772
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.1.2 Database output/conversion
Register the information when copying the database information and/or acquired images in
bitmap file format (bmp) and dynamic image format (avi) to the remote computer.
(1) Start service mode and click "Directories" in the [Config.] tab. Perform remote computer
setting and user setting in the opened window.
* The system must be restarted to make the settings effective.
(a) Basic window

1 [Add] Enables adding of remote host information or remote user information.
2 [Edit] Enables editing of already set remote host information or remote user
information.
3 [Remove] Enables deletion of already set remote host information or remote user
information.
773
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) Remote host/remote user setting window

1 Mnemonic Name Connection name
2 Host Name The remote host is selected here.
To add a remote host, click [Host Add/Del] (refer to (c) below).
3 Share The common name of the remote computer is specified here.
4 Domain The domain of the remote computer is specified here.
5 User The user name on the remote computer is specified here.
6 Password The password for the user name is specified here
(displayed with "*").
7 Confirm password The password for the user name is repeated here
(displayed with "*").
774
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(c) Remote host setting window

1 Host Name/IP Address Already set host names and IP addresses are listed in
this window.
2 [Ping] Pings the selected host.
3 [Add] Adds the selected remote computer (refer to (d) below).
4 [Edit] Enables editing of already set remote computer
information (refer to (d) below).
5 [Remove] Deletes the selected remote computer information.
6 [Close] Closes the remote host setting window.
775
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(d) Remote computer adding/editing window

1 Host Name The remote computer name is specified here.
2 IP Address The IP address of the remote computer is specified here.
3 [Find] Pings the remote computer to confirm that it is online.
4 [OK] Saves the settings and closes the window.
5 [Cancel] Cancels the settings and closes the window.
776
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.2 XTP-8100G Setting
NOTE: Items indicated as mandatory in the adjustment item must be set at the time of
installation. Items with descriptions in the reference item are settable (selectable) at the
time of installation.
29.2.1 System transformer cabinet
(1) External appearance of the system transformer cabinet
PSQ PWB (T3) Power transformer T3

(with terminal board for
Power transformer T1 line voltage selection)
(with terminal board for
line voltage selection)
Fuses F1, F2
(NFB1)
Terminal board for line

voltage selection of T2
(TB1) (TB2) (TB3) System power transformer T2

Power terminal board
(TB4)
Grounding terminal board
Item Adjustment Remarks

T1 Tap Mandatory 200, 220, 230, 240 V
T2 Tap Mandatory 380, 400, 415, 440, 480 V
T3 Tap Mandatory 200, 220, 230, 240 V
777
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Layout of 3-phase transformer T2 terminal board
LR1 LS1 LT1 220 220 220 LR2 LS2 LT2 220 220 220 220 0 220 0 220 0
U V W PU1 PV1 PW1 PU2 PV2 PW2 R1 S1 T1 R2 S2 T2 C1 C1 C2 C2 C3 C3
3-phase 400 V 3-phase 220 V 3-phase 220 V Single-phase 220 V

3-phase 400 V non-isolated output isolated output
system input isolated output (front) isolated output (side) (from 3-phase)
(3) Layout of single-phase transformer output terminal board
100B1 100B2 100B3 100B4 0B1 0B2 0B3 0B4 100B5 0B5 200B 0B
Single-phase Single-phase
Single-phase 100 V isolated output 100 V isolated 200 V isolated
output output
778
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.2.2 Power cabinet
(1) External appearance of the power cabinet
Fan (blow up)
PWB UNIT
STARTER UNIT STARTER UNIT
PWB UNIT
MA DETECTOR PWB
INVERTER UNIT1 AC/DC UNIT
AC/DC UNIT
INVERTER UNIT-1
(IGBT DRV PWB)
Fan (far side)
TERMINAL PWB
(inside)
INVERTER UNIT2 INVERTER UNIT-2
GCU
UNIT T1
Power transformer
Oil inlet lid
GCU driver
High-voltage
transformer
GCU tank
GRIT
TANK
H.V TRANS
Power terminal
board
Grounding LF1
Grounding
terminal board terminal board
779
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) External appearance of the power cabinet PWB
J01: XSUB PWB

J02: PXCIF PWB
J03: HVC1 PWB
J04: HVC2 PWB
J05: MAC1 PWB
J06: MAC2 PWB
100 VAC connector

for MAC1, 2
CAN: I/F connector with the system controller
X15: I/F connector with the system controller
X46: GCU TANK (for TUBE2) filament heating connector
X45: GCU TANK (for TUBE1) filament heating connector

X36: I/F connector with the GCU driver (for TUBE1)
X37: I/F connector with the GCU driver (for TUBE2)
NOTE: HVC1, 2, and MAC1, 2 are the same PWB. For convenience, the left-front PWB is
numbered as 1.
780
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Item Adjustment Remarks

XSUB JP1 Release For emulator connection
SW7-1 ON mAs Backup ON: 600 mAs OFF: 800 mAs
SW7-2 Not used
VR1 Adjusted Adjustment of fluoroscopy tube current overcurrent detection level
VR3 Adjusted Adjustment of mAs integral circuit gain
VR4 Adjusted Adjustment of 600 mAs detection level
VR5 Adjusted Adjustment of 800 mAs detection level
PXCIF SW1 – Service tool
SW2 –
SW3 – Reserved
SW5 All OFF Setting of MPU operation mode
SW6 Function setting F/L setting
JP1 For reset
JP5 Release For emulator connection
HVC1, HVC2 JP1 Release For emulator connection
SW1 Service tool
SW2
SW3 Service tool
VR1 Adjusted Adjustment of tube voltage waveform (E-K)
VR2 Adjusted Adjustment of internal tube voltage detection circuit gain
VR3 Adjusted Adjustment of over tube voltage detection level
VR4 Adjusted Adjustment of over tube voltage detection level
VR5 Adjusted Adjustment of tube voltage waveform (A-E)
VR6 Adjusted Adjustment of chopper overcurrent detection level (fluoroscopy)
VR7 Adjusted Adjustment of chopper overcurrent detection level (radiography,
PF)
VR9 Adjusted Adjustment of triangle wave for chopper PWM (other than Ready)
VR10 Adjusted Adjustment of triangle wave for chopper PWM (Ready)
VR11 Adjusted Adjustment of triangle wave for bridge PWM
VR12 Adjusted Adjustment of rising slope of the tube voltage reference waveform
VR13 Adjusted Adjustment of rising slope of the tube voltage reference waveform
MAC1, MAC2 VR2 Adjusted Adjustment of heating circuit chopper period
VR3 Adjusted Adjustment of heating circuit inverter period
JP1 Adjusted Switching of heating circuit inverter period
Short between 2 and 3.
MA DETECTOR VR1 Adjusted Adjustment of tube current detection circuit gain
VR2 Adjusted Adjustment of tube current detection circuit gain
VR3 Adjusted Adjustment of continuous fluoroscopy tube current detection
circuit gain
VR4 Adjusted Adjustment of continuous fluoroscopy tube current detection
circuit gain (reserved)
781
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.2.3 External appearances of units
(1) External appearance of the inverter unit
R3 CD3 CD2 R2
(B/W) (R/B)
R1 CD1
SR
K A
IGBT4 IGBT1 IGBT2 IGBT3

(2in1) (2in1)
(2) External appearance of the AC/DC unit
CNT2 CNT1
F3
NFB1
SR1
R3
TB2
F4 F1 F2
P1 N1 P2 N2
782
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) External appearance of the GCU unit
(4) External appearance of the high-voltage tank
High-voltage socket
(Connected to GCU TANK for TUBE1)
High-voltage socket
(Connected to GCU TANK of G. CAB for TUBE2)
1 2
Oil inlet lid

TB2
TB1
X44
1 2
High-voltage socket
(Connected to ANODE of X-ray tube TUBE2)
High-voltage socket
(Connected to ANODE of X-ray tube TUBE1)
783
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(5) External appearance of the GCU tank
784
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.2.4 PWB details
(1) XSUB PWB
(a) PWB external appearance
TP11 VR3 VR4 VR5 TP12
TP15
VR1
SW7
JP1
785
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) List of LEDs
Color
D18 SETUP Green Lights when the starter is in setup status.
D19 BRAKE Red Lights while the starter is being braked.
D21 PINV1_NG Red Lights when the P_INV1_PWB of the starter is defective.
D22 PINV2_NG Red Lights when the P_INV2_PWB of the starter is defective.
D23 PINV34_NG Red Lights when the P_INV3, P_INV4_PWB of the starter is defective.
D43 TUBE1_GCU_ERR Red Lights when a GCU error occurs on TUBE1.
D44 TUBE2_GCU_ERR Red Lights when a GCU error occurs on TUBE2.
D45 R_FOCUS Green Indicates that the right focus has been selected for the GCU for
stereo radiography.
D48 F_mA_OVER Red
D50 mAs_OVER Red
D51 CPU_ERROR Red
(c) List of test pins
TP4 HS Indicates the H level when the high-speed rotation mode of the starter is
selected.
TP6 0V 0V
TP11 100mAs/V mAs signal
TP12 mAs backup level
TP13 20mA/V Radiography and pulsed fluoroscopy tube current signal
TP15 F_mA Fluoroscopy tube current signal
TP16 F_mA over level
TP17 mAs_BACKUP Indicates the H level in mAs backup status.
TP19 F_mA_OVER Indicates the H level in F_mA OVER status.
TP20 Indicates the input voltage to the AD converter.
TP21 200mA/V Radiography and pulsed fluoroscopy tube current signal
TP22 RIGHT_INT
TP25 F_mA_SUB Fluoroscopy tube current signal
TP26 +15V +15 V power
TP27 +5V +5 V power
TP28 -15V -15 V power
TP29 GND GND
786
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(d) List of settings
JP1 For emulator connection (fixed to open)
SW7 SW7-1: Over mAs setting ON: 600 mAs setting OFF: 800 mAs setting
800 mAs 600 mAs

(AEC)
1 2 1 2
OFF OFF
SW7-2: Free
(e) List of adjustments
VR1 Adjustment of fluoroscopy tube current overcurrent detection level

Adjust TP16 as follows.
Japan -5.0 V 0.1 V Detection level 10 mA

Outside Japan -6.5 V 0.1 V Detection level 13 mA
VR3 Adjustment of mAs integral circuit gain

Adjust so that the voltage at TP11 is increased up to 1.0 V +/- 0.1 V when radiography
is performed under conditions of 100 kV, 500 mA, and 200 msec.
VR4 Adjustment of 600 mAs detection level
This adjustment is affected by the adjustment of VR5 and must be performed after
adjustment of VR5. When 600 mAs setting is performed using SW7, adjust the
voltage at TP12 to 5.4 V +/- 0.1 V.
VR5 Adjustment of 800 mAs detection level
When 800 mAs setting is performed using SW7, adjust the voltage at TP12 to 8.0 V
+/- 0.1 V.
After this adjustment has been performed, adjust VR4 again.
787
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) PXCIF PWB
SW6 SW5
SW1, 2
JP5
SW3
JP1
788
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) List of LEDs
Color
D2 CPU_ERR Red
D3 F_ON Green Output from the PXCIF PWB.
D4 HVC1 Green Goes out when HVC1 is selected.
D5 HVC2 Green Goes out when HVC2 is selected.
D6 RX Green Output from the PXCIF PWB.
D7 TUBE1_OK Green The LED goes out if TUBE1 overheats.
D8 TUBE2_OK Green The LED goes out if TUBE2 overheats.
D9 W_HEX1_OK Green The LED goes out if there is an abnormality in the water-cooled
unit of TUBE1.
D10 W_HEX1_OK Green The LED goes out if there is an abnormality in the water-cooled
unit of TUBE2.
D13 CHG_UP Green Lights when charging of the capacitor bank is completed.
D15 MA_DETECT_NG Red Lights if the MA_DETECTOR_PWB is defective.
D19 H8_STATUS Green The number of blinks of the LED indicates the status of the MPU
for communication.
Number of blinks
10 times : Within the main routine
9 times : Waiting until the Z80 starts up
8 times : Communication between the Z80 and the MPU is
being checked.
7 times : The data is being read from the EEPROM.
6 times : mAs backup testing is being performed.
5 times : F_mA backup testing is being performed.
4 times : CAN never became operational (uninitialized).
3 times : CAN is not operational.
(CAN became operational once and then became
non-operational.)
2 times : Not specified.
1 time : CAN is operational.
D25 INV1_OH Red Indicates overheating of inverter unit 1.
D26 INV2_OH Red Indicates overheating of inverter unit 2.
D30 L_FOCUS Green Indicates that the left focus has been selected.
D31 F_READY Green Output from the PXCIF PWB.
D32 READY Green Output from the PXCIF PWB.
D33 STATUS_NG Red Indicates that an error is occurring.
D35 D_TUBE1 Green Indicates TUBE1 selection.
D36 D_TUBE2 Green Indicates TUBE2 selection.
D37 ST_SETUP Green Lights when the starter is in setup status.
D38 BREAKE Red Lights while the starter is being braked.
789
No. 2J308-036EN*I
TP1 GND 0V
TP2 5V +5 V power
TP3 READY Operation instruction signal for other PWBs
TP4 RX Operation instruction signal for other PWBs
TP5 F_READY Operation instruction signal for other PWBs
TP6 F_ON Operation instruction signal for other PWBs
TP7 H8_NMI NMI signal of H8_MPU (for development)
TP8 For monitoring Z80_MPU operation
TP9 For monitoring Z80_MPU operation
TP10 C_RESET H8_MPU reset signal (for development)
TP13 RX Exposure instruction signal for the timer IC
TP15 RDYIN Operation instruction signal for the Z80_MPU
TP16 RXIN Operation instruction signal for the Z80_MPU
TP17 FRDYIN Operation instruction signal for the Z80_MPU
TP18 FXIN Operation instruction signal for the Z80_MPU
JP1 For forced reset (fixed to open)
SW1, 2 3
4
5
For setting the LED display mode
2 6
1 7
0 8
F 9
E A
D B
C
SW3 Reserved
SW5 For setting the MPU operation mode

SW5-1, -2 OFF
SW6 Function setting
SW6-1 OFF: Setting for the front ON: Setting for the side
SW6-2 OFF: - ON: Check Tube2 data on start-up
790
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(e) Details of LED display mode
With settings of SW1 and 2, the system information can be displayed in the 4-digit
7-segment LED. The details are described below.
SW1 SW2 Descriptions Display format

0 0 Reception packet No.
0 1 Radiography tube voltage . [kV]
0 2 Radiography tube current . [mA] : 0.0 to 999.9 mA
 [mA] : 1000 mA or more
0 3 Radiography pulse width . [ms] : 0.0 to 655.3 ms
 [ms] : 654 ms or more
(Note that 9999 is displayed for 10 s or more.)
0 4 Radiography focus/preflash time LED1, 2 Radiography focus No.
LED3, 4 Radiography preflash time
In units of 10 ms (HEX)
0 5 Radiography preflash level 0 to FFF (HEX)
0 6 Radiography main heating level 0 to FFF (HEX)
0 7 Heating level for correcting for 0 to FFF (HEX)
radiography tube current reduction
0 8 Stereo radiography right focus/preflash LED1, 2 Stereo radiography right focus No.
time LED3, 4 Stereo radiography right focus preflash
time In units of 10 ms (HEX)
0 9 Stereo radiography right focus preflash 0 to FFF (HEX)
level
0 A Stereo radiography right focus main 0 to FFF (HEX)
heating level
0 B Heating level for correcting for stereo 0 to FFF (HEX)
radiography right focus tube current
reduction
0 C Communication READY/F-READY B9 = 1: Pulsed fluoroscopy - READY
B8 = 1: F-READY
B0 = 1: Radiography READY
(HEX)
Example: Pulsed fluoroscopy READY "0200"
0 F Transmission packet No.
1 1 Pulsed fluoroscopy tube voltage . [kV]
1 2 Pulsed fluoroscopy tube current . [mA]
1 3 Pulsed fluoroscopy pulse width . [ms]
1 4 Pulsed fluoroscopy focus/preflash time LED1, 2 Pulsed fluoroscopy focus No.
LED3, 4 Pulsed fluoroscopy preflash time
Example: "020A" Small focus, Preflash 100 ms
1 5 Pulsed fluoroscopy preflash level 0 to FFF (HEX)
1 6 Pulsed fluoroscopy main heating level 0 to FFF (HEX)
1 7 Heating level for correcting for pulsed 0 to FFF (HEX)
fluoroscopy tube current reduction
791
No. 2J308-036EN*I

2 1 Continuous fluoroscopy tube voltage . [kV]
2 2 Continuous fluoroscopy tube current . [mA]
2 4 Continuous fluoroscopy focus/preflash LED1, 2 Continuous fluoroscopy focus No.
time LED3, 4 Continuous fluoroscopy preflash time
2 5 Continuous fluoroscopy preflash level 0 to FFF (HEX)
2 6 Continuous preflash main heating level 0 to FFF (HEX)
3 1 Tube voltage detection value . [kV]
(radiography/pulsed fluoroscopy)
(HVC1)
3 2 Inverter operation time detection value . [ms] : 0.0 to 655.3 ms
(radiography/pulsed fluoroscopy)  [ms] : 654 ms or more
(HVC1) (Note that 9999 is displayed for 10 s or more.)
3 3 Pulse time (kV setting 75%) detection . [ms] : 0.0 to 655.3 ms
value (radiography/pulsed fluoroscopy)  [ms] : 654 ms or more
3 4 Radiography tube current detection . [mA] : 0.0 to 999.9 mA
value  [mA] : 1000 mA or more
3 5 Tube voltage detection value . [kV]
(radiography/pulsed fluoroscopy)
(HVC2)
3 6 Inverter operation time detection value . [ms] : 0.0 to 655.3 ms
(radiography/pulsed fluoroscopy)  [ms] : 654 ms or more
3 7 Pulse time (kV setting 75%) detection . [ms] : 0.0 to 655.3 ms
value (radiography/pulsed fluoroscopy)  [ms] : 654 ms or more
detection value (HVC1)
detection value (HVC2)
3 A Continuous fluoroscopy tube current . [mA]
detection value
3 B 2000 mA range tube current detection . [mA] : 0.0 to 999.9 mA
value (radiography/pulsed fluoroscopy)  [mA] : 1000 mA or more
3 C 200 mA range tube current detection . [mA]
value (radiography/pulsed fluoroscopy)
3 D Continuous fluoroscopy tube current . [mA]
detection value (data on the neutral
point MAIN side)
3 E Continuous fluoroscopy tube current . [mA]
detection value display (data on the
neutral point SUB side)
792
No. 2J308-036EN*I

4 0 Technique code
4 1 External stereo focus indication signal
display
4 2 TUBE No. = 0: No TUBE selection
= 1: TUBE1
= 2: TUBE2
4 3 X-ray tube anode rotation mode, stator LED1, 2 X-ray tube anode rotation mode
coil type display B1: = 1: Extension by HIGH SPEED1 minutes
B0: = 1: Normal rotation at all times
(HEX)
LED3, 4 Stator coil type display
= 1: Toshiba, AA coil
= 3: VARIAN S coil
= 4: VARIAN R coil
4 4 Anode heat capacity [HU] (HEX)
Example: "708" 1800 KHU
4 5 X-ray tube information B15 = 1: GRID X-ray tube
B14 = 1: STEREO X-ray tube
B10 = 1: Water-cooled X-ray tube
B9 = 1: With supplementary thermal switch
B3 = 1: With FOCUS3
B2 = 1: With FOCUS2
B1 = 1: With FOCUS1
B0 = 1: With FOCUS0
(HEX)
Example: "8607"
B15 = 1, B10 = 1, B9 = 1, B2 = 1,
B1 = 1, B0 = 1
4 6 FOCUS0 maximum filament current In units of 0.1 A (HEX)
Example: "32" 5.0 A
4 A FOCUS0 preheating level 0-FFF (HEX)
4 B FOCUS1 preheating level 0-FFF (HEX)
4 C FOCUS2 preheating level 0-FFF (HEX)
4 D FOCUS3 preheating level 0-FFF (HEX)
5 6 FOCUS0 IF-OVER LEVEL (HEX)
(A 1MAC00 error is caused if the IF A/D
conversion data of FOCUS0 exceeds
this value.)
this value.)
this value.)
793
No. 2J308-036EN*I

this value.)
5 A FOCUS0 IF A/D conversion data (HEX)
5 B FOCUS1 IF A/D conversion data (HEX)
5 C FOCUS2 IF A/D conversion data (HEX)
5 D FOCUS3 IF A/D conversion data (HEX)
6 0 ERROR CODE MAC1 PWB B15 = 1: MAC1 100V ERROR
B14 = 1: MAC1 POWER SUPPLY ERROR
B13 = 1: MAC1 DA AD ERROR
B6 = 1: FOCUS1 (HEAT1) CHOPPER no voltage
B5 = 1: FOCUS1 (HEAT1) CHOPPER voltage
OVER
B4 = 1: FOCUS1 (HEAT1) IF OVER
OVER
(HEX)
6 1 ERROR CODE MAC2 PWB B15 = 1: MAC2 100V ERROR
B14 = 1: MAC2 POWER SUPPLY ERROR
B13 = 1: MAC2 DA AD ERROR
OVER
OVER
(HEX)
6 2 ERROR CODE HVC1 PWB B14 = 1: HVC1 XRAY signal error
B13 = 1: HVC1 RAM error
B12 = 1: HVC1 DA AD error
B11 = 1: HVC1 charge detection
B10 = 1: HVC1 radiography/pulsed fluoroscopy
pulse time over
B9 = 1: HVC1 KV signal A-E, E-K unbalance
B8 = 1: HVC1 KV no signal
B4 = 1: HVC1 CPU error
B3 = 1: IGBT DRV1 error
B2 = 1: HVC1 KV signal is a negative value.
B1 = 1: HVC1 CHOPPER overcurrent
B0 = 1: HVC1 tube voltage over
(HEX)
794
No. 2J308-036EN*I

6 3 ERROR CODE HVC2 PWB B14 = 1: HVC2 XRAY signal error
B13 = 1: HVC2 RAM error
B12 = 1: HVC2 DA AD error
B11 = 1: HVC2 charge detection
B10 = 1: HVC2 radiography/pulsed fluoroscopy
pulse time over
B9 = 1: HVC2 KV signal A-E, E-K unbalance
B8 = 1: HVC2 KV no signal
B4 = 1: HVC2 CPU error
B3 = 1: IGBT DRV2 error
B2 = 1: HVC2 KV signal is a negative value.
B1 = 1: HVC2 CHOPPER overcurrent
B0 = 1: HVC2 tube voltage over
(HEX)
6 4 ERROR CODE INVERTER UNIT B9 = 1: DG2 overheat
B8 = 1: INVERTER2 overheat
B1 = 1: DG1 overheat
B0 = 1: INVERTER1 overheat
(HEX)
6 5 ERROR CODE GCU B12 = 1: GCU2 CUT-OFF error
B11 = 1: GCU2 overheat
B10 = 1: GCU2 power error
B9 = 1: GCU2 (L) bias error
B8 = 1: GCU2 R bias error
B4 = 1: GCU1 CUT-OFF error
B3 = 1: GCU1 overheat
B2 = 1: GCU1 power error
B1 = 1: GCU1 (L) bias error
B0 = 1: GCU1 R bias error
(HEX)
6 6 ERROR CODE STARTER UNIT B13 = 1: Transistor overheat
B12 = 1: RAM error
B1 = 1: COIL no current
B9 = 1: INVERTER overcurrent
B6 = 1: SUB COIL insufficient current
B5 = 1: LINE overvoltage
B5 = 1: LINE low voltage
B2 = 1: P-INVERTER3, 4 no output
B1 = 1: P-INVERTER2 no output
B0 = 1: P-INVERTER1 no output
(HEX)
6 8 ERROR CODE PXIF PWB B13 = 1: Capacitor bank voltage error
B11 = 1: XRAY signal error
B10 = 1: EEP-ROM sum check error
B9 = 1: RAM error
B8 = 1:
B7 = 1: HRU error
B6 = 1: TUBE2 water-cooled unit error
B4 = 1: TUBE2 OVER HEAT
B2 = 1: TUBE1 water-cooled unit error
B0 = 1: TUBE1 OVER HEAT
(HEX)
795
No. 2J308-036EN*I

6 9 ERROR CODE XSUB PWB B9 = 1: CPU error
B8 = 1: DA AD error
B7 = 1: RAM error
B4 = 1: NE-MA error
(mA is detected in states other than
READY/FREADY.)
B3 = 1: MAS OVER/FMA OVER TEST error
B1 = 1: FMA OVER
B0 = 1: MAS OVER
(HEX)
9 9 SEQUENCE TEST mode No display
The following errors are ignored with
this setting at power ON.
 KV no signal error
 MAC 100 V error
 MAC CHOPPER no voltage error
 Capacitor bank incorrect voltage
B B Setting which lengthens the high-speed No display
rotation of the X-ray tube anode by
1 minute
The mode in which high-speed rotation
of the X-ray tube anode is lengthened
by 1 minute is available with this setting
at power ON.
F 1 MA-DETECT 2000 mA range Units of 0.1 mA : 0 to 999.9 mA
continuous display Units of 1 mA : 1000 mA or more
F 2 MA-DETECT 200 mA range continuous Units of 0.1 mA
display
F 3 MA-DETECT 20 mA range continuous Units of 0.01 mA
display
F 4 MA-DETECT 20 mA range (SUB) Units of 0.01 mA
continuous display
796
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) HVC1 PWB, HVC2 PWB
VR4 VR3 VR13 VR12 VR2
VR11
VR1
TP17
VR5
VR7
VR9
VR10
VR6
TP20
SW1, 2
SW3
(b) List of LEDs
Color
D1 READY Green
D2 F_READY Green
D3 F_ON Green
D4 X-RAY Green
D13 INTERNAL_ERR Red Lights at the time of arcing error, kV unbalance error, radiography
timer error, DA/AD check error, etc.
D14 OVER_CU Red Lights at the time of overcurrent.
D15 CPU_ERROR Red
D16 IGBT_DRV_ERR Red
D20 OVER_KV Red
797
No. 2J308-036EN*I
TP1 PF_ON
TP2 GND
TP3 BRIDGH_PULSE
TP4 BRIDGH_PULSE
TP5 BE
TP6 B2 High-voltage bleeder 2
TP7 OVER_KV_L
TP8 OVER_KV_H
TP9 SET_KV
TP10 ACT_KV2
TP11 B1 High-voltage bleeder 1
TP12 CHOPPER_CU
TP13 OVER_CU_RX Overcurrent level (radiography)
TP14 OVER_CU_FX Overcurrent level (fluoroscopy)
TP16 Chopper gate drive, pulse
TP17 Triangle wave for inverter bridge PWM
TP18 CAP_V
TP19 Triangle wave for chopper PWM
TP20 Chopper PWM pulse
TP21 Tube voltage feedback differential signal
TP22 SET_KV
TP23 X_IN
TP24 READY_IN
TP25 F_READY_IN
TP26 F_IN
TP27 F_TIMING
TP28 BRD_ON
TP29 EXT_F_TIMING
TP30 CHOP_ON
TP31 1.2MHz
TP32 240KHz
TP33 BRD_TIMING
TP34 CHOP_TIMING
TP35 A-E A-E voltage
TP36 RX0.75
TP37 RX0.5
TP38 RX0.75
TP39 OVER_CU Indicates the H level at the time of overcurrent
TP40 OVER_KV
TP41 KV_REVERSE
TP42 CHOP_CU
798
No. 2J308-036EN*I

SW1, 2 3
4
5
LED display mode setting
2 6
1 7
0 8
F 9
E A
D B
C
SW3 For increasing/decreasing adjustment data

By setting SW1 to C, adjustment data can be entered.
When the switch for increasing/decreasing data is moved upwards, data
increases. Data decreases when the switch is moved downwards.
(e) List of adjustment VRs
VR1 Adjustment of tube Adjusts the detection waveform of the high-voltage transformer
voltage waveform (E-K) bleeder circuit. For the adjustment procedures, refer to the main
text.
VR2 Adjustment of the internal For the adjustment procedures, refer to the main text.
tube voltage detection
circuit gain
VR3 Adjustment of over tube Adjusts the voltage at TP8 to 6.1 V +/- 0.1 V.
voltage detection level
VR4 Adjustment of over tube Adjusts the voltage at TP7 to 5.1 V +/- 0.1 V.
voltage detection level
VR5 Adjustment of tube Adjusts the detection waveform of the high-voltage transformer
voltage waveform (A-E) bleeder circuit. For the adjustment procedures, refer to the main
text.
VR6 Adjustment of chopper Adjusts the voltage at TP14 to -4.0 V +/- 0.1 V.
overcurrent detection level
(fluoroscopy)
VR7 Adjustment of chopper Adjusts the voltage at TP13 to -8.0 V +/- 0.1 V.
overcurrent detection level
(radiography/fluoroscopy)
VR9 Adjustment of the triangle Adjust so that the high-level period at TP20 is 33 sec. This
waveform for chopper adjustment affects the adjustment of VR10. After this adjustment,
PWM (other than Ready) adjust VR10 again.
799
No. 2J308-036EN*I
VR10 Adjustment of the triangle This adjustment is affected by the adjustment of VR9 and must be
waveform for chopper performed after adjustment of VR9. Adjust so that the high-level
PWM (for Ready) period at TP20 during ready operation is 62 sec.
VR11 Adjustment of the triangle Adjust so that the voltage peak at TP17 during ready operation is
waveform for bridge PWM 10 V +/- 0.2 V.
VR12 Adjustment of the rising This adjustment is affected by the adjustment of VR13 and must be
slope of the tube voltage performed after adjustment of VR13.
reference waveform
VR13 Adjustment of the rising This adjustment affects the adjustment of VR12. After this
slope of the tube voltage adjustment, adjust VR12 again.
reference waveform
800
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(f) Details of LED display mode
With settings of SW2 and 3, the system information can be displayed in the 4-digit
7-segment LED. The details are described below.
SW1 SW2 Function

0 0 Radiography, Tube voltage detection value
1 Radiography, Tube voltage setting value
2 Radiography, Tube current setting value
3 Radiography, Time setting value
4 Radiography, Tube voltage correction value
5
6 Continuous fluoroscopy, Tube voltage detection value
7 Continuous fluoroscopy, Tube voltage setting value
8 Continuous fluoroscopy, Tube current setting value
9 Continuous fluoroscopy, Tube voltage correction value
A Radiography tube voltage, Rising time constant setting value
B Pulsed fluoroscopy tube voltage, Rising time constant setting value
C Capacitor unit charge voltage detection value
D
E
F
C 0
1 Continuous fluoroscopy, Tube voltage correction value setting (50 kV, 0.5 mA)
5
6
7
8
9
A Radiography, Tube voltage rising time setting
B Pulsed fluoroscopy, Tube voltage rising time setting
C
D
E
F
801
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(4) MAC1 PWB, MAC2 PWB
VR2
TP FREQ1
VR3 TP FREQ2
(b) List of LEDs
Color
LED1 IFL Red Lights in cases of L-side heating inverter overcurrent.
LED2 IFS Red Lights in cases of S-side heating inverter overcurrent.
LED3 EOL Red Lights in cases of L-side heating inverter chopper overvoltage.
LED4 EOS Red Lights in cases of S-side heating inverter chopper overvoltage.
LED7 RESET Red Lights at the time of reset.
LED8 AC_FAIL Red Lights if the 100 V power is faulty.
802
No. 2J308-036EN*I
FREQ1 Heating inverter chopper frequency

FREQ2 Heating inverter frequency
VSL L-side setting voltage
VSS S-side setting voltage
EOL L-side chopper voltage (1/10 of actual voltage)
EOS S-side chopper voltage (1/10 of actual voltage)
GND
AGND
GND2
JP1 Switching of heating circuit inverter period (short-circuit from 2 to 3)

FREQ2
(e) List of adjustments
VR2 Adjustment of heating Adjust the period of the waveform at TP FREQ1 to 16.7 sec.
circuit chopper period
VR3 Adjustment of heating Adjust the period of the waveform at TP FREQ2 to 167 sec.
circuit inverter period
803
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(5) MA DETECTOR PWB
CAUTION: 1. Since the current at the neutral point contains all currents
supplied by the high-voltage transformer, the current in the
high-voltage bleeder within the system (0.5 mA/100 kV) and
the current in the high-voltage bleeder connected to the
exterior of the system at the time of tube voltage
measurement, as well as the tube current in the X-ray tube unit
are added.
2. For systems in which a metal tube is combined, there is a

difference between the reading of the secondary tube ammeter
and the reading of the ammeter at the neutral point. The
reading of the secondary tube ammeter may be approx. 10%
lower.
VR4 to 1
(b) List of test pins
TP0 GND
TP1 200 mA/V Tube current at the time of radiography and pulsed fluoroscopy
TP2 20 mA/V Tube current at the time of radiography and pulsed fluoroscopy
TP3 2 mA/V Tube current at the time of continuous fluoroscopy
TP4 2 mA/V Tube current at the time of continuous fluoroscopy
804
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(c) List of adjustments
This adjustment is used as the reference for automatic adjustment of tube current
and must be as precise as possible. The measurement timing setting of the
ammeter for the neutral point must be 20 msec after the start of X-ray exposure and
the measurement period must be 10 msec.
VR1 Adjustment of tube current Set SW1 = 3 and SW2 = B on the PXCIF PWB to allow the tube
detection circuit gain current detection value of this circuit to be displayed.
(TP1: 1.0 V/200 mA) Adjust so that when radiography is performed under conditions of
80 kV, 500 mA, and 40 msec, the tube current detection value is
within +/- 2%.
VR2 Adjustment of tube current Set SW1 = 3 and SW2 = C on the PXCIF PWB to allow the tube
detection circuit gain current detection value of this circuit to be displayed.
(TP2: 1.0 V/20 mA) Adjust so that when radiography is performed under conditions of
80 kV, 100 mA, and 40 msec, the tube current detection value is
within +/- 2%.
VR3 Adjustment of continuous Set SW1 = 3 and SW2 = D on the PXCIF PWB to allow the tube
fluoroscopy tube current current detection value of this circuit to be displayed.
detection circuit gain Adjust so that when fluoroscopy is performed under conditions of
(TP3: 1.0 V/2.0 mA) 100 kV and 4.0 mA, the tube current detection value is within
+/- 0.1 mA.
VR4 Adjustment of continuous Set SW1 = 3 and SW2 = E on the PXCIF PWB and perform
fluoroscopy tube current adjustment in the same manner as for VR3.
detection circuit gain
(TP4: 1.0 V/2.0 mA)
805
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(6) TERMINAL PWB
X30
(b) List of LEDs
L1 DC24V Lights when 24 VDC is ON.

L2 Lights when the capacitor bank is charged.
TP1 GND
TP2 VC For monitoring the output voltage of the isolation amplifier for capacitor
bank voltage detection
(d) List of settings and adjustments
This adjustment is used as the reference for automatic adjustment of tube current
and must be as precise as possible. The measurement timing setting of the
ammeter for the neutral point must be 20 msec after the start of X-ray exposure and
the measurement period must be 10 msec.
JP1 Open
TDR1 Adjusted Used to turn ON CNT2 15 seconds after power ON.
TF29- Open For service
TF30 When measurement is performed with the tube voltage meter
connected to the high-voltage switch for TUBE2, the high-voltage switch
for TUBE2 can be forced to ON by short-circuiting this portion.
806
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.2.5 Test methods
(1) X-ray precision test
(a) Measuring the tube voltage
<1> When connecting the bleeder in parallel with the X-ray tube
Connect the tube voltage meter to the "TUBE2" side of the high-voltage
transformer (high-voltage switch).
Short-circuit from TF29 to TF30 on the TERMINAL PWB and operate the
switch on the "TUBE2" side. (Return it to the original position after
measurement is completed.)
WARNING: 1. There are so many live parts on the TERMINAL PWB

and its surrounding sections that extreme care
should be taken to prevent shorted parts from
coming off.
2. Because the free receptacle of the tube voltage meter

carries high voltage, fill in with sufficient insulation
oil to prevent discharge.
3. Because the high-voltage circuit may be charged,

take extreme care when connecting/disconnecting
the high-voltage bushing.
Tube1 + +
Tube1 -
Tube2 +
Anode
Tube2 - Cathode -
DG Tank -
(HRU Tank) kV meter
X-ray tube
GCU
807
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<2> When connecting the bleeder to the X-ray tube serially
As shown in the figure below, connect the bleeder between the high-voltage
transformer (high-voltage switch) and the X-ray tube.
Tube1 + +
Anode
Tube1 - Cathode
kV meter
DG Tank -
(HRU Tank) -
X-ray tube
GCU
808
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) Connecting the ammeter for neutral point
WARNING: When the ammeter for neutral point is to be connected,

the short-circuit metal of the terminal board must be
removed. If fluoroscopy/radiography is performed with
this part open-circuited, high voltage is generated
between terminal boards, producing a dangerous
situation. For connection, confirm that the connection
cables and connection terminals are not discontinuous
or loose. After measurement is completed, reconnect
the short-circuit metal to the original position.
CAUTION: Do not perform fluoroscopy tube current adjustment with

the tube voltmeter connected. When the tube voltage meter
is connected, the current in the tube voltage meter and the
current in the X-ray tube are added, which together is the
current at the neutral point. This makes it impossible to
measure the tube current correctly.
When 100 kV voltage is applied with the KV-201D
(manufactured by the ALCO company) connected, approx.
0.25 mA current (0.125 mA for 50 kV) flows.
When the tube current is measured using the neutral point

ammeter, note that the reading reflects the currents (0.5 mA
at 100 kV) in the bleeders within the two high-voltage
transformers that are mixed together.
NOTE: When adjustment is performed within a lower tube current range, the
measuring instrument may end up in over-range status, despite the
adjustment current being lower than the measurement range. This occurs
because the current which flows in order to charge stray capacitance of
the high-voltage cable at the time of tube voltage rising exceeds the set
range of the measuring instrument. If this occurs, increase the
measurement range for adjustment.
For the same reason, delay the measurement timing by approx. 20 msec
after the start of X-ray exposure in order to avoid the effect of tube voltage
rising.
mA Charge current
Tube current
time
809
No. 2J308-036EN*I
NOTE: For systems in which a metal tube is combined, the reading of the
secondary tube ammeter does not include the current flowing in the metal
earth because of performance on the anode side. Therefore, the reading
of the secondary tube ammeter is lower than the actual tube current.
Because the neutral point ammeter measures the current on the cathode
side, the reading of the measuring instrument can be taken as the tube
current.
<1> MA-2000 manufactured by ALCO company (also used for

fluoroscopy/radiography)
Remove the short-circuit metal between TL6 and TL7 on the mA detector
board and connect the red clip between them. After measurement has been
completed, replace the short-circuit metal to its original position. It is not
necessary to connect the black clip.
MA-2000
TL6 TL7
Red
Black
<2> MA-201 manufactured by ALCO company (dedicated for R-mA measurement)
board and connect it between them. After measurement has been completed,
replace the short-circuit metal to its original position. The fluoroscopy tube
current must be measured using the current measurement mode of the digital
multimeter.
TERMINAL PWB
mA meter
ALCO MA-201
TL6 TL7
810
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<3> 35035 mA/mAs meter manufactured by KEITHLEY company (not provided

with the hold function)
board and connect TL1 to the positive terminal of the measuring instrument
and TL2 to the negative terminal of the measuring instrument. After
measurement has been completed, replace the short-circuit metal to its
original position.
TERMINAL PWB
mA/mAs meter
KEITHLEY
35035
TL1 TL2
+ -
(2) Adjustment precision and list of adjustment standards
Precision standard
Target Adjustment standards
(IEC standards)
Radiography tube voltage precision +3%, -10% +/- 10%
Radiography tube current precision +5%, -15% +/- 20%
Radiography timer precision +/- (2% +1 msec) +/- (5% +1 msec)
(Display and setting at the time of AEC
operation)
Continuous fluoroscopy tube voltage +3%, -10% +/- 10%
precision
operation)
Continuous fluoroscopy tube current +5%, -15% +/- 20%
precision
operation)
Fluoroscopy cumulating time precision -5% to +0%
811
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.3.1 PWB setting

DIP SW1-1: OFF (Selection of initial data BB-RAM at power ON)
ON (Not used)
DIP SW1-2: OFF (Information saved for each axis is not initialized.)
ON (Information saved for each axis is initialized.)
DIP SW1-3: OFF (CANopen SDO value is not initialized.)
ON (CANopen SDO value is initialized.)
DIP SW1-4: OFF (Independent auto positioning value is not initialized.)
ON (Independent auto positioning value is initialized.)
ON (Detector type: FPD is combined)
DIP SW1-6: OFF (CANopen address TUBE1 is selected.)
ON (CANopen address TUBE2 is selected.)
DIP SW1-7: OFF (Independent operation mode is disabled.)
ON (Independent operation mode is enabled.)
DIP SW1-8: OFF (Timeout setting is enabled when the ceiling-suspended C-arm is
selected.)
ON (Timeout setting is disabled when the ceiling-suspended C-arm is
selected.)
DIP SW2-1: (Not used)
ON (FPD fan lock detection is disabled.)
DIP SW2-3: OFF (FPD temperature detection is enabled.)
ON (FPD temperature detection is disabled.)
DIP SW2-4: OFF (Check for interference with the table, patient is not available.)
ON (Check for interference with the table, patient is available.)
DIP SW2-5, 6, 7, 8: System Information setting.
SW2-5 SW2-6 SW2-7 SW2-8

Single plane OFF OFF OFF OFF
(Not used) ON OFF OFF OFF
Dual plane (90°) OFF ON OFF OFF
Dual plane (180°) ON ON OFF OFF
Dual plane (0°) OFF OFF ON OFF
Activ (Asteion) ON OFF ON OFF
Activ (Aquilion) OFF ON ON OFF

OPEN (Use as the system controller is disabled.)
812
No. 2J308-036EN*I
DIP SW S1 : All OFF (IRQ selection)

(3) [A03] MIO PWB

ON (Service mode function is enabled.)
S1-2: OFF (Support unit type: CAS-810A, CAS-830A)
ON (Not used)
S1-3: OFF (Dual-plane system 0° layout)
ON (Dual-plane system 90°, 180° layout)
S1-4: OFF (Dual-plane system 810A side)
ON (Dual-plane system 830A side)
NOTE: For systems other than dual plane systems, set S1-3 and S1-4 to OFF.
RSW S6: Setting the axis for auto scaling

0: Disabled
1: Main rotation
2: Slide
3: Detector near/away
4: Support column rotation
JP2: Short (Not used.)
JP3: Open (C-arm safety switch is used.)
ON (All safety switches are disabled.)
S2-2: OFF (Other-arm-side safety switch is enabled.)
ON (Other-arm-side safety switch is disabled.)
All OFF otherwise.
813
No. 2J308-036EN*I

RSW1: 0 (TFP-800B)
RSW1: 1 (TFP-1200B)
ON (OFF-main mode)
S1-4: ON (Blade/compensation filter can be operated while fluoroscopy is OFF.)
OFF (Blade/compensation filter can be operated during fluoroscopy only.)
S1-5: ON (Blade/compensation filter can be operated while no tube is selected.)
OFF (Blade/compensation filter can be operated only while tube is
selected.)
S1-8: ON (BLA-800C mounted)
OFF (BLA-800A mounted)
814
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.4.1 PWB setting

[CAS-830A]

ON (Not used)
selected.)
selected.)
DIP SW2-2 OFF (FPD fan lock detection is enabled.)
DIP SW2-5, 6, 7, 8: System Information setting
SW2-5 SW2-6 SW2-7 SW2-8


815
No. 2J308-036EN*I

(3) [A03] MIO PWB

ON (Service mode function is enabled.)
S1-2: OFF (Support unit type: CAS-810A, CAS-830A)
ON (Not used)
S1-3: OFF (Dual-plane system 0° layout)
ON (Dual-plane system 90°, 180° layout)
S1-4: OFF (Dual-plane system 810A side)
ON (Dual-plane system 830A side)
NOTE: For systems other than dual-plane systems, set S1-3 and S1-4 to OFF.
RSW S6: Setting the axis for auto scaling

0: Disabled
1: Main rotation
2: Slide
3: Detector near/away
4: Tabletop longitudinal movement
5: Tabletop lateral movement
JP2: Short (Not used)
JP3: Short (C-arm safety switch is not used.)
ON (All safety switches are disabled.)
S2-2: OFF (Other-arm-side safety switch is enabled.)
ON (Other-arm-side safety switch is disabled.)
All OFF otherwise.
816
No. 2J308-036EN*I

RSW1: 0 (TFP-800A/A1 used in combination)
RSW1: 3 (TFP-1216A used in combination)

ON (OFF-main mode)
S1-4: ON (Blade/compensation filter can be operated while
fluoroscopy is OFF.)
OFF (Blade/compensation filter can be operated during
fluoroscopy only.)
S1-5: ON (Blade/compensation filter can be operated while
no tube is selected.)
OFF (Blade/compensation filter can be operated only
while tube is selected.)
OFF (BLA-800A mounted)
817
No. 2J308-036EN*I
[CAS-830B]

ON (Not used)
selected.)
selected.)
SW2-5 SW2-6 SW2-7 SW2-8


JP2: OPEN (Internal ROM is enabled.)
JP3, JP4: SHORT (Internal ROM is enabled.)
818
No. 2J308-036EN*I

(3) [A03] MIO PWB

S10 (8 bit) 1 OFF Service mode function : Enabled
ON : Disabled
2 OFF Support unit type : CAS-830B
3 ON Support unit type : CAS-830B
4 OFF Not used
5 OFF Rail switch function : Disabled
ON : Enabled
6 OFF Grid connection function : Disabled
ON : Enabled
7 OFF Not used
S2 (2 bit) 1 OFF Touch sensor function : Enabled
ON : Disabled
2 OFF Other-arm touch sensor function : Enabled
ON : Disabled
S3 (8 bit) 1 Only 4 ON IRQ setting
to
8
S5 0 Not used
S6 Setting of the axes for auto-scaling
0: None
1: Main rotation
2: Sliding
3: Detector near/away movement
4: Ceiling longitudinal movement
5: Ceiling lateral movement
6: Ceiling support column rotation
7: FPD rotation
819
No. 2J308-036EN*I

JP1 Open (Not used)
JP2 Shorted AUX touch sensor setting : Disabled
JP3 Shorted C-arm touch sensor setting : Disabled
Open : Enabled
JP4 9-10 Short (GA TRIGER 125 Hz)

LED1 Red System reset (lit during reset operation)
LED2 Green Emergency status (not lit when the Emergency SW is ON)
LED3 Green CLOCK and FPGA status (blinking during normal operation)
Tableside console communication status
LED4 Green
Satellite console communication status
LED5 Green
LED6 Green Not used (not lit)
LED7 Red PWB reset (lit during reset operation)
LED8 Red FPGA (goes out when configuration is completed)
820
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(4) [A04] COLLIMATOR I/F PWB
RSW1 (Selection of the detector size)

0 (TFP-800A is used.)
RSW2 (Selection of the support unit)

1 (CAS-810A is used.)
2 (CAS-820B is used.)
3 (CAS-830B is used.)
4 (CAS-880A is used.)
RSW3 (Not used)

0 (Not used)
RSW4 (Not used)

0 (Not used)
Dip SW 1-1 : ON (SH7055 operation mode (internal ROM enabled))

1-2 : OFF (SH7055 operation mode (internal ROM is enabled))
1-3 : OFF (SH7055 operation mode (internal ROM is enabled))
1-4 : ON (Flash Write Enable boot mode setting)
Dip SW 2-1 : ON (Service mode ON)

OFF (Service mode OFF)
2-2 : OFF (not used)
2-5 : ON (when the EPOS2 PWB is used in combination)
OFF (when the EPOS PWB is used in combination)
2-6 : ON (Manual speed initialization is performed.)
OFF (Manual speed initialization is not performed.)
2-7 : ON (The aperture adjustment/positional error correction value
is cleared.)
OFF (The aperture adjustment/positional error correction value
is not cleared.)
2-8 : ON (The SDO master setting information is initialized.)
OFF (The SDO master setting information is not initialized.)
821
No. 2J308-036EN*I
DIP SW 3-1 : OFF (BLA type: BLA-900A)

: ON (BLA type: BLA-900C)
3-2 : OFF (Not used: Reserved for an additional BLA type)
3-3 : OFF (ON-main mode)
ON (OFF-main mode)
3-4 : OFF (The aperture correction is invalid.)
ON (The aperture correction is valid.)
3-5 : OFF (The beam hardening filter position is fixed
(beam hardening filter operations cannot be performed).)
ON (The beam hardening filter can be operated.)
3-6 : OFF (The blades/compensation filters can be operated only
during fluoroscopy.)
ON (The blades/compensation filters can be operated even when
fluoroscopy is not performed.)
3-7 : OFF (The blades/compensation filters can be operated only when
the corresponding X-ray tube is selected.)
no X-ray tube is selected.)
3-8 : OFF (For systems with the BLA-900A or BLA-900C used in
combination, main unit rotation is also performed.)
DIP SW 4-1 : ON (FPGA configuration mode)

DIP SW 5-1 : OFF (Not used)

DIP SW 6-1 : OFF (CAN1 terminator not provided)

ON (CAN1 terminator provided)
6-2 : OFF (CAN2 terminator not provided)
DIP SW 7-1 : OFF (Not used)

822
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(5) PWBs in the operating panel

JP1 (Shorted) (Not used)
JP2 (Open) (Shorted)
JP3 (Not used) (Open)
JP6 (Shorted) 
S1 (All OFF) (All OFF)
PWB CO
S-1-1 OFF (The MAG selection switches (+/-) are not inverted.)
ON (The MAG selection switches (+/-) are inverted.)
S1-2 OFF (F/L linking with the MAG selection switches is disabled.)
ON (F/L linking with the MAG selection switches is enabled.)
S1-3, 4 (Not used)
PWB IMG
S1-4 ON (The function buttons are not lit at power ON.)
OFF (The function buttons are lit at power ON.)
823
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.5.1 PWB setting
DIP SW1-1: OFF (Selection of initial data BB-RAM at power ON)

ON (Not used)
DIP SW1-6: OFF (CANopen address Frontal or TUBE1 is selected.)
ON (CANopen address Lateral or TUBE2 is selected.)
selected.)
selected.)

DIP SW2-3: (Reserved)
DIP SW2-5, 6, 7, 8: System Information setting.
SW2-5 SW2-6 SW2-7 SW2-8

Biplane ON OFF OFF OFF

824
No. 2J308-036EN*I

(3) [A03] MIO PWB

S10 (8 bit) 1 OFF Service mode function : Disabled
ON : Enabled
2 OFF Support unit type : CAS-880A
ON : CAS-820B
3 OFF Not used
4 OFF Support unit used in combination:
Single-plane and Biplane systems in which
the 820B is used in combination
ON Not used
ON : Enabled
6 OFF Grid connect function : Disabled
ON : Enabled
7 OFF Not used
ON : Disabled
2 OFF Other arm touch sensor function : Enabled
ON : Disabled
8
S5 0 Not used
825
No. 2J308-036EN*I

S6 0 Selection of the axis for auto-scaling, initial-teaching
0: No axis
1: Arm rotation
2: Arm sliding
3: SID
4: Floor base rotation
6: FPD rotation
7: BLA rotation (only for systems with the 8" FPD)

JP2 SHORT Auxiliary touch sensor setting : Disabled
JP3 SHORT Floor base touch sensor setting : Disabled
OPEN : Enabled
LED Color Function

normal)
normal)
826
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(4) [A04] COLLIMATOR CONT PWB/[A04] COLLIMATOR I/F PWB
(a) When the BLA-800C (COLLIMATOR CONT PWB) is used in combination

ON (OFF-main mode)
S1-4: ON (Blade/compensation filter can be operated while fluoroscopy
is OFF.)
fluoroscopy only.)
S1-5: ON (Blade/compensation filter can be operated while no tube is
selected.)
selected.)
(b) When the BLA-900A or BLA-900C (COLLIMATOR I/F PWB) is used in combination

0 (When the TFP-800A/A1, TFP-800A/B1, or TFP-800B is used in
combination)
2 (When the TFP-1200A is used in combination)

1 (When the CAS-810A is used in combination)
2 (When the CAS-820B is used in combination)
RSW 3 (Not used.)

0: Not used
RSW 4 (Not used.)

0: Not used
827
No. 2J308-036EN*I

1-2: OFF (SH7055 operation mode (The internal ROM is enabled.))
1-3: OFF (SH7055 operation mode (The internal ROM is enabled.))
1-4: ON (Flash Write Enable boot mode setting)
DIP SW 2-1: ON (Service mode ON)

OFF (Service mode OFF)
2-2: OFF (Not used)
2-3: OFF (Not used)
2-4: OFF (Not used)
2-5: ON (when the EPOS2 PWB is used in combination)
2-6: ON (Manual speed initialization is performed.)
2-7: ON (Aperture adjustment/positional error correction value is
cleared.)
OFF (Aperture adjustment/positional error correction value is not
cleared.)
2-8: ON (SDO master setting information is initialized.)
OFF (SDO master setting information is not initialized.)
DIP SW 3-1: OFF (BLA type: BLA-900A)

ON (BLA type: BLA-900C)
3-2: OFF (Not used: Reserved for an additional BLA type)
3-3: OFF (ON-main mode)
ON (OFF-main mode)
3-4: OFF (Aperture correction is not valid.)
ON (Aperture correction is valid.)
3-5: OFF (The beam hardening filter operation is fixed.)
ON (The beam hardening filter operation is possible.)
3-6: OFF (The blades/compensation filters can be operated only during
fluoroscopy.)
3-7: OFF (The blades/compensation filters can be operated only when
ON (The blades/compensation filters can be operated when no
X-ray tube is selected.)
3-8: OFF (The beam limiting device rotation shaft is provided when the

828
No. 2J308-036EN*I

4-2: ON (FPGA configuration mode)
4-3: ON (FPGA configuration mode)
4-4: OFF (Not used)
5-2: OFF (Not used)
5-3: OFF (Not used)
5-4: OFF (Not used)
5-5: OFF (Not used)
5-6: OFF (Not used)
5-7: OFF (Not used)
5-8: OFF (Not used)
DIP SW 6-1: OFF (CAN1 terminator not provided)

6-2: OFF (CAN2 terminator not provided)

7-2: OFF (Not used)
7-3: OFF (Not used)
7-4: OFF (Not used)
(5) PWBs in the operating panel

JP1 (SHORT) (not used)
JP2 (OPEN) (SHORT)
JP3 (Not used) (SHORT)
JP4 (SHORT) (SHORT)
JP5 (SHORT) (OPEN)
JP6 (SHORT) --
S1 (All are OFF) (All are OFF)
PWB CO
S1-1 OFF (Increase/decrease functions of the MAG selection switches (+/-) are
not inverted.)
ON (Increase/decrease functions of the MAG selection switches (+/-) are
inverted.)
S1-2 OFF (F/L link with the MAG selection switch is disabled.)
ON (F/L link with the MAG selection switch is enabled.)
S1-3, 4 OFF (Not used)
PWB IMG
S1-4 ON (The function button is not lit at power ON.)
OFF (The function button is lit at power ON.)
829
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.6.1 PWB setting

ON (Not used)
DIP SW1-6: OFF (CANopen address Frontal or TUBE1 is selected.)
ON (CANopen address Lateral or TUBE2 is selected.)
DIP SW1-8: Not used
DIP SW2-1: Not used
DIP SW2-3: (Reserved)
SW2-5 SW2-6 SW2-7 SW2-8

Biplane ON OFF OFF OFF

830
No. 2J308-036EN*I

(3) [A03] MIO PWB

S10 (8 bit) 1 OFF Service mode function : Disabled
ON : Enabled
2 OFF Support unit type : CAS-880A
ON : CAS-820B
3 OFF Not used
4 OFF Not used
ON : Enabled
6 OFF Grid connect function : Disabled
ON : Enabled
7 OFF Not used
ON : Disabled
2 OFF Other arm touch sensor function : Enabled
ON : Disabled
8
S5 0 Not used
831
No. 2J308-036EN*I

S6 0 Setting of the axis for auto scaling
0: No axis
1: Arm rotation
2: Arm sliding
3: SID
4: Ceiling longitudinal movement
5: Ceiling lateral movement
6: FPD rotation (only for systems with the 12" FPD)
7: Detector up/down movement
8: Tube up/down movement

JP2 SHORT Auxiliary touch sensor setting : Disabled
JP3 SHORT Floor base touch sensor setting : Disabled
OPEN : Enabled
LED Color Function

normal)
normal)
832
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(4) [A04] COLLIMATOR CONT PWB/[A04] COLLIMATOR I/F PWB
(a) When the BLA-800C (COLLIMATOR CONT PWB) is used in combination

ON (OFF-main mode)
S1-4: ON (Blade/compensation filter can be operated while fluoroscopy
is OFF.)
fluoroscopy only.)
S1-5: ON (Blade/compensation filter can be operated while no tube is
selected.)
selected.)
(b) When the BLA-900A or BLA-900C (COLLIMATOR I/F PWB) is used in combination

0 (When the TFP-800A/A1, TFP-800A/B1, or TFP-800B is used in
combination)
2 (When the TFP-1200A is used in combination (V3.62 or later))

833
No. 2J308-036EN*I
DIP SW 2-1: OFF (Service mode ON)

ON (Service mode OFF)
2-2: OFF (Not used)
2-3: OFF (Not used)
2-4: OFF (Not used)
2-5: ON (when the EPOS2 PWB is used in combination)
2-6: ON (Manual speed initialization is performed.)
2-7: ON (Aperture adjustment/positional error correction value is
cleared.)
OFF (Aperture adjustment/positional error correction value is not
cleared.)
2-8: ON (SDO master setting information is initialized.)
OFF (SDO master setting information is not initialized.)
DIP SW 3-1: OFF (BLA type: BLA-900A)

ON (BLA-type: BLA-900C)
3-2: OFF (Not used: Reserved for an additional BLA type)
3-3: OFF (ON-main mode)
ON (OFF-main mode)
3-4: OFF (Aperture correction is not valid.)
ON (Aperture correction is valid.)
3-5: OFF (The beam hardening filter operation is fixed.)
OFF (The beam hardening filter operation is possible.)
3-6: OFF (The blades/compensation filters can be operated only during
fluoroscopy.)
3-7: OFF (The blades/compensation filters can be operated only when
ON (The blades/compensation filters can be operated when no
X-ray tube is selected.)
3-8: OFF (The beam limiting device rotation shaft is provided when the
834
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.7 BLA-800C Setting
Switch setting
RSW1, RSW2: 0
: ON (OFF-main mode)
1-2 : OFF (Aperture correction is not performed)
: ON (Aperture correction is performed)
1-3 : OFF (Beam hardening filter cannot be moved)
: ON (Beam hardening filter can be moved)
: ON (FPD is combined)
For other detailed settings, refer to the installation manual for the BLA-800C (2C356-064E).
Switch setting
RSW1, RSW2: 0
: ON (OFF-main mode)
1-2 : OFF (Aperture correction is not performed)
: ON (Aperture correction is performed)
1-3 : OFF (Beam hardening filter cannot be moved)
: ON (Beam hardening filter can be moved)
: ON (FPD used in combination)
For other detailed settings, refer to the installation manual for the BLA-800A (2C356-056E).
835
No. 2J308-036EN*I
The settings for each daughter PWB are listed below.
BLA-900A PWB (EPOS PWB)
Axis Node DIP SW setting Axis Node DIP SW setting

Target axis Target axis
No. ID 1 2 3 4 No. ID 1 2 3 4
Square beam
limiting
1 1 ON OFF OFF OFF 7 F3 sliding 7 ON ON ON OFF
device blade
(foot end)
Square beam
limiting
2 2 OFF ON OFF OFF 8 F1 rotation 8 OFF OFF OFF ON
device blade
(head end)
Square beam
limiting
3 3 ON ON OFF OFF 9 F2 rotation 9 ON OFF OFF ON
device blade
(left side)
Square beam
limiting
4 4 OFF OFF ON OFF 10 F3 rotation 10 OFF ON OFF ON
device blade
(right side)
Beam
5 F1 sliding 5 ON OFF ON OFF 11 11 ON ON OFF ON
hardening filter
Beam limiting
6 F2 sliding 6 OFF ON ON OFF 12 12 OFF OFF ON ON
device rotation
* The above settings are applicable to the EPOS PWB (BSX13-0351 or BSX13-0332/YWP5770)
only. It is not necessary to perform the above settings for the EPOS2 PWB (BSX13-
0449/YWP5833).
836
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.12 Adjustment Software Starting Procedures
(1) Turn ON the power of the Infinix-i series system.
(2) Select the [Utility] tab on the screen and press the [Service] button in the Service Tools
area.
(3) The service license key input screen is displayed. Enter the license key.
(4) Press the [Adjustment] button in the [Maint.] tab in the Service Software screen.
The adjuster's name is requested. Click [Execute] after inputting the adjuster's name. The
Adjustment Menu will be displayed.
837
No. 2J308-036EN*I
No. Item name Description of the items

1 Tube Select Used to display/select the adjustment status depending on the system
configuration.
SP (single plane) : Selection is not possible.
DP (dual plane) : When selecting the adjustment status, move the
support unit used in the normal system operating
status to the tabletop side.
Selection is not possible.
BP (biplane) : Select the plane to be adjusted.
2 MA Adjust Tube current adjustment
3 Focus Adjust Tool used when focus adjustment is performed
4 Device Gain Adjust Optical device adjustment
Iris/ND filter optical transmission measurement
5 ABC Gain Adjust Dose adjustment for fluoroscopy, DA, and one-shot radiography
6 Dose Limit Adjust Dose limit adjustment
7 SEC Adjust For DSA, SEC function adjustment
8 F-ACT Adjust For DA, F-ACT function adjustment
9 Image Level Analysis Tool used for measuring the image level
10 Navi Mode Check box for enabling/disabling the adjustment Navi function. Place a
check mark to enable the function.
CAUTION: X-ray tube switching for the DP system:
Before entering this adjustment screen, switch the X-ray tube to the X-ray tube
for which adjustment is to be performed.
Since X-ray tube switching cannot be performed after adjustment, the system
must be rebooted to perform adjustment.
838
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.12.1 X-ray adjustment support function (Adjustment navigator function)
As the X-ray adjustment procedure (from starting service mode through to execution ) is
complex and includes many steps, certain experience and knowledge are required to perform
it smoothly. The support function (adjustment navigator function), which provides operational
navigation with guide messages, sequence control, and display reference information, and
simplifies the process by eliminating unnecessary operations, makes the procedure easier,
faster, and more reliable.
Operation of the adjustment navigator function is described in this subsection.
(1) Operating the adjustment navigator
An example of the X-ray adjustment window containing the adjustment navigator is

described below. If the adjustment navigator is used, the support window (box in the
figure) is displayed.
Example of X-ray adjustment window containing the adjustment navigator
NOTE: Adjustment functions operated using the adjustment navigator are for tube
current adjustment, FPD adjustment, fluoroscopy/radiography dose adjustment,
F-ACT adjustment, and dose limit adjustment. For other adjustment functions,
perform the conventional procedures.
839
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(a) Turning ON/OFF the adjustment navigator
The adjustment navigator can be turned ON/OFF by changing either the setting
displayed in the adjustment menu window or the setting displayed in each
adjustment window.
<1> Turning ON/OFF the adjustment navigator using the setting displayed in the
adjustment menu window
When the adjustment window is started up with the "Navi Mode" checkbox in
the adjustment menu window checked, the window containing the adjustment
navigator is opened.
<2> Turning ON/OFF the adjustment navigator using the setting displayed in each
adjustment window
The adjustment navigator can be turned ON/OFF using the "Navi" checkbox in
the adjustment window.
840
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) Functions of the adjustment navigator
The adjustment navigator mainly provides functions for adjustment procedures

through the support window. Usage of each function is described below.
<1> Display function for adjustment procedure guide messages
The Operation and Status fields are displayed in the support window in the
lower part of the screen (box outlined in bold in the figure).
The window displays messages on the adjustment procedure in progress.
841
No. 2J308-036EN*I
 Messages on the adjustment procedures that the operator must perform

next are displayed in the Operation field. The adjustment procedures are
performed by following the message instructions.
 Messages that the adjustment is complete, descriptions, and handling of

errors that occur during adjustment are displayed in the Status field.
842
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<2> Adjustment procedure control function
The required adjustment procedure is displayed in the Navigation Process

field of the support window on the right side of the screen with Treeview. The
 mark is displayed to the left of the adjustment item. The  mark for the
item for which the adjustment is being performed is highlighted in color.
Adjustment items cannot be changed using the tab key on the adjustment
navigator. Changing the adjustment items can be performed using one of the
two methods below.
<a> To select an adjustment item, place the mouse cursor on the desired
item displayed in Treeview and click it. The adjustment window and
parameters that correspond to the selected adjustment item are
displayed.
 The adjustment item can be changed from one item to another using the
[Prev] and [Next] buttons. The adjustment window and parameters that
correspond to the selected adjustment item are displayed.
NOTE: In most adjustment procedures, the adjustment item can be selected

automatically without performing the above methods. If it is
necessary to return to the previous item, perform one of the
procedures above.
843
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<3> Help window display function
Reference information related to the adjustment in progress can be displayed

in a Help window on the system monitor or in-room monitor. On these
monitors, reference data such as installation of instruments used for
adjustment and target values for adjustment are displayed. Displaying the
information on the monitors facilitates the procedure by making reference to
the manual unnecessary.
The Help window can be displayed by clicking the buttons under "Help" in the
support window on the right of the screen.
These buttons support each monitor. When the button for the corresponding
monitor is pressed, the Help window is displayed on the selected monitor.
(The buttons Ex.3 and Ex.4 are used for biplane systems.)
844
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.13 Adjustment Procedure If Misregistration Became Large During Rotational DSA
Checking the amount of shift at each mechanical section and checking the engagement of the
drive section encoder gears
(1) Contact adjustment for the CAS-810A slide roller
Prepare the following shims for adjustment work.
 0.01-mm-thick shims: 20 mm (width), 100 mm (length)  2
 0.05-mm-thick shims: 20 mm (width), 300 mm (length)  4
(a) Remove the C-arm section covers from the C-arm support unit.
C-arm section cover
C-arm section cover
(b) Perform sliding over the entire stroke one or two times at a main rotation angle of 0°.
(This is required to make the contact of the main roller even.)
(c) Set the main rotation angle to 0° and the sliding angle to 0°.
845
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(d) Main roller
Loosen the M16 nuts of the eccentric shafts, insert the 5-mm hexagonal wrench into
the hexagonal holes, and rotate the eccentric shafts so that the clearance between the
rollers and the rail surface is large.
The shafts without the punched holes are the straight shafts and are not related to the
adjustment work described here. Do not loosen the nuts for these shafts.
Punched hole indicating the Punched hole indicating the

direction of eccentricity direction of eccentricity
Main roller ASSY (upper section) Main roller ASSY (lower section)
846
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(e) Insert the 0.05-mm-thick shims between eccentric shaft surface <1> on the C-arm
main roller travel surface (where the clearance was increased in step (d)) and the
rollers (4 locations). Then temporarily secure the shims on the C-arm using tape.
Figure 29-6
(f) Adjust the eccentric shafts so that the rollers come in contact with the shims inserted
in step (e). Then secure the nuts with a tightening torque from 125.3 N・m to
169.5 N・m.
847
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(g) Loosen the two M12 hexagonal socket head bolts securing the mounting plates at the
following sections. In these sections, the rollers run idle and no load is applied by the
left/right rollers.
Side roller unit

(upper section
on the L side)
Side roller unit

(under section on the R side)
848
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(h) Insert the 0.01-mm-thick shims between the upper section/lower section of surface
<2> and the rollers. Then temporarily secure the shims on the C-arm using tape.
(i) Adjust the side roller ASSY mounting position so that the rollers come in contact with
the shims inserted in step (h).
CAUTION: When the position of the side roller ASSY is adjusted, the clearance between
the left main roller and the C-arm, and the clearance between the right main
roller and the C-arm must be the same so that the main roller does not move
in the oblique direction.
This section is the important securing section. Perform tightening with a tightening
torque of 34.32 Nm.
(j) Remove the tape that is temporarily securing the shims and move the C-arm gradually
in the sliding direction.
While confirming that they are not caught by the rollers, remove the shims inserted in
steps (e) and (h).
Confirm that all the shims are removed.
(k) After the shims have been removed while performing C-arm sliding, set the main
rotation angle to 0°, the RAO to 90°, and the LAO to 90°. At this angle, move the
C-arm in the sliding direction over the entire stroke to confirm that there is no
abnormality.
849
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Adjustment by pressing the set-position stopper unit of the CAS-810A support column
rotation section
Loosen the set-position stopper unit mounting bolts, push the unit toward the support unit,
and tighten the mounting bolts again.
This work must be performed by setting the support column rotation position of the support
unit so that the stopper dog is not in contact with the set-position stopper unit.
850
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Contact adjustment for the CAS-830A, CAS-830B, CAS-880A slide roller
(a) Remove the C-arm holder covers as shown in the figure below.
CAS-830A, CAS-830B C-arm holder cover removal/attachment
CAS-880A C-arm holder cover removal/attachment
851
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) Perform sliding over the entire stroke one or two times at a main rotation angle of 0°.
(This is required to make the contact of the main roller even.)
(c) Set the main rotation angle to 0° and the sliding angle to 0°.
(d) Loosen the M16 nuts of the eccentric shafts (figure below), insert the 5-mm hexagonal
wrench into the hexagonal holes, and rotate the eccentric shafts so that the clearance
between the rollers and the rail surface is large.
(e) Insert the +0.05-mm-thick shims between the eccentric shaft surface (<1> in the figure
below) on the C-arm main roller travel surface (the side where the clearance was
increased in step (d) and the opposite side) and the rollers (4 locations). Then
temporarily secure the shims (4 locations) on the C-arm using tape.
in step (e). Then secure the nuts with a tightening torque from 125.3 Nm to 169.5
Nm.
left/right rollers.
(h) Insert the +0.01-mm-thick shims between the upper section/lower section of the
surface (<2> in the figure above) and the rollers. Then temporarily secure the shims
on the C-arm using tape.
852
No. 2J308-036EN*I
torque of 34.32 N・m.
CAUTION: When the position of the side roller ASSY is adjusted, distances A, B, C, and
D must be the same so that the main roller does not move in the oblique
direction.
steps (e) and (h).
(k) After the shims have been removed while performing C-arm sliding, set the main
rotation angle to 0°, the RAO to 90°, and the LAO to 90°. At this angle, move the
C-arm in the sliding direction over the entire stroke to confirm that there is no
abnormality.
853
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(4) CAS-820B slide roller area adjustment
(a) Remove the C-arm holder cover as shown in the figure below.
M4 pan head screw
M4 pan head screw
M4 pan head screw

M4 pan head screw
Finishing cap
M4 flat head screw
Finishing cap
Attaching/removing the C-arm holder cover
(b) Perform sliding movement over the entire stroke one or two times. (In order to even
contact of the main roller.)
(c) Set the C-arm to LAO 90° (sliding).
854
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(d) Loosen the M16 nuts of the eccentric shafts (figure below), insert the 5-mm hexagonal
wrench into the hexagonal holes, and rotate the eccentric shafts so that the clearance
between the rollers and the rail surface is large.
(e) Insert the +0.05-mm-thick shims between the eccentric shaft surface (<1> in the figure
above) on the C-arm main roller travel surface (the side where the clearance was
increased in step (d) and the opposite side) and the rollers (4 locations). Then
temporarily secure the shims (4 locations) on the C-arm using tape.
in step (e). Then secure the nuts with a tightening torque from 125.3 N・m to 169.5
N・m.
left/right rollers.
(h) Insert the +0.05-mm-thick shims between the left section/right section of the surface
(<2> in the figure above) and the rollers. Then temporarily secure the shims on the
C-arm using tape.
855
No. 2J308-036EN*I
torque of 34.32 N・m.
CAUTION: When the position of the side roller ASSY is adjusted, distances A, B, C, and
D must be the same so that the main roller does not move in the oblique
direction.
steps (e) and (h).
(k) Slide the C-arm to remove the shims, then confirm that it moves properly by sliding the
C-arm over its entire stroke.
856
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(5) Checking the engagement of the CAS-810A/CAS-830A/CAS-820B encoder gears
Check the backlash (clearance between teeth) of the encoders for the main rotation/sliding
axes used during acquisition. If the backlash is not in conformance with the standard,
perform adjustment. (For CAS-820B, only sliding axis)
[Tools required]
 Phillips screwdrivers
 Collimator keyboard unit (BSX14-0530)
[Checking/adjustment procedures]
(a) Connecting the collimator keyboard unit
<1> At NFB21 (front surface) and NFB22 (side surface) of the system power cabinet,
set the CAS cabinet to OFF.
<2> Connect the collimator keyboard to [A04] PWB CNN2 in the PWB/CNN UNIT in
the CAS cabinet.
857
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) Removing covers
Remove the covers so that the encoder of the applicable axis can be accessed.
<CAS-810A>
Main rotation encoder
Sliding encoder
858
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<CAS-830A>
(830A) Main rotation encoder
859
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Slide encoder
(830A)
<CAS-820B>
860
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(c) Checking the backlash
Check the encoder data using the collimator keyboard unit. Check the backlash based
on the value.
<1> Display the encoder data of the applicable axis using the collimator keyboard.
Axis Keyboard
Main rotation axis 5-10
Sliding axis 5-11
NOTE: To enter "5-10"

First, press the [MODE] key and [5] ("5-00" is displayed).
Next, press the [SUB] key and [1] and [0] ("5-10" is displayed).
Then press the [READ] key.
<2> Check the backlash standard value.
Manually rotate the encoder to calculate the backlash.

Obtain the difference of the encoder data value displayed on the collimator
keyboard.
The standard value for the main rotation/sliding axes is from 3 pulses to 5 pulses.
<3> If the backlash is not in conformance with the standard value, adjust the amount
of engagement.
861
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.14 Procedures for Registering the Auto-Positioning Target Positions
To register an auto-positioning target position, move the arm/table to the desired position, enter
the auto-positioning No. to be registered, and press the store button.
If it is necessary to change the factory-set target positions at the time of installation, use auto
positioning service mode (described below). The procedures for setting the auto-park position for
a small/large room are also described below.
(1) Auto positioning service mode
The target position for the auto-positioning No. can be registered regardless of the user
protect setting. Use auto positioning service mode by following the procedures below.
NOTE: For your reference: The following auto positioning No. cannot be changed.
No. 96 (Default): RL position
(a) Select the study protocol for which the target position is to be registered. Then start
the study.
To register the auto-positioning No. for which study start interlock has been set, select
the desired study protocol.
(b) Press the [Auto Pos. Service Mode] button in the utility setting screen.
(c) Enter the user name and password.
 Default settings
User name : Administrator

Password : Hyper
(d) The following screen is displayed. While this screen is displayed, the system is in auto
positioning service mode.
(e) When the [Finish] button in the screen is pressed, auto positioning service mode is
terminated.
862
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Procedures for setting the auto-park position
Set the auto-park position by following the procedures below.
(a) Enter auto positioning service mode.
Since study start interlock has been set for the auto-park No., the study protocol is not
referred to when auto positioning service mode is entered.
Select the desired study protocol to enter this mode.
(b) Manually move the arm to the desired position to be registered as the auto-park
position.
(c) After the arm reaches the desired position, enter the auto-park No. (default: 99) and
press the store button. The current position is registered as the auto-park position.
(d) Exit auto positioning service mode.
NOTE: To change the biplane park position for the biplane system (CF-i/BP), set the
frontal and lateral park positions separately as follows:
Note that the biplane park position cannot be set using No.77.
No.77 is used to reproduce the set biplane park position.
No.66: Frontal park position setting (LL position)

No.67: Frontal park position setting (RL position)
No.76: Lateral park position setting
863
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.15 Examination Room Display Setting
29.15.1 Examination room monitor physical layout setting
The physical layout of the monitors in the examination room is selected in the setting tool.
Installation of the examination room monitors on the left side of the system monitor and 2-line
layout of the monitors for the biplane configuration are possible.
(1) Start up the system.
(2) Start the service tool and open "Command Line".
(3) Set "NT Command Interpreter" in the command list, enter the following command in the
Parameters field, and then click the Go button.
F:\Celeve\bin\Txs_stopCeleve.js
(4) When a confirmation dialog is displayed, click the OK button to close the dialog.
* After this, the Celeve software is not started up at power ON.
(5) Terminate the service tool and shut down the system.
(6) Turn ON the power of the system and start up the system.
(7) When Windows starts up, execute the following file in Explorer and open the monitor
layout setting tool.
F:\Celeve\bin\MonitorLayoutSettingTool.exe
864
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(8) Select the monitor layout corresponding to the physical layout of the examination room
monitors from "Layout Pattern" and click the Apply button.
System configuration Layout Pattern Remarks

Other than biplane 1. Main console: Left Layout in which the examination room
configuration monitors are installed on the right of
the system monitor
2. Main console: Right Layout in which the examination room
monitors are installed on the left of the
system monitor
Biplane configuration 1. Main console: Left, Layout in which the examination room
Exam-room monitor: monitors are installed in a single line
One line on the right of the system monitor
2. Main console: Right, Layout in which the examination room

Exam-room monitor: monitors are installed in a single line
One line on the left of the system monitor
3. Main console: Left, Layout in which the examination room

Exam-room monitor: monitors are installed in two lines on
Two lines the right of the system monitor
4. Main console: Right, Layout in which the examination room

Exam-room monitor: monitors are installed in two lines on
Two lines the left of the system monitor
(9) When the setting is saved, the following dialog is displayed. Click the OK button to close
the dialog.
(10) Click the Close button to close the monitor layout setting tool.
865
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(11) Confirm monitor layout on the monitor setting screen of Windows.
(a) Display the Windows start menu (press the Windows button of the keyboard or click
the Start button in the task bar), select Start  Control Panel, and double-click
"Display" in the list.
(b) Click the Settings tab and confirm that the displayed monitor layout corresponds to
the layout setting made in the setting tool.
(c) Click the Identify button and confirm that the monitor numbers are displayed at the
correct positions. If the position of each monitor differs from the settings, start up
the monitor layout setting tool and perform setting again.
(d) If there is no problem in the monitor setting, click the Cancel button to close the
setting button.
CAUTION: If monitor layout is changed on the monitor setting screen of Windows, the
system may not operate properly. Be sure to change monitor layout using
the monitor layout setting tool.
(12) Execute the following batch file in Explorer.
F:\Celeve\bin\Txs_restartCeleve.js
(13) When a dialog for executing the batch file is displayed, click the OK button to close the
dialog.
(14) Shut down the system.
(15) Turn ON the power of the system and confirm that the Celeve software starts up normally.
866
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(16) When the monitor layout setting tool is started up, an error message may be displayed.
In this case, take the corrective actions described below.
<1> If the number of examination monitors recognized by the software is larger than
those actually used, an error message "Superfluity of monitors identified." is
displayed. In this case, take the corrective actions described below.
(a) Click the Close button to close the tool.
(b) Execute the following batch file to initialize the monitor layout setting.
F:\Celeve\bat\utility\registry\Reset_MonitorLayout.reg
(c) Start up the monitor layout setting tool and set monitor layout again.
867
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<2> If the number of examination monitors recognized by the software is smaller than
those actually used, an error message "Shortage of monitors identified." is
displayed. In this case, take the corrective actions described below.
(a) Click the Close button to close the tool.
(b) Check if any monitors are set to "Disable" on the monitor setting screen of
Windows. If there are, set them to "Enable" and restart the system.
(c) If no monitors are set to "Disable", start the system and check the "additional
monitor option (XIDF-REF801 (Additional Ref. Monitor))" in the service tool. If
this option is enabled even though an additional monitor is not used, disable
this option, click the Save button, and restart the system.
(d) After the system is started up, execute the following batch file to initialize the
monitor layout setting.
F:\Celeve\bat\utility\registry\Reset_MonitorLayout.reg
(e) Start up the monitor layout setting tool and set monitor layout again.
868
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.15.2 Display style setting for examination room monitor layout and L-side angle (biplane systems)
From the pull-down menu, select the display settings (monitor type, menu layout) indicating the
layout of the monitors installed in the examination room. Be sure to change the settings
accordingly if an additional monitor is set.
Select the display type for the L-side angle for biplane systems. Select Mechanical (slide
angle/rotation angle), Clinical (RAO-LAO/CAU-CRA), ClinicalInMechanical (label: RAO-
LAO/CAU-CRA; value: absolute value of the mechanical angle) for the L-side arm.
(1) Examination room monitor layout setting
(a) Select the [Utility] tab and click the [Service] button.
(b) The password entry dialog is displayed. Enter the login password and click the
[OK] button.
(c) After the service tool starts up, select the [Utils] tab and click "Command Line" in the
tree-view pane.
(d) Press the [Go] button while "Monitor Setting Tool" is selected for "Command List".
The application for setting (ChangeDataMaker) starts up.
ChangeDataMaker initial screen
869
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(e) Start up "ChangeDataMaker". From the pull-down menu, select the monitor type
and specify which side (right/left) the examination room menu should be displayed
on. Click [OK] to apply the settings and close the dialog.
In order to register the new setting in the system, exit the Service Software, shut
down the computer, and then turn the power ON.
NOTE: Perform this setting appropriately depending on mouse movement.

After setting is performed, check the connections of the monitors in the
examination and control rooms, as required.
870
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) L-side angle information display setting
(a) After ChangeDataMaker is executed by performing steps (a) to (d) of (1).
(b) Click the [ArmType] tab and select one of the following three items from the "Lateral
Arm Type" combo box.
ChangeDataMaker ArmType setting screen
(c) Clicking the [OK] button registers the setting and closes the dialog box.
NOTE: In general, do not change the setting for "Frontal Arm Type" (however, it is
possible to change the settings if required).
Do not remove the settings for mechanical angle and clinical angle in
subsection 29.15.3 "Examination room monitor-system information display
settings" as doing so will result in the angles not being displayed.
(d) Set "NT Command Interpreter" in the Command List.

Enter "f:\celeve\bat\utility\registry\****.reg" in the Parameter field and then click the
[Go] button.
For "****.reg", enter one of the following file names.

Mechanical : The mechanical angle of the arm (slide angle/rotation
angle) is displayed (default setting).
ComLib_AngleDisplayType0.reg
Clinical : The clinical angle (RAO-LAO/CAU-CRA) is displayed.
ClinicalInMechanical : The clinical angle and the mechanical angle (label: RAO-
LAO/CAU-CRA, value: absolute value of the mechanical
angle) are displayed.
(e) To register the new setting in the system, exit the Service Software, shut down the
computer, and then turn the power ON.
871
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.15.3 Examination room monitor-system information display settings
Change the following system information settings displayed on the examination room monitors.
 Setting for the information displayed before the study (single setting for the system)
 Setting for the examination room monitors display information by study protocol.
It is possible to set the display items, display font size, and display layout.
(1) Select the [Utility] tab and click the [Service] button.
(2) The password entry dialog is displayed. Enter the login password and click the [OK]
button.
(3) After the service tool starts up, select the [Utils] tab and click "Command Line" in the
tree-view pane.
(4) Press the [Go] button while "IniSelectLauncher" is selected for "Command List".
The application for setting starts up.
IniSelectLauncher initial screen
Folder : Displays the location of the target setting data. In general, do not change
this, although this is possible with the [Change] button.
System : Displays the system activation configuration

(810SP (DP)/830SP/DP/Activ/BP).
872
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(5) Select the file to be set
To edit the pre-study information display setting file  (a)
To edit the in-service-study information display setting file  (b)
(a) Select the pre-study information display setting file
<1> Click the "Before start of study" radio button on the "IniSelectLauncher"
screen.
<2> For DP systems, set the information for the CAS-810A or CAS-830A.
Select either arm condition.
(b) Select the In-service-study information display setting file
<1> Click the "Protocol" radio button on the "IniSelectLauncher" screen.
<2> For DP systems, select either arm to be set for "ArmType".
<3> Select the study protocol name to be edited.
(6) Clicking the [IniMaker] button opens the Information Display Editing Screen.
IniMaker information setting screen (fluoroscopic monitor before a study is started)
873
No. 2J308-036EN*I
IniMaker information setting screen (during a study)
(a) When the in-service-study information display setting file is selected and started
using IniSelectLauncher, a dialog for selecting the monitor configuration list
(Fluo/Map/Run) is displayed. Select the button corresponding to the desired
configuration to start the edit screen.
(b) Drag & drop the BMP from the bitmap area, which is on the right side of the screen,
to the display setting area, which is on the left quarter of the screen. This sets it as
display information.
(c) Drag & drop the BMP from the display setting area, which is on the left quarter of
the screen, to the bitmap area, which is on the right side of the screen. This
cancels the display information and the information is cleared.
(d) The information BMPs on the editing screen are color-coded to distinguish the
information type.
White : System information

Grey : Accessory screen information for Run 1
Pink : Accessory screen information for Run 2
Green : Accessory screen information for Map 1
Light blue : Accessory screen information for Map 2
NOTE: 1. Do not set the system information for components that are not included in
the system.(e.g., ceiling longitudinal/lateral position information for a
CAS-810A system)
2. Confirm that multiple information items that have been set do not conflict
with each other.
3. Do not remove the information related to the messages (Particular
Message) that is set for the fluoroscopic monitor or the information related to
the messages (Warning Message) and guides (Guide Message) that are set
for the reference monitor. If they are removed, the corresponding messages
or guides will not be displayed.
4. Do not set certain items for the monitor configuration.
874
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<1> Setting of the image-related information
<a> For single-plane configuration
Monitor Fluoroscopic Setting for Setting for

configuration monitor setting reference monitor 1 reference monitor 2
Fluoroscopic Do not set the image- Do not set Run 1 and
independent related information. Map 1 information
conflicting with each
other.
Set only information
MAP Set only information Set only information for Map 2.
independent for Run 1. for Map 1.
Run independent Set the image-related Set only information
information. for Run 1.
* The fluoroscopic monitor for lateral imaging can be selected for the biplane
configuration.
* Run independent mode can be selected only for the single-plane
configuration.
 For biplane configuration
Frontal Lateral Setting for Setting for

Monitor
fluoroscopic fluoroscopic reference reference
configuration
monitor setting monitor setting monitor 1 monitor 2
Fluoroscopic Do not set the Do not set the Set information Set information
independent image-related image-related for Run 1 and for for Run 2 and for
information. information. Map 1 together. Map 2 together.
Map independent Set only Set only Set only Set only
information for information for information for information for
Run 1. Run 2. Map 1. Map 2.
(7) Changing the settings
Move the mouse cursor away from any of the display information BMPs. Clicking the
right button of the mouse displays a context menu. Select the item to be changed from
among those listed below.
Study : Patient-related information

System : System-related information
Image : Image-related information (not selectable)
Message : Information related to the message display
Other : Other information
(8) Changing the font size
Move the mouse cursor over the information BMP to change its font size. Clicking the
right button of the mouse displays a context menu. Select the desired font size
(Small/Medium/Large/Narrow).
875
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(9) Select the monitor for editing
Changes can be made in the dialog box for the "IniMaker Dialog".
To edit the information displayed for the F-side fluoroscopy monitor  Fluoroscopy (F)
To edit the information displayed for the L-side fluoroscopy monitor

(only for BP)  Fluoroscopy (L)
To edit the information displayed for Reference monitor 1

(not selectable)  Reference 1
To edit the information displayed for Reference monitor 2

(not selectable)  Reference 2
(10) Changing the monitor configuration to be edited
Use the IniMaker dialog box.
To edit the display information for the fluoroscopic independent configuration  Fluo
To edit the display information for the Map independent configuration  Map
To edit the display information for the Run independent configuration  Run
To edit the display information for the Run independent configuration (for BP)  Run
876
No. 2J308-036EN*I
The following options are provided in the IniMaker dialog box.
RingMenu : The display information in the Ring Menu is added. (Normally, do not
change this setting.)
AutoAdjust : When icons overlap, the display positions are adjusted automatically.
MessageCheck : Whether or not message display is set is checked before file writing.
If there are any messages that are not set, a dialog box is displayed
and the file is not written.
To turn OFF any of the above functions, deselect the corresponding check box.
(12) Save the edited contents
When editing has been completed, click the "Write Setup File" button on the IniMaker
screen. A confirmation dialog for overwriting the existing setting file is displayed.
Select [Yes] or [No].
[Yes] : Overwrite the file and save the edited information.

[No] : Discard the edited information without saving.
(13) Exit editing
Clicking the [End] button causes the exit confirmation dialog to be displayed.
Select [Yes] or [No]. After exiting editing, return to the IniSelectLauncher screen.
[Yes] : Exit editing.

[No] : Clear editing and return to edit mode.
877
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(14) Copy the edited contents to all study protocols or specified protocols
Clicking the [ProtocolCopy] button on the IniSelectLauncher screen opens the Protocol
Copy dialog. In this dialog, select the copy source, copy mode, and copy destination and
then click the [OK] button. The edited contents are copied to all study protocols or to the
specified protocol, according to the setting.
Item descriptions
Select a protocol to copy : Select the protocol to be copied.
Copy Mode : Select the copy mode.
To copy both the display information and menu information  Layout&Menu

To copy the display information only  Layout
To copy the menu information only  Menu
Copy to protocols : Select the copy destination protocol
To copy to all protocols  All Protocol

To copy to the specified protocol  Select Protocol
Protocol Copy screen
When "LayOut&Menu" is selected for Copy Mode, both the displayed information and the
settings for the menus set in subsection 29.15.4 are copied.
(15) Reboot the system.
After exiting "IniSelectLauncher" by clicking the [Exit] button, exit the Service Software,
shut down the system, and then turn the power back ON. The new settings are
registered in the system.
878
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.15.4 Examination room menu setting
This changes the menu setting displayed on the examination room monitor by study protocol.
The menu functions and settings of the Home menu can be specified for each menu page.
The menu page set as the Home menu is displayed when a study is started. It also serves as
a transition page when the lever is tilted to the left or right when other pages are displayed
during a study.
button.
(3) After the service tool starts up, select the [Utils] tab and click "Command Line" in the
tree-view pane.
(4) Select "IniSelectLauncher" in the Command List box and click the [Go] button to start the
setup application.
IniSelectLauncher screen
Folder : Displays the location of the target setting data. In general, do not change
this, although this is possible with the [Change] button.
System : Displays the system activation configuration

(810SP (DP)/830SP/DP/Activ/BP).
(5) Select the protocol to be set.
(a) Click the "Protocol" radio button on the "IniSelectLauncher" screen.
(b) For DP systems, select either arm to be set for "ArmType".
(c) Select the study protocol name to be edited.
879
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(6) Clicking the [RingMenuEdit] button opens the examination room menu editing screen.
RingMenuEdit screen
(7) Perform setting.
(a) By checking or unchecking the "Ring Add" check box, set whether or not the
corresponding menu is displayed.
(b) Designate the menu shown at the start of a study using the "Home" setting radio
button.
(c) Set the menu display order using the "No." combo boxes.
(d) Set the title shown on the menu by editing the "Menu Title".
(e) Set the functions to be registered to menus using the "Menu" list boxes.
 To add a function : Select the function to be added in the Menu List using
the mouse and drag & drop it to the desired position.
 To move a function : Select the function to be moved using the mouse and
drag & drop it to the new position.
 To delete a function : Select the function to be deleted using the mouse and
click the right mouse button. Select "Delete" from the
displayed pop-up menu.
(8) Save the settings.
When menu setting has been completed, click "File" on the edit screen and then click the
"Save" menu to save the settings. The same settings are saved for the Fluoroscopic
Independent, Map Independent, and Run Independent configurations.
880
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(9) Exit editing.
After saving has been completed, click "File" on the menu on the edit screen and then
click "Exit" to exit the edit screen and return to the IniSelectLauncher screen.
(10) Copy the edited contents to all study protocols or the specified protocol.
Clicking the [ProtocolCopy] button on the "IniSelectLauncher" screen opens the Protocol
Copy dialog. In this dialog, select the copy source, copy mode, and copy destination and
then click the [OK] button. The edited contents are copied to all study protocols or to the
specified protocol, according to the setting.
When "LayOut&Menu" is selected for Copy Mode, both the menu information and the
settings for the display information set in subsection 29.15.3 are copied.
After exiting "IniSelectLauncher" by clicking the [Exit] button, exit the Service Software,
shut down the system, and then turn the power back ON. The new settings are
registered in the system.
881
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.16 Setting Procedures When Several 3D-Angio Systems Are Used
1st
group
192.168.100.10 192.168.100.11 192.168.100.12
Celeve-1 Reconstruction 3DWS-1

PC-1
192.168.100.20 192.168.100.21 192.168.100.22

2nd
group Reconstruction
Celeve-2 3DWS-2
PC-2
If two or more 3D-Angio systems are used on the same network, the computer names of the
second and subsequent reconstruction PCs/angiography workstation must be changed. The
names of the reconstruction PCs/angiography workstation have been set to "3D-ANGIO" at the
time of shipment. The name of the reconstruction PC/angiography workstation in the 1st group is
left unchanged, but that in the 2nd group is to be changed to "3D-ANGIO2". This subsection
describes the change procedures. If three or more 3D-Angio systems are used, the names of the
reconstruction PCs/angiography workstation in the 3rd group onwards must be changed in the
same manner.
After the names of the reconstruction PCs are changed, also change the 3D-WS (ZIO) setting.
Ask the person in charge of ZIO to change the 3D-WS setting. Note that operation is not
performed properly unless the 3D-WS setting is changed.
The procedures for changing the computer name of the reconstruction PC/angiography
workstation in the 2nd group are described below.
(1) Setting the i-series system in the 2nd group
(a) Network node setting
<1> Start up the service software. In the tree-view pane of the [Config.] tab, select
"DICOM Management"  "Remote Nodes" and click the [Add] button.
The corresponding screen opens. Click the [Host Add/Del] button at the upper
right of the window. The above screen opens.
<2> Enter "3D-ANGIO2" as the computer name of the reconstruction PC/angiography

workstation for "Host Name".
882
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<3> Enter the TCP/IP address of the reconstruction PC/angiography workstation.

(Enter the IP address issued in the hospital.)
<4> Press the [OK] button to close this screen.
(b) Txs3dSite.ini setting
<1> Start up the service software. Select the [Utils] tab and click "Command Line".
The above screen is displayed.
<2> In the above setting, set "NT Command Interpreter" in the Command List field.
Then enter "f:\celeve\TxsSite\Txs3d\Txs3dSite.ini" in the Parameter field and
press the [Go] button.
<3> When the Txs3dSite.ini editing screen is displayed, edit the following sections.
(Before change) : NetworkPathName = \\3D-Angio\A3D_DRV
(After change) : NetworkPathName = \\3D-Angio2\A3D_DRV
<4> Overwrite the Txs3dSite.ini file and complete the setting.
<5> Close the Service software and restart the i-series system.
883
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Setting the reconstruction PC
(a) Change the computer name using the Control Panel.
<1> Select "Start"  "Control Panel".

Double-click "System" in the Control Panel screen.
<2> Move to the [Computer Name] tab and click the [Change] button.
884
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<3> Change the Computer Name to "3D-ANGIO2".
<4> Complete the setting by selecting [OK].
(b) a3dmn.ini setting
<1> Back up "C:\WINDOWS\a3dmn.ini". (Copy as follows.)

"C:\WINDOWS\a3dmn.ini"  "C:\WINDOWS\a3dmn.ini.bak"
<2> Double-click "C:\WINDOWS\a3dmn.ini" to open it.
<3> Change the following sections in a3dmn.ini.
[WS3DREQCMD]
(Before change):
OUTPUT_3D=\\3D-Angio\a3d_drv\nw3d\reconst.out
OUTPUT_FUZ=\\3D-Angio\a3d_drv\nw3d\xa000001.fuz
(After change):
OUTPUT_3D=\\3D-Angio2\a3d_drv\nw3d\reconst.out
OUTPUT_FUZ=\\3D-Angio2\a3d_drv\nw3d\xa000001.fuz
<4> Overwrite the a3dmn.ini file and complete the setting.
<5> Restart the reconstruction PC/angiography workstation.
CAUTION: If the a3dmn.ini setting is not performed properly, the patient

information and the image information may not match. Be sure to
perform this setting.
885
No. 2J308-036EN*I
When 3D-WS (Vitrea 2) setting is complete, perform the following operational checks for
each 3D-Angio system.
 When reconstruction of 3D-DSA and 3D-DA rotational images acquired by the i-series
system in the 1st group starts, reconstruction processing should start at the
reconstruction PC/angiography workstation in the 1st group and the 3D images
generated at the 3D-WS in the 1st group should be displayed.
 When reconstruction of 3D-DSA and 3D-DA rotational images acquired by the i-series
system in the 2nd group starts, reconstruction processing should start at the
reconstruction PC/angiography workstation in the 2nd group and the 3D images
generated at the 3D-WS in the 2nd group should be displayed.
886
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.17 Operational Internal Flag Setting Procedures
It is possible to change the operational internal flag settings (not included in the service menu) by
following the procedures below.
(1) Start up the service software. Select the [Utils] tab and click "Command Line".
The above screen is displayed.
(2) In the above screen, set "NR Command Interpreter" in the Command List field.
Then enter "f:\celeve\bat\utility\registry\****.reg" in the Parameters field and press the [Go]
button.
887
No. 2J308-036EN*I
For the "***.reg" section, the following file names can be entered.
Function File name Operation Description of operation (: Default)

Contrast adjustment dial ComLib_SDF_WW_OFF.reg Rotation in the  Right rotation: The value increases./Left rotation: The value
operation CCW direction decreases.
decreases the
value.
ComLib_SDF_WW_ON.reg Rotation in the Right rotation: The value decreases./Left rotation: The value increases.
CW direction (Same as the SDF movement.)
increases the
value.
Optional settings for ComLib_Panoramic_OFF.reg Disabled The optional settings are disabled.
Panoramic view ComLib_Panoramic_ON.reg Enabled  The optional settings are enabled.
Stereo display during ComLib_Stereo_OFF.reg Not performed Stereo display is not performed during rotational DSA.
rotational DSA (Valid in V4.01 or later)
ComLib_Stereo_ON.reg Performed  Stereo display is performed during rotational DSA.
(Valid in V4.01 or later)
Display of the acquisition ComLib_PlayAngle_Disp_OFF.reg Not performed The acquisition angle is not displayed during playback.
angle during image ComLib_PlayAngle_Disp_ON.reg Performed  The acquisition angle is displayed during playback.
playback
Selection of the SDF-type ComLib_SDF_Lut_OFF.reg Not selected  The SUB LUT is not the SDF type.
SUB LUT ComLib_SDF_Lut_ON.reg Selected The SUB LUT is the SDF type.
Disabling of start exam for ComLib_Disable_StartExam_OFF.reg Not disabled  Fluoroscopy cannot be disabled at any time.
fluoroscopy ComLib_Disable_StartExam_ON.reg Disabled Fluoroscopy can be disabled at any time.
Priority in high-speed ComLib_HsbpProc_RATE.reg Priority given to Priority is given to the rate during high-speed biplane acquisition.
biplane rate
ComLib_HsbpProc_PROC.reg Priority given to  Priority is given to processing during high-speed biplane acquisition.
processing
888
No. 2J308-036EN*I

Mag. calculation mode ComLib_AutoCalib_OldType_OFF.reg Specified tabletop  When "Calculation Mode" for "Mag. Calculation" is set to "Usual", the
height processing type is set as follows:
"The geometric magnification ratio is calculated assuming that the
target region is immobilized above a certain tabletop position. The arm
position is assumed to be fixed to PA for calculation."
ComLib_AutoCalib_OldType_ON.reg Isocenter When "Calculation Mode" for "Mag. Calculation" is set to "Usual", the
processing type is set as follows:
"The geometric magnification ratio is calculated assuming that the
target region is immobilized at the isocenter above the tabletop. The
arm position is assumed to be fixed to PA for calculation."
Image rotation angle ComLib_ImgRotCorrectType_OFF.reg Performed  In the frontal (Tube1) system, image rotation correction is performed
correction: Frontal (Tube1) at an arbitrary angle.
(detector rotation) This is not valid for the system on which the FPD1216 is mounted.
Image rotation correction Perform image rotation correction at 0°, 90°, and 180° only.
only at 0/90/180 ComLib_ImgRotCorrectType_ON.reg Not performed Image rotation correction is performed at 0°, 90°, and 180° only when
the detector of the frontal (Tube1) system is the FPD.
Image rotation angle ComLib_ImgRotCorrectType_L_OFF.reg Performed at any  Image rotation correction is performed at an arbitrary angle for the
correction: Lateral (Tube2) angle. lateral/frontal (Tube2) system.
(detector rotation) This is not valid for the system on which the FPD1216 is mounted.
Image rotation correction Perform image rotation correction at 0°, 90°, and 180° only. (Valid in
only at 0/90/180 V4.01 or later)
ComLib_ImgRotCorrectType_L_ON.reg Performed only at Image rotation correction is performed at 0°, 90°, and 180° only when
0/90/180. the detector of the lateral/frontal (Tube2) system is the FPD.
Transmission of summary Comlib_PPS_DOSE_EXPOSURE_ Disabled  In MPPS notification to the HIS/RIS server, the summary of dose
of dose exposure SUMMARY_OFF.reg exposure history (tube voltage, tube current, exposure time, and
information (tube voltage, fluoroscopic time) is not transmitted.
tube current, exposure Comlib_PPS_DOSE_EXPOSURE_SUM Enabled In MPPS notification to the HIS/RIS server, a summary of the dose
time, fluoroscopic time) via MARY_ON.reg exposure history (tube voltage, tube current, exposure time, and
MPPS fluoroscopic time) is transmitted.
Refer to subsection 17.4.2 (6)
889
No. 2J308-036EN*I

Transmission of details of Comlib_PPS_DOSE_EXPOSURE_ Disabled  In MPPS notification to the HIS/RIS server, details of the dose
dose exposure information DETAIL_OFF.reg exposure history (tube voltage, tube current, exposure time, and
(tube voltage, tube current, fluoroscopic time) are not transmitted.
exposure time, fluoroscopic Comlib_PPS_DOSE_EXPOSURE_ Enabled In MPPS notification to the HIS/RIS server, details of the dose exposure
time) via MPPS DETAIL_ON.reg history (tube voltage, tube current, exposure time, and fluoroscopic
time) are transmitted.
Refer to subsection 17.4.2 (6)
Background parallel ComLib_ExControlModeForHsipProc Not possible: Conventional exclusive access control is performed.
processing during LevelOne_OFF.reg Exclusive access
fluoroscopy control
ComLib_ExControlModeForHsipProc Possible:  Exclusive access control (hardware) of fluoroscopic processing is
LevelOne_ON.reg Relaxation of relaxed so that still image processing or background processing can be
exclusive access performed in parallel.
control (hardware)
Internal processing with ComLib_ExControlModeForTxsSysState Not possible: Conventional exclusive access control is performed.
reduced stress during Mgr_OFF.reg Exclusive access
image playback control
ComLib_ExControlModeForTxsSysState Possible:  Exclusive access control by improvement in the internal processing
Mgr_ON.reg Relaxation of for system status management: The exclusive access control
exclusive access (software) is relaxed in order to reduce the stress related to image
control (software) playback.
Image rotation angle ComLib_ImgRotCorrectModeForCeilRot_ Rotation  Image rotation correction mode (0: The rotation correction angle is
correction OFF.reg correction angle = 0° or 90° when the support column rotation angle is 0° 5° or 90° 5°)
Frontal (Tube1) (support 0 when the
column rotation) support column
Image rotation correction rotation angle is
for support column rotation 0 5.
Rotation
correction angle =
90 when the
support column
rotation angle is
90 5.
ComLib_ImgRotCorrectModeForCeilRot_ No limitations Image rotation correction mode (without limitations)
ON.reg
890
No. 2J308-036EN*I

Mouse operation for StudySelectSingleClickSelect_OFF.reg Double-clicking In Directory mode, opening of the study list from the patient list is
opening the list in Directory performed by double-clicking (as before).
mode (double- StudySelectSingleClickSelect_ON.reg Single-clicking  In Directory mode, opening of the study list from the patient list is
clicking/single-clicking) performed by single-clicking.
Transfer of items in StudySelectDbClickSendPostProc_ Disabled In Directory mode, when an item is double-clicked from the list, the item
Directory mode to Review OFF.reg is not transferred to Review mode (as before).
mode by double-clicking StudySelectDbClickSendPostProc_ Enabled  In Directory mode, when an item is double-clicked from the list, the
them ON.reg item is transferred to Review mode.
(To make this presetting effective, also execute
"StudySelectSingleClickSelect_ON.reg".)
Automatic opening of the StudySelectAutoExpandList_OFF.reg Disabled In Directory mode, when an item is selected from the patient list, the
study and image lists when study and image lists do not open automatically (as before).
an item is selected in the Specify the operations when a server other than the Q/R server is
patient list in Directory selected as the data source.
mode StudySelectAutoExpandList_ON.reg Enabled  In Directory mode, when an item is selected from the patient list, the
(when a server other than study and image lists open automatically.
the Q/R server is selected Specify the operations when a server other than the Q/R server is
as the data source) selected as the data source.
Automatic opening of the StudySelectAutoExpandListQR_OFF.reg Disabled  In Directory mode, when an item is selected from the patient list, the
study and image lists when study and image lists do not open automatically (as before).
an item is selected in the Specify the operations when the Q/R server is selected as the data
patient list in Directory source.
mode StudySelectAutoExpandListQR_ON.reg Enabled In Directory mode, when an item is selected from the patient list, the
(when the Q/R server is study and image lists open automatically.
selected as the data Specify the operations when the Q/R server is selected as the data
source) source.
Image export after SUB CrcCommonForceSubtraction_OFF.reg SUB processing When the SUB processing check mark is set to ON in the image
processing when SUB is performed only processing parameters, SUB processing is performed only for images
processing is set to ON for images in the with the SUB status and the images are exported (as before).
SUB status
CrcCommonForceSubtraction_ON.reg SUB processing  When the SUB processing check mark is set to ON in the image
is performed for processing parameters, SUB processing is performed even for images
images in the with the UNSUB status and the images are exported.
UNSUB status
891
No. 2J308-036EN*I

Mandatory entry item ComLib_SimplificationRegist_OFF.reg Patient ID, patient  The mandatory entry items for the system at the time of start of
setting at the start of the name, date of examination are the patient ID, patient name, date of birth, sex, and
examination birth, sex, study study protocols (as before).
protocol
ComLib_SimplificationRegist_ON.reg Patient ID, study The mandatory entry items for the system at the time of start of
protocol examination are the patient ID and the study protocols. The default
setting for this function is OFF.
Obtain permission from the user when performing this setting.
Display of the filter setting StudySelect_QRNodeUseDefaultFilter_ Not displayed In DICOM Q/R, the filter setting screen is not displayed. Retrieval is
screen in DICOM Q/R OFF.reg performed from all patients (as before).
StudySelect_QRNodeUseDefaultFilter_ Displayed  In DICOM Q/R, the filter setting screen is displayed.
ON.reg
Use of "*" in retrieval with SR_WildCardReferencePerformed_ "*" is not used. In DICOM MWM, when an Accession Number or Requested
Accession Number or OFF.reg ProcedureID is used as a key, retrieval is performed using a key without
Requested ProcedureID in "*" placed on both ends of the key.
DICOM MWM SR_WildCardReferencePerformed_ "*" is used.  In DICOM MWM, when an Accession Number or Requested
ON.reg ProcedureID is used as a key, retrieval is performed using a key with "*"
placed on both ends of the key.
MapSave of BP image ComLib_BPMapSaveType_Off.reg Only the current Set the conventional MapSave mode to valid (MapSave is performed
(Current BP image BP image only for the current image of the BP image).
only/both F and L BP ComLib_BPMapSaveType_On.reg Both the F and L  Set MapSave mode with the new functions to valid (MapSave is
images) BP images performed simultaneously for both the F and L BP images).
Movement coordinates ComLib_PanningReset_On.reg Movement When the Panning button is held down in Panning processing,
maintained/not maintained coordinates processing is terminated with the current movement coordinates
when panning is maintained maintained.
terminated by holding ComLib_PanningReset_Off.reg Movement  When the Panning button is held down in Panning processing, the
down the Panning button coordinates reset coordinates are reset to (0.0) and then processing is terminated.
to (0, 0)
Magnification ratio ComLib_PostZoomReset_On.reg Magnification ratio When the PostZoom button is held down in PostZoom processing,
maintained/not maintained maintained processing is terminated with the current magnification ratio maintained.
when zooming is ComLib_PostZoomReset_Off.reg Magnification ratio  When the PostZoom button is held down in PostZoom processing,
terminated by holding reset the current magnification ratio is reset to the default value and then
down the PostZoom button processing is terminated.
892
No. 2J308-036EN*I

Jog shuttle operation ComLib_PlaySpeedChgType_Off.reg V3.14 or earlier  The movement of the shuttle is set to correspond to that of V3.14 or
(V3.14 or earlier) (V3.20 or earlier.
later) The rate at the time of image acquisition is set as the maximum
playback speed and the playback speed can be changed in seven
stages according to shuttle operation.
Images acquired at 1 f/s:
1 f/s  0.86  0.72  0.58  0.44  0.3  0.3  stop
Images acquired at 30 f/s
30 f/s  25.7  21.4  17.1  12.8  8.5  4.2  stop
ComLib_PlaySpeedChgType_On.reg V3.20 or later The movement of the shuttle is set to correspond to that of V3.20 or
later
The playback speed is changed in seven steps according to shuttle
operation and is maximum when the shuttle is turned to its limit.
Single-plane image : 60 f/s to stopped, regardless of the image
acquisition rate
Biplane image : 30 f/s to stopped, regardless of the image
acquisition rate
HSBP image : 60 f/s to stopped, regardless of the image
acquisition rate
3D calibration processing ComLib_AcquireGridPhantomImages_ Grid phantom Grid phantom images are required in 3D calibration.
(Grid phantom image ON.reg image is required.
required) ComLib_AcquireGridPhantomImages_ Grid phantom  Grid phantom images are not required in 3D calibration.
(Grid phantom image not OFF.reg image is not
required) required.
Automatic display of ComLib_VFS_Auto_Job_Chage_OFF.reg Not performed If the images transferred to Printing mode are for a different patient from
images transferred to the one whose images are currently displayed, the transferred images
Printing mode when they are not automatically displayed.
are not images of the ComLib_VFS_Auto_Job_Chage_ON.reg Performed  Even if the images transferred to Printing mode are for a different
current patient (patient patient from the one whose images are currently displayed, the
whose images are transferred images are automatically displayed.
currently displayed)
893
No. 2J308-036EN*I

Automatic display of the ComLib_VFS_Auto_Sheet_Change_ Not performed Images transferred to Printing mode are created on the last sheet but
images transferred to OFF.reg are not automatically displayed.
Printing mode if the images ComLib_VFS_Auto_Sheet_Change_ Performed  Images transferred to Printing mode are created on the last sheet
are to be printed on the last ON.reg and are automatically displayed.
sheet
Display of the ImageText ComLib_VFS_ImgTxt_SDFFormat_ Celeve format  In Printing mode, the ImageText information shown on the images is
information of the image in OFF.reg displayed in the Celeve format (the same is true for printing).
Printing mode in the ComLib_VFS_ImgTxt_SDFFormat_ SDF format In Printing mode, the ImageText information shown on the images is
Celeve format or SDF ON.reg displayed in the SDF format (the same is true for printing).
format
Operation of MaskSelect ComLib_BPMSelect_OneSideDisp_ MaskSelect is not  Operation when MaskSelect-enabled images are displayed on only
when MaskSelect-enabled NO.reg performed. one monitor during BPMaskSelect.
images are displayed on MaskSelect is not performed.
only one monitor during ComLib_BPMSelect_OneSideDisp_ MaskSelect is Operation when MaskSelect-enabled images are displayed on only one
BPMaskSelect ONE.reg performed. monitor during BPMaskSelect.
MaskSelect is performed.
Test shot for general DSA ComLib_InjNotReadyTest_DSA_ Test shot is  Control of Test Shot (for general DSA) while the injector is not ready.
when the injector is not IMPOSSIBLE.reg disabled. Test Shot is disabled.
ready
ComLib_InjNotReadyTest_DSA_ Test shot is Control of Test Shot (for general DSA) while the injector is not ready.
POSSIBLE.reg enabled. Test Shot is enabled.
Test shot for special DSA ComLib_InjNotReadyTest_DSASR_ Test shot is Control of Test Shot (for special DSA) while the injector is not ready.
when the injector is not IMPOSSIBLE.reg disabled. Test Shot is disabled.
ready
ComLib_InjNotReadyTest_DSASR_ Test shot is  Control of Test Shot (for special DSA) while the injector is not ready.
POSSIBLE.reg enabled. Test Shot is enabled.
Magnification ratio reset ComLib_DigitalZoom_Reset_ Resetting to the  Reset control when the set SW is held down in DigitalZoom
operation when the set SW StartStudy.reg ratio at the start of processing.
is held down in examination The magnification ratio is reset to that at the time of the start of
DigitalZoom processing examination.
ComLib_DigitalZoom_Reset_ Resetting to 1.0 Reset control when the set SW is held down in DigitalZoom processing.
ZoomOFF.reg The magnification ratio is reset to 1.0.
894
No. 2J308-036EN*I

SSD calculation used in ComLib_SsdCalcMode_OFF.reg 5 cm toward the  The SSD calculation for dose measurement is performed using the
dose measurement front from the existing Toshiba method (5 cm toward the front, relative to the center of
center of the the patient)
patient
ComLib_SsdCalcMode_ON.reg 15 cm toward the The SSD calculation for dose measurement is performed using the IEC
front from the IVR standard (15 cm toward the front, relative to the isocenter).
isocenter
Independent setting of F/L ComLib_ViewID_Individual_Setting_ Independent Independent F/L setting for View ID is not performed for BP systems (as
for View ID in BP systems OFF.reg setting is not before).
performed.
ComLib_ViewID_Individual_Setting_ Independent  Independent F/L setting for View ID is performed for BP systems.
ON.reg setting is
performed.
Delimiter between the first ComLib_VFS_PatientName_ Comma  When patient names are shown in the Printing window or on film
and last names when the DeleteComma_OFF.reg sheets, commas are placed between the first name and the last name.
patient name is displayed ComLib_VFS_PatientName_ Space When patient names are shown in the Printing window or on film
in Printing mode DeleteComma_ON.reg sheets, a space is placed between the first name and the last name.
Securing of the RAID area ComLib_RaidReserve_ON.reg The RAID area is  RAID is reserved at the time of start or end of examination.
at the start or end of the secured.
examination ComLib_RaidReserve_OFF.reg The RAID area is RAID is not reserved at the time of start or end of examination.
not secured.
Use of the Prev/Next keys ComLib_CatalogPageChgType_OFF.reg Not used  In catalog display, the Prev/Next keys on the console do not function
as catalog display page as catalog display page feed keys.
feed keys in thumbnail ComLib_CatalogPageChgType_ON.reg Used In catalog display, the Prev/Next keys on the console function as
display catalog display page feed keys.
895
No. 2J308-036EN*I

Display of the result values ComLib_LengthTextDisplayPosition_ Not displayed  The result values for Length and Length% are not displayed at the
for Length and Length% at OFF.reg end of the image display area.
the end of the image ComLib_LengthTextDisplayPosition_ Displayed The result values for Length and Length% are displayed at the end of
display area ON.reg the image display area.
Display of the default frame ComLib_RevsPlaybackStartType_ The default frame  For the frame displayed first when the cut is switched, the default
in thumbnail display when OFF.reg is displayed. frame in thumbnail display is set.
the cut is switched ComLib_RevsPlaybackStartType ON.reg A frame other For the frame displayed first when the cut is switched, a frame other
than the default than the default frame in thumbnail display is set.
frame is Refer to subsection 29.27.12 for setting of the frame to be displayed
displayed. first.
Simultaneous operation of ComLib_BPPhotoSaveType_OFF.reg Not performed  Simultaneous Photo Save is not performed for
Photo Save for BP F and L BP F/L images displayed on the in-room monitor.
images displayed on the in-
(Photo Save is performed for images on the plane displayed on the
room monitor
currently selected monitor.)
ComLib_BPPhotoSaveType_ON.reg Performed Simultaneous Photo Save is performed for BP F/L images displayed on
the in-room monitor.
Simultaneous operation of ComLib_StuRevBPMapSaveType_ Not performed  Simultaneous Map Save is not performed for BP F/L images
MapSave for BP F and L OFF.reg displayed in Exam mode.
images displayed in Exam (Map Save is performed for images on the plane that is currently
mode displayed.)
ComLib_StuRevBPMapSaveType_ Performed Simultaneous Map Save is performed for BP F/L images displayed in
ON.reg Exam mode.
Simultaneous operation of ComLib_StuRevBPPhotoSaveType_ Not performed  Simultaneous Photo Save is not performed for
PhotoSave for BP F and L OFF.reg BP F/L images displayed in Exam mode.
images displayed in Exam
(Photo Save is performed for images on the plane that is currently
mode
displayed.)
ComLib_StuRevBPPhotoSaveType_ Performed Simultaneous Photo Save is performed for BP F/L images displayed in
ON.reg Exam mode.
896
No. 2J308-036EN*I

Simultaneous operation of ComLib_PicObBPPhotoSaveType_ Not performed  Simultaneous Photo Save is not performed for
PhotoSave for BP F and L OFF.reg BP F/L images displayed in Review mode.
images displayed in (Photo Save is performed for images on the plane that is currently
Review mode displayed.)
ComLib_PicObBPPhotoSaveType_ Performed Simultaneous Photo Save is performed for BP F/L images displayed in
ON.reg Review mode.
Output of the Entrance ComLib_SendPPSExt_OFF.reg Not performed  When the study results are transferred to the MPPS server, the
Dose DICOM tag (0040, DICOM tag (0040, 8302) of the Entrance Dose is not output in units of
8302) in units of mGy when mGy.
the examination results are ComLib_SendPPSExt_ON.reg Performed When the study results are transferred to the MPPS server, the DICOM
transferred to the MPPS tag (0040, 8302) of the Entrance Dose is output in units of mGy.
server
Addition of the Window CrcCommonAddWndCenerAndWidthOn Not performed  When the image data is exported with gray-scale processing, the
Center (0028, 1050) and ProcLUT_OFF.reg DICOM tags of the Window Center (0028, 1050) and the Window Width
Window Width (0028, (0028, 1051) are not added.
1051) DICOM tags when CrcCommonAddWndCenerAndWidthOn Performed When the image data is exported with gray-scale processing, the
exporting image data with ProcLUT_ON.reg DICOM tags of the Window Center (0028, 1050) and the Window Width
gray-scale processing (0028, 1051) are added.
Generation of warning ComLib_HUAudioAlarm_OFF.reg Not performed  A warning buzzer does not sound in the examination room even
sound when the HU when the HU exceeds 80%.
exceeds 80% After executing this command, execute the save operation on the
system setting screen and then restart the system.
ComLib_HUAudioAlarm_ON.reg Performed When the HU exceeds 80%, a warning buzzer sounds in the
examination room.
After executing this command, execute the save operation on the
system setting screen and then restart the system.
Setting of View ID (frontal ComLib_ViewID_SeriesDescription_ Performed The value that was set for the View ID (F side for biplane systems) is
system in BP system) in ON.reg set for Image Comment of the DICOM tag of acquired images and for
the Series Description Series Description.
DICOM tag for the ComLib_ViewID_SeriesDescription_ Not performed  The value that was set for the View ID (F side for biplane systems) is
acquired images OFF.reg set for Image Comment of the DICOM tag of acquired images only. The
value is not set for Series Description.
897
No. 2J308-036EN*I

X-ray pause control when ComLib_XrayCtrlType0.reg  X-ray exposure X-ray control settings when the tube support is parked
the tube support is parked automatically  Automatically goes into a Pause state when the tube support is
paused when parked.
tube support
parked  Pause is not automatically cleared when the tube support is not at the
park position.
 Pause state not
cleared  When the tube support is parked, X-ray irradiation is possible when
automatically Pause is cleared.
when tube After executing this command, select [Configuration] -> [System] in the
support moved service screen. Then, save the conditions without making any changes
from park and restart the system.
position
 Even when tube
support parked,
X-ray exposure
possible if
Pause state
cleared
ComLib_XrayCtrlType1.reg  X-ray exposure  X-ray control settings when the tube support is parked
not  Does not automatically go into a Pause state when the tube support is
automatically parked.
paused when
tube support  Pause is not automatically cleared when the tube support is not at the
parked park position.
 Pause state not  When the tube support is parked, X-ray irradiation is prohibited.
cleared After executing this command, select [Configuration] -> [System] in the
automatically service screen. Then, save the conditions without making any changes
when tube and restart the system.
support moved
from park
position
 X-ray exposure
possible when
tube support
parked
898
No. 2J308-036EN*I

X-ray pause control when ComLib_XrayCtrlType2.reg  X-ray exposure X-ray control settings when the tube support is parked
the tube support is parked automatically  Automatically goes into a Pause state when the tube support is
(continued) paused when parked.
tube support
parked  Pause is automatically cleared when the tube support is not at the
park position.
 Pause state
cleared  When the tube support is parked, X-ray irradiation is possible when
automatically Pause is cleared.
when tube After executing this command, select [Configuration] -> [System] in the
support moved service screen. Then, save the conditions without making any changes
from park and restart the system.
position
 Even when tube
support parked,
X-ray exposure
possible if
Pause state
cleared
Auto Last Calibration ComLib_AutoLastCalib_ON.reg Enabled  Enables the Auto Last Calibration function (a function that adapts
function Last CF values to Manual CF values if the conditions for automatic Last
Calibration adaptation are met when starting distance measurements
and ratio measurements).
ComLib_AutoLastCalib_OFF.reg Disabled Disables the Auto Last Calibration function.
L system angle display ComLib_AngleDisplayType0.reg The mechanical Angle display on the lateral side: The mechanical angle of the arm
angle of the arm (sliding angle/rotation angle) is displayed.
is displayed.
ComLib_AngleDisplayType1.reg The clinical angle Angle display on the lateral side: The clinical angle (RAO-LAO/CAU-
is displayed. CRA) is displayed.
ComLib_AngleDisplayType2.reg The absolute Angle display on the lateral side: The mechanical angle is displayed in
value of the the clinical angle field (the label indicates RAO-LAO/CAU-CRA, but the
mechanical angle absolute value of the mechanical angle is displayed).
is displayed.
899
No. 2J308-036EN*I

Process time display value ComLib_DsaAcqTimeActual_OFF.reg Calculation  A value calculated using the calculation formula is displayed in frame
formula in units of units (as before).
frame
ComLib_DsaAcqTimeActual_ON.reg The elapsed Display of elapsed time during radiography/playback is possible.
radiography time
is displayed.
ABC ROI Calc. Type ComLib_RoiCalcType ON.reg Setting is Type setting for ABC ROI for legs can be carried out in Advanced
setting for legs in the possible. Presets
Advanced Presets window. ComLib_RoiCalcType OFF.reg Setting is not  Type setting for ABC ROI for legs cannot be carried out in Advanced
possible. Presets.
Movement of the identifier ComLib_LengthIdentifierMove_ON.reg Movement is  Setting for movement of the identifier in Length analysis is possible.
in Length analysis possible.
ComLib_LengthIdentifierMove_OFF.reg Movement is not Setting for movement of the identifier in Length analysis is not possible.
possible.
Checking whether image ComLib_RaidDeleteNoCheck_OFF.reg Possible  Image deletion impossible check in overwrite mode is possible.
deletion is possible in ComLib_RaidDeleteNoCheck_ON.reg Not possible Image deletion impossible check in overwrite mode is not possible.
overwrite mode
Automatic image playback ComLib_Foff_AutoPlay_ON.reg Automatic When Map is set to independent and LIH is not set, auto playback is
after fluoroscopy in the playback is performed after fluoroscopy. However, auto playback is not performed
Map independent performed after after fluoroscopy when the playback image is halted.
configuration without LIH fluoroscopy. * If fluoroscopy is performed repeatedly at short intervals, image
playback may be performed automatically. Explain this to the user
and obtain the user's agreement before enabling this function.
ComLib_Foff_AutoPlay_OFF.reg Automatic  When Map is set to independent and LIH is not set, auto playback
playback is not after fluoroscopy is disabled.
performed after
fluoroscopy.
Reset operation of the ComLib_OpenFilterBladeOption_On.reg Reset operation When the compensation filter is reset, the blades are also reset.
beam limiting device of the blades is Optional operation of the console function (OpenFilter).
blades when OpenFilter is performed.
performed ComLib_OpenFilterBladeOption_Off.reg Reset operation  When the compensation filter is reset, the blades are not reset.
of the blades is Optional operation of the console function (OpenFilter).
not performed.
900
No. 2J308-036EN*I

Display of the HLC Comlib_HlcCheckBoxDisplay_ON.reg Displayed The HLC checkbox is displayed on the Acquisition mode.
checkbox in Acquisition * HLC mode cannot be selected in systems for the USA.
mode.  The HLC checkbox is not displayed on the Acquisition mode
Comlib_HlcCheckBoxDisplay_OFF.reg Not displayed
Display of photo images on Comlib_DispPhotoDisable_ON.reg Displayed  Photo images are not displayed on the reference monitor.
the reference monitor Comlib_DispPhotoDisable_OFF.reg Not displayed Photo images are displayed on the reference monitor.
Display of the FOV in ComLib_FovZoomDisp_Disable_OFF.reg Performed  FOV is displayed in FOV/Zoom display mode, taking Live Zoom into
FOV/Zoom display mode account.
taking into account Live ComLib_FovZoomDisp_Disable_ON.reg Not performed As previously, FOV is displayed in FOV data display mode.
Zoom operation.
Load distribution in TxsJobQueueTxsCrcBufferChange- Load distribution  Load distribution is not performed in import/export processing during
import/export processing OFF.reg is not performed. examination.
during the examination TxsJobQueueTxsCrcBufferChange- Load distribution Load distribution is performed in import/export processing during
ON.reg is performed. examination.
Note that time required for importing/exporting processing may be
slightly slow. Processing speed is not changed when the examination is
not in progress.
Thumbnail/catalog display ComLib_CatalogMode_Review_OFF.reg Thumbnail display  The display mode switches to thumbnail display when the
in Review mode thumbnail/catalog button is clicked in the Review mode.
ComLib_CatalogMode_Review_ON.reg Catalog display The display mode switches to catalog display when the
thumbnail/catalog button is clicked in the Review mode.
Thumbnail/catalog display ComLib_CatalogMode_Exam_OFF.reg Thumbnail display  The display mode switches to thumbnail display when the
in Exam mode thumbnail/catalog button is clicked in the Exam mode.
ComLib_CatalogMode_Exam_ON.reg Catalog display The display mode switches to catalog display when the
thumbnail/catalog button is clicked in the Exam mode.
Movement of the mouse Comlib_SingleScreenMouseMode_ Movement is  Mouse movement to an Exam room monitor is possible(Valid in
cursor to the examination OFF.reg possible. V4.22 or later).
room monitor Comlib_SingleScreenMouseMode_ Movement is not Mouse movement to an Exam room monitor is not possible(Valid in
ON.reg possible. V4.22 or later).
901
No. 2J308-036EN*I

Realtime alert function Comlib_RealTimeAlert_OFF.reg Disabled  The real-time alert function is disabled.
Comlib_RealTimeAlert_ON.reg Enabled The real-time alert function is enabled.
Display of the dose rate ComLib_DoseRateTimeUnitTypeMin_ON. (mGy/min)  Dose rate display switches to the dose rate per minute (mGy/min.).
per minute (mGy/min) reg (Default setting at the time of shipment in V4.25 or later)
Pixel shifting by dragging Comlib_MousePixelShift_OFF.reg Disabled Pixel shifting by dragging the mouse is disabled.
the mouse (available in V4.30 or later)
Comlib_MousePixelShift_ON.reg Enabled  Pixel shifting by dragging the mouse is enabled.

(available in V4.30 or later)
Preparatory operation and Comlib_3DRM_Adjust_OFF.reg Disabled  Disables the preparatory operation and reset operation function of
reset operation of the the support unit.
support unit (Available only in V4.40 or later)
Comlib_3DRM_Adjust_ON.reg Enabled  Enables the preparatory operation and reset operation function of the
support unit.
(Available only in V4.40 or later)
LIH setting Comlib_LIH_UIDisable_OFF.reg Disabled  Enables the LIH setting (ON/OFF) to be changed in Acquisition mode
and Utility mode. (This function is available in V4.40 or later.)
Comlib_LIH_UIDisable_ON.reg Enabled  Disables the LIH setting (ON/OFF) to be changed in Acquisition

mode and Utility mode. (This function is available in V4.40 or later.)
902
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.18 Corrective Actions When the DFP-8000A Cannot Be Started Up
29.18.1 Outline of the DFP-8000A software
(1) Software environment
The DFP-8000A employs Windows XP Professional (English version) as its operating

system. The common platform that is already used in other Toshiba modalities is
employed as the middleware, and applications specific to the DFP operate based on the
middleware.
The Windows OS and the common platform applications etc. have been installed in the
system drive (C drive), database information items have been installed in the D drive,
image data (including thumbnail images, but excluding the original image data) has been
installed in the E drive, and applications specific to the DFP have been installed in the F
drive. These drives are included in a mirroring HD unit (set). The original image data
and the related information items are stored in another dedicated RAID unit.
If an HD included in the mirroring HD unit is defective, it can be recovered using the

mirroring HD unit. In other cases, however, such as if the unit itself or the Windows OS is
defective, the system must be recovered by the procedures described later.
The DFP-8000A software environment has been constructed using several DVDs at the
manufacturing stage. These DVDs are referred to as the product master DVDs and
include all the files used for the mirroring HD unit. By using these DVDs, the basic DFP-
8000A environment can be reconstructed even on site.
Since the environment reconstructed from these DVDs is the basic environment, the
settings specific to the site must be set after reconstruction is performed.
(2) Settings specific to the site
As explained above, since the DFP-8000A employs the Windows OS as its platform, the
computer name, IP address, and other such settings are site-specific information.
Because the recovery DVDs are used in common for all systems, the settings required
for Windows OS will be set to a specified status after reconstruction of the basic DFP-
8000A environment. Back up the original settings in advance so that they can be
restored after reconstruction. At least record the network settings (such as the computer
name and IP address) as "information items at the time of installation". This is necessary
because the common platform used in i-series systems handles the computer name as
an important key, and these information items are important in connection with the
DICOM server. If the settings are not restored to the original settings, connection with
other devices on the network may be disabled.
For DFP applications, the site-specific data (X-ray adjustment data etc.) is stored as
DFP-specific application files in the F drive. Backup these files at regular intervals using
the backup function provided as one of the service functions. The setting data is
basically updated at the time of installation or software upgrading. After work is
completed and normal operation is confirmed, be sure to back up the data.
In addition to the above site-specific data, database information, which is upgraded in

daily use, also exists. This includes the history database, which consists of the
patient/study information, and the database for managing the RAID used for storing
original images. For this database information, the original information items are difficult
to recover perfectly after system recovery even when backup has been performed at
some point, because this information is updated daily. Note that these information items
may not be recovered perfectly and that there are restrictions on the recoverable images
using the RaidDataRecovery function.
903
No. 2J308-036EN*I
NOTE: The following images can be recovered using the RaidDataRecovery function.
DA/DSA images (including rotational/stepping DA/DSA images), fluoroscopic

dynamic images, and fluoroscopic static images (including LIH images)
acquired using the system.
Other images (such as imported images) cannot be recovered.
(3) Points regarding recovery of the environment
(a) Windows OS, service pack, security patch, general-purpose applications, etc.
When the restoration is performed using the recovery DVDs, most settings at the
time of shipment can be recovered for the above items. Note, however, that some
system files related to the OS, service pack/security patch, application versions, etc.
may have been updated due to on-site modifications (FMI) performed after
installation. When recovering the environment, be sure to update these items.
(b) Registry information
Basically the registry information can be recovered in the same manner as for (a)
above. For the registry information specific to the DFP-8000A, however, most
settings must be performed again in the HyperSetup processing described later. In
this case, note that the status is basically set to the initial status. To restore the
registry information to that before corruption, the required registry information must
have been backed up in the normal status using the backup function of the service
functions. If the backup information does not exist, setting must be performed again
using mainly the service functions.
(c) Database information related to Versant
The database information is stored in files in the D drive. Initial files are generated
when the HyperSetup processing is executed. Information items stored in this drive
are updated as the system is used. In normal cases, even if these information
items have been backed up at regular intervals, they cannot be perfectly restored to
the original status after recovery.
(d) NTFS system image database information
This information is stored in the E drive. The initial files are generated when
HyperSetup processing is executed. Information items stored in this drive are also
updated as the system is used. Thumbnail images acquired by the DFP-8000A and
information regarding images transferred to external devices (DICOM server/imager)
are included in the information of this drive. Note that these information items are
different from those in the image database in the RAID used for storing original
images.
904
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(e) DFP-8000A applications
These applications are stored as files in the F drive. The files in the second DVD of
of the recovery DVDs are those at the time of shipment and these files are located
in the celeve folder of the F drive. If on-site modifications have been performed
after installation, the files should have been updated. Update the files after
recovery by following the procedures in the applicable on-site modification manuals.
Of these files, only files in the TxsSite folder have special meaning. They include
the X-ray adjustment data acquired at the time of installation and several files
including information items set using the service functions. During the backup
processing of the service functions, all the files in this folder are backed up by
default. Therefore, the setting data in this folder can be recovered using the
specified restoration procedures. Note, however, that the database information
related to images stored in the RAID used for storing original images is also
included (TxsSite\TxsRaid). Since these items are updated each time images are
acquired at the DFP-8000A, even if backed-up files are restored, they cannot be
used as is. The database must be reconstructed using the RaidDataRecovery
function described above.
(f) Supplementary information
Though information files are located in separate drives as described above, they
are not totally independent of each other. In particular, for database information
related to Versant, database information for NTFS system images, and database
information for images stored in the RAID used for storing original images, the files
are generated by the HyperSetup processing and are updated and matched as the
system is used. Basically, if these database information items do not match, normal
system operation is not ensured.
Depending on the recovery status of these items, some mismatches may occur. In
the worst case, the previous setting data (mainly database information) must be set
to the initial status to prevent mismatches. Though the best recovery method is to
perform HyperSetup processing, the database information will be reset to the initial
status and all information items for images acquired before corruption (including the
related information) will be lost. When the database is reconstructed using the
RaidDataRecovery function described above, images stored in the RAID used for
storing original images can be read but the patient/study information history will be
lost.
905
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.18.2 Proactive measures against system corruption
(1) Backup using the service functions
This subsection describes the settings and database backup/restoration methods using
the service functions.
(a) After starting up the DFP-8000A, insert an unused CD-R with a storage capacity of
650 MB or more into the Multi drive. When the data is to be backed up to the local
disk, check whether or not there is sufficient space for backup on drive F of the local
disk. The free disk space required for backup is approximately 100 MB. Even if
drive F does not have sufficient free space, when the SP is connected, it is possible
to use the free space of the SP. Therefore, find a drive of the SP that has sufficient
free space and mount the drive from the DFP in advance.
(b) Perform the specified procedures to enter the service menu.
(c) Select the [Maint.] tab and select "Backup/Restore"  "Backup System Settings" in
the tree view on the left of the main window.
(d) The following window is displayed. Specify "MULTI" (Multi drive) in the "Backup To"
drop down list and click the [Start] button. Approximate 15 minutes are required to
complete backup processing.
Note that when the data is to be backed up to the local disk or the SP, specify the
network mounted local disk or the SP instead of "MULTI".
NOTE: The HistoryDB can also be backed up using TxsCdrWriter described later
in "Backing up data using TxsCdrWriter".
906
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(e) When backup has been completed successfully, the following dialog box is
displayed.
NOTE: The size information of the "LIH" character strings during LIH display is
not backed up.
Therefore, the size information of the "LIH" character strings during LIH
display will not be restored.
If the size of the "LIH" character strings has been customized on site, set
the size of the "LIH" character strings again referring to subsection 29.25
"Changing the LIH Font".
NOTE: For example, when a service processor (SP) is connected to the target
system and sufficient free space can be reserved in one of the drives of
the SP without adversely affecting SP operation, it is also possible to store
the backup files there. The above function, provided as a service menu, is
designed so that the files/registries described in the specified setting file
are stored in the specified folder in the specified file format. However, if
all subfolders/files in the "D:/DATABASE" folder, all subfolders/files in the
"E:/IMAGE" folder, the "TxsSite" folder in the "F:\celeve" folder (and
"bat/bin/config/Data/log/Tool/TxsI18nExcel/TXSService", if possible) are
backed up as is on the condition that there is sufficient free space in the
SP, recovery processing may be simplified. (Of course, the data transfer
time varies depending on the amount of data. If all of the files and folders
described above are to be transferred, the total amount of data may be
several GB. This point must also therefore be considered when this work
is performed.)
(f) The following information is provided as reference information. The folders

generated through backup processing in the local drive can be saved onto a CD-R
disk using the method described below. The method described above limits writing
to the backup folders, while this method does not have this restriction (although that
it has other restrictions).
After confirming that the folders are saved normally, delete the backup folders in the
drive by folder.
907
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Backing up data using TxsCdrWriter
CAUTION: This writing function supports only CDs created using this function.
Therefore, do not use a CD that is created (written) using commercial
writing software. Also, after recording to the CD-R, be sure to remove the
CD media temporarily. If additional writing is performed without ejecting
the CD temporarily, it may not be possible to read the written data in some
cases.
This subsection describes the procedures for storing the data files to be backed up using
the CD-R writing function installed in i-series systems as a standard function. Of the
subfolders in the "F:\celeve" folder, do not use the "doc" folder only.
The backup procedures are described below.
(a) Prepare a raw CD-R disk.
(b) Double-click "F:\celeve\bin\TxsCdrWriter.exe" to directly execute the application

program or use the command line entry function provided as one of the service
functions to start up "TxsCdrWriter.exe". Note that the [CD-R Tool] button is
provided in the dialog displayed by clicking the [System] button in the [Utility] tab
displayed after the system is started up. TxsCdrWriter.exe can also be started up
by clicking the [CD-R Tool] button.
The following dialog box is displayed.
908
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(c) Click the [Add Folder] button to select the folder to be backed up. To select more
than one folder, select additional folders and perform the same procedures.
For example, to record a group of data sets called the site specific data
(F:\celeve\TxsSite) on a CD-R disk, directly select the folder as shown in the figure
below and then click the [OK] button.
(d) With the following settings, click the [CD-R Publish] button.
909
No. 2J308-036EN*I
1 Starts up system recovery disk (ERD) generation processing.

2 Displays the window in which the folders to be backed up are selected.
3 Clears a group of folders that were set as the files for backup.
4 Backup mode. When "Daily backup" is selected, site specific information
and Windows system files (files including the registry files) are automatically
specified. When "Full backup" is selected, the system is set so that all of
the subfolders and files in the "celeve" folder of drive F are backed up (only
backup to InnerVision is possible). "Duplicate Mode" should be selected
when a folder is to be recorded several times with the same folder name on
the same CD-R disk. A folder with "YYYYMMDD-hhmmss" indicating the
date and time is automatically generated and the selected folders (files) are
stored in the generated folder.
5 Write button
6 When an InnerVision system is connected, the specified file is written in the
log storage folder of the InnerVision system.
7 Displays details of an error.
8 Displays the remaining free space on the CD-R disk.
9 Displays the Multi drive name.
10 Indicates the drive letter of the Multi drive. This is fixed to "G" in production
systems. Do not change this setting
11 Backup processing for the history database starts. The backed-up
database file is stored in "F:\celeve\TxsSite\Backup".
910
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(e) After writing has been completed normally, attempt to copy the files to a temp folder
to confirm that the data written on the CD-R can be copied normally.
Do not forget to delete all of the files that were temporarily copied.
(f) Write the backup software version, the date of backup, the names of the backup
files (folders), etc. on the label of the CD-R generated through this processing and
store it in a safe place.
29.18.3 Actions to be taken after a system crash has occurred
(1) If Windows does not start up because some Windows system files cannot be read, step
(2) "Restore processing using the recovery DVD" below must be performed.
(2) Restore processing using the recovery DVD
With regard to the recovery processing described below, the following four levels are
defined. In any case, restore processing is performed on the condition that the recovery
DVD is provided with the product.
(a) Level 1: Level at the time of installation (including the status after FMI work has
been completed in some cases)
(b) Level 2: Level at which X-ray readjustment work is recovered in addition to Level 1.
(c) Level 3: Level at which the RAID image database is recovered in addition to Level 2.
(d) Level 4: Level at which the history database etc. are recovered in addition to Level 3.
The backup files required and the time required differ depending on the recovery
processing level. It is possible to recover to Level 1 and Level 3 regardless of whether or
not a backup has been performed (in case of recovery to Level 3, however, X-ray
readjustment and resetting of various system data using the service function will be
required if backup has not been performed). In order to perform Level 2 and Level 4, it is
necessary to perform backup in advance.
911
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Level at the time of installation (including the status after FMI work has been
Level 1
completed in some cases)
Required work items Approximate time required
1. Restoration using the image file 25 minutes
2. Mini-setup wizard 5 minutes
3. Windows startup setting/Network setting 2 minutes
4. Applying the security patch programs 15 minutes
5. Computer name setting 10 minutes
6. Updating the celeve folder 10 minutes
7. Windows Locale setting 10 minutes
8. System reset setting –
9. System data generation –
10. Changing the Windows final settings 10 minutes
11. Actions to be taken when modification has been performed 20 minutes
according to an FMI etc. after installation of the system
12. HyperSetup processing 25 minutes
13. Startup check and final service setting 20 minutes
14. Option settings for the region and language 10 minutes
Total Approx. 3 hours
 The above list shows the standard time required for Level 1.
 The time required for recovery for Levels 2 to 4 varies depending on the number of images
(i.e., the number of images to be recovered), whether the HistoryDB is restored or not, and
the size of the HistoryDB.
 Recovery to Level 2 or Level 4 cannot be performed unless data is backed up in advance.

(Prior data backup is essential.)
 The standard time required to recover the system to Level 3 can be calculated as the "time
required for recovery to level 2 + normal X-ray adjustment time + time required for
resetting the system data using the service function".
 With regard to recovery of the history database etc., the standard time required for
restoration is approximately 20 minutes maximum assuming that backup is completed
normally.
CAUTION: This processing requires the product ID of the Windows OS printed on the
COA attached to the system cover; therefore, be sure to write it down in
advance.
912
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Restoration using the image file
CAUTION: The recovery DVDs to be used differ depending on the model name of the
server PC. Check the model name of the server PC as described below.
Model name: PDS-BX02TMS

Recovery DVDs to be used : Nos. 1/3, 2/3
Identification procedure : <1> SCSI connection terminal is provided
<2> NIC is provided.
Model name: PDS-BX04TMS

Recovery DVDs to be used : Nos. 2/3, 3/3
Identification procedure : <1> SCSI connection terminal is not
provided
<2> NIC is not provided.
913
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(a) Pull out the 4 cables connected to the bridge board in the CPCI chassis.
(b) Turn the power ON and insert the recovery DVD into the Multi drive as described
below.
 For PDS-BX02TMS, insert the first recovery DVD.

 For PDS-BX04TMS, insert the third recovery DVD.
(c) When "Press any key to boot from CD…" is displayed after the BIOS has started
up, press [Enter].
(d) The system will be activated through the DVD and the software will be installed
automatically.
(e) When image development is completed, DFP will reboot automatically. Remove
the DVD from the drive.
(4) Mini-setup window
When the system is rebooted, the mini-setup wizard is executed. When the mini-setup
wizard is completed, the system is automatically rebooted.
914
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(5) Windows startup setting/Netwrok setting

(a) Select "Control Panel" – "System" and click the [Settings] button in the "Startup and
Recovery" field on the [Advanced] tab. In the "System startup" field, uncheck the
"Time to display list of operating systems:" and "Time to display recovery options
when needed:" checkboxes. Then click [OK] to set the system so that the list
display window does not appear at startup.
915
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) Perform network connection setting.
NOTE: The work procedure differs depending on the server PC used. Confirm
the model name of the server PC and perform appropriate setting.
<1> For PDS-BX02TMS
Select "Control Panel" – "Network Connections" and confirm that the

connections for each network are set as specified below. If necessary, select
the corresponding network device name, right-click the mouse, and select
[enable] or [disable] to change the network connection settings.
Local Area Connection

Device name: Intel (R) PRO/1000 MT Dual Port Server Adapter
Connection setting: Network cable unplugged, Firewalled
Local Area Connection 2
Device name: Intel (R) PRO/1000 MT Dual Port Server Adapter 2
Connection setting: Disable, Firewalled
Device name: Microsoft Loopback Adapter
Connection setting: Connected, Firewalled
<2> For PDS-BX04TMS
Select "Control Panel" – "Network Connections" and change the network

name as specified below. To change the network name, select the network
name, click the right mouse button, and select "Rename".
Local Area Connection  Local Area Connection 3

Local Area Connection 1  Local Area Connection
Confirm that network connection setting is performed as specified below. If

necessary, select the network device name and select "enable" or "disable" in
the right-click menu to change the connection status.
Local Area Connection

Device name : Intel(R) 82578DM Gigabit Network Connection
Connection status : Network cable unplugged, Firewalled
Device name : Intel(R) 82574L Gigabit Network Connection
Connection status : Disable, Firewalled
Device name : Microsoft Loopback Adapter
Connection status : Connected, Firewalled
NOTE: If the network settings (e.g. IP address) has been modified at the site, perform
resetting here.
916
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(6) Applying the security patch programs
NOTE: Skip the procedure in this subsection if the security patch does not need to be
applied.
Whether or not application of the security patch programs is required can be

checked in the instructions in the Readme.txt file in the Security Patches folder
of the second recovery DVD. Even if patch program execution files are present
in the folder, be aware that application of security patch programs may not
always be required in this step.
Place the second recovery DVD in the drive and double-click the patch program
execution files (usually the extension is "exe") in the Security Patches folder to apply the
patch programs. The order is not important. However, if a dialog box requesting you to
reboot the system is displayed, be sure to reboot the system before applying other patch
programs. Note that it does not matter if these security patch programs are applied more
than once.
(7) Computer name setting
The serial number of the DFP-8000A system is set as the computer name at the time of
shipment (example: A2600001). As described previously, the computer name is an
important key code. Therefore, record the name before a crash occurs and set the value
here. The computer name must be set at two locations. The settings at the two locations
must be the same.
(a) The fist location at which the specified computer name must be set is in the
VERSANT_DBID_NODE column in the Environment Variables window displayed
by selecting "Control Panel" - "System" - [Advanced] tab - [Environment Variables].
Change "A2600000"
in the left figure to the
serial number.
917
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) The second setting location is in the "Computer Name Changes" window displayed
selecting "Control Panel" - "System" - [Computer Name] tab - "Changes".
The computer name set here must be the same as that at the first location. After
setting is completed, a message is displayed requesting that you reboot the system.
Follow the instructions to reboot the system.
Change "A2600000"
in the left figure to the
serial number.
If the computer names set at the two locations described above do not match, the
system will not operate normally even after setup is completed.
(8) Updating the celeve folder
Note that the second recovery DVD contain the system software shipped with the system
that should initially be installed in the "F:\celeve" folder. Follow the procedures below to
replace all of the folders/files in the existing "F:\celeve" folder.
(a) Use Explorer to create a new "celeve-bak" folder immediately under drive F. (As a
result, the "celeve" folder and the "celeve-bak" folder both exist immediately under
drive F.)
(b) Move (cut & paste) all of the folders/files in the "celeve" folder of drive F to the
"celeve-bak" folder. (The files in all the folders in the "celeve" holder cannot be
deleted. Be sure to "move" them.)
(c) Copy all of the folders/files contained in the second recovery DVD to the "celeve"
folder of drive F. After copying is completed normally, release the "Read Only"
status of these copied folders/files. (With all of the folders/files selected, click the
right mouse button to display the Properties window. In this window, remove the
checkmark from the "Read-Only" checkbox in the Attributes column and then click
[OK]. When the dialog box is displayed, place a checkmark in "Apply Changes to
the selected items, subfolders and files" and click [OK] again.)
(d) Copy the "MPlus Platform" folder located in the "Celeve" folder of drive F to the root
directory of drive F.
918
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(9) Window Locale setting
CAUTION: The work to be performed in this subsection differs depending on the

language setting of the system. Perform Locale setting appropriately for
each system.
(a) Select "Control Panel"  "Regional and Language Options".
(b) Select the appropriate option according to the area where the site is located in the
Standards and formats field on the Regional Options tab.
Japan : Japanese (Japan)

Countries other than Japan : English (United States)
To set French, Spanish, Italian, German, Portuguese, or Russian GUI, select the
option specified below.
French GUI : French (France)

Spanish GUI : Spanish (Spain)
Italian GUI : Italian (Italy)
German GUI : German (Germany)
Portuguese GUI : Portuguese (Portugal)
Russian GUI : Russian (Russia)
919
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(c) Select the appropriate option according to the site location in the Language for non-
Unicode program field on the Advanced tab.
Japan : Japanese (Japan)

Countries other than Japan : English (United States)
To set French, Spanish, Italian, German, Portuguese, or Russian GUI, select the
option specified below.
French GUI : French (France)

Spanish GUI : Spanish (Spain)
Italian GUI : Italian (Italy)
German GUI : German (Germany)
Portuguese GUI : Portuguese (Portugal)
Russian GUI : Russian (Russia)
920
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(d) Click [OK]. The following dialog opens. Click [Yes].
(e) The following dialog opens. Click [Yes] to restart the system.
(10) System reset setting
(a) Select "Control Panel" - "Administrative Tools" - "Service" - "CsaCompMgrInit".

Right-click the mouse and select [Start].
(b) Execute "ginasettings.bat" in the "F:\Celeve\bat\utility" folder.
(c) Restart the system.
921
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(11) System data generation
(a) Generating a new system data file
<1> Startup Explorer and execute DefaultDataMaker.exe in F:\Celeve\bin folder.
<2> Perform setting corresponding to each system configuration and check the
Make RT Data checkbox. Also check the following checkboxes depending on
the optional configuration for each system.
HSBP: XIDF-BPS803 or XIDF-BPS804

SNRF: XIDF-SNR801
Detector name and detector to be selected by DefaultDataMaker
Model name Alias Selection in DefaultDataMaker

TFP-800A FPD8+ TFP-800A
TFP-1216A FPD1216 TFP-1216A
REGION:
Indication Remarks
Japan Systems for inside Japan
United States Systems for the USA
Europe Systems for other countries
* To set the French, Spanish, Italian, German, Portuguese, or Russian GUI,

select "France", "Spain", "Italy", "Germany", "Portugal", or "Russia".
CAS:
Indication Remarks
CAS-830A TFP-800A (BLA-800C)
TFP-1216A (BLA-800A)
CAS-830B TFP-1200A (BLA-900A)
922
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<3> Click the [OK] button. DOS window opens and the file corresponding to each
system is copied.
<4> If key input is required in DOS window during processing, follow the prompt
message. When processing is completed, the DOS window closes
automatically and exe. also terminates.
(b) Registering the default values for the PreProc image quality parameters
NOTE: When this procedure is performed, the existing PreProc image quality
parameters are overwritten. If the data has already been backed up
(F:\Celeve\TxsSite\TxsRTService\TxsRTPreProc_service_para.dat,
F:\Celeve\TxsSite\TxsRTService\TxsRT_SNRF_service_para.dat,
F:\Celeve\TxsSite\TxsRT_SNRF_KvAgcMas_para.dat), this procedure
does not need to be performed.
If the Make RT Data checkbox is checked during work described in (a),
this work is not necessary.
<1> Execute the "F:\Celeve\bin\TxsRTPreProcDataMaker.exe" file.
<2> Referring to the following table, perform setting according to the system
configuration and click the [OK] button. Select "SinglePlane" for Activ systems.
(Since a checkmark has been placed in the "Download to RT" checkbox in the
default setting, remove the checkmark. A checkmark is also placed in the
"SNRF" checkbox in the default setting; remove this checkmark if SNRF is not
used in combination.)
Commonly Selection with

Model name Remarks
used name TxsRTPreProcDataMaker.exe
923
No. 2J308-036EN*I
REGION:
Display Remarks
Japan For Japan
USA For USA
EU Should not be used (reserved for future use).
OTHERS For other areas
(c) Registering the default adjustment values
NOTE: When this procedure is performed, the existing adjustment data is overwritten.
If the data has already been backed up, this procedure does not need to be
performed.
If the Make RT Data checkbox is checked during work described in (1), this
work is not necessary.
<1> Start up Explorer and execute the

"F:\Celeve\bin\TxsRTDefaultDataMaker.exe" file.
<2> Referring to the following table, perform setting according to the connected
system and click the OK button. Select "SinglePlane" for Activ systems.
(Confirm that a checkmark is not placed in the "Download to RT" checkbox.
A checkmark is placed in the "SNRF" checkbox. Remove the checkmark
since the SNRF is not used in combination. Note that "HSBP" can be selected
only when "BiPlane" is selected. When the HSBP option is used in
combination, place a checkmark in this checkbox.)
Commonly Selection with

Model name
used name TxsRTDefaultDataMaker.exe
924
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(12) Changing the Windows final settings
(a) Shut down the system and turn OFF the power of the DFP.
(b) Connect four cables to the Bridge PWB in the CPCI chassis.
(c) Turn ON the power of the DFP.
(d) Open the "Explorer" window and confirm that drives C, D, E, and F are hard disks
and drive G is a Multi drive. If a drive letter is not correct, select "Control Panel" -
"Administrative Tools" and then click the "Computer Management" icon to correct
the drive letter.
(e) Copy all the files in "F:\Celeve\bin\drivers" to "C:\WINDOWS\system32\drivers" to

overwrite them.
(f) Perform either one of the following works according to the country where the
system is installed.
 For systems for Japan
Double-click "F:\celeve\bat\utility\TxsDomestic.bat". The DOS window opens

and then closes immediately (normal operation).
 For systems for countries other than Japan
Double-click "F:\celeve\bat\utility\TxsForeign.bat". The DOS window opens and

then closes immediately (normal operation).
(g) Set the task scheduler
<1> Select "Control Panel" - "Scheduled Tasks" - "Startup Window Dummy".

Right-click the mouse and select [Properties].
<2> When the following window opens, click [Set password]. The password entry
screen opens. Enter "@Toshiba_XA" and click [OK].
925
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(h) After the system is rebooted, delete the "F:\celeve-bak" folder that was backed up
previously and empty the Recycle Bin. (If you attempt to delete the folder without
rebooting the system, the folder cannot be deleted successfully. Be sure to reboot
the system and then delete the folder.)
CAUTION: In order to start up the DFP-8000A system in normal status, the

version numbers of the system software and of the RT software
(real-time series software installed in the ROM on the PPC PWB)
must be the same. If only the mirror HD unit is being recovered, the
version of the system software is that at the time of shipment at this
point. However, if modification has been performed at the site
according to an FMI after the system had been installed, it is very
likely that the RT software version has been upgraded. Therefore, it
may not yet be possible to start up the DFP-8000A system normally
at this point. In addition, some data files such as the RAID
management database have not yet been generated. Therefore, be
careful not to start up the system as an i-series system. (Only the
Windows system should be allowed to start up.)
(13) Actions to be taken when modification has been performed according to an FMI etc. after
installation of the system
At this point, some settings are still in the initial status. In addition, if modification has
been performed according to an FMI etc. after installation of the system, the same
processing must be performed again with regard to the DFP-8000A system software only.
At this time, follow the same procedures as in the FMI manual. (Note that version
upgrade of the RT software described in the FMI manual does not need to be performed.)
The FMI manual provided previously describes the procedures assuming that the system
is running normally. However, since some data files have not yet been generated at this
point, the system cannot be started up normally as an i-series system. Therefore, skip
the procedures that include startup of the system (e.g., processing to be performed by
starting up a service program).
926
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(14) HyperSetup processing
In addition to the generation of initial files for various database information items and
image management files, initial setting of the registry is performed through this
processing. The procedures for restoring the backup data are described below. At this
stage, perform HyperSetup processing. As a result, the Level 1 recovery status can be
achieved. The Level 2 recovery status can be achieved by executing the procedures for
restoring the backup data described later. The Level 3 recovery status can then be
achieved by executing the RaidDataRecovery function. If system recovery is required
immediately or if it is not necessary to read images stored in the original image storage
RAID, it is possible to stop system recovery processing at Level 1. The HyperSetup
procedures are described below.
(a) Select "Control Panel" - "Administrative Tools" - "Service" - "CsaCompMgrInit".

Right-click the mouse and select [Start].
(b) When the "F:\Celeve\bat\utility\HyperSetup.bat" file is double-clicked, batch

processing starts. This batch processing includes interrupts required for startup of
some processes (which require key entry by the operator), execution of the
application dialog for initialization of the image management file (once), and display
of the pop-up menu for registry setting registration (multiple times).
(c) When the image file initialization dialog box (TxsRaidUtilityFE) is displayed, check
the free space of the RAID (Raid Disk Size) at the upper left of the screen and then
click the [Run] button according to the instructions displayed in the dialog boxes.
(d) When "NO ERROR" is displayed in the STATUS field (Raid Status field in the
bottom center part of the screen), initialization processing for the image
management file is completed successfully. Click the [Exit] button to close the
window.
927
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(e) Following a brief delay after the above processing is completed, the interaction for
registering the registry settings starts. During this processing, select [OK] or [Yes]
for all selections. (The window shown below is an example.)
(f) The CAAS2000 registry software starts up and the following dialog appears.
Click [OK].
(g) When "Overwrite C:\WINNT\fonts\ARIALUNI.TTF? (Yes/No/All)" is displayed in the

DOS window, press "y" and the [Enter] key. The font setting is overwritten.
When "Press any key to continue …" is displayed, press the [Enter] key.
(h) After the HyperSetup procedures have been completed successfully, the DOS
window is automatically closed by pressing the [Enter] key and then any key.
 For systems shipped to sites outside Japan

Double-click the "F:\celeve\bat\utility\registry\TxsI18nReg(en-US).reg" file to
register the setting (this operation changes the setting "ja-JP" to "en-US").
Alternatively, double-click the file specified below according to the language
setting used at the site.
For systems with the French GUI:
F:\celeve\bat\utility\registry\TxsI18nReg(fr-FR).reg
For systems with the Spanish GUI:
F:\celeve\bat\utility\registry\TxsI18nReg(es-ES).reg
For systems with the Italian GUI:
F:\celeve\bat\utility\registry\TxsI18nReg(it-IT).reg
For systems with the German GUI:
F:\celeve\bat\utility\registry\TxsI18nReg(de-DE).reg
For systems with the Portuguese GUI:
F:\celeve\bat\utility\registry\TxsI18nReg(pt-PT).reg
For systems with the Russian GUI:
F:\celeve\bat\utility\registry\TxsI18nReg(ru-RU).reg
 For systems to be shipped to Germany
Double-click the "F:\celeve\bat\utility\registry\ComLib_LIH_UIDisable_ON.reg" file
to register the setting (this operation puts restrictions on the LIH/MIH functions).
928
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(i) The following DOS window remains open. Click [] to close it.
(15) Restoring the backup data
Assuming that data has been backed up, this processing should be performed.
Otherwise, the level to which the system can be recovered is limited to Level 1.
(X-ray adjustment work must be performed again.) However, some image data items can
be recovered by RaidDataRecovery processing.
If setting data has been backed up, perform restoration here.
If backup was performed using the service menu described in subsection 29.18.2 (1), the
system status at the time of backup can be recovered using the restoration function of
the service menu.
CAUTION: Before restoring, back up the following folder generated after HyperSetup
processing.
[Folder to be backed up] F:\celeve\TxsSite\TxsRaid
[Backup destination] F:\temp
The folder must be moved back to its original location after the following
restore procedure. Be sure to back up the folder.
Start the service menu using the following procedure.
(a) Double-click the "F:\celeve\bin\TxsMPlusSrvStartBC.exe" file using Explorer to start

up the Toshiba Service window.
(b) When the Toshiba Service main window is displayed, continue processing
according to the normal service menu operating procedures.
929
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(c) Select the [Maint.] tab and select "Backup/Restore" –"Restore System Settings" in
the tree view on the left of the screen.
(d) Select the folder to be restored. If a CD-R was used for backup, place the CD-R in
the Multi drive and click the [Browse] button.
(e) The following window is displayed. Select the appropriate drive and the data to be
restored and then click the [OK] button.
930
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(f) After the specified backup folder has been selected, a check mark is placed in the
checkbox for the data that was automatically backed up. Press the [Start] button at
the lower right section. The confirmation dialog is displayed twice. Click the [Yes]
button each time.
(g) When processing is completed successfully, the following dialog box is displayed.
(h) After the restore process terminates normally, close the service screen by following
the screen message. After all opened menus have closed, restart the system.
If the system does not restart, the restored data items have not been properly
restored.
(i) After restarting the system, manually remove the "F:\celeve\TxsSite\TxsRaid" folder
and then copy the "F:\celeve\TxsSite\TxsRaid" folder that was backed up in
"F:\temp" to its original location. After copying has completed normally, delete the
backed-up folder (named TxsRaid) in the F:\temp directory and empty the Recycle
Bin.
NOTE: When the backup data is stored in the SP, restoration should be
performed by manually copying back the required files. At this point, the
software must be returned to the same version as when the data files
were backed up. Even in this case, it is necessary to back up the
"F:\celeve\TxsSite\TxsRaid" file and then move it back to its original
location.
(j) Changing the System Software Settings
<1> Start up Explorer from the task bar.
<2> After Explorer starts up, execute the following file.
f:\celeve\bin\TxsPpcComMgrIniSetForService.exe
The following dialog is displayed.
931
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<3> Check the installed video boards and place a check mark in the applicable
radio box.
If tearing-free video boards have been installed, place a check mark in the
"Video board" check box and then press [Update].
If S-VIDEO/DUAL-VIDEO boards have been installed, place a check mark in

the "S-Video Dual-Video" check box and then press [Update].
When setting is performed successfully, the following dialog is displayed.

Click [OK] in this dialog.
<4> Click [Close] to close the dialog.
(k) Double-click the "F:\celeve\bin\Txs_restartCeleve.js" file so that the DFP-8000A

starts automatically. Then restart the system.
NOTE: 1. When the backup files stored in the SP etc. are restored manually
The files are restored but the registry information is not restored
perfectly.
If backup was performed using the service menu, the registry

information can be restored by restoring the "Configurations" data
included in the backed-up data sets. (Even in the case of a registry
crash problem as described previously, if the backed-up data sets
exist, the registry information can be restored by performing this
operation.) After completing this procedure, manually restore the data
sets that were backed up manually to the original drive (folders).
2. The size information of the "LIH" character strings during LIH display is
not backed up. Therefore, the size information of the "LIH" character
strings during LIH display will not be restored.
If the size of the "LIH" character strings has been customized on site,
set the size of the "LIH" character strings again referring to subsection
29.25 "Changing the LIH Font".
932
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(16) Startup check and final service setting
If all of the work procedures up to this stage have been performed normally, it should be
possible to start up the i-series application. After confirming that the i-series application
can be started up normally, immediately check the service settings. If the restoration
processing described in the previous subsection has been performed successfully, the
main setting data sets described below should have been transferred. Even so, be sure
to reconfirm them. If HyperSetup processing has been performed but restoration
processing has not been performed, perform X-ray readjustment at this stage. In
addition, since it is likely that many setting values have been returned to their initial
settings, set them again at this stage.
(a) Start up the service software.
<1> Select [Service] in the [Utility] tab.
<2> Password entry is requested. Enter the password.
(b) Perform Windows Locale setting with the service software.
CAUTION: Since the Locale settings differ between the systems used inside Japan
and outside Japan. Perform setting appropriately according to the country
in which the system is used.
933
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<1> In the [Config.] tab, select "System Management" – "Language".
<2> Select "English (United States)" for the region.
* To set the French, Spanish, Italian, German, Portuguese, or Russian GUI,

select "French (France)", "Spanish (Traditional Sort)", "Italian (Italy)",
"German (Germany)", "Portuguese (Portugal)", or "Russian (Russia)".
<3> Click [Apply].
(c) Perform time zone setting.
<1> Select "System Management" – "Date & Time" in the tree-view pane.
<2> Select the time zone according to the region where the system is to be
installed.
<3> Click [Apply].
934
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(d) Perform setting of the character set.
<1> Select "Characterser" in the tree-view pane.
<2> Select the character set as shown below.
[English] ISO_IR6
* French GUI : [French] ISO_IR100

Spanish GUI : [Spanish] ISO_IR100
Italian GUI : [Italian] ISO_IR100
German GUI : [German] ISO_IR100
Portuguese GUI : [Portuguese] ISO_IR100
Russian GUI : [Russian] ISO_IR100
<3> Click [Apply].
(e) Set the serial number of the system.
<1> Select "Site Description" in the tree-view pane.
<2> Enter the serial number in the serial number entry field.
<3> Enter the station name in the station name entry field as specified below.
DFP-8000A/J4 : 1204**** (**** indicates the last four digits of the system
serial number.)
DFP-8000A/W4 : 2204**** (**** indicates the last four digits of the system
serial number.)
<4> Click [Apply].
935
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(f) Set the system.
<1> Select "System" in the tree-view pane.
<2> Perform setting of the system in the system setting screen.
CAUTION: For systems shipped to sites outside the USA, be sure to change the SSD
setting of the CAS from 38 cm to 30 cm and register the new setting.
(Be sure to check this setting again after all the units used in combination
are installed.)
(g) Set the fluoroscopic timer.
<1> In the tree-view pane on the left of the system setting screen, select "DFP"
and switch the display to the screen for setting "Other".
<2> Perform setting as specified below by setting the appropriate radio button to
ON.
 USA : Select "HHS (2006.06-)".
 Other countries : Select "IEC".
 Confirm that the Alarm Time Setting (sec) is "30".
(h) Change the fluoroscopic focus setting in the study protocol.
NOTE: Perform the procedures described below only when DSRX-T7444GDS is

connected.
<1> Start up Explorer and execute "F:Celeve\bin\TxsDefaultFocusSetup.exe".
936
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<2> After the fluoroscopic focus setting tool starts up, check "Tube Type" (framed
sections in the following figure) and click [Execute].
Example screen for DP systems
<3> When the confirmation dialog is displayed, click [OK].
<4> When the setting completion dialog is displayed, click [OK] to complete the
setting.
NOTE: Even if this tool is to be executed, an error dialog is displayed in the

following cases and the tool cannot be executed.
 When a tube has not been set on the system setting screen of the
service tool
 Perform setting for the tube and then execute the tool.
 For systems in which the DSRX-T7444GDS has not been connected

 It is not necessary to execute this tool.
 When a study is in progress

 Execute this tool after the study is completed.
(i) Execute "F:\celeve\bin\Txs_stopCeleve.js to restart the system.
937
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(17) Option settings for the region and language
(a) Perform Windows Locale setting.
<1> Select "Control Panel" - "Regional and Language Options".
<2> In the Location field on the [Regional Options] tab, select the locale
corresponding to the destination and then click [Apply].
(b) Set the date and the formatting of numbers.
<1> Click [Customize] in the Standards and formats field on the [Regional Options]
tab.
<2> Set "." (period) for "Decimal symbol" on the [Numbers] tab in the Customize
Regional Options screen.
Note that "." (period) may not be available in the options in the "Decimal
symbol" drop-down list according to the settings in "Regional and Language
Options". In this case, Enter "." (period) from the keyboard.
<3> Set "/" (slash) for "Date separator" in the Short date field on the [Date] tab in
the Customize Regional Options screen.
CAUTION: Do not set any options other than "/" (slash) for "Date separator".
Doing so may result in system failure.
<4> In the Long date formats field on the [Date] tab on the Customize Regional
Options screen, select "MMMM.dd.yyyy" and then click [OK].
938
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(c) Set the input language.
<1> In the Text Services and Input Language field on the [Language] tab, click
[Detail].
<2> In the Default input language field on the [Settings] tab on the Text Services
and Input Languages screen, set the input language to "English (United States)
- US" and then click [Apply].
(d) Change the key sequence setting.
<1> Click [Key Settings] in the Preferences field on the [Language] tab.
<2> Click [Change Key Sequence] in the Hot keys for input languages field on the
Advanced Key settings screen.
<3> When the following screen opens, remove all of the checkmarks and then click
[OK].
<4> Click [OK] in each screen to close the screens.
(e) Execute "F:\celeve\bin\Txs_restartCeleve.js" to restart the system.
939
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(18) RaidDataRecovery processing
After restarting the system, select "RaidDataRecovery" in "Command List" to start up the
RaidDataRecovery menu using the command line entry function provided as one of the
service functions. For details of this function, refer to subsection 4.4 of the service
manual (2D308-016EN).
29.18.4 Mirroring unit setting confirmation
(1) Setting using the utility software installed in the mirroring unit
Perform this procedure only when the both hard disk drives are to be replaced due to a
malfunction etc. This procedure is not required when the system is to be restored using
the backup hard disk drive prepared in advance.
(2) Startup and shutdown of the utility software
(a) Startup
<1> Open the [System] tab and click [Service] to enter service mode.
<2> Click "Command Line" in the [Utils] tab.
<3> Select "Mirroring Utility" from the command list and click the [GO] button.
(b) Shutdown
<1> Click the [Exit] button in the Utility software.
<2> Terminate service mode.
940
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Settings
Click the [Settings] tab.
Confirm that "Set disconnect rebuild frequency" of "Disconnect Rebuild Frequency

Setting" is set to "0". If it is set to "0", close the utility software.
If a value other than "0" is set, change the value to "0" and click the [Set] button.
Then, close the software.
CAUTION: Do not change settings other than those in "Disconnect Rebuild Frequency
Setting".
Utility software window for the mirroring unit
941
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.19 Check of the Memory, Video Board, and Hard Disk Settings
The "TxsInitialTest.exe" file has been prepared for checking of the memory, video board, and
hard disk settings. This file checks the following items at the time of startup of the system
software.
 Amount of memory
 Number of video boards
 Resolutions of the video boards
 Free space on the hard disks
 Whether the hard disk drives are working normally
When all the settings are normal, "NORMAL: System is working properly." is displayed as shown
in the figure below and the window is automatically closed. When any inappropriate item is
detected, an error message appears in the last part and the window remains displayed.
The error messages are shown below.
(1) "ERROR: System Memory is too small. Call service."
The message "!!! Physical memory is [physical memory size] GBytes, but it is not enough."
is displayed in the window.
[Cause] The memory is insufficient.
[Corrective action] Check the memory settings according to subsections 3.3.1 "PWB setting"
and 4.3.8 (1) "Checking/setting the system BIOS".
942
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) "ERROR: Display Card is not working. Call service."
The message "!!! [number of monitors] Video Boards are working, but it is not enough." is
displayed in the window.
[Cause] The number of monitors that can be recognized is less than 3 and the number of
video boards is insufficient.
[Corrective action] Check the video board settings according to subsections 3.3.1 "PWB
setting" and 4.3.8 (1) "Checking/setting the system BIOS". Also, confirm that the boards are
mounted properly by removing/inserting them.
If this error message still remains displayed after taking the corrective actions above, a
video board may have failed. Replace the video board according to subsection 5.1.6 "Video
card (BSX17-3832) replacement procedures" of the service manual (2D308-016EN).
(3) "ERROR: Color setting of Display is incorrect. Call service."
The message "!!! Bits per pixel (Video board [applicable video board number]) is [bits per
pixel], but is it not correct setting." is displayed in the window.
[Cause] The color setting is other than 32-bit colors for one or more of the video boards.
[Corrective action] Change the color settings for the applicable video board to 32-bit colors
according to subsection 5.1.6 "Video card (BSX17-3832) replacement procedures" of the
(4) "ERROR: Resolution setting of Display is incorrect. Call service."
The message "!!! Resolution (Video Board [applicable video board number]) is [setting value
in the Screen area], but it is not correct setting." is displayed in the window.
[Cause] The setting value in the Screen area is incorrect for one or more of the video
boards.
[Corrective action] Set the appropriate setting value in the Screen area for the applicable
video board according to subsection 5.1.6 "Video card (BSX17-3832) replacement
procedures" of the service manual (2D308-016EN).
(5) "ERROR: There is not enough room on the disk. Call service."
The message "!!! FreeSpace in drive [applicable drive name] is [amount of free space] MB,
but it is not enough." is displayed in the window.
[Cause] The free space on the applicable hard disk is insufficient.
[Corrective action] The corrective action differs depending on the applicable drive.
<For the C drive> Delete unnecessary files from "C:\temp".
<For the D and E drives> Start up the system and delete unnecessary studies from among
the previous studies.
<For the F drive> Delete unnecessary files from the F drive. If an error message still
remains displayed, delete files for previous versions, such as "F:\celeve-old".
943
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(6) "ERROR: Logical drive does not exist. Call service."
The message "!!! There is no drive with drive name [applicable drive name], but this drive is
needed." is displayed.
[Cause] A partition that should be present is not present in the system disk.
[Corrective action] A system disk failure may have occurred. Attempt to restart the system.
If the system cannot be restarted, perform recovery processing according to subsection
29.18.3 "Actions to be taken after a system crash has occurred". Immediately obtain the
system disk service parts and rebuild the disk using the mirroring unit according to
subsection 5.1.4 "Drive unit replacement" of the service manual (2D308-016EN).
944
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.20 Setting the Image Quality Parameters

29.20.1 Setting procedure and setting mechanism
(1) Setting procedure
On the Image Param. Check screen in Utility mode, the image quality parameter settings
can be changed. It is possible to temporarily change the image quality parameters to
check the image quality. It is also possible to register the changed settings. For the
detailed procedures, refer to subsection 4.4.15 of the service manual (2D308-016EN).
Example of the Image Param. Check screen in Utility mode (fluoroscopy):

* For the recommended settings for the image quality parameters, refer to
subsection 29.20.2.1(1).
* Type DT is the settings for dynamic trace and "ADCF" is always selected
* Type RM is the settings for creating a mask image for fluoroscopy roadmap
(when "SUB" is set for the Default Mask of Fluoro Param) and "Linear" is
always selected (V4.22 or later).
945
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Example of the Image Param. Check screen in Utility mode (SNRF):

* For the recommended settings for the image quality parameters, refer to
subsection 29.20.3 (1).
* Type DT is the settings for dynamic trace.
* Type RM is the settings for creating a mask image for fluoroscopy roadmap
(when "SUB" is set for the Default Mask of Fluoro Param) (V4.22 or later).
946
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Setting mechanism
The setting mechanism for the image quality parameters is shown below.
(a) On the Image Param. Check screen in Utility mode, a combination of image quality
parameters can be selected from the existing 8 parameters; from pattern A to
pattern H.
(b) Patterns A to C and E to H can be assigned to the Cardiac1 Frontal (1st)/Cardiac2

Frontal (1st), Angio1 Frontal (1st)/Angio2 Frontal (1st), Cardiac1 Lateral
(2nd)/Cardiac2 Lateral (2nd), and Angio1 Lateral (2nd)/Angio2 Lateral (2nd)
parameter types. (Pattern D is the setting used for acquiring the image quality data
when the image processing is set to OFF). In the default setting, pattern C is used
for Cardiac and pattern A is used for Angio in V3.41 or earlier, while pattern H is
used for Cardiac and pattern G is used for Angio in V3.42 or later.
(c) Values for each parameter can be changed within the effective value range by
using the [Up/Down] button or by directly entering values.
* The above procedures are possible only at the service personnel level only.
(d) According to selection of Cardiac1/Cardiac2/Angio1/Angio2 in the upper section of

the Study Protocol setting screen in Utility mode, the parameters set on the Image
Param. Check screen are selected as the image quality parameters for the
corresponding study.
For example, on the Image Param. Check screen, when "H" has been set for
Cardiac1 and "G" has been set for Angio1, if "Cardiac1" is selected on the Study
Protocol screen, the Pattern "H" image quality parameter type is set in Study mode.
When "Angio1" is set, the Pattern "G" image quality parameter type is set.
(e) When the display WW/GL and spatial filter are set in the [Fluoroscopy] tab on the
Study Protocol screen, processing of the display WW/GL and the spatial filter can
be added to fluoroscopic images to which the above image quality parameters have
been applied.
If the user requires fine adjustment to achieve the desired image quality, use this
setting.
* The user can also change the contents of the settings on the Study Protocol
screen in Utility mode.
Service setting
Fluoroscopic Fluoroscopic
Image processing parameter setting Display window
images monitor
Parameter types (A to H) Spatial filter
Detailed parameters (The display gamma
is fixed.)
Cardiac Set the type.
Angio Set the type.
Study protocol setting

Selecting the parameters for Cardiac/Angio
Setting the display window/spatial filter
Setting by the user/application specialist
947
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.20.2 Fluoroscopic image quality parameters
(1) Recommended settings and arrangement methods
(a) Recommended settings

st nd
Cardiac1 Frontal (1 ) "H" "ADCF" Lateral (2 ) "H" "ADCF"
st nd
Cardiac2 Frontal (1 ) "C" "Linear" Lateral (2 ) "C" "Linear"
st nd
Angio1 Frontal (1 ) "G" "ADCF" Lateral (2 ) "G" "ADCF"
st nd
Angio2 Frontal (1 ) "A" "Linear" Lateral (2 ) "A" "Linear"
Parameter Type A C G H DT RM
Low Frequency Image (Fluoro) 3 3 3 3 1 3
Low Frequency Image (DA) 3 3 3 3 3 3
CENH 2 3 1 1 1 2
HLCENH 2 2 0 [2]* 2 2 2
ASP LUT No. 109 109 39 [19]* 39 [19]* 39 109
ASP LUT No. (Processed Fluo) 109 109 19 19 19 109
DR Compression LUT No. (Fluoro) 4 1 3 3 1 4
DR Compression LUT No. (DA) 4 1 3 3 0 4
Recursive Coef. (Fluoro) 7 7 1 1 1 7
Recursive Coef. (Processed Fluoro) 7 7 1 1 1 7
RFLT Live Coef.  15f/s 10 10 0 [10]* 0 5 10
: Fluoro < 15f/s 10 10 0 [10]* 0 5 10
RFLT Live Coef.  15f/s 20 20 20 20 10 20
: Processed Fluoro < 15f/s 20 20 20 20 10 20
RFLT Background Coef.  15f/s 60 60 0 [10]* 0 40 60
: Fluoro < 15f/s 60 60 0 [10]* 0 40 60
RFLT Background Coef.  15f/s 80 80 80 80 60 80
AGC RFLT Live  15f/s 60 60 60 60 60 60
: Fluoro < 15f/s 60 60 60 60 60 60
AGC RFLT Live  15f/s 60 60 60 60 60 60
AGC RFLT Background  15f/s 85 85 85 85 85 85
: Fluoro < 15f/s 80 80 80 80 80 80
AGC RFLT Background  15f/s 90 90 90 90 90 90
Maximum AGC 16 16 16 16 16 16
Eigen Filter (Fluoro) 32 12 10 10 12 32
Eigen Filter (Processed Fluoro) 11 11 10 10 10 10
Eigen Filter (512_DA) 0 11 11 12 [11]* 11 0
Eigen Filter (1024_DA) 0 11 11 12 [11]* 11 0
Eigen Filter Coef. For DA:ON/OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF
FLTADR 1 2 1 0 [1]* 0 1
FLTADR (Processed Fluoro) 1 1 1 1 1 1
DDCF/ADCF Linear ADCF (ADCF) (Linear)
GL (Study Protocol) 0 0 0 0 0
WW (Study Protocol) 4095 4095 4095 4095 4095
Spatial Filter Type/Level (Study Protocol) (F20) (F10) (F20) (H3) (H3)
*) The values in square brackets are the recommended settings for systems
for the USA.
948
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) Settings for cardiac systems
The recommended default setting is "ADCF/type H".
In the settings, the background is smoothened to improve device contrast.

Therefore, higher noise may be observed during fluoroscopy. To reduce the noise,
change the parameters as described below.
<1> Eigen filter (Fluoro) --- Fluoroscopic images only
Direction in which the contrast

enhancement level is reduced
(noise reduction direction)
28 29 20 21 22 23 24 25 Direction in which the guidewire

38 39 30 31 32 33 34 35 contrast enhancement level is reduced
(noise reduction direction)
18 19 10 11 12 13 14 15
The noise is reduced in the order "31"  "11"  "10".
<2> FLTADR --- Fluoroscopic images only

Fluoroscopic image enhancement filter. Noise is reduced in the order
"3"  "2"  "0"  "1".
(Note that the order is different from the descending order.)
<3> CENH --- Processing applied to both fluoroscopic images and DA images
The image contrast is enhanced by applying a gain to the high-frequency
images (signal images). The high-frequency images are obtained by
subtracting the low-frequency images (background images) from the original
images.
Noise is reduced in the order "3"  "2"  "1"  "0".
<4> RFLT Live Coef. (Fluoro) --- Fluoroscopic images only

Recursive filter coefficient for fluoroscopic images. When this filter is used,
there is a trade-off between the noise and the image lag.
As the values increase in the order "10"  "15"  "20", the noise reduces, but
the image lag increases.
<5> Eigen filter (1024_DA)

When "Eigen filter coef. for DA" is set to ON, the Eigen filter for DA is set to
ON. The setting procedure is same as for fluoroscopy. Refer to <1>.
When "0" is set, the Eigen filter is set to OFF.
When the Eigen filter for DA is OFF, artifacts due to the Eigen filter reduce, but
the background noise increases.
<6> Spatial filter for display

Change the spatial filter setting on the study protocol setting screen for
fluoroscopy or on the acquisition program setting screen for radiography.
The setting can also be changed during the study.
Fluoroscopy: As the value becomes smaller ("H3"  "H1"), the noise reduces.
DA: Noise is reduced in the order "H30"  "H20"  "H10".
949
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(c) Settings for Angio systems
The recommended default setting is "ADCF/type G".
However, if fluoroscopy roadmapping is to be used, the recommended default

setting is "Linear/type A".
<Fluoroscopic setting for Angio systems>
<1> In the "ADCF/type G" setting, the background is smoothened to improve

device contrast in the same manner as for the standard cardiac setting.
Since the contrast is increased, higher noise levels in fluoroscopy may be

observed, but devices can be seen more clearly.
<2> In the "Linear/type A" setting, the contrast is relatively low, but noise levels are
also low.
<Setting for improving the image quality in fluoroscopy roadmapping>
The details of the settings are described below.
<1> When fluoroscopy roadmapping is performed, noise and artifacts are reduced
at the "Linear/type A" setting compared to the "ADCF/type G" setting.
<2> When a fluoroscopic image is also to be displayed during fluoroscopy

roadmapping, image processing during fluoroscopy roadmapping can be set
to ON as the service setting. Note, however, that noise levels in fluoroscopy
roadmap images are slightly increased. To improve image quality, therefore,
this setting should remain OFF.
<3> The image quality in DSA Sub Mask is superior to that in Fluoroscopic Peak
Mask.
<4> If the "ADCF/type G" setting has been used to improve the fluoroscopic image
quality, set a lower contrast value in the parameters to reduce noise in
fluoroscopy roadmapping.
950
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Outline of each parameter
(a) Linear setting
Item Effective input data Standard setting value

Low frequency image creation (for fluoroscopy) 0 to 15 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Low-frequency image creation (for DA) 0 to 15 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
CENH 0 to 3 1, 2, 3
HLCENH 0 to 2 0, 1, 2
ASP LUT No. 0 to 127 109
ASP LUT No. (Processed fluoroscopy) 0 to 127 109
DR compression LUT No. (for fluoroscopy) 0 to 5 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
DR compression LUT No. (for DA) 0 to 5 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Recursive filter coefficient Normal fluoroscopy 0 to 7 2 to 7
combination ratio
Processed fluoroscopy 0 to 7
Simple RFLT live Normal fluoroscopy  15 f/s 0 [%] to 99 [%] 5 to 40
coefficient (weak)
Normal fluoroscopy < 15 f/s 0 [%] to 99 [%]
Processed fluoroscopy  15 f/s 0 [%] to 99 [%]
Processed fluoroscopy < 15 f/s 0 [%] to 99 [%]
Simple RFLT background Normal fluoroscopy  15 f/s 0 [%] to 99 [%] 70 to 90
coefficient (strong)
AGC RFLT live coefficient Normal fluoroscopy  15 f/s 0 [%] to 99 [%] 50 to 60
AGC RFLT background Normal fluoroscopy  15 f/s 0 [%] to 99 [%] 70 to 90
coefficient (strong)
Maximum AGC 1 to 16 8, 16
Eigen filter coefficient (fluoroscopy) 0 to 127 0, 10, 11, 12, 20, 21,
22, 30, 31, 32
Eigen filter coefficient (Processed fluoroscopy) 0 to 127 0, 10, 11, 12, 18, 19,
30, 31, 32, 38, 39
Eigen filter coefficient (512_DA) 0 to 127 0, 10, 11, 12
ON/OFF of the Eigen filter for DA ON/OFF ON, OFF
FLTADR (spatial filter coefficient) 0 to 3 0, 1, 2, 3
FLTADR (spatial filter coefficient, processed fluoroscopy) 0 to 3 0, 1, 2, 3
951
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Item Selection/input item Setting

Linear/ADCF setting Linear / ADCF(Default) Radio button
* For Infinix-i series systems, image processing types shown in boldface and
underlined also apply to DA/one-shot images.
<1> Low Frequency Image (Fluoroscopy) (Creation of low-frequency image for

fluoroscopy)
Select the unsharpness filter coefficient. This is applied to normal

fluoroscopy/processed fluoroscopy.
Range: 1 (high enhancement frequency (narrower enhancement width)) to 6

(low enhancement frequency (wider enhancement width))
<2> Low Frequency Image (DA) (Creation of low-frequency image for radiography)
Select the unsharpness filter coefficient. The coefficient can be applied to

images acquired from DA/one-shot radiography.

<3> CENH
Coefficient that changes the entire strength of the ASP (image enhancement
filter). This also applies to DA images, not only to fluoroscopic images. Even
if the coefficient is the same, image enhancement is greater for fluoroscopic
images than for DA images.
Setting Contrast enhancement

0 No enhancement
1 Weak
2 Medium
3 Strong
For DA images, contrast enhancement without the frequency characteristics

are applied.
For fluoroscopic images, in addition to contrast enhancement equivalent to

CENH, ASP enhancement with the frequency characteristics is added.
* When a DR Compression LUT of "1" to "3" is selected, contrast

enhancement equivalent to fluoroscopy is also applied to DA images.
Contrast enhancement is strengthened by a factor of 1.1 for fluoroscopic
images and DA images.
952
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<4> HLCENH
Coefficient for changing the enhancement of bright areas. This coefficient can
be applied to fluoroscopic images and images acquired by DA/one-shot
radiography.
Value Contrast enhancement of bright parts

0 Low
1 Medium
2 High (standard setting for Linear)
<5> ASP LUT No.
ASP LUT No. (Processed fluoroscopy)
The ASP LUT No. is fixed to "109". In this setting, artifacts do not occur
regardless of the DR LUT.
<6> DR Compression LUT No. (Fluoroscopy)

DR Compression LUT No. (DA)
In background image compression, areas that are too bright are compressed
and the brightness level for black areas is increased.
Compression for the black areas is linked with the tube voltage. Therefore,
the compression table has been changed so that the brightness is increased
to suppress the excessive blackness if the tube voltage is low, or the
brightness is decreased to maintain the contrast if the tube voltage is high.
Setting Compression of background images

0 No compression
1 Black areas : Weak compression,
White areas : Strong compression
"0"
2 Black areas : No compression, "3"
"4"
White areas : Strong compression "1" "2" "5"
3 Black areas : No compression,
White areas : Medium compression "4" "5"
"1"
The slope decreases at a higher point. "0" "2" "3"
4 Black areas : Medium compression
White areas : Medium compression
5 Black areas : Medium compression
White areas : Strong compression
953
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<7> Recursive Coef. (Fluoroscopy) (Recursive filter coefficient combination ratio:

Normal fluoroscopy)
Recursive filter coefficient for movement detection that changes the recursive
filter coefficient combination ratio for moving sections and the still background
on images. The ratio also changes corresponding to the brightness.
Ratio of the
Setting
background image
0 0.25 - 0.25 (Effect: weak) ....... No movement detection
1 0.25 - 0.33
5 0.25 - 0.5 (Effect: strong) ..... Application of the recursive filter is

strong for still areas.
For the type where the brightness dependency is added to the combination
ratio, application of the recursive filter is increased in dark areas.
6 0.25 - 0.52 (0.34) (Effect: Medium) ................ Dynamic image detection +

With bright dependency
7 0.25 - 0.70 (0.40) (Effect: Medium strong) ..... Dynamic image detection +
With bright dependency
<8> Recursive Coef. (Processed Fluoro) (Recursive filter coefficient combination

ratio: Processed fluoroscopy)
Recursive filter coefficient for movement detection in processed fluoroscopy

(such as fluoroscopic subtraction).
In normal cases, a stronger coefficient is set than for normal fluoroscopy.
<9> RFLT Live Coef. Fluoro  15 f/s (Simple RFLT live coefficient: Normal
fluoroscopy with 15 f/s or more)
RFLT Live Coef. Fluoro < 15 f/s (Simple RFLT live coefficient: Normal
fluoroscopy with under 15 f/s)
Recursive filter coefficient that is multiplied for fluoroscopic signal images.

When the value is increased, application of the recursive filter becomes
stronger and noise is reduced, but the after-image is increased. The value
indicates the inclusion ratio of previous images.
Values can be changed for two pulse rates. Normally, set the same values.
Setting Recursive Noise reduction After-image

10 Weak Small effect Small
   
40 Strong Large effect Large
954
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<10> RFLT Live Coef. Processed Fluoro  15 f/s (Simple RFLT live coefficient:
Processed fluoroscopy)
RFLT Live Coef. Processed Fluoro < 15 f/s (Simple RFLT live coefficient:
To improve the image quality in fluoroscopic subtraction, a stronger coefficient

is set than for normal fluoroscopy.
<11> RFLT Background Coef. Fluoro  15 f/s (Simple RFLT background coefficient:
Normal fluoroscopy)
RFLT Background Coef. Fluoro < 15 f/s (Simple RFLT background coefficient:
Normal fluoroscopy)
Recursive filter coefficient that is multiplied for background fluoroscopic

images. Set larger values normally.
Values can be changed for two pulse rates. Set a smaller value for the low
pulse rate.
Setting Recursive Noise reduction After-image

   
<12> RFLT Background Coef. Processed Fluoro  15 f/s (Simple RFLT background
coefficient: Processed fluoroscopy)
RFLT Background Coef. Processed Fluoro < 15 f/s (Simple RFLT background
Set the same value as for normal fluoroscopy, or set a larger value.
<13> AGC RFLT Live Coef. Fluoro (AGC RFLT live coefficient: Normal fluoroscopy)
AGC RFLT Live Coef. Processed Fluoro (AGC RFLT live coefficient:
AGC RFLT Background Coef. Fluoro (AGC RFLT background coefficient:

Normal fluoroscopy)
AGC RFLT Background Coef. Processed Fluoro (AGC RFLT background

When the patient thickness is greater than the specified thickness for the
maximum X-ray conditions, the AGC is set to ON. Since the recursive filter is
changed linked with the AGC gain, set the recursive filter coefficient to
"Maximum AGC".
<14> Maximum AGC
AGC gain when the recursive filter coefficient reaches the maximum at the
above AGC.
"16" : Default setting
"8" : Application of the recursive filter becomes stronger at an early stage.
955
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<15> Eigen Filter Coef. (Fluoroscopy)
Eigen Filter Coef. (Processed fluoroscopy)
The recommended setting for "Cardiac" is "12" or "11".
The contrast becomes stronger in order of 10 < 11 < 12. For parameters from
20 to 22, noise enhancement is suppressed but enhancement of the signal is
strengthened relative to the parameters from 10 to 12. The contrast becomes
stronger in order of 20 < 21 < 22.
For "30-32", the signal strength is the medium setting relative to "10-12" and
"20-22".
The recommended setting for Angio is "32".
The coefficient when "0" is set is the same as when the Eigen filter is set to
OFF. However, if "0" is set, contrast is enhanced. If the Eigen filter is to be
set to OFF, decrease the CENH value (for example, set CENH to "0").
Contrast enhancement
Weak Strong
18 < 19 < 10 < 11 < 12 < 13 < 14 < 15 Weak

38 < 39 < 30 < 31 < 32 < 33 < 34 < 35 Signal enhancement
28 < 29 < 20 < 21 < 22 < 23 < 24 < 25 Strong
<16> Eigen filter coefficient (512_DA)
Eigen filter coefficient (1024_DA)
Eigen filter coefficient for DA: ON/OFF
For DA, these three items should be set to "11" or "ON".
The coefficient can be changed in the same manner as for fluoroscopy.
Weak Strong
18 < 19 < 10 < 11 < 12 < 13 < 14 < 15 Weak

28 < 29 < 20 < 21 < 22 < 23 < 24 < 25 Strong
956
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<17> FLTADR
FLTADR (Processed fluoroscopy)
Spatial filter processing Set "2" to increase the enhancement level.

Set "1" to reduce the enhancement level.
The enhancement level changes in the order "1", "0", "2", "3".
<a> For types A to E, noise particles may become too large at M2 and M3 for
making the blood vessel diameter constant in the examined region.
For types F and G, noise appears to be reduced at M2 and M3 because

the enhancement frequency is fixed.
 For types A to E, unnatural noise patterns may be shown when

enhancement is increased. However, for types F and G, natural
enhancement is possible using the circular filter.
The enhancement level is greater for type H than for type F.
The features of each type are as shown below.
NONE : The spatial filter is set to OFF.
A1 to 99 : Image enhancement
B1 to 99 : Image enhancement + low-pass filter
C1 to 99 : Low-pass filter
D1 to 99 : Low-pass filter for which high-frequency signals are

reduced compared to type C
E1 to 99 : Image enhancement for which the enhancement level is

greater than that for type A
F1 to 99 : Image enhancement for which the enhancement frequency

is fixed
G1 to 99 : Image enhancement for which the enhancement frequency

is greater than that for type F
H1 to 99 : Image enhancement for which low-frequency

enhancement is greater than that for type F.
957
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(c) ADCF setting
To change the setting to Linear, perform setting as follows.
 On the Image Param. Check screen in Utility mode, change the setting to Linear
in the Linear/ADCF setting area.
 On the Image Param. Check screen in Utility mode, change the image quality
parameter combination to pattern "C" or "A".

Low-frequency image creation (for fluoroscopy) 0 to 15 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Low-frequency image creation (for DA) 0 to 15 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
CENH 0 to 3 1, 2, 3
HLCENH 0 to 2 0, 1, 2
ASP LUT No. 0 to 127 0 to 99
ASP LUT No. (Processed fluoroscopy) 0 to 127 0 to 99
DR compression LUT No. (for fluoroscopy) 0 to 5 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
DR compression LUT No. (for DA) 0 to 5 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Recursive filter coefficient Normal fluoroscopy 0 to 7 0 to 5
combination ratio Processed fluoroscopy 0 to 7
Simple RFLT live Normal fluoroscopy  15 f/s 0 [%] to 99 [%] 0 to 40
coefficient (weak Normal fluoroscopy < 15 f/s 0 [%] to 99 [%]
coefficient)
Simple RFLT background Normal fluoroscopy  15 f/s 0 [%] to 99 [%] 0 to 90
coefficient (strong Normal fluoroscopy < 15 f/s 0 [%] to 99 [%]
coefficient)
AGC RFLT live coefficient Normal fluoroscopy  15 f/s 0 [%] to 99 [%] 0 to 60
AGC RFLT background Normal fluoroscopy  15 f/s 0 [%] to 99 [%] 50 to 90
coefficient (strong Normal fluoroscopy < 15 f/s 0 [%] to 99 [%]
coefficient)
Maximum AGC 1 to 16 8, 16
Eigen filter coefficient (fluoroscopy) 0 to 127 0, 10, 11, 12, 20, 21,
22, 30, 31, 32
Eigen filter coefficient (Processed fluoroscopy) 0 to 127 0, 10, 11, 12, 18, 19,
30, 31, 32, 38, 39,
Eigen filter coefficient for DA: ON/OFF ON/OFF ON, OFF
958
No. 2J308-036EN*I

FLTADR (spatial filter coefficient) 0 to 3 0, 1, 2, 3
FLTADR (spatial filter coefficient, processed fluoroscopy) 0 to 3 0, 1, 2, 3
Item Selection/input item Setting

Linear/ADCF setting Linear/ADCF Radio button
(Default)
* The fluoroscopic image processing types shown in boldface and underlined also
apply to DA/one-shot images.
* When fluoroscopy roadmapping is used, Linear is recommended instead of
ADCF (refer to subsection 29.20.2. (1) (c)).
<1> Low Frequency Image (Fluoroscopy) (Creation of low-frequency image for

fluoroscopy)
fluoroscopic images (including images acquired from fluoroscopic processing).
<2> Low Frequency Image (DA) (Creation of low-frequency image for radiography)
images acquired from DA/one-shot radiography.
<3> CENH
Coefficient for changing the enhancement for the whole ASP (image
enhancement filter). The coefficient can be applied to images acquired by
DA/one-shot radiography as well as fluoroscopic images. The enhancement
of the fluoroscopic image is equal to that of the image acquired by DA.
Value Contrast enhancement

0 No enhancement
1 Low
2 Middle
3 High
Contrast enhancement (without frequency characteristics) is performed for

images acquired by DA. ASP enhancement (with frequency characteristics)
as well as contrast enhancement equivalent to CENH are performed for
fluoroscopic images.
* For ADCF setting, contrast enhancement equivalent to that for fluoroscopic
images is applied to DA images regardless of the LUT No. setting (LUT0 to
LUT5).
959
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<4> HLCENH
Coefficient for changing the enhancement of bright areas. This coefficient can
be applied to fluoroscopic images and images acquired by DA/one-shot
radiography.
Value Contrast enhancement of bright parts

0 Low (standard setting for Angio)
1 Medium
2 High (standard setting for Cardiac and Linear)
<5> ASP LUT No.
ASP LUT No. (Processed fluoroscopy)
For ADCF setting, it is recommended that the ASP LUT No. be set to "39".
Ten's place: Coefficient determining the average contrast level
One's place: Coefficient determining the brightness level
When the contrast level is increased, the image sharpness and image noise
are both increased.
The brightness level is normally set so that the contrast enhancement of dark
areas is weak and the contrast enhancement of bright areas is strong. It is
therefore recommended that "9" be set.
Setting ASP enhancement

9 Weak
19
29
39
49
59 Strong (increased by setting to 69, 79, 89, or 99)
<6> DR Compression LUT No. (Fluoroscopy)

DR Compression LUT No. (DA)
In image background compression, areas that are too bright are compressed
and the brightness level for black areas is increased.
For ADCF setting, "3" is the standard setting for cardiac and angio. Changes
to setting values to 2 to 4 are linked with the tube voltage and vary with the
compression curve. The brightness of black areas is reduced as the tube
voltage increases.
The set value "0" is for dynamic trace. The compression level is the same as
that for "1" in the area below the ABC operating point and the compression
level is higher than "1" in the area above the ABC operating point.
960
No. 2J308-036EN*I
ADCF setting
Setting Compression of the image background
0 Strong compression
(particularly bright area)
1 Strong compression (flat image)
2 
3 Medium compression
4 
5 Weak compression (brightness of black
areas reduced)
<7> Recursive Coef. (Fluoroscopy) (Recursive filter coefficient combination ratio:

Normal fluoroscopy)
Recursive filter coefficient for movement detection that changes the recursive
filter coefficient combination ratio for moving sections and the still background
on images. The ratio also changes corresponding to the brightness.
ADCF setting described below. The standard setting is "1".
Setting Ratio to the

background
image
0 0.25-0.52 Weak image lag, small noise reduction effect

(strong movement detection, weak noise
reduction when the background image is dark)
1 0.25-0.7 Weak image lag, small noise reduction effect

(strong movement detection, strong noise
2 0.25-0.52 
3 0.25-0.7 
4 0.25-0.52 Stronger image lag, large noise reduction effect

(weak movement detection, weak noise
5 0.25-0.7 Stronger image lag, large noise reduction effect

(weak movement detection, strong noise
6 0.25-0.52 Support of ADCF setting ratio (for test)
7 0.25-0.7 Support of ADCF setting ratio (for test)
Brightness dependency is added to all combination ratios.
961
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<8> Recursive Coef. (Processed Fluoroscopy) (Recursive filter coefficient

combination ratio: Processed fluoroscopy)
Recursive filter coefficient for movement detection in processed fluoroscopy

(such as fluoroscopic subtraction)
In normal cases, a stronger coefficient than for normal fluoroscopy is set.
<9> RFLT Live Coef. Fluoro  15 f/s (Simple RFLT live coefficient: Normal
fluoroscopy with 15 f/s or more)
RFLT Live Coef. Fluoro  15 f/s (Simple RFLT live coefficient: Normal
fluoroscopy with under 15 f/s)
Recursive filter coefficient that is multiplied for fluoroscopic signal images.

When the value is increased, application of the recursive filter becomes
stronger and noise is reduced, but the image lag is increased. The value
indicates the inclusion ratio of previous images.
Values can be changed for two pulse rates. Normally, set the same values.
Setting Recursive Noise reduction Image lag

   
<10> RFLT Live Coef. Processed Fluoro  15 f/s (Simple RFLT live coefficient:
RFLT Live Coef. Processed Fluoro  15 f/s (Simple RFLT live coefficient:
To improve the image quality in fluoroscopic subtraction, a stronger coefficient

is set than for normal fluoroscopy.
<11> RFLT Background Coef. Fluoro  15 f/s (Simple RFLT background coefficient:
Normal fluoroscopy)
RFLT Background Coef. Fluoro  15 f/s (Simple RFLT background coefficient:

Normal fluoroscopy)
Recursive filter coefficient that is multiplied for background fluoroscopic

images. Set larger values normally.
Values can be changed for two pulse rates. Set a smaller value for the low
pulse rate.
Setting Recursive Noise reduction Image lag

   
962
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<12> RFLT Background Coef. Processed Fluoro  15 f/s (Simple RFLT background
RFLT Background Coef. Processed Fluoro  15 f/s (Simple RFLT background

Set the same value as for normal fluoroscopy, or set a larger value.
<13> AGC RFLT Live Coef. Fluoro (AGC RFLT live coefficient: Normal fluoroscopy)
AGC RFLT Live Coef. Processed Fluoro (AGC RFLT live coefficient:
AGC RFLT Background Coef. Fluoro (AGC RFLT background coefficient:

Normal fluoroscopy)
AGC RFLT Background Coef. Processed Fluoro (AGC RFLT background

When the patient thickness is greater than the specified thickness for the
maximum X-ray conditions, the AGC is set to ON. Since the recursive filter is
changed linked with the AGC gain, set the recursive filter coefficient to
"Maximum AGC".
<14> Maximum AGC
AGC gain when the recursive filter coefficient reaches the maximum at the
above AGC.
"16" : Default setting

"8" : Application of the recursive filter becomes stronger at an early stage.
963
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<15> Eigen filter coefficient (fluoroscopy)
Eigen Filter Coef. (Processed fluoroscopy)
The recommended setting for "Cardiac" is "10".
The contrast becomes stronger in order of 10 < 11 < 12. For parameters from
20 to 22, noise enhancement is suppressed but enhancement of the signal is
strengthened relative to the parameters from 10 to 12. The contrast becomes
stronger in order of 20 < 21 < 22. For "30-32", the signal strength is the
medium setting relative to "10-12" and "20-22".
The recommended setting for "Angio" is "10".
When the Eigen filter is to be set to OFF, the coefficient should be set to "0"
and the CENH value should be decreased (for example, set CENH to "0").
Weak Strong
18 < 19 < 10 < 11 < 12 < 13 < 14 < 15 Weak

28 < 29 < 20 < 21 < 22 < 23 < 24 < 25 Strong
<16> Eigen filter coefficient (512_DA)
Eigen filter coefficient (1024_DA)
Eigen filter coefficient for DA: ON/OFF
The recommended settings for the Eigen filter for DA are "12" or "11" and
"ON".
The coefficient can be changed in the same manner as for fluoroscopy.
Weak Strong
18 < 19 < 10 < 11 < 12 < 13 < 14 < 15 Weak

28 < 29 < 20 < 21 < 22 < 23 < 24 < 25 Strong
964
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<17> FLTADR
FLTADR (Processed fluoroscopy)
Spatial filter processing Set "2" to increase the enhancement level.

Set "1" to reduce the enhancement level.
The enhancement level changes in the order "1", "0", "2", "3".
 For types A to E, noise particles may become too large at M2 and M3 for
making the blood vessel diameter constant in the examined region.
For types F and G, noise appears to be reduced at M2 and M3 because the

enhancement frequency is fixed.
 For types A to E, unnatural noise patterns may be shown when

enhancement is increased. However, for types F and G, natural
enhancement is possible using the circular filter.
The enhancement level of Type H is greater than that of type F.
The features of each type are as shown below.
NONE : The spatial filter is set to OFF.
A1 to 99 : Image enhancement
B1 to 99 : Image enhancement + low-pass
C1 to 99 : Low-pass filter
D1 to 99 : Low-pass filter for which high-frequency signals are reduced

compared to type C
E1 to 99 : Image enhancement for which the enhancement level is

greater than that for type A
F1 to 99 : Image enhancement for which the enhancement frequency is

fixed
G1 to 99 : Image enhancement for which the enhancement frequency is

greater than that for type F
H1 to 99 : Image enhancement for which low-frequency enhancement is

greater than that for type F
965
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.20.3 SNRF image quality parameters
(1) Recommended settings
Cardiac1 Frontal (1st) "H" "ADCF" Lateral (2nd) "H" "ADCF"

Cardiac2 Frontal (1st) "C" "Linear" Lateral (2nd) "C" "Linear"
Angio1 Frontal1 (1st) "G" "ADCF" Lateral (2nd) "G" "ADCF"
Angio2 Frontal (1st) "A" "Linear" Lateral (2nd) "A" "Linear"
Parameter Type A C G H DT RM
Fluoroscopy Ct 85 85 85 [95]* 85 [95]* 90 85
Cnsd 90 90 90 90 90 90
Cd 90 90 90 90 90 90
Vf 7 7 7 7 7 7
1 100 100 100 100 100 100
2 70 70 70 [80]* 70 [80]* 70 70
3 70 70 70 [80]* 70 [80]* 70 70
SNRF LUT 2 2 2 2 2 2
Processed Ct 85 85 85 85 85 85
Fluoroscopy Cnsd 90 90 90 90 90 90
Cd 90 90 90 90 90 90
Vf 7 7 7 7 7 7
1 100 100 100 100 100 100
2 80 80 80 80 80 80
3 80 80 80 80 80 80
SNRF LUT 2 2 2 2 2 2
DA Ct 85 85 85 85 85 85
Cnsd 90 90 90 90 90 90
Cd 90 90 90 90 90 90
Vf 7 7 7 7 7 7
1 100 100 100 100 100 100
2 70 70 70 70 80 70
3 70 70 70 70 80 70
SNRF LUT 2 2 2 2 2 2
OneShot Ct 85 85 85 85 85 85
Cnsd 90 90 90 90 90 90
Cd 90 90 90 90 90 90
Vf 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 100 100 100 100 100 100
2 80 80 80 80 80 80
3 80 80 80 80 80 80
SNRF LUT 2 2 2 2 2 2
DSA Ct 85 85 85 85 85 85
Cnsd 90 90 90 90 90 90
Cd 90 90 90 90 90 90
Vf 7 7 7 7 7 7
1 100 100 100 100 100 100
2 80 80 80 80 80 80
3 80 80 80 80 80 80
SNRF LUT 2 2 2 2 2 2
*) The values in square brackets are the recommended settings for systems for the USA.
966
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Description of each parameter
Items Descriptions Acceptable input data Standard-setting value

Ct Noise estimated correction 0 [%] to 100 [%] 70 to 100
Cnsd Estimated correction of 0 [%] to 100 [%] 70 to 100
exposure dose-dependent
noise
Cd Estimated correction of dark 0 [%] to 500 [%] 70 to 100
image noise
Vf Frame used 0 to 15 1, 3, 7, 11, 15
1 Application ratio for low- 0 [%] to 100 [%] 70 to 100
frequency filter image
2 Application ratio for 0 [%] to 100 [%] 50 to 100
intermediate frequency filter
image
3 Application ratio for high- 0 [%] to 100 [%] 50 to 100
frequency filter image
SNRF LUT Weighting coefficient 0 to 7 1, 2, 3
The following parameters are each set for fluoroscopy, processed fluoroscopy, DA,
one-shot, and DSA.
(a) Ct: Noise estimated correction
Correction is performed for the total value of dark image noise and noise
independent of the exposure dose. If the correction value is set to 0%, noise
reduction is not performed because the estimated noise value is 0 and pixels are
recognized as signals.
If the correction value is set to 100%, if movement is quick, low-contrast objects

may cause slight after-images.
In this case, lower the correction value. If the correction value is lowered too far,
noise grains can be seen on the image because the effectiveness of noise
reduction is decreased and large amplitude noise is recognized as signals.
(b) Cnsd: Estimated correction of exposure dose-dependent noise
Correction is performed for estimated value of exposure dose-dependent noise.

This coefficient is used to correct the estimated value of X-ray-dependent noise.
It does not affect dark parts.
(c) Cd: Estimated correction of dark image noise
This coefficient is used to correct noise, including noise arising in X-ray-

independent circuits. Filter effectiveness can be changed in dark parts by changing
this correction value.
967
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(d) Vf: Frame to be used and pixel to be compared
Frame to be used and pixel to be compared to determine the filter coefficient. 11

and 15 can be selected only for V4.22 or later.
1 : Latest frame
3 : Two images (the latest frame and the frame preceding it) are used.
7 : Three images (the latest frame and the two frames preceding it ) are used.
11 : Two images (the latest frame and the frame preceding it) are used .
(Comparison with fewer pixels)
15 : Three images (the latest frame and the two frames preceding it ) are used.
(Comparison with fewer pixels)
(e) 1: Application ratio for low-frequency filter image
This indicates the usage rate for filter image against an image reduced to a 64  64
pixel image. If this is set to 0%, the usage rate for filter image is set to 0% and
noise reduction is not performed.
(f) 2: Application ratio for intermediate frequency filter image
This indicates the usage ratio for a filter image against an image reduced to a
256  256 pixel image. If this is set to 0%, the usage ratio for filter image is set to
0% and noise reduction is not performed. If panning has been performed with
patterns in the background, dynamic images may not appear natural. To reduce
this, lower the value of the noise reduction coefficient. If the value is lowered, the
effectiveness of the noise reduction coefficient is reduced; however, unnatural
appearance is also reduced. For fluoroscopy, the appropriate setting value is 70%.
Set a higher usage ratio for low-noise images of objects with little movement.
It is recommended that the application ratio is set to 100% for DSA.
(g) 3: Application ratio for high-frequency filter image
This indicates the usage ratio for filter image against the original image (512  512
or 1024  1024). If this is set to 0%, the usage ratio for filter image is set to 0% and
noise reduction is not performed. If panning has been performed with patterns in
the background, dynamic images may not appear natural. To reduce this
unnaturalness, lower the value of the noise reduction coefficient. If the value is
lowered, the effectiveness of the noise reduction coefficient is reduced; however,
unnatural appearance is also reduced. For fluoroscopy, the appropriate setting
value is 70%. Set a higher usage ratio for low-noise images of objects with little
movement.
It is recommended that the application ratio is set to 100% for DSA.
(h) SNRF LUT: Weighting coefficient
This is a table to determine the filter weighting coefficients for each pixel. As the
table is set to increase (0, 1, 2, 3), the probability of noise reduction is high.
LUT has two systems, 0 to 3 and 4 to 7.
If the table is set to 0, it is likely that pixels are recognized as signals. As a result,
noise reduction is performed less frequently. If the table is set to a value from 4 to 7,
the range of criteria for recognizing a pixel as noise or signal is small compared with
that for which the table is set to a value from 0 to 3.
For that reason, there will be some appearance of unnaturalness.
It is recommended to set the table to 2.
968
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.21 Setting the Date Display Format
Set the date display format using the control panel and Utility menu. There are two types of date
display formats.
<Display format>
Setting 1 Setting 2
Patient registration 2004 2004
System date 5/6/2004 Thursday, May 06, 2004
Patient information (system monitor) 5/6/2004 Thursday, May 06, 2004
Patient information (in-room monitor) 5/6/2004 5/6/2004
Study Select List 5/6/2004 Thursday, May 06, 2004
Image Detail 5/6/2004 5/6/2004
Related information (system monitor) 5/6/2004 5/6/2004
Related information (in-room monitor) 5/6/2004 5/6/2004
Filming 5/6/2004 Thursday, May 06, 2004
MPPS 5/6/2004 Thursday, May 06, 2004
(1) Setting 1
(a) In Windows, select Control Panel  Regional Options  Date.
<1> Set M/d/yyyy for "Short date format".
<2> Set dddd, MMMM dd, yyyy for "Long date format".
(b) Select Utility  Site Setup  Date/Time Presets.
<1> Select "Short date format" for "Date Format".
(2) Setting 2
(a) In Windows, select Control Panel  Regional Options  Date.
<1> Set M/d/yyyy for "Short date format".
<2> Set dddd, MMMM dd, yyyy for "Long date format".
(b) Select Utility  Site Setup  Date/Time Presets.
<1> Select "Long date format" for "Date Format".
969
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.22 Setting the Automatic Label Name Issuance Rule for Media
Select the rule for automatically issuing the label names to CD-R and DVD-RAM from among the
following three types.
Type 1: TOSHIBA0001 to TOSHIBA0009, TOSHIBA000A to TOSHIBA000Z,

TOSHIBA0010 ……
Type 2: TOSHIBAA001 to TOSHIBAA999, TOSHIBAB000 to TOSHIBAB999,

TOSHIBAC000 ……
Type 3: TOSHIBA0001 to TOSHIBA0009, TOSHIBA0010 to TOSHIBA9999, TOSHIBA0001 ……
Type 1 is set as the default.
NOTE: If the rule for issuing numbers is changed, numbering will be initialized.
(2) On the service software screen, Select "Command Line" on the [Utils] tab.
(3) Select "Change Label Issue Type" in the Command List field and click the [Go] button.
The following setup tool is started.
(4) Select the desired type and click the [OK] button. The new setting is saved and the setup
tool is closed. The new setting becomes effective when the system is next started up.
Numbering will be initialized.
970
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.23 Setting the Frame-Advance Playback Condition Using the Jog
Frame feeding of dynamic images can be performed using the jog on the main console or the
review console.
Specify the value for "N" for "advance 1 frame by turning the jog N graduations".
The default setting is "advance 1 frame by turning the jog 1 graduation".
(2) Select "Command Line" on the [Utils] tab.
(3) Confirm that "Nt Command Interpreter" is selected in the Command List field. Then, enter
"F:\celeve\TxsSite\TxsSysDataMgr\ConsPara.ini" in the Parameter field.
(4) Click the [Go] button at the bottom of the screen to open the ini file.
(5) Edit the [Rate] key setting in the ExJog section.
[ExJog]
Start = 1
Rate = 1 <----
The value for the Rate key represents "N" for "advance 1 frame by turning the jog N
graduations".
For example, when "Rate = 10" is set, the cine image is advanced by a single frame for
every 10 steps of jog movement (that is, one jog rotation).
(6) When the setting has been changed, select File  Save to save the ini file.
(7) Select File  Exit to close the ini file.
(8) Terminate the service software. The changes become effective when the system is next
started up.
971
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.24 Fluo. PulseRate Select Processing
(1) Using the command line input function (provided as a service function), select "Fluo.
PulseRate Select" in the Command field to start the fluoroscopic pulse rate acquisition
selection tool. This tool allows independent fluoroscopic pulse rate changes (allows one-
touch setting of fluoroscopic pulse rates from the examination room menu or the console)
and can be used to set pulse rates for which one-touch setting is enabled.
The following setting dialog is displayed.
In the setting dialog, the rates that can be used (registered in the service setting) are
displayed.
If rates for which one-touch switching is enabled have already been set (located in the ini
file), check marks are placed in the checkboxes of the corresponding items.
Place/remove the check marks in/from the checkboxes to select the rates for which
one-touch switching can be used.
 Fluo Pulse Rate (SP/BP/DP: Tube1)

The setting in this frame applies to Tube 1 of the SP, BP (F/L), or DP system.
 Fluo Pulse Rate (DP: Tube2)
The setting in this frame applies to Tube 2 of the DP system.

This setting is not required for the SP system and BP system.
972
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) To apply the setting, click the [OK] button.
The following confirmation dialog is displayed.
When [Yes] is clicked in this dialog, rates for which one-touch switching is enabled are
written to the ini file. After writing is completed, the setting dialog is displayed again.
When [No] is clicked, writing to the ini file is not performed and the setting dialog is
displayed again.
(3) To terminate the fluoroscopic pulse rate acquisition selection tool, click the [Close] button.
The following confirmation dialog is displayed.
Click [Yes] in the dialog to terminate the tool.
When [No] is clicked, the setting dialog is displayed.
(4) Processing when an error occurs
One of the following dialogs is displayed when an error occurs.
 ini file read error
973
No. 2J308-036EN*I
 ini file write error
When [OK] is clicked in the error dialogs above, the contents of the setting dialog are
changed to those shown below.
Click [Close] to terminate this tool. After checking "F:\Celeve\TxsSite\TxsStudy\Study.ini",

perform setting again.
974
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.25 Changing the LIH Font
The character string "LIH" is displayed on the LIH image. The font size of this string can be
reduced.
(1) Start up the system as usual.

(2) Press [Ctrl] + [Alt] + [Delete] to display the following "System Reset" window.
Move the cursor to the blue bar and double-click the right mouse button.
(3) Click the [Cancel] button in the System Reset window to close this window.
(4) Move the cursor to the bottom of the window and press the Windows key on the keyboard to
display the task bar.
(5) Select "Specify the file name and execute". Enter "cmd.exe" and click [OK].
(6) When the DOS window opens, enter the following command and then move to F:\celeve\bin.
F:
cd F:\celeve\bin
(7) Execute "TxsLIHTextMaker" and check the LOID.
F:\Celeve\bin>txslihtextmaker
**********************************************************
* This tool will add CsaGraphicText on LIH image *
**********************************************************
*** image_LOID_for_LIH_Frontal is 5.0.21546 ***  Note this value (LOID on the F side).
deleteing old CsaImageOverlay 5.0.2167825.
deleteing old CsaGraphicFrame 5.0.2167823.
new CsaGraphicFrame(CsaGraphicText) 5.0.2169875 has been created.
new CsaImageOverlay 5.0.2169877 has been created.
Loid 5.0.21546 has been modified completely.
*** image_LOID_for_LIH_Lateral is 5.0.22572 ***  Note this values (LOID on the L side).
Hit enter to exit exit  Terminate "Txslihtextmaker".
F:\Celeve\bin>
F:\Celeve\bin>txslihtextmaker ss  Change the LIH font size.
975
No. 2J308-036EN*I
**********************************************************
* This tool will add CsaGraphicText on LIH image *
**********************************************************
Enter CsaImage Loid of LIH (only Enter to exit) : 5.0.21546  Enter the LOID that was entered
before.
Enter LIH strings (default=LIH) : LIH
Enter font size (default=64) : 32  Decrease this value.
Enter font taller (default=2) : 2 Enter these values even if
they are the same as the
Enter X position (default=0) : 0 default values.
Enter Y position (default=57) : 57
*** Loid is 5.0.21546 ***
Enter CsaImage Loid of LIH (only Enter to exit) :  To make changes for the L side, enter
the LOID for the L side.
Hit enter to exit
F:\Celeve\bin>
(8) Restart the system and start a study. Perform and terminate fluoroscopy and check the LIH
font size.
976
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.26 Correction for Virtual Collimation
In Virtual Collimation, the ends of the X-ray beam limiting device and compensation filters are
shown graphically. However, when operating the compensation filters, it is recommended that a
section located before the edge section (section thicker than the edge section) be displayed
graphically. In this case, perform adjustment to display the desired location of the wedge-shaped
section of the compensation filter.
Before starting this work, pixel size registration must be completed.
(1) Setting the edge imaging correction rate
Set the edge imaging correction rate (%) in TxsVirtualColliCmd.ini in

\celeve\TxsSite\TxsVirtualColliCmd. (Default: 0 (No correction))
[ImprovementOfGraphics]: Improvement of VirtualColli graphics (%)
Bla_800A_F_F1 = 0 0  BLA800A (F side) filter F1: A-side compensation rate (%),

B-side compensation rate (%)
Bla_800A_F_F3 = 0  BLA800A (F side) filter F3 compensation rate (%)
Bla_800A_L_F1 = 0 0  BLA800A (L side) filter F1: A-side compensation rate (%),
Bla_800A_L_F3 = 0  BLA800A (L side) filter F3 compensation rate (%)
Bla_800C_F_F1 = 0 0  BLA800C (F side) filter F1: A-side compensation rate (%),
Bla_800C_L_F1 = 0 0  BLA800C (L side) filter F1: A-side compensation rate (%),
Bla_900A_L_F3 = 0  BLA900A (L side) filter F3 compensation rate (%)
The actual compensation procedures are described in (a) to (d).
977
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(a) Example 1: BLA-800A edge imaging compensation

(These values are just examples. Do not use them as is.)
 F1 A-side edge imaging compensation

The correction value  is set as 10% of the distance between P3 and P2, and the
position corresponding to a distance of  from P3 toward P2 is set as the
compensation point P3'.
In the same manner, the position corresponding to a distance of  from P5 toward
P6 is set as the compensation point P5', and the position corresponding to a
distance of  from P4 toward P0 is set as the compensation point P4'. The broken
lines indicate the display position after compensation is performed.
 F1 B-side edge imaging compensation
The correction value  is set as 30% of the distance between P1 and Pm, and the
position corresponding to a distance of  from P1 toward Pm is set as the
In the same manner, the position corresponding to a distance of  from P7 toward
Pn is set as the compensation point P7'. The broken lines indicate the display
position after compensation is performed.
 Perform compensation for F2 A side and F2 B side in the same manner as for F1.
A side (compensation B side (compensation
rate: 20%) rate: 40%)
B side (compensation A side (compensation
rate: 30%) rate: 10%)
F1 F2
P1 P1' Pm P2 P2 Pm P1' P1
P3' P3'
P3 P3
P0 P4' P4 P4 P4' P0
P5 P5
P5' P5'
P7 P7' Pn P6 P6 Pn P7' P7
978
No. 2J308-036EN*I
 F3 edge imaging compensation
The correction value  is set as 20% of the distance between P1 and Pm, and the
position corresponding to a distance of  from P1 toward Pm is set as the
Pn is set as the compensation point P2', the position corresponding to a distance of
 from P4 toward Pm is set as the compensation point P4', and the position
corresponding to a distance of  from P3 toward Pn is set as the compensation
point P3'. The broken lines indicate the display position after compensation is
performed.
Compensation rate: 20%
P1 P2
P1' P2'
Pm Pn
P4' P3'
P4 P3
(b) Example 2: BLA-800C edge imaging compensation


The correction value  is set as 10% of the distance between Pq and P2, and the
position corresponding to a distance of  from P2 toward Pq is set as the
Ps is set as the compensation point P3', and the position corresponding to a
distance of  from P4 toward Pt is set as the compensation point P4'. The broken
The correction value  is set as 40% of the distance between P6 and Pr, and the
position corresponding to a distance of  from P6 toward Pr is set as the
compensation point P6'. The broken lines indicate the display position after
compensation is performed.
979
No. 2J308-036EN*I
A side (compensation B side (compensation

rate: 30%) rate: 20%)
B side (compensation A side (compensation
rate: 40%) rate: 10%)
F1 F2
P2' P2 P2 P2' Pq P1' P1
P1 Pq
P6 P6' Pr
Ps P3' P3
Pr P6' P6
P3 P3' Ps
P5 Pt P4' P4 P4 P4' Pt P5' P5
(c) Example 3: BLA-900A edge imaging compensation

The correction value  is set as 10% of the distance between P3 and P2, and the
position corresponding to a distance of  from P3 toward P2 is set as the
P6 is set as the compensation point P5', and the position corresponding to a
distance of  from P4 toward P0 is set as the compensation point P4'. The broken
The correction value  is set as 30% of the distance between P1 and Pm, and the
position corresponding to a distance of  from P1 toward Pm is set as the
In the same manner, the position corresponding to a distance of  from P7 toward
Pn is set as the compensation point P7'. The broken lines indicate the display
position after compensation is performed.
980
No. 2J308-036EN*I
B-side
(compensation rate: 40%)
B-side A-side
(compensation rate: 30%) (compensation rate: 20%)
A-side
F1 (compensation rate: 10%) F2
P1 P1' Pm P2 Pm P1' P1
P2
P3' P3'
P3 P3
P4' P4
P0
P4 P4'
P5
P5
P5'
P7 P7' Pn P5' Pn P7' P7
P6 P6
 F3 edge imaging compensation
The correction value  is set as 20% of the distance between P1 and Pm, and the
position corresponding to a distance of  from P1 toward Pm is set as the
Pn is set as the compensation point P2', the position corresponding to a distance of
 from P4 toward Pm is set as the compensation point P4', and the position
corresponding to a distance of  from P3 toward Pn is set as the compensation
point P3'. The broken lines indicate the display position after compensation is
performed.
Compensation rate: 20%
P1 P2
P1' P2'
Pm Pn
P4' P3'
P4 P3
981
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(d) BLA-900C edge imaging compensation
Bla_900C_F_F1 = 10 30  BLA900C (F side) filter F1: A-side compensation ratio (%),

B-side compensation ratio (%)
Bla_900C_F_F2 = 20 40  BLA900C (F side) filter F2: A-side compensation ratio (%),
B-side compensation ratio (%)
(These values are only examples. Do not use them as is.)
The correction value a is set as 10% of the length of the A-side edge, and the
location corresponding to a distance of a from P4 toward P0 is set as compensation
point P4'. P3 and P5 are recalculated based on the edge length after compensation
is performed and are set as compensation points P3' and P5', respectively. The
broken lines indicate the display position after compensation is performed.
The correction value b is set as 30% of the length of the B-side edge, and the
location corresponding to a distance of b from P1 toward Pm is set as
In the same manner, the position corresponding to a distance of b from P7 toward
Pn is set as compensation point P7'. The broken lines indicate the display position
after compensation is performed.
982
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) After editing is performed, save the file (the previous file is overwritten) and then terminate
the processing.
(3) Reset the software.
(4) For Virtual Collimation, start a study using a study protocol in which the display setting of
the X-ray beam limiting device and the compensation filter is set to ON. Perform and
terminate fluoroscopy and then slightly move the X-ray beam limiting device. The X-ray
beam limiting device and the compensation filter are graphically displayed on the
fluoroscopic LIH image. Since the X-ray beam limiting device was moved after terminating
fluoroscopy, a shift may occur between the X-ray beam limiting device image on the
fluoroscopic LIH image and the graphic. However, since the compensation filter was not
moved after terminating fluoroscopy, the compensation filter image on the fluoroscopic LIH
image and the graphic match.
(5) Visually compare the compensation filter image on the fluoroscopic LIH image and the
graphically-displayed compensation filter.
If their edges almost match, setting is complete.
If the edges do not match, perform steps (1) to (3) again.
983
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.27 Default Settings for the Playback System (Image Playback Systems)
This subsection describes default settings for the image playback system (Exam, Review,
In-room monitor) and printing.
Perform default setting using the playback system default setting tool.
29.27.1 Starting up the tools
(1) Select "Command Line" on the [Utils] tab in the service software window.
(2) Select "Revs Presets Editor" in the Command List column and click the [Go] button.
The following setting tool (hereafter referred to as the "main screen") starts up.
984
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.27.2 Annotation
This subsection describes annotation setting in Exam and Review modes and in printing.
When the [Annotation] button in the main screen is clicked, the following annotation setting
screen (hereafter referred to as the "setting screen") is displayed.
(1) Setting the preferred line type
Select "Default Line" or "User Operation" (radio buttons for setting the preferred line type)
Default Line : Returns to the default line type.
User Operation : Retains the user operation.
(2) Setting the default line type
When the [Default Line Type] button is clicked, the line type list is displayed. Select a
line type from this list.
(3) Adding/deleting the register text list
To add text, enter character strings to be added to "Registered Item" (register text list
setting combo box) and click the [Add] button.
To delete text, select the target text from the combo box for setting the register text list
and click the [Delete] button.
(4) Setting the default font and font size
Select a font for "Font" (default font selection combo box) and select a font size for "Font
Size" (default font size selection combo box).
(5) Saving/resetting the setting
Clicking the [OK] button saves the setting and closes the setting screen.
Clicking the [Cancel] button closes the setting screen without saving the setting.
Clicking the [Reset] button returns to the setting when the setting screen was displayed.
985
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.27.3 Calibration
This subsection describes calibration setting in Exam and Review modes.

When the [Calibration] button in the main screen is clicked, the following calibration setting
screen (hereafter referred to as the setting screen) is displayed.
(1) Setting the auto calibration type that is selected automatically

Select "PID" or "ARP" (radio buttons for setting default type).
986
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Setting the ARP calibration default size
Set a size for "ARP Default Size" (spin box for setting the ARP default size).
(3) Setting the calibration object indication method that is selected automatically
Select "Distance", "Sphere", or "Catheter" (radio buttons for setting the default indication
method).
987
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(4) Setting the calibration object size-setting method with the 2-point indication method that
is selected automatically
Choose "Select Size" or "Free" (radio buttons for setting the default calibration object
size-setting method).
(5) Setting the default calibration object size with the 2-point indication method
Select a size for "Default Select Size" (combo box for setting the default calibration object
size with the 2-point indication method).
988
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(6) Setting the default size with the circular indication method
Select "Diameter" or "Volume" (combo box for setting the default size setting method).
(7) Setting the default size setting method with the diameter indication method
Select "Diameter" or "Free" (combo box for setting the default size setting method).
989
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(8) Setting the default diameter size with the diameter indication method
Select a size for "Default Diameter" (combo box for setting the default diameter size with
the diameter indication method).
(9) Setting the default size with the volume indication method
Directly enter a value for "Default Volume Size" (text box for the default size) and press
[Enter] on the keyboard.
990
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(10) Setting the default catheter size setting method
Select "Catheter Size" or "Free" (radio buttons for the default setting method).
(11) Setting the default catheter size
Select a size for "Default Fr Size" (combo box for entering the default catheter size).
991
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(12) Editing the list for selecting the calibration object size with 2-point indication method
(a) Click the [Size List] button (for the list for selecting the calibration object size with
2-point indication method).
(b) The following list-editing screen is displayed.
(c) The order of the list can be changed using the [Top], [Up], [Down], and [Bottom]
buttons.
To add a value to the list, enter a value for "Size (mm)" (size entry text box) and
click the [Add] button. To delete values from the list, select the target value from
the list and click the [Delete] button.
(d) Clicking the [OK] button sets the changed contents and closes the editing screen.
Clicking the [Cancel] button resets the changed contents and closes the editing
screen.
992
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(13) Editing the list for selecting the calibration object size with diameter indication method
(a) Click the [Diameter List] button (for the list for selecting the calibration object size
with diameter indication method).
buttons.
To add a value to the list, enter a value for "Diameter (mm)" (size entry edit box)
and click the [Add] button. To delete values from the list, select the target value
from the list and click the [Delete] button.
screen.
993
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(14) Editing the catheter size selection list
(a) Click the [Size List] button (for catheter size selection list).
buttons.
To add a value to the list, enter a value for "Size (Fr)" (size entry text box) and click
the [Add] button. To delete values from the list, select the target value from the list
and click the [Delete] button.
screen.
994
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(15) Setting the permissible range for automatic application of the CF value
Set a range for "AutoCF Tolerance Level" using the setting slider bar and the spin box.
Clicking the [Reset] button returns to the original setting when the setting screen was
displayed.
995
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.27.4 Context menu
This subsection describes context menu setting in Exam and Review modes.
When the [Context Menu] button in the default main screen is clicked, the following context
setting screen (hereafter referred to as the "setting screen") is displayed.
(1) Adding/deleting the display items
Each context menu item can be moved using the [], [], [], and [] buttons.
Move the display group to be displayed in the context menu to "Selected Menus".
Move the display group not to be displayed in the context menu to "Available Menus".
Methods for moving items
Move the selected item to the display side : Click the [] button.
Move all the selected items to the display side : Click the [] button.
Move the selected item to the non-display side : Click the [] button.
Move all the selected item to the non-display side : Click the [] button.
displayed.
996
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.27.5 Customization of the function buttons
This subsection describes customization of the function buttons in Exam and Review modes.
When the [Customize] button on the main screen is clicked, the following customization screen
(hereinafter referred to as the "setting screen") for the function buttons is displayed.
997
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(1) Selecting the target location
Select the [Exam] or [Review] tab and select the [Tool1], [Tool2], [Tool3], or [Tool4] tab to
select the target location for the function.
998
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Adding/deleting display tabs
To add a display tab, click the [Add] button. To delete a display tab, click the [Delete]
button. Note that up to four tabs can be displayed. If the Tool4 tab has already been
displayed on the screen, no tabs can be added.
999
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Assignment of functions
Click the desired button to which the function is to be assigned and then click the desired
function button in the "Function List".
It is possible to assign the same function to multiple buttons.
It is also possible to change assignments for multiple buttons.
Note that a yellow function button in the "Function List" indicates that the function is
assigned to any of the display tabs.
(4) Saving/resetting the settings
Clicking the [OK] button saves the settings and closes the setting screen.
Clicking the [Cancel] button closes the setting screen without saving the settings.
Clicking the [Reset] button restores the original settings (the settings when the setting
screen was opened).
Clicking the [All Reset] button sets all the tabs to the current information of the
initialization file.
1000
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.27.6 Measurement in the ROI
This subsection describes setting for measurement in the ROI in Exam and Review modes.
When the [Functions/ROI] button on the main screen is clicked, the screen for setting in the
ROI (hereafter referred to as the "setting screen") is displayed.
(2) Setting the display position and size of the ROI
Set the size of the ROI displayed in the image display area using the mouse.
The set coordinate and size are displayed on the control section at the right of the setting
screen.
When the right mouse button is double-clicked in the ROI, the ROI and the center
coordinate in the image display area are aligned.
(3) Setting the ROI drawing position offset
Clicking the [Disp] button displays the offset adjustment ROI in blue.
Set an ROI position offset using the slider bar for offset adjustment, spin button, and
"MoveAmount" (spin box).
displayed.
1001
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.27.7 Image parameter setting
This subsection describes image parameter setting in Exam and Review modes.
When the [Image Parameter] button on the main screen is clicked, the following Image
Parameter setting screen (hereinafter referred to as the "setting screen") is displayed.
(1) Setting the sensitivity
Set the sensitivity using the "Brightness", "Contrast", "Spatial Filter", and "Zoom" slider
bars.
displayed.
1002
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.27.8 Length
This subsection describes length setting in Exam and Review modes and on the in-room
monitor.
When the [Length] button in the main screen is clicked, the following Length setting screen
(hereafter referred to as the "setting screen") is displayed.
1003
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(1) Setting display/non-display of the CF value and geometrical zoom rate
Select "Calib. Factor" or "Geometrical Zoom Rate" (checkbox for setting display/non-
display of the CF value and geometrical zoom rate). Place a checkmark in the box of the
item to be displayed. Note, however, that a checkmark for "Geometrical Zoom Rate" can
be placed only when a checkmark for "Calib. Factor" is placed. (It is not possible to
select a setting where only the geometrical zoom ratio is displayed.)
(2) Setting the line type
Select "Solid Line", "Dashed Line", or "Dotted Line" (line type selection radio buttons).
1004
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Setting the line thickness
Select a "Thickness" (line thickness setting combo box).
While this combo box is selected, a default value can also be selected using the mouse
wheel, or the up/down and left/right keys on the keyboard.
(4) Setting the function for the ratio measurement that is selected automatically
Select "Length", "Area", or "Both" (radio buttons for setting the function for the ratio
measurement that is selected automatically).
1005
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Clicking the [Reset] button returns to original setting when the setting screen was
displayed.
1006
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.27.9 Pixel shifting
This subsection describes how to set pixel shifting in Exam and Review modes.
When the [Pixel Shift] button on the main screen is clicked, the following pixel shifting setting
screen is displayed.
V4.30 or later
1007
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(1) Setting the default shift unit each time the spin button is clicked
Select a value from "Shift Unit" (shift unit combo box).
<V4.30 or later>
For manual pixel shifting, select a value from "Manual Shift Unit" (shift unit combo box).
For mouse pixel shifting, select a value from "Mouse Shift Unit" (shift unit combo box).
(2) Setting the default shift range
Select a value from "Shift Range" (default shift range combo box).
(3) Setting the default ROI shape
Select a value from "ROI Shape" (default ROI shape combo box).
(4) Setting the default position and size of the ROI
Set the size of the ROI displayed in the image display area using the mouse.
The set coordinate and size are displayed on the control section at the right of the setting
screen.
When the right mouse button is double-clicked in the ROI, the ROI and the center
coordinate in the image display area are aligned. The setting procedures are the same
for the rectangular and circular blades.
(5) Setting of mouse pixel shift automatic ON (V4.30 or later)
Select whether mouse pixel shifting is automatically enabled when the pixel shift function
panel is opened. Select "On" to automatically enable mouse pixel shifting.
displayed.
1008
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.27.10 Setting automatic display of transfer images from Directory
This subsection describes automatic display of images transferred from Directory in Review
mode.
When the [Other] button in the main screen is clicked, the other function setting screen
Perform setting in "Image Switching", "Tab Switching" (checkbox for setting automatic display
of transferred images). Place a check mark when automatic display and/or automatic tab
movement are to be performed.
Clicking the [Reset] button returns to the original setting when the setting screen was displayed.
1009
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.27.11 Setting automatic display of previous link images
This subsection describes automatic display setting of previous link images in Exam mode.
Perform setting in "Image Switching" (checkbox for setting automatic display of previous link
images). Place a check mark when automatic display is to be performed.
Clicking the [Reset] button returns the setting to original one when the setting screen is
displayed.
1010
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.27.12 Setting the playback start position
This subsection describes setting of the playback start position in Exam and Review modes
and in the in-room monitor.
When the [Other] button in the main screen is clicked, the default function setting screen
Set the playback start position using the slider bar for playback start position adjustment, spin
button, and spin box.
Clicking the [Reset] button returns the setting to original one when the setting screen is
displayed.
1011
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.27.13 Specifying the mouse double-click operations
The Exam and Review operations executed by double-clicking of the mouse left button can be
specified.
Click the [Other] button in the main window to display the following window (hereafter referred
to as "setting window").
Select "Catalog" or "Playback" for "Double click operation on Image area".
To close the setting window and save the settings, click the [OK] button.
To close the setting window without saving the settings, click the [Cancel] button.
To return the settings to those when the setting window was opened, click the [Reset] button
1012
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.27.14 Setting the PanoramicView creation mode selection combo box display
This subsection describes display setting for the Panoramic View creation mode selection
combo box in Exam and Review modes.
Select "Possible" or "Impossible" (radio buttons for displaying the PanoramicView creation
mode switching menu).
1013
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.27.15 Specifying the default combo box when a PanoramicView image is created
The default setting of the combo box to be used in Exam mode and Review mode when a
PanoramicView image is created can be specified.
Click the [Other] button on the main screen to display the following window (hereafter referred
to as "setting screen").
Select "Not Limited" or "Limited" for "PanoramicView Default Mode".
1014
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.27.16 Setting whether LM% reset is enabled when the Reset Parameter function is executed
Whether or not LM% reset is enabled when the Reset Parameter function is executed in Exam
and Review modes can be set.
Click the [Other] button on the main screen to display the following window for setting the other
functions (hereinafter referred to as "setting screen").
Select the "Include LM%" or "Not Include LM%" radio button in the All Reset operation area.
1015
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.28 Playback System Default Settings (Examination room monitor functions)
The default settings for the examination room monitor functions (CrossLine (guidance lines),
InfoView (image-related information), MouseDEF (mouse sensitivity), VirtualColli (virtual
collimation), ThumbnailView, and Others can be specified.
Set each default setting using the INI file setting tool.
29.28.1 Startup of the tool
(2) Select "ExamRoom Presets Editor" from the command List and click the [GO] button to
start up the following setting tool (hereafter referred to as "main window").
1016
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.28.2 Specifying the settings for the guidance lines used for the X-ray beam limiting device
The settings for the guidance lines used for the X-ray beam limiting device can be specified.
Click the [CrossLine] button in the main window to display the following CrossLine setting
window.
(1) Setting the default thickness of the lines
Select a value from the "Thickness" combo box.
(2) Setting the default number of lines
Select a value from the "Number" combo box.
(3) Setting the space between lines
Set the space between the lines using the slider bar or the spin box in the "Interval" area.
(4) Setting the color of the lines
Set the gray scale level of the lines using the slider bar or the spin box in the "Color" area.
(5) Saving or discarding settings
To close the setting winow without saving the settings, click the [Cancel] button.
To return the settings to those when the setting window was opened, click the [Reset]
button.
1017
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.28.3 Displaying the image-related information
The image-related information items to be displayed on the monitor in the examination room
can be specified.
Click the [InfoView] button in the main window to display the following InfoView setting window
(hereafter referred to as "setting window").
1018
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(1) Initial image-related information display setting
The initial image-related information item settings can be specified in the

"InfoViewContextMenu" area. Place check marks as desired.
Item in "InfoViewContextMenu" area Description

InfoViewInit If this item is checked, image-related information
is displayed as the default.
InfoViewAdd If this item is checked, the item [InfoDisp] is
displayed in the context menu.
1019
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Specifying whether or not to display individual image-related information items on images
Whether or not individual image-related information items are to be displayed on images

can be specified in the "InformationView" area. Place a check mark next to each item to
be displayed.
1020
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Specifying ZoomOff and image parameter settings for fluoroscopy
Whether or not ZoomOff is to be set and whether image parameters are to be displayed
during fluoroscopy can be specified in the "ImageParameter" area. Place check marks
next to the desired items.
button.
1021
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.28.4 Mouse sensitivity setting
Click the [MouseDEF] button in the main window to display the following MouseDEF setting
window (hereafter referred to as "setting window").
1022
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(1) Specifying the parameter sensitivities of an image using the mouse
The parameter sensitivities for an image can be specified in the

"MouseSensitivityConversion" area. They can be changed using the slider bar or the
spin box.
In the combo box next to "FrameForward", select the number of frames to be fed per
rotation of the mouse wheel.
1023
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Specifying the sensitivity of the spatial filter using the mouse
The sensitivity of the spatial filter can be specified in the "SpatialFilter" area.
The sensitivity of the spatial filter can be specified using the slider bars or the spin boxes
in the "SpatialFilter" area.
1024
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Items in the [SpatialFilter] area Description

Angle Demarcation angle for longitudinal/lateral mouse
movement (to prevent changing of the spatial filter level
and pattern at the same time)
RefreshTime Time lag between pressing of the mouse button and
changing of the space filter (ms)
Type_Sensitivity_Type Filter sensitivity when the spatial filter pattern is changed
(number of pixels)
Intensity_Sensitivity Filter sensitivity when the spatial filter level is changed
(number of pixels)
Type_Offset Offset until the start of the spatial filter pattern change
(number of pixels)
button.
1025
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.28.5 Virtual collimation
The virtual collimation settings and the X-ray beam limiting device geometrical correction
support tool settings can be changed.
Click the [VirtualColli] button to display the following VirtualColli setting window (hereafter
referred to as "setting window").
1026
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(1) Specifying the filter fill pattern used in virtual collimation
Specify the filter fill pattern by selecting a radio button in the "FillStipple" area.
Items in the FillStipple area Description

Straight line (No Painting Out) No fill
Stripe (Heavy) Striped pattern (thick lines)
Stripe (Fine) Striped pattern (thin lines)
Cross (Interval Wide) Crossed pattern
1027
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Specifying the settings of the X-ray beam limiting device geometric correction support
tool
The displays on the filter guide can be specified in the "FilterGuide" area. The settings of
the guidance lines can be specified using the slider bar or the spin box in the
"FilterGuide" area.
Items in the FilterGuide area Description

NormalPositionH Horizontal position in Normal field (position relative to the
center)
NorlmalPositionV Vertical position in Normal field (position relative to the
center)
PortraitPositionH Horizontal position in Portrait field (position relative to the
center)
PortraitPositionV Vertical position in Portrait field (position relative to the
center)
LandscapePositionH Horizontal position in Landscape field (position relative to
the center)
LandscapePositionV Vertical position in Landscape field (position relative to
the center)
LineThickness Thickness of the lines
button.
1028
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.28.6 Thumbnail view
The thumbnail view settings can be specified.
Click the [ThumbnailView] button in the main window to display the following ThumbnailView
setting window (hereafter referred to as "setting window").
1029
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(1) Specifying whether or not to display individual image-related information items in

thumbnail view
Whether or not individual image-related information items are to be displayed in

thumbnail view can be specified in the "ViewDispInfo" area. Place a check mark next to
each item to be displayed.
For View ID, applies only in 5-image display mode.
1030
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Specifying the font brightness for the image-related information
(Invalid setting)
The font brightness for the image-related information can be specified in the
"DispInfoFont" area, using the "FontColor" slider bar or the spin box.
1031
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Enlarging the image number displayed in thumbnail view
Whether or not the image number displayed in thumbnail view is to be enlarged can be
specified in the "EnlargesDispInfo" area.
To enlarge the image number display, place a check mark in the "ImageNo" box.
1032
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(4) Specifying whether or not the map image display monitor selection menu is to be
displayed
Whether or not the map image display monitor selection menu should be displayed can
be specified in the "DispMonSelect" area.
Place a check mark next to "User" to display it.
1033
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(5) Specifying the map image display monitor selection menu settings
The map image display monitor selection menu settings can be specified in the
"DispMonSelect" area.
The default monitor can be specified by selecting a radio button from "DefaultRef".
1034
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(6) Specifying the mouse wheel scrolling sensitivity
The mouse wheel scrolling sensitivity can be specified in the "Mouse" area.
Select the sensitivity value from the combo box next to "ScrollPerWheel".
1035
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(7) Specifying the operational sensitivity of the joystick
The operational sensitivity of the joystick can be specified in the "JoyStick" area.
Specify the operational sensitivity for cursor movement and page selection by the joystick
in thumbnail view using the slider bars and the spin boxes for "Image" or "Page".
1036
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(8) Specifying the settings for the link between the frame displayed on an image in thumbnail
view and the target image to be processed
The frame-cursor link settings for thumbnail view can be specified in the
"SynchroThumbnail" area.
When a check mark is placed for an item, the frame-cursor is displayed on the thumbnail
that corresponds to the processing target image in the relevant process.
Items in the
Description
[SynchroThumbnail] area
AutoMapImageMap Frame-cursor link for map image display in AutoMap
AutoMapImageRun Frame-cursor link for run image display in AutoMap
CaasImgShow Frame-cursor link for "Caas" processing
InRoomMap Frame-cursor link for map image transfer from the control room monitor to
the in-room monitor
InRoomRun Frame-cursor link for run image transfer from the control room monitor to
the in-room monitor
LatestRun Frame-cursor link for execution of "LatestRun"
MapNextPrev Frame-cursor link for pressing of "Map" selection switch
MapToRun Frame-cursor link for execution of "MapToRun"
ReviewCutChg Frame-cursor link for execution of "Review"
RunNextPrev Frame-cursor link for pressing of "Run" selection switch
CatalogMap Frame-cursor link for display of images selected from the "Map" thumbnails
CatalogRun Frame-cursor link for display of images selected from the "Run" thumbnails
1037
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(9) Setting for number of display images
Select number of display images from the "Number of Display Image" radio button.
Recommended setting:
7 Images: SP system or DP system

5 Images: BP system
1038
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(10) Setting for selection menu on Map image display monitor
(a) Perform the settings for image display monitor selection menu from "Context
Setting".
Inline : Display in 1 line vertically

Arrange : Display in 2 lines vertically (selectable when the additional
BP-fluoroscopy-independent monitor and additional
BP-Map-independent monitor are used)
1039
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) Select the radio button for 2-line display from "Context Arrange" on the Map image
display monitor selection menu.
1040
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(c) Set for character string display on the Map image display monitor selection menu.
BP_Add : Setting with additional BP

BP/SP_Add : Setting without additional BP/Setting with additional SP
1041
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(d) Perform preview for the Map image display monitor selection menu (When "Display
Mode" is set to Arrange).
BP_Add : Setting with additional BP-fluoroscopy-independent

monitor/setting with additional BP-Map-independent monitor
BP_AddRun : Setting with BP-Run-independent monitor
BP/SP_Add : Setting without additional BP/setting with additional SP
button.
1042
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.28.7 Others
Items on the monitor in the examination room can be changed.
Click the [Other] button in the main window to display the following Other setting window
(hereafter referred to as "setting window").
1043
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(1) Specifying the playback speed
The speed of image playback using the shuttle knob can be specified in the
"PlaybackInfo" area.
Specify the playback speed using the spin box next to "PlaybackSpeed_Minimum".
1044
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Specifying the settings for the guide display used in the universality test
Specify the settings for the guide display used in the universality test using the slider bar
or the spin box in the "PhantomGuide" area.
Items in the PhantomGuide area Description

CenterPositionX X coordinate of the intersection point
CenterPositionY Y coordinate of the intersection point
CircleRadius Radius of the circle
LineThickness Thickness of the line
1045
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Setting the guidelines for the helical ball phantom (V4.30 or later)
Display or nondisplay, line thickness, and display interval of the guidelines are set.
Items in the Description

Helix Guide area
Display Display/nondisplay of the guidelines. ON: display/OFF: nondisplay
Width Display interval of the guidelines is set. (From 50 to 250 pixels)
Line Thickness Thickness of the guidelines is set. (from 1 to 5 pixels)
Thickness of the cross lines is double the set value.
1046
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(4) Variation settings in up/down and left/right operation in fluoroscopic landmark
In fluoroscopic landmark, variations corresponding to joystick operation in the up/down

and left/right directions are set.
Items in the FluoroLandMark area Description

Up/Down In fluoroscopic landmark, variations
corresponding to joystick operation in the
up/down direction is set. The variations can be
set in the range from 0 (no variation) to 20.
Left/Right In fluoroscopic landmark, variations
corresponding to joystick operation in the left/right
direction is set. The variations can be set in the
range from 0 (no variation) to 20.
1047
No. 2J308-036EN*I
button.
1048
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.29 Printing (Customized Setting of Scale Display)
Customization of scale display
<1> 5cm Segment length
<3> <4>
Display block size
5 cm 5 cm
<2> 5 cm
Interval with segment bounder
Display area size
Setting file name: TxsFIScaleBar.ini
(1) Display position
Description : 0: up, 1: down, 2: left, 3: right, others: right

Default value : DisPos = 3
(2) Display block size
Description : Indicates the block size as a ratio using a scale whose segment length
corresponds to 100%.
Default value : DispSize = 0.300000
(3) Interval with segment bounder
Description : Indicates the display interval as a ratio using a scale whose segment
length corresponds to 100%.
Default value : IntervalBoundarLine = 0.020000
(4) Centering position
Description : Indicates the scale length center position as a ratio using a scale whose
segment length corresponds to 100%.
Default value : Centering = 0.450000
(5) For Printing (line thickness in Printing display)
Description : Indicates the line thickness of the scale display in units of pixel
Default value : LineThicknessOnVFS = 1
1049
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(6) For FilmSheet (line thickness on film sheet)
Description : Indicates the line thickness of the scale display as a ratio relative to the
value set for "For Printing".
Default value : LineThicknesOnFilmSheet = 2 (double thickness)
* As the line thickness in Printing display differs from that actually printed on the film sheet,
separate setting is required.
(7) For Printing (Length of long scale division in Printing display)
Description : Indicates the long scale division length in units of pixel.

Default value : MainMarkLenOnVFS = 10.000000
(8) For FilmSheet (Length of long division on film sheet)
Description : Indicates the long scale division length as a ratio relative to the value set
for "For Printing".
Default value : MainMarkLenOnFilmSheet = 1.000000
(9) For Printing (Length of short scale division in Printing display)
Description : Indicates the short scale division length in units of pixel.

Default value : SubMarkLenOnVFS = 7.000000
(10) For FilmSheet (Length of short division in film sheet)
Description : Indicates the short scale division length as a ratio relative to the value set
for "For Printing".
Default value : SubMarkLenOnFilmSheet = 1.000000
1050
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.30 Changing the Gamma Function for Subtraction Images
Check whether the gamma function for subtraction images set in the system is a linear-type
gamma function or an S-type gamma function. Then perform conversion setting for the other
type of gamma function.
(1) Start up the service tool and select "Command Line" on the [Utils] tab.
(2) Enter "ConvertPresetSubWindow.exe" in the command field and press the [Go] button. The
setting application (ChangeGammaForSubImage) starts.
If the startup window shown below is displayed, the linear-type gamma function is currently
set for subtraction images. When the [OK] button is pressed, the gamma function is
converted to the S-type gamma function and the WW/GL values are automatically
converted accordingly. The dialog box then closes.
ChangeGammaForSubImage start window
If the startup window shown below is displayed, the S-type gamma function is currently set
for subtraction images. When the [OK] button is pressed, the gamma function is converted
to the linear-type gamma function and the WW/GL values are automatically converted
accordingly. The dialog box then closes.
ChangeGammaForSubImage start window
(3) Applying the changes to the system
To apply the changed settings in system operation, terminate the service software, shut
down the system, and then turn ON the system power again.
1051
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.31 Settings Related to Security
This subsection describes the methods for preventing security-related problems (such as leakage
of personal information contained in the system and reduction in system operation performance).
29.31.1 Installation of a firewall system
To prevent unauthorized access by computer viruses, it is recommended that a firewall system

be installed between the intra-hospital network and the system. Toshiba provides a
recommended firewall system at your expense. For details, contact your Toshiba
representative.
The following table shows the details of the DFP-8000A packet filtering rules to be registered
in the firewall system.
Port No. Segment Protocol name Comment Filtering rules

7 udp/tcp echo service Permitted
21 tcp ftp All rejected
23 tcp telnet All rejected
135 tcp rpc Remote Procedure Call All rejected
Location Service
137 udp/tcp netbios-ns NETBIOS Name Service Only remote maintenance
(TAC, SP) permitted
138 udp netbios-dgm NETBIOS Datagram Only remote maintenance
Service (TAC, SP) permitted
139 tcp netbios-ssn NETBIOS Session Service Only remote maintenance
(TAC, SP) permitted
1025 tcp listen Permitted
104 tcp DICOM-specific Only specific destination
protocol permitted
Installation tcp DICOM-specific Only specific destination
setting protocol permitted
Other udp/tcp All rejected
1052
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.31.2 HIPAA Mode setting
The purpose of HIPAA mode is to meet the product function requirements described in the
guidelines related to the law protecting personal information. In these guidelines, security
requirements related to laws protecting personal information in each country, including the U.S.
HIPAA Act (The Health Insurance Probability and Accountability Act) have been collected and
Toshiba's company policy has been defined. In HIPAA mode, the following functions are
provided.
 User Management : User certification and screen saver function using the user ID and
password.
 Audit Trail : Function that records which user performs which operation in the
audit log.
With these functions, unauthorized access of operators who do not have system use
permission can be prevented.
CAUTION: To protect personal information included in the system, it is necessary that

operating rules related to security be defined clearly and observed properly in the
hospital. Note, however, that the HIPAA mode provided in this system is only to
support these operating rules. Explain to the user that security cannot be
ensured simply by setting HIPAA mode, and obtain understanding from the user.
For the detailed HIPAA mode setting procedures, refer to the description in (4) "System" (l)
"Security Setting" in subsection 5.2.5 "Config. window". When HIPAA mode is switched
between ON and OFF, be sure to restart the system. (HIPAA mode switching is not performed
properly by software reset.) HIPAA mode is set to OFF at the time of shipment from the
factory. When HIPAA mode is switched to ON for the first time, the default user ID set in the
factory can be used. For details, contact the Field Support Group.
A system administrator (person in charge of managing the intra-hospital network or system or

equivalent, who does not perform medical practice using the system) or service engineer can
register additional user IDs. For the user ID registration/editing procedures, refer to the section
describing "Safety Management Measures Related to Personal Information" in the operation
manual.
CAUTION: Only service engineers can use the user ID with SERVICE authorization. Do not
disclose the user ID with SERVICE authorization and password to persons other
than the service engineers. Also do not lose this user ID and password.
1053
No. 2J308-036EN*I
While HIPAA mode is ON, service engineers should note the following.
 As described in the service mode start procedure of subsection 5.2.2 "Starting the setting
screen and applying the changed data", Service mode can be entered even when a user ID
without Service authorization is logged-on, by entering the license key.
 The user name and password for ADMIN authorization (Administrator) defined in "User
Authority Setup" in Utility mode must be entered when functions such as the following
functions in Utility mode are executed.
[User Manager] button : User certification setting

[Image Param. Check] button : Default value setting of the image quality parameters
 When the audit log recording function is set to ON, instruct the user to back up the audit log
periodically (save to media or remote PC) and to delete the audit log for which backup has
already performed from the system. If a large-sized audit log remains in the system disk
(drive D), a warning message is displayed. In this case, back up the audit log and delete
the unnecessary audit log from the system.
 When the audit log is backed up to media or a remote PC, Audit Log Viewer can also be
saved in the same location. At this time, the initial setting file (AuditLogAdmin.ini) is saved
together with the Audit Log Viewer executable file (AuditLogViewer.exe). In this initial
setting file, the following settings are possible for Audit Log Viewer.
Whether the audit log is ordered in descending order or ascending order

Label name for items in the audit log
Order for items in the audit log
Whether or not items in audit log are displayed
The initial setting file is located in the following folder. Since the file is editable, create a
backup file before starting work.
F:\Celeve\data\TxsHIPAA\Archive
The initial setting file should be copied to the folder containing the Audit Log Viewer
executable file. If the initial setting file is not located in the same folder, Audit Log Viewer is
executed with the factory default conditions.
 After HIPAA mode is set to ON, it can be returned to OFF. In this case, save the entire
audit log to media or a remote PC before setting the mode back to OFF.
 When HIPAA mode is switched to OFF and then ON, the user ID and password registered
before the mode was changed to OFF are effective.
1054
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.32 Procedures for Reducing the Variation of the Timing for Starting Radiography or Storage
Fluoroscopic Images
Operation of the image storage unit (RAID) can be set to either "Remain" mode or "OverWrite"
mode. "OverWrite" mode is a widely employed because old images in the image storage unit are
simply overwritten, allowing images to be managed in an efficient manner. In this mode, the
image recording area can be reserved immediately before the start of DA.
The processing load is one of the main causes of the variation in the DA start timing. Reserving
the image recording area at the start or end of the study minimizes the variation in the DA start
timing and the fluroscopic image storage start timing caused by the load associated with
reserving the image recording area during the study.
NOTE: This procedure should be performed only when the image storage unit (RAID) is used in
"OverWrite" mode.
This procedure should not be performed when the image storage uint (RAID) is used in
"Remain" mode.
In V3.31 or earlier, if the image recording area reservation function is set so that the image
recording area is reserved at the end of the study, it may take approximately 1 minute to
complete the first study each time the system is turned ON (or restarted by executing "Restart"
from the System Reset window) due to the time required for processing related to image
recording area reservation. This time differs depending on the system operating status. (The
time has been reduced in versions after V3.31.)
Perform the registry setting procedures and the initialization file editing procedures for the image
recording area reservation function.
(1) Specifying the image recording area to be reserved in advance
If the image recording area is to be reserved immediately before DA, it is acceptable to

allocate the recording area size according to the acquisition program. However, it is
necessary to reserve the image recording area before the start of the study. The size of the
image recording area must be determined in advance.
Although specifying a sufficiently large image recording area reservation size may eliminate
the need to delete images during the study, it may also result in the deletion of more old
images than necessary. Therefore, the size required for recording images in a single study
should be used as the standard for determining the image recording area to be reserved in
advance. The standard size differs depending on the system operating conditions. Refer to
the images of previous studies to determine the appropriate size.
The image recording area reservation size can be set with the following parameters:
 MatrixSize (matrix size) : 512/1024

 Bits (number of bits) : 8/10/12
 NumOfFrame (number of frames per cut) : 1 to 2048
 NumOfCut (number of cuts)
Note: In biplane acquisition mode, the total number of frontal and lateral frames should be
set for NumOfFrame.
When images are to be acquired with a combination of multiple matrix

sizes/bits/numbers of frames in a single study, specify the combination of matrix
sizes/bits/numbers of frames to be used most frequently.
1055
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Registry setting
To enable the image recording area reservation function, perform the following procedures.
Start up the Service Software menu and click "Command Line" in the [Utils] tab. The
Command Line window opens. Select "NT Command Interpreter" from the Command Line
window, enter "f:\celeve\bat\utility\registry\ComLib_RaidReserve_ON.reg" in the
"Parameter" field, and then click [GO] in the lower part of the window.
To disable the image recording area reservation function, enter

"f:\celeve\bat\utility\registry\ComLib_RaidReserve_OFF.reg" in the "Parameter" field and
then click [GO] in the lower part of the window.
The new setting becomes effective the next time the system is started up.
(3) Editing the initialization file
In the same manner as for registry setting, select "NT Command Interpreter" from the
Command Line window. Enter "f:\celeve\TxsSite\TxsSysStateMgr\RaidReserveSetting.ini"
in the "Parameter" field and then click [GO] in the lower part of the window. Notepad is
started up to open the above initialization file. Edit the settings.
After editing is completed, select "File" - "Save" from the Notepad menu to save the edited
initialization file. Then, close Notepad. The new setting becomes effective the next time the
(a) Set the image recording area reservation timing.
Processing at the start of the study or at the end of the study can be specified. It is
also possible to specify both.
Although the period for which old images are stored is slightly shorter if "1" is set for
"EndStudy" (the image recording area is reserved at the end of the study), the
processing load at the start of the study is reduced. Note that processing related to
image recording area reservation is performed at the time of completion of the first
study each time the system is turned ON (or restarted by executing "Restart" from the
System Reset window), and it may therefore take approximately 1 minute to complete
the study. This time differs depending on the system operating status. (The time has
been reduced in versions after V3.31.)
;------------------------------------------------------------
; Raid Reserve Function 1: Enable/ 0: Disable
;------------------------------------------------------------
[BaseSetting]
StartStudy = 1 <- Specify "1" to perform processing at the start of the study or "0" not to
perform processing at the start of the study.
EndStudy = 1 <- Specify "1" to perform processing at the end of the study or "0" not to
perform processing at the end of the study.
1056
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) Set the image recording area size.
Refer to "(1) Specifying the image recording area to be reserved in advance" above for
this setting.
The following example is for MatrixSize: 1024  1024, Bits: 10 bits, NumOfFrame: 300,
and NumOfCut: 10.
;------------------------------------------------------------
; MatrixSize: 512 or 1024
; Bits: 8 or 10 or 12
; NumOfFrame: 1 <= NumOfFrame <= 2048
; NumOfCut: 1 <= NumOfCut
;------------------------------------------------------------
[StartStudy]
MatrixSize = 1024 <-- Perform setting based on "(1) Specifying the image recording area
to be reserved in advance".
Bits = 10 <-- Perform setting based on "(1) Specifying the image recording area
NumOfFrame = 300 <-- Perform setting based on "(1) Specifying the image recording area
NumOfCut = 10 <-- Perform setting based on "(1) Specifying the image recording area
[EndStudy]
MatrixSize = 1024 <-- Perform setting based on "(1) Specifying the image recording area
Bits = 10 <-- Perform setting based on "(1) Specifying the image recording area
NumOfFrame = 300 <-- Perform setting based on "(1) Specifying the image recording area
NumOfCut = 10 <-- Perform setting based on "(1) Specifying the image recording area
Note: Be sure not to change the setting for "MaxValue".
;------------------------------------------------------------
; MaxValue (MB) Don't edit this value!
;------------------------------------------------------------
[MaxValue]
MaxValue = 10240 <-- Do not change this value.
(4) Applying the new settings
The new registry settings and the new initialization file settings are loaded the next time the
Therefore, close the Service Software menu and reboot the system to make the new
settings effective.
1057
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.33 Setting Communication with the Coolant Circulator
29.33.1 Setting procedures for enabling/disabling communication
This subsection describes the procedure for connecting the communication cable between the
DFP-8000A and the coolant circulator to perform communication when a coolant circulator that
can communicate with the DFP-8000A is used in combination.
Perform the following procedure.
(1) When the coolant circulator is connected to TUBE1 of the F-side DP of the SP/BP
system
[OK] button.
(c) When the service tool is started up, select the [Utils] tab and select "Command
Line" in the tree-view pane.
(d) Select "Chiller Status Check Setting" as the Command List and enter the following
parameters. Then press the Go button.
Parameters : /FT1 /ON
(e) Confirm that the "File update success" dialog is displayed to indicate that setting
has been performed successfully.
(f) The setting becomes valid after the system is restarted.
(2) When the coolant circulator is connected to TUBE2 of the L-side DP of the BP system
[OK] button.
(c) When the service tool is started up, select the [Utils] tab and select "Command
Line" in the tree-view pane.
(d) Select "Chiller Status Check Setting" as the Command List and enter the following
parameters. Then press the Go button.
Parameters : /LT2 /ON
(e) Confirm that the "File update success" dialog is displayed to indicate that setting
has been performed successfully.
(f) The setting becomes valid after the system is restarted.
After setting has been completed, perform the communication check referring to subsection
4.5 "Communication Check Between the DFP-8000A and the Coolant Circulator".
If it is necessary to disconnect the DFP-8000A and the coolant circulator due to incorrect
setting or any other reason, enter the following parameters in step (d) of each procedure.
SP/F-side of BP/TUBE1 of DP : /FT1 /OFF
L-side of DP/TUBE2 of DP : /LT2 /OFF
1058
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.33.2 Setting procedures for the communication port
The serial port (COM port) is used to communicate with the coolant circulator in DFP-8000A.
This subsection describes the procedure for setting the serial port number that is used to
communicate with the coolant circulator in DFP-8000A.
Communication port used to communicate with coolant circulator.
COM 1 : Dosimeter
COM 2 : Coolant circulator (SP, BP-F side, DP-Tube1 side)
COM 3
(USB serial converter unit is used) : Coolant circulator (BP-L side, DP-Tube2 side)
* USB serial converter unit is mounted only in BP,
DP systems
The default for the software is as follows. Change the port setting based on the
communication port listed above.
Dosimeter : COM 1
Coolant circulator
(SP, BP-F side, DP-Tube1 side) : COM 3
Coolant circulator
(BP-L side, DP-Tube2 side) : COM 4
Setup procedures for the communication port
button.
(3) When the service tool is started up, select the [Utils] tab and select "Command Line" in
the tree-view pane.
(4) Select "Chiller COM Port Setting" as Command List, click "Go" and activate the setup
tool.
(5) Select the appropriate COM port for "Chiller (SP/DP Tube1/BP Frontal" and "Chiller
(DP Tube2/BP Lateral) in the "TxsChillerComPortSetting" tool, and click the [Save] button.
(6) The setting will be effective after rebooting.
1059
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.34 Image Quality Control Parameter Settings
29.34.1 Additional filter linkage setting tool
This is a tool that can change the linkage settings for additional filters.
(1) Startup procedure
(a) Start up the system in the normal manner.
(b) Select the [Utility] tab on the screen and click the [Service] button in the Service
Tools area.
(c) When the service license key entry screen is displayed, enter the service license
key.
(d) On the [Utils] tab of the service software, click "Fluo Control Parameter Setup
Utility".
1060
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Software windows
(a) Window when in BP/DP configuration with JPN standard selected (V4.25 or earlier)
(In SP configurations, there is no Lateral (2nd) tab.)
1061
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Set the following values based on the BLA.
Set the same values with AI 1.8 mm when F3 is AI 1.5 mm.
 Setting values for the BLA-800A/BLA-800C

(When F1: Ta 0.03 mm, F2: Ta 0.06 mm, F3: AI 1.8 mm)
Dose Min_SID SID1 SID2 SID3

Step SID1 SID2 SID3
kW Limit <= SID <= SID <= SID <= SID <
Count (cm) (cm) (cm)
(mGy) < SID1 < SID2 < SID3 Max_SID
50 0 0 0 0 F2 - - -
2.2 kW 125 0 0 0 0 F3 - - -
87 0 0 0 0 F1 - - -
50 0 0 0 0 F2 - - -
3.0 kW 125 1 115 0 0 F1 F3 - -
87 0 0 0 0 F2 - - -
 Setting values for the BLA-800A/BLA-800C (BF 3)

(When F1: Cu 0.2 mm, F2: Cu 0.3 mm, F3: AI 1.8 mm)

Step SID1 SID2 SID3
50 0 0 0 0 F2 - - -
2.2 kW 125 0 0 0 0 F3 - - -
87 1 105 0 0 F2 F1 - -
50 0 0 0 0 F2 - - -
3.0 kW 125 1 110 0 0 F1 F3 - -
87 1 115 0 0 F2 F1 - -

(When F1: Cu 0.2 mm, F2: Cu 0.3 mm, F3: AI 1.8 mm, F4: Cu 0.5 mm)

Step SID1 SID2 SID3
50 1 105 0 0 F4 F2 - -
2.2 kW 125 0 0 0 0 F3 - - -
87 1 105 0 0 F2 F1 - -
50 1 105 0 0 F4 F2 - -
3.0 kW 125 1 110 0 0 F1 F3 - -
87 2 102 115 0 F4 F2 F1 -
1062
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) Window when in BP/DP configuration with HHS standard selected (V4.25 or earlier)
1063
No. 2J308-036EN*I


Step SID1 SID2 SID3
(R) < SID1 < SID2 < SID3 Max_SID
10 0 0 0 0 F1 - - -
2.2 kW 20 0 0 0 0 F3 - - -
0 0 0 0 - - - -
10 0 0 0 0 F2 - - -
3.0 kW 20 1 110 0 0 F1 F3 - -
0 0 0 0 - - - -


Step SID1 SID2 SID3
10 1 105 0 0 F2 F1 - -
2.2 kW 20 0 0 0 0 F3 - - -
0 0 0 0 - - - -
10 1 115 0 0 F2 F1 - -
3.0 kW 20 0 0 0 0 F3 - - -
0 0 0 0 - - - -


Step SID1 SID2 SID3
10 1 105 0 0 F2 F1 - -
2.2 kW 20 0 0 0 0 F3 - - -
0 0 0 0 - - - -
10 2 102 115 0 F4 F2 F1 -
3.0 kW 20 0 0 0 0 F3 - - -
0 0 0 0 - - - -
1064
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(c) Window when in BP/DP configuration with JPN standard selected (V4.30 or later)
1065
No. 2J308-036EN*I

Dose Limit
kw SID Thickness 1 Thickness 2 Thickness 3 Thickness 4
(mGy)
1 F2 F2
50 2 F2 F2 F2 F2
3 F2 F2
1 F2 F3
2.2 kw 125 2 F2 F2 F1 F3
3 F1 F3
1 F2 F2
87 2 F2 F2 F2 F1
3 F2 F1
1 F2 F2
50 2 F2 F2 F2 F2
3 F2 F2
1 F2 F1
3.0 kw 125 2 F2 F2 F1 F3
3 F1 F3
1 F2 F2
87 2 F2 F2 F2 F2
3 F2 F1
Setting values for the SID and thickness of the object
Dose Limit SID 1 SID 2 Thickness 1 Thickness 2 Thickness 3

kw
(mGy) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm)
50 105 115 12 15 22
2.2 kw 125 105 115 12 15 22
87 105 115 12 15 22
50 105 115 12 15 22
3.0 kw 125 105 115 12 15 22
87 102 115 12 15 22
1066
No. 2J308-036EN*I

Dose Limit
(mGy)
1 F2 F2
50 2 F2 F2 F2 F2
3 F2 F2
1 F2 F3
2.2 kw 125 2 F2 F2 F1 F3
3 F1 F3
1 F2 F2
87 2 F2 F2 F2 F1
3 F2 F1
1 F2 F2
50 2 F2 F2 F2 F2
3 F2 F2
1 F2 F1
3.0 kw 125 2 F2 F2 F1 F3
3 F1 F3
1 F2 F2
87 2 F2 F2 F2 F2
3 F2 F1

kw
50 105 115 12 15 22
2.2 kw 125 105 115 12 15 22
87 105 115 12 15 22
50 105 115 12 15 22
3.0 kw 125 105 115 12 15 22
87 102 115 12 15 22
1067
No. 2J308-036EN*I

Dose Limit
(mGy)
1 F4 F4
50 2 F4 F4 F4 F2
3 F4 F2
1 F2 F3
2.2 kw 125 2 F4 F2 F1 F3
3 F1 F3
1 F4 F2
87 2 F4 F4 F2 F1
3 F2 F1
1 F4 F4
50 2 F4 F4 F4 F2
3 F4 F2
1 F2 F1
3.0 kw 125 2 F4 F2 F1 F3
3 F1 F3
1 F4 F4
87 2 F4 F4 F4 F2
3 F4 F1

kw
50 105 115 12 15 22
2.2 kw 125 105 115 12 15 22
87 105 115 12 15 22
50 105 115 12 15 22
3.0 kw 125 105 115 12 15 22
87 102 115 12 15 22
1068
No. 2J308-036EN*I
 Setting values for the BLA-900C (BF 5)

(When F1: Cu 0.2 mm, F2: Cu 0.3 mm, F3: AI 2.0 mm, F4: Cu 0.5 mm, F5: Cu 0.9 mm)
Dose Limit
(mGy)
1 F4 F4
50 2 F5 F4 F4 F2
3 F4 F2
1 F2 F3
2.2 kw 125 2 F4 F2 F1 F3
3 F1 F3
1 F4 F2
87 2 F5 F4 F2 F1
3 F2 F1
1 F5 F4
50 2 F5 F5 F4 F2
3 F4 F2
1 F2 F1
3.0 kw 125 2 F4 F2 F1 F3
3 F1 F3
1 F5 F4
87 2 F5 F5 F4 F2
3 F4 F1

kw
50 105 115 12 15 22
2.2 kw 125 105 115 12 15 22
87 105 115 12 15 22
50 105 115 12 15 22
3.0 kw 125 105 115 12 15 22
87 102 115 12 15 22
1069
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(d) Window when in BP/DP configuration with HSS standard selected (V4.30 or later)
1070
No. 2J308-036EN*I

Dose Limit
(R/min)
1 F2 F2
10 2 F2 F2 F2 F1
3 F2 F1
2.2 kw
1 F1 F3
20 2 F2 F2 F1 F3
3 F1 F3
1 F2 F2
10 2 F2 F2 F2 F2
3 F2 F1
3.0 kw
1 F1 F3
20 2 F2 F2 F1 F3
3 F1 F3

kw
(R/min) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm)
10 105 115 12 15 22
2.2 kw
20 105 115 12 15 22
10 105 115 12 15 22
3.0 kw
20 105 115 12 15 22
1071
No. 2J308-036EN*I

Dose Limit
(R/min)
1 F2 F2
10 2 F2 F2 F2 F1
3 F2 F1
2.2 kw
1 F1 F3
20 2 F2 F2 F1 F3
3 F1 F3
1 F2 F2
10 2 F2 F2 F2 F2
3 F2 F1
3.0 kw
1 F1 F3
20 2 F2 F2 F1 F3
3 F1 F3

kw
10 105 115 12 15 22
2.2 kw
20 105 115 12 15 22
10 105 115 12 15 22
3.0 kw
20 102 115 12 15 22
1072
No. 2J308-036EN*I

Dose Limit
(R/min)
1 F4 F2
10 2 F4 F4 F2 F1
3 F2 F1
2.2 kw
1 F1 F3
20 2 F4 F2 F1 F3
3 F1 F3
1 F4 F4
10 2 F4 F4 F4 F2
3 F4 F1
3.0 kw
1 F1 F3
20 2 F4 F2 F1 F3
3 F1 F3

kw
10 105 115 12 15 22
2.2 kw
20 105 115 12 15 22
10 105 115 12 15 22
3.0 kw
20 105 115 12 15 22
1073
No. 2J308-036EN*I
 Setting values for the BLA-900C (BF 5)

(When F1: Cu 0.2 mm, F2: Cu 0.3 mm, F3: AI 2.0 mm, F4: Cu 0.5 mm, F5: Cu 0.9 mm)
Dose Limit
(R/min)
1 F4 F2
10 2 F5 F4 F2 F1
3 F2 F1
2.2 kw
1 F1 F3
20 2 F4 F2 F1 F3
3 F1 F3
1 F5 F4
10 2 F5 F5 F4 F2
3 F4 F1
3.0 kw
1 F1 F3
20 2 F4 F2 F1 F3
3 F1 F3

kw
10 105 115 12 15 22
2.2 kw
20 105 115 12 15 22
10 102 115 12 15 22
3.0 kw
20 105 115 12 15 22
1074
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Description of the UI
"Date/Time"
Displays the date the settings were saved.

For BP, DP systems, the dates the Frontal (1st) and Lateral (2nd) parameters
were set (were saved) are handled separately.
"Dose Type"
A radio button for selecting the standard (JPN/HHS).

Select JPN for Japan, HHS for other regions.
"Fluoroscopy Control Parameter"
Items for shared settings not related to the standard

"Pulse Fluoroscopy Max kW"
Displays the content set in service.

"Beam Filter Control Flag for SID"
[ON], [OFF] can be selected by pressing the button.

"Beam Filter Control Flag for kV"

"Beam Filter Control Flag during Fluoroscopy"

"Beam Filter Request Delay Timer (unit: ms)"
Input the values.

However, units smaller than 100 ms cannot be input.
Also, the range that can be input is from 500 to 10000.
"Beam Filter for Continuous Fluoroscopy"
[F1] to [F4] can be selected by pressing the button.

If BLA is BLA-800A or BLA-800C, F4 cannot be selected.
"Beam Filter Control Parameter for SID"
Depending on the standard selected, the items that can be input are different
(see the window for details).
"StepCount" : Can be set from 0 to 3.
0 : If not changing the filter by SID, use this setting when using Filters.
1 : For the SID, the additional filter used can be set for the two divisions
MinSID<=SID<SID1 and SID1<=SID<MaxSID.
2 : For the SID, the additional filter used can be set for the three divisions
MinSID<=SID<SID1, SID1<=SID<SID2, and SID2<=SID<MaxSID.
3 : For the SID, the additional filter used can be set for the four divisions
MinSID<=SID<SID1, SID1<=SID<SID2, SID2<=SID<SID3, and
SID3<=SID<MaxSID.
1075
No. 2J308-036EN*I
"Beam Filter Control Parameter for kV"
Currently cannot be set.

[Set Default]
When this button is clicked, the values are returned to the default values for
the system configuration.
[Save]
By changing the values, the [Save] button becomes clickable.

To have the settings reflected, click the button to have the content of the
settings reflected.
If a message "Successfully downloaded!" appears after clicking the button, the
content of the settings has been reflected.
1076
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) V4.30 or later
"Date/Time"
Displays the date the settings were saved.

For BP, DP systems, the dates the Frontal (1st) and Lateral (2nd) parameters
were set (were saved) are handled separately.
"Dose Type"

Select JPN for Japan, HHS for other regions.
"Fluoroscopy Control Parameter"
Items for shared settings not related to the standard

"Pulse Fluoroscopy Max kW"
Displays the content set in service.

"Beam Filter Request Delay Timer (unit: ms)"
Input the values.

However, units smaller than 100 ms cannot be input.
Also, the range that can be input is from 500 to 10000.
"Beam Filter for Continuous Fluoroscopy"
[F1] to [F5] can be selected by pressing the button.

If BLA is BLA-800A or BLA-800C, F4 cannot be selected.
[F5] is available only for BLA-900C.
"Beam Filter Control Parameter for SID"
Depending on the standard selected, the items that can be input are different
(see the window for details).
[Set Default]
When this button is clicked, the values are returned to the default values for
the system configuration.
[Save]
By changing the values, the [Save] button becomes clickable.

To have the settings reflected, click the button to have the content of the
settings reflected.
If a message "Successfully downloaded!" appears after clicking the button, the
content of the settings has been reflected.
1077
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.34.2 Additional radiographic filter interlock setting tool
This tool allows the interlock settings of the additional radiographic filter to be changed.
Tools area.
(c) When the service license key entry screen is displayed, enter the service license
key.
(d) On the [Utils] tab of the service software, click "Radiography Control Parameter
Setup Utility".
1078
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Software window
"Date/Time"
The date and time of saving of the settings are displayed.
"Beam Filter Control Parameter"
"thickness correct"
The patient thickness correction values can be set (separate values for Frontal
(Tube 1) and Lateral (Tube 2)).
The set values must be within the range from "-3.0 cm to 3.0 cm"
(increments of 0.1 cm)
"DA", "DSA", "OneShot"

Additional interlock filter settings for each technique
The beam filter selection point and the filter to be used can be specified according to
the patient thickness.
The values set in the Step fields must be within the range from "3 cm to 28 cm"
(3 <= Step 1 < Step 2 < Step 3 <= 28).
[Set Default]
Click this button to return the settings to their default values.
[Save]
The [Save] button is enabled when a value is changed. Click the button to save the
settings. When it is clicked, the message "Successfully downloaded!" is displayed,
indicating that the settings are saved.
1079
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.34.3 Fluoroscopy control parameter-setting tool manual
Fluoroscopy control parameter
(b) After the system is started up, press the [Ctrl] + [Alt] + [Delete] keys on the
keyboard to open the System reset screen. Place the mouse cursor on the blue bar
at the top of the screen and double-click the mouse right button.
(c) Click the [Cancel] button of the System Reset screen to close the screen.
(d) Move the mouse cursor to the bottom of the screen. Press the Windows key on the
keyboard to display the task bar.
(e) Start up Explorer and open F:\celeve\bin folder. Execute

TxsRTFluoroAbcCtrlPara.exe in the folder.
NOTE: This tool should basically be used with the factory default values.
1080
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Software windows
1081
No. 2J308-036EN*I
[GFS Tube], [LM-Angio], [LM-Cardiac]
Select the tab corresponding to the tube for which you want to set fluoroscopy control
parameters.
"Dose Type"

In the HHS standard, HLC-L is grayed out.
* Select "JPN" for Japan, "HHS" for other regions.
"Min mA", "Max mA"
Input the minimum, maximum mA values for each rate.

 Make sure to input Min mA and Max mA such that the relationship between them is
one where Min mA  Max mA.
 Possible input range (small focus)
GFS : 10 mA to 50 mA
Angio : 10 mA to 50 mA
Cardiac : 10 mA to 200 mA (however, 160 mA is the upper limit for normal
fluoroscopy)
 Input range (medium focus)

GFS : 10 mA to 137 mA
Angio : 10 mA to 200 mA (however, 160 mA is the upper limit for normal
fluoroscopy)
Cardiac : 10 mA to 200 mA (however, 160 mA is the upper limit for normal
fluoroscopy)
"Min msec", "Max msec"
Input the minimum, maximum ms values for each rate.

 Make sure to input Min msec and Max msec such that the relationship between
them is one where Min msec  Max msec.
 Possible input range
GFS : 2.0 ms to 13.3 ms
Angio : 2.0 ms to 13.3 ms
Cardiac : 2.0 ms to 13.3 ms
[Set Default]
Click to return the settings to their initial values.
[SAVE]
Have the settings reflected.
[QUIT]
Quit the software.
1082
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.35 Printing (Setting of the Maximum Number of Characters to Be Displayed for the Patient Name)
The length in characters of the patient name display for Printing can be changed within the range
of 20 to 34 characters (single-byte). The settings can be changed by following the procedure
below.
(2) The password entry dialog is displayed. Enter the login password and click the [OK] button.
(3) When the service tool is started up, select the [Utils] tab and select "Command Line" in the
tree-view pane.
(4) In the window above, set the Command List field to "NT Command Interpreter".
(5) Enter "f:\celeve\TxsSite\TxsFilm\TxsFlConfig.ini" in the Parameter field, and then click the
[GO] button.
(6) The window for editing TxsFlConfig.ini appears, so edit the following part. (Example shows
a change from 20 characters to 34 characters)
(Before the change) : [Total characters on screen]

;20-34 characters
PatientName = 20
(After the change) : [Total characters on screen]

;20-34 characters
PatientName = 34
(7) Save over the TxsFlConfig.ini file, and then quit.
(8) Quit the service settings, and then start the Celeve system.
1083
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.36 Additional Filter Initial Settings
In the additional filter initial settings, make the initial settings for the additional filters in the system
configuration.
Make the initial settings in the following order.
CAUTION: Be sure to restart the system before starting the setting procedure.
Startup of the FPD Adjustment
Additional filter settings tool

Make additional filter settings.
Additional filter settings tool

Perform additional filter interlock setting.
Additional radiographic filter interlock setting tool

Specify the settings of the additional
radiographic filter interlock tool.
Dose Limit adjustment control

Start Dose Limit adjustment control
to make setting in accordance
with additional filter changes.
Make FACT adjustments.

Start Dose Limit adjustment control
to meke setting in accordance
with additional filter changes.
End additional filter initial setting
29.36.1 Settings
Make additional filter-related settings.
Be sure to make these settings when BLA changes.
1084
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.36.2 Operation procedure
(1) Additional filter settings
Make additional filter settings referring to subsection 29.36.3 "Additional filter setting
method".
(2) Perform additional filter interlock setting referring to subsection 29.36.4 "Setting
procedure for the additional filter settings tool".
(3) Perform the interlock setting procedures as described in subsection 29.36.5 "Specifying
the settings of the additional radiographic filter interlock tool".
(4) FACT adjustment control
Make FACT adjustments related to additional filter settings referring to subsection

29.36.6.
(5) Dose Limit adjustment control
Make Dose Limit adjustments related to additional filter settings referring to subsection
29.36.7.
1085
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.36.3 Additional filter setting method
(a) Start up the system normally.
Tools group.
(c) The service license key entry screen is displayed. Enter the service license key.
(d) Click "Beam Filter Setup Utility" in the [Utils] tab on the Service Software screen.
NOTE: When starting for the first time or BLA is changed, a message "setup data
error! beam filter xxxxxx. please setup data" will appear, but this is displayed
because the additional filter setting values are different from the actual BLA
configuration. The message will no longer appear when the settings in this
section are made.
(2)
(3)
(4)
(7)
(6)
(2) Set the "Area".
The items to select in "Area" are "JPN" for Japan, "USA" for the United States; select
"OTHER" for other areas.
1086
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Input the "Ser No.".
Input the BLA Serial No. for BLA-800A, BLA-800C.
No input is needed for BLA-900A, BLA-900C.
NOTE: The serial No. indicates the recommended default value; however, this value
may not always be suitable for the actual BLA configuration. For BLA-800C,
pay attention to the following points.
 BLA-800C with the serial No. **J*****
Enter the serial No. as is (**J*****). The four-filter configuration is
recommended.
 When the beam quality filter is replaced using the FIQ_Up_Grade kit
Setting cannot be performed using the serial number of the beam limiting
device. Check "Customize" and change the beam filter configuration.
(4) Click the [Set] button. After that, confirm that the additional filter information and the
Safety Beam Filter information correspond with the settings in (2) and (3), and are
reflected in the input fields in the frames.
NOTE: It is not necessary to change the additional filter information or the Safety Beam
Filter information that is input automatically. Checking the "Customize" check
box makes it possible to change this information manually.
(5) In the DP/BP system, perform the operations and make the settings for (2) to (4) for
"Lateral (2nd)" as well.
(7) Click the [Quit] button to quit the software.
NOTE: When the system has not started properly and the settings are made and
saved, a "Failed to download!" error will occur. After confirming that the system
was started properly, make the settings again.
1087
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.36.4 Setting procedure for the additional filter settings tool
Tools group.
(d) Click "Fluo Control Parameter Setup Utility" in the [Utils] tab on the Service
Software screen.
(V4.25 or earlier)
(2)
(3) (5) (6)
1088
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(V4.30 or later)
(* This screen is for BP systems.)
(2) Select the "Dose Type".
If "JPN" has been selected in the "Area" item in "Fluoro ABC mAs Control Setup Utility",
select "JPN" here. If another area has been selected, select "HHS".
(3) Click the [Set Default] button.
After clicking the button, confirm that values have been set in the "Fluoroscopy Control
Parameter" and "Beam Filter Control Parameter for SID" areas.
(4) For DP/BP systems, perform steps (2) and (3) for "Lateral (2nd)".
NOTE: 1. If the initial default values have not been changed, the settings are not changed
when the [Set Default] button is clicked. In this case, since no changes have been
made, saving is not required and the [Save] button is disabled.
2. When the system has not started properly and the settings are saved, a "Failed to
download!" error occurs. Confirm that the system has started properly and then
perform the setting procedure again.
3. In the software of V4.30 or later, the fluoroscopic beam filter control parameters
can be set according to the thickness of the object and the SID. The beam filter
can be set for each combination of the thickness (Thickness 3 and 4) and SID
(SID1 to 3). For Thickness 1 and 2, however, one beam filter type is set
regardless of the SID.
(6) Click the [Quit] button to close the software.
1089
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.36.5 Specifying the settings of the additional radiographic filter interlock tool
Tools group.
(d) Click "Radiography Control Parameter Setup Utility" in the [Utils] tab on the Service
Software screen.
(*The above figure is for the BP configuration.)
(2) Change the settings if required.
Basically, the default settings should be used.

Click [Set Default].
(3) If the settings are changed, click the [Save] button to save the settings.
NOTE: 1. If the initial values have not been changed, the [Set Default] button and the [Save]
button are disabled.
2. The download error message "Failed to download!" is displayed if an attempt is

made to change or save the settings when system operation is abnormal.
Confirm that system operation is normal and then perform the setting
change/saving operation again.
(4) Click the [Cancel] button to close the software.
1090
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.36.6 F-ACT adjustment control
For the operation of the adjustment controls, refer to section 11 "F-ACT ADJUSTMENT".
29.36.7 Dose limit adjustment
For adjustment operations, refer to section 12 "DOSE LIMIT ADJUSTMENT".
If the additional filter type set in the additional filter settings procedure differs from the
additional filter type in the existing adjustment data, a message "Addition filter information is
not correct. Please adjust it again." appears, so click the [OK] button to clear the message box
and make adjustments.
Confirm that the additional filter type set in additional filter settings are shown in the adjustment
window.
1091
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.37 Biplane System Automatic Positioning Data-Setting Tool
CAUTION: Use this tool when installing the equipment.
Using this tool will return all of the automatic positioning data to the factory defaults.
NOTE: 1. Use of this tool requires a license.
2. This tool cannot be used with systems other than CF/BP or VF/BP systems.
In CF/BP and VF/BP systems, this tool sets whether to use "LL Default" or "RL Default" as the
default position for the -arm.
29.37.1 Screen layout
Setup Mode Select whether to use system units or study protocol units.
Site Default  Change all of the system automatic positioning data (all
(All Study Protocol) automatic positioning data linked to study protocols and all
automatic positioning data not linked to study protocols).
Study Protocol  Change the automatic positioning data linked to the specified
study protocol.
Default Positioning Select LL/RL.
Left Lateral  Rewrite the data to Left Lateral.
Right Lateral  Rewrite the data to Right Lateral.
[Execute] Carry out the automatic positioning data rewriting process under
the conditions set in the User Interface.
[CLOSE] Close the application.
1092
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.37.2 Method of use
(1) In the service settings, select "Command Line" on the [Utils] tab. The window below
appears.
(2) From the Command List pull-down menu, select "Bi-Plane System Auto Pos. Setting
Tool", and then click the [GO] button.
(3) In "Setup Mode", select the units for automatic positioning data rewriting (entire system,
each study protocol).
(4) If "Study Protocol" is selected, select the study protocols to rewrite (multiple selections
possible).
(5) In "Default Positioning", select either the "Left Lateral" or "Right Lateral" setting.
(6) Click the [Execute] button.
1093
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(7) A dialog box appears to confirm if it is okay to start the rewriting process, so click the [OK]
button. To quit, click the [Cancel] button.
(8) When a dialog box appears indicating that the rewriting has finished, click the [OK] button
to close the dialog, and click the [Close] button to quit the tool.
(9) Quit the command line and service software, and then restart the system.
1094
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.37.3 List of messages
Message dialogs and the corrective actions
Dialog box shown Meaning Corrective action

Automatic
positioning data
rewriting finished
Dialog box To rewrite, click

confirming the [OK] button.
whether it is okay
To quit, click the
to rewrite the
[Cancel] button.
automatic
positioning data
License invalid Obtain a valid

license.
Although it is in Select one or

"Study Protocol" more study
rewriting mode, protocols to
no study rewrite, and then
protocols are click the [Execute]
selected for button again.
rewriting.
This tool has This tool can only

been run on an be used with
inapplicable CF/BP or VF/BP
system. systems. Check
the name of the
system.
1095
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Dialog box shown Meaning Corrective action

Automatic Check whether
positioning data there are any files
rewriting failed. with "Read Only"
attributes under
the Celeve folder.
An unanticipated Collect the logs

error occurred. and contact your
Toshiba service
representative.
1096
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.38 V-IF FPGA Data Download Tool
CAUTION: 1. Do not execute this tool unless specifically instructed to do so.
The data in the system does not always correspond to the latest PWB data.
Execution of this tool may overwrite the data with old FPGA data.
2. The V-IF FPGA data download tool is used when changing the FPGA of the
V-IF. Do not use this tool in systems that do not include the V-IF.
NOTE: Note that a license is required in order to use the tool.
<1> <2> <7>
<3>
<4> <5>
<6>
No. Name Description of function

<1> V-IF Board 1 Frontal (Tube1) setting
<2> V-IF Board 2 Frontal (Tube2)/Lateral setting
<3> FPGA Version The current FPGA version or error code is displayed.
<4> Abort Downloading is interrupted.
<5> Download FPGA data is downloaded to the V-IF.
<6> Status The status is displayed.
<7> Close The tool is closed.
1097
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.38.2 Operating method
(2) Press [Ctrl] + [Alt] + [Delete] to display the following "System Reset" window. Move the
cursor to the blue bar and double-click the right mouse button.
(4) Move the cursor to the bottom of the window and press the Windows key on the
(5) Start up Explorer and copy the V-IF data file from the CD-R to the following location.
f:\celeve\data\fpga\vif\rev2\vif.bin
(6) Stat up the service software and select "Command Line" on the [Utils] tab.
The following window is displayed.
(7) Select "V-IF FPGA Update" in the Command List pull-down menu and then click the [GO]
button.
1098
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(8) Click the [Download] button in the section of the board where the FPGA file is updated.
(Downloading starts.)
To interrupt the processing, click the [Abort] button.
(9) After the following dialog is displayed, click [OK] and then [Close] to close the "FPGA
data download tool".
(10) Close the software and then shut down the system.
(11) Restart the system.
(12) Restart the FPGA data download tool to confirm that the FPGA version is the specified
file.
1099
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.38.3 Message list
Messages and corrective actions displayed in the status display area
Error code Messages displayed in Meaning Corrective action

displayed in the the status display area
FPGA version
display area
- Ready... - -
- Downloading... Downloading is in -
progress.
- Preparing... Preparation for data -
downloading is in
progress.
- Verifying... Verification of the data -
downloaded to the V-IF
is in progress.
- Aborted. The [Abort] button was -
Restart the system and clicked.
retry FPGA download.
0x0000 - Startup was performed Perform the update procedure.
using the Master ROM.
0xFFFE ERROR!! The V-IF board is not Confirm that the V-IF board is installed
The V-IF board is not installed. and that it operates normally.
installed.
0xFFFD The V-IF board is not This V-IF board does Check the revision of the V-IF board and
equipped with the FPGA not support the replace it with one that supports the
data download function. download function. download function.
This V-IF board is not
supported.
0xFFFC ERROR!! The RT software does After shutting down the system, restart
0xFFF7 Fatal error occurred. not respond. the system and then perform the update
Restart the system. procedure again. If the problem is not
corrected, contact (FS).
0xFFF9 ERROR!! Verification of the Click the [Download] button to perform
FPGA download failed. downloaded data failed. the update procedures again.
Please retry FPGA
download.
0xFFF8 ERROR!! A timeout occurred Shut down the system, restart the
FPGA download failed. while downloading the system, and perform the update
Restart the system and data. procedures again.
retry FPGA download. If the problem is not corrected, contact
(FS).
- ERROR!! The FPGA data file is Copy the FPGA data from the CD-R
FPGA download failed. damaged. again and perform the update procedures
The FPGA file is broken. again.
0xFFFB ERROR!! The FPGA data file Confirm that the FPGA data file exists at
The FPGA data file is not could not be found. the specified location. Then, perform the
found. update procedures again.
- ERROR!! An unexpected error Shut down the system. Then, restart the
Unexpected error occurred. system and perform the update
occurred. procedure again.
If the problem is not corrected, contact
(FS).
* When reporting an error code to (FS), also report the error code displayed in the FPGA
Version field.
1100
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.39 Tool for Changing the Fluoroscopy Roadmapping Factor
NOTE: A license is required in order to use this tool.
This tool is used in the fluoroscopy roadmapping function to change the weighting coefficient for
the density of the blood vessels and the guidewire in the subtraction image.
No. Details of the function Remarks

<1> Pull-down menu for study Selects the study protocol to be set.
protocol selection
<2> Effective number setting Sets the effective number.
1 to 15 can be set in steps of 1.
<3> Parameter setting 1 to 40 can be set in steps of 1.
(A setting value of "10" corresponds to the standard
density setting. A larger value increases the
density and a smaller value reduces the density.)
ALPHA : Density for the blood vessels
BETA : Density for the guidewire
(*) In order to facilitate adjustment, it is
recommended that the density of the guidewire be
adjusted by changing WW/GL/SFLT while keeping
the setting value for BETA unchanged at 10.
<4> [Reload] button Ignores the value set by the GUI and reloads the
data set in the system.
<5> [Set Param.] button Enables the value set by the GUI in the system.
<6> Close button Closes the tool.
1101
No. 2J308-036EN*I
29.39.2 Operating procedure
(2) Start up the service software and select "Command Line" on the [Utils] tab.
The following screen is displayed.
(3) In the Command List pull-down menu, select "Fluo. Roadmap Setup" and click the [GO]
button.
(4) Set each parameter and then click the [Set Param.] button.
(5) Click [X] to close the screen.
(6) Close the service tool, restart the system, and perform the operational checks.
1102
No. 2J308-036EN*I
30. APPENDIX 2 (HHS TEST)
30.1 DFP-8000A, XTP-8100G/DFP-8000D, XTP-8100G
30.1.1 Detailed instructions for production testing
(1) Test method for air kerma rate
(a) Objective
Fluoroscopic equipment that is provided with automatic exposure rate control shall
not be operable at any combination of tube potential and current that will result in an
AKR (air kerma rate) in excess of 88 mGy/min (10 R/min) at the point where the
center of the useful beam enters the patient.
When the high-level control is activated, the equipment shall not be operable at any
combination of tube potential and current which will result in an AKR in excess of
176 mGy/min (20 R/min) at the point where the center of the useful beam enters the
patient.
(b) Test method
<1> Testing when the source is below the table
<a> Set the test equipments and the diagnostic X-ray units as follows.
1) Set the tabletop to the horizontal position.
2) Place the attenuation block (200  200  19 mm) at the approximate

center of the table and 150 mm (6 in) above the tabletop and
conform the center of the X-ray field to it by observing the image.
3) Set the imaging system to 300 mm (12 in) above the tabletop.
1103
No. 2J308-036EN*I
4) Place the probe of the dosemeter at the center of the X-ray field and
10 mm (0.4 in) above the tabletop by observing the image.
5) Place the lead sheet (300  300  2 mm) at the center of the X-ray
field between the attenuation block and the imaging system.
 Open the beam limiting device fully.
<c> Select MANUAL mode.
<d> Measure the air kerma rate for the tube voltage at which the dose limit is
displayed for the specified SID, mA, and beam filter (see subsection
30.1.2) in the normal continuous fluoroscopy mode. Confirm that the
dose does not exceed 88 mGy/min (10 R/min).
<e> Measure the air kerma rate for the tube voltage at which the dose limit is
30.1.2) in the HLC continuous fluoroscopy mode. Confirm that the dose
does not exceed 176 mGy/min (20 R/min).
<f> Measure the air kerma rate for the kV and ms at which the dose limit is
30.1.2) in the normal pulsed fluoroscopy mode. Confirm that the dose
<g> Measure the air kerma rate for the kV and ms at which the dose limit is
30.1.2) in the HLC pulsed fluoroscopy mode. Confirm that the dose does
not exceed 176 mGy/min (20 R/min).
<h> Select the "Automatic Brightness Control" mode.
 Make an exposure (in normal continuous fluoroscopy mode), measure

the maximum air kerma rate, and verify that the value of air kerma rate
Measure the AKR for the specified SID and beam filter. See subsection
30.1.2.
<j> Make an exposure (in HLC continuous fluoroscopy mode), measure the
maximum air kerma rate, and verify that the value of air kerma rate does
30.1.2.
<k> Make an exposure (in normal pulsed fluoroscopy mode) in auto mode.
Measure the maximum air kerma rate, and verify that the value of AKR
Measure the AKR for the specified SID, pulse rate, and beam filter.
See subsection 30.1.2.
<l> Make an exposure (in HLC pulsed fluoroscopy mode) in auto mode.
1104
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<2> Testing when the source is above the table
<a> Set the test equipment and the diagnostic X-ray units as follows.
1) Set the tabletop to the horizontal position.
2) If the source-to-image distance (SID) is variable, set the end of the

beam limiting device as close to the tabletop as it can be placed
provided it shall not be closer than 300 mm.
3) Place the attenuation block (200  200  19 mm) at the approximate

center of the table and 150 mm (6 in) above the tabletop and
conform the center of the X-ray field to it by observing the image.
4) Place the probe of the dosemeter at the center of the X-ray field and
300 mm (12 in) above the tabletop by observing the image.
5) Place the lead sheet (300  300  2 mm) at the center of the X-ray
field on the tabletop.
 Open the beam limiting device fully.
1105
No. 2J308-036EN*I

30.1.2.
30.1.2.
1106
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<3> Testing in a C-arm type of fluoroscopy system
<a> Set the test equipment and the diagnostic X-ray units as follows.
1) If necessary, position the tabletop out of the path of the primary

beam.
2) Place the probe of the dosemeter 300 mm (12 in) from the input
surface of the imaging system.
3) Place the aluminum attenuation block (200  200  19 mm) and the
lead sheet (200  200  2 mm) at the center of the X-ray field as
shown in the above figure.
4) Place the probe, aluminum attenuation block, and lead sheet in order
to measure the AKR for minimum SID to maximum SID.
5) Be sure to measure the dose at the SIDs given in section 12.
 Open the shutter blades of the beam-limiting device fully.
1107
No. 2J308-036EN*I

30.1.2.
30.1.2.
Measure the AKR at the specified SID, pulse rate, and beam filter.
Measure the AKR at the specified SID, pulse rate, and beam filter.
(c) Test equipment required
<1> Dosemeter
This measurement requires one of the following test equipments.
<a> Keithley model 35050A with 96020B chamber
 Victoreen model 500 with 550-4 probe
<c> Victoreen model 8000 with 6000-530B chamber
<d> Unfors model RaySafe Xi with R/F detector
<2> Aluminum attenuation block
200  200  19 (mm)
<3> Lead sheet
300  300  2 (mm)
1108
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(d) Rejection limit
In case of NORMAL fluoroscopy, maximum air kerma rate limit:

88 mGy/min (10 R/min).
In case of HLC fluoroscopy, maximum air kerma rate limit:

176 mGy/min (20 R/min).
(2) Test method for reproducibility and linearity
(a) Objective
A series of 10 radiation exposure measurements are performed to calculate the

coefficient of variation and the average exposure ratio.
(b) Test method
<1> Set the X-ray apparatus and test instrument as the following block diagram.
<2> Turn on the equipment line switch and calibrate test instruments.
<3> Set the technique factors (radiographic kV, mA and time selectors) and during
the 10 consecutive measurements, at intervals of one or two minutes the
technique factors are adjusted to alternate settings and reset to the test setting
after each measurement.
Refer to item "Combination of specified technique factors" in subsection

30.1.1 (3) for details.
NOTE: The testing exposure conditions should be within maximum rating of the
installed tubes given in the table in subsection 30.1.1 (3).
<4> Record the dose meter value for each measurement.
1109
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<5> The coefficient of variation "C", 1020.30(b)(8), of the 10 exposure

measurements is calculated using the following equation;
2
S 1 10
 10 
C   Xi2    Xi / 10
X 3 X i1  i1 
Where Xi = the exposure measurement
X = mean value of the exposure measurements

S = estimated standard deviation
<6> Confirm that the above produce "C" is not greater than 0.045.
<7> The average rations of exposure to the indicated milliampere-second product

(mR/mAs), (1020.31(c)), of the 10 exposure measurements is calculated using
the following equation;
X1  X2
X1  X2
Where X1 and X2 = average mR/mAs values obtained at each of two

consecutive tube current settings.
<8> Confirm that the above product is not greater than 0.09 times.
<1> Radiation measurement
This measurement requires one of the following dosemeters.
(d) Rejection limit
<1> Coefficient of variation C  0.045
X1  X2
<2> Average exposure ratio  0.09
X1  X2
1110
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Setting technique factors for reproducibility and linearity test without AEC
(a) General
The fundamental idea, which determines how the combination of technique factors
for the test is selected, is to select a peak tube potential (low, middle and high kV)
and the product of tube current and exposure time.
During a series of 10 radiation exposure measurements, all variable controls for

technique factors are adjusted alternate settings and reset to the test setting after
each measurement.
According to the following procedure, 10 radiation exposures are measured.
Test Procedure
1111
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) Combination of specified technique factors I
(For DFP-8000A)
Exposure Conditions
Focus Alternate settings (1) Alternate settings (2)
kV mA sec
50 400 0.040 56 kV - 50 mA - 0.050 s 64 kV - 100 mA - 0.100 s
500 0.032 56 kV - 50 mA - 0.050 s 64 kV - 100 mA - 0.100 s
100 10 0.320 86 kV - 50 mA - 0.050 s 94 kV - 100 mA - 0.100 s
20 0.160 86 kV - 50 mA - 0.050 s 94 kV - 100 mA - 0.100 s
630 0.025 86 kV - 50 mA - 0.050 s 94 kV - 100 mA - 0.100 s
800 0.020 86 kV - 50 mA - 0.050 s 94 kV - 100 mA - 0.100 s
125 10 0.320 116 kV - 50 mA - 0.050 s 124 kV - 100 mA - 0.100 s
20 0.160 116 kV - 50 mA - 0.050 s 124 kV - 100 mA - 0.100 s
(For DFP-8000D/W4)
Exposure Conditions
Focus Alternate settings (1) Alternate settings (2)
kV mA sec
60 50 0.400 56 kV - 50 mA - 0.050 s 64 kV - 100 mA - 0.100 s
100 0.200 56 kV - 50 mA - 0.050 s 64 kV - 100 mA - 0.100 s
90 400 0.013 86 kV - 50 mA - 0.050 s 94 kV - 100 mA - 0.100 s
800 0.0063 86 kV - 50 mA - 0.050 s 94 kV - 100 mA - 0.100 s
120 100 0.050 116 kV - 50 mA - 0.050 s 124 kV - 100 mA - 0.100 s
200 0.025 116 kV - 50 mA - 0.050 s 124 kV - 100 mA - 0.100 s
1112
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(4) Test method for peak tube potential
(a) Objective
To check the maximum deviation of the indicated peak tube potential of X-ray
generators.
(b) Test method
A high resistance voltage divider (400 M) with a known output-to-input ratio
(1/40000), a kV indication unit containing an amplifier and a voltmeter are used to
determine peak potential.
<1> Connect a high resistance voltage divider, a kV indication unit, and 2 auxiliary
high-potential cables for the measurement between the high-voltage generator
and the X-ray tube as follows.
High-resistance voltage divider

(KV-201D) X-ray
tube
X-ray
Power H.V.
control
supply generator
box
kVp
indication High-potential
unit cable
(KV-201D)
<2> Check whether zero adjustment in the meter is correct.
<3> Apply the high-potential voltage to the X-ray tube according to the setting
shown in the recording form of subsection 30.1.2, and then read the readout at
which the meter points out the kV value.
1113
No. 2J308-036EN*I
High voltage meter: ALCO model KV-201D
(d) Rejection limit
The kV measured on the kV meter must not exceed the following limits which are
the maximum allowable deviations from the values on the kV selector.
<1> Radiographic tube potential accuracy : 7%
<2> Fluoroscopic tube potential accuracy : 7%
(5) Test method for tube current
(a) Objective
To ensure that the actual tube current agrees with the indicated tube current within
the error limits assigned by TOSHIBA when the X-ray system is connected to an
adequate power supply as specified by TOSHIBA.
(b) Test method
<1> Connect as follows. Select one of the two methods.
Method <a>:
Method :
<2> Select tube current according to the setting shown in the recording form of
subsection 30.1.2.
1114
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<3> Make an exposure and record the mA indicated on the mA meter.
Note for Method <a>:
Note that the tube current displayed in the mA meter is 90% of the actual
current in the case of the metal X-ray tube because 10% of electrons colliding
with the anode flow into the metal ground.
The actual mA is calculated using the following equation in the case of the
metal X-ray tube.
Value indicated on the mA meter

The actual mA =
0.90
Note for Method :
Note that the tube current displayed in the mA meter is added with the leakage
current of high resistance voltage divider.
The actual mA is calculated using the following equation.
The actual mA =
Value indicated on the kV meter
Value indicated on the mA meter -
200 M
<1> mA meter : ALCO model MA-1201DC (for Method <a>)

ALCO model MA-2000 (for Method )
<2> High-voltage meter : ALCO model KV-201D
(d) Rejection limit
The mA measured on the mA meter must not exceed the following limits which are
the maximum allowable deviations from the values indicated on the R.mA indicator
and the F.mA selector.
<1> Radiographic tube current accuracy: 15%
<2> Fluoroscopic tube current
a. From 0.5 mA to 0.9 mA: 0.2 mA

b. From 1.0 mA to 4.0 mA: 15%
(6) Test method for exposure time
(a) Objective
To verify that the deviation between the measured exposure time and the indicated
exposure time during any exposure does not exceed the maximum deviation
specified by TOSHIBA, when the equipment is connected to an adequate power
supply as designated in the Federal Standard.
1115
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) Test method
For radiography
<1> Connect as follows.
<2> Select the technique factors according to the setting shown in the recording
form of subsection 30.1.2.
<3> Make an exposure and record the exposure time measured.
<4> Repeat for the other exposure times and technique factors.
For pulsed fluoroscopy
<1> Connect an osciloscope to the signal of PXCIF board in power cabinet of X-

ray high-voltage generator XTP-8100G.
Measuring point : Between TP13(RX) and TP1(GND)
<2> Select the technique factors according to the setting shown in the recording
form of subsection 30.1.2.
<3> Make an exposure and record the exposure time measured.
(c) Test equipment required for radiography
<2> Exposure time counter : ALCO model TD-3A
(d) Rejection limit
The exposure time measured on the exposure time counter must not exceed the
following limits which are the maximum allowable deviations from the values on the
time selector.
a. From 0.001 to 0.009 s : 1 ms

b. From 0.01 to 1.0 s : 10%
1116
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(7) Test method for automatic exposure control limits
(a) Objective
To determine, when an automatic exposure control is provided, that the product of

X-ray tube current and exposure time is limited to not more than 600 mAs per
exposure.
(b) Test method
<1> Connect as follows. Select one of the method below.
Method <a>:
*: Connect the mA meter to the high-resistance voltage divider side when the
small plug of the high-voltage cable is connected to the X-ray tube side
(water-cooled X-ray tube, etc.).
Method :
Power X-ray H.V.

supply control generator High-
resistance X-ray
mA meter voltage tube
divider
High-voltage
cable
Exposure kVp
time indicating
counter unit
<2> Turn ON the main circuit breaker and depress the POWER ON pushbutton.
<3> Press a technique switch for which automatic exposure control can be used.
<4> Turn ON the automatic exposure control switch.
<5> Set the exposure condition as follows.
R.kV : 50 kV
R.mA and time : 400 mA, 1.5 s
1117
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<6> Remove the detector for automatic exposure control outside the X-ray field.
<7> Make an exposure and record the mA reading and exposure time when
backup operates.
The operation of over-mAs backup circuit is indicated by the BACK UP display

and the buzzer.
<8> Verify that the product of indicated value is not over 600 mAs.
Note for Method <a>:
Note that the tube current displayed in the mA meter is 90% of the actual
current in the case of the metal X-ray tube because 10% of electrons colliding
with the anode flow into the metal ground.
The actual mA is calculated using the following equation in the case of the
metal X-ray tube.
Value indicated on the mA meter

The actual mA =
0.90
Note for Method :
Note that the tube current displayed in the mA meter is added with the leakage
current of high resistance voltage divider.
The actual mA is calculated using the following equation.
The actual mA =
Value indicated on the kV meter
Value indicated on the mA meter -
200 M
<1> mA meter : ALCO model MA1201DC (for Method <a>)

ALCO model MA2000 (for Method )
<2> Exposure time counter : ALCO model TD-3A
(d) Rejection limit
The product of tube current and exposure time measured on the mA meter and the
exposure time counter must not exceed the following limits.
Maximum product of tube current and exposure time limit: 600 mAs
1118
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(8) Test method for displayed AKR and cumulative air kerma
(a) Objective
The displayed AKR and cumulative air kerma shall not deviate from the actual
values by more than 35%.
(b) Test methods
<1> Set the test equipments and the diagnostic X-ray units as follows.
<2> Place the dosimeter probe at a location 50 mm above the tabletop at the
center of the X-ray exposure field.
<3> Place the lead sheet (300 mm  300 mm  2 mm) on the entrance plane of the
imaging system.
<4> Select "Normal field" for the FOV and adjust the beam limiting device blades
so that the probe is not cut off on the fluoroscopic monitor.
<5> Perform the following procedures to check the displayed AKR and cumulative
air kerma at low dose.
<a> Set the fluoroscopic condition setting mode to Manual mode, and set the
fluoroscopic conditions to 15 fps/80 kV.
Generate fluoroscopic X-rays, and adjust the pulse width and tube
current so that the dose rate measured by the dosimeter is approx.
6 mGy/min.
 Generate fluoroscopic X-rays for 3 seconds or more under the above
conditions. Compare the dose ratio measured by the dosimeter and the
AKR displayed on the monitor, and confirm that the difference between
these values is 35%.
1119
No. 2J308-036EN*I
<c> Generate fluoroscopic X-rays for 3 seconds or more under the above
conditions. When the cumulative dose measured by the dosimeter is
approx. 100 mGy, stop generating fluoroscopic X-rays.
<d> Compare the increase in the cumulative air kerma displayed on the
monitor and the cumulative dose measured by the dosimeter. Confirm
that the difference between these values is 35%.
<6> Perform the following procedures to check the displayed AKR and cumulative
air kerma at high dose.
<a> Change the fluoroscopic condition setting mode to ABC mode and
generate 15-fps fluoroscopic X-rays. The fluoroscopic conditions will be
maximum.
 Under the above conditions, generate fluoroscopic X-rays for 3 seconds
or more. Measure the dose rate measured by the dosimeter and the
AKR displayed on the monitor. Confirm that the difference between
these values is 35%.
<c> Under the above conditions, generate fluoroscopic X-rays for about 10
seconds and then stop generation.
<d> Compare the increase in the cumulative air kerma displayed on the
monitor and the cumulative dose measured by the dosimeter. Confirm
that the difference between these values is 35%.
<1> Dosimeter
This measurement requires one of following equipments.
<2> Lead sheet
300  300  2 (mm)
1120
No. 2J308-036EN*I
30.1.2 Measuring points for production testing
30.1.2.1 For DFP-8000A, XTP-8100G
(1) Air kerma rate limits test results
(a) Manual mode
Continuous Fluoroscopy Mode

Normal mode SID : cm (1st step = minimum SID)
Indicated kV Measured mA/ms AKR

Beam filter F1 125 kV mA mGy/min
Beam filter F4 (*1) 125 kV mA mGy/min

HLC mode SID : cm (1st step = minimum SID)
Indicated kV Measured mA/ms AKR

Pulsed Fluoroscopy Mode

Normal mode SID : cm (1st step = minimum SID) 30 pps
Indicated kV (*2) Measured mA/ms AKR

Beam filter F1 110 or 120 kV mA ms mGy/min
Beam filter F4 (*1) 110 or 120 kV mA ms mGy/min
(*1) Perform this adjustment only when the beam limiting device with beam filter
F4 or F5 is used in combination.
(*2) Perform test with the maximum pulsed fluoroscopy tube voltage (110 kV or
120 kV).
1121
No. 2J308-036EN*I

HLC mode SID : cm (1st step = minimum SID) 30 pps
Indicated kV (*2) Measured mA/ms AKR

120 kV).
(b) Auto mode

Measured kV/mA AKR


Measured kV/mA AKR

1122
No. 2J308-036EN*I

Measured kV/mA/ms (*2) AKR

Normal mode SID : cm (2nd step) 30 pps

Normal mode SID : cm (3rd step) 30 pps

Normal mode SID : cm (4th step = maximum SID) 30 pps

120 kV).
1123
No. 2J308-036EN*I


HLC mode SID : cm (2nd step) 30 pps

HLC mode SID : cm (3rd step) 30 pps

HLC mode SID : cm (4th step = maximum SID) 30 pps

120 kV).
1124
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Reproducibility and linearity test results
50 50 100 100 100 100 125 125

kV
kV kV kV kV kV kV kV kV
400 500 10 20 630 800 10 20
mA
mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA
0.04 0.032 0.320 0.160 0.025 0.02 0.320 0.160
sec
s s s s s s s s
Focus
1
mGy mGy mGy mGy mGy mGy mGy mGy
2
3
4
5
Exposure mGy mGy mGy mGy mGy mGy mGy mGy
No.
6
7
8
9
10
X
(mR/mAs)
X1  X 2
X1  X 2
1 R = 0.258 mC/kg
1 R = 8.73 mGy
1125
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Radiographic peak tube potential and tube tube current test results
Exposure time : 0.080 s
kV
50 kV 100 kV 125 kV
mA (Focus)
10 mA kV kV kV
( ) mA mA mA
400 mA kV kV kV
( ) mA mA mA
630 mA kV kV kV
( ) mA mA mA
800 mA kV
( ) mA
kV Accuracy (Error : %)
kV
50 kV 100 kV 125 kV
mA
10 mA
% % %
400 mA
% % %
630 mA
% % %
800 mA
%
mA Accuracy (Error : %)
kV
50 kV 100 kV 125 kV
mA
10 mA
% % %
400 mA
% % %
630 mA
% % %
800 mA
%
1126
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(4) Fluoroscopic peak tube potential and tube current test results
kV
50 kV 100 kV 125 kV
mA
kV kV kV
0.5 mA
mA mA mA
kV kV kV
4.0 mA
mA mA mA
kV
50 kV 100 kV 125 kV
mA
0.5 mA
% % %
4.0 mA
% % %
kV
50 kV 100 kV 125 kV
mA
0.5 mA
% % %
4.0 mA
% % %
1127
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(5) Exposure time test results
For radoography
Exposure condition Measured time Maximum

Maximum error
Time mA kV (ms) deviation
50 kV
ms
1.0 ms 630 mA 100 kV 1 ms

ms
125 kV
ms
50 kV
%
100.0 ms 10 mA 100 kV 10%

ms
125 kV
%
For plulsed fluoroscopy
Exposure condition Measured time Maximum

Maximum error
Time mA kV (ms) deviation
8.0 ms 100 mA 80 kV % 10%
(6) Automatic exposure control limit test result
X-ray condition: 50 kV 400 mA 1.5 s
Measured mA Measured exposure time mAs

(A) (B) [(A)  (B)]
mA s mAs
1128
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(7) Displayed AKR and cumulative air kerma test results
(a) Low dose condition

 Manual mode
 FOV: N-mode, 15 fps, target dose: 6 mGy/min or more and 100 mGy or more
kV mA ms Actual value Displayed Difference (%)

(A) value (D) (|A-D|/A)*100
AKR 80
(6 mGy/min or more) mGy/min mGy/min
Cumulative air kerma 80
(100 mGy or more ) mGy mGy
(b) Maximum dose condition

 Auto mode (ABC) with 2 mm lead sheet
 FOV: N-mode, 15 fps
kV mA ms Actual value Displayed Difference (%)

(A) value (D) (|A-D|/A)*100
AKR
mGy/min mGy/min
Cumulative air kerma
(10 s ) mGy mGy
1129
No. 2J308-036EN*I
30.1.2.2 For DFP-8000D, XTP-8100G
(1) Air kerma rate limits test results
(a) Manual mode

Beam filter F1
Indicated kV Measured
AKR
mA
125 kV
mA mGy/min
100 kV
mA mGy/min
80 kV
mA mGy/min

Beam filter F3
AKR
mA
125 kV
mA mGy/min

Beam filter F1
AKR
mA/msec
/
110 kV
mA/msec mGy/min
/
100 kV
mA/msec mGy/min
/
80 kV
mA/msec mGy/min

Beam filter F3
AKR
mA/msec
/
110 kV
mA/msec mGy/min
1130
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) Auto mode

Beam filter F1
Measured
AKR
kV/mA
125/
kV/mA mGy/min
Normal mode SID : cm (2nd step)
Beam filter F1
Measured
AKR
kV/mA
125/
kV/mA mGy/min
Normal mode SID : cm (3rd step)
Beam filter F1
Measured
AKR
kV/mA
125/
kV/mA mGy/min
Normal mode SID : cm (4th step)
Beam filter F1
Measured
AKR
kV/mA
125/
kV/mA mGy/min

Beam filter F3
Measured
AKR
kV/mA
125/
kV/mA mGy/min
1131
No. 2J308-036EN*I

Beam filter F1 Beam filter F2 Beam filter F3 Beam filter F4 (*1)

Measured Measured Measured Measured
AKR AKR AKR AKR
kV/mA/msec kV/mA/msec kV/mA/msec kV/mA/msec
110/ 110/ 110/ 110/
kV/mA/msec mGy/min kV/mA/msec mGy/min kV/mA/msec mGy/min kV/mA/msec mGy/min
Normal mode SID : cm (2nd step) 30 pps

AKR AKR AKR AKR
110/ 110/ 110/ 110/
Normal mode SID : cm (3rd step) 30 pps

AKR AKR AKR AKR
110/ 110/ 110/ 110/
Normal mode SID : cm (4th step) 30 pps

AKR AKR AKR AKR
110/ 110/ 110/ 110/

Beam filter F3
Measured
AKR
kV/mA/msec
110/
kV/mA/msec+ mGy/min
F4 is used in combination.
1132
No. 2J308-036EN*I


AKR AKR AKR AKR
110/ 110/ 110/ 110/

Beam filter F3
Measured
AKR
kV/mA/msec
110/
kV/mA/msec+ mGy/min
F4 is used in combination.
1133
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Reproducibility and linearity test results
60 60 90 90
kV
kV kV kV kV
50 100 400 800
mA
mA mA mA mA
0.4 0.2 0.013 0.0063
sec
s s s s
Focus
1
mGy mGy mGy mGy
2
mGy mGy mGy mGy
3
mGy mGy mGy mGy
4
mGy mGy mGy mGy
5
mGy mGy mGy mGy
Exposure No.
6
mGy mGy mGy mGy
7
mGy mGy mGy mGy
8
mGy mGy mGy mGy
9
mGy mGy mGy mGy
10
mGy mGy mGy mGy
X
(mR/mAs)
X1  X 2
X1  X 2
1 R = 0.258 mC/kg
1 R = 8.73 mGy
1134
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Radiographic peak tube potential and tube current test results
Exposure time : 0.080 s
kV
60 kV 90 kV
mA (Focus)
50 mA kV kV
( ) mA mA
100 mA kV kV
( ) mA mA
400 mA kV kV
( ) mA mA
800 mA kV kV
( ) mA mA
kV
60 kV 90 kV
mA
50
mA % %
100
mA % %
400
mA % %
800
mA % %
kV
60 kV 90 kV
mA
50
mA % %
100
mA % %
400
mA % %
800
mA % %
1135
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(4) Fluoroscopic peak tube potential and tube current test results
kV
60 kV 90 kV
mA
1.0 mA kV kV
mA mA mA
2.0 mA kV kV
mA mA mA
4.0 mA kV kV
mA mA mA
kV
60 kV 90 kV
mA
1.0 mA
mA % %
2.0 mA
mA % %
4.0 mA
mA % %
kV
60 kV 90 kV
mA
1.0 mA
mA % %
2.0 mA
mA % %
4.0 mA
mA % %
1136
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(5) Exposure time test results
Exposure condition Measure time Maximum

Maximum Error
Time mA kV (ms) Deviation
60 kV
1.0 500 ms
1 ms
ms mA
90 kV
ms
60 kV
10.0 100 %
10%
ms mA
90 kV
%
(6) Automatic exposure control limit test result
X-ray condition: 50 kV 400 mA 1.5 s
Measured mA Measured exposure time mAs

(A) (B) [(A)  (B)]
mA sec mAs
(7) Displayed AKR and cumulative air kerma test results
(a) Low dose condition
 Manual mode
 FOV: N-mode, 15 fps, target dose: 6 mGy/min and 100 mGy
kV mA mS Actual Displayed Difference (%)

value (A) value (D) (|A-D|/A)*100
AKR 80
(6mGy/min)
Cumulative 80
air kerma
(100mGy)
(mGy/min) (mGy)
(b) Maximum dose condition
 Auto mode (ABC) with 2 mm Lead sheet

 FOV: N-mode, 15 fps
kV mA mS Actual Displayed Difference (%)

value (A) value (D) (|A-D|/A)*100
AKR
Cumulative
air kerma
(10sec)
(mGy/min) (mGy)
1137
No. 2J308-036EN*I
30.1.3 Adjustment accuracy and standards list
X-ray adjustment accuracy
Accuracy standard Accuracy standard

Item Adjustment standard
(HHS rejection limit) (IEC standard)
Radiographic tube voltage
+3%, -7% 7% 10%
accuracy
Radiographic tube current
+5%, -15% 15% 20%
accuracy
10%
Exposure timer accuracy  (2% +1 ms) 1 ms for less than  (10% +1 ms)
10 ms
Continuous fluoroscopic tube 7%
+3%, -7% 10%
voltage accuracy
+5%, -15% 15%
Continuous fluoroscopic tube
0.2 mA for less than 0.2 mA for less than 20%
current accuracy
1 mA 1 mA
1138
No. 2J308-036EN*I
30.2 BLA-800A, BLA-800C
The system should be tested to ensure compliance with requirements when the system is
installed and when components are replaced. The test methods are as follows.
Test items Test methods Replaced components

Beam quality Refer to ATTACHMENT 02 of the X-ray tube housing assembly
installation and service manual below;
BLA-800A -------No.2C356-056E
BLA-800C ------No.2C356-064E
Alignment of the X-ray field Refer to ATTACHMENT 03 of the X-ray tube housing assembly
with the fluoroscopic image installation and service manual below;
receptor
BLA-800A -------No.2C356-056E
Image intensifier
BLA-800C ------No.2C356-064E
Flat panel detector
(Note 1)
Note 1: The testing positions are as follows, regardless of the beam limiting device type
(BLA-800A or BLA-800C).
1139
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Support device Adjust position for X-ray field Test position FOV.
LAO/RAO 0
CAS-810A RAO 120, CRA/CAU 0 Normal
CRA/CAU 0
CAS-830A LAO/RAO 0 LAO 90, CAU 90

Normal
(Note 4) CRA/CAU 0 RAO 90, CAU 90
LAO/RAO 0 LAO 90, CAU 90
CAS-830A FPD ROT. 0 and -90
CRA/CAU 0 Normal
(Note 5) RAO 90, CAU 90
FPD ROT. 0
FPD ROT. 0 and -90
LAO 0 LAO 120, CRA/CAU 0,
I.I./Tube 0 cm
CRA/CAU 0 Normal
LAO 0, CRA/CAU 0,
I.I./Tube 0 cm
I.I./Tube 0 cm
SID: Stroke center
CAS-820B LAO 0 or LAO 120,
CRA/CAU 0, I.I./Tube 7 cm
(Note 2)
Normal
LAO 0 or LAO 120,
CRA/CAU 0, I.I./Tube -7 cm
(Note 2)
LAO/RAO 0 LAO 0, CRA/CAU 0
FPD/COLLI. ROT. 0 and
CRA/CAU 0
+70 and -70
FPD/COLLI. ROT. 0
LAO 90, CRA 50
CAS-880A FPD/COLLI. ROT. 0 or +70 Normal
or -70 (Note 3)
LAO 0, CRA/CAU 0
FPD/COLLI. ROT. 0 or +70
or -70 (Note 3)
Note 2: Select the angle (LAO 0 or LAO 120) for which the data obtained was worse in the first
two test.
Note 3: Select the FPD/COLLIMATOR angle (0 or +70 or -70) for which the data obtained was
worse in the first test.
Note 4: When TFP-1216A is not used in combination.
Note 5: When TFP-1216A is used in combination.
Measure magnification mode of FOV at the test position where the worst data was obtained for
the normal mode.
1140
No. 2J308-036EN*I
30.3 BLA-900A, BLA-900C
The system should be tested to ensure compliance with requirements when the system is
installed and when components are replaced. The test methods are as follows.
Test items Test methods Replaced components

Beam quality Refer to subsection 30.3.1. X-ray tube housing assembly
(HVL)
Alignment of the X-ray field Refer to subsection 30.3.2. X-ray tube housing assembly
with the fluoroscopic image
receptor
Flat panel detector
30.3.1 Method for checking the beam quality (HVL) of the BLA-900A or BLA-900C
(1) Measurement procedure
(a) Perform setting as shown in the figure below.
Detector: RaySafe Xi R/F detector manufactured by Unfors RaySafe AB

(Or Unfors Xi R/F detector manufactured by Unfors Instruments AB (former company name))
1141
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) Set the beam-hardening filter to the 0.2-mm copper filter.
(c) Select an exposure technique factor as specified below, tube current: 100 mA or
more, and exposure time: 100 ms or more.
BLA-900A: 80 kV
BLA-900C: 125 kV
(d) Generate X-rays and record the HVL value displayed on the measurement
instrument. Perform measurement three times and record the average value as the
HVL value.
(e) Perform the testing procedures from (c) to (d) for the following beam-hardening
filters.
 0.3-mm-thick copper filter

 0.5-mm-thick copper filter
 1.8-mm-thick aluminum filter (when the BLA-900A is used) or
2.0-mm-thick aluminum filter (when the BLA-900C is used)
 0.9-mm-thick copper filter (when the BLA-900C is used)
(2) Instrument
RaySafe Xi with R/F detector manufactured by Unfors RaySafe AB

(Or Unfors Xi with R/F detector manufactured by Unfors Instruments AB (former company
name))
(3) Rejection limit
The measured HVL value should be equal to or more than the value specified below.
BLA-900A: 3.19 mm Al (at 80 kV)

BLA-900C: 4.95 mm Al (at 125 kV)
1142
No. 2J308-036EN*I
30.3.2 Method for checking the alignment of the X-ray field relative to the fluoroscopic image receptor
for the BLA-900A or BLA-900C
(1) Test procedure
(a) Mount the test plate with holes at 10-mm intervals on the front of the detector.
Refer to figures 30.3.2-1 and 30.3.2-2.
X-ray detector (rectangular)
Test film
Test plate with grid
X-rays
SFD
Tube housing assembly
Figure 30.3.2-1 Test plate and test film setting procedure
1143
No. 2J308-036EN*I
For BLA-900A
For BLA-900C
Figure 30.3.2-2 Test plate
1144
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) Set the support unit at the test position that has been determined for each support
unit. Refer to table 30.3.2-1.
(c) Place a test film on the test plate. Refer to figure 30.3.2-3.
d
Developed test film
X-ray field
Visible area
a b
c
Figure 30.3.2-3 Measure the misalignment relative to the visible area

(For the test plate for BLA-900A)
(d) Measure the distance from the focus to the test film and record this value as the
SFD.
(e) Generate X-rays and develop the test film.
(f) Based on the fluoroscopic image displayed on the TV monitor, determine the visible
area. Then, draw a line on each edge of the visible area on the developed test film.
Refer to figure 30.3.2-3.
(g) Draw a line on the each edge of the X-ray field.

Then, measure the misalignment of each edge from the visible area and record the
measured values as a, b, c, and d. Refer to figure 30.3.2-3.
(h) Calculate the excess length (a + b) and the excess width (c + d).
(i) Calculate the sum of the excess length and the excess width (a + b + c + d).
(j) Repeat steps (b) to (h) at the various positions that have been determined for each
support unit. Refer to table 30.3.2-1.
1145
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(2) Equipment
Test plate with holes at 10-mm intervals. Refer to figure 30.3.2-2.
(3) Rejection limit
(a) The excess length or width of the X-ray field relative to the visible area should be
2.0% of the SFD or less.
(b) The sum of the excess length and the excess width relative to the visible area
should be 3.0% of the SFD or less.
Table 30.3.2-1 Test position (1/3)
Test position
Support Adjust position for
FPD orientation FOV
device X-ray field C-arm position
(Note 4)
LAO/RAO 0° Landscape (1) LAO 0°, CRA/CAU 0°
CRA/CAU 0° SID maximum and minimum
COLLIMATOR ROT. 0° and
FPD/COLLIMATOR ROT. 0° +135° and -135° (Note 1)
(2) LAO 90°, CAU 90°
SID and COLLIMATOR ROT.
(Note 2)
CAS-880A (3) RAO 90°, CAU 90°
CAS-830B SID and COLLIMATOR ROT.
(When BLA- (Note 2) Normal
900A is used
in combina- Portrait (4) LAO90°, CRA/CAU 0°
tion) SID maximum and minimum
COLLIMATOR ROT. 0°
(5) LAO 90°, CAU 90°
SID (Note 3)
COLLIMATOR ROT. 0°
(6) RAO 90°, CAU 90°
SID (Note 3)
COLLIMATOR ROT. 0°
Note 1: The COLLIMATOR ROT. angle can be set within the range of 135° by rotating
the support column of the support unit by 135°.
Note 2: Select the SID and the COLLIMATOR angle (0° or +135° or -135°) for which the
data obtained was worse in test (1).
Note 3: Select the SID for which the data obtained was worse in test (4).
Note 4: Only for the 12"  16" FPD, change the FPD orientation when performing tests.
For the 12"  12" FPD, perform tests (1) to (4).
After testing is performed in Normal mode, also perform testing in the remaining modes
(FOVs). At this time, use the test position at which the worst result was obtained in
Normal mode.
1146
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Support Adjust position for Test position

FOV
device X-ray field FPD orientation C-arm position
LAO 120° (1) LAO 120°, CRA/CAU 0° and
CRA/CAU 0° LAO 0°, CRA/CAU 0°
SID maximum and minimum
FPD/COLLIMATOR ROT. 0° TUBE/FPD UP/DOWN 0 cm
COLLIMATOR ROT. 0°
(2) TUBE/FPD UP +7 cm
COLLIMATOR ROT. 0°
LAO CRA/CAU and SID
(Note 1)
(3) TUBE/FPD DOWN -7 cm
COLLIMATOR ROT. 0°
LAO CRA/CAU and SID
(Note 1)
(4) LAO 120°, CRA/CAU 0° and
LAO 0°, CRA/CAU 0°
TUBE/FPD UP/DOWN 0 cm
COLLIMATOR ROT. +45°
CAS-820B
(When BLA- (5) TUBE/FPD UP +7 cm
900A is used COLLIMATOR ROT. +45° Normal
in combina- LAO CRA/CAU and SID
tion) (Note 2)
COLLIMATOR ROT. +45°
LAO CRA/CAU and SID
(Note 2)
(7) LAO 120°, CRA/CAU 0° and
TUBE/FPD UP/DOWN 0 cm
COLLIMATOR ROT. -45°
(8) TUBE/FPD UP +7 cm
LAO CRA/CAU and SID
(Note 3)
LAO CRA/CAU and SID
(Note 3)
Note 1: Select the arm position (LAO CRA/CAU SID) for which the data obtained was
worse in test (1).
Note 2: Select the arm position (LAO CRA/CAU SID) at which the worst result was
obtained in test (4).
Note 3: Select the arm position (LAO CRA/CAU SID) at which the worst result was
obtained in test (7).
After testing is performed in Normal mode, also perform testing in the remaining modes
(FOVs). At this time, use the test position at which the worst result was obtained in test
(1) to (3) (COLLIMATOR ROT. 0°), (4) to (6) (COLLIMATOR ROT. +45°), and (7) to (9)
(COLLIMATOR ROT. -45°).
1147
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Support device Adjust position for X-ray field Test position FOV
LAO 120°, CRA/CAU 0°,
I.I./Tube 0 cm
Normal
LAO 0°, CRA/CAU 0°,
CAS-820B LAO 0° I.I./Tube 0 cm
(When BLA- CRA/CAU 0°
900C is used LAO 0° or LAO 120°,
in combina- I.I./Tube 0 cm CRA/CAU 0°, I.I./Tube 7 cm
tion) SID: Stroke center (Note 1)
Normal
LAO 0° or LAO 120°,
CRA/CAU 0°, I.I./Tube -7 cm
(Note 1)
FPD/COLLI. ROT. 0° and
CAS-880A +70° and -70°
(When BLA- LAO/RAO 0° LAO 90°, CRA 50°
900C is used CRA/CAU 0° FPD/COLLI. ROT. 0° or +70° Normal
in combina- FPD/COLLI. ROT. 0° or -70° (Note 2)
tion) LAO 0°, CRA/CAU 0°
FPD/COLLI. ROT. 0° or +70°
or -70° (Note 2)
Note 1: Select the angle (LAO 0° or LAO 120°) for which the data obtained was worse in
the first two test.
Note 2: Select the FPD/COLLIMATOR angle (0° or +70° or -70°) for which the data
obtained was worse in the first test.
Measure magnification mode of FOV at the test position where the worst data was
obtained for the normal mode.
After all of the above tests are performed, set the conditions of the test in which the worst
result was obtained and perform testing for spot fluoroscopy.
The test procedure for spot fluoroscopy is described below.
<1> First quadrant: Set the minimum range of spot fluoroscopy in the
uppermost part and far right side of the field (Spot Posi.
X = 576, Y = 448).
<2> Second quadrant: Set the minimum range of spot fluoroscopy in
the uppermost part and far left side of the field (Spot Posi.
X = 448, Y = 448).
<3> Third quadrant: Set the minimum range of spot fluoroscopy in
the lowermost part and far left side of the field (Spot Posi.
X = 448, Y = 576).
<4> Fourth quadrant: Set the minimum range of spot fluoroscopy in
the lowermost part and far right side of the field (Spot Posi.
X = 576, Y = 576).
Compare the target ROI of spot fluoroscopy and the image of spot
fluoroscopy which are displayed on the fluoroscopic monitor to
measure the amount of exposure field misalignment.
(Checking "Last Image Hold" and "Last Image Hold (Spot)" allows
the target ROI of spot fluoroscopy and the spot fluoroscopy image to
be displayed on the LIH image in spot fluoroscopy).
1148
No. 2J308-036EN*I
31. APPENDIX 3
This section describes the operation of service functions that have been added in software version
3.61 or later. Refer to section 29 for functions that existed before V3.61 was developed.
31.1 PreProc/SNRF2 FPGA Data Download Tool
2. This tool is for changing PreProc and SNRF2 FPGA that supports SNRF. Do
not use this tool if PreProc and SNRF2 that supports SNRF is not installed in
the system.
NOTE: The license is required to use this tool.
31.1.1 Description of the window
No. Name Function description

<1> PreProc/SNRF2 Board 1 Settings for the first set
<2> PreProc/SNRF2 Board 2 Settings for the second set (required only for HSBP)
<3> FPGA Version Current FPGA version or error code is displayed.
<4> Abort Used to terminate downloading.
<5> Download Used to download the FPGA data to PreProc.
<7> Close Used to close the tool.
1149
No. 2J308-036EN*I
31.1.2 Using the PreProc FPGA data download tool
(2) After startup of the system, press [Ctrl] + [Alt] + [Delete] on the keyboard to display the
following System Reset window. Move the cursor to the blue bar on the upper part of the
window. Double-click the right mouse button.
(3) Click the [Cancel] button on the System Reset window to close the System Reset window.
(4) Move the cursor to the lower part of the screen and press the Windows key on the
keyboard to display the taskbar.
(5) Open Explorer and copy the PreProc data file from the CD-R to the location below.
For PX17-41910:
f:\celeve\data\fpga\PreProc_SNRF\Rev1\preproc.bin
For PX17-43412:
f:\celeve\data\fpga\PreProc_SNRF\Rev2\preproc.bin
For PX17-44911 (SNRF2)
f:\celeve\data\fpga\SNRF2\Rev1\SNRF2.bin
(6) Select the [Utility] tab in the window and click the [Service] button in the Service Tools
area.
(7) When the service license key entry window is displayed, enter the service license key.
(9) Select "PreProc/SNRF2 FPGA Update" from the Command List pull-down menu and
click the [GO] button.
1150
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(10) Click the [Download] button on the board to update the FPGA file. (Download starts and
the number on the display increases.)
To terminate downloading, click the [Abort] button.
(11) The following dialog is displayed. Click the [OK] button. Click the [Close] button on the
FPGA data download tool to close the window.
(12) Close the service software and shut down the system.
(14) After rebooting the system, start up FPGA data download tool again and confirm that the
specified file is displayed in FPGA Version.
1151
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Messages displayed in the Status area and handling
Error code Message displayed in

displayed in the Status area Description Handling
FPGA Version
- Ready... ---- -
- Downloading... Data is being -
downloaded.
- Preparing... Data is being -
prepared for
download.
- Verifying... Data downloaded in -
PreProc is being
verified.
- Aborted. The [Abort] button has -
Restart the system and been pressed.
0x0000 - The master ROM has Perform the update procedures.
started up.
0xFFFE The PreProc board is The PreProc board is Check whether or not the PreProc
not installed. not installed. board is installed and operating
normally.
0xFFFD The PreProc board is The PreProc board Check the version displayed on the
not equipped with the does not support the PreProc board and change it to a
FPGA data download data download version that supports the download
function. function. function.
This PreProc board is
not supported.
0xFFFC ERROR!! The RT software is Shut down the system and reboot.
0xFFF7 Fatal error occurred. not responding. Perform the update procedure
Restart the system. again. If the problem cannot be
resolved, contact (FS).
0xFFF9 Error!! After data is Click the [Download] button and
FPGA download failed. downloaded, it cannot perform the update procedures.
Please retry FPGA be verified.
download.
0xFFF8 ERROR!! Timeout occurred Shut down the system and reboot.
FPGA download failed. during data download. Then perform the update procedure
Restart the system and again. If the problem cannot be
retry FPGA download. resolved, contact (FS).
- ERROR!! The FPGA data file is Copy the FPGA data from CD-R
FPGA download failed. damaged. again and perform the update
The FPGA file is broken. procedure.
0xFFFB ERROR!! The FPGA data file Confirm that the FPGA data file is in
The FPGA data file is cannot be found. the specified location and perform
not found. the update procedure again.
- Error!! An unexpected error Shut down the system and reboot.
Unexpected error occurred. Perform the update procedure
occurred. again. If the problem cannot be
* When contacting (FS) about errors, give details of the error code displayed on the FPGA
Version field.
1152
No. 2J308-036EN*I
31.2 SNRF FPGA Data Download Tool
2. This tool is for changing SNRF FPGA. Do not use this tool if SNRF is not
installed in the system. For systems with SNRF2 installed, use the
PreProc/SNRF2 FPGA download tool.
NOTE: The license is required to use this tool.
31.2.1 Description of the window
No. Name Function description

<1> SNRF Board 1 Settings for the first set
<2> SNRF Board 2 Settings for the second set (required only for HSBP)
<3> FPGA Version Current FPGA version or error code is displayed.
<4> Abort Used to terminate downloading.
<5> Download Used to download the FPGA data to SNRF.
<7> Close Used to close the tool.
1153
No. 2J308-036EN*I
31.2.2 Using the SNRF FPGA data download tool
(2) After startup of the system, press [Ctrl] + [Alt] + [Delete] on the keyboard to display the
following System Reset window. Move the cursor to the blue bar on the upper part of the
window. Then double-click the right mouse button.
(3) Click the [Cancel] button in the System Reset window to close the window.
(4) Move the cursor to the lower part of the screen and press the Windows key on the
keyboard to display the taskbar.
(5) Open Explorer and copy the SNRF data file from the CD-R to the location below.
For PX17-41911:
f:\celeve\data\fpga\SNRF\Rev1\SNRF.bin
For PX17-43536:
f:\celeve\data\fpga\SNRF\Rev2\SNRF.bin
(6) Select the [Utility] tab in the window and click the [Service] button in the Service Tools
area.
(7) When the service license key entry window is displayed, enter the service license key.
(9) Select "SNRF FPGA Update" from the Command List pull-down menu and click [GO].
1154
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(10) Click the [Download] button on the board for updating the FPGA file. (Download starts
and the number on the display increases.)
To stop downloading, click the [Abort] button.
(11) The following dialog is displayed. Click the [OK] button. Click the [Close] button on the
FPGA data download tool to close the window.
(12) Close the service software and shut down the system.
(14) Start up FPGA data download tool again and confirm that the specified file is displayed in
FPGA Version.
1155
No. 2J308-036EN*I
Messages displayed on the Status area and handling
Error code Message displayed in

displayed in the Status area Description Handling
FPGA Version
- Ready... ---- -
- Downloading... Data is being -
downloaded.
- Preparing... Data is being -
prepared for
download.
- Verifying... Data downloaded in -
SNRF is being
verified.
- Aborted. The [Abort] button is -
Restart the system and pressed.
0x0000 - The master ROM is Perform the update procedures.
started up.
0xFFFE The SNRF board is not The SNRF board is Check whether or not the SNRF
installed. not installed. board is installed and operating
normally.
0xFFFD The SNRF board is not The SNRF board Check the version displayed on the
equipped with the FPGA does not support the SNRF board and change it to a
data download function. data download version that supports the download
This SNRF board is not function. function.
supported.
0xFFFC ERROR!! The RT software does Shut down and reboot the system.
0xFFF7 Fatal error occurred. not respond. Perform the update procedure
Restart the system. again. If the problem cannot be
0xFFF9 Error!! After data is Click the [Download] button and
FPGA download failed. downloaded, it cannot perform the update procedure.
Please retry FPGA be verified.
download.
0xFFF8 ERROR!! Timeout occurred Shut down the system and reboot.
FPGA download failed. during data Then perform the update procedure
Restart the system and downloading. again. If the problem cannot be
retry FPGA download. resolved, contact (FS).
- ERROR!! The FPGA data file is Copy the FPGA data from CD-R
FPGA download failed. damaged. again and perform the update
The FPGA file is broken. procedures.
0xFFFB ERROR!! The FPGA data file Confirm that the FPGA data file is in
The FPGA data file is cannot be found. the specified location and perform
not found. the update procedures again.
- Error!! An unexpected error Shut down the system and reboot.
Unexpected error occurred. Perform the update procedures
occurred. again. If the problem cannot be
0xFFF5 SNRF2 is installed. SNRF2 is installed to Because the SNRF2 PWB is used,
Please use the system. use the PreProc/SNRF2 FPGA
PreProc/SNRF2 Fpga download tool.
Update tool.
* When contacting (FS) about errors, give details of the error code displayed on the FPGA
Version field.
1156
No. 2J308-036EN*I
31.3 ADIF FPGA Data Download Tool
2. This is a dedicated tool for changing the FPGA on ADIF board PX17-45526 or a
later version. It cannot be used for ADIF board PX17-42291 or an earlier
version.
NOTE: Note that a license is required in order to use the tool.
No. Name Description of function

<1> ADIF Board ADIF board setting
<2> FPGA Version The current FPGA design date or error code is displayed.
<3> Abort Downloading is interrupted.
<4> Download FPGA data is downloaded to the ADIF.
<6> Close The tool is closed.
1157
No. 2J308-036EN*I
31.3.2 Operating method
(2) Press [Ctrl] + [Alt] + [Delete] to display the following "System Reset" window. Move the
cursor to the blue bar and double-click the right mouse button.
(4) Move the cursor to the bottom of the window and press the Windows key on the
(5) Start up Explorer and copy the ADIF data file from the CD-R to the following location.
f:\celeve\data\fpga\ADIF\Rev2\ADIF.bin
(6) Stat up the service software and select "Command Line" on the [Utils] tab.
The following window is displayed.
(7) Select "ADIF FPGA Update" in the Command List pull-down menu and then click the [GO]
button.
1158
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(8) Click the [Download] button (Downloading starts.)

To interrupt the processing, click the [Abort] button.
(9) After the following dialog is displayed, click [OK] and then [Close] to close the "FPGA
data download tool".
(10) Close the software and then shut down the system.
(12) Restart the FPGA data download tool to confirm that the FPGA version is the specified
file.
1159
No. 2J308-036EN*I
31.3.3 Message list
Messages and corrective actions displayed in the status display area
Error code Messages displayed in Meaning Corrective action

displayed in the the status display area
FPGA version
display area
- Ready... - -
- Preparing... Preparation for data -
downloading is in
progress.
- Downloading... Downloading is in -
progress.
- Aborted. The [Abort] button was -
Restart the system and clicked.
0x0000 - Startup was performed Perform the update procedure.
using the Master ROM.
0xFFFE ERROR!! The ADIF board is not Confirm that the ADIF board is installed
The ADIF board is not installed. and that it operates normally.
installed.
0xFFFD The V-IF board is not This ADIF board does Check the revision of the ADIF board and
equipped with the FPGA not support the replace it with one that supports the
data download function. download function. download function.
This ADIF board is not
supported.
0xFFFC ERROR!! The RT software does After shutting down the system, restart
0xFFF7 Fatal error occurred. not respond. the system and then perform the update
Restart the system. procedure again. If the problem is not
corrected, contact (FS).
0xFFF9 ERROR!! Verification of the Click the [Download] button to perform
FPGA download failed. downloaded data failed. the update procedures again.
Please retry FPGA
download.
0xFFF8 ERROR!! A timeout occurred Shut down the system, restart the
FPGA download failed. while downloading the system, and perform the update
Restart the system and data. procedures again.
retry FPGA download. If the problem is not corrected, contact
(FS).
0xFFFB ERROR!! The FPGA data file Confirm that the FPGA data file exists at
The FPGA data file is not could not be found. the specified location. Then, perform the
found. update procedures again.
0xFFFF ERROR!! An unexpected error Shut down the system. Then, restart the
Unexpected error occurred. system and perform the update
occurred. procedure again.
If the problem is not corrected, contact
(FS).
* When reporting an error code to (FS), also report the error code displayed in the FPGA
Version field.
1160
No. 2J308-036EN*I
31.4 Pre-Operation Check Support Function
A function supporting the daily pre-operation check of the system is described below. The pre-
operation check is performed to see if the system operates normally performing fluoroscopy
(fluoroscopy acquisition)/radiography using a copper plate or user's unique phantom. Using this
support function, if the dedicated protocol with sequential navigation setting is used, X-ray
conditions, brightness and dose rate can be analyzed and stored, and displayed with past data by
performing fluoroscopy (fluoroscopy acquisition)/radiography. In V4.22 or later, tube current for
One Shot radiography can also be checked.
Refer to the operation manual for information on using the pre-operation check support function.
31.4.1 Examination protocol for pre-operation check support function
The examination protocol described below is set at the time of shipment. Customize it
according to the user's needs. (For example: Delete the DSA program if the user does not
need it.)
Examination protocol name Remarks

WakeUpCheck
F.D.-WakeUpCheck This cannot be deleted or edited.
Click [Add] to copy this.
1161
No. 2J308-036EN*I
31.4.2 Customizing the initial setting data
The data displayed in the Initial Data field can be customized. Click the [Edit Initial Param.]
button in the window below and perform customization setting on the displayed window.
1162
No. 2J308-036EN*I
If necessary, enter values to change the settings.
Click the [Set Current Result] button to automatically enter the current analysis data for each
item. To display the analysis data in the "Initial Data" area in the report window, click the [OK]
button. To close the initial data edit window without displaying the analysis data in the report
window, click the [Cancel] button.
NOTE: For INFX-8000V CF/BP and VF/BP, the systems data can be edited separately for
the lateral and frontal planes on the corresponding tabs. For INFX-8000F DP
systems, data can be edited separately for Tube 1 and Tube 2 in the same manner
as above.
1163
No. 2J308-036EN*I
31.4.3 Customizing the information display
Past data as well as "Initial Data" and "This Time" are displayed in the report window. The
amount of past data can be customized. Edit the INI file using notepad.exe and change the
setting in response to customer demand.
Item Description Remarks

File location F:Celeve\TxsSite\
TxsMaintenancePrtclMgr
File name TxsMaintenancePrtclMgr.ini
Section for the setting [WakeUpPrtcl]
Setting key ListNum Range of the setting
From 1 to 10
Example of the setting
Display of the past five data
1164
No. 2J308-036EN*I
31.4.4 Data transmission to InnerVision
In sites that are connected to InnerVision, displayed data is transmitted to InnerVision as csv
files when the [OK] button is pressed on the report window during pre-operation check. One
csv file can store up to 180 past data items.
NOTE: If an examination is terminated without displaying report window even once, the
report window is displayed automatically. If the [OK] button in the report window is
clicked, the analysis data is transferred to InnerVision even if the examination is
terminated.
(1) Transmission settings
The LogFTP editing tool is used for transmission settings. It edits the FTP transmission
file (F:\Celeve\TxsSit\TxsLogFTP\TxsLogFTP.ini). Setting of the tool is also necessary at
sites that are not connected to InnerVision.
(a) Setting procedures at sites with InnerVision installed
<1> After activating the system, activate the service software and select
"Command Line" on the [Utils] tab.
<2> Select "LogFTP Edit Tool" from the Command List pull-down menu and click
the [GO] button.
<3> The following screen will be displayed. Select "Service Processor

(FTP Transfer)".
<4> Enter the IP address and site ID of the SP workstation.
<5> Select [OK] to finish.
Transmission destination in InnerVision: _log.dir/yyyymmddhhmmsstttS_DIAG.csv

yyyymmddhhmmssttt shows the year,
month, day, hour, minute, second and
millisecond.
1165
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(b) Setting procedures at sites that are not connected to InnerVision
<1> After activating the system, activate the service software, and select
"Command Line" on the [Utils] tab.
<2> Select "LogFTP Edit Tool" from the Command List pull-down menu and click
the [GO] button.
<3> The following screen will be displayed. Select "Local Drive".
<4> Select [OK] to finish.
NOTE: 1. The original pre-modification ini file is saved in the same folder as
TxsLogFTP.ini.bak.
2. File transmission is not performed for sites that are not connected to InnerVision.
However, data is stored in the following file. Data can be saved to CD-R using the
CD-R tool, which can be accessed by clicking the [System] button on the [Utils] tab.
Make sure that the original files are not deleted during operation.
F: \celeve\TxsSite\TxslmgCheck\TxsImgCheck.csv
1166
No. 2J308-036EN*I
31.4.5 Termination of the pre-operation check support function
To terminate the pre-operation check support function, click the [Finish Study] button to
terminate examination.
NOTE: If an examination is terminated without displaying report window even once, the
report window is displayed automatically. If the [OK] button in the report window is
clicked, the analysis data is transferred to InnerVision even if the examination is
terminated.
31.4.6 Checking the tube current (V4.22 or later)
During operational checking of One Shot radiography, variation of the tube current for each
focus is measured. If the tube current exceeds the reference value, a message dialog is
displayed prompting the user to perform adjustment using the tube current adjustment support
function (X-ray Self-Adjustment Tool, refer to subsection 31.11) or to contact the Toshiba
service representative for adjustment.
The conditions under which the message is displayed are subject to change in accordance
with instructions from TMSC.
CAUTION: When One Shot radiography is performed, set the system to the ready state,
confirm that the X-ray control unit is set, and then press the exposure
handswitch to increase measurement accuracy.
The setting points are specified below.
Items Value Remarks

Location of the file F:\Celeve\TxsSite\TxsMaintenancePrtclMgr
File name TxsMpmWakeUpCalc.ini
Setting section [DEFAULT_PARAM]
Setting key UpperLimit = 100 It is not necessary to
LowerLimit = 85 change the value unless
otherwise instructed.
1167
No. 2J308-036EN*I
31.5 Constancy Test Support Function
The function for supporting the constancy test (the test performed by the user for managing their
system), that is recommended in the IEC/JIS standards, is described in this subsection.
In the constancy test, fluoroscopy (fluoroscopic image acquisition) and radiography are
performed using a copper plate and the image quality evaluation phantom (PTW phantom) and
variations with time in the image quality are acquired as numerical data. Using the support
function, placement of the phantom, fluoroscopy (fluoroscopic image acquisition), and
radiography can be performed using the dedicated protocol with sequential navigation; and X-ray
conditions, low contrast resolution, and spatial resolution can be analyzed and recorded.
31.5.1 Study protocol for supporting the constancy test
Study protocol name Remarks

ConstancyTest A-B
F.D. - ConstancyTest A-B Deletion or editing is not possible. Use this protocol by pressing
[Add] and copying it.
F.D. - ConstancyTest F-L Provided only for the biplane system. The order of the
acquisition programs in this protocol differs from that in the
above protocol. Data acquisition is possible for each plane in
this protocol. Deletion or editing is not possible. Use this
protocol by pressing [Add] and copying it.
1168
No. 2J308-036EN*I
31.5.2 Procedure for acquiring the data (single-plane system)
(1) Start the constancy test.
(a) Select the study protocol for the constancy test (ConstancyTest A-B) and start the
examination. X-ray conditions, fluoroscopy mode, and radiography mode are
automatically selected when the examination is started.
(2) Acquire images of copper plates.
(a) Perform autopositioning for the arm and the tabletop to set them in place following
the guide displayed on the reference monitor.
(b) Place two 1-mm copper plates on the beam limiting device cover.
(c) Perform fluoroscopic image acquisition, DA, and DSA following the guide.
Switching from DA to DSA is automatically performed by the sequential navigation
function.
(3) Acquire images of the PTW phantom.
(a) Remove the copper plates from the beam limiting device cover.
(b) Perform autopositioning following the guide.
(c) Place the PTW phantom on the table and adjust the tabletop position and table
height so that the phantom is aligned with the markers on the fluoroscopy monitor.
At this time, raise the table so that the phantom is close to the front surface of the
FPD (about 1-cm clearance) in order to facilitate positioning.
(d) Perform fluoroscopic image acquisition, DA, and DSA following the guide.
1169
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(4) Terminate the constancy test.
(a) Terminate the examination.
NOTE: 1. To acquire images again, select [Prev] in the examination room menu and set the
radiographic program again.
2. When placing the copper plates, if autopositioning fails due to timeout, selecting
[A-Pos#] in the examination room menu allows autopositioning to be performed
again. When placing the PTW phantom, if autopositioning fails due to timeout and
the radiographic program is not switched, select [Next] to perform autopositioning
again.
3. The function of each button displayed in the examination room menu is as follows.
 [A-Pos#] : When the radiographic program of which autopositioning link is set is

selected, use this button to set the target position for autopositioning.
 [Prev] : Use this button to switch from the current radiographic program to
the last radiographic program. (*1)
 [Next] : Use this button to switch from the current radiographic program to
the next radiographic program. (*1)
(*1) If the autopositioning link function is set for the radiographic program to be
selected, autopositioning must be executed. Otherwise, the radiographic
program is not switched even if [Prev] or [Next] is selected.
31.5.3 Procedure for acquiring the data (biplane system)
(a) Select the study protocol for supporting the constancy test (ConstancyTest A-B)
and start the examination.
(2) Acquire images of copper plates (frontal side).
1170
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) Acquire images of copper plates (lateral side).
(a) Remove the copper plates from the F-side beam limiting device cover.
(b) Following the guide on the reference monitor, perform autopositioning for the arm
and tabletop to set them in place. At this time, the -arm is not switched to the AP
position and is stopped at the 70-cm position of the tabletop longitudinal stroke.
Change the -arm manually to the AP position.
(c) Place two 1-mm copper plates on the L-side beam limiting device cover.
(d) Perform fluoroscopic image acquisition, DA, and DSA following guide.
(4) Acquire images of the PTW phantom (frontal side).
(a) Remove the copper plates from the L-side beam limiting device cover.
1171
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(5) Acquire image of the PTW phantom (lateral side).
(a) Perform autopositioning following the guide. At this time, the -arm is not switched
to the AP position and is stopped at the 70-cm position of the tabletop longitudinal
stroke. Change the -arm manually to the AP position.
(b) Adjust the tabletop position and table height so that the phantom is aligned with the
markers on the fluoroscopy monitor.
CAUTION: 1. In biplane systems, when autopositioning is performed for one plane, the arm
on the other plane is moved to the park position. To not move the arm to the
park position, cancel all autopositioning number link settings for the radiographic
program in the study protocol for the constancy test (refer to subsection 9.3.12
"Autopositioning number link setting" of the reference manual). If the link
function is cancelled, the arm position and the SID must be set properly by
manual operation during the constancy test.
2. When images are acquired on the lateral side, be sure to set the -arm to the
LL position (*1). If the -arm is set to the RL position and images are acquired
at the target position, the acquired images are reversed and correct analysis
results cannot be obtained. For the same reason, do not use the function for
displaying the acquired images in the reverse direction.
Note that if the -arm is set to the RL position (default position for the FPD12
biplane system and FPD1216/FPD12 biplane system), autopositioning is
disabled.
(*1) LL position: The standard arm position of which the FPD is set on the
patient left side
1172
No. 2J308-036EN*I
31.5.4 Procedure for acquiring the data (dual-plane system)
(a) Select the study protocol for the constancy test (ConstancyTest A-B) and start the
examination. For the setting in which the study protocol for the tube that is not
currently selected is selected, the study protocol for the constancy test is
automatically selected. Click the [OK] button without changing the selection.
(2) Acquire images of copper plates (currently selected tube side)
(3) Acquire images of the PTW phantom (currently selected tube side).
(a) Remove the copper plates from the beam limiting device cover.
1173
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(4) Acquire images of copper plates and the PTW phantom (non-currently selected tube
side).
(a) Switch the tube and acquire images in the same manner as in steps (2) and (3).
CAUTION: If the CAS-830A is set to the park position, autopositioning to the preset position
cannot be performed. Execute autopositioning No. 95 and set the CAS-830A to
the reference position of the arm on the patient head end.
After the CAS-830A is set on the patient head end, select [A-Pos#] in the
examination room menu, since autopositioning No.11 has failed due to timeout.
Then execute autopositioning No. 11 again.
31.6 Remote Maintenance Function
The remote maintenance function allows the system to be remotely operated from the service PC.
The system can continue to be operated by users even when the remote maintenance function is
enabled. This function facilitates analysis of system malfunctions and training on optimal use the
system.
CAUTION: The remote maintenance function can be enabled or disabled by users at their
convenience. While the remote maintenance function is enabled, the remote
connection icon is displayed on the system monitor and a message indicating that
the system is remotely connected is displayed on the monitor in the examination
room.
If the system is not operated for a certain period of time while the system is
remotely connected, the remote connection is automatically terminated.
Refer to (I) "Security Setting" of step (2) "System Management" of subsection 5.2.5 "Config.
window" for details regarding setting of the remote maintenance function. Be sure to reboot the
system after the setting for the remote maintenance option is changed (switched ON (checked) or
OFF (unchecked)).
1174
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(1) Setting confirmation
Option settings
<1>
<2> <3>
No. Descriptions Remarks

<1> Remote maintenance option Check to turn ON the remote maintenance option.
check box Uncheck to turn OFF the remote maintenance
option.
<2> Radio button for enabling the When the remote maintenance option is turned ON,
remote maintenance function select this radio button to enable the remote
maintenance function.
<3> Radio button for disabling the When the remote maintenance option is turned ON,
remote maintenance function select this radio button to disable the remote
maintenance function.
1175
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(a) If the remote maintenance option has been turned OFF, confirm that the [Remote
Maint. Permit] button is not displayed in the "Service Tools" area on the [utility] tab.
(b) If the remote maintenance option is ON and the remote maintenance function is
enabled, confirm that the [Remote Maint. Permit] button is displayed in the "Service
Tools" area on the [Utility] tab and is enabled.
1176
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(c) If the remote maintenance option is ON, but the remote maintenance function is
disabled, confirm that the [Remote Maint. Permit] button is displayed in the "Service
Tools" area on the [Utility] tab, but is disabled.
(2) Operational check
Confirm that the function operates as described in the PC Anywhere installation manual.
1177
No. 2J308-036EN*I
31.7 SPD Data Acquisition Support Function
The ROI display function in Exam mode is used when phantom acquisition is performed to
acquire image data for system installation, detector replacement, FIQ parameter change or
periodic check etc.
In sites with InnerVision installed, results of ROI measurement in Exam mode can be transmitted
to InnerVision.
The support functions used for transmitting data to InnerVision and storing data in CD-R are
described below.
31.7.1 File transmission settings
Refer to 31.4.4 (1) "Transmission settings". Be aware that the following contents differ from
the reference destination.
Transmission destination in Inner Vision; _log.dir/yyyymmddhhmmsstttS_IMGPARAM
"yyyymmddhhmmss" shows year, month, date, hour, minute, and second.
NOTE: For sites that are not connected to InnerVision, data files are stored in the system
HDD. Data can be saved in CD-R using the CD-R tool, which can be accessed by
clicking the [System] button on the [Utils] tab.
As data is not automatically deleted, data reduction should be performed periodically
to prevent the system HDD becoming full.
F:\celeve\LogRoot\yyyymmddhhmmsstttS_IMGPARAM
* "yyyymmddhhmmss" shows year, month, date, hour, minute, and second.
1178
No. 2J308-036EN*I
31.7.2 Acquiring SPD data
(1) Perform examination.
(2) Acquire an image and perform ROI analysis in Exam mode.
(3) Place the mouse cursor on the position indicated below. Then double right-click the
mouse while holding down the [Ctrl] and [Shift] keys.
1179
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(4) The following window is displayed. Click the [OK] button.
The ROI measurement information on the displayed frame is transmitted to InnerVision.
(5) To perform analysis for another frame, change frames. Then perform the procedures in
steps (3) and (4).
1180
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(6) Check the files in InnerVision. As they are saved in csv format, check the files using
notepad.exe.
(a) A file is created for every transmission.
(b) A file includes several items of ROI data (four in the example below).
NOTE: If the transmission to InnerVision fails, the following window is displayed. Check
the file transmission setting and the setting for connection to InnerVision etc.
If the SPD data transmission function is used, "Static Data" information is

transmitted, regardless of the checkbox setting in the ROI Calculation window.
1181
No. 2J308-036EN*I
31.8 Edge Mask
In ADCF setting, severe white artifacts may appear at the edges of the image display frame. This
section describes the procedure for setting the edge mask at the edges of the frame to eliminate
such artifacts.
31.8.1 Setting procedure (V4.00)
(1) Folder containing the file to which the edge mask is set
 F:\Celeve\TxsSite\TxsRTService
(2) The file for which the setting is changed
 TxsRTPreProc_mask.ini
(3) Changes to the setting
 Back up the file and then edit the file.

 The edge mask can be used for images with the normal FOV only. For biplane
radiography, setting must be performed separately for the F and L sides.
(4) Maximum value of the edge mask
Set a value lower than the value specified below.
 For 512 : 6
 For 1024 : 12
1182
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(5) Setting the changes
(a) After the parameters have been changed, save the file.
(b) Open "System" in service mode.
(c) Press [Save] without changing the setting.
(d) Restart the system.
1183
No. 2J308-036EN*I
31.8.2 Setting procedures
Set with the edge mask setup tool. This tool allows the user to adjust the set values while
observing fluoroscopic or radiographic images.
(1) Click [Edge Mask] button on the [Utility] tab to activate.
(2) Enter service password.
(3) The following screen will be displayed. Adjust the edge mask values.
Setting screen for TFP-800A/TFP-1216A dualplane (TUBE1) system
Item Description
Mag Select the Mag (N, Mag1, Mag2) to set the edge mask. The availability of the setting is
based on the detector. The options that cannot be set for the Mag are not displayed in
the pulldown menu.
Frontal (1st), The widths of edge mask for Frontal (1st TUBE) and Lateral (2nd TUBE) can be set
*1
Lateral (2nd) based on the image size. The maximum value that can be entered is 20 for 1024  1024
and 10 for 512  512. For dual-plane systems, the current TUBE can be input, but not
the other side. The input area for the other TUBE is grayed out and cannot be input.
Reload For dual-plane systems, enables the input for the current support unit. The input area
for the support unit set at park position is grayed out and cannot be input.
Apply Applies the changes to the system. When "Successfully downloaded!" is displayed, the
changes have been applied.
Cancel Terminates the tool.
*1 For TFP-1216A, the minimum value is 128 and the maximum is 148.
1184
No. 2J308-036EN*I
31.8.3 Check procedure
(1) Insertion direction of the support unit
After the edge mask is applied, the image displayed on the monitor is rotated and the
image orientation (up/down, left/right) may be changed according to the FPD mounting
orientation. When checking the image, be sure to insert the support unit as shown below.
Common to C-arm units : LAO/RAO = 0°, CRA/CAU = 0°
 CAS-880A + TFP-800A : Patient head end

 CAS-880A + TFP-1200A : Patient left side
 CAS-880A + TFP-1216A : 180° rotation of the images acquired from the patient
head end (landscape) (*1)
 CAS-830A + TFP-1216A : Patient head end (landscape)
Common to -arm units : LAO = 90°, CRA/CAU = 0°
 CAS-820B + TFP-800A : 90° CCW rotation of the acquired images (*1)

 CAS-820B + TFP-1200A : 90° CW rotation of the acquired images (*1)
*1 After image acquisition, rotate an image with annotations in Current Case mode
and check the image. (This is different from image inversion. Keep this in mind.)
(2) Check the image.
1185
No. 2J308-036EN*I
31.9 Reference Line Display for Radiation Field Alignment
Displays a reference cross line for radiation field alignment. There are 2 setting methods. One is
to use the system settings and the other is to make the setting through the beam limiting device
aperture support tool.
31.9.1 Setting using system settings
(1) Display procedure
(a) Start the service setting using DFP console. Select "Command Line" on the [Utils]
tab.
(b) Set "Nt Command Interpreter" in the Command List. Input

"f:\celeve\bat\utility\registry\ComLib_CrossLineDisp_ON.reg" in the parameter
column. Then click the [GO] button.
(c) Reboot DFP.
(2) Cancellation procedure
(a) Start the service setting using DFP console. Select "Command Line" on the [Utils]
tab.
(b) Set "Nt Command Interpreter" in the Command List. Input

"f:\celeve\bat\utility\registry\ComLib_CrossLineDisp_OFF.reg" in the parameter
column. Then click the [GO] button.
(c) Reboot DFP.
31.9.2 Setting from the beam limiting device aperture support tool (referred to below as "support tool")
(1) Display procedure
(a) Select [Utility] tab  "Aperture Adjust" using the DFP console.
(b) NOTE dialog will be displayed after activating the support tool. Click [OK].
(c) Click [CROSS LINE] on the lower left of the support tool screen. (Reference line
will be displayed on the fluoroscopy monitor.)
(2) Cancellation procedure
(a) Click [CROSS LINE] on the lower left of the support tool screen again.
(b) Click [EXIT] on the lower right of the support tool screen to terminate the support
tool.
* No buttons other than those mentioned above are used here.
1186
No. 2J308-036EN*I
31.10 ABC ROI Setup Tool
This tool is used to change the ROI number of the default ROI (#1 to #3) and the default ROI
Type in the system data.
(1) After activating the system, activate the service software and select "Command Line" on the
[Utils] tab.
(2) Select "ABC ROI Setup" from the Command List pull-down menu and click the [GO] button.
1187
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) The following screen is displayed.
(4) Select the Study Protocol to be changed.
(5) Select the Acquisition Program to be changed.
(6) Select the ROI (#1 to #3) to be changed.
1188
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(7) Select the ROI Type to be allocated for (6).
(8) Repeat steps (6) and (7) to continue changing the ROI.
Select the Default ROI No. (#1 to #3) when there are no more changes to make.
(9) To select a different acquisition program, repeat steps (4) to (8) after selecting [Save].
* If [Save] has not yet been selected, it is possible to return to the original settings by
selecting [Reset].
When all changes have been made, select [Close].
1189
No. 2J308-036EN*I
31.11 X-ray Self-Adjustment Tool
The X-ray self-adjustment tool is provided to allow the user to simply adjust the tube current. If
tube current changes over time are found during checking of One Shot radiography in the pre-
operational check, a message is displayed prompting the user to readjust the tube current using
this tool.
31.11.1 Window information
Select Utility  X-ray Self-Adjustment Tool. The X-ray Self-Adjustment Tool window is
displayed as shown below. For the operating procedure, refer to the operation manual and the
operating procedure of the reference monitor.
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<1> Message display : The work contents and the procedure are displayed.
<2> Adjust : The adjustment status is displayed.
<3> Check : The check status is displayed.
<4> Progress : Operation progress is displayed.
<5> [Exit] : Closes the window.
When instructed, hold down the radiography switch or fluoroscopy switch. The progress of the
operation can be checked in the window. Note that it may take longer than normal fluoroscopy
to generate X-rays when the fluoroscopy switch is held down during this work. Be aware of
this.
1190
No. 2J308-036EN*I
31.11.2 Explanation to the user and setting the administrator
The user does not routinely employ this function. Be sure to explain the operating procedure
for this function to the user. It is available by default for users with administrator privileges. If
HIPAA is used, it is also possible for users with service privileges to start up the tool.
To change the password, select System/User Manager in Utility mode and then select
Properties. The Properties window is displayed and the password can be changed in the
window.
User Manager window Properties window
31.11.3 Precautions
(1) If readjustment is required frequently in the pre-operational check, focus selection may
be set to "Fixed" in acquisition programs. In this case, it is recommended to change to
"Auto".
(2) For the user's ease of operation, this tool allows only simplified checking and adjustment.
It is therefore recommended that the tube current be adjusted using the normal tube
current adjustment function at the time of periodic inspection.
(3) Even if readjustment is required during the pre-operational check, examinations can be
performed using the system. Adjustment should be performed when the system is not
used for clinical examinations.
1191
No. 2J308-036EN*I
31.12 Large-Screen Monitor Setting Tool
This tool is used to change the system default layout and the IP address of the large-screen
monitor.
(1) After the system is started up, start up the service software and select "Command Line" on
the Utils tab.
(2) In the Command List pull-down menu, select "LMM Setting Tool" and click [Go].
1192
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(3) The following window is displayed.
(4) Set the IP address of Large Monitor Manager (LMM56800) in the "LMM IP" field.
(5) Set the system default layout* in the "System Default Layout" field.
*The layout to be applied to the large-screen monitor immediately after startup of the system
(before starting the examination) and after completion of the examination.
(6) Click [OK] to close the tool.
31.13 Time Server Setting Tool
This tool is used to perform ON/OFF setting of the function for setting the correct time that is
activated at the time of system startup and to set the IP address of the time data source server.
(1) After the system is started up, start up the service software and select "Command Line" on
the Utils tab.
(2) In the Command List pull-down menu, select "Time Server Setting Tool" and Click [Go].
(3) The following window is displayed.
(4) Place a checkmark in the checkbox to set the function for setting the correct time to ON.
(5) Set the IP address of the time data source server.
1193
No. 2J308-036EN*I
(6) Execute [Ping]/[Test] and confirm that time data can be obtained from the specified server.
(7) Click [OK] to save the settings, terminate the tool, and reboot the system.
Message dialog boxes and actions to be taken
Displayed dialog Meaning Action to be taken

Ping to the server Click [Test] and check that the time can be
has been performed obtained from the server.
successfully.
Ping to the server Check the network connection status.

has failed.
Check that the server is started up.
Time data has been -

successfully obtained
from the server.
Time data acquisition Check the server status.

from the server has (If the NTP server is not running, this
failed. function cannot be used.)
It is likely that there is a problem with the
time data source server. Contact the
hospital network administrator.
(8) To disable the function for setting the correct time, remove the checkmark from the
checkbox and click [OK] to save the setting. Then terminate the tool and reboot the system.
1194 E
LEGAL MANUFACTURER
1385, SHIMOISHIGAMI, OTAWARA-SHI, TOCHIGI-KEN 324-8550, JAPAN

No. 2J308-036EN I: Toshiba Medical Systems Corporation 2010-2012 All Rights Reserved

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

No. 2J308-036EN I: Toshiba Medical Systems Corporation 2010-2012 All Rights Reserved

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

No. 2J308-036EN I: Toshiba Medical Systems Corporation 2010-2012 All Rights Reserved

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

No.

PERFORMANCE CHECK MANUAL

 TOSHIBA MEDICAL SYSTEMS CORPORATION 2010-2012

1. No part of this manual may be copied or reprinted, in whole or in part,

REV. DATE REASON PAGE SER. DOC.

INI. 2010-04 Mr. Uehara ------- TM-WP2

*A 2010-08 Support of V4.10, V4.22 Mr. Ishikawa All pages

*B 2010-12 Support of V4.23 Mr. Ishikawa All pages

*C 2011-03 Addition of descriptions for V4.23 All pages

*D 2011-06 Support of V4.25 Mr. Ishikawa All pages

*E 2011-08 Follow up Mr. Ishikawa All pages

*F 2011-11 Support of V4.30 Mr. Ishikawa All pages

*G 2012-04 Support of V4.40 Mr. Ishikawa All pages

*H 2012-06 Follow up Mr. Ishikawa All pages TM-WP2G

*I 2012-10 Support of V4.50 Mr. Ozawa All pages

1. Meaning of Signal Words

Signal word Meaning

DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will

WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

2. Post a sign reading "INSPECTION IN PROGRESS" on the entrance of the

3. Be sure to inform co-workers before turning ON the power of the

4. Do not operate this system in an atmosphere containing flammable gases

5. When the system must be stopped in an emergency, immediately press

6. Press the X-ray exposure switch only when exposure is to be performed.

7. When it is necessary to work on the interior of the system to replace

Since the system contains charged sections, be sure to check residual

Do not change measuring points or connect/disconnect connectors while

3. Do not spill or spray disinfectant, detergent, or water on the system or on the

4. Wear a safety helmet and safety shoes during work.

6. When moving the system, be sure to check the following points.

8. Exercise extreme care to ensure safety, because heavy units must be

2. The low-voltage cables and signal cables must be routed separately.

Safety Precautions ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4

2.1 Manuals Required ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 26

2.2 Measuring Instruments and Tools Required -------------------------------------------------------------- 26

2.3 Parts to Be Prepared (Recommended) --------------------------------------------------------------------- 27

3. CHECKS BEFORE TURNING ON THE POWER SUPPLY ---------------------------------------------------- 30

3.1 Checking the Voltage Setting of the System Transformer --------------------------------------------- 30

3.3 DFP-8000A Setting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 32

3.3.1 PWB setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 32

3.3.2 Setting the Multi drive ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 46

3.3.3 Setting the USB extender ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 47

3.3.4 DIP switch setting of the VIDEO card ---------------------------------------------------------- 48

3.3.6 Setting of main console C ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 52

3.4 CAS-810A Setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 53

3.4.1 PWB setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 53

3.4.2 Statuses of the POWER/SERVO UNIT -------------------------------------------------------- 54

3.5 CAS-830A, CAS-830B Setting -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 55

3.5.1 PWB setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 55

3.5.2 Statuses of the POWER/SERVO UNIT -------------------------------------------------------- 62

3.5.3 Checking the coolant circulator ------------------------------------------------------------------ 62

3.6 CAS-880A Setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 64

3.6.1 PWB setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 64

3.6.2 Statuses of the POWER/SERVO UNIT -------------------------------------------------------- 69

3.7 CAS-820B Setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 71

3.7.1 PWB setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 71

3.8 BLA-800C Setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 77

3.8.1 Switch setting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 77

3.8.2 Checking the ROM ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 77